MSC Nastran 2013.1 Superelements Guide

MSC Nastran 2013.
1
Superelements Users Guide
Main Index
Corporate
Europe, Middle East, Africa
MSC.Software Corporation
4675 MacArthur Court, Suite 900
Newport Beach, CA 92660
Telephone: (714) 540-8900
Toll Free Number: 1 855 672 7638
Email: americas.contact@mscsoftware.com
MSC.Software GmbH
Am Moosfeld 13
81829 Munich, Germany
Telephone: (49) 89 431 98 70
Email: europe@mscsoftware.com
Japan
Asia-Pacific
MSC.Software Japan Ltd.

Shinjuku First West 8F
23-7 Nishi Shinjuku
1-Chome, Shinjuku-Ku
Tokyo 160-0023, JAPAN
Telephone: (81) (3)-6911-1200
Email: MSCJ.Market@mscsoftware.com
MSC Software (S) Pte. Ltd.

100 Beach Road
#16-05 Shaw Tower
Singapore 189702
Telephone: 65-6272-0082
Email: APAC.Contact@mscsoftware.com
Worldwide Web
www.mscsoftware.com
Disclaimer
MSC.Software Corporation reserves the right to make changes in specifications and other information contained
in this document without prior notice.
The concepts, methods, and examples presented in this text are for illustrative and educational purposes only,
and are not intended to be exhaustive or to apply to any particular engineering problem or design. MSC.Software
Corporation assumes no liability or responsibility to any person or company for direct or indirect damages resulting
from the use of any information contained herein.
User Documentation: Copyright 2013 MSC.Software Corporation. Printed in U.S.A. All Rights Reserved.
This notice shall be marked on any reproduction of this documentation, in whole or in part. Any reproduction or
distribution of this document, in whole or in part, without the prior written consent of MSC.Software Corporation is
prohibited.
This software may contain certain third-party software that is protected by copyright and licensed from
MSC.Software suppliers.
MSC, MD, Dytran, Marc, MSC Nastran, MD Nastran, MSC Patran, MD Patran, OpenFSI, the MSC.Software
corporate logo, and Simulating Reality are trademarks or registered trademarks of the MSC.Software Corporation
in the United States and/or other countries.
NASTRAN is a registered trademark of NASA. PAMCRASH is a trademark or registered trademark of ESI Group.
SAMCEF is a trademark or registered trademark of Samtech SA. LS-DYNA is a trademark or registered trademark
of Livermore Software Technology Corporation. ANSYS is a registered trademark of SAS IP, Inc., a wholly owned
subsidiary of ANSYS Inc. ABAQUS is a registered trademark of ABAQUS Inc. All other brand names, product
names or trademarks belong to their respective owners. PCGLSS 6.0, Copyright 1992-2005, Computational
Applications and System Integration Inc. All rights reserved. PCGLSS 6.0 is licensed from Computational
Applications and System Integration Inc. METIS is copyrighted by the regents of the University of Minnesota. A
copy of the METIS product documentation is included with this installation. Please see "A Fast and High Quality
Multilevel Scheme for Partitioning Irregular Graphs". George Karypis and Vipin Kumar. SIAM Journal on Scientific
Computing, Vol. 20, No. 1, pp. 359-392, 1999.
Revision 0. November 15, 2013

NA*V2013.1*Z*Z*Z*DC-SUPER
Main Index
Contents
Introduction and Fundamentals

Introduction to this Guide
Why Use Superelements?

4
Reduced Cost
4
Quicker Turnaround
4
Reduced Risk
4
Large Problem Capabilities
4
Partitioned Input and Output
5
Security
5
Automation with High Performance Computing
Fundamentals of Superelement Analysis
Partitioned Solutions
10
Key Concepts in Superelement Partitions
Static Condensation Process
11
10
Manual Solution of a Small Superelement Example

Conventional Analysis
17
Superelement Analysis
19
16
List of Superelement Enhancements Released Since Version 69
How to Define a Superelement

Introduction
40
Superelement vs. Residual

Three Types of Superelements
41
43
Defining List Superelements

44
List Superelement Definition with the SESET Entry
44
List Superelement Definition with the GRID Entry
45
List Superelement Definition on Element ID the SEELT entry
Interior versus Exterior Points
47
Superelement Partitioning
54
Main Index
34
46
ii Superelements Users Guide
Defining PART Superelements

71
Defining Parts
71
The Bulk Data Section Using PARTs
71
Format of the Input File When PARTs are Used
Connecting PARTs to Other PARTs
78
72
Defining and Attaching External Superelements

94
Discussion of 2-step vs. 3-step methods
94
Definition of External Points
102
Creating External Superelements with EXTSEOUT
105
Using EXTSEOUT (2-Step) External Superelements
114
Using PARAM,EXTOUT (3-Step) External Superelements
126
The Superelement Map SEMAP
138
Contents of the Superelement MAP List Superelement
138
Contents of the Superelement MAP PART Superelement
141
Single Level Superelement Analysis

Introduction
150
Baseline Static Example using Patran
153
Single-Level Analysis Using List Superelements

Static Example using Patran. (flyswatter)
166
Single-Level Analysis Using PART Superelements
Static Example using Patran (flyswatter)
196
Single-Level Analysis Using External Superelements
Static Example Using Patran (flyswatter)
204
Comparison of Methods
196
204
223
Loads, Constraints, Case Control, and Parameters in Static Analysis

Introduction
228
Mechanical Loads in Static Analysis

List Superelements
229
PART Superelements
234
External Superelements
234
Thermal Loads in Static Analysis
List Superelements
235
Main Index
166
229
235
CONTENTS iii
PART Superelements
241
241
Boundary Conditions in Static Analysis
242
Single Point Constraints (SPCs)
242
Grid Point Singularity Processing
243
Multipoint Constraints (MPCs) and Rigid Elements
Case Control
260
The SUPER Command
Condensed Case Control
Expanded Case Control
Output Control
269
244
261
263
265
Parameter Controls
274
List Superelements
274
PART Superelements
274
275
Special Considerations
276
SNORM for PART or External Superelements
Inertia Relief Analysis Using Superelements

Introduction
282
The Concept of Inertia Relief
283
Interface for Inertia Relief Using Superelements

Manual Definition of Reference Points
284
Automatic Definition of Reference Points
286
Inertia Relief Examples (Freedom)
287
Baseline Residual Example
288
List Superelement Example
292
PART Superelement Example
295
External Superelement Example
297
Comparison of results
297
Multiple Loading in Static Analysis

Introduction
300
Internal Case Control Partitioning

Use of Load Sequences
301
Main Index
276
301
284
iv Superelements Users Guide
Examples for Multiple Loading Conditions (cantilever plate)

306
List Superelements
307
PART Superelements
308
310
Comparison of Results
313
303
Multi-Level Superelement Analysis

Introduction
316
Comparison of Single- and Multi-Level Superelements
317
User Interface
327
List Superelements
329
PART Superelements
329
330
Example Multi-Level Superelement Solved Manually
Example Multi-Level Superelement (Freedom)
Baseline Residual Solution
340
List Superelement Solution
341
PART Superelement Solution
345
External Superelement Solution
349
369
331
339
Output Description and Control in Static Superelement Analysis

Introduction
372
Diagnostic/Connection Output
373
Superelement Definition Tables
373
Controlling Diagnostic Output with PARAMs SEMAP, SEMAPOPT, SEMAPPRT
375
Part Superelement Diagnostic Output
Sorted Bulk Data
387
Boundary Grid Search Output
388
387
List (SESET) Superelement Diagnostic Output

Sorted Bulk Data
391
392
Visualizing Model with OUTPUT(PLOT)
Main Index
394
391
CONTENTS v
Result Output
395
List Superelements
396
PART Superelements
397
399
Controlling Results Output with SEDR
405
Introduction to Dynamic Analysis Using Superelements

Introduction
408
Description of Dynamic Reduction Process

410
Static Condensation
410
Dynamic Reduction Component Modes Synthesis
Illustrative Example
450
Accuracy Improvements with CMS
450
Nastran Set Definitions The USET Table
10
413
458
Input and Output for Dynamic Reduction

Introduction
464
Case Control for Dynamic Reduction

Single Level Dynamic Reduction
List Superelements
470
PART Superelements
492
513
465
468
Multi-Level Dynamic Reduction

514
Defining the Superelement Tree
514
Multi-Level Superelement Component Modes Synthesis Connection
Multi-Level Modal Reduction Example (fly swatter)
518
11
Dynamic Loading on Superelements

Introduction
542
Direct Reference to EXCITEID
550
Indirect Reference to EXCITEDID: LOADSET / LSEQ Method

Superelement Damping
Main Index
559
554
517
vi Superelements Users Guide
Modal Transient Illustrative Example

560
Non-Superelement Solution
560
List Superelement LOADSET / LSEQ Reference to EXCITEDID
574
List Superelement Direct Reference to EXCITEDID
578
PART Superelement LOADSET / LSEQ Reference to EXCITEDID
581
PART Superelement Direct Reference to EXCITEDID
587
Frequency Response Illustrative Example
593
593
606
609
PART Superelement LOADSET / LSEQ Reference to EXCITEDID
612
618
External Superelement Dynamic Loading
624
Residual Vectors
624
Applying a Dynamic Load an External Superelement
624
Applying the Time History to the External Loading
627
Combining External Superelement Dynamic Loads with Residual Dynamic Loads
629
External Superelements and Damping
632
12
External Superelement Examples

Introduction
634
Connections
635
Automatic Connections
635
Manual Connections
636
Potential Conflicts with SPC/MPC dof
639
Static Examples
642
Static Examples Using 2-Step Method (EXTSEOUT)
Static Examples Using 3-Step Method
650
Modal Examples
660
Modal Examples Using 2-Step Method (EXTSEOUT)
Modal Examples Using 3-Step Method
668
642
660
Transient Response Examples

676
Transient Response Examples Using 2-Step Method (EXTSEOUT)
Transient Response Examples Using 3-Step Method
683
Frequency Response Examples
695
Frequency Response Examples Using 2-Step Method (EXTSEOUT)
Main Index
676
695
CONTENTS vii
Frequency Response Examples Using 3-Step Method
13
702
Practical Image Superelements

Introduction
716
List Superelements
718
Using CSUPER
718
Example Using CSUPER
720
PART Superelements
734
Using SEBULK and SELOC to image a PART
734
Using SEMPLN to define a mirror plane
737
Example Using SEBULK, SELOC, and SEMPLN
737
749
Using SECONCT to Attach and External Superelement
Example using SECONCT
751
Multiple Image Example for Electronic Components
Baseline Solution (Full Model)
756
CSUPER Image Superelement Solution
757
PART Superelement Image Solution
762
External Superelement Image Solution
766
774
14
778
Creating a Flexible Body with ADMSMNF

Simple Linkage Example
781
Additional Reference Material
790
792
Superelements in Aeroelasticity
Introduction
794
Example of Swept Wing
Main Index
779
Design Sensitivity and Optimization with Superelements

Introduction
16
756
Preparing Adams Flexible Bodies

Introduction
15
749
796
viii Superelements Users Guide
List Superelement
799
PART Superelement
801
External Superelement
805
17
Considerations in Nonlinear and Buckling Analysis

Introduction
812
Superelement Limitations in Nonlinear and Buckling Analysis

813
Buckling Example Showing Poor Approximation for Superelements
815
Applying Loads on Upstream Superelements in Nonlinear Statics
Superelement Loading in SOL 106
824
830
Practical Buckling Example Isolating and Individual Panel
Superelements in Heat Transfer
18
840
Random Vibration with Superelements

Introduction
846
Enforced Motion (SPCD) Examples

851
Baseline Model, Cantilever Plate
851
List Superelement, Cantilever Plate
863
PART Superelement, Cantilever Plate
866
869
Enforced Motion (Large Mass) Examples
Electronics Board Example
884
Baseline
884
List Superelement
887
Part Superelement
892
897
913
19
Output with XYPLOT

Introduction
916
Superelement Plotting with PLOT

917
920
CSUPER Example
926
Main Index
882
833
824
CONTENTS ix
XYPLOT Commands
930
Illustrative Example: Modal Transient
934
Illustrative Example: Modal Frequency Response
Illustrative Example: Random Vibration
950
APPENDICES
Glossary
2
Boundary Element
2
Branch Element
2
Collector Superelement
2
Component Modes Synthesis
2
Constraint Modes
2
2
Fixed Boundary Solution
3
Free Boundary Solution
3
List Superelement
3
Load Sequence
3
Mixed Boundary Solution
3
Multilevel Superelement Tree
3
Mutually Exclusive Set
3
Main Bulk Data Section
4
PART Superelement
4
Phase 1 Processing
4
Phase 2 Processing
4
Phase 3 Processing
4
Qualifier
4
SEP1
5
SEP1X
5
Single Level Superelement Tree
5
Processing Order
5
Main Index
944
x Superelements Users Guide
Main Index
Chapter 1: Introduction and Fundamentals
Main Index
2 Superelements Users Guide


In finite element analysis, demand for computer resources has always exceeded existing capabilities. In
the early days of computers, when engineers were solving 3 x 3 problems by hand, computers were able
to handle problems as large as 11 x 11. Once engineers discovered this ability, the size of engineering
problems quickly grew to exceed the capacity of the existing systems. This process has repeated itself
time and time again. Today modern computers are capable of solving problems involving more than
100,000,000 equations with 100,000,000 unknowns, which is still not enough to satisfy the needs of
many engineers as more detail is added to finite element models and higher fidelity solutions are
required.
The limits on hardware resources, combined with budget restrictions (large runs and stochastic variations
can be time-consuming), limits the ability of engineers to solve large, complicated problems with high
fidelity meshes. A solution to these problems (both hardware and time budget), can be achieved for many
models by using superelements in MSC.Nastran.
By using superelements, the analyst can not only analyze larger models (including those which exceed
the capacity of your hardware), but he can also become more efficient in performing the analysis, thus
allowing more analytical design cycles or iterations in the analysis. Another benefit of superelements
efficiency can be realized when models are subjected to probabilistic or stochastic analysis by varying
portions of the structure. In design optimization, the use of superelements has become automated to help
reduce the overall optimization costs through a process called Automated External Superelement
Optimization (AESO) which is briefly described in Chapter 15: Design Sensitivity and Optimization
with Superelements, and more fully described in the Design Sensitivity and Optimization Users Guide.
The principle used in superelement analysis is often referred to as substructuring. That is, the model is
divided into a series of components, each of which is processed independently resulting in a set of
matrices that are reduced to a boundary and describe the behavior of the component as seen by the rest
of the structure. Often these components are comprised of logical groupings of elements (an engine, a
wing, a fender, the exhaust system, etc.), hence the term superelement.
The reduced boundary matrices for the individual superelements are combined to form assembly
matrices which are referred to as the residual matrices. The residual matrices are solved using standard
techniques for calculating displacements (and velocities, accelerations for dynamic solutions). The
residual solution is then imposed on the boundary of each superelement so that the data recovery
(calculation of displacements, stresses, etc.) for the boundary can be combined with the data recovery for
the body loads on the superelement.
In static analysis the theory used in superelement processing is exact. In dynamics the reduction of the
stiffness is exact, but approximations occur during the reduction of the mass and damping matrices. The
dynamic solution can be improved dramatically by augmenting the static reduction with additional
dynamic degrees of freedom in a method called component modal synthesis, which is described in
Chapter 10: Input and Output for Dynamic Reduction.
In buckling analysis, the reduction of the differential stiffness uses the same theory as the static reduction,
but doesnt provide an accurate solution compared to the non-reduced system. Unfortunately, there is no
improvement available as in dynamic analysis, however, a savvy user can use this to his advantage as
Main Index
CHAPTER 1 3
described in Practical Buckling Example Isolating and Individual Panel (Ch. 17). Superelements can be
used in nonlinear analysis, but the superelement is limited to a linear reduction in its initial orientation.
Note:
Even though the theory of static condensation is exact for static solutions, the numeric
conditioning of the structural matrices can affect the overall solution. If the superelement
stiffness matrices are well conditioned, then there will be only miniscule differences
between a residual-only solution and a superelement solution.
This Users Guide is intended to be tutorial in format. That is, the emphasis is on how to use
superelements, not on the theory of superelements. Sufficient theory is presented for those who wish to
understand the operations. Hand-solved samples are included to help the user understand the operations
involved when superelements are used. Sample MSC.Nastran input files and selected output are also
presented at appropriate points for clarity. All of the example files used in this guide are also delivered
with the standard MSC.Nastran delivery in the install_dir/doc/seug/chapter#/subject subdirectories.
This Users Guide presumes that the reader is experienced in finite element analysis and wants to add
superelement technology to his repertoire of skills. The Guide is arranged so that an experienced finite
element analyst can start at the beginning and read only the information applicable to the type of analysis
desired. Overall information on superelements is presented first, followed by information for static
analysis, followed by dynamics and other features. It is recommended that the user read the first 3
chapters for foundation as well as Chapter 4 because much of the information presented in the section
on statics is applicable in subsequent chapters. However, an engineer should be able to read the
applicable sections without having to read unnecessary information.
Main Index


Efficiency is the primary reason to use superelements. A finite element model is rarely analyzed only
once. Often the model is modified and re-analyzed time and time again. By analyzing only the part of the
structure which changes, the user can save significant time. Without using superelements, each analysis
can cost the price of a complete solution. Here is a partial list of the advantages of superelements:
Reduced Cost
Instead of solving the entire model each time, superelements offer the advantage of incremental
processing. On restarts this advantage is magnified by the need to process only the parts of the structure
directly affected by the change. This means that if the user thinks ahead when defining superelements, it
is possible to achieve performance improvements on the order of anywhere from 2 to 30 times faster than
non-superelement methods (or more).
Quicker Turnaround
Because superelements can be processed individually with less computer resources required than a
complete, non-superelement solution, it is often possible to submit individual superelement processing
runs using fast queues (or on local workstations instead of servers), rather than waiting and running the
complete problem at once using an overnight queue. As stochastic and Monte Carlo simulations are
becoming more popular to understand the robustness of a structural design, fast solutions are a must.
Reduced Risk
Processing a model without using superelements is an all-or-nothing proposition. If an error occurs, the
entire model must be processed again once the error is corrected. When using superelements, each
superelement need be processed only once, unless a change requires reprocessing the superelement. If an
error occurs during processing, only the affected superelement and the residual structure (final
superelement to be processed) need be reprocessed. The superelements that did not have an error do not
need to be processed again until a change is made to those superelements.
Large Problem Capabilities

All computers have hardware limits. MSC.Nastran is designed so that problem size will not be limited
by the program. This means that limits on available disk space or memory are the only limitations that
should be encountered by a user. When the size of a model becomes too large to be processed on a
computer without using superelements, the user can use multiple computer resources to process each
superelement, or process one superelement at a time on a single computer resource. The reduced matrices
for each superelement can be stored on separate drives and brought together for the residual solution.
Main Index
CHAPTER 1 5
Then data recovery can be done on each superelement separately, if desired. This process frees file space
and reduces disk usage and storage costs.
Note:
Prior to MSC.Nastran Version 2005.5, there was a memory limit of 2 Gigawords (8

Gigabytes) because of a 32 bit integer address used by MSC.Nastran (i4). Beginning in
MSC.Nastran Version 2005.5, this limitation was removed by providing the option to use
a 64 bit integer address (i8), thus making the number of words available for memory
address = 2^64, which is, in effect, an unlimited memory address. The higher memory can
be made available by specifying MODE=i8 on the command line. (note: the mode
keyword cannot be specified in an rc file as of MSC.Nastran v2010, so the user must
specify the mode keyword on the command line).
Partitioned Input and Output

Because superelements can be processed individually, separate analysis groups or organizations can
model individual parts of the structure and perform model checks without information from other groups.
An excellent example is the International Space Station which has many contractors working on the
structure. Each contractor models his own components and sends either complete or reduced models to
a system integrator, who assembles the models to represent the many possible configurations, performs
analysis for each configuration, and sends results back to the individual contractors for their use. The
partitioned output format used in superelements allows for segmented data recovery; i.e., data recovery
can be requested for only the desired segments of the structure.
Security
Many companies work on proprietary or secure projects. These may range from keeping a new design
from the competition, to keeping material data proprietary, to working on a highly confidential defense
program. Even when working on open programs, there is a need to send a representation of the model to
others so that they may perform a coupled analysis of an assembly which incorporates the component.
The use of external superelements allows users to send reduced boundary matrices that contain no
geometric information about the actual component-only mass, stiffness, damping and loads as seen at the
boundary. Upon receiving a set of reduced matrices in any format that can be read by MSC.Nastran, an
engineer can define an external superelement using those matrices and attach the foreign structure to his
model.
Automation with High Performance Computing

As models become larger and users demand high fidelity system level responses, the discipline of High
Performance Computing (HPC) has become a primary consideration for industries such as the
automotive industry. There are many techniques involved in HPC, including efficient use of CPU core
memory (i.e. L1, L2, L3 cache), shared memory parallel (SMP) schemes for enhanced matrix solution
times using multi-core CPU machines, and distributed memory parallel (DMP) schemes used to take
advantage of compute clusters with many different machines linked with a high-speed intranet to split
Main Index

and recombine solutions. While many of the schemes are purely mathematical (cache memory, SMP),
the distributed computing utilizes superelement technology as its core method for splitting and
recombining the solution of a large model. There are several schemes available to the user, such as
Geometric Domain Decomposition which automatically splits the model into superelements based on
GRID connectivity, Matrix Domain Decomposition which automatically splits the model into
superelements based on matrix characteristics, and Automated Component Modes Synthesis (ACMS)
which automatically splits the model based on GRID or Matrix characteristics and adds a Component
Modes Synthesis calculation for improved dynamic characteristics. While distributed HPC is based on
superelement technology, the discipline of HPC is beyond the scope of this document and will be covered
in another manual.
Main Index
CHAPTER 1 7

Superelement analysis can be described as a form of substructuring. That is, a model can be divided into
superelements by the user in such a way that MSC.Nastran will process each superelement independently
of all other superelements. The processing of each superelement results in a reduced set of matrices
(mass, damping, stiffness, and loading) that represent the properties of the superelement as seen at its
connections to adjacent structures. Once all superelements have been processed, these reduced matrices
are assembled in what is known as the residual structure, and the assembly solution is performed. Data
recovery for each superelement is performed by expanding the solution at the attachment points, using
the same transformation that was used to perform the original reduction on the superelement.
Superelements can consist of physical data (elements and grid points) or can be defined as an image of
another superelement or as an external superelement (a set of matrices from an external source to be
attached to the model). Figure 1-1 demonstrates a simplified illustration of condensing a structure to its
boundaries, solving a reduced system, and back-expanding the solution to obtain the data recovery for
the superelement. Example files are available to the user in the following installation directory and file
names: /doc/seug/chapter1/clamp-baseline.bdf, clamp-seset.bdf, and clamp-part-se.bdf.
Figure 1-1
Simplified Depiction of Superelement Reduction, Solution, and Data Recovery
The following figures illustrate the possible types of superelement. In Figure 1-2, a model of a portion
of a gear is shown. The physical model of one tooth can be represented as a superelement. This type is
called a primary superelement-one where the actual geometry for the superelement is defined in the bulk
data. Other gear teeth, as shown in Figure 1-2, are images of the first (primary) tooth. An image
superelement is a superelement that uses the geometry of another superelement to describe it for
MSC.Nastran. These image superelements can save processing time in that they are able to re-use the
Main Index

reduced stiffness, mass, and damping matrices from their primary superelement, which reduces the
amount of calculations needed. Full data recovery is available for image superelements. An image
superelement can be an identical image, as shown in Figure 1-2, or a mirror image, as shown in
Figure 1-3. In Figure 1-3, the right side of the plate is a mirror image copy of the primary. Please note that
images can have their own unique loadings. Only the stiffness, mass and damping is identical to the
primary. Another type of superelement is the external superelement, where a part of the model is
represented by using matrices from an outside source (the matrices can come from another MSC.Nastran
run). For these matrices no internal geometry information is available; only the grid points to which the
matrices are attached are known. An external superelement is shown in Figure 1-4. In this figure the finite
element model is on the left and the external superelement is represented by the dashed lines on the right.
Main Index
Figure 1-2
A Primary Superelement and Several Identical Images
Figure 1-3
A Primary Superelement and its Mirror Image Superelement
CHAPTER 1 9
Figure 1-4
An External Superelement
Chapter 10: Input and Output for Dynamic Reduction.
Main Index

Key Concepts in Superelement Partitions
There are several key concepts that must be understood in the superelement formulation and processing;
these are:
The input is partitioned into a separate set for processing each superelement.
When MSC.Nastran is processing the bulk data for a model, the input is partitioned into a
separate set for each superelement, based on user instructions. The input used to accomplish this
partitioning is discussed in Chapter 2: How to Define a Superelement.
Once the bulk data is partitioned into separate sets, each superelement is processed individually.
The degrees-of-freedom (DOFs) for each superelement are partitioned into sets in a manner
identical to that used in conventional analysis. That is, all DOFs for a superelement are
combined to create a G-set. Then MPCs and R-elements are used to define the M- and N-sets,
etc. (see Constraint and Set Notation (Ch. 1) in the MSC Nastran Reference Manual for a
complete description of MSC.Nastran sets). The only change in the definition of sets is the
definition of exterior DOFs. For each superelement the exterior DOFs are defined as the A-set,
which can contain physical and modal degrees of freedom.
Boundary / Exterior DOFs are best described as those that are retained or kept for
further analysis. A superelements exterior DOFs are best described as those that are retained
for further analysis, or you can think of them as boundary or attachment DOFs, where the
superelement connects to other superelements or the residual. Note that exterior DOF are not
required to attach to any other DOF. Structural matrices are assembled for each superelement,
and the matrices go through reduction processing until the only remaining terms are for the A-set
or attachment DOFs. These reduced matrices are used to represent the properties of the
superelement when it is attached to the rest of the model.
Interior DOFs can be thought of as those that are condensed out during
superelement processing. All DOFs of a superelement that are not exterior are called
interior DOFs (the omitted or O-set). These are the DOFs that are condensed out of the matrices
during the reduction process. Using either static or dynamic reduction, the stiffness, mass,
damping, and loading on these interior DOFs are transferred to the exterior DOFs.
Each superelement is processed individually. The reduction process is best illustrated
using the process known as static condensation. For illustration purposes, we will ignore
Lagrange DOF in this discussion, since they are not compatible with superelement processing. In
static condensation we will start with the superelement matrices after all MPCs, R-elements, and
Main Index
CHAPTER 1 11
SPCs have been processed. The set of DOFs remaining at this point are in terms of the F-set
(DOFs that are not constrained), which contains the O- and A-sets as subsets. Although the
interior DOFs include the M- and S-sets also, the interior DOFs in this guide will often be often
referred to as the O-set.
Note:
Lagrange Rigid Element Processing. Typically, the dependent dof associated with
RBEs are placed in the mr set, while the dependent dof associated with MPCs are
placed in the mp set; which collectively define the M-Set. However, if the user specifies
RIGID=LAGRAN in the case control, the dependent dof are carried into the ASET as part
of the lm dof. Currently the MSC.Nastran processing does not handle the
RIGID=LAGRAN for superelements. Further discussion on this subject can be found in
Nastran Set Definitions The USET Table (Ch. 9).
Static Condensation Process

The key to superelement processing is the reduction of the omitted DOF to the equivalent boundary
matrices as shown in the following figure:
Figure 1-5
Main Index
Pictorial Example of Static Condensation

A comprehensive description of the equations used by MSC.Nastran can be found in Dynamic Reduction
and Component Mode Synthesis in SubDMAP SEMR3 (Ch. 1) in the MSC Nastran Reference Manual. A
more simplified presentation of the static condensation theory is included here for completeness. It is
assumed that the reader has some familiarity with the MSC.Nastran set notation for more information
on set notation, please refer to Degree-of-Freedom Sets (Ch. 7) in the MSC Nastran Quick Reference
Guide.
In this formulation we will start with the superelement matrices after all M-set (MPCs and Rigid
elements), and S-Set (active SPCs and permanent constraints on grid entries) have been processed. The
set of DOFs remaining at this point are in terms of the F-set (dof that are not constrained), which contains
the O- and A-sets as subsets. Although, in general, the interior dof may also include the M- and S-sets
also, the interior dof in this guide will often be often referred to as the O-set.
The static equation for the F-set is
K ff U f = P f
(1-1)
This equation may be expanded to show the A-set and O-set partitions as
Ko o Ko a U
Po
o
=
T
Pa
Ko a Ka a Ua
(1-2)
where the bar over a term ( K a a and P a ) indicates that the sub-matrix represents the associated matrix
of terms for that set before the reduction operation. In a static solution, the T-set is equivalent to the Aset and is defined as the retained physical dof. So, for a static solution the previous equation becomes:
Ko o Ko t U
o
T
Ko t Kt t Ut
Po
Pt
(1-3)
If we look at the upper part of the equation, we obtain

Ko o Uo + Ko t Ut = Po
(1-4)
Pre-multiplying both sides of the equation by K o o

Uo
Main Index
t o ta l
= Ko o Ko t Ut + Ko o Po
produces
(1-5)
CHAPTER 1 13
We can break up the total solution U o into two parts: the Fixed Boundary Solution , U o
Free Boundary Solution, U o
f ree
f ix ed
, and the
. To simplify the equation we define the physical boundary
transformation matrix between the exterior and interior motion as G o t .

1
Go t = Ko o Ko t
(1-6)
Physically, the G o t matrix represents the influence coefficients to the free boundary solution, also
referred to as the Constraint Modes. That is, each column of this matrix represents the motion of the
interior points when one boundary dof is moved one unit while the other boundary points are held
constrained. Therefore, the transformation matrix has one column for each exterior (boundary) dof (the
Aset for the superelement), and the number of rows are equal to the number of interior dof (the O-set for
the superelement). The constraint modes are discussed further in Example of Constraint Modes (Ch. 9)
which includes a graphic example.
Note:
Computational Cost of Constraint Modes

The calculation of the constraint modes more specifically G o t is typically the highest
cost associated with a static superelement solution because of the cost of calculating the
1
matrix K o o . Even in dynamic solutions the cost associated with the constraint modes
is often a significant cost of the overall solution.
When the constraints mode influence coefficients are multiplied by the boundary displacements of the
residual solution, the free boundary solution is obtained:
Uo
f ree
= Go t Ut
(1-7)
Where U t is the partition from the residual structure solution of the physical dof to the superelement
boundary dof.
In addition to the free boundary solution, the fixed boundary solution of the superelement must be
calculated in order to obtain the total solution for the superelement:
Uo
f ix ed
= U oo = K o o P o
(1-8)
This matrix represents the static solution for the displacements of the superelement when the loads are
applied and the exterior points are held fixed. Based on these definitions, the total displacement of the
interior points can be defined as
Uo
Main Index
t o ta l
= Uo
fre e
+ Uo
fi xe d
(1-9)

A physical representation of this equation demonstrates the concepts of fixed boundary solution and free
boundary solution for a cantilever beam example.
Figure 1-6
Pictorial representation of fixed boundary solution and free boundary solution
Continuing with the reduction theory we rewrite the equation for the lower part of Equation 1-3 as:
T
K o t G o t U t + U oo + K t t U t = P t
(1-10)
From which, we can obtain the reduced stiffness K tt and boundary loading P t of the superelement:
T
K tt = K o t G o t + K tt
T
Pt = Go t Po + Pt
(1-11)
(1-12)
The residual structure consists of all components of the model that were not assigned to any other
superelement, plus the assembly of the reduced superelement matrices. Each superelement is processed
in this manner, and its associated matrices are reduced to the exterior dofs. Once all superelements have
been processed, the reduced matrices are assembled into a system matrix during the residual structure
processing.
Thus, the total assembled stiffness matrix of the residual structure, K g g , is represented by
Main Index
CHAPTER 1 15
K g g = K jj + K a a
(1-13)
The system or assembly solution is performed using the assembled matrices for the residual structure.
Once the assembly solution is known, the boundary solution is found for each superelement. This
boundary solution is used to calculate the interior displacements for each superelement, then standard
data recovery is available for all superelements, including the residual structure. Any output that is
available in standard (non-superelement) analysis is available in superelement analysis. The difference
is that the output is now partitioned by superelement.
Main Index


The following small problem is used to demonstrate how a static analysis is performed using
superelements. The solution to the problem is first shown using conventional analysis, then by using
superelements.
Figure 1-7
Small NON-Superelement Example
For this example we are looking only at motion along the axis of the points, thus the problem is simplified
to contain only five DOFs. Note: this example is solved in MSC.Nastran and provided as part of the
documentation. The conventional analysis model is: /doc/seug/chapter1/simple-conventional.bdf and
the superelement solution is: /doc/seug/chapter1/simple-superelement.bdf.
The output for the simple-conventional.bdf file is as follows. Note that this .f06 listing, and other listings
in this book may remove page headings and slightly re-arrange the format slightly to fit the page, so the
actual .f06 output format may be slightly different than shown
Main Index
CHAPTER 1 17
.
MSC NASTRAN JOB CREATED ON 19-MAR-11 AT 16:09:34
MARCH
19, 2011
MSC NASTRAN
7/15/10
PAGE
10
DEFAULT
0
BASELINE MODEL
SUBCASE 1
D I S P L A C E M E N T
POINT ID.
TYPE
T1
T2
T3
R2
R3
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
2.500000E+00
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
4.000000E+00
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
3.500000E+00
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
POINT ID.
T2
V E C T O R
TYPE
T1
1.000000E+00
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
2.000000E+00
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
3.000000E+00
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
F O R C E S
POINT ID.
O F
T3
R1
S I N G L E - P O I N T
T2
R3
C O N S T R A I N T
TYPE
T1
-2.500000E+00
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
-3.500000E+00
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
FORCE
ID.
ELEMENT
I N
T3
R2
F O R C E S
R1
L O A D
ELEMENT
V E C T O R
S C A L A R
FORCE
ID.
-2.500000E+00
Listing 1-1
R1
S P R I N G S
ELEMENT
R2
( C E L A S 1 )
FORCE
ID.
-1.500000E+00
R3
ELEMENT
FORCE
ID.
5.000000E-01
3.500000E+00
MSC.Nastran Output for the Simple Example w/o Superelements
Conventional Analysis
In conventional analysis the problem is formulated in matrix form, constraints are applied, and the
resulting reduced problem is solved. The five-by-five stiffness matrix is as follows:
Main Index

K 12
Kg g =
K 12
K 12 K 12 + K 23
K 23
K 23
K 23 + K 34
K 34
K 34
K 34 + K 45 K 45
K 45
(1-14)
K 45
Each row (or column) in the above matrix represents the terms associated with one DOF in the model.
The terms are in ascending order; that is, the first column represents DOF 1, and the last column
represents DOF 5. Replacing the springs by their numeric values, we have
Kg g =
1
1
0
0
0
1
2
1
0
0
0
1
2
1
0
0
0
1
2
1
0
0
0
1
1
(1-15)
We now apply the constraints to the problem. In finite element analysis, constraints are applied by
removing the associated rows and columns from the matrix; therefore, after applying constraints we have
the static equation for the constrained structure
U2
U3 =
U4
K 12 + K 23
K 23
K 23
K 23 + K 34
K 34
K 34 + K 45
P2
P3
P4
(1-16)
or, in numeric terms
U2
U3 =
U4
2 1 0
1 2 1
0 1 2
1
2
(1-17)
Solving the equations provides the solution for the free dof:
U2
2.5
U 3 = 4.0
U4
3.5
Main Index
(1-18)
CHAPTER 1 19
The total solution vector becomes:
Ug =
U1
0.0
U2
2.5
U 3 = 4.0
U4
3.5
0.0
U5
(1-19)
The constraint forces are obtained by partitioning the G-set stiffness matrix and solution vector as
follows:
F s = K s f U f Equation 1-20
(1-20)
F1
=
F5
(1-21)
2.5
2.5
1 0 0
4.0 =
0 0 1
3.5
3.5
Element Data Recovery

For this example, we can calculate the element forces based upon:
F el em + K e lem U e lem
(1-22)
The CELAS1 convention for calculating element force is (Refer to Eq. (3-64) in the MSC Nastran
Reference Manual) :
F 12 = K 12 U 1 U 2
(1-23)
F 12 = 1.0 0.0 2.5 = 2.5
(1-24)
The remainder of the elements forces can be calculated similarly.

F 23 = 1.5
(1-25)
F 34 = 0.5
(1-26)
F 45 = 3.5
(1-27)
We now formulate and solve the same problem using superelements, as shown in Figure 1-8. Because
the method of defining superelements has not been discussed yet, some of what follows has not been
Main Index

defined. However, as you read further, more of the information will become clear. First a flowchart
showing the order of processing used to perform superelement analysis is shown in Figure 1-9, Flowchart
for Superelmeent Processing.
Main Index
Figure 1-8
Small Superelement Example
Figure 1-9
Flowchart for Superelmeent Processing
CHAPTER 1 21
Note:
Note to advanced users: in the MSC.Nastran SubDMAP listings, the parameter LPFLG is
used to control entry and processing within a superelement loop. Also, several of the
MALTER statements are strategically placed at the top and bottom of superelement loops
as follows:
Table 1-1
Strategic DMAP MALTER Locations Associated with Superelements
$MALTER:TOP OF PHASE 1 SUPERELEMENT LOOP AFTER PARAMETERS AND

$MALTER:QUALIFIERS SET
$MALTER:AFTER SUPERELEMENT STIFFNESS, VISCOUS DAMPING, MASS, AND

$MALTER:ELEMENT STRUCTURAL DAMPING GENERATION (KJJZ, BJJX, MJJX, K4JJ)
$MALTER:AFTER TOTAL SUPERELEMENT STIFFNESS, VISCOUS DAMPING, AND MASS

$MALTER:FORMULATED, STRUCTURAL + DIRECT INPUT (KJJ, BJJ, MJJ)
$MALTER:AFTER SUPERELEMENT LAD GENERATION (PJ)
$MALTER:AFTER UPSTREAM SUPERELEMENT MATRIX AND LOAD ASSEMBLY

$MALTER:(KGG, BGG, MGG, K4GG, PG)
$MALTER:AFTER SUPERELEMENT MATRIX AND LOAD REDUCTION TO A-SET,

$MALTER:STATIC AND DYNAMIC (KAA, MAA, BAA, K4AA, PA)
ENDIF $ EXTER $MALTER:BOTTOM OF PHASE 1 SUPERELEMENT LOOP
$MALTER:AFTER SUPERELEMENT DISPLACEMENT RECOVERY (UG)

$
SET THE FOLLOWING FOR DBCPATH
ENDIF $ MALTER:BOTTOM OF SUPERELEMENT DATA RECOVERY LOOP
Continuing with the superelement solution for our simple example, the definitions of the model shown
in Figure 1-8:
Superelement 1 (SEID = 1)
Grid points 1 and 2 are interior points. (These grid points are condensed out during the Phase
1 operations for superelement 1.)

Elements and are interior or belong to superelement 1.
The constraint at grid point 1 is contained in superelement 1.
The load applied on grid point 2 is in superelement 1.
Main Index

Grid point 3 is exterior to superelement 1. (After all reduction [Phase 1] is completed for
superelement 1, all that remains is a set of matrices representing the superelement attached to
grid point 3.)
Superelement 2 (SEID = 2)
Grid points 4 and 5 are interior to superelement 2.
Grid point 3 is exterior to superelement 2.
The load on grid point 4 is in superelement 2.
Elements and are interior to or belong to superelement 2.
The constraint on grid point 5 is contained in superelement 2.
Residual structure (R.S. OR SEID = 0)
Grid point 3 is interior to the residual structure.
There are no elements left to belong to the residual structure.
The load on grid point 3 is in the residual structure.
Superelements 1 and 2 are processed independently, then the reduced matrices are assembled
at the residual.
Phase 1 Processing of Superelement 1
After the model is divided into superelements, the data for superelement 1 contains the following
information:
Figure 1-10
Simple Model, Superelement 1 Partition
Based on this model, u 3 is the exterior DOF and belongs to the A-set for superelement 1. Therefore, we
want to generate matrices for superelement 1, apply any constraints, and reduce the matrices to the
exterior DOF. The G-set for this superelement consists of the DOFs associated with grid points 1, 2, and
3. The following are the G-sized matrices:
Main Index
CHAPTER 1 23
Kg g
K 12
=
K 12
K 12 K 12 + K 23 K 23
K 23
K 23
0
1 1 0
1 2 1
0 1 1
(1-28)
P
1
0
1
P
=
Pg
2 = 1
0
P1
3
(1-29)
The boxed superscript 1 ( 1 ) shown on the matrices indicates that they belong to superelement 1. Notice
1
that the force on grid point 3, P 3 , is not included in the Superelement Processing because the force is
applied to an exterior point, it is not included in the superelement, but is accounted for in the residual
structure. This fact is indicated in the matrix for the loading by placing a bar over the P3 term and
indicating that this represents only loading on grid point 3 associated with superelement 1.
Looking at the model, we see that grid point 1 is constrained. Because that grid point is interior to the
superelement, the constraint is applied as a part of the processing for superelement 1. The resulting
(reduced) stiffness matrix is
K ff
K 12 + K 23 K 23
K 23
K 23
Ko o Ko t
K t o K tt
2 1 0
1 1
(1-30)
This matrix is now divided into interior (O-set) and exterior (A-set) DOFs, and a static condensation is
performed to reduce the matrices to the exterior DOFs.
First we compute the boundary transformation for superelement 1 becomes (recall equation (1-6)):
G0 t
= Ko o Ko t =
1
1
------------------------- K 23 = ------------K 12 + K 23
1+1
= 0.5 1
(1-31)
The physical meaning of this equation is that if Point 3 is moved +1.0 units, then Point 2 will move 0.5
units. This is exactly as expected considering that Point 1 is constrained.
Now, we use the G o t transformation to compute the reduced stiffness at the boundary:
K tt
= K o t G o t + K tt = 1.0 0.5 + 1.0 = 0.5
(1-32)
Again, the results make sense because there are two springs in series, for which the equation is readily
available in text books or online services such as Wikipedia
(http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hooke%27s_law#Derivation) :
Main Index

K 12 K 23
11
K e q u i v = ------------------------ = ------------- = 0.5
1+1
K 12 + K 23
(1-33)
Now we have to reduce the applied loadings to the boundary. After applying the constraint to the loading
matrix, we have
Pf
P
2
=
= 1.0
1
P
0.0
3
(1-34)
Referring back to 1-12, the loads reduction to the boundary becomes:

Pt
= P3
= Go t P2 + P3
= 0.5 1.0 + 0.0 = 0.5
(1-35)
Inspection reveals that this also makes sense. If grid points 1 and 3 are constrained, then of the load
would be distributed to each point.
Phase 1 Processing of Superelement 2
After the model is divided into superelements, the data for superelement 1 contains the following
information:
Figure 1-11
Simple Model, Superelement 2 Partition
Degree of freedom u 3 is the exterior dof and belongs to the A-set for superelement 2. The reduction of
the stiffness and loads to the exterior dof follows. Since this is similar to superelement 1, only the critical
equations are shown.
Main Index
CHAPTER 1 25
Kg g
K 34
=
K 34
K 34 K 34 + K 45 K 45
0
K 45
K 45
2
P
3
2
Pg
= P
4
P
5
1 1 0
1 2 1
0 1 1
(1-36)
= 3
(1-37)
Again, since grid point 3 is exterior to superelement 2, the load is not part of the load vector for
superelement 2. Recall, forces on exterior points are not included in the superelement matrices.
The constraint will be applied, this time at dof 5, thus the boundary transformation will be calculated and
applied to the stiffness and loads matrices, resulting in the following:
2
G ot
K tt
Pt
= Ko o Ko t =
K 34
-----------------------K 34 + K 45
1
------------1+1
= 0.5
= K o t G o t + K tt = 1.0 0.5 + 1.0 = 0.5

= P3
= Go t P4 + P3
= 0.5 3 + 0.0 = 1.5
(1-38)
(1-39)
(1-40)
The transformation and reduced matrices make sense. If grid point 3 is moved 1.0 unit, grid point 4 will
move 0.5 units. As before, the stiffness is two springs in series, resulting in a combined stiffness of 0.5,
and the load of 3.0 units at grid point 4 gives a 1.5 unit reaction at point 3 if it is constrained.
Residual Structure Processing
The remaining dof, or in this case grid point 3, is defined as the residual structure.
Phase 1 Processing
The phase 1 matrices are generated for the residual structure, based on any elements or loads remaining,
then the reduced matrices from the superelements are added at the appropriate dof.
Phase 2 Processing
After the combined (or assembled) matrix for the residual is formed, and constraints applicable to the
remaining DOFs are applied and the residual structure problem is solved as part of phase 2 operations.
Phase 3 Processing
Main Index

Phase 3 represents the data recovery. In this case, since there is only one grid, the data recovery is trivial.
In the general case, the data recovery for the residual will include the residual element stresses, strains,
forces, etc.
Figure 1-1, depicts how the superelements feed into the residual structure. The individual components
that are assembled to make up the residual are shown on the left. The resulting assembly model is shown
on the right, where the system stiffness is: K = K 1 + K 2 . The residual structure for this model contains
no elements, only one grid point, the physical load on that point, and the reduced matrices from the
superelements.
Figure 1-12
Simple Model, Residual Structure
Because all physical constraints have been applied at the superelement level, no reduction is performed
at the residual level for this model. If there were a physical model for the residual, then it would also go
through the application of constraints and a reduction to a final set of analysis matrices. Therefore, the
assembly matrix is the result of adding the superelement matrices together at grid point 3, or
Kg g
Kg g
= K jj
+ i = 1 Kt t
(1-41)
1
2
= 0 + K tt + K t t
(1-42)
= 0 + 0.5 + 0.5 = 1.0

Where the matrices K tt
K jj
and K tt
(1-43)
2
represent the reduced superelement stiffness matrices, and the
matrix represents the stiffness matrix resulting from any elements in the residual structure. In
0
this problem there are no elements in the residual structure; therefore, K jj is null. Since there are
no SPCs or MPCs in the residual structure, there are not eliminations or reductions require, so
Main Index
CHAPTER 1 27
K tt
= Kg g
= 1.0
(1-44)
Similarly, the loading matrix is the physical loadings applied on the residual, plus the reduced
superelement loads. Because grid point 3 was in the residual, its load was not applied to the upstream
superelements, so the 2.0 unit force on grid point 3 is finally included at this point.
0
Pt
Pt
= Pj
= Pj
1
2
+ Pt + Pt
(1-45)
= 2.0 + 0.5 + 1.5 = 4.0
(1-46)
Now that the stiffness and loading matrices have been generated and reduced, we are ready to solve the
residual structure problem for the physical (T-set) displacements. This is referred to as the Phase 2
solution:
1
Ut = Kt t Pt
U3
(1-47)
1
--- 4.0 = 4.0
1
(1-48)
Now that the residual solution vector is available, the data recovery can be performed. In this case, there
is no additional data recovery for the residual structure since there are no elements, SPC constraints, or
MPC constraints. The data recovery will be performed for the superelements in the subsequent sections.
Review of the MSC.Nastran output from file /doc/seug/chapter1/simple-superelement.bdf. confirms the
solution.
1
MARCH
19, 2011
MSC NASTRAN
DEFAULT
0
SUPERELEMENT MODEL
PAGE
POINT ID.
3
TYPE
T1
4.000000E+00
T2
0.0
TYPE
T1
2.000000E+00
Listing 1-2
T2
0.0
V E C T O R
T3
0.0
L O A D
POINT ID.
22
SUBCASE 1
R1
0.0
R3
0.0
V E C T O R
T3
0.0
R2
0.0
R1
0.0
R2
0.0
R3
0.0
MSC.Nastran Output for the Residual Structure of the Simple Example with
Superelements
Detailed explanations of the output will be provided in subsequent chapters.
Main Index
7/15/10
SUPERELEMENT 0

Data Recovery for Superelement 1

The first part of the Phase 3 data recovery involves partitioning the residual solution to the superelement
boundary. In this case, it is trivial since there is only one residual dof. The next step for superelement
data recovery is to calculate the solution vector for the interior dof. The interior solution has two
components:
t
Free boundary displacements u 2
The free boundary displacements are based on the boundary solution of the residual structure (i.e. the
external dof are, in general, free dof in the residual). For this example, the only unknown becomes u 2
based on the external dof boundary displacements (i.e. the T-set), or
Figure 1-13
Simple Example Superelement 1 Free Boundary Displacement Data

Recovery
se id
t
uo

t
u2

= G ot
1
= Go t
sei d
Ut
Ut
s ei d
(1-49)
(1-50)
= 0.5 4.0 = 2.0
(1-51)
o
Fixed boundary displacements u 2
The fixed boundary solution is the solution vector for the interior dof when the T-set is fixed.
Main Index
CHAPTER 1 29
Figure 1-14
Simple Example Superelement 1 Fixed Boundary Displacement Data

Recovery
se id
o
uo

o
uo

= Ko o
1
= Ko o
1 se id
Po
Po
se id
(1-52)
(1-53)
1
= ------------------ 1.0 = 0.5
1 + 1
(1-54)
Total interior solution: u 2
The total interior solution is the summation of the free boundary solution and the fixed boundary solution
Uo
U2
s eid
se id
t
= Uo

sei d
o
+ Uo

= 2.0 + 0.5 = 2.5
(1-55)
(1-56)
The F-set (free set) displacements U f
The solution vector for the degrees of freedom allowed to move is obtained by merging the T-set and OSet:
sei d
Ut
se id
Uf
=
Uo
Main Index
(1-57)

1
U
= 2
= 2.5
U3
4.0
(1-58)
The G-set displacements U g
The total solution vector for all dof in the superelement is calculated by merging the SPC constraints and
back-expansion of the MPC dependent dof. In this example, there are only SPCs, so the total solution
vector becomes:
sei d
Uf
s eid
Ug
=
Us
1
U
0.0
1
=
2.5
U2
4.0
U3
(1-59)
(1-60)
Rearranging:
U1
0.0
1
Ug
= U 2 = 2.5
U3
4.0
(1-61)
Constraint Forces
The constraint forces are obtained by partitioning the G-set stiffness matrix and solution vector as
follows:
Fs = Ks f Uf
F1 =
2.5
= 2.5
1 0
4.0
(1-62)
(1-63)
Element Data Recovery
For this example, we can calculate the element forces based upon:
F el em = K e le m U e le m
Main Index
(1-64)
CHAPTER 1 31
F 12 = K 12 U 1 U 2
(1-65)
F 12 = 1.0 0.0 2.5 = 2.5
(1-66)
Similarly:
F 23 = 1.0 2.5 4.0 = 1.5
The MSC.Nastran output for this superelement matches the hand calculations
Main Index
(1-67)

:
1
MARCH
19, 2011
MSC NASTRAN
DEFAULT
0
7/15/10
PAGE
SUPERELEMENT 1
SUPERELEMENT MODEL
TYPE
T1
T2
V E C T O R
T3
R1
R2
R3
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
2.500000E+00
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
4.000000E+00
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
L O A D
POINT ID.
2
TYPE
T1
1.000000E+00
T2
TYPE
T1
-2.500000E+00
FORCE
0.0
O F
T2
I N
T3
0.0
S C A L A R
ELEMENT
ID.
-2.500000E+00
Listing 1-3
R3
0.0
C O N S T R A I N T
R1
S P R I N G S
FORCE
R2
0.0
0.0
ID.
1
R1
0.0
0.0
F O R C E S
ELEMENT
V E C T O R
T3
0.0
F O R C E S
POINT ID.
SUBCASE 1
POINT ID.
29
,
ELEMENT
R2
0.0
R3
0.0
( C E L A S 1 )
FORCE
ELEMENT
ID.
2
FORCE
ID.
-1.500000E+00
MSC.Nastran output for Simple Example Superelement 1

Following the same procedure, the data recovery for superelement 2 produces the following results:
Ug
U3
4.0
= U 4 = 3.5
U5
0.0
(1-68)
The constraint forces are:

F5 =
Main Index
3.5
= 3.5
1 1
0.0
(1-69)
CHAPTER 1 33
And the element forces are:

F 34 = 1.0 3.5 4.0 = 0.5
(1-70)
F 45 = 1.0 0.0 3.5 = 3.5
(1-71)
The MSC.Nastran output for this superelement matches the hand calculations:
1
MARCH
19, 2011
MSC NASTRAN
DEFAULT
0
SUPERELEMENT MODEL
PAGE
POINT ID.
TYPE
T1
4.000000E+00
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
3.500000E+00
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
T2
T3
L O A D
TYPE
T1
T2
3.000000E+00
0.0
F O R C E S
POINT ID.
5
TYPE
T1
-3.500000E+00
FORCE
ID.
O F
T3
I N
T3
0.0
S C A L A R
5.000000E-01
Listing 1-4
R3
R3
0.0
C O N S T R A I N T
R1
S P R I N G S
FORCE
R2
0.0
0.0
ID.
3
R2
R1
0.0
T2
ELEMENT
R1
V E C T O R
0.0
0.0
F O R C E S
ELEMENT
V E C T O R
POINT ID.
38
,
SUBCASE 1
Main Index
7/15/10
SUPERELEMENT 2
ELEMENT
R2
0.0
R3
0.0
( C E L A S 1 )
FORCE
ELEMENT
ID.
4
3.500000E+00
MSC.Nastran output for Simple Example Superelement 2
ID.
FORCE

List of Superelement Enhancements Released Since

Version 69
Superelement technology is constantly being advanced by the development staff of MSC.Nastran and
New versions of MSC.Nastran are released periodically. This guide has been prepared with minimal
reference to the version number and is consistent with the MSC.Nastran 2010. The previous version of
this guide was released in conjunction with the MSC Nastran 2001. There have been several significant
releases in the meantime and it is felt to be of historical interest to show how each of these releases add
to the Superelement capability. It is also of great practical interest to those who are not using the most
recent release to see which of the capabilities described in this Guide are not available to them. The major
enhancements since Version 69 are identified here. Discussions of each of these topics are included in
this Guide.
Version 69
Introduction of PART Superelements
Release Guide Contents, Chapter 5:
Automatic Attachment of Partitioned Superelements
Multilevel Superelements
Superelements in Dynamic Analysis
Restarts with Superelements
Image Superelements
MSC/NASTRAN Plotter
Parts Assembly with Manual Control
Upward Compatibility
MSC/PATRAN Interface
Definitions and Acronyms
Summary of New or Modified Bulk Data Entries
Sample Files
Version 69.1
External Superelements for SOL 101 and SOL 103 3 Step Method
PARAMs added: EXTOUT, EXTDROUT, EXTDR
Support for MATRIXDB, DMIGDB, DMIGOP2, DMIGPCH
Addition of EXTERNAL to SEBULK entry
EXTRN bulk data entry introduced
Version 70.0
Enhanced External Superelements
Better documentation on usage
Main Index
CHAPTER 1 35
Residual Vectors for improved dynamic

Superelement Mass Reduction performance improvement
Version 70.5
Splining Upstream Superelements in Aeroelastic Analysis
Use of External Superelements in Aeroelastic Analysis
Coupled Fluid-Structure Models with Interface DOFs in Superelements
PARAM, FLUIDSE
External SE Enhancements
Assembly of external in SOL 101 thru 159
Data Recovery support added for SOL 107 through 112
CSUPER-type support for external SE via EXTOUT PARAMs
PARAM,VMOPT,1 to support virtual mass at GSET level
Better component mode handling byu bypassing INREL module
Version 70.7
Distributed Parallel Linear Static Analysis (SOL 101)
Differential Stiffness for Upstream Superelements
External Superelement Data Recovery for SOL 146
Modal Damping for Upstream Superelements, PARAM,SESDAMP,YES
Add Modal Damping to Structural Damping for Superelements, PARAM,KDAMP,-1
Special Superelement Reserved for Fluid Elements, PARAM,FLUIDSE,seid
Reduced Data Recovery Matrices, PARAM,MINIGOA
Automated QSET Generation, PARAM,NQSET,n
Automatic Removal of Unused QSET dof, PARAM,SMALLQ
Version 2001
Shell Normal Default, PARAM,SNORM
Multiple DMIG input
Force Resultant Output Enhancements
Simplified Static Loading Data in Dynamic Analysis (removal of LOADSET/LSEQ
restrictions)
OMODES Case Control of Modal Output
OTIME Case Control of Temporal Output
WEIGHTCHECK Mass Summation Output Including Upstream Superelements
Parallel Processing Enhancements: Geometric Domain Decomposition
Main Index

Automated Component Modes Synthesis (ACMS)
Version 2004
Enhancements to External Superelements 2 Step Method
EXTSEOUT Cast Control
BNDFIX/BNDFIX1, BNDFREE, BNDFREE1
Scale Factors on X2GG and X2PP Matrices
Support of Adjoint Sensitivity in Superelement Analysis
Design Responses Spanning Across Subcases or Superelements
Specify DELAY or DPHASE in Upstream Superelements
Residual Vector Enhancements
Nonstructural Mass Support for Superelements (NSM, NSM1, NSMADD)
Modal Participation Factors for Fluid Superelement
Control of Superelement Differential Stiffness Calculation, PARAM,SEKD
Adams Flexible Body Support, ADMSMNF
Punch File Identification of Superelement ID
Version 2004R3 (2004.5)

ACMS with Matrix Domain Decomposition
ACMS compatible with Superelements, Including External Superelements
Version 2005
CSET Improvements, PARAM,MHRED
Automatic QSET generation, PARAM,AUTOQSET
Version 2005R2 (2005.1)

External Superelement Support in SOL 600
ADMSMNF Support in SOL 600
USET Support for MATMOD Option 16
Support for Fixed Boundary Displacements in SOL 101 for EXTSEOUT Assembly Runs
Support for Data Recovery with EXTSEOUT(DMIGPCH) option
Version 2005R3 (2005.5) / MDR1

Efficiency Enhancements for MTRXIN handling of DMIG entries
BSETi/BNDFIXi and CSETi/BNDFREEi Entries can be commingled
Enhancements to EXTSEOUT
ASMBULK AUTO and MANQ options
Main Index
CHAPTER 1 37
FSCOUP option to Store Fluid-Structure Coupling Matrix

DMIGSFIX option to Define DMIG Matrix Names
Automatic QSET numbering scheme with PARAM AUTOQSET
Automatic OTM output for PLOTEL elements
MATDB name equivalent to MATRIXDB
Version 2007 / MDR2

ACMS for External Superelement Reduction
Automatic External Superelement Optimization (AESO)
Version 2007.1 / MDR2.1

ACMS for External Superelement Reduction of Fluid
EXTSEOUT support for OUTPUT4 with MATRIXOP4
Merged Superelement Output, PARAM,FULLSEDR
Version 2008 / MDR3

Local Adaptive Mesh Refinement
Improved SMP throughput for Static Condensation
Version 2010
Support for Part Superelement Optimization
SOL 400 Support for Linear Solutions with Superelements
Main Index

Main Index
Chapter 2: How to Define a Superelement
Main Index
Introduction

Introduction
Introduction
Now that the basic concept of superelements has been explained, we can focus on how to define
superelements in MSC.Nastran. Superelements are defined using the Bulk Data Section of the input file
and controlled via File Management Section (FMS), Executive Control, PARAMeters, and Case Control.
There are three methods available for defining superelements:
List Superelement: Commonly referred to as SESET superelements
PART Superelement: Commonly referred to as BEGIN SUPER superelements
External Superelement: Commonly referred to as EXTSEOUT or EXTOUT or DMIG
superelements
The purpose of this chapter is to describe the input required to define each type of superelement as well
as discuss some of the advantages and disadvantages of each method.
Note:
BEGIN SUPER vs. BEGIN BULK Superelement Partitioning

MSC.Nastran maintains two distinct paths for superelement processing in the solution
sequences. When a BEGIN SUPER entry is present the program uses the more modern
SEP1X module to make the SEMAP table used to control partition of superelements. When
there is a BEGIN BULK entry but no BEGIN SUPER entries a parallel path using the older
SEP1 module is used instead. For a more detailed discussion of these two methods, please
refer to the Superelement Analysis (p. 394) in the MSC Nastran Reference Manual.
Main Index
CHAPTER 2 41

Each superelement in MSC.Nastran is identified by an integer identification known as the SEID. Each
SEID must be a unique positive integer (with the exception of the residual structure, which is known as
superelement 0). If no superelements are defined, the model is assumed to be a residual-structure-only
model, and a conventional (non-superelement) solution is performed. By default, all superelement
solution sequences perform a conventional solution if no superelements are defined. The superelement
solution sequences for MSC.Nastran are as follows:
Table 2-1
Solution Sequences that Support Superelements
SOL Number
101
SOL Name
SESTATIC
Description
Statics with options:
Linear steady state heat transfer.
Alternate reduction.
Inertia relief.
103
SEMODES
Normal modes.
105
SEBUCKL
Buckling with options:

Static analysis.
Alternate reduction.
Inertia relief.
Main Index
106
NLSTATIC
Nonlinear or linear statics
107
SEDCEIG
Direct complex modes
108
SEDFREQ
Direct frequency response
109
SEDTRAN
Direct transient response
110
SEMCEIG
Modal complex eigenvalues
111
SEMFREQ
Modal frequency response
112
SEMTRAN
Modal transient response
128
SENLRHM
Nonlinear harmonic response
129
NLTRAN
Nonlinear or linear transient response
144
AESTAT
Static Aeroelastic response
145
SEFLUTTER
Aerodynamic flutter
146
SEAERO
Aeroelastic response

Table 2-1
Solution Sequences that Support Superelements
SOL Number
153
SOL Name
NLSCSH
Description
Static structural and/or steady state heat transfer
analysis with options:
Linear or nonlinear analysis.
159
NLTCSH
Transient structural and/or transient heat transfer

analysis with options:
Linear or nonlinear analysis.
Main Index
200
DESOPT
Design Optimization
400
NONLIN
Nonlinear static and transient analysis
CHAPTER 2 43

As mentioned in the Introduction to this chapter, MSC.Nastran has 3 basic methods for defining
superelements:
List Superelements: as the name implies, List Superelements are defined by specifying a list
(or set) in the main Bulk Data section of the input file. These are often referred to as SESET
superelements because the most common way of defining them is with the SESET bulk data
entry. When superelements are defined using this approach, the model defined in this section of
the input is cut apart into separate components (each component is a superelement). A good way
to describe this is to say that the program is using a cookie-cutter approach with the model,
taking a model and dividing it into superelement lists for processing. Many models of this type
could be run as a stand-alone, or one shot model without superelement processing. However,
a savvy user who has repeated components can use the List Superelements to efficiently image
(copy, repeat, mirror) parts of the model.
PART Superelements: PART superelements are defined by defining each superelement in its
own Partitioned Bulk Data section. These separate sections of the bulk data are self-contained in
that each section contains all geometry, elements, properties, constraints, parameters, and
loading data for that component of the model. When PARTs are used the program works in a
manner similar to an assembly process. That is, a series of separate components are assembled
into the final finite element model, i.e. the residual structure.
External superelements: External Superelements are similar to PART superelements in many
respects, except rather than solving the model in a single run, the superelement can be processed
and output for use at a later time. There are many advantages of external superelements: 1) the
reduced matrices are compact and can be added to another structure while maintaining full
fidelity of the component behavior on the system, 2) they can be easily re-used as many times as
necessary at a very low runtime cost, 3) they can protect design information (proprietary
geometry) and material information (composite layup), 4) key results can be monitored without
the need for full data recovery, 5) files can be easily shared and maintained across different
organizations or design groups.
The three approaches can be used independently or together depending upon the application. In versions
prior to Version 69, only the list superelements were available. Input files from versions prior to Version
69 of MSC.Nastran can be used in later versions, and any superelement input will be treated as before.
Once PARTs are defined, the program uses a different set of rules to partition the Main Bulk Data Section
into superelements. The modern external superelements were first introduced with PARAMs in V69.1
and enhanced to include convenient case control commands in V2004. A list of enhancements by
version can be found in List of Superelement Enhancements Released Since Version 69.
Main Index


As the name implies, List Superelements are defined by specifying a list or set; but List Superelements
can only be defined in the main Bulk Data section of the MSC.Nastran input file. The superelement
processing partitions the model into separate sections based on a list of interior grid points and/or
elements defined by the user. The Main Bulk Data Section is defined as the first bulk data input section
which occurs after BEGIN BULK or BEGIN SUPER [=0].
List Superelements can be defined on the GRID entry, the SESET entry, or the SEELT entry. In addition,
a superelement can be defined as a copy of another superelement (image superelement) or by using
matrices from an external source (external superelement) by using the CSUPER entry. Refer to
Chapter 13: Practical Image Superelements for more details on image superelements.
Any grid points defined in the main bulk data that are not assigned to a superelement, using either a
SESET, GRID, or a SEELT entry will automatically be assigned to the residual structure (SEID = 0).
For list superelements defined with BEGIN BULK: if SPOINTs or EPOINTs exist in the input stream,
they are automatically and permanently assigned to the residual structure and cannot be reassigned to be
interior to a superelement. However, if the user specifies BEGIN SUPER, then SPOINTs and EPOINTs
can be assigned to any superelement. The reason is that BEGIN BULK and BEGIN SUPER undergo
different superelement processing as described in the Superelement Analysis (Ch. 1) in the MSC Nastran
Reference Manual
List Superelement Definition with the SESET Entry

The SESET entry can be used to define the interior GRIDs associated to a Superelement. The user
simply defines the SESET, its SEID and the associated GRID list for the interior GRIDs.
SESET
Superelement Interior Point Definition
Defines interior grid points for a superelement.

Format:
1
SESET
SEID
G1
G2
G3
G4
G5
G6
G7
17
24
25
165
Example:
SESET
Main Index
10
CHAPTER 2 45
Alternate Format and Example:

SESET
SEID
G1
THRU G2
SESET
17
THRU
165
Field
Contents
SEID
Superelement identification number. Must be a primary superelement. (Integer > 0)
Gi
Grid or scalar point identification numbers. (0 < Integer < 1000000; G1 < G2)
The SESET entry takes precedence over the SEID field on the GRID entry defined below. SESET
defines grid and scalar points to be included as interior to a superelement. SESET may be used as the
primary means of defining superelements or it may be used in combination with SEELT entries which
define elements interior to a superelement. For additional comments on the SESET entry, please refer
to the SESET (Ch. ) in the MSC Nastran Quick Reference Guide.
There is no limit on the number of SESET entries that can be used to define a superelement, and the
THRU option on the SESET entry, can have open sets. That is, not all grid points in the range specified
need to exist. If a nonexistent grid point is referenced by an SESET entry, that part of the entry is ignored.
If BEGIN SUPER is used and SEELT is present, then SEELT will take precedence over both the SESET
entry and GRID entry SEID field.
List Superelement Definition with the GRID Entry

An interior superelement GRID can also be defined on the GRID entry in the SEID field.
GRID
Grid Point
Defines the location of a geometric grid point, the directions of its displacement, and its permanent
single-point constraints.
Format:
1
GRID
ID
CP
X1
X2
X3
CD
PS
SEID
1.0
-2.0
3.0
Example:
GRID
Main Index
316
10

Field
Contents
lD
Grid point identification number. (0 < Integer < 100,000,000, see Remark 9.)
CP
Identification number of coordinate system in which the location of the grid

point is defined. (Integer > 0 or blank*)
X1, X2, X3
Location of the grid point in coordinate system CP. (Real; Default = 0.0)
CD
Identification number of coordinate system in which the displacements,

degrees- of-freedom, constraints, and solution vectors are defined at the grid
point. (Integer > -1 or blank, see Remark 3.)*
PS
Permanent single-point constraints associated with the grid point. (Any of

the Integers 1 through 6 with no embedded blanks, or blank*.)
SEID
Superelement identification number. (Integer > 0; Default = 0)
*See the GRDSET entry for default options for the CP, CD, PS, and SEID fields.
Note:
Note that a SESET entry will override the definition on the GRID entry. Also, the
GRDSET entry can be used to define the default SEID for all GRIDs in the main bulk data
section.
List Superelement Definition on Element ID the SEELT entry

As an alternative to defining the superelement based on GRID ids, the superelement can be defined based
on element ids using the SEELT entry. If the main bulk data section is defined with BEGIN SUPER
[=0] instead of BEGIN BULK, then the SEELT entry can be used to define the elements which belong
to each superelement. The advantage is that sometimes it is easier to define element ranges rather than
GRID ranges for large models. Refer to the note on superelement processing based on BEGIN SUPER
vs. BEGIN BULK Superelement Partitioning.
SEELT
Superelement Boundary Element Reassignment
Reassigns superelement boundary elements to an upstream superelement

Format:
Main Index
SEELT
SEID
EID1
EID2
EID3
EID4
EID5
EID6
EID7
10
CHAPTER 2 47
Example:
SEELT
147
562
937

SEELT
SEID
EID1
THRU EID2
SEELT
12006
THRU
12050
Field
Contents
SEID
Superelement identification number. See Remark 7. (Integer > 0)
EIDi
Element identification numbers. (Integer > 0 or THRU; for

THRU option EID1 < EID2.)
The SEELT entry can also be used to assign elements connected entirely to boundary GRIDs to the
upstream superelement.
Interior versus Exterior Points

Any GRID point assigned to a superelement by the user is interior to that superelement. Exterior grid
points are defined by the program based on processing order. If a grid point is connected to a
superelement but is interior to a downstream superelement (one which is processed later), that grid point
is exterior to the upstream superelement. Processing order can be defined by either the user or the
program. Other than Chapter 7: Multi-Level Superelement Analysis, we will limit the discussion in this
Guide to what is known as a single-level processing tree, where all exterior points of the superelements
are assigned as interior to the residual structure.
Simple Example using Cantilever Plate
To illustrate the concept of interior vs. exterior grid points, we can use the cantilever plate as an example.
In this case, we want to define two superelements and a residual as shown in Figure 2-1; the nonsuperelement model for this can be found at: /doc/seug/chapter2/cantilever-beam/baseline.bdf, and the
corresponding SESET model is in the same directory in file seset.bdf.
Main Index

Figure 2-1
Simple Example use to define List Superelements
We will define the interior grids for each superelement with the SESET entry. Note that this example
demonstrates both forms of the SESET entry (simple list and thru list).
Table 2-2
Sample SESET Entries used to define a List Superelement
$ Tip.10
SESET
10
108
THRU
111
SESET
10
208
THRU
211
20
101
102
$ Base.20
SESET
103
201
202
203
The resulting superelement definition is shown in Figure 2-2.
Figure 2-2
Example Model Superelement Interior Grid Definition
Considering superelement 10, the grid definitions are as follows:
Main Index
CHAPTER 2 49
Figure 2-3
Interior and Exterior Grids for Superelement 10
Note that GRID 107 and 207 are exterior to Superelement 10 and interior to Superelement 0 (the
residual). The .f06 file clearly lists the interior and exterior GRID definitions as well as the list of
elements for each superelement
SUPERELEMENT
10
LIST OF INTERIOR GRID POINTS

INDEX
-1-
-2-
108
109
-3-
-4-
110
111
SUPERELEMENT
( TOTAL NO. OF INTERIOR POINTS =
-5-
-6-
-7-
-8-
208
209
210
211
-1-
-2-
107
207
-3-
-5-
-6-
-4-
SUPERELEMENT
( TOTAL NO. OF EXTERIOR POINTS =

-7-
-8-
-9-
2 )
-10-
10
LIST OF ELEMENT ID-S

INDEX
-1-
-2-
-3-
-4-
10
Listing 2-1
-10-
10
LIST OF EXTERIOR POINTS

INDEX
8 )
-9-
( TOTAL NO. OF ELEMENTS =

-5-
-6-
-7-
-8-
4 )
-9-
-10-
Superelement Summary Based on List Superelements with BEGIN BULK
Note that instead of SESET, this example could have been defined by using BEGIN SUPER (instead of
BEGIN BULK) and the following SEELT definition: SEELT,10,7,thru,10. In this case the superelement
processing would have gone through the new superelement processing and the output would have been
Main Index

different as shown in Listing 2-2. See also the Note on BEGIN SUPER vs. BEGIN BULK Superelement
Partitioning
0
SUPERELEMENT
10
TYPE = PRIMARY (MAIN BULK DATA)

LIST OF
INDEX
1
-1-
-2-
1B
2B
-3-
EXTERIOR POINTS
-4-
SUPERELEMENT
-5-
( TOTAL NO. OF EXTERIOR POINT =

-6-
-7-
-8-
2 )
-9-
-10-
10

LIST OF
INDEX
1
-1108
-2109
-3110
INTERIOR POINTS
-4111
SUPERELEMENT
-5208
( TOTAL NO. OF INTERIOR POINT =

-6209
-7210
-8-
8 )
-9-
-10-
211
10

LIST OF
INDEX
1
ELEMENTS
-1-
-2-
-3-
-4-
10
Listing 2-2
( TOTAL NO. OF ELEMENTS

-5-
-6-
-7-
-8-
4 )
-9-
-10-
Superelement Summary Based on List Superelements with BEGIN SUPER
Demonstration of Defining Interior Points in Patran

The cantilever plate example in the previous section can be easily defined in Patran. It is presumed that
the user has a working knowledge of Patran and groups. First, to define the superelements, the user opens
the proper form in Patran by selecting the Meshing tab and the Superelement Icon
Main Index
CHAPTER 2 51
Figure 2-4
Opening the Create Superelement form in Patran
Next the user simply selects the group which will define each superelement. The dot in the SE.10
will tell Patran to honor the number 10 as the SEID when it exports the MSC.Nastran bdf SESET
entries.
Main Index

Figure 2-5
Patran Superelement Definition Based on Groups
By default, Patran will automatically detect grids 107 and 207 as the superelement exterior dof. There
are some special cases where the user may want to redefine the exterior dof and they are covered later in
this Guide
When creating an analysis job, the user must specify if superelements are desired, otherwise Patran will
not write a superelement model. By default, a PART superelement model is written, but the user can also
chose a list (SESET) superelement model as shown in the example below.
Main Index
CHAPTER 2 53
Figure 2-6
Main Index
Patran Analysis Setup to Write a List (SESET) Superelement Input File

Superelement Partitioning
Each superelement is processed as an independent model. To achieve this, MSC.Nastran creates separate
bulk data for each superelement. In the case of Part Superelements, this is naturally performed based on
the user directive BEGIN SUPER = SEID. However, for list superelements, MSC.Nastran must
interrogate and partition the bulk data into its constituent superelements.
List superelements are partitioned based on user input. Recall that list superelements are defined with
SESET entries, or GRID entries with and SEID specified on field 9, or by defining BEGIN SUPER in
conjunction with SEELT in the main bulk data section.
The partitioning process for list superelements is described as follows.
First the processing order is defined for the model; i.e. which superelement will be processed
first. For single-level superelements, the processing order is not important. However, for multilevel superelements, the tip superelements must be processes first, followed by the collector
superelements in a hierarchy that will feed into the residual structure. Once the processing order
is defined, the bulk data is partitioned for each superelement based on the processing order.
All interior grid points assigned to the superelement are placed in the bulk data section for its
associated superelement. These grids are also removed from the residual structure bulk data.
All elements connected to the interior grid points of the superelement are placed in its associated
bulk data section. These elements are removed from the residual bulk data.
All exterior points are stored with the superelement bulk data. These grids remain in residual
bulk data section and may also be defined in other superelement bulk data sections.
Any loading entries specific to the interior grid points and/or interior elements are removed from
the residual bulk data and associated with the superelement bulk data. Any information removed
from the residual bulk data and associated to a superelement is not available for use in any other
superelement.
Any loads that are specific to grids interior to the residual structure are retained in the residual
bulk data section and processes with the residual structure. (Refer to the simple example in
Superelement Analysis (Ch. 1)).
Copies are made of common data. For example, property entries can be applicable to elements
in multiple superelements. Also loadings such as PLOAD4 and GRAV could apply to multiple
superelements. Common data is not removed from the residual bulk data, but it is copied so that
it will be available for the relevant superelements.
Once all information for the first superelement has been separated, the process is repeated for the next
superelement based on the processing order. After the bulk data has been separated, moved, or copied for
each upstream superelement, the remaining data belongs to the residual structure. Once the list
superelements have been partitioned, each superelement is processed using its own unique bulk data. If
there are entries that need information from more than one superelement for processing (for example,
PLOAD4 entries with a THRU range including elements from several superelements), the program may
give a fatal message when processing the affected superelements. To simplify matters, think of each
superelement as being processed independently from all others, thus reducing the chance for errors.
A more detailed description of the grid and element partitioning is included in the following subsections.
Main Index
CHAPTER 2 55
Grid Point Partitioning

Interior grid points are assigned by the user. Exterior points are normally determined by the program,
based on element connectivity. Any grid point (that is not interior to the superelement) connected to an
element that is interior to a superelement is defined as an exterior point for the superelement.
In addition, it is possible for the user to define additional exterior grid points beyond the ones assigned
by the program. This definition can be accomplished by using the CSUPEXT entry.
CSUPEXT
Superelement Exterior Point Definition
Assigns exterior points to a superelement.

Format:
1
CSUPEXT
SEID
GP1
GP2
GP3
GP4
GP5
GP6
GP7
10
Example:
CSUPEXT
147
562
937

CSUPEXT
SEID
EID1
THRU
EID2
CSUPEXT
12006
THRU
12050
Field
Main Index
Contents
SEID
Superelement identification number. See Remark 7. (Integer > 0)
GPi
Grid identification numbers. (Integer > 0 or THRU; for THRU option GP1 <
GP2.)

This entry is used to assign exterior points that might not be assigned based on connectivity. Examples
are: reference grid points on CBAR and CBEAM entries, PARAM,GRDPNT, reference grid points on
loading entries, and points connected only by RBE or MPC entries.
Note:
SPOINT and EPOINT handling

There are special rules regarding scalar (SPOINT) and extra (EPOINT) points. SPOINTs
are scalar points and are used as special dof for operations like storing generalized dof
in Component Modes Synthesis (see also Dynamic Reduction Component Modes
Synthesis (Ch. 9), defining warping dof for CBEAM elements, and as a dof to store
relative displacements in a relative displacement MPC, to name a few uses. EPOINTs are
extra points that are used in dynamics analysis to define transfer functions as part of
control systems. Extra points are added to the system after the finite element matrix
assembly and real eigenvalue solution. Therefore, structural elements, constraints, and
static loads may not be connected to EPOINTs. Note that neither SPOINTs nor EPOINTs
are associated to geometric entities.
EPOINTS: must be part of the residual structure. If the user attempts to assign an
EPOINT as interior to an upstream superelement, a FATAL message will occur.

SPOINTS: depending on the processing method, SPOINTs have different rules:
BEGIN BULK: For list superelements in the main bulk data section defined with
BEGIN BULK, both scalar and extra points are, automatically and permanently
assigned as interior to the residual structure. They cannot be interior to any other
superelement. Scalar points can be exterior to any number of superelements and
are often used in dynamics to represent component modes. Extra points cannot be
exterior to any superelement; in fact, any entries that reference extra points can
reference only points and elements that are interior to the residual structure.
BEGIN SUPER: For Part Superelements or List Superelements in models that
contain BEGIN SUPER , the SPOINTs remain interior to the superelement in

which they are defined. In multi-level superelement analysis, this gives the user
the option to define collector superelements and store component modes in
SPOINTs. Also, warping dof and other dof defined with SPOINTs will remain in
their natural superelement for processing.
Element Partitioning
Element partitioning for list superelements is handled automatically by MSC.Nastran. Any element that
is connected entirely to the interior points of a superelement is assigned to that superelement. A Branch
Element is an element that connects to grid points belonging to more than one superelement. Branch
elements are assigned to the most upstream (based on processing order) superelement to which they are
connected Figure 2-7 shows an example of a branch element. This example is the same example
described earlier and can be located at /doc/seug/chapter2/cantilever-beam/seset.bdf. In this example,
element 7 attaches to GRID 107 and 207 which both belong to superelement 10 (as an external dof) and
superelement 0 (as an internal dof. Since superelement 10 is the most upstream superelement, element
7 is automatically attached to superelement 10. From a programming standpoint this means that the
Main Index
CHAPTER 2 57
element formulation (stiffness, mass, etc.) and element data recovery (element forces, stresses, etc.) are
calculated during the processing of superelement 10. From a practitioner standpoint, the more important
thing to understand is that the element data recovery will be performed and reported in the .f06 and .op2
files as part of superelement 10. For this example, the .f06 file clearly demonstrates that element 7
belongs to superelement 10 and that the data recovery is performed for superelement 10.
Figure 2-7
Example of Branch Superleement
SUPERELEMENT
10

0
INDEX
-1-
-2-
108
109
-3-
-4-
110
111
SUPERELEMENT
-5-
-6-
-7-
-8-
208
209
210
211
INDEX
-1-
-2-
107
207
-3-
-4-
SUPERELEMENT
-5-
-6-
INDEX
1
-1-
-2-
-3-
-4-
10
-7-
-8-
-9-
2 )
-10-
10

0
-10-
10

0
8 )
-9-

-5-
-6-
-7-
-8-
4 )
-9-
-10-
SUPERELEMENT

0
INDEX
-1-
-2-
104
105
-3-
-4-
106
107
SUPERELEMENT
-6-
-7-
-8-
204
205
206
207
Main Index
INDEX
-1-
-2-
-3-
-4-
-5-
-6-
8 )
-9-
-10-

0
-5-

-7-
-8-
3 )
-9-
-10-

MD NASTRAN JOB CREATED ON 20-MAR-11 AT 12:28:00
MARCH
20, 2011
MD NASTRAN
CREATED BY LANCE PROCTOR, EAGLESIM
7/15/10
PAGE
17
SUPERELEMENT 0
0
*** USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 7321 (SEDRDR)
DATA RECOVERY FOR SUPERELEMENT
0 IS NOW INITIATED.
MARCH
20, 2011
MD NASTRAN
DEFAULT
0
7/15/10
SESET STATIC SOLUTION
20
,
SUBCASE 1
POINT ID.
PAGE
SUPERELEMENT 0
V E C T O R
TYPE
T1
T2
104
5.068370E-03
1.580829E-02
0.0
T3
0.0
R1
0.0
R2
9.892963E-03
R3
105
6.398248E-03
2.707486E-02
0.0
0.0
0.0
1.247253E-02
106
7.548106E-03
4.074128E-02
0.0
0.0
0.0
1.469234E-02
107
8.518030E-03
5.644763E-02
0.0
0.0
0.0
1.655197E-02
204
-4.830489E-03
1.579607E-02
0.0
0.0
0.0
9.892758E-03
205
-6.080313E-03
2.706290E-02
0.0
0.0
0.0
1.247260E-02
206
-7.150200E-03
4.072934E-02
0.0
0.0
0.0
1.469227E-02
207
-8.040061E-03
5.643537E-02
0.0
0.0
0.0
1.655221E-02
MARCH
20, 2011
MD NASTRAN
7/15/10
PAGE
SUPERELEMENT 10
22
,
0
10 IS NOW INITIATED.
MARCH
20, 2011
MD NASTRAN
DEFAULT
0
Main Index
PAGE
TYPE
25
,
SUBCASE 1
POINT ID.
7/15/10
SUPERELEMENT 10
V E C T O R
T1
T2
107
8.518030E-03
5.644763E-02
0.0
T3
0.0
R1
0.0
R2
1.655197E-02
R3
108
9.307833E-03
7.383300E-02
0.0
0.0
0.0
1.805235E-02
109
9.918178E-03
9.254120E-02
0.0
0.0
0.0
1.919017E-02
110
1.034660E-02
1.121981E-01
0.0
0.0
0.0
1.997773E-02
111
1.060229E-02
1.324967E-01
0.0
0.0
0.0
2.034813E-02
207
-8.040061E-03
5.643537E-02
0.0
0.0
0.0
1.655221E-02
CHAPTER 2 59
208
-8.750085E-03
7.382199E-02
0.0
0.0
0.0
1.805149E-02
209
-9.279610E-03
9.252547E-02
0.0
0.0
0.0
1.919340E-02
210
-9.631094E-03
1.122000E-01
0.0
0.0
0.0
1.996567E-02
211
-9.795371E-03
1.324328E-01
0.0
0.0
0.0
2.031519E-02
MARCH
20, 2011
MD NASTRAN
DEFAULT
0
7/15/10
ELEMENT
I N
FIBER
GRID-ID
26
,
SUBCASE 1
S T R E S S E S
ID
PAGE
SUPERELEMENT 10
Q U A D R I L A T E R A L
E L E M E N T S
STRESSES IN ELEMENT COORD SYSTEM
DISTANCE
( Q U A D 4 )
OPTION = BILIN
PRINCIPAL STRESSES (ZERO SHEAR)
NORMAL-X
NORMAL-Y
SHEAR-XY
ANGLE
CEN/4 -5.000000E-02
4.000000E+02
3.673928E+00
2.999654E+02
28.2752 5.613475E+02 -1.576736E+02
MAJOR
MINOR
6.545851E+02
VON MISES
5.000000E-02
4.000000E+02
3.673928E+00
2.999654E+02
28.2752 5.613475E+02 -1.576736E+02
6.545851E+02
107 -5.000000E-02
7.899135E+03 -2.632689E+00
2.999654E+02
2.1709 7.910506E+03 -1.400356E+01
7.917517E+03
5.000000E-02
7.899135E+03 -2.632689E+00
2.999654E+02
2.1709 7.910506E+03 -1.400356E+01
7.917517E+03
108 -5.000000E-02
7.899135E+03
9.980545E+00
2.999654E+02
2.1743 7.910524E+03 -1.408448E+00
7.911228E+03
5.000000E-02
7.899135E+03
9.980545E+00
2.999654E+02
2.1743 7.910524E+03 -1.408448E+00
7.911228E+03
208 -5.000000E-02 -7.099135E+03
9.980545E+00
2.999654E+02
87.5882 2.261497E+01 -7.111770E+03
7.123104E+03
5.000000E-02 -7.099135E+03
9.980545E+00
2.999654E+02
87.5882 2.261497E+01 -7.111770E+03
7.123104E+03
207 -5.000000E-02 -7.099135E+03 -2.632689E+00
2.999654E+02
87.5839 1.002412E+01 -7.111792E+03
7.116809E+03
5.000000E-02 -7.099135E+03 -2.632689E+00
2.999654E+02
87.5839 1.002412E+01 -7.111792E+03
7.116809E+03
2.999654E+02
27.7067 5.575302E+02 -1.711873E+02
6.599902E+02
CEN/4 -5.000000E-02
4.000000E+02 -1.365707E+01
5.000000E-02
4.000000E+02 -1.365707E+01
2.999654E+02
27.7067
5.575302E+02 -1.711873E+02
6.599902E+02
Listing 2-3
Branch Superelement Processing in .f06 File
A Boundary Element is an element that is connected to grid points, all of which are exterior to a
superelement. Boundary elements are automatically assigned to the downstream superelement, but may
be placed in the upstream superelement by using the SEELT Bulk Data entry. For example, consider
Figure 2-8 which is the cantilever plate with beam elements surrounding each plate element (i.e. a
stiffened plate). In this case, since GRID 107 and 207 are exterior to Superelement 10, and element 307
attaches to GRID 107 and 207, the default behavior is that element 307 belongs to Superelement 0. This
means that any mass, stiffness, damping, or element load is calculated and attached to the matrices that
make up Superelement 0. The user may choose to assign element 307 to Superelement 10. In order to
assign a boundary element to Superelement 10, the user can use the SEELT command. For this example,
there are two example problems located in /doc/seug/chapter2/cantilever-beam/boundary-se0.dat and
Main Index

/doc/seug/chapter2/cantilever-beam/boundary-se10.dat. The file boundary-se0.dat demonstrates the

default behavior
Figure 2-8
Example of Boundary Elements Automatically Assigned to Residua
SUPERELEMENT
10

0
INDEX
-1-
-2-
-3-
16 )
-4-
-5-
-6-
-7-
-8-
-9-
-10-
109
110
207
208
10
107
108
11
209
210
308
309
310
311
SUPERELEMENT

0
INDEX
-1-
-2-
13 )
-3-
-4-
-5-
-6-
-7-
-8-
-9-
-10-
104
105
106
204
205
206
304
11
305
306
307
DEFAULT
SUPERELEMENT 0
SUBCASE 1
S T R E S S E S
STAT DIST/
Main Index
I N
B E A M
E L E M E N T S
( C B E A M )
CHAPTER 2 61
ELEMENT-ID
GRID
LENGTH
SXC
SXD
SXE
SXF
S-MAX
S-MIN
206
0.000
-5.124043E+03 -5.124043E+03 -5.834160E+03 -5.834160E+03 -5.124043E+03 -5.834160E+03
207
1.000
-5.252965E+03 -5.252965E+03 -5.705236E+03 -5.705236E+03 -5.252965E+03 -5.705236E+03
104
0.000
-1.436810E+02 -1.436810E+02 -4.061910E+01 -4.061910E+01 -4.061910E+01 -1.436810E+02
204
1.000
-4.087595E+01 -4.087595E+01 -1.434255E+02 -1.434255E+02 -4.087595E+01 -1.434255E+02
105
0.000
-1.421059E+02 -1.421059E+02 -3.954948E+01 -3.954948E+01 -3.954948E+01 -1.421059E+02
205
1.000
-3.946863E+01 -3.946863E+01 -1.421882E+02 -1.421882E+02 -3.946863E+01 -1.421882E+02
106
0.000
-1.422200E+02 -1.422200E+02 -3.948044E+01 -3.948044E+01 -3.948044E+01 -1.422200E+02
206
1.000
-3.956195E+01 -3.956195E+01 -1.421399E+02 -1.421399E+02 -3.956195E+01 -1.421399E+02
107
0.000
-1.432607E+02 -1.432607E+02 -4.087958E+01 -4.087958E+01 -4.087958E+01 -1.432607E+02
207
1.000
-4.062019E+01 -4.062019E+01 -1.435215E+02 -1.435215E+02 -4.062019E+01 -1.435215E+02
206
304
305
306
307
Listing 2-4
Boundary Element Automatically Assigned to Residual
The file boundary-se10.dat demonstrates how to reassign boundary element 307 to superelement 10 by
specifying the following SEELT entry:
SEELT
Superelement Boundary Element Reassignment
Reassigns superelement boundary elements to an upstream superelement

Format:
1
SEELT
SEID
EID1
EID2
EID3
EID4
EID5
EID6
EID7
10
307
10
Example:
SEELT
In Patran, this can be put in the direct text input for the bulk data section as follows:
SEELT,10,307
For this example, boundary element 304 remains in the residual, but boundary element 307 has been
reassigned to superelement 10.
Main Index

Figure 2-9
SUPERELEMENT
Example of Boundary Element Manually Assigned to Upstream Superelement
10
INDEX
-1-
-2-
-3-
17 )
-4-
-5-
-6-
-7-
-8-
-9-
-10-
110
207
208
10
107
108
109
11
209
210
307
308
309
310
311
SUPERELEMENT

0
INDEX
-1-
12 )
-2-
-3-
-4-
-5-
-6-
-7-
-8-
-9-
-10-
104
105
106
204
205
206
304
11
305
306
DEFAULT
SUPERELEMENT 0
SUBCASE 1
S T R E S S E S
I N
B E A M
E L E M E N T S
SXE
SXF
( C B E A M )
STAT DIST/
ELEMENT-ID
GRID
LENGTH
SXC
SXD
S-MAX
S-MIN
206
0.000
-5.124043E+03 -5.124043E+03 -5.834160E+03 -5.834160E+03 -5.124043E+03 -5.834160E+03
207
1.000
-5.252965E+03 -5.252965E+03 -5.705236E+03 -5.705236E+03 -5.252965E+03 -5.705236E+03
104
0.000
-1.436810E+02 -1.436810E+02 -4.061910E+01 -4.061910E+01 -4.061910E+01 -1.436810E+02
Main Index
206
304
CHAPTER 2 63
204
1.000
-4.087595E+01 -4.087595E+01 -1.434255E+02 -1.434255E+02 -4.087595E+01 -1.434255E+02
105
0.000
-1.421059E+02 -1.421059E+02 -3.954948E+01 -3.954948E+01 -3.954948E+01 -1.421059E+02
205
1.000
-3.946863E+01 -3.946863E+01 -1.421882E+02 -1.421882E+02 -3.946863E+01 -1.421882E+02
305
DEFAULT
SUPERELEMENT 10
SUBCASE 1
S T R E S S E S
I N
B E A M
E L E M E N T S
SXE
SXF
( C B E A M )
STAT DIST/
ELEMENT-ID
0
GRID
LENGTH
SXC
SXD
S-MAX
S-MIN
210
0.000
-8.225272E+02 -8.225272E+02 -1.068186E+03 -1.068186E+03 -8.225272E+02 -1.068186E+03
211
1.000
-9.582994E+02 -9.582994E+02 -9.324120E+02 -9.324120E+02 -9.324120E+02 -9.582994E+02
107
0.000
-1.432607E+02 -1.432607E+02 -4.087958E+01 -4.087958E+01 -4.087958E+01 -1.432607E+02
207
1.000
-4.062019E+01 -4.062019E+01 -1.435215E+02 -1.435215E+02 -4.062019E+01 -1.435215E+02
108
0.000
-1.383584E+02 -1.383584E+02 -3.462496E+01 -3.462496E+01 -3.462496E+01 -1.383584E+02
208
1.000
-3.558226E+01 -3.558226E+01 -1.374025E+02 -1.374025E+02 -3.558226E+01 -1.374025E+02
210
307
308
Listing 2-5
Boundary Element Manually Reassigned to Upstream Superelement with

SEELT
Point elements such as concentrated mass elements (CONMi) are assigned as interior to the
superelement that contains the grid point to which the element is attached. For the case where the GRID
is exterior to one superelement and interior to another superelement, the CONM2 will be assigned to the
interior grid (i.e. the downstream superelement). Consider, for example, the cantilever plate model with
CONM2 attached to GRIDs 107, 207 as shown in Figure 2-10. In this case, the default behavior is that
the CONM2 are processed entirely within Superelement 0. This example is located at:
/doc/seug/chapter2/cantilever-beam/conm2-SE0.dat.
Figure 2-10
Main Index
Example of Point Element on a Superleement Boundary

SUPERELEMENT

0
INDEX
-1-
-2-
-3-
Listing 2-6
-4-

-5-
501
-6-
-7-
-8-
5 )
-9-
-10-
502
CONM2 Automatically Assigned to Downstream Superlement
However, the SEELT command can assign the CONM2 to the upstream superelement if desired
(/doc/seug/chapter2/cantilever-beam/conm2-se10.dat).
SEELT,10,501,502
0
SUPERELEMENT
10

0
INDEX
-1-
-2-
-3-
Listing 2-7
-4-
10

-5-
501
-6-
-7-
-8-
6 )
-9-
-10-
502
Manually Reassigned to Upstream Superelement with SEELT
Example of Bulk Data Partitioning

The following example demonstrates the bulk data partitioning associated with list superelements. The
double-headed flyswatter is used for demonstration; the input file can be located at
/doc/seug/chapter2/flyswatter/seset.dat. This example differs from the cantilever plate in that not all of
the superelements are directly adjacent to the residual structure elements. The grid points shown in
Figure 2-12 are the grid points that belong to the residual structure. All other grid points are interior to
one of the superelements. These residual structure points are all exterior points for one or more of the
superelements. The residual structure contains not only the reduced matrices for the superelements, but
also any elements that were not assigned to another superelement. The residual structure for this model
contains only one element, QUAD4 number 5, which was not assigned to another superelement during
superelement processing.
Main Index
CHAPTER 2 65
Main Index
Figure 2-11
Flyswatter Example for List Superelement Partitioning
Figure 2-12
Residual Structure Interior Grids

The SESET entries associated with Figure 2-12 are as follows:

$ SEID.10
SESET
10
33
34
37
SESET
10
45
THRU
50
SESET
10
57
THRU
62
SESET
10
69
THRU
74
SESET
10
81
THRU
86
SESET
10
93
THRU
98
SESET
20
39
40
43
SESET
20
51
THRU
56
SESET
20
63
THRU
68
SESET
20
75
THRU
80
SESET
20
87
THRU
92
SESET
20
99
THRU
104
30
29
30
40
31
32
38
$ SEID.20
44
$ SEID.30
SESET
$ SEID.40
SESET
$ SEID.50
SESET
50
THRU
SESET
50
21
22
SESET
60
15
THRU
SESET
60
25
26
70
THRU
12
$ SEID.60
18
$ SEID.70
SESET
Listing 2-8
Flyswatter SESET Definition
In this example, all points that are exterior to any superelements are interior to the residual structure.
Therefore, all superelements attach directly to the residual structure. This is known as a Single Level
Superelement Tree. If the exterior point of any superelement is an interior point of another superelement
which is not the residual, the model is what is known as a multilevel tree, which will be discussed later
(Chapter 7: Multi-Level Superelement Analysis). Conceptually, the single level superelement
processing is shown in the following figure:
Main Index
CHAPTER 2 67
Figure 2-13
More details on Single Level Superelement Analysis are contained in Chapter 3: Single Level
Superelement Analysis.
Following the process defined in the beginning of Superelement Partitioning (Sec. ), the following steps
are followed for this model:
The processing order for the model is determined. Since this is a single-level tree, the
processing order is not critical. MSC.Nastran defines the order by superelement id with the
residual structure being processed last. The .f06 output is as follows:
SUPERELEMENT DEFINITION TABLE
(SORTED BY SEID)
INDEX
SUPERELEMENT
PROCESS ORDER
DOWNSTREAM SE SUPERELEMENT TYPE
RESIDUAL STRUCTURE
10
PRIMARY SUPERELEMENT
20
30
40
50
60
70

(SORTED BY PROCESS ORDER)
Main Index


INDEX
SUPERELEMENT
PROCESS ORDER
DOWNSTREAM SE
SUPERELEMENT TYPE
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
RESIDUAL STRUCTURE
Listing 2-9
Flyswatter Single-Level Processing Order
The interior grids associated to each superelement are placed into the bulk data section for its
corresponding superelement. The exterior grids for each superelement are associated to both the
upstream superelement and the residual. For example, superelement 30 has interior grids 29 and
30 and exterior grids 19, 20, 35 and 36.
Figure 2-14
Grids Associated with Superelement 30
The interior and exterior grids associated to superelement 3 are identified in the .f06 file as
follows:
SUPERELEMENT
30
INDEX
-1-
-2-
29
30
-3-
-4-
SUPERELEMENT
-5-
Main Index
-1-
-2-
-3-
-4-
-7-
-8-
-9-
2 )
-10-
30

INDEX

-6-

-5-
-6-
-7-
-8-
-9-
4 )
-10-
CHAPTER 2 69
19
20
35
36
SUPERELEMENT
12 )
INDEX
-1-
-2-
-3-
-4-
-5-
-6-
-7-
-8-
-9-
-10-
13
14
19
20
23
24
27
28
35
36
11
41
42
Listing 2-10
File Identification of Grids Associated with Superelement 3
The elements associated to each superelement are placed into the bulk data section for its
corresponding superelement. For superelement 30, the details are as follows
Figure 2-15
Elements Associated with Superlement 30
SUPERELEMENT
30

INDEX
-1-
-2-
14
15
Listing 2-11
Main Index
-3-
-4-

-5-
-6-
-7-
-8-
2 )
-9-
-10-
File Identification of Elements Associated with Superelement 30

Loads are processed. Since this model has inertia loading only, all of the loads are processed for
each superelement and reduced to the boundary. The OLOAD RESULTANT is printed for each
superelement:
*** USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 7325 (SEP2DR)
PROCESSING OF SUPERELEMENT
3 IS NOW INITIATED.
^^^ USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 9045 (PHASE1DR)

^^^ PHASE 1 - SUPERELEMENT GENERATION, ASSEMBLY AND REDUCTION.
1
MARCH
25, 2011
MD NASTRAN
12/15/10
PAGE
29
SUPERELEMENT 3
0
*** USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 7310 (VECPRN)
ORIGIN OF SUPERELEMENT BASIC COORDINATE SYSTEM WILL BE USED AS REFERENCE LOCATION.
RESULTANTS ABOUT ORIGIN OF SUPERELEMENT BASIC COORDINATE SYSTEM IN SUPERELEMENT BASIC SYSTEM COORDINATES.
0
OLOAD
SUBCASE/
LOAD
DAREA ID
TYPE
T1
FX
0.000000E+00
RESULTANT
T2
T3
R1
----
----
----
FY
----
FZ
----
----
MX
----
----
----
MY
----
----
----
----
MZ
----
----
----
----
TOTALS
0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00
Listing 2-12
0.000000E+00
---3.622400E-01
3.622400E-01
R2
0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00
1.883648E+00
---1.159168E+00
0.000000E+00
1.883648E+00
---0.000000E+00
---1.159168E+00
R3
0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00
---------0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00
Loads Processing for Superelement 3
Finally, all of the common data is copied to the respective superelement sections. For this
model, the common data includes the PARAM entries, but, in general, this could include
properties (PSHELL, PBEAM, etc.) and material entries (MAT1, MAT2, etc.). There is no
special printout for each superelement in the .f06 file associated with the common data.
The items associated with each superelement (interior points, exterior points, and elements) printed in
the .f06 file can be controlled by the SEMAP, SEMAPOPT, and SEMAPPRT parameter. These are
defined in the Quick Reference Guide.
Main Index
CHAPTER 2 71

As its name implies, the list superelements in the previous section are defined by lists (sets). Another
method of generating superelements is by defining PARTs. PARTs are used to subdivide a model into
superelements by defining an entire stand-alone bulk data of each superelement. This provides
advantages to model integrators when assembling component models that are generated by different
organizations, different engineers, or that were generated independently from other components in the
assembly.
Defining Parts
PARTs are defined as separate components using separate areas of the Bulk Data Section in
MSC.Nastran. Therefore, each PART can be thought of as a separate component model. MSC.Nastran
automatically locates any coincident grid points in common between the constituent PARTs and connects
the component models to create the assembly model. Of course, for more complicated situations,
MSC.Nastran provides the user with complete control of the connection points.
The Bulk Data Section can be divided into separate sections for each PART. This division is
accomplished by using the BEGIN SUPER entry. The format of this entry is as follows:
BEGIN [BULK] SUPER = i
Where i is the superelement id defined by the user. The commonly used form of this command is:
BEGIN SUPER = i
Which is the form used in this book.
The PART superelement concept was introduced in Version 69. Prior to Version 69, the Bulk Data
Section of the input file was always a single section of data that contained the complete model definition.
That is to say, the entire model was defined in the area between BEGIN BULK and ENDDATA. Each
grid point had to be unique, and each element id had to be unique and parameters in the Bulk Data
Section applied to every superelement (unless overwritten by a case control parameter). With the advent
of PART superelements, it became possible to partition the Bulk Data Section of the input into separate
component models, using the BEGIN SUPER command. Thus, each of these component models is a
self-contained model defining a PART of the total model. Within each of these sections, grid point and
element ids must be unique as before; however, different PARTs can reuse grid and element ids, because
the sections are separate in the input file.
The Bulk Data Section Using PARTs

When PARTs are used, the bulk data is divided into different sections. The section of the bulk data
contained between the BEGIN BULK (or BEGIN SUPER [= 0]) and either the first BEGIN SUPER = i,
or the ENDDATA is known as the Main Bulk Data Section. In this section the user may define
superelements as described in Defining List Superelements in Section Defining List Superelements.
Any superelements defined in this section are known as main bulk data superelements. Refer to the note
on superelement processing based on in Chapter 1. The superelement partitioning associated with
Main Index

PARTs in MSC.Nastran contains logic to determine coincident grid points between different PARTs.
After determining which grid points are coincident, MSC.Nastran will (by default) automatically connect
any coincident grid points. Of course, the user has the option to override the automatic connection which
will be described in Connecting PARTs to Other PARTs, in Connecting PARTs to Other PARTs.
Format of the Input File When PARTs are Used

When PARTs are used the Executive and Case Control Sections are unchanged, only the Bulk Data
Section is different. A sample input file looks like the following:
SOL 101
CEND
TITLE = Sample Input File Demonstrating PARTs definition
BEGIN BULK
$
$ MAIN BULK DATA SECTION
$
$ bulk data definition for the Residual Structure (SEID=0)
BEGIN SUPER = 1
$
$ bulk data for PART Superelement 1 (SEID=1)
$
BEGIN SUPER = 25
$
$ bulk data for PART Superelement 25 (SEID=25)
$
ENDDATA
Listing 2-13
Example of PART Superelement Delimiters with BEGIN SUPER
In this example, there is a Main Bulk Data Section (which may or may not define list superelements) and
two PART superelements (SEID = 1 and SEID = 25). Each section is self-contained. That is, no entry in
PART 1 can reference an entry in any other section of the input. This goes for all PARTs; they must be
self-contained. There are several Main Bulk Data Section bulk data entries that can be used to move,
Main Index
CHAPTER 2 73
copy, or manually connect PARTs, but beyond these entries, no entry in any section of the input can
reference an entry in any other section of the bulk data.
Note:
A common point of confusion when using PART superelements is the use of PARAM
entries. Since each PART is processed independently of the other PARTs, the PARAMs
must be defined within each PART bulk data section. Alternatively, most PARAMs can be
defined in the Case Control Section. For example, in order to obtain a results output2 file
for each PART superelement, PARAM,POST,-1 must be specified in each PART bulk data
section, or in the case control. For PARAMs that will apply to the entire model, it is
common to put the PARAM entries above the first SUBCASE. For more details on which
parameters can be defined in the Case Control, or Bulk Data, refer to the Parameter
Applicability Tables (Ch. 5) in the MSC Nastran Quick Reference Guide.
Static Example Input Using Freedom

We will use the freedom airplane example to demonstrate how to set up a model using PARTs. In this
example, we will assume that there are different analysts (or organizations) responsible for various
components of the aircraft. In this case, we have a full model and will not use symmetry or image
superelements, which will be introduced in later chapters.
Also, it is assumed that each analyst (or organization) has provided a complete run ready bulk data
section that has all grids, elements, properties, materials, loads, constraints, etc. defined. Note that loads
and constraints must have consistent IDs across parts in order to process properly; a more detailed
description of loads and constraints is contained in Chapter 4: Loads, Constraints, Case Control, and
Parameters in Static Analysis. The files associate with this example can be found in
/doc/seug/chapter2/freedom/.
Demonstration of Patran definition
PART superelements can be easily defined in Patran. Note that Patran does have the limitation that all
grids and elements must be unique (which is not the case for Nastran PART superelements). For this
example, we will start with /doc/seug/chapter2/feedom-baseline.dat and read it into Patran.
Main Index

Figure 2-16
Freedom Example Baseline (w/o Superelements)
Next, the model is organized into logical groups. For readers trying to follow this example, a session file
is available to generate the groups; /doc/seug/chapter2/group-create-color-continuous.ses. The session
file also be colors and displays the model in group mode to more easily identify the superelements.
Figure 2-17
Freedom Model After Being Organized Into Groups
Creation of superelements is easily accomplished in Patran. From the meshing tab, the user selects the
superelement icon and defines each superelement by selecting the appropriate group. An example is
shown here:
Main Index
CHAPTER 2 75
Figure 2-18
Patran Creation of Superelements by Groups
For this example, the wing box is designated as the residual structure. Therefore, in Patran a
superelement is not created for the wing box. Also note that the SEID can be encoded into the
superelement name by including a .## for example wings.40 will make sure that the SEID
associated with the wings group will be 40.
After the superelements are defined, the superelements are selected when generating the MSC.Nastran
analysis file.
The user can chose to write part superelements or list superelements (SESET) by selecting the
appropriate option on the form.
Main Index

Figure 2-19
Including the Superelements in an Analysis
The resulting input files for both PART superelement and list superelement (SESET) are found in the
installation: /doc/seug/chapter2/freedom/partse-continuous.bdf and seset.bdf.
In a variation of the model, a completely independent bulk data file was created for each component. In
this case the grid ids are discontinuous between the parts. The constituent models are contained in these
files in /doc/seug/chapter2/freedom.
Main Index
CHAPTER 2 77
Filename
SEID
GRID/Element/MPC Ids
freedom-part-aft-fuselage.bdf
30
30000-39999
freedom-part-cabin.bdf
50
50000-59999
freedom-part-engines.bdf
20
20000-29999
freedom-part-nose.bdf
60
60000-69999
freedom-part-tail.bdf
10
10000-19999
freedom-part-wingbox.bdf
Residual
1-9999
freedom-part-wing.bdf
40
40000-49999
The assembly input file, partse-discontinous.bdf, is very simple and uses INCLUDEs to read the
constituent models:
SOL 101
CEND
TITLE = Freedom plane example
SUBTITLE = Created by Lance Proctor, EagleSim
LABEL = discontinuous nodes at interfaces
ECHO = NONE
param,post,-1
param,prtmaxim,yes
SUBCASE 1
SUBTITLE=Default
SPC = 1
LOAD = 1
DISPLACEMENT(plot,SORT1,REAL)=ALL
SPCFORCES(SORT1,REAL)=ALL
STRESS(plot,SORT1,REAL,VONMISES,BILIN)=ALL
BEGIN BULK
include 'part-wingbox.bdf'
BEGIN SUPER = 10
include 'part-tail.bdf'
BEGIN SUPER = 20
include 'part-engines.bdf'
BEGIN SUPER = 30
include 'part-aft-fuselage.bdf'
Main Index

BEGIN SUPER = 40
include 'part-wings.bdf'
BEGIN SUPER = 50
include 'part-cabin.bdf'
BEGIN SUPER = 60
include 'part-nose.bdf'
enddata
Connecting PARTs to Other PARTs

PART Superelements offer a complete range of flexibility to the user when it comes to defining
connections and relocating a PART. Each of these features will be described in the following subsections.
Automatic PART Connections
As the section title suggests, MSC.Nastran has an automatic connection feature to connect PARTs. By
default, the program automatically connects grids from a PART to any coincident grids in any other
PARTs or grids defined in the Main Bulk Data Section. There is no need to be concerned with coordinate
systems on these coincident points; MSC.Nastran automatically connects coincident points, accounting
for differences in the output coordinate systems. These points will be identified as boundary points in the
output from MSC.Nastran. By default, no special effort is required from you to make the connection. If
for one connection all the boundary points belong to PARTs (none of the coincident points are in the
residual structure), then MSC.Nastran will create a new internal grid that is coincident with the boundary
grids and assign the internal grid in the residual structure (or to the lowest connected superelement in a
multi-level tree). These internal points cannot be constrained. If you wish to apply a constraint on this
point, you can define a coincident grid point in the residual structure (or in the lowest connected
superelement for a multi-level tree) and constrain that point, or you can apply constraints in the PARTs
(subject to the limitations described in Chapter 4).
At this point, the user may ask, do the grids have to be exactly coincident, or is there a tolerance? The
answer is yes, MSC.Nastran has provisions to define a close enough tolerance for grids from different
PARTs to be considered coincident. This is defined on the SECONCT entry with the TOL field or on
the SEBULK entry with the TOL field.
SECONCT
SEBULK
Main Index
SEIDA
SEIDB
TOL
LOC
GIDA1
GIDB1
GIDA2
GIDB2
SEID
TYPE
RSEID
METHOD
GIDA3 GIDB3 -etc.-
TOL
LOC
UNITNO
CHAPTER 2 79
TOL
Location tolerance to be used when searching for boundary grid points. (Real;
Default = 10E-5). The search is based on a sphere with a radius of TOL.
Even though the user has an option to change the TOL associated with a search, it is recommended
that the user take measures to ensure that the grids are exactly coincident to ensure that the model will
pass strain energy checks performed by the GROUNDCHECK case control command. The
consequence of connecting non-coincident boundary grids is similar to that of having direct MPC
equations that connect non-coincident grids but do not account for the offset in the equations.
For example, in the freedom sample partse-discontinuous.bdf , the tail to aft fuselage was automatically
connected at 20 grids. A closer examination of the interface shows that the grid ids were, in fact, not the
same, but the coordinates of the grids were coincident, so the models were automatically connected. The
figure below shows the interface grids and the listing is from the .f06 file
Figure 2-20
Exploded View of Automatic Connection Featuring Discontinuous GRID IDs

(model separated for clarity)
0
0
BOUNDARY SEQUENCE ASSIGNMENT TABLE

BOUNDARY
SEQUENCE ID --------------------------------- ASSIGNED TO POINT ID (SUPERELEMENT) -
Main Index
1B
10415 (
10)
30001 (
30)
2B
10416 (
10)
30002 (
30)
3B
10417 (
10)
30003 (
30)

4B
10418 (
10)
30004 (
30)
5B
10419 (
10)
30005 (
30)
6B
10420 (
10)
30006 (
30)
7B
10421 (
10)
30007 (
30)
8B
10422 (
10)
30008 (
30)
9B
10423 (
10)
30009 (
30)
10B
10424 (
10)
30010 (
30)
11B
10425 (
10)
30011 (
30)
12B
10426 (
10)
30012 (
30)
13B
10427 (
10)
30013 (
30)
14B
10428 (
10)
30014 (
30)
15B
10429 (
10)
30015 (
30)
16B
10430 (
10)
30016 (
30)
17B
10431 (
10)
30017 (
30)
18B
10432 (
10)
30018 (
30)
19B
10433 (
10)
30019 (
30)
20B
10434 (
10)
30020 (
30)
Listing 2-14
Freedom Boundary Connections for Discontinuous Grid IDs
User Controlled PART Connections

The automatic connection feature in MSC.Nastran is applicable to many models, but there are also many
situations where the automatic connection feature is inadequate or inappropriate. For example, suppose
there are two plates that are riveted at 25mm intervals, but each have a mesh density of 5mm. It would
be inappropriate to connect the plates at every 5mm, but rather every fifth GRID as depicted in
Figure 2-14. As another example, there may be a residual has coincident nodes with a CBUSH to
simulate a bolted connection as shown in Figure 2-15. When a coincident search finds two grids, which
one should it choose? MSC.Nastran cannot determine this a priori, therefore, a FATAL message will be
issued and the user will have to specify the connection precisely. There are several methods available to
define the connections, and each has its own appeal depending on the situation. These will be described
in the subsequent subsections.
Main Index
CHAPTER 2 81
Figure 2-21
Main Index
Example of Not Connecting Every Coincident GRID

Figure 2-22
Example of Multiple Coincident Nodes
SEBNDRY, SEBULK, SECONCT, SEEXCLD

In the examples in Figure 2-14 and Figure 2-15 it is clear that an automatic scheme cannot cover all cases
of superelement connection. Fortunately, the design of MSC.Nastran allows the user to specify which
grids will be used in the boundary search. This can be done by overriding the default search by using
several methods:
SEBNDRY: The SEBNDRY defines a list of grid points that can be connected between a PART
and one or more PARTs (used to limit the automatic search for coincident points).
SEBULK: Defines boundary search options (sets tolerance for coincident grid point checks)
SECONCT: Explicitly defines the GRIDs and SPOINTs to be connected between PARTs
(override automatic search logic) and allows you to set the tolerance for the coincident point test
SEEXCLD: Provides a list of points in a PART that cannot be connected to one or more other
PARTs (used to limit automatic search logic)
SEBNDRY
Superelement Boundary-Point Definition
Defines a list of grid points in a partitioned superelement for the automatic boundary search between a
specified superelement, or between all other superelements in the model.
Main Index
CHAPTER 2 83
SEBNDRY SEIDA
SEIDB
GIDA1
GIDA2 GIDA3
GIDA7
GIDA8
-etc.-
10
GIDA4
GIDA5
GIDA6
This entry is used to limit the automatic search logic to selected grid points for certain PARTs. Any grid
points listed on this entry are the only grid points in SEIDA to which the automatic logic can connect
grid points in SEIDB.
Description of the fields on this entry:
Field
Contents
SEIDA
Partitioned superelement identification number. (Integer > 0)
SEIDB
Superelement identification. See Remark 2. (Integer > 0 or Character ALL; Default

= ALL)
GIDAi
Identification number of a boundary grid point in superelement SEIDA. (Integer > 0

or THRU; For THRU option, G1 < G2.)
Example:
1
SEBNDRY
400
10
20
30
40
10
In the example, the user instructs MSC.Nastran to search for grid points in superelement 4 that are
coincident to points in PART 400, only grid points 10, 20, 30, and 40 in PART 400 can be used. No other
grid points in superelement 400 can be connected to points in superelement 4, even if they are coincident.
Note that if a restricted list of grid points needs to be listed for PART 4, then a similar entry should be
generated by the user.
SEBULK
Partitional Superelement Connection
Defines superelement boundary search options and a repeated, mirrored, or collector superelement.
Main Index
SEBULK
SEID
TYPE
RSEID
METHOD
TOL
LOC
UNITNO
10

This entry has a number of uses. For purposes of the current section, we will limit the discussion to the
control of the automatic search logic for coincident grid points. In this context, a description of the fields
on this entry follows:
Field
Contents
SEID
superelement number for which this SEBULK entry is being used. There may be
several SEBULK entries required to define each PART in the model.
TYPE
there are several TYPEs allowed. For purposes of the current discussion, only
PRIMARY will be considered (the other TYPEs involve more advanced features)no default value.
RSEID
reference superelement id-also an advanced feature to be discussed later.
METHOD
boundary GRID point search method-can be AUTO (default) or MANUAL. If this is

MANUAL, then SECONCT entries must be used for this PART to make the
connections to the rest of the model.
TOL
location tolerance for coincident grid point test (default = 1.E-5).
LOC
coincident grid point test option for MANUAL connection. Can be YES (default =
grid points must be within TOL, or a FATAL will be issued) or NO (do not test for
coincidence-may be dangerous).
Example:
1
SEBULK
14
PRIMA
RY
1.E-3
AUTO
10
The example instructs MSC.Nastran to use the automatic coincident grid point search logic to find the
attachment points for superelement 14, but to use a tolerance of 1.0E-3 units.
SECONCT
Main Index
Partitioned Superelement Boundary-Point Connection
SECONCT
SEIDA
SEIDB
TOL
LOC
GIDA1
GIDB1
GIDA2
GIDB2
GIDA3
GIDB3
-etc.-
10
CHAPTER 2 85
Alternate Format
1
SECONCT
SEIDA
SEIDB
TOL
LOC
GIDA1
THRU
GIDA2
GIDB1
THRU
GIDB2
10
This entry manually specifies points (GRID or SPOINT) to be connected between two superelements. If
this entry is used and METHOD=AUTO on the SEBULK entry, these points are added to the list of
points found by the automatic logic. If METHOD=MANUAL on the SEBULK, then only these points
are connected between these two superelements.
Field
Contents
SEIDA
Identification number of superelement for connection to SEIDB. (Integer > 0)
SEIDB
Identification number of superelement for connection to SEIDA. (Integer > 0)
TOL
Location tolerance to be used when searching for or checking boundary grid points.
(Real; Default = 10E-5)
LOC
Coincident location check option for manual connection. (Character; YES or

NO; Default = YES)
GIDAi
Identification number of a grid or scalar point in superelement SEIDA, which will

be connected to GIDBi
GIDBi
Identification number of a grid or scalar point in superelement SEIDB, which will

be connected to GIDAi
Example:
SECONCT 10
1001
20
4001
1.0E-4
YES
2222
4444
This entry instructs MSC.Nastran that when connecting PART 10 to superelement 20, the tolerance for
the coincident grid point test will be 1.0E-4 units and the coincident point test will be performed. This
entry also instructs the program to connect point 1001 in PART 10 to point 4001 in superelement 20,
point 1002 in PART 10 to point 4002 in superelement 20, and point 2222 in PART 10 to point 4444 in
superelement 20 (in this context point can apply to sets of either GRID entries or SPOINTs).
SEEXCLD. The format of the SEEXCLD entry follows:
SEEXCLD
Partitioned Superelement Exclusion
Defines grids that will be excluded during the attachment of a partitioned superelement.
Main Index

Format:
1
SEEXCLD
SEIDA
SEIDB
GIDA1
GIDA2
GIDA3
GIDA4
GIDA5
GIDA6
GIDA7
GIDA8
-etc.-
10
This entry is used to limit the automatic search logic. While the SEBNDRY limits the search to selected
grid points, the SEEXCLD excludes grid points from the search. Any grid points listed on this entry are
grid points in SEIDA that the automatic logic cannot connect to grid points in SEIDB.
Field
Contents
SEIDA
SEIDB
Superelement identification. (Integer > 0 or Character = ALL; Default = ALL)
GIDAi
Identification number of a grid in superelement SEIDA to be excluded from

connection to superelement SEIDB. (Integer > 0 or THRU; for THRU option
GIDA1 < GIDA2.)
Example:
SEEXCLD
110
10
45
678
396
The above entry instructs the program to exclude grid points 45, 678, and 396 when performing the
automatic search to connect PART 110 to superelement 10.
Manually Defining Exterior Points for a PART
When defining a PART, additional exterior points can be specified by the use of ASET, BSET, CSET,
BNDFIX, BNDFREE, and/or ASET1, BSET1, CSET1, BNDFIX1, or BNDFREE1 entries to define the
exterior points. Any point in a PART that is listed on either an ASET or ASET1 entry is automatically
made exterior to that PART (whether there is a coincident point in another superelement or not). All six
DOFs of that point are made exterior. The fields on these entries that are used to select DOFs are ignored
when these entries are used in PARTs. If there is no coincident point in any other PART, internal points
are created in the residual structure that are coincident with the selected points, and the matrices for the
PART are connected to these points.
The formats for these entries are very similar, and are grouped here for convenience
Main Index
CHAPTER 2 87
ASET
ID1
C1
ID2
C2
ID3
C3
ID4
C4
ID1
ID2
ID3
ID4
ID5
ID6
ID7
ID8
ID9
ID10
etc.-
10
BSET
CSET
BNDFIX
BNDFIX1
ASET1
BSET1
CSET1
BNDFIX1
BNDFREE1
The ASETi, BSETi, and BNDFIXi entries indicated dof that are fixed during component modes
synthesis, while CSETi, and BNDFREEi indicate dof that are free during component modes synthesis.
These concepts are described in detail in Chapter 9: Introduction to Dynamic Analysis Using
Superelements. Additional description can be found in Table 2-4 on page 101.
Moving and/or Rotating a PART
If the model of a PART is not in the desired location or orientation, it can be repositioned by translating
and/or rotating and/or mirroring the PART into a new orientation before the program performs the
connection search with other components of the model. Repositioning a PART to a new orientation is
accomplished using the SELOC entry in the Main Bulk Data Section. This is performed by simply
defining 3 points on each PART that will provide the proper orientation. Mirroring a PART can be
accomplished by defining a mirror plane with SEMPLN and then using SEBULK to define the PART
to be mirrored. If a PART needs to be mirrored and repositioned, the mirror operation is performed first.
Note that these points do not necessarily have to be a boundary point for connection of the PARTs.
Actually, a POINT bulk data entry can be used to define a geometric point without adding degrees of
freedom to the system.
The SELOC entry is defined as follows:
SELOC
Main Index
Partitioned Superelement Location

Defines a partitioned superelement relocation by listing three noncolinear points in the superelement and
three corresponding points not belonging to the superelement.
Format:
1
SELOC
SEID
PA1
PA2
PA3
PB1
PB2
PB3
10
This entry instructs MSC.Nastran to move and/or rotate a PART (SEID) using three non-colinear GRID
entries in the PART (PA1, PA2, PA3) and three GRID entries or POINTs defined in the Main Bulk Data
Section (PB1, PB2, PB3).
Field
Contents
SEID
Partitioned identification number of the partitioned superelement. (Integer > 0)
PAi
Identification numbers of three noncolinear grids (GRID entry) or points (POINT

entry) which are in the partitioned superelement. (Integer > 0)
PBi
Identification numbers of three grids (GRID entry) or points (POINT entry)

defined in the main Bulk Data Section to which PAi will be aligned. (Integer > 0)
If the user request MSC.Nastran plots of the model using the PLOT case control commands, any PART
that has been translated and/or rotated will appear in its final location. Currently Patran only plots PARTs
in their original location and orientation. Therefore, it is recommended that you use the MSC.Nastran
plotter to view your model after using any SELOC entries. Also, deformed plots are available with PARTs
in their final locations. There is an option (SENOMOVE) on the PLOT command that can be used to
display PARTs in their original location. The jet example below includes the PLOT commands to obtain
final model orientations and deformations.
PART Basic Coordinate System vs. Main Bulk Data Basic Coordinate System
When the SELOC entry is encountered, the program repositions the PART so that grid points PA1-PA3
in the PART are coincident with PB1-PB3 in the main bulk data. This repositioning is performed before
the coincident grid point search logic is performed, thus connections for the PART are based on the
relocated position. When a PART is relocated like this, the basic coordinate system for the PART is
translated and rotated to move the PART into the desired position. Output for the PART is relative to the
part basic coordinate system in relocated orientation.
When a model has PARTs defined, each PART is in its own separate section of the bulk data and are
processed as individual models up to the point when they are assembled. As a default, MSC.Nastran
assumes that the basic coordinate system for all PARTs is identical to that defined in the Main Bulk Data
Section. Therefore, we have a term known as the main bulk data basic coordinate system. As long as the
model is defined using the main bulk data basic coordinate system, no additional transformations are
required. However, if a PART is reoriented and rotated via the SELOC entry, there are additional
transformations required to align everything properly which are accounted for automatically by
MSC.Nastran (see the subsection on loads below for special handling of loads on rotated parts.)
Main Index
CHAPTER 2 89
Example using Jet

Consider the following simplified example of a Jet aircraft will demonstrate translation, rotation, and
mirroring of a few simple PARTs.
Figure 2-23
Simplified Example of a Jet Plane.
In this scenario, the original PARTs were generated by different organizations using different coordinate
systems. The Parts in their initial orientation are shown in Figure 2-17.
Main Index

Figure 2-24
Jet PARTs in Their Original Orientation.
The PARTs for this example and their required geometric manipulation are identified as follows:
SEID
Main Index
Description
Geometric Manipulation
Fuselage
None
Right Inboard Wing
Reposition with SELOC
Right Outboard Wing
CHAPTER 2 91
SEID
Description
Geometric Manipulation
Vertical Tail
Left Horizontal Stabilizer
12
Left Inboard Wing
Mirror with SEBULK / SEMPLN then

reposition with SELOC
13
Left Outboard Wing

15
Right Horizontal Stabilizer

A partial listing of the input file is included here for reference. The full bulk data for this file can be
found in in /doc/seug/chapter2/jet101.dat.
OUTPUT(PLOT)
CSCALE
1.3
PLOTTER NAST
SET 1= ALL
$isometric view
VIEW
210., 25. , 180.
AXES y ,
z,
seplot 1,2,3,4,5
ptitle = plot all primary se in their original positions
find scale origin 1 set 1
plot senomove set 1
$
seupplot 0
ptitle = plot undeformed full model
plot set 1
$
seupplot 0
ptitle = plot deformed full model
plot static deformation set 1 origin 1
Listing 2-15
Partial Input file for Jet101.dat Demonstrating Nastran PLOT Commands.
$
$
position se 2 (inboard right wing)
$
GRID,2001,,1.,1.625,-1.
Main Index

GRID,2002,,1.,0.,-1.
GRID,2003,,1.,-.25,-2.
SELOC,2,19,24,23,2001,2002,2003
$
$
position se 3 (outboard right wing)
$
GRID,2011,,1.,1.75,-5.
GRID,2012,,1.,-1.00,-5.
GRID,2013,,1.,-1.08333,-6.0
SELOC,3,43,49,35,2011,2012,2013
$
$ Define mirror plane with 3 grids, and mirror SE 2, 3, 5
$
GRID,9998,,-5.96-8,1.625, 0.
GRID,9997,,0.,0.,0.
GRID,9996,,2.,0.,2.87-7
SEMPLN,12,PLANE,9998,9997,9996
SEMPLN,13,PLANE,9998,9997,9996
SEMPLN,15,PLANE,9998,9997,9996
SEBULK,12,MIRROR,2,AUTO
$
$
position image se 12 (inboard left wing) after mirroring
$
GRID,3001,,1.,1.625,1.
GRID,3002,,1.,0.,1.
GRID,3003,,1.,-.25,2.
SELOC,12,19,24,23,3001,3002,3003
$
$
position image se 13 (outboard left wing) after mirroring
$
GRID,3011,,1.,1.75,5.
GRID,3012,,1.,-1.00,5.
GRID,3013,,1.,-1.08333,6.0
SELOC,13,43,49,35,3011,3012,3013
Listing 2-16
Partial Input file for Jet101.dat Demonstrating Reposition and Mirror
Body Loads on Rotated Parts

If the repositioning involves rotating the PART, then (as mentioned before) the basic coordinate system
of that PART will be rotated. Thus, all loadings, MPCs, and SPCs go through the same rotation as the
PART-possibly causing unexpected results if you have not planned for this rotation. There are some
loading entries that account for this rotation automatically. Currently, only the GRAV and RFORCE
Main Index
CHAPTER 2 93
entries support this capability, accomplished by the field labeled MB on these entries. The formats for
these two entries are:
1
10
GRAV
SID
N1
N2
N3
MB
10
RFORCE
SID
GID
CID
R1
R2
R3
METHOD
RACC
MB
IDRF
The MB field on these two entries tells the program whether the loading is defined using a coordinate
system defined in the PART (and therefore rotated with the PART), which is the default, or whether the
coordinate system is defined in the Main Bulk Data Section (MB=-1). If the load is defined using a
coordinate system from the Main Bulk Data Section, the loading does not rotate with the PART; rather,
the loading retains the original orientation based on the selected coordinate system in the Main Bulk Data
Section.
The user is cautioned to check the OLOAD resultants carefully for any PARTs that are rotated during a
repositioning or mirroring operation.
Main Index


The use of external superelements has been around for a very long time in many forms. Prior to
MSC.Nastran Version 69.1 many companies would use custom DMAP solutions to generate and
assemble reduced structural matrices, load transformation matrices, and output transformation matrices.
The advantages of external superelements included reduced solution times for large systems (i.e. Space
Shuttle Orbiter, rockets, commercial and military jets, automotive assemblies, etc.), quicker turn around
for design iterations and load cycles, keeping data private / security (material properties, internal details,
airfoil geometry, etc.), and partitioned output (output provided back to only the relevant organization),
had been recognized by the user community and many processes were built around the custom DMAPS.
The classic list superelements (SESET) had the capability for external superelements via the CSUPER
entry. However, this had many limitations and was not as portable across organizations and versions as
the modern external superelement technology which is based on PART superelement techniques. The
discussions in this section, and most of this guide, will be focused on the modern external superelement
technology introduced in MSC.Nastran Version 69.1.
Most of the superelement enhancements that have been incorporated into the standard solution sequences
since Version 69 have been centered around external superelements. For a comprehensive list of these
enhancements, please refer to List of Superelement Enhancements Released Since Version 69 (Ch. 1).
Discussion of 2-step vs. 3-step methods

In MSC.Nastran Version 69.1, the external superelements were first introduced via the means of
PARAM EXTOUT and similar entries. This offered the users access to easy external superelement
generation, assembly, and data recovery in a 3-step method. Subsequently, in MSC.Nastran Version
2004, the process was simplified to a 2-step method using the Case Control command EXTSEOUT.
This section will describe then general procedures required for either method. Although these methods
are very similar, each method has its advantages and users should understand the differences before
selecting the method that is appropriate to their needs.
Main Index
CHAPTER 2 95
Figure 2-25
Schematic of 2-Step External Superelement Process
Another way to visualize the steps involved in the 2-Step External Superelement Process is to review
how the steps are applied to the C-Clamp example. Note that in this case, the residual consists of only
2 grid points and no elements. This is perfectly valid, and in practice it is common to have a residual
structure without any elements (but usually there are several external superelements that are attached to
the residual). This example is provided in the following files: /doc/seug/chapter2/clamp-ext2step1st.dat and clamp-ext2step-2nd.dat
Main Index

Figure 2-26
Main Index
Illustrative Example of the 2-Step Method
CHAPTER 2 97
Figure 2-27
Schematic of 3-Step External Superelement Process
A similar mapping of the 3-Step External Superelement Process onto the C-Clamp example is shown
below. This example is provided in the following files: /doc/seug/chapter2/clamp-ext3step-1st.dat,
clamp-ext3step-2nd.dat, and clamp-ext3step-3rd.dat
Main Index

Figure 2-28
Illustrative Example of the 3-Step External Superelement Process
2-Step method with EXTSEOUT

The 2-Step method of external superelements in MSC.Nastran was introduced in Version 2004. This
method uses case control EXTSEOUT to generate the external matrices, which can include stiffness,
mass, damping, material damping (k4 damping), loads, fluid structure coupling matrices, and output
transformation matrices (OTMs) for use in subsequent data recovery.
In addition to the external matrices, the EXTSEOUT method has options to generate bulk data entries
necessary for the bookkeeping and assembly during the assembly run. These automatically generated
entries are placed in the .asm file described in the EXTSEOUT Case Control command.
The EXTSEOUT case control command provides a convenient method to define the features that the user
wants to activate during the superelement reduction process for the 2-Step method.
Main Index
CHAPTER 2 99
Depending on the output option or user request with EXTBULK, additional information will be put in
the standard punch (.pch) file. For a discussion of output options, please refer to Output Formats and
Considerations (Sec. ).
Note:
EXTBULK Processing
The punch file generated when EXTBULK is requested provides a self-documenting file
which defines the GRIDs, boundary dof (ASET), modal dof (QSET), PLOTELs, and
coordinate systems (CORD2x) for the reduced matrices. The data generated in the .pch file
is required for the assembly run processing of the DMIGPCH and MATOP4 options;
however, the data in the .pch file is ignored in the assembly run because all of the data is
embedded in the matrices that are stored on the database or output2 files.
Output Transformation Matrix (OTM) Limitations

For the 2-Step process, OTMs are created for displacements, constraint forces (SPC forces), element
forces, and element stresses and used in the assembly run to calculate the external superelement data
recovery. Displacements and SPC forces are always calculated as requested, BUT CARE MUST BE
TAKEN when specifying output for STRESS and FORCE. Item Code Description (Ch. 6) in the MSC
Nastran Quick Reference Guide must be consulted to determine if an OTM is possible for the output
request. The items available for OTM output are designated with at (1) which has this definition:
Data for components marked with the symbol (1) are included in the data block MES and MEF
outputs from modules DRMH1/DRMH3 and DRMS1. DRMH1/DRMH3 are used in

EXTSEOUT Case Control processing. (See MD Nastran DMAP Programmers Guide.)
As an example, consider the stress OTMs for a QUAD4 element. A review of the Item Code
Descriptions reveals that there are four QUAD4 element types, but only one is available for OTM
calculations:
Table 2-3
CQUAD4
Element
Type
33
QUAD4 Element Types and their Availability for OTM Processing
Description
QUAD4 Linear Center
Available
for
OTM?
YES
Comment
Center output only.
Case Control request: STRESS(CENTER)
90
QUAD4 Nonlinear
NO
Nonlinear analysis will not generate OTMs
95
QUAD4 Composite
NO
Composites will not produce OTMS.
144
QUAD4 Linear Corner
NO
STRESS(CORNER) will not produce any

OTMS
The following snippet from Item Code Description (Ch. 6) in the MSC Nastran Quick Reference Guide
shows the superscript of (1) and its availability for OTM processing.
Main Index

Figure 2-29
Snippet of Stress Item Code Descriptions from Quick Reference Guide
Because of the OTM limitations, some users still prefer the flexibility of the 3-Step method. The 3-Step
method also supports xdb output.
Main Index
CHAPTER 2 101
3-Step method with PARAMs.

The 3-Step External Superelement Process requires much more user input. For example, the asm file
is not automatically generated in the 3-Step process.
The additional information in the .pch file is as follows:
Table 2-4
Entries Generated in the .pch File for the 3-Step Method

Punch File Entry
Purpose
BEGIN SUPER = extid
Not generated in 3-step method
GRID
CORDix
PLOTEL
ASET, QSET
Not Generated in 3-step method
SPOINT
Not Generated in 3-step method
DMIG matrices
If DMIGSFIX is blank, the following matrices are output
(if DMIGPCH output is specified)
KAAX (boundary stiffness matrix)
NOTE: if matrices are null, they will not be

generated. (For example, BAAX will not
be generated for a static analysis.)
MAAX (boundary mass matrix)

BAAX (boundary viscous damping matrix)
K4AAX (boundary structural damping matrix)
PAX (boundary load matrix)
AAX (boundary fluid structure coupling matrix)
DMI matrices
(if DMIGPCH or MATOP4 is specified)
DMI Matrices are output associated with the OTMs

required for data recovery of the external superelement in
the assembly run.
MUG1, MUG1O (Displacement OTMs)
MQG1, MQG1O (SPCForce OTMs)
MES1, MES1O (Element Stress OTMs)
MEF1, MEF1O (Element Force OTMs)
DTI tables
DTI tables are output associated with the OTMs required

for data recovery of the external superelement in the
assembly run.
TUG1, TUG1O (Displacement OTMs)
TQG1, TQG1O (SPCForce OTMs)
TES1, TES1O (Element Stress OTMs)
TEF1, TEF1O (Element Force OTMs)
Main Index

When inputting the matrices for a reduced external superelement (SEBULK), there are five options that
can be selected using the parameter EXTOUT. EXTOUT must be placed in the Case Control Section
above any subcase or in the main Bulk Data Section. The options for Step 1 (see the table at the end of
this discussion) are as follows:
Table 2-5
PARAM EXTOUT
PARAM EXTOUT
Behavior
MATRIXDB
Stores boundary matrices on database (.MASTER and .DBALL files)
DMIGDB
Stores boundary matrices on database (.MASTER and .DBALL files)
DMIGOP2
Writes boundary matrices to an OUTPUT2 file.
DMIGPCH
Writes boundary matrices to the punch file (.pch) in DMIG format.
MATRIXOP4
Writes boundary matrices to an OUTPUT4 file.
The options for Steps 2 and 3 are outline in Using PARAM,EXTOUT (3-Step) External Superelements
in Using PARAM,EXTOUT (3-Step) External Superelements.
Definition of External Points

In order to use external superelements, the user must define the interface points to the superelement, or
the external points. The considerations that go into selecting the interface points include: physical
interfaces (bolt locations, strut attachments, etc.), locations for load application, and number of dynamic
dof necessary to adequately define the dynamic response of the external superelement in the assembled
environment.
Physical External DOF
The selection of physical interfaces is the most logical and common physical dof that are selected for
external superelements. However, other considerations can lead the user to define additional points
such as dof that will be used for clearance calculations or dof that will be used to apply loads. In any
Main Index
CHAPTER 2 103
event, the definition of physical dof for use in external superelements can be accomplished with several
different bulk data entries. These are summarized here:
Figure 2-30
Bulk Data Entries used to Define Physical DOF of External Superelements

Bulk Data Entry
Behavior
ASET, ASET1
Define physical dof to be retained in a static condensation. By

default, these dof are part of the BSET and considered fixed
during component modes synthesis (1)
BSET, BSET1
Define physical dof to be retained in a static condensation.

These points are fixed during component modes synthesis(1)
CSET, CSET1
Define physical dof to be retained in a static condensation.

These points are free during component modes synthesis
BNDFIX, BNDFIX1
Same as BSET, BSET1
BNDFREE, BNDFREE1
Same as CSET, CSET1
Table Notes:
(1)
If there are no BSETi/BNDFIXi or CSETi/BNDFREE/BNDFRE1 entries present, all a-set points

are considered fixed during component mode analysis. If there are only BSETi/BNDFIXi entries
present, any a-set degrees-of-freedom not listed are placed in the free boundary set (c-set). If there
are only CSETi/BNDFREE/BNDFRE1 entries present or both BSETi/BNDFIXi and
CSETi/BNDFREE/BNDFRE1 entries present, the c-set degrees-of-freedom are defined by the
CSETi/BNDFREE/BNDFRE1 entries, and any remaining a-set points are placed in the b-set.
The ASET/ASET1,
BSET/BSET1, CSET/CSET1, BNDFIX/BNDFIX1, and

BNDFREE/BNDFREE1 entries follow a similar format that list grid numbers and component
degrees of freedom associated with the set. The BNDFIX/BNDFIX1 entries are described here, the other
entries are similar and full descriptions can be found in the Quick Reference Guide.
1
ASET
ID1
C1
ID2
C2
ID3
C3
ID4
C4
BSET
CSET
BNDFIX
BNDFIX1
Main Index
10

ASET1
ID1
ID2
ID3
ID8
ID9
ID10
etc.-
ID4
ID5
ID6
ID7
BSET1
CSET1
BNDFIX1
BNDFREE1
Where C or Ci indicate a dof direction and IDi is a grid number.

Dynamic External DOF
As detailed in the Dynamic Reduction Component Modes Synthesis (Sec. ) static condensation of
physical points is usually inadequate to capture the dynamic behavior of a superelement. Thus, the static
condensation is augmented with Component Modes Synthesis (CMS) and residual vectors. To
accommodate these additional dof, there are a few relevant entries:
Entries Related to Dynamic DOF
Description / Behavior
SPOINT
In conjunction with QSET/QSET1, A degree of freedom

available to store Component Modes and/or Residual
Vectors
QSET, QSET1
Defines the SPOINT IDs that are used to store CMS and/or
Residual Vector dof
EXTSEOUT EXTBULK=MAN
For the .asm file: generate an SEBULK entry that specifies

MANUAL as the method for searching boundary points,
and an SECONCT entry that defines connections for
boundary grid and scalar points.
EXTSEOUT EXTBULK=MANQ

AUTO as the method for searching boundary points, and an
SECONCT entry that defines connections for boundary
scalar points.
EXTSEOUT EXTBULK=AUTO
Automatically generate SPOINT/QSET entries.

AUTO as the method for searching boundary points, and an
SECONCT entry that defines connections for boundary
scalar points.
PARAM,AUTOQSET,YES
Main Index
Similar to EXTSEOUT EXTBULK=AUTO
CHAPTER 2 105
The QSET and QSET1 entries follow a similar format to the physical dof format:
1
QSET
ID1
C1
ID2
C2
ID3
C3
ID4
C4
QSET1
ID1
ID2
ID3
ID4
ID5
ID6
ID7
ID8
ID9
ID10
-etc.-
10
If either PARAM,AUTOQSET,YES, or EXTSEOUT EXTBULK=AUTO are specified, SPOINTs are

automatically generated internally to represent the Q-set DOFs. The IDs of these SPOINTs are of the
form 9sssnnnn where sss is the superelement ID seid specified by the EXTID keyword, and nnnn is a
mode number. Both sss and nnnn will have leading zeros inserted in them to ensure that sss is a threedigit number and nnnn is a four-digit number. Thus, for example, the Q-set DOF corresponding to the
8th mode of superelement ID 5 would be represented by an SPOINT with an automatically generated ID
of 90050008, while the Q-set DOF corresponding to the 50th mode of superelement ID 25 would be
represented by an SPOINT with an automatically generated ID of 90250050.
Because of the preceding numbering scheme, the superelement ID seid specified by the EXTID keyword
must necessarily not exceed 999 when PARAM,AUTOQSET,YES is specified. The program terminates
the job with a User Fatal Message if this condition is not met.
Further, because of the preceding numbering scheme, the user should ensure that, when
PARAM,AUTOQSET,YES is specified, the IDs of the grid and scalar points of the external
superelement do not conflict with the automatically generated SPOINT IDs of the Q-set DOFs. The
program terminates the job with a User Fatal Message if this condition is not met.
Creating External Superelements with EXTSEOUT

The EXTSEOUT case control command
The EXTSEOUT case control command provides a convenient method to define the features that the
user wants to activate during the superelement reduction process for the 2-Step method. The format of
the command is as follows:
Main Index

EXTSEOUT
STIFFNESS MASS DAMPING K4DAMP LOADS FSCOUP
MAN
ASMBULK = MANQ EXTBULK EXTID = seid
AUTO
DMIGSFIX = cccccc
EXTID
(2-1)
MATOP4 (or MATRIXOP4) = unit
MATDB (or MATRIXDB)

DMIGDB
DMIGOP2 = unit
DMIGPCH
Example(s):
EXTSEOUT
EXTSEOUT(DMIGOP2=26)
EXTSEOUT(ASMBULK EXTID=200)
EXTSEOUT(ASMBULK EXTBULK EXTID=100)
EXTSEOUT(ASMBULK=AUTO EXTBULK EXTID=100)
EXTSEOUT(ASMBULK=MANQ EXTID=10 DMIGDB)
EXTSEOUT(ASMBULK EXTID=100 DMIGOP2=26)
EXTSEOUT(ASMBULK EXTID=100 DMIGPCH)
EXTSEOUT(ASMBULK EXTID=100 DMIGSFIX=XSE100 DMIGPCH)
EXTSEOUT(ASMBULK EXTID=200 DMIGSFIX=EXTID DMIGPCH)
EXTSEOUT(ASMBULK EXTID=100 MATOP4=26)
.
Describer
Main Index
Meaning
STIFFNESS
Store the boundary stiffness matrix.
Describer
Meaning
STIFFNESS
Store the boundary stiffness matrix.
MASS
Store the boundary mass matrix.
DAMPING
Store the boundary viscous damping matrix.
K4DAMP
Store the boundary structural damping matrix.
LOADS
Store the boundary static loads matrix.
FSCOUP
Store the boundary fluid-structure coupling matrix.
ASMBULK or
ASMBULK = MAN
Generate Bulk Data entries for use in a subsequent superelement assembly

process and store them on the assembly punch file (.asm). This data, which
is used in the main bulk data portion of a subsequent assembly job,
includes an SEBULK entry that specifies MANUAL as the method for
searching boundary points, and an SECONCT entry that defines
connections for boundary grid and scalar points.
CHAPTER 2 107
Describer
Meaning
ASMBULK = MANQ
Similar to the ASMBULK = MAN option, except that the generated

SECONCT entry defines connections not only for boundary grid and
scalar points, but also for Q-set points. This allows the user to have control
over the Q-set points of the external superelement in the subsequent
assembly job.
ASMBULK = AUTO
Generate Bulk Data entries for use in a subsequent superelement assembly

process, and store them on the assembly punch file (.asm). This data,
which is to be used in the main bulk data portion of a subsequent assembly
job, includes an SEBULK entry that specifies AUTO as the method for
searching boundary points, and an SECONCT entry that defines
connections for boundary scalar points.
EXTBULK
Generate Bulk Data entries related to the external superelement and store
them on the standard punch file (.pch). This data is used in the BEGIN
SUPER portion of the bulk data of a subsequent assembly job. EXTBULK
need not be specified if DMIGPCH or MATOP4 (see the following
descriptions) is specified.
Note that, in general, the EXTBULK keyword is not required and is
provided solely for user convenience. In the absence of EXTBULK and
the associated output on the standard punch file resulting from it, the
subsequent assembly job will retrieve the required data for the external
superelement from the medium on which the boundary matrices are stored.
Main Index
EXTID=seid
seid (integer > 0) is the superelement ID to be used on the SEBULK and

SECONCT (if applicable) Bulk Data entries stored on the assembly punch
file (.asm) if ASMBULK is specified, and in the BEGIN SUPER Bulk
Data entry stored on the standard punch file (.pch) if EXTBULK or
DMIGPCH is specified.
DMIGSFIX = cccccc
cccccc is the suffix (up to six characters) to be employed in the names of

the DMIG matrices stored on the standard punch file (.pch) if the
DMIGPCH option is specified.
DMIGSFIX = EXTID
The seid defined by the EXTID keyword is the suffix to be employed in

the names of the DMIG matrices stored on the standard punch file (.pch)
if the DMIGPCH option is specified.
MATDB
(or MATRIXDB)
(Default)
Store the boundary matrices and other information on the database.
DMIGDB
Similar to MATDB (or MATRIXDB) except that the boundary matrices

are stored as DMIG Bulk Data entries on the database.

Describer
Meaning
DMIGOP2 = unit
Store the boundary matrices as DMIG Bulk Data entries on an .op2 file
whose Fortran unit number is given by unit (Integer > 0).
DMIGPCH
Store the boundary matrices as DMIG Bulk Data entries on the standard
punch file (.pch).
MATOP4 = unit
Store the boundary matrices on an .op4 file whose Fortran unit number is
(or MATRIXOP4 = unit) given by unit (Integer > 0).
The various remarks about the entries above can be found in the EXTSEOUT case control command in
the Quick Reference Guide.
ASMBULK
The ASMBULK keyword in the EXTSEOUT case control command provides a convenience to the user
by automatically generating bulk data entries necessary for the bookkeeping and assembly during the
assembly run. The following table summarizes the entries generated by specifying ASMBULK:
Table 2-6
Entries Generated in the .asm File When ASMBULK is Requested
ASMBULK Generated Entries
Purpose
GRID
GRID points associated with the boundary points and PLOTEL

entries.
CORD2x
All coordinate frames necessary to define the GRID placement

(CP) and displacement (CD) coordinate frames
PLOTEL
All PLOTEL entries defined in the reduction run. These are often
used to view the outline modal or dynamic displacements in an
assembly run.
Main Index
CHAPTER 2 109
Table 2-6
Entries Generated in the .asm File When ASMBULK is Requested
ASMBULK Generated Entries
Purpose
SEBULK
Defines the EXTID as an External superelement and defines the

connection method (automatic or manual) between the external
superelement and the residual structure during the assembly run.
Also defines the fortran unit number to use when reading an op2
or op4 file.
SECONCT
The SECONCT entry is used to define the grid pairings used in

the assembly run. There are options to output actual grid pairs or
use the automatic option. There are also pairings available for
SPOINTs in dynamic analysis
EXTID (not a bulk data entry)
The user defined SEID that will be assigned to the external

superelement this will be used in the SEBULK and SECONCT
entries
SPOINT
For modal reductions using component modes synthesis (CMS),

the modal dof are stored in SPOINTs. These can be manually or
automatically generated by the program depending on user
options generated with the MANQ option only.
EXTBULK
The EXTBULK keyword on the EXTSEOUT case control command generates bulk data entries related
to the external superelement and stores them on the standard punch file (.pch). This data is used in the
BEGIN SUPER portion of the bulk data of a subsequent assembly job. The data generated by EXTBULK
is necessary for DMIGPCH and MATOP4 media formats, but is not used by the other media formats.
However, the data generated in the punch file when EXTBULK is specified provides a self-documenting
file which defines the GRIDs, boundary dof (ASET), modal dof (QSET), PLOTELs, and coordinate
systems (CORD2x) for the reduced matrices.
Table 2-7
Entries Generated in the .pch File When EXTBULK is Requested

Punch File Entry
Purpose
BEGIN SUPER = extid
Define the bulk data delimeter for the external superelement and
define the SEID
GRID
GRID points associated with the boundary points and PLOTEL

entries.
CORDix
All coordinate frames necessary to define the GRID placement

(CP) and displacement (CD) coordinate frames
PLOTEL
All PLOTEL entries defined in the reduction run. These are often
used to view the outline modal or dynamic displacements in an
assembly run.
Main Index

Table 2-7

Punch File Entry
Purpose
ASET, BSET, CSET, BNDFIX, BNDFREE,

ASET1, BSET1, CSET1, BNDFIX1,
BNDFREE1, QSET, QSET1
Entries associated with the boundary definitions for the external

superelement.
SPOINT
For modal reductions using component modes synthesis (CMS),

the modal dof are stored in SPOINTs. These can be manually or
automatically generated by the program depending on user
options.
Main Index
CHAPTER 2 111
Table 2-7

Punch File Entry
DMIG matrices
(if DMIGPCH output is specified)
NOTE: depending on the user request, not all
matrices will be generated.
Purpose
If DMIGSFIX is blank, the following matrices are output
KAAX (boundary stiffness matrix)
MAAX (boundary mass matrix)
BAAX (boundary viscous damping matrix)
K4AAX (boundary structural damping matrix)
PAX (boundary load matrix)
AAX (boundary fluid structure coupling matrix)
If DMIGSFIX = integer (SEID of external superelement)

Kseid (boundary stiffness matrix)
Mseid (boundary mass matrix)
Bseid (boundary viscous damping matrix)
K4seid (boundary structural damping matrix)
Pseid (boundary load matrix)
Aseid (boundary fluid structure coupling matrix)
(where seid is the superelement id)

If DMIGSFIX = label (label of external superelement, limited to
6 characters)
Kcccccc (boundary stiffness matrix)
Mcccccc (boundary mass matrix)
Bcccccc (boundary viscous damping matrix)
K4cccccc (boundary structural damping matrix)
Pcccccc (boundary load matrix)
Acccccc (boundary fluid structure coupling matrix)
(where cccccc is the user specified label)

DMI matrices
(1)
DMI Matrices are output associated with the OTMs required for
data recovery of the external superelement in the assembly run.
MUG1, MUG1O (Displacement OTMs)
MQG1, MQG1O (SPCForce OTMs)
MES1, MES1O (Element Stress OTMs)
MEF1, MEF1O (Element Force OTMs)
Main Index

Table 2-7

Punch File Entry
DTI tables
(1)
Purpose
DTI tables are output associated with the OTMs required for data
recovery of the external superelement in the assembly run.
TUG1, TUG1O (Displacement OTMs)
TQG1, TQG1O (SPCForce OTMs)
TES1, TES1O (Element Stress OTMs)
TEF1, TEF1O (Element Force OTMs)
Table Notes:
1. The MUG1, MQG1, MES1, MEF1, TUG1, TQG1, TES1, and TEF1 matrix and table are associated with
the free boundary displacement, spcforce, stress, and force OTMs. The MUG1O, MQG1O, MES1O,
MEF1O, TUG1O, TQG1O, TES1O, and TEF1O matrix and table are fixed boundary , spcforce, stress,
and force OTMs. For more information on free boundary vs fixed boundary solutions, refer to
Manual Solution of a Small Superelement Example (Ch. 1)
Main Index
CHAPTER 2 113
Output Formats and Considerations

The EXTSEOUT case control command, and the PARAM,EXTOUT parameter provide many output
media format options. These are summarized in the following table:
Table 2-8
External Superelement Media Format Options
EXTSEOUT format
Or
PARAM,EXTOUT
MATRIXDB or MATDB
DMIGDB
DMIGOP2
Behavior
Notes
Stores boundary matrices

and OTMS on the database
(.MASTER and .DBALL
files)
1. Machine Precision
Stores boundary matrices

and OTMS on the database
(.MASTER and .DBALL
files)
Writes boundary matrices

and OTMS to an OUTPUT2
file.
2. Run with SCR=NO
2. Run with SCR=NO
2. ASSIGN OUTPUT2
a. EXTSEOUT specify DMIGOP2=unit
b. EXTOUT specify PARAM,EXTUNIT
3. Run with SCR=NO if data recovery in step 3
is desired.
DMIGPCH
Writes boundary matrices to

the punch file (.pch) in
DMIG format.
1. Loss of precision in DMIG format

2. Not available for data recovery with 3-step
method
OTMs are written to the

punch file in DMI and DTI
format.
MATOP4 or MATRIXOP4
Writes boundary matrices to

an OUTPUT4 file.
OTM Matrices are
OUTPUT4, OTM Tables
are punched.
1. ASSIGN OUTPUT4
a. FORMATTED (ASCII)
b. UNFORMATTED (Binary)
2. Machine Precision if UNFORMATTED
3. FORMATTED can specify precision with
PARAM,OP4DIGS (default=15)
4. Works with PARAM,EXTOUT,
MATRIXOP (but not MATOP4)
5. Run with SCR=NO if data recovery is
desired in 3-Step process.
Main Index

Using EXTSEOUT (2-Step) External Superelements

The use of the 2-Step external superelement option is dependent upon the media format chosen. The
following subsections describe the generic setup for each media option. Specific example problems for
each media format are included in CHAPTER 12.
Main Index
CHAPTER 2 115
MATRIXDB/MATDB and DMIGDB formats

The following table summarizes representative entries required for each step of the 2-step external
superelement using the MATRIXDB or DMIGDB options:
Main Index

Table 2-9
External Superelement 2-Step Procedure with MATRIXDB or DMIGDB

Step
Required Entries
STEP 1 Matrix
Generations
Command Line
Filename used for

example: step1.dat
SCR=NO
SEID=10 is used for

example
Save the database for subsequent use in step 2
Case Control
Define the EXTSEOUT parameters (representative entry shown):
EXTSEOUT(ASMBULK EXTID=10)
OR
EXTSEOUT(ASMBULK EXTID=10 DMIGDB)
Define output requests for data recovery in Step 2 (these entries are optional, or
may use a SET ID instead of ALL)

DISP=ALL
SPCF=ALL
STRESS=ALL
FORCE=ALL
Bulk Data
Parameters for defining physical / dynamic boundary dof:
ASET/ASET1, BSET/BSET1, CSET/CSET1, BNDFIX/BNDFIX1,

BNDFREE/BNDFREE1, QSET/QSET1
DOF to store CMS and RESVEC dof
SPOINT
Main Index
CHAPTER 2 117
Table 2-9
External Superelement 2-Step Procedure with MATRIXDB or DMIGDB

Step
STEP 2 Assembly and

Data Recovery Model
Filename used for
example: step2.dat
Required Entries
File Management Section
Assign and locate the database(s) from Step 1
ASSIGN SE10M=step1.MASTER
ASSIGN SE10D=step1.DBALL
DBLOCATE DB=(EXTDB)CONVERT(SEID=10),
LOGICAL=SE10M
where:
step1.MASTER is the database from the Step 1. xxx is the superelement
identification number given to the partitioned Bulk Data Section for the external
superelement.
Case Control
Define output requests for data recovery (these entries are optional, or may use a
SET ID instead of ALL). Only these requests will be honored for the external
superelement:
DISP=ALL
SPCF=ALL
STRESS=ALL
FORCE=ALL
Bulk Data Entries
Include the assembly file generated in Step 1
INCLUDE step1.asm
Main Index

DMIGOP2
superelement using the DMIGOP2 option:
Main Index
CHAPTER 2 119
Table 2-10
External Superelement 2-Step Procedure with DMIGOP2
Step
STEP 1 Matrix
Generations
Filename used for
example: step1.dat
SEID=10 is used for
example
Output2 unit 32 is used
for example
Required Entries
Define the output2 filename and unit number
ASSIGN OUTPUT2=se10.op2 unit=32 delete(1)

Case Control
EXTSEOUT(ASMBULK EXTID=10 DMIGOP2=32)

Define output requests for data recovery in Step 2 (these entries are optional,
or may use a SET ID instead of ALL)

DISP=ALL
SPCF=ALL
STRESS=ALL
FORCE=ALL
Bulk Data

SPOINT
Main Index

Table 2-10
External Superelement 2-Step Procedure with DMIGOP2
Step
STEP 2 Assembly
and Data Recovery
Model
Filename used for
example: step2.dat
Inputt2 unit =32 is used
for example
Required Entries
Assign the Output2 file from Step 1
ASSIGN INPUTT2=se10.op2unit=32(2)
Case Control
Define output requests for data recovery (these entries are optional, or may
use a SET ID instead of ALL). Only these requests will be honored for the
external superelement:
DISP=ALL
SPCF=ALL
STRESS=ALL
FORCE=ALL
Bulk Data Entries
Include the assembly file generated in Step 1
INCLUDE step1.asm(2)
NOTES
1. The op2 filename must be different than the base input filename (i.e. cannot be step1.op2) because
the post processing output2 unit is autoassigned.
2. The SEBULK entry UNITNO field that is generated in the .asm file will use the unit number
defined in the EXTSEOUT entry in Step1. If the user wants to change the inputt2 unit number in
Step 2, it must be changed on both the ASSIGN statement and the SEBULK entry in the .asm file.
DMIGPCH
superelement using the DMIGPCH option:
Main Index
CHAPTER 2 121
Main Index

Table 2-11
External Superelement 2-Step Procedure with DMIGPCH
Step
STEP 1 Matrix
Generations
Filename used for
example: step1.dat
SEID=10 is used
for example
Required Entries
Case Control
EXTSEOUT(ASMBULK EXTID=10 DMIGPCH DMIGSFIX=S10)

Define output requests for data recovery in Step 2 (these entries are
optional, or may use a SET ID instead of ALL)

DISP=ALL
SPCF=ALL
STRESS=ALL
FORCE=ALL
Bulk Data

SPOINT
Main Index
CHAPTER 2 123
Table 2-11
External Superelement 2-Step Procedure with DMIGPCH
Step
STEP 2
Assembly and
Data Recovery
Model
Filename used for
example: step2.dat
Required Entries
Case Control
Bring in the matrices generated in Step1. In this example it is assumed
that all possible matrices were generated. Since DMIGSFIX=S10 in Step

1, the S10 is used for each matrix:
K2GG=KS10
M2GG=MS10
B2GG=BS10
K42GG=K4S10
A2GG=AS10
P2G=PS10
Define output requests for data recovery (these entries are optional, or
may use a SET ID instead of ALL). Only these requests will be honored
for the external superelement:
DISP=ALL
SPCF=ALL
STRESS=ALL
FORCE=ALL
Bulk Data Entries
Include the assembly file and dmig (punch) file
INCLUDE step1.asm
INCLUDE step1.pch(2)
NOTES
1. The .pch file must be at the END of the main bulk data section since it has the BEGIN
SUPER entry. If it is placed at the beginning or in the middle of the main bulk data
section, either FATAL messages or unpredictable results will occur. If multiple .pch
files are included, then they must all be grouped at the end of the main bulk data section.
Main Index

MATRIXOP4 / MATOP4
superelement using the MATRIXOP4 option:
Main Index
CHAPTER 2 125
Table 2-12
External Superelement 2-Step Procedure with MATRIXOP4
Step
STEP 1 Matrix
Generations
Filename used for
example: step1.dat
SEID=10 is used for
example
Output4 unit 33 is used
for example
Required Entries
ASSIGN OUTPUT4=se10.op4 unit=33 delete

Case Control
EXTSEOUT(ASMBULK EXTID=10 MATRIXOP4=33)

Define output requests for data recovery in Step 2 (these entries are optional, or
may use a SET ID instead of ALL)

DISP=ALL
SPCF=ALL
STRESS=ALL
FORCE=ALL
Bulk Data

SPOINT
Main Index

Table 2-12
External Superelement 2-Step Procedure with MATRIXOP4
Step
STEP 2 Assembly and
Data Recovery Model
Filename used for
example: step2.dat
Required Entries
Assign the output4 file from Step 1
ASSIGN INPUTT4=se10.op4unit=33(1)
Case Control
Define output requests for data recovery (these entries are optional, or may use a
SET ID instead of ALL). Only these requests will be honored for the external
superelement:
DISP=ALL
SPCF=ALL
STRESS=ALL
FORCE=ALL
Bulk Data Entries
INCLUDE step1.asm(1)
INCLUDE step1.pch(2)
NOTES
1. The SEBULK entry UNITNO field that is generated in the .asm file will use the unit number defined
in the EXTSEOUT entry in Step1. If the user wants to change the inputt2 unit number in Step 2, it
must be changed on both the ASSIGN statement and the SEBULK entry in the .asm file.
2. The .pch file must be at the END of the main bulk data section since it has the BEGIN SUPER entry.
If it is placed at the beginning or in the middle of the main bulk data section, either FATAL messages
or unpredictable results will occur. If multiple .pch files are included, then they must all be grouped
at the end of the main bulk data section.
Using PARAM,EXTOUT (3-Step) External Superelements

The 3-Step external superelement method requires more user input since the .asm file is not automatically
generated for step 1. The Step 2 solution is capable of OTM data recovery, but there is also the option to
save the boundary solution so that a more complete data recovery can be done using the database stored
during Step 1. Also note that the external superelement boundary solution is only available for storage
on the MSC.Nastran database (.MASTER, .DBALL) using the MATRIXDB (MATDB), or DMIGDB
formats. In addition to the database, the user could specify that the boundary solution be stored on and
Output2 file with the DMIGOP2 format. The following sections outline the steps and entries necessary
to accomplish the 3-Step method.
Main Index
CHAPTER 2 127
Step 1 Creating External Superelement
Main Index

Step 1 Output Format

MATRIXDB (or MATDB) and
DMIGDB
Filename used for example:
step1.dat
SEID=10 is used for example
Required Entries
Command Line
Save the database for subsequent use in step 2 and 3
SCR=NO
Bulk Data
Parameters for creating external SE:
PARAM,EXTOUT,MATRIXDB
Or
PARAM, EXTOUT,DMIGDB

SPOINT
DMIGOP2 Option
step1.dat
Output unit 32 is used for example
Command Line
SCR=NO

Command Line
Save the database for subsequent use in step 2 and 3
SCR=NO
Bulk Data
PARAM,EXTOUT,DMIGOP2

SPOINT
Main Index
CHAPTER 2 129
Step 1 Output Format
Required Entries
DMIGPCH Option
Command Line

step1.dat
Bulk Data
PARAM,EXTOUT,DMIGPCH

SPOINT
MATRIXOP4 Option
step1.dat
Output unit 32 is used for example
Command Line
SCR=NO
Bulk Data
PARAM,EXTOUT,MATRIXOP

SPOINT
Main Index

Step 2 Attaching External Superelement: Residual Solution
Main Index
CHAPTER 2 131
Step 2 Attachment
If STEP 1 was MATRIXDB,
MATDB, or DMIGDB
step2.dat
Required Entries
Assign the step1 database and locate the data
DBLOCATE DB=(EXTDB)CONVERT(SEID=10),
LOGICAL=SE10M
where:
step1.MASTER is the database from the Step 1. xxx is the
superelement identification number given to the partitioned
Bulk Data Section for the external superelement.
Bulk Data Entries
Define output media for SEID boundary deflections.
PARAM,EXTDROUT,MATRIXDB(1)
Or
PARAM,EXTDROUT,DMIGDB(1)
Or
PARAM,EXTDROUT,DMIGOP2(2)
Define data relevant to external superelement
GRID
CORDij
PLOTEL
SPOINT
SEBULK
SECONCT
Main Index

Step 2 Attachment
If STEP 1 was DMIGOP2
Required Entries

step2.dat
Store boundary displacements

on output2 unit 33
ASSIGN OUTPUT2=se10bndry.op2 unit=33
ASSIGN INPUTT2=se10.op2 unit=32

Bulk Data Entries
PARAM,EXTDROUT,MATRIXDB(1)
Or
PARAM,EXTDROUT,DMIGDB(1)
Or
PARAM,EXTDROUT,DMIGOP2(2)
PARAM,EXTDRUNT,33
GRID
CORDij
PLOTEL
SPOINT
SEBULK
SECONCT
Main Index
CHAPTER 2 133
Step 2 Attachment
Required Entries
If STEP1 was DMIGPCH

step2.dat
Case Control

on output2 unit 33
Attach the matrices generated in Step1. In this example it is

assumed that all possible matrices were generated.
K2GG=KAAX
M2GG=MAAX
B2GG=BAAX
K42GG=K4AAX
A2GG=AAX
P2G=PAX
Bulk Data Entries
Define data relevant to external superelement connection
GRID
CORDij
PLOTEL
SPOINT
SEBULK
SECONCT
BEGIN SUPER=10
GRID
CORDij
PLOTEL
SPOINT
INCLUDE step1.pch
Main Index

Step 2 Attachment
Required Entries
If STEP 1 was MATRIXOP4 File Management Section

step2.dat
ASSIGN INPUTT4=se10.op4 unit=32

Define data relevant to external superelement connection
GRID
CORDij
PLOTEL
SPOINT
SEBULK (specify TYPE=EXTOP4 and UNITNO)
SECONCT
BEGIN SUPER=10
GRID
CORDij
PLOTEL
SPOINT
INCLUDE step1.pch
Main Index
CHAPTER 2 135
Step 2 Storing Boundary Solution for Step 3

Step 2 Save Boundary
Solution for Step 3
Store Boundary Solution as:
MATRIXDB, MATDB, or
DMIGDB
step2.dat
Required Entries
Command Line
SCR=NO
Bulk Data Entries
PARAM,EXTDROUT,MATRIXDB
Or
PARAM,EXTDROUT,DMIGDB
Store Boundary solution as:
DMIGOP2
step2.dat
on output2 unit 33

ASSIGN OUTPUT2=se10bndry.op2 unit=33

Bulk Data Entries
PARAM,EXTDROUT,DMIGOP2
PARAM,EXTDRUNT,33
Step 3 Data Recovery for External Superelement
Main Index

Step 3 Data Recovery from

Step 2 Boundary Solution
Required Entries
If Boundary Solution stored with File Management Section

MATRIXDB, MATDB, or
Obtain the data from the original reduction run and the boundary
DMIGDB
displacements from the assembly run.
step3.dat
RESTART LOGICAL=SE10M(1)
ASSIGN ASSYM=step2.MASTER
ASSIGN ASSYD=step2.DBALL
DBLOCATE DB=(EXTDB) WHERE(SEID=10),
LOGICAL=ASSYM
where:
step1.MASTER is the database from the Step 1.
10 is the superelement identification number given to the partitioned
Bulk Data Section for the external superelement in Step 2.
Case Control Section
Any data recovery request applicable to the analysis will be honored.
Identify that the 3-step data recovery is being performed
PARAM,EXTDR,YES
Request Output2 or XDB file
PARAM,POST,0
Bulk data section
Main Index
CHAPTER 2 137
Step 3 Data Recovery from

Step 2 Boundary Solution
Required Entries
If Boundary Solution stored with File Management Section

DMIGOP2
Obtain the data from the original reduction run and the boundary
displacements from the assembly run.
step3.dat
Boundary displacements on
output2 unit 33
RESTART LOGICAL=SE10M(1)
ASSIGN INPUTT2=se10bndry.op2 unit=33
where:
10 is the superelement identification number given to the partitioned
Bulk Data Section for the external superelement in Step 2.
Case Control Section
Any data recovery request applicable to the analysis will be honored.
Identify that the 3-step data recovery is being performed
PARAM,EXTDR,YES
PARAM,EXTDRUNT,33
Request Output2 or XDB file
PARAM,POST,0
Bulk data section
NOTES
1. The File Management Section for the Data Recovery Restart is based on a read only restart This
means that the data on the original database is accessed, but the data is not modified or added to in any
way.
Main Index


The SEMAP contains the tables that will instruct MSC.Nastran how to process a superelement job. It
contains lists processing order, superelement associations, interior grids, exterior grids, elements, etc. By
default, the superelement map is output to the .f06 file for each superelement run. The amount of output
can be controlled by PARAM,SEMAP and its associated parameters SEMAPOPT and SEMAPPRT.
Throughout this chapter, we have introduced snippets of the SEMAP that were relevant to the topic at
hand. This section will describe the SEMAP in more detail using the output from the freedom examples:
/doc/seug/chapter2/freedom/partse-continuous.bdf and /doc/seug/chapter2/freedom/partsediscontinuous.bdf . Please refer to Figure 2-17 for details on how the model is broken up into
superelements.
Contents of the Superelement MAP List Superelement

This section defines the SEMAP for list superelements that are defined in the main bulk data section
(BEGIN BULK). The first part of the SEMAP is the Superelement Definition Table. This is presented
in two sorts (sorted by SEID and sorted by Process order). The type of superelement is also specified.
The types include: Residual Structure, Primary (main bulk data or begin super), Repeat, Mirror,
Collector, or External. The Superelement Tree defines how the superelements will be processes and
connected to on-another. It is more important to understand the process order that MSC.Nastran will use
when multi-level superelements are used this subject will be covered in detail in Chapter 7: Multi-Level
(SORTED BY SEID)
INDEX
SUPERELEMENT
PROCESS ORDER
DOWNSTREAM SE
SUPERELEMENT TYPE
RESIDUAL STRUCTURE
10
20
30
40
50
60

INDEX
Main Index
SUPERELEMENT
PROCESS ORDER
DOWNSTREAM SE
SUPERELEMENT TYPE
10
20
30
40
50
60
RESIDUAL STRUCTURE
CHAPTER 2 139
TABLE OF DOWNSTREAM CONNECTIONS FOR EACH SUPERELEMENT

INDEX
SE ID
ID-S OF DOWNSTREAM CONNECTIONS IN DOWNSTREAM ORDER
10
20
30
40
50
60
S U P E R E L E M E N T
( NO. LEVELS =
TIP
NO. TIPS =
L E V E L
T R E E
* = PROCESS ORDER )
N U M B E R
INDEX
-1-
10
1*
20
2*
30
3*
40
4*
50
5*
60
6*
Listing 2-17
Listing of Superelement Definition Table, Connectivity, and SETREE for List

superelements
Next the Unique Superelement Connectivity List provides details on the number of points that share a
connection between superelements as well as the 1st ID associated with each connection.
UNIQUE SUPERELEMENT CONNECTIVITY LIST ------------------------------------ CONNECTED TO -(SORTED BY SE-ID)
COUNT
Main Index
1ST GRD
TYPE
INT.-TO-SE
SE-ID
SE-ID
SE-ID
SE-ID
SE-ID
SE-ID

16
40
34
30021
20
37
17
50
170
54
24
50782
50
60
24
50001
30
50
20
30001
10
30
17
10039
10
397
10001
10
304
20001
20
144
20006
20
637
30055
30
96
30233
30
40
40009
40
1048
40011
40
136
50025
50
621
50038
50
193
60025
60
24
60032
60
Listing 2-18
30
Listing of Unique Superleement Connectivity List for List Superleements
Next, the list of interior points, exterior points, and elements is provided for each superelement. Note
that the residual structure will not have any exterior points and is always listed last.
SUPERELEMENT
10

INDEX
414 )
-1-
-2-
-3-
-4-
-5-
-6-
-7-
-8-
-9-
-10-
10001
10002
10003
10004
10005
10006
10007
10008
10009
10010
11
10011
10012
10013
10014
10015
10016
10017
10018
10019
10020
21
10021
10022
10023
10024
10025
10026
10027
10028
10029
10030
SUPERELEMENT
10
20 )
INDEX
-1-
-2-
-3-
-4-
-5-
-6-
-7-
-8-
-9-
-10-
30001
30002
30003
30004
30005
30006
30007
30008
30009
30010
11
30011
30012
30013
30014
30015
30016
30017
30018
30019
30020
SUPERELEMENT
10

INDEX
Main Index
-1-
-2-
-3-
-4-

-5-
-6-
-7-
-8-
859 )
-9-
-10-
CHAPTER 2 141
10001
10002
10003
10004
10005
10006
10007
10008
10009
10010
11
10011
10012
10013
10014
10015
10016
10017
10018
10019
10020
21
10021
10022
10023
10024
10025
10026
10027
10028
10029
10030
31
10031
10032
10033
10034
10035
10036
10037
10038
10039
10040
SUPERELEMENT

INDEX
-1-
-2-
-3-
-4-
-5-

-6-
-7-
-8-
325 )
-9-
-10-
10
11
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
201
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
221
222
501
30001
30002
30003
30004
30005
30006
30007
231
30008
30009
30010
30011
30012
30013
30014
30015
30016
30017
SUPERELEMENT

INDEX
-1-
-2-
-3-
-4-

-5-
-6-
-7-
-8-
397 )
-9-
-10-
10
11
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Listing 2-19
Listing of Interior Points, Exterior Points, and Elements for List Superelements
Contents of the Superelement MAP PART Superelement

The output for the PART superelements (or any model with superelements and a BEGIN SUPER entry),
is very similar to the List Superelement output for Main Bulk Data superelements. There are some
advantages in that more information is output with respect to the Boundary Grids and their connectivity.
SUPERELEMENT DEFINITION TABLE (SORTED BY SEID)
PRIMARY
SUPERELEMENT SUPERELEMENT
PROCESS
DOWNSTREAM
ORDER
SUPERELEMENT
TYPE
------------ ------------ ------- ------------ -----------------------------
Main Index
RESIDUAL STRUCTURE
10
PRIMARY (BEGIN SUPER)
LABEL
--------------------------------

20
30
40
50
60
SUPERELEMENT DEFINITION TABLE (SORTED BY PROCESS ORDER)

PRIMARY
PROCESS
DOWNSTREAM
ORDER
SUPERELEMENT
TYPE
LABEL
------------ ------------ ------- ------------ ----------------------------10
20
30
40
50
60
RESIDUAL STRUCTURE
--------------------------------
TABLE OF DOWNSTREAM SUPERELEMENTS FOR EACH SUPERELEMENT

SUPERELEMENT
DOWNSTREAM SUPERELEMENTS IN DOWNSTREAM ORDER
------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
10
20
30
40
50
60
( CONFIGURATION = SINGLE LEVEL
T R E E
NO. LEVELS =
NO. TIPS =
6 )
TIP
LEVEL
LEVEL
LEVEL
LEVEL
LEVEL
LEVEL
LEVEL
LEVEL
LEVEL
INDEX
-1-
-2-
-3-
-4-
-5-
-6-
-7-
-8-
-9-
Main Index
10
20
30
40
CHAPTER 2 143
50
60
Table 2-14 Listing of Superelement Definition Table, Connectivity, andSETREE for PART
Superelements
Next, the Boundary Sequence Assignment Table shows how the superelement grids are connected. In
this example, GRID 30001 is on the boundary of SEID 10 and 30. Since this is a single-level tree, GRID
30001 is assigned to the residual structure. Refer to Figure 2-8 for an example.

BOUNDARY
SEQUENCE ID --------------------------------- ASSIGNED TO POINT ID (SUPERELEMENT) -------
1B
30001 (
0)
30001 (
10)
30001 (
30)
2B
30002 (
0)
30002 (
10)
30002 (
30)
3B
30003 (
0)
30003 (
10)
30003 (
30)
4B
30004 (
0)
30004 (
10)
30004 (
30)
5B
30005 (
0)
30005 (
10)
30005 (
30)
6B
30006 (
0)
30006 (
10)
30006 (
30)
7B
30007 (
0)
30007 (
10)
30007 (
30)
8B
30008 (
0)
30008 (
10)
30008 (
30)
9B
30009 (
0)
30009 (
10)
30009 (
30)
10B
30010 (
0)
30010 (
10)
30010 (
30)
11B
30011 (
0)
30011 (
10)
30011 (
30)
12B
30012 (
0)
30012 (
10)
30012 (
30)
13B
30013 (
0)
30013 (
10)
30013 (
30)
14B
30014 (
0)
30014 (
10)
30014 (
30)
15B
30015 (
0)
30015 (
10)
30015 (
30)
16B
30016 (
0)
30016 (
10)
30016 (
30)
17B
30017 (
0)
30017 (
10)
30017 (
30)
18B
30018 (
0)
30018 (
10)
30018 (
30)
Listing 2-20
Main Index
Listing of Boundary Sequence Table for Part Superelements

The boundary sequence data is also reported with the interior SEID. This is useful for models with
complicated connections or multi-level trees.
POINT/SUPERELEMENT CONNECTIVITY LIST (SORTED BY POINT ID
- "B" INDICATES BOUNDARY SEQUENCE ID)
INTERIOR TO
POINT ID
TYPE
SUPERELEMEMT ------------------------------- CONNECTED TO SUPERELEMENT ------------------
1B
10
30
2B
10
30
3B
10
30
4B
10
30
5B
10
30
6B
10
30
7B
10
30
8B
10
30
9B
10
30
10B
10
30
11B
10
30
12B
10
30
13B
10
30
14B
10
30
15B
10
30
16B
10
30
17B
10
30
18B
10
30
19B
10
30
20B
10
30
21B
20
30
Listing 2-21
Listing of Point to Superelement Connectivity for PART Superelements Sorted

by Point
Another convenient output is the connectivity list showing the first boundary point and how many
boundary points are associated with the connectivity of each superelement. This can be useful when the
user knows there should be a certain number of connections between 2 superelements. A quick review
of the table can indicate problems that need to have further investigation.
POINT/SUPERELEMENT CONNECTIVITY LIST (SORTED BY FIRST POINT ID - "B" INDICATES BOUNDARY SEQUENCE ID)
FIRST
COUNT
20
Main Index
INTERIOR TO
POINT ID
1B
TYPE
SUPERELEMEMT ------------------------------- CONNECTED TO SUPERELEMENT -------------------------------
10
30
CHAPTER 2 145
34
21B
20
30
24
55B
30
50
16
79B
40
37
95B
50
24
132B
50
60
MARCH
29, 2011
MD NASTRAN
12/15/10
PAGE
POINT/SUPERELEMENT CONNECTIVITY LIST (SORTED BY COUNT - "B" INDICATES BOUNDARY SEQUENCE ID)
FIRST
COUNT
INTERIOR TO
POINT ID
TYPE
16
79B
40
20
1B
10
30
24
55B
30
50
24
132B
50
60
34
21B
20
30
37
95B
50
POINT/SUPERELEMENT CONNECTIVITY LIST (SORTED BY INTERIOR SUPERELEMENT - "B" INDICATES BOUNDARY SEQUENCE ID)
FIRST
COUNT
INTERIOR TO
POINT ID
TYPE
16
79B
40
34
21B
20
24
132B
50
60
24
55B
30
50
20
1B
10
30
37
95B
50
Listing 2-22
30
Listing of Point to Superelement Connectivity for PART Superelements

Additional Sorts
Next, the list of interior points, exterior points, and elements is provided for each superelement. Note
that the residual structure will not have any exterior points. Also note that boundary dof are designated
with a B.
SUPERELEMENT
TYPE = RESIDUAL STRUCTURE

LIST OF
INDEX
-1-
-2-
-3-
INTERIOR POINTS
-4-
-5-
-6-
-7-
-8-
325 )
-9-
-10-
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
11
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
63
151
Main Index
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213

161
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
501
171
1B
2B
3B
4B
5B
6B
7B
8B
9B
10B
181
11B
12B
13B
14B
15B
16B
17B
18B
19B
20B
191
21B
22B
23B
24B
25B
26B
27B
28B
29B
SUPERELEMENT

LIST OF
INDEX
ELEMENTS
397 )
-1-
-2-
-3-
-4-
-5-
-6-
-7-
-8-
-9-
-10-
10
11
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
SUPERELEMENT
10

LIST OF
INDEX
EXTERIOR POINTS
20 )
-1-
-2-
-3-
-4-
-5-
-6-
-7-
-8-
-9-
-10-
1B
2B
3B
4B
5B
6B
7B
8B
9B
10B
11
11B
12B
13B
14B
15B
16B
17B
18B
19B
20B
SUPERELEMENT
10

LIST OF
INDEX
-1-
-2-
-3-
INTERIOR POINTS
-4-
-5-

-6-
-7-
-8-
414 )
-9-
-10-
10001
10002
10003
10004
10005
10006
10007
10008
10009
10010
11
10011
10012
10013
10014
10015
10016
10017
10018
10019
10020
21
10021
10022
10023
10024
10025
10026
10027
10028
10029
10030
SUPERELEMENT
10

LIST OF
INDEX
ELEMENTS
859 )
-1-
-2-
-3-
-4-
-5-
-6-
-7-
-8-
-9-
-10-
10001
10002
10003
10004
10005
10006
10007
10008
10009
10010
11
10011
10012
10013
10014
10015
10016
10017
10018
10019
10020
Main Index
CHAPTER 2 147
Listing 2-23
Main Index
Listing of Interior Points, Exterior Points, and Elements for PART

Superelements

Main Index
Chapter 3: Single Level Superelement Analysis
Main Index
Single Level Superelement

Analysis
Introduction

Introduction
Introduction
A single-level superelement analysis is defined as one in which all superelements connect to the residual
structure only. Single-level superelement analysis occurs when the exterior points of all superelements
in the model are interior to the residual structure. In this case each superelement can be processed
independently from all other superelements. This concept was introduced in Example of Bulk Data
Partitioning (Ch. 2). The figures are repeated here as a refresher:
Figure 3-1
Flyswatter Example Showing Grids Assigned to Residual in Single Level

A single level superelement means that any boundary points where two or more superelements meet are
external to the upstream superelement (SEID>0) and internal to the residual structure. Single-level
analysis is the simplest form of superelement analysis and is recommended for the beginning
superelement user. Partitioning the model into superelements for a single-level analysis requires the least
effort from the user, and processing control (if desired) is simple. Conceptually, the single level
superelement processing is shown in the following figure:
Main Index
CHAPTER 3 151
Figure 3-2
Single Level Superelement Analysis of Flyswatter
It should be noted that if PARTs are used, the model is automatically a single-level model unless either
DTI,SETREE or SETREE entries exists in the Main Bulk Data Section. If the model is defined as a
Main Bulk Data Section only model, care must be taken to verify that all exterior points belong to the
residual structure; otherwise, a multilevel processing tree (Chapter 7: Multi-Level Superelement
Analysis) is created automatically.
In addition to single level being recommended for the beginning superelement user, single-level analysis
is recommended for use in the analysis of structures that are expected to change often and in many areas.
For this case, where there is no knowledge of areas that will not be changing, a single-level model is
almost always the most efficient. Thus, when a change occurs, only the affected superelement and the
residual structure need to be processed again. Therefore, restarts for model change can be very efficient.
In fact, this is one of the biggest advantages of using superelements. With the advent of external
superelements, the processing becomes even easier.
MSC.Nastran offers the user a variety of results output formats. Some of these formats are more suitable
for output post-processing of superelements in Patran than others. The formats, their descriptions, and
Main Index

Introduction
a statement of superelement support are in the table below. Note that for this chapter, the op2 file
(PARAM,POST,-1) will be used.
Table 3-1
Nastran Output Format Compatibility with Superelement Processing
Results Output Format

Extension
.f06
DISP(PRINT)=ALL
.pch
DISP(PUNCH)=ALL
.xdb
DISP(PLOT)=ALL
PARAM,POST,0
.op2
DISP(PLOT)=ALL
PARAM,POST,-1
.MASTER/.DBALL
DISP(PLOT)=ALL
NASTRAN SYSTEM(316)=19
Main Index
Description
Superelement Support
The basic output file is the .f06 file. Full support of all
superelement output
It is an ASCII file that can be
opened in any text editor easily read
and interpreted by the user.
This file is an ASCII output. It is
not convenient as the .f06 to the
human viewer, but lends itself to
user written scripts and importing
into custom post-processors.
Full support of all

superelement results.
The xdb file is a binary format

which is indexed for rapid results
access. Patran can attach the xdb
file instead of reading it, thus
keeping the Patran database smaller
because the results are on the
external xdb file.
PART superelements are not

supported
The op2 file is a binary format

which is a flat file. Patran must
read the op2 file into its database,
thus increasing the overall size.
Full support of all

superelement results
The MASTER/DBALL is a binary

format of the Nastran database
which is indexed for rapid results
access. Like the xdb, the
MASTER/DBALL can be attached
to Patran, keeping the database
small.
PART superelements are

fully supported
List Superelements are not

fully supported
Note: Patran does not

support duplicate IDs, so
PART superelements may
need to be processed in their
own database.
List Superelements are fully

supported.
CHAPTER 3 153

This Chapter will go into more depth than the introductory chapters, so more detail will be presented in
reviewing the input, processing, and results. To form a baseline, the model will be baselined as a nonsuperelement model, and then details will be provided to define the model using both list and PART
superelements. Finally, the superelement and non-superelement solutions will be compared.
It is assumed that the user has some working-level knowledge of Patran, so buttons and forms that are
considered base knowledge are not shown. It is presumed the user knows how to rotate the model, create
groups, define loads, and submit analysis decks to MSC.Nastran. The baseline file can be located at
/doc/seug/chapter3/baseline/baseline.bdf
The model consists of 104 grids and 67 elements as shown here:
Figure 3-3
Main Index
Double Headed Flyswatter Baseline Model

All of the elements are unit thickness and the material is steel (in English units). The model is fixed at
the base (grids 1 & 2) in all 6 dof and there are three loadings as shown below:
Figure 3-4
Main Index
Load 101, the pressure load applied to the two square portions of the model
CHAPTER 3 155
Figure 3-5
Main Index
Load 201, In Phase point loads applied at the corners

Figure 3-6
Load 301, opposing point loads at the corners.
There are some key metrics from the MSC.Nastran solution of the baseline model that will be compared
to the superelement solutions.
O U T P U T
F R O M
G R I D
P O I N T
W E I G H T
G E N E R A T O R
REFERENCE POINT =
M O
Main Index
3.166560E-02
0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00 -2.180939E-01 *
0.000000E+00
3.166560E-02
0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00
2.168404E-19 *
0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00
3.166560E-02
2.180939E-01 -2.168404E-19
0.000000E+00 *
0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00
2.180939E-01
1.663935E+00 -1.387779E-17
0.000000E+00 *
CHAPTER 3 157
0.000000E+00
* -2.180939E-01
0.000000E+00 -2.168404E-19 -1.387779E-17
3.125090E-01
0.000000E+00 *
2.168404E-19
0.000000E+00
1.976444E+00 *
0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00
S
*
1.000000E+00
0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00 *
0.000000E+00
1.000000E+00
0.000000E+00 *
0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00
1.000000E+00 *
DIRECTION
MASS AXIS SYSTEM (S)
MASS
X-C.G.
Y-C.G.
Z-C.G.
3.166560E-02
0.000000E+00
6.887407E+00
0.000000E+00
3.166560E-02
6.847823E-18
0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00
3.166560E-02
6.847823E-18
6.887407E+00
0.000000E+00
I(S)
*
1.618332E-01
1.238432E-17
0.000000E+00 *
1.238432E-17
3.125090E-01
0.000000E+00 *
0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00
4.743421E-01 *
1.618332E-01
I(Q)
*
3.125090E-01
*
4.743421E-01 *
Q
Listing 3-1
1.000000E+00
0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00 *
0.000000E+00
1.000000E+00
0.000000E+00 *
0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00
1.000000E+00 *
Grid Point Generator Output for Baseline Mode
OLOAD
SUBCASE/
LOAD
DAREA ID
TYPE
101
201
Main Index
FX
T1
0.000000E+00
RESULTANT
T2
T3
R1
----
----
----
FY
----
FZ
----
----
MX
----
----
----
MY
----
----
----
----
MZ
----
----
----
----
TOTALS
0.000000E+00
FX
0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00
----
0.000000E+00
R2
0.000000E+00
----
-3.200000E+01 -2.560000E+02 -4.440892E-16

0.000000E+00
---0.000000E+00
----
0.000000E+00 -3.200000E+01 -2.560000E+02 -4.440892E-16

----
FY
----
0.000000E+00
FZ
----
----
MX
----
----
------4.000000E+00
----
---0.000000E+00
4.000000E+01
0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00
---0.000000E+00
----
R3
0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00
---------0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00
-------

301
MY
----
----
----
----
MZ
----
----
----
----
TOTALS
0.000000E+00
FX
0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00
----
----
----
FZ
----
----
MX
----
----
----
MY
----
----
----
----
MZ
----
----
----
----
0.000000E+00
Listing 3-2
0.000000E+00
---0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00
----
4.000000E+01
----
FY
TOTALS
0.000000E+00
4.000000E+00
0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00
---2.080000E+01
0.000000E+00
---0.000000E+00
----
0.000000E+00
---0.000000E+00
2.080000E+01
0.000000E+00
---------0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00
OLOAD Resultant for Baseline Mode
*** SYSTEM INFORMATION MESSAGE 4159 (DFMSA)

THE DECOMPOSITION OF KLL
YIELDS A MAXIMUM MATRIX-TO-FACTOR-DIAGONAL RATIO OF
1.133766E+03
*** USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 5293 (SSG3A)

FOR DATA BLOCK KLL
LOAD SEQ. NO.
EPSILON
EXTERNAL WORK
-4.6426305E-12
4.9504608E-02
-4.5038209E-12
1.5267804E-03
-2.1373923E-12
1.2906785E-03
Listing 3-3
EPSILONS LARGER THAN 0.001 ARE FLAGGED WITH ASTERISKS
Residual Solution Diagnostics for Baseline Model
SPCFORCE RESULTANT
SUBCASE/
LOAD
DAREA ID
TYPE
101
201
Main Index
FX
T1
0.000000E+00
T2
T3
R1
----
----
----
FY
----
FZ
----
----
MX
----
----
----
MY
----
----
----
----
MZ
----
----
----
----
TOTALS
0.000000E+00
FX
0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00
----
---3.200000E+01
3.200000E+01
----
0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00
2.560000E+02
2.560000E+02
----
R2
0.000000E+00
---4.849454E-12
---6.487255E-12
----
R3
0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00
---------0.000000E+00
1.133671E-11
0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00
CHAPTER 3 159
301
FY
----
FZ
----
0.000000E+00
----
-4.000000E+00
MX
----
----
----
-4.000000E+01
----
MY
----
----
----
----
-1.540990E-12
MZ
----
----
----
----
----
TOTALS
0.000000E+00
FX
0.000000E+00
----
0.000000E+00
----
0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00 -1.151745E-12
----
----
----
FZ
----
----
MX
----
----
----
-2.398082E-13
----
MY
----
----
----
----
-1.189257E+01
MZ
----
----
----
----
----
0.000000E+00
Listing 3-4
----
0.000000E+00
FY
TOTALS
0.000000E+00
---0.000000E+00
7.709389E-13
0.000000E+00
---0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00 -4.000000E+00 -4.000000E+01 -2.692735E-12

----
----
----
0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00 -8.907434E+00
---------0.000000E+00
7.709389E-13 -2.398082E-13 -2.080000E+01
0.000000E+00
SPCFORCE Resultants for Baseline Model

MAXIMUM
SPCFORCES
SUBCASE/
DAREA ID
T1
T2
T3
101
0.0000000E+00
0.0000000E+00
1.6000000E+01
1.2800000E+02
R1
2.3944511E+01
0.0000000E+00
201
0.0000000E+00
0.0000000E+00
2.0000000E+00
2.0000000E+01
3.7587638E+00
0.0000000E+00
301
0.0000000E+00
0.0000000E+00
1.1134293E+01
2.4154820E+00
5.9462829E+00
0.0000000E+00
MAXIMUM
R2
R3
DISPLACEMENTS
SUBCASE/
DAREA ID
T1
T2
T3
101
0.0000000E+00
0.0000000E+00
4.2660399E-03
5.5805832E-04
R1
3.4896220E-05
0.0000000E+00
201
0.0000000E+00
0.0000000E+00
7.6339021E-04
9.9121207E-05
1.6829077E-05
0.0000000E+00
301
0.0000000E+00
0.0000000E+00
6.4533926E-04
4.1716805E-05
8.6961598E-05
0.0000000E+00
MAXIMUM
R2
R3
APPLIED LOADS
SUBCASE/
DAREA ID
T1
T2
T3
101
0.0000000E+00
0.0000000E+00
6.3999999E-01
0.0000000E+00
0.0000000E+00
0.0000000E+00
201
0.0000000E+00
0.0000000E+00
2.0000000E+00
0.0000000E+00
0.0000000E+00
0.0000000E+00
301
0.0000000E+00
0.0000000E+00
2.0000000E+00
0.0000000E+00
0.0000000E+00
0.0000000E+00
Listing 3-5
Main Index
R1
R2
R3
Maximum SPCFORCES, DISPLACEMENTS and APPLIED LOADS for

Baseline Model

Figure 3-7
Main Index
Deflections for Pressure Load Baseline Model
CHAPTER 3 161
Figure 3-8
Main Index
Deflections for In Phase Point Loads Baseline Model

Figure 3-9
Main Index
Deflections for Opposing Point Loads Baseline Model
CHAPTER 3 163
Figure 3-10
Main Index
Stress Tensor for Pressure Load (max=1.79E+3) Baseline Model

Figure 3-11
Main Index
Stress Tensor for In-Phase Loads (Max = 2.87E+02) Baseline Model
CHAPTER 3 165
Figure 3-12
Main Index
Stress Tensor for Opposing Loads (Max = 1.59E+02) Baseline Model


The list superelement equivalent will be generated in Patran. Of the list superelement methods, Patran
supports BEGIN BULK with SESET.
Static Example using Patran. (flyswatter)

The Patran definition of superelements is based on Groups. Therefore, the first step in defining
superelement is to define Groups. For the example problem /doc/seug/chapter3/baseline/baseline.bdf,
the model was defined with different property sets. Patran has a convenient method to create groups from
property sets as shown in the following figure. A session file for creating these groups is included in
/doc/seug/chapter3/create-group.ses
Figure 3-13
Generating Groups from Property Sets
The result of the above action will create a screen similar to the following:
Main Index
CHAPTER 3 167
Figure 3-14
Result of Creating Groups from Properties
Note that the user can easily modify the group colors by changing them in the Display Options for Entity
Color/Label/Render Form. Of course, this step is completely optional for the user.
Main Index

Figure 3-15
Example of Modifying Group Colors
After the groups are created, it is simple to define the superelements. On the Meshing Tab, the user
selects the Superelement Icon. The superelement form is straight forward. The user enters a name, or
label, for the superelement and then selects the desired group. Note, to specify a unique superelement ID
associated with each superelement, the user can embed a number. To do this, the label should include
.## at the end. The . is a delimeter telling Patran that the following number ## is to be encoded as
the SEID when writing the SESET entry. For example, a label of SE.10 will generate SESET entries
with SEID=10.
Main Index
CHAPTER 3 169
Figure 3-16
Example of Generating Superelements with Embedded SEID
In this example, each group associated with a pshell id is made into a superelement, with the exception
of pshell.10, which is designated at the residual structure. So, pshell.1 = SE.10, pshell.2 = SE.20, etc.
For the user following along in Patran, a session file to create the superelements is located at
/doc/seug/chapter3/create-se.ses (Note: this assumes the groups were created as described above if not,
unexpected results will occur).
The Select Boundary Nodes button allows the user to select the boundary nodes of a superelement.
Patran will automatically select boundary nodes based on the element connectivity. However, for special
cases the user may want to add additional boundary nodes or clarify the boundary notes. In this case the
Patran form is convenient for selecting the additional nodes. The Get Default Boundary Nodes will
automatically populate the Selected Boundary Nodes list box with the nodes that Patran found on the
boundary. The user can add or modify these nodes as necessary.
Main Index

Figure 3-17
Form to Modify Boundary Node Definition
Now that the superelements are defined, a superelement analysis can be performed. Note that by default,
Patran DOES NOT write a superelement model. The superelements must be selected by pressing the
Select Superelements button and selecting all of the superelements. Also note, that by default, a PART
superelement will be written by Patran. In order to obtain a list superelement defined with BEGIN BULK
and SESET, the user must unselect the Write Part Superelement toggle.
Main Index
CHAPTER 3 171
Figure 3-18
Example of Selecting SESET Superelements for an Analysis
Since this model will be compared to the baseline model, the user will want to specify the Node i.d. for
Wt. Gener. as 0. Also, as described earlier, the output format will be op2. These can be defined on the
Solution Parameters form.
Main Index

Figure 3-19
Defining Node for Grid Point Weight Generator and OP2 File Format
Finally, the use must select the subcases associated with the baseline model. This is easily accomplished
with the Subcase Select button and its subordinate form.
Main Index
CHAPTER 3 173
Figure 3-20
Select the Same Subcases as the Baseline Model
The exported file (doc/seug/chapter3/seset/seset.bdf) will have the SESET entries defined. Recall that
the SESET entries define the interior grids associated with a superelement. Reviewing the list below
(refer to Figure 3-3 and Figure 3-13) confirms that Patran has written the desired SESET entries.
A more detailed view of the interior and exterior grids for Superelement 10 bears this out. The SESET
entry includes all grids associated to superelement 10 except 35 and 36, which belong to superelement
10, but are exterior grids.
Main Index

Figure 3-21
Exterior Grids to Superelement 10
$ SE.10
SESET
10
33
34
37
SESET
10
45
THRU
50
SESET
10
57
THRU
62
SESET
10
69
THRU
74
SESET
10
81
THRU
86
SESET
10
93
THRU
98
SESET
20
39
40
43
SESET
20
51
THRU
56
SESET
20
63
THRU
68
SESET
20
75
THRU
80
SESET
20
87
THRU
92
SESET
20
99
THRU
104
30
29
30
38
$ SE.20
$ SE.30
SESET
$ SE.40
Main Index
44
CHAPTER 3 175
SESET
40
31
32
$ SE.50
SESET
50
THRU
SESET
50
21
22
SESET
60
15
THRU
SESET
60
25
26
70
THRU
12
$ SE.60
18
$ SE.70
SESET
Listing 3-6
SESET Entries Associated with List Superelement
After running doc/seug/chapter3/seset/seset.bdf, the .f06 file and results can be interrogated. The first
thing is the SEMAP. This indicates the processing order and the superelement tree. Note that every
superelement has a DOWNSTREAM SE of 0 (or the residual) confirming that this is a single-level
superelement tree.

(SORTED BY SEID)
INDEX
SUPERELEMENT
PROCESS ORDER
DOWNSTREAM SE
SUPERELEMENT TYPE
RESIDUAL STRUCTURE
10
20
30
40
50
60
70

INDEX
SUPERELEMENT
PROCESS ORDER
DOWNSTREAM SE
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
RESIDUAL STRUCTURE

INDEX
Main Index
SE ID
SUPERELEMENT TYPE

10
20
30
40
50
60
70
( NO. LEVELS =
TIP
NO. TIPS =
L E V E L
T R E E
* = PROCESS ORDER )
N U M B E R
INDEX
-1-
10
1*
20
2*
30
3*
40
4*
50
5*
60
6*
70
7*
UNIQUE SUPERELEMENT CONNECTIVITY LIST ------------------------------------ CONNECTED TO -------------(SORTED BY SE-ID)

COUNT
Main Index
1ST GRD
TYPE
INT.-TO-SE
SE-ID
SE-ID
13
50
70
27
40
60
35
10
30
19
30
50
24
60
SE-ID
SE-ID
SE-ID
SE-ID
SE-ID
CHAPTER 3 177
23
50
14
60
70
41
20
40
28
33
10
34
10
40
20
28
39
20
29
30
31
40
50
15
60
70
70
Listing 3-7
SEMAP of Process Order for List Superelement Example
Next comes the listing of interior grids, exterior grids, and elements associated with each superelement:
SUPERELEMENT
10
34 )
INDEX
-1-
-2-
-3-
-4-
-5-
-6-
-7-
-8-
-9-
-10-
33
34
37
38
45
46
47
48
49
50
11
57
58
59
60
61
62
69
70
71
72
21
73
74
81
82
83
84
85
86
93
94
31
95
96
97
98
SUPERELEMENT
10

INDEX
-1-
35
-2-
-3-
-4-

-5-
-6-
-7-
-8-
-9-
2 )
-10-
36
SUPERELEMENT
10
25 )
INDEX
-1-
-2-
-3-
-4-
-5-
-6-
-7-
-8-
-9-
-10-
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
11
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
21
38
39
40
41
42
continues for each SEID
Listing 3-8
SEMAP of Interior Grids, Exterior Grids, and Elements for Each Superelement
Next, the partitioned geometry and bulk data associated to each superelement is written to the output2
file. Refer to Figure 1-9 for a schematic representation of these steps. The following table lists the
Main Index

datablocks that are output for each superelement. For a more detailed description of each datablock refer
to the DMAP Programmers Guide or the nddl listings in the MSC.Nastran delivery.
Table 3-2
Data Written to Output2 (PARAM,POST,-1) by PHASE 0 Processing
Datablock Name
NDDL Datablock
Name
Data Contents
GEOM1X
GEOM168
Geometry data (v68 format): CORD2x, GRID, POINT
GEOM2X
GEOM201
Table of Bulk Data entries related to element

connectivity for MSC.Nastran Version 2001. (CBAR,
CBEAM, CQUAD4, etc.)
GEOM3X
GEOM301
Table of Bulk Data entry images related to static and

thermal loads for MSC.Nastran Version 2001.
GEOM4X
GEOM4705
Table of Bulk Data entry images related to constraints

for MSC.Nastran Version 70.5
EPTX
EPT01
Element property table for MSC.Nastran Version 2001
MPTS
MPTS
Table of Bulk Data entry images related to material

properties and nonlinear solution parameters (MAT1,
MAT2, NLPARM, etc.)
DITS
DIT
DYNAMICS
DYNAMIC
PCOMPT
PCOMPT
EDTS
EDT
BGPDTX
BGPDT68
Direct Input Tables (TABLE1D, TABLE2D,

TABRND1, etc.)
Table of Bulk Data entry images related to dynamics
(DLOAD, DPHASE, EIGRL, FREQ1, etc.)
Supplemental data related to composites elements.
Data related Aeroelastic entries (ACMODL,
AECOMP, SPLINEi, etc.)
Basic grid point definition table (Pre-Version 69)
Contains a list of all grid points in internal sort, with
(for grid points) their x, y, z locations in the basic
coordinate system along with a displacement
coordinate system identification number. (output only
if PARAM POSTEXT='YES')
The following table lists the Phase 0 data written to the .op2 for this example. Note that datablocks that
are null are not output.
^^^ USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 9044 (PHASE0)
^^^ BULK DATA AND CASE CONTROL PARTITIONING,
RESTART CHECKING, AND UNDEFORMED PLOTTING IS
^^^ INITIATED FOR SUPERELEMENT 10

*** USER WARNING MESSAGE 2053 (GP4)
UNDEFINED SINGLE-POINT CONSTRAINT SET
*** SYSTEM WARNING MESSAGE 3002 (MAKEOLD)
Main Index
CHAPTER 3 179
EOF ENCOUNTERED WHILE READING DATA BLOCK GEOM2S
(FILE
101) IN SUBROUTINE MAKoG2
*** USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 4114 (OUTPX2)

DATA BLOCK GEOM1X
101
WRITTEN ON FORTRAN UNIT
12 IN BINARY (LTLEND) FORMAT USING NDDL DESCRIPTION FOR GEOM16, TRL =
NAME OF DATA BLOCK WRITTEN ON FORTRAN UNIT IS GEOM1

(MAXIMUM POSSIBLE FORTRAN RECORD SIZE =
16386 WORDS.)
(MAXIMUM SIZE OF FORTRAN RECORDS WRITTEN =
291 WORDS.)
(NUMBER OF FORTRAN RECORDS WRITTEN =
15 RECORDS.)
(TOTAL DATA WRITTEN FOR DATA BLOCK =
315 WORDS.)

DATA BLOCK GEOM2X
102
8192

16386 WORDS.)
353 WORDS.)
15 RECORDS.)

1
377 WORDS.)
MSC NASTRAN JOB CREATED ON 02-APR-11 AT 08:53:17
APRIL
2, 2011
MSC NASTRAN
7/15/10
PAGE
SUPERELEMENT 10
0
0

DATA BLOCK GEOM3X
103
64
256

16386 WORDS.)
303 WORDS.)
30 RECORDS.)
380 WORDS.)

DATA BLOCK GEOM4X
104
32
16

16386 WORDS.)
7 WORDS.)
25 RECORDS.)
48 WORDS.)

DATA BLOCK EPTX
105
12 IN BINARY (LTLEND) FORMAT USING NDDL DESCRIPTION FOR EPT0, TRL =
512
NAME OF DATA BLOCK WRITTEN ON FORTRAN UNIT IS EPT
Main Index
16386 WORDS.)
14 WORDS.)
16

20 RECORDS.)
45 WORDS.)

DATA BLOCK MPTS
101
12 IN BINARY (LTLEND) FORMAT USING NDDL DESCRIPTION FOR MPT, TRL =
32768
NAME OF DATA BLOCK WRITTEN ON FORTRAN UNIT IS MPTS

16386 WORDS.)
15 WORDS.)
20 RECORDS.)
46 WORDS.)

[Continues for each superelement]
Listing 3-9
PHASE 0 Output2 Datablocks.
After the Phase 0 processing is complete for each superelement, the Phase 1 processing begins. Again a
superelement loop is used and each superelement is processed in the order determined by the SEMAP.
The Phase 1 processing includes the following operations:
Main Index
CHAPTER 3 181
Figure 3-22
Phase 1 Superelement Reduction Process Schematic
To relate this process to the operations performed by MSC.Nastran and the associated output in the .f06
file, this example performs the following operations:
Formulation of global stiffness matrix, K jj , for the elements of superelement
Element Matrix Generation (EMG)
Element Matrix Assembly (EMA)
Formulation of global mass matrix, M j j , for each superelement
.f06 output of Grid Point Weight Generator (GPWG)
Main Index

Formulation of global loads matrix K jj , for each superelement

.f06 output of OLOAD RESULTANT
Static Condensation to boundary stiffness K a a , for each superelement
.f06 output for statistics on DCMP of KOO refer to Equation (1-6)

BY LANCE PROCTOR, EAGLESIM
O U T P U T
F R O M
APRIL
G R I D
P O I N T
2, 2011 MSC NASTRAN

7/15/10
SUPERELEMENT 10
W E I G H T
REFERENCE POINT =
G E N E R A T O R
M O
*
1.172800E-02
0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00 -9.382400E-02 *
0.000000E+00
1.172800E-02
0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00 -3.752960E-02 *
0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00
1.172800E-02
9.382400E-02
3.752960E-02
0.000000E+00 *
0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00
9.382400E-02
7.674803E-01
3.002368E-01
0.000000E+00 *
0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00
3.752960E-02
3.002368E-01
1.369830E-01
0.000000E+00 *
* -9.382400E-02 -3.752960E-02
0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00
9.044634E-01 *
S
*
1.000000E+00
0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00 *
0.000000E+00
1.000000E+00
0.000000E+00 *
0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00
1.000000E+00 *
DIRECTION
MASS AXIS SYSTEM (S)
MASS
X-C.G.
Y-C.G.
Z-C.G.
1.172800E-02
0.000000E+00
8.000000E+00
0.000000E+00
1.172800E-02
-3.200000E+00
0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00
1.172800E-02
-3.200000E+00
8.000000E+00
0.000000E+00
I(S)
*
1.688832E-02
5.551115E-17
0.000000E+00 *
5.551115E-17
1.688832E-02
0.000000E+00 *
0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00
3.377664E-02 *
I(Q)
*
1.688832E-02
*
1.688832E-02
*
3.377664E-02 *
Q
*
1.000000E+00
0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00 *
0.000000E+00
1.000000E+00
0.000000E+00 *
0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00
1.000000E+00 *
Main Index
APRIL
2, 2011
MSC NASTRAN
7/15/10
CREATED
CHAPTER 3 183
SUPERELEMENT 10
OLOAD
SUBCASE/
LOAD
DAREA ID
TYPE
FX
T1
0.000000E+00
RESULTANT
T2
T3
R1
----
----
----
0.000000E+00
FY
----
FZ
----
----
MX
----
----
----
MY
----
----
----
----
MZ
----
----
----
----
TOTALS
0.000000E+00
FX
0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00
---0.000000E+00
----
R2
2.000000E+00
2.000000E+00
0.000000E+00
2.000000E+01
0.000000E+00
2.000000E+01
----
FY
----
FZ
----
----
MX
----
----
----
MY
----
----
----
----
MZ
----
----
----
----
TOTALS
0.000000E+00
FX
0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00
----
2.000000E+00
2.000000E+00
0.000000E+00
2.000000E+01
0.000000E+00
2.000000E+01
----
----
FZ
----
----
MX
----
----
----
MY
----
----
----
----
MZ
----
----
----
----
0.000000E+00
----
----
FY
TOTALS
0.000000E+00
----
----
0.000000E+00
R3
0.000000E+00
----
0.000000E+00
1.040000E+01
----
-------
0.000000E+00
----
---0.000000E+00
1.040000E+01
0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00
----
0.000000E+00
1.040000E+01
----
-------
0.000000E+00
----
---0.000000E+00
1.040000E+01
0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00
----
0.000000E+00
-1.600000E+01 -1.280000E+02 -5.120000E+01

0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00
----
-------
0.000000E+00
----
---0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00 -1.600000E+01 -1.280000E+02 -5.120000E+01
0.000000E+00

THE DECOMPOSITION OF KOO
5.006693E+00

FOR DATA BLOCK KOO
LOAD SEQ. NO.
EPSILON
EXTERNAL WORK
8.5530295E-15
1.1700904E-05
6.9137383E-15
1.1700904E-05
6.9176406E-15
9.7933684E-05


Main Index
EPSILONS LARGER THAN 0.001 ARE FLAGGED WITH ASTERI
APRIL
2, 2011
MSC NASTRAN
7/15/10
SUPERELEMENT 20

[Continues for each superelement]
Listing 3-10
Phase 1 Superelement Processing (typical)
Note that the results are on a superelement basis, so we cannot compare the Grid Point Weight Generator
or OLOAD RESULTANT to the baseline run. Also note that these tables do not contain the data from
upstream superelements, so the residual structure will only contain mass and loads associated with the
processing of its partition.
For some superelements, there will be no loading. A warning message 3204 is provided to the user. If
there are not supposed to be any loads associated with the superelement, then the message can be safely
ignored.
APRIL
2, 2011
MSC NASTRAN
7/15/10
SUPERELEMENT 40
*** USER WARNING MESSAGE 3204 (SSG1)

UNABLE TO FIND SELECTED SET (
303) IN TABLE (SLT ) IN SUBROUTINE (SSG1).


Listing 3-11
Example of Warning Message 3204 Issued when there are no Loads on a

Superelement
After all of the upstream superelements are processed, the data is brought into the residual structure and
solved. Data recovery is performed on the residual:
Main Index
CHAPTER 3 185
Figure 3-23
Residual Structure Processing Schematic
Note that in static analysis, the K a a matix is further reduced to the K ll matrix in order to account
for any dof associated with the reference set (R-set), which is most commonly associated with inertia
Main Index

relief. Thus, the decomposition statistics are associated with matrix K ll . After the solution of the
residual, normal back expansion to the G-Set matrices is performed and data recovery is calculated. The
results are also placed on the output2 file. In this case, since there are no SPC Forces in the residual
structure, the output is for displacement and stress.
Result Datablock Names for Output2
Data Block Name
Output Quantity
OUG1
Displacements
OES1X1
Element Stresses
OQG1
SPC Forces
For a more comprehensive listing of output2 datablocks, refer to PARAM,POST in the Quick Reference
Guide.
APRIL
2, 2011
MSC NASTRAN
7/15/10
SUPERELEMENT 0
SUBCASE 1

THE DECOMPOSITION OF KLL
2.280555E+02

FOR DATA BLOCK KLL
LOAD SEQ. NO.
EPSILON
EXTERNAL WORK
-2.3362402E-13
1.5033779E-03
-7.3558232E-14
1.2672746E-03
-1.0165675E-13
4.9308721E-02
APRIL
2, 2011
MSC NASTRAN
7/15/10
SUPERELEMENT 0

0 IS NOW INITIATED.
APRIL
2, 2011
MSC NASTRAN
7/15/10
SUPERELEMENT 0
MAXIMUM
DISPLACEMENTS
SUBCASE/
DAREA ID
R1
R2
R3
0.0000000E+00
T1
0.0000000E+00
T2
3.4402413E-04
T3
9.5935357E-05
1.5204940E-05
0.0000000E+00
0.0000000E+00
0.0000000E+00
3.4337837E-04
3.8530961E-05
8.5337437E-05
0.0000000E+00
0.0000000E+00
0.0000000E+00
1.9924592E-03
5.5037666E-04
2.8907216E-05

Main Index
APRIL
0.0000000E+00
2, 2011
MSC NASTRAN
7/15/10
SUPERELEMENT 0
CHAPTER 3 187
MAXIMUM
APPLIED LOADS
SUBCASE/
DAREA ID
T1
T2
T3
0.0000000E+00
0.0000000E+00
0.0000000E+00
0.0000000E+00
R1
0.0000000E+00
R2
0.0000000E+00
R3
0.0000000E+00
0.0000000E+00
0.0000000E+00
0.0000000E+00
0.0000000E+00
0.0000000E+00
0.0000000E+00
0.0000000E+00
0.0000000E+00
0.0000000E+00
0.0000000E+00
0.0000000E+00

DATA BLOCK OUG1
101
12 IN BINARY (LTLEND) FORMAT USING NDDL DESCRIPTION FOR OUG, TRL =
288
NAME OF DATA BLOCK WRITTEN ON FORTRAN UNIT IS OUG1

16386 WORDS.)
146 WORDS.)

40 RECORDS.)
775 WORDS.)
DOUBLE FLYSWATTER MODEL
APRIL
2, 2011
MSC NASTRAN
IN PHASE LOADS
7/15/10
SUPERELEMENT 0
SUBCASE 1
POINT ID.
TYPE
T1
T2
V E C T O R
T3
R1
R2
13
0.0
0.0
1.142174E-04
5.814735E-05
6.925292E-07
0.0
R3
14
0.0
0.0
1.142174E-04
5.814735E-05
-6.925292E-07
0.0
19
0.0
0.0
1.939904E-04
8.944685E-05
9.119628E-06
0.0
20
0.0
0.0
1.859524E-04
8.734564E-05
8.727956E-06
0.0
Etc.
APRIL
2, 2011
MSC NASTRAN
IN PHASE LOADS
7/15/10
SUPERELEMENT 0
SUBCASE 1
S T R E S S E S
ELEMENT
FIBER
ID GRID-ID
5
DISTANCE
I N

NORMAL-X
CEN/4 -5.000000E-01 4.440042E+01
NORMAL-Y
5.761679E+01 -3.128198E-11
5.000000E-01-4.440042E+01 -5.761679E+01
13 -5.000000E-01 4.325489E+01
etc.
Main Index

MAJOR
MINOR
VON MISES
-90.0000
5.761679E+01
4.440042E+01
5.227697E+01
-4.440042E+01 -5.761679E+01
5.227697E+01
0.0000
5.761679E+01 -3.127998E-11
-90.0000
3.127998E-11
0.0000
5.761679E+01 -3.128264E-11
-90.0000
5.000000E-01-4.325489E+01 -5.761679E+01
3.128264E-11
( Q U A D 4 ) OPTION = BILIN
ANGLE
3.128198E-11
5.000000E-01-4.325489E+01 -5.761679E+01
14 -5.000000E-01 4.325489E+01
SHEAR-XY
E L E M E N T S
0.0000
4.325489E+01
5.194682E+01
-4.325489E+01 -5.761679E+01
5.761679E+01
5.194682E+01
4.325489E+01
5.194682E+01
-4.325489E+01 -5.761679E+01
5.761679E+01
5.194682E+01


DATA BLOCK OES1X1
101

63
12 IN BINARY (LTLEND) FORMAT USING NDDL DESCRIPTION FOR OES1X, TRL =
11
NAME OF DATA BLOCK WRITTEN ON FORTRAN UNIT IS OES1X1

16386 WORDS.)
146 WORDS.)

Listing 3-12
40 RECORDS.)
748 WORDS.)
Solution and Data Recovery of the Residual Structure
Following the data recovery of the residual, the boundary solution for each superelement is partitioned,
and data recovery for the superelement is performed. Schematically, this is represented as:
Figure 3-24
Main Index
Superelement Data Recovery Schematic
CHAPTER 3 189
In the MSC.Nastran .f06 file, the data recovery for each superelement is as follows:
APRIL
2, 2011
MSC NASTRAN
7/15/10
SUPERELEMENT 10
MAXIMUM
DISPLACEMENTS
SUBCASE/
DAREA ID
T1
T2
T3
0.0000000E+00
0.0000000E+00
7.6338986E-04
9.9121149E-05
R1
1.6829072E-05
R2
0.0000000E+00
0.0000000E+00
0.0000000E+00
6.4533821E-04
4.1716754E-05
8.6961452E-05
0.0000000E+00
0.0000000E+00
0.0000000E+00
4.2660381E-03
5.5805803E-04
2.8907216E-05
R3
APRIL
0.0000000E+00
2, 2011
MSC NASTRAN
7/15/10
SUPERELEMENT 10
MAXIMUM
APPLIED LOADS
SUBCASE/
DAREA ID
T1
T2
T3
0.0000000E+00
0.0000000E+00
2.0000000E+00
0.0000000E+00
R1
0.0000000E+00
R2
0.0000000E+00
R3
0.0000000E+00
0.0000000E+00
2.0000000E+00
0.0000000E+00
0.0000000E+00
0.0000000E+00
0.0000000E+00
0.0000000E+00
6.3999999E-01
0.0000000E+00
0.0000000E+00
0.0000000E+00

DATA BLOCK OUG1
101
12 IN BINARY (LTLEND) FORMAT USING NDDL DESCRIPTION FOR OUG, TRL =
864
NAME OF DATA BLOCK WRITTEN ON FORTRAN UNIT IS OUG1

16386 WORDS.)
288 WORDS.)

40 RECORDS.)
1351 WORDS.)
APRIL
2, 2011
MSC NASTRAN
IN PHASE LOADS
7/15/10
SUPERELEMENT 10, 1
SUBCASE 1
POINT ID.
etc.
Main Index
TYPE
T1
T2
V E C T O R
T3
R1
R2
33
0.0
0.0
3.683764E-04
9.794447E-05
1.543324E-05
0.0
R3
34
0.0
0.0
3.560836E-04
9.801662E-05
1.548379E-05
0.0
35
0.0
0.0
3.440241E-04
9.593536E-05
1.486124E-05
0.0
36
0.0
0.0
3.321574E-04
9.586434E-05
1.520494E-05
0.0
37
0.0
0.0
3.192997E-04
9.717572E-05
1.586828E-05
0.0

APRIL
2, 2011
MSC NASTRAN
IN PHASE LOADS
7/15/10
PAGE
SUPERELEMENT 10
SUBCASE 1
S T R E S S E S
ELEMENT
FIBER
ID GRID-ID
18
CEN/4
I N
DISTANCE
NORMAL-X
-5.000000E-01
NORMAL-Y
1.147215E+00
-5.000000E-01 -7.783450E-01
OPTION = BILIN
ANGLE
MAJOR
5.651187E-01 -1.174470E+00 -38.0409
MINOR
VON MISES
2.066162E+00 -3.538281E-01
2.263909E+00
51.9591
3.538281E-01 -2.066162E+00
2.263909E+00
4.400495E+00 -1.174470E+00 -77.8013
1.174470E+00
4.654397E+00 -1.032246E+00
5.247230E+00
12.1987
1.032246E+00 -4.654397E+00
5.247230E+00
-5.000000E-01 -7.783450E-01 -3.270258E+00 -1.174470E+00 -21.6541
-3.120555E-01 -3.736547E+00
3.590704E+00
5.000000E-01
34
( Q U A D 4 )
SHEAR-XY
5.000000E-01 -1.147215E+00 -5.651187E-01
33
E L E M E N T S
5.000000E-01
7.783450E-01 -4.400495E+00
7.783450E-01
3.270258E+00
1.174470E+00
1.174470E+00
68.3459
3.736547E+00
3.120555E-01
3.590704E+00
etc.

DATA BLOCK OES1X1
101
63
12 IN BINARY (LTLEND) FORMAT USING NDDL DESCRIPTION FOR OES1X, TRL =
11
NAME OF DATA BLOCK WRITTEN ON FORTRAN UNIT IS OES1X1

16386 WORDS.)
2175 WORDS.)

Listing 3-13
40 RECORDS.)
7012 WORDS.)
Data Recovery for Superelements (typical)
SPCFORCE RESULTANT
SUBCASE/
LOAD
DAREA ID
TYPE
Main Index
FX
T1
0.000000E+00
T2
T3
R1
----
----
----
FY
----
FZ
----
----
-4.000000E+00
MX
----
----
----
-4.000000E+01
MY
----
----
----
----
MZ
----
----
----
----
TOTALS
0.000000E+00
FX
0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00
----
0.000000E+00
R2
0.000000E+00
----
0.000000E+00 -9.208634E-12
----1.234923E-11
----
0.000000E+00 -4.000000E+00 -4.000000E+01 -2.155787E-11

----
----
----
0.000000E+00
R3
0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00
---------0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00
73
,
CHAPTER 3 191
FY
----
FZ
----
0.000000E+00
----
-3.943512E-12
MX
----
----
----
-2.762679E-11
----
MY
----
----
----
----
-1.189256E+01
MZ
----
----
----
----
----
TOTALS
0.000000E+00
FX
0.000000E+00
----
0.000000E+00
----
----
0.000000E+00
----
----
FZ
----
----
MX
----
----
----
MY
----
----
----
----
MZ
----
----
----
----
0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00
---3.200000E+01
0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00
2.560000E+02
3.200000E+01
---0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00
-------
0.000000E+00 -3.943512E-12 -2.762679E-11 -2.080000E+01
FY
TOTALS
----
0.000000E+00 -8.907443E+00
----
0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00
5.097167E-11
----
----
----
6.834711E-11
----
2.560000E+02
---0.000000E+00
1.193188E-10
APRIL
0.000000E+00
2, 2011
MSC NASTRAN
7/15/10
MAXIMUM
DISPLACEMENTS
SUBCASE/
DAREA ID
T1
T2
T3
0.0000000E+00
0.0000000E+00
7.6338986E-04
9.9121149E-05
R1
1.6829072E-05
R2
0.0000000E+00
0.0000000E+00
0.0000000E+00
6.4533821E-04
4.1716754E-05
8.6961452E-05
0.0000000E+00
0.0000000E+00
0.0000000E+00
4.2660381E-03
5.5805803E-04
3.4896173E-05
R3
APRIL
0.0000000E+00
2, 2011
MSC NASTRAN
7/15/10
MAXIMUM
APPLIED LOADS
SUBCASE/
DAREA ID
T1
T2
T3
0.0000000E+00
0.0000000E+00
2.0000000E+00
0.0000000E+00
R1
0.0000000E+00
R2
0.0000000E+00
0.0000000E+00
0.0000000E+00
2.0000000E+00
0.0000000E+00
0.0000000E+00
0.0000000E+00
0.0000000E+00
0.0000000E+00
6.3999999E-01
0.0000000E+00
0.0000000E+00
0.0000000E+00

BY LANCE PROCTOR, EAGLESIM
R3
APRIL
2, 2011
MSC NASTRAN
7/15/10
APP LOAD RESULTANT

SUBCASE/
LOAD
DAREA ID
TYPE
Main Index
FX
T1
0.000000E+00
T2
T3
R1
----
----
----
FY
----
FZ
----
0.000000E+00
----
----
MX
----
----
----
MY
----
----
----
----
MZ
----
----
----
----
4.000000E+00
0.000000E+00
4.000000E+01
0.000000E+00
R2
0.000000E+00
---0.000000E+00
---0.000000E+00
----
R3
0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00
---------0.000000E+00
CREATED

TOTALS
0.000000E+00
FX
0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00
----
4.000000E+00
----
0.000000E+00
----
FY
----
FZ
----
----
MX
----
----
----
MY
----
----
----
----
MZ
----
----
----
----
TOTALS
0.000000E+00
FX
0.000000E+00
----
4.000000E+01
0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00
----
0.000000E+00
----
0.000000E+00
----
----
MX
----
----
----
MY
----
----
----
----
MZ
----
----
----
----
0.000000E+00
----
0.000000E+00
2.080000E+01
----
----
----
----
----
FZ
0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00
----
0.000000E+00
----
0.000000E+00
FY
TOTALS
0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00
-3.200000E+01 -2.560000E+02
0.000000E+00
---0.000000E+00
2.080000E+01
0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00
----
0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00
----
----
----
0.000000E+00
----
0.000000E+00 -3.200000E+01 -2.560000E+02
0.000000E+00
APRIL
---0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00
2, 2011
MSC NASTRAN
7/15/10
IN PHASE LOADS
E Q U I L I B R I U M
C H E C K
RESULTANT LOADS IN BASIC COORDINATE SYSTEM
SUBCASE
REFERENCE
LOAD
NO.
POINT
TYPE
ORIGIN
ORIGIN
ORIGIN
T1
T2
APP-LOAD
0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00
4.000000E+00
F-OF-SPC
0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00
-4.000000E+00
-------------
-------------
-------------
*TOTALS*
0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00
APP-LOAD
0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00
F-OF-SPC
0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00
-3.943512E-12
-------------
-------------
-------------
*TOTALS*
0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00
APP-LOAD
0.000000E+00
F-OF-SPC
0.000000E+00
*TOTALS*
Listing 3-14
Main Index
R2
R3
4.000000E+01
0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00
-4.000000E+01
-2.155787E-11
0.000000E+00
-------------
-------------
-------------
0.000000E+00
-2.155787E-11
0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00
2.080000E+01
0.000000E+00
-2.762679E-11
-2.080000E+01
0.000000E+00
-------------
-------------
-------------
-3.943512E-12
-2.762679E-11
0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00
-3.200000E+01
-2.560000E+02
0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00
3.200000E+01
2.560000E+02
1.193188E-10
0.000000E+00
-------------
-------------
-------------
-------------
-------------
-------------
0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00
1.193188E-10
0.000000E+00
Listing
T3
R1
CHAPTER 3 193
Main Index
Figure 3-25
Deflections for Pressure Loads SESET Model
Figure 3-26
Deflections for In Phase Point Loads SESET Model

Main Index
Figure 3-27
Deflections for Opposing Point Loads SESET Model
Figure 3-28
Stress Tensor for Pressure Load (max = 1.79E+3) SESET Model
CHAPTER 3 195
Main Index
Figure 3-29
Stress Tensor for In-Phase Loads (Max = 2.87E+02) SESET Model
Figure 3-30
Stress Tensor for Opposing Loads (Max = 1.59E+02) SESET Model


The PART superelement equivalent will be generated in Patran.
Static Example using Patran (flyswatter)

The PART superelement process follows the list superelement process in Patran with the exception of
writing the input file. For the case of PART superelements, be sure that the Write Part Superelement
box is checked on the Select Superelements form:
Figure 3-31
Main Index
Example of Selecting SESET Superelements for an Analysis
CHAPTER 3 197
The resulting bulk data includes the residual bulk data followed by the BEGIN SUPER = SEID for each
of the superelements:
BEGIN BULK
$ Direct Text Input for Bulk Data
PARAM
POST
-1
PARAM
GRDPNT
PARAM
PRTMAXIM YES
$ Elements and Element Properties for region : pshell.10

PSHELL
10
10
1.
10
10
$ Pset: "pshell.10" will be imported as: "pshell.10"

CQUAD4
10
13
14
24
23
0.
0.
$ Referenced Material Records

$ Material Record : mat1.10
$ Description of Material :
MAT1*
*
10
3.+7
1.15385+7
.3
7.33-4
$ Nodes of Group :
GRID
13
-.4
3.6
0.
GRID
14
.4
3.6
0.
GRID
23
-.4
4.4
0.
GRID
24
.4
4.4
0.
$ Loads for Load Case : _IN_PHASE_LOADS.SC201

$ Loads for Load Case : _OPPOSING_LOADS.SC301
$ Loads for Load Case : _PRESSURE_LOAD.SC101
$ Pressure Loads of Load Set : pload2.101.2D
$ Referenced Coordinate Frames
$
$
$ Superelement Name: SE.10
BEGIN SUPER = 10
PARAM
POST
-1
PARAM
GRDPNT
PARAM
PRTMAXIM YES

PSHELL
1.

CQUAD4
18
33
34
46
45
0.
0.
CQUAD4
19
34
35
47
46
0.
0.
CQUAD4
20
35
36
48
47
0.
0.
CQUAD4
21
36
37
49
48
0.
0.
Etc.
Main Index

GRID
97
-2.
10.
0.
GRID
98
-1.2
10.
0.

LOAD
303
1.
1.
201

LOAD
305
1.
1.
301

LOAD
307
1.
1.
101
$ Nodal Forces of Load Set : force.201

FORCE
201
93
2.
0.
0.
1.
0.
0.
1.

FORCE
301
93
2.

PLOAD4
101
18
-1.
THRU
42

$
$
$ Superelement Name: SE.20
BEGIN SUPER = 20
PARAM
POST
-1
PARAM
GRDPNT
PARAM
PRTMAXIM YES

PSHELL
1.

CQUAD4
43
39
40
52
51
0.
0.
CQUAD4
44
40
41
53
52
0.
0.
CQUAD4
45
41
42
54
53
0.
0.
Listing 3-15
Partial Listing of PART Superelement Input File
The SEMAP is in a different format for the PART superelement than it is for the main bulk data section
list superelement. However, the partitions for these two models are exactly the same.
PRIMARY
PROCESS
DOWNSTREAM
ORDER
SUPERELEMENT
TYPE
------------ ------------ ------- ------------ -----------------------------
Main Index
RESIDUAL STRUCTURE
10
20
30
40
50
LABEL
------------------------
CHAPTER 3 199
60
70

PRIMARY
PROCESS
DOWNSTREAM
ORDER
SUPERELEMENT
TYPE
LABEL
------------ ------------ ------- ------------ ----------------------------10
20
30
40
50
60
70
RESIDUAL STRUCTURE
------------------------

SUPERELEMENT
------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
APRIL
2, 2011
MSC NASTR
T R E E
NO. LEVELS =
NO. TIPS =
7 )
TIP
LEVEL
LEVEL
LEVEL
LEVEL
LEVEL
LEVEL
LEVEL
LEVEL
LEVEL
INDEX
-1-
-2-
-3-
-4-
-5-
-6-
-7-
-8-
-9-
Main Index
10
20
30
40
50
60

70
APRIL
2, 2011
MSC NASTR

BOUNDARY
SEQUENCE ID --------------------------------- ASSIGNED TO POINT ID (SUPERELEMENT) --------------------
1B
35 (
10)
35 (
30)
2B
36 (
10)
36 (
30)
3B
41 (
20)
41 (
40)
4B
42 (
20)
42 (
40)
5B
19 (
30)
19 (
50)
6B
20 (
30)
20 (
50)
7B
27 (
40)
27 (
60)
8B
28 (
40)
28 (
60)
9B
13 (
0)
13 (
50)
10B
23 (
0)
23 (
50)
11B
14 (
0)
14 (
60)
12B
24 (
0)
24 (
60)
13 (
70)
14 (
70)
APRIL
2, 2011
MSC NASTR
- "B" INDICATES BOUNDA
INTERIOR TO
POINT ID
TYPE
SUPERELEMEMT ------------------------------- CONNECTED TO SUPERELEMENT ---
1B
10
30
2B
10
30
3B
20
40
4B
20
40
5B
30
50
6B
30
50
7B
40
60
8B
40
60
9B
50
70
10B
50
11B
60
12B
60
70
APRIL
2, 2011
MSC NASTR
POINT/SUPERELEMENT CONNECTIVITY LIST (SORTED BY FIRST POINT ID - "B" INDICATES B
Main Index
CHAPTER 3 201
FIRST
COUNT
INTERIOR TO
POINT ID
TYPE
1B
10
30
3B
20
40
5B
30
50
7B
40
60
9B
50
70
10B
50
11B
60
12B
60
70
APRIL
2, 2011
MSC NASTR
POINT/SUPERELEMENT CONNECTIVITY LIST (SORTED BY COUNT - "B" INDICATES BOUNDARY S

FIRST
COUNT
INTERIOR TO
POINT ID
TYPE
12B
60
10B
50
11B
60
70
9B
50
70
1B
10
30
5B
30
50
3B
20
40
7B
40
60
APRIL
2, 2011
MSC NASTR
POINT/SUPERELEMENT CONNECTIVITY LIST (SORTED BY INTERIOR SUPERELEMENT - "B" INDI

FIRST
COUNT
INTERIOR TO
POINT ID
TYPE
12B
60
5B
30
50
3B
20
40
1B
10
30
9B
50
70
11B
60
70
10B
50
7B
Listing 3-16
Main Index
40
60
SEMAP of Process Order for PART Superelement Example

SUPERELEMENT

LIST OF
INDEX
INTERIOR POINTS
12 )
-1-
-2-
-3-
-4-
-5-
-6-
-7-
-8-
-9-
-10-
1B
2B
3B
4B
5B
6B
7B
8B
9B
10B
11
11B
12B
SUPERELEMENT

LIST OF
INDEX
1
-1-
-2-
-3-
ELEMENTS
-4-
-5-
-6-
-7-
-8-
1 )
-9-
-10-
SUPERELEMENT
10
TYPE = PRIMARY (BEGIN SUPER)

LIST OF
INDEX
1
-1-
-2-
1B
2B
-3-
EXTERIOR POINTS
-4-
-5-
SUPERELEMENT
-6-
-7-
-8-
2 )
-9-
-10-
20

LIST OF
INDEX
1
-1-
-2-
3B
4B
-3-
EXTERIOR POINTS
-4-
-5-
SUPERELEMENT
-6-
-7-
-8-
2 )
-9-
-10-
30

LIST OF
INDEX
1
EXTERIOR POINTS
-1-
-2-
-3-
-4-
1B
2B
5B
6B
SUPERELEMENT
-5-
-6-
-7-
-8-
4 )
-9-
-10-
40

LIST OF
INDEX
1
EXTERIOR POINTS
-1-
-2-
-3-
-4-
3B
4B
7B
8B
-5-
SUPERELEMENT
-6-
-7-
-8-
4 )
-9-
-10-
50

LIST OF
INDEX
1
Main Index
EXTERIOR POINTS
-1-
-2-
-3-
-4-
5B
6B
9B
10B
-5-

-6-
-7-
-8-
4 )
-9-
-10-
CHAPTER 3 203
SUPERELEMENT
60

LIST OF
INDEX
1
EXTERIOR POINTS
-1-
-2-
-3-
-4-
7B
8B
11B
12B
-5-
SUPERELEMENT
-6-
-7-
-8-
4 )
-9-
-10-
70

LIST OF
INDEX
1
-1-
-2-
9B
11B
Listing 3-17
-3-
-4-
EXTERIOR POINTS
-5-

-6-
-7-
-8-
-9-
2 )
-10-
SEMAP of External Grids for PART Superelement Example
Note that the remainder of the processing (Phase 0, Phase 1, Phase 2, and Phase 3) and .f06 file output
follows the List Superlement Example.
Also, the Patran post-processing plots are the same as for the List Superelement example
Main Index


External superelements provide another useful method of solving this model. The advantage of external
superelements to the practitioner is that different organizations can generate the external superelement
w/o divulging proprietary geometry or proprietary material properties.
Static Example Using Patran (flyswatter)

For this example the same model of the flyswatter is used. It should be noted that even though this is a
complete model, in general, the models of the individual parts will be generated completely separately.
In this example, the 2-Step Method using MATRIXDB method will be used. Patran provides a
convenient method of generating external superelements. For example, to create an external
superelement of superelement 10, the following procedure can be performed in Patran.
First, the user defines the boundary points by creating the ASET entries. This is accomplished in the
Meshing Tab by selecting the DOF List icon. Next, select the dof to use and the boundary nodes as
shown below.
Figure 3-32
Main Index
Creating the Boundary D0OF with an ASET for Superelement 10
CHAPTER 3 205
When creating the analysis, the group associate with each external superelement is selected:
Figure 3-33
Select the Group Associated with Superelement 10
The form for setting up the external superelement creation is straight forward. In Translation Parameters,
the user selects Ext. Superelement Spec and defines the parameters for the reduction. These
parameters closely mirror the EXTSEOUT case control command.
Main Index

Figure 3-34
Defining an External Superelement in Patran (EXTSEOUT)
The user must also select the boundary dof (ASET) in the Solution Parameters form:
Main Index
CHAPTER 3 207
Figure 3-35
Define the Appropriate ASET by selecting the Appropriate DOF List
Finally, the Output Transformation Matrices (OTMs) are based on the output requests. Note that only
displacement, spcforce, element stress, and element strain are supported. Also note that bilin is not
supported for element stresses, but center is supported (refer to OTM Limitations).
Main Index

Figure 3-36
Set the Stress Output to Center
The resulting bdf file includes the EXTSEOUT case control and ASET bulk data entries necessary to
generate an external superelement for SE 10.
SOL 101
CEND
$ Direct Text Input for Global Case Control Data
TITLE = MSC NASTRAN job created on 02-Apr-11 at 19:25:07
ECHO = NONE
EXTSEOUT(ASMBULK,EXTBULK,EXTID=10,MATRIXDB)
SUBCASE 1
TITLE=DOUBLE FLYSWATTER MODEL
SUBTITLE=IN PHASE LOADS
LOAD = 303
DISPLACEMENT(SORT1,REAL)=ALL
Main Index
CHAPTER 3 209
STRESS(SORT1,REAL,VONMISES,CENTER)=ALL
$ Direct Text Input for this Subcase
SUBCASE 2
SUBTITLE=OPPOSING LOADS
LOAD = 305
SUBCASE 3
SUBTITLE=PRESSURE LOAD
LOAD = 307
BEGIN BULK
PARAM
PARAM
POST
-1
PRTMAXIM YES

PSHELL
1.

CQUAD4
18
33
34
46
10.
0.
45
0.
0.
[Remainder of model definition]
GRID
98
-1.2

LOAD
303
1.
1.
201

LOAD
305
1.
1.
301

LOAD
307
1.
1.
101

FORCE
201
93
2.
0.
0.
1.
0.
0.
1.

FORCE
301
93
2.

PLOAD4
101
18
-1.
ASET1
123456
35
36

ENDDATA
Main Index
THRU
42

Listing 3-18
.bdf File for External Superelement 10 Creation Run
Similar steps are followed for the remainder of the superelements, with the exception of the residual
structure. Note that since MATRIXDB is the method, the reduction runs must be made with SCR=NO
on the command line in order to save the database so that it can be used in the assembly step (step 2).
Note that each model should select all 3 subcases even if there is no load on the superelement for a
specific subcase. This is discussed more in Mechanical Loads in Static Analysis (Ch. 4).
Each reduction run will produce a .MASTER/.DBALL file which contains the reduced matrices and a
.asm file which contains the assembly instructions for MSC.Nastran. An example of the .asm file is:
$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$
$
$ ASSEMBLY PUNCH (.ASM) FILE FOR EXTERNAL SUPERELEMENT
10
$ ------------------------------------------------------------$
$ THIS FILE CONTAINING BULK DATA ENTRIES PERTAINING TO
$ EXTERNAL SUPERELEMENT
10 IS MEANT FOR INCLUSION
$ ANYWHERE IN THE MAIN BULK DATA PORTION OF THE ASSEMBLY RUN

$
$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$
$--------------------------- COLUMN NUMBERS ---------------------------$00000000111111111122222222223333333333444444444455555555556666666666777
$23456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012
$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$
$
SEBULK
10EXTERNAL
MANUAL
$
SECONCT
10
35
35
36
36
$
$ BOUNDARY GRID DATA
$
GRID
35
-3.6
6.
0.
GRID
36
-2.8
6.
0.
$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$
Listing 3-19
.asm File Contents for Superelement 10
Note that in this case, the GRIDs in the external superelement creation run have the same IDs as the
GRIDs in the assembly run. If this were not the case, either the SEBULK AUTO option could be used,
or the user could update the SECONCT the grid pairs to match the situation.
After all of the parts have been reduced, the assembly run will attach the reduced models and perform the
solution and data recovery. The group selected for this run is pshell.10 (the residual structure). In order
Main Index
CHAPTER 3 211
to attach the external superelement databases, the File Management Section must have the appropriate
ASSIGN and DBLOCATE statements as shown below:
Figure 3-37
File Management Section Direct Text Input required for Assembly Run
In order for the results of all superelements to be placed on the op2 file, PARAM,POST,-1 must be
specified for each superelement. The most convenient way to accomplish this is to add it to the case
control:
Main Index

Figure 3-38
Assembly Run needs PARAM,POST,-1 in Case Control to Obtain Output for

Each Superelement
In addition, the bulk data section must include the .asm files for the attachment instructions:
Main Index
CHAPTER 3 213
Figure 3-39
Bulk Data Section Direct Text Input required for Assembly Run
The resulting bdf file for the assembly run will look like this:
$ Direct Text Input for File Management Section
assign se10m='create-ext10.MASTER'
DBLOCATE DATABLK=(EXTDB) CONVERT(SEID=10) LOGI=se10m
$ Direct Text Input for Executive Control
$ Linear Static Analysis, Database
SOL 101
Main Index

CEND
param,post,-1
TITLE = MSC NASTRAN job created on 02-Apr-11 at 19:25:07
ECHO = NONE
SUBCASE 1
SUBCASE 2
SUBCASE 3
BEGIN BULK
include 'create-ext10.asm'
PARAM
POST
PARAM
GRDPNT
PARAM
PRTMAXIM YES

PSHELL
10
10
1.
10
10

CQUAD4
10
13

Main Index
14
24
23
0.
0.
CHAPTER 3 215
MAT1*
10
3.+7
1.15385+7
.3
7.33-4
$ Nodes of Group : pshell.10

GRID
13
-.4
3.6
0.
GRID
14
.4
3.6
0.
GRID
23
-.4
4.4
0.
GRID
24
.4
4.4
0.

ENDDATA
Listing 3-20
Input file for Assembly Run
The SEMAP indicates a single-level superelement tree. Also note that the TYPE indicates an external
superelement.
PRIMARY
PROCESS
DOWNSTREAM
ORDER
SUPERELEMENT
TYPE
------------ ------------ ------- ------------ ----------------------------0
10
10
EXTERNAL (SEBULK (A-SET))
20
20
30
30
40
40
50
50
60
60
70
70
LAB
--------------------
RESIDUAL STRUCTURE
SUPERELEMENT DEFINITION TABLE (SORTED BY PROCESS ORDE

PRIMARY
PROCESS
DOWNSTREAM
ORDER
SUPERELEMENT
TYPE
------------ ------------ ------- ------------ -----------------------------
Main Index
10
10
20
20
30
30
40
40
50
50
60
60
70
70
RESIDUAL STRUCTURE
LAB
--------------------


SUPERELEMENT
------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
APRIL
2, 2011
MSC N
T R E E
NO. LEVELS =
NO. TIPS =
TIP
LEVEL
LEVEL
LEVEL
LEVEL
LEVEL
LEVEL
LEVEL
LEVEL
LEVEL
INDEX
-1-
-2-
-3-
-4-
-5-
-6-
-7-
-8-
-9-
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
Listing 3-21
Listing
These files can be found in doc/seug/chapter3/ext-2-step-dmigpch

Table 3-3
External Superelement Example files

File
create-set10.bdf
create-set20.bdf
create-set30.bdf
create-set40.bdf
Main Index
CHAPTER 3 217
Table 3-3
External Superelement Example files

File
create-set50.bdf
create-set60.bdf
create-set70.bdf
assembly.bdf
Figure 3-40
Main Index
Displacements for In Phase Loads (Max = 7.63E-04) EXTSEOUT Model

Figure 3-41
Main Index
Displacements for Opposing Loads (Max = 6.45E-04) EXTSEOUT Model
CHAPTER 3 219
Figure 3-42
Main Index
Displacements for Pressure Loads (Max = 4.27E-03) EXTSEOUT Model

Figure 3-43
Main Index
Stress Tensor for In Phase Loads (Max = 2.72E+02) EXTSEOUT Model
CHAPTER 3 221
Figure 3-44
Main Index
Stress Tensor for Opposing Loads (Max = 1.51E+02) EXTSEOUT Model

Figure 3-45
Main Index
Stress Tensor for Pressure Loads (Max = 1.72E+02) EXTSEOUT Model
CHAPTER 3 223
Even though the answers are effectively the same, a thorough review of the .f06 files indicates there are
some differences the user should be aware of.
GRID POINT WEIGHT GENERATOR The Grid Point Weight Generator (GPWG) is
presented on a per-superelement basis. There is no roll-up of the GPWG. A complete

discussion of GPWG can be found in the Grid Point Weight Generator (Ch. 19) in the MSC
Nastran Linear Static Analysis Users Guide.
An alternative to PARAM,GRDPNT is the case control command WEIGHTCHECK. In static
analysis only the J-Set is available. The G-Set is available for dynamic analysis which will
provide the roll-up at the residual. Recall that the J-Set matrices are the elements for the
current superelement and the G-Set matrices include the upstream data.
In static analysis, inertia Loads (GRAV, RFORCE) are calculated as load vectors for each
superelement and brought down to the residual (the mass matrix is not reduced in static
analysis).
OLOAD RESULTANT - The OLOAD Resultant is also on a per-superelement basis. There is
no roll-up of the total applied loads for any of the superelement methods. A comprehensive
discussion of the OLOAD Resultant can be found in the Model Verification (Ch. 10) in the MSC
Nastran Linear Static Analysis Users Guide.
DCMP Messages associated with the Decomposition of the stiffness matrices:
For more information on these messages, refer to Mechanisms and Singularities (Ch. 10) in the
MSC Nastran Linear Static Analysis Users Guide.

Non-Superelement Model
DCMP is only performed for the residual KLL (the left-over set).
SESET and PART Superelements
DCMP is performed for each superelement reduction KOO (the omitted set)
DCMP is performed for the residual structure KLL (the left-over set)
DCMP is performed when generating each external superelement - KOO
DCMP is performed for the residual structure KLL
Main Index

For this example, the DCMP statistics associated with KLL can be compared. The Epsilon and External
Work are reported for each of the 3 subcases.
Table 3-4
Comparison of Max Ratio, Epsilon, and External Work

Model
KLL Max Ratio
Epsilon
External Work
Baseline
1.133766E+03
-4.6426305E-12
4.9504608E-02
-4.5038209E-12
1.5267804E-03
-2.1373923E-12
1.2906785E-03
-2.3362402E-13
1.5033779E-03
-7.3558232E-14
1.2672746E-03
-1.0165675E-13
4.9308721E-02
-1.9596399E-14
1.5033779E-03
-1.4003384E-13
1.2672746E-03
-4.2464950E-14
4.9308721E-02
-8.9743771E-14
1.5033779E-03
-1.3249746E-13
1.2672746E-03
-1.0808809E-13
4.9308721E-02
SESET
2.280555E+02
PART
3.737677E+02
EXTSEOUT
3.737677E+02
Note that the Max Ratio changes slightly for each method. This can be expected based on the roundoff
associated with reducing superelements and should not cause any concern to the practitioner. The
Epsilon values are a measure of the solution accuracy and are all numeric zero, which indicates a solid
numerical solution. The External Work is based on the work performed by the matrix available in the
residual structure. It is noted that the external work for all superelement solutions is exactly the same
indicating the methods have generated the same solution.
SPCFORCE Resultant. The SPCFORCE Resultant is also on a per-superelement basis. There is
no roll-up of the total applied loads for any of the superelement methods. A comprehensive
discussion of the SPCFORCE Resultant can be found in the Model Verification (Ch. 10) in the
MSC Nastran Linear Static Analysis Users Guide. In this example, only superelement 70 has
the SPCFORCE Resultant. This can be compared for each model:
Main Index
CHAPTER 3 225
Table 3-5
Comparison of SPCFORCE Resultant

Model
T3 Total
R1 Total
R2 Total
Baseline
-4.000000E+00
-4.000000E+01
zero
zero
zero
-2.080000E+01
3.200000E+01
2.560000E+02
zero
-4.000000E+00
-4.000000E+01
zero
zero
zero
-2.080000E+01
3.200000E+01
2.560000E+02
zero
-4.000000E+00
-4.000000E+01
zero
zero
zero
-2.080000E+01
3.200000E+01
2.560000E+02
zero
Not available
Not available
Not available
SESET
PART
EXTSEOUT
Note that zero is numeric 0.000 and values were reported as E-11 to E-13. Also note that for the
EXTSEOUT solution, the SPCFORCE Resultant is not available, but the SPCFORCES match the
SPCFORCES for all other solutions.
EQUILIBRIUM Check. Although not part of this example, a note is appropriate. The
EQUILIBRIUM Check is only available for non-superelement models. For further details, refer
to Equilibrium Checks (Ch. 10) in the MSC Nastran Linear Static Analysis Users Guide.
MAXIMUM SPCFforces, MAXIMUM Displacements, and MAXIMUM Applied Loads.
These values are output on a per-superelement basis.

DISPLACEMENT, SPCFORCE, ELSTRESS, and ELFORCE. Again, these quantities are
output on a per-superelement basis. For displacements, GRID 13 is in the residual for each
solution and GRID 93 has the maximum displacement. These values are compared here for
each of the 3 subcases:
Main Index

Table 3-6
Comparisons of Displacements Residual dof and Max Displacement dof

Model
Disp 13-T3
Disp 93-T3
Baseline
1.142174E-04
7.633902E-04
2.691105E-05
6.453393E-04
-7.091641E-04
-4.266040E-03
1.142174E-04
7.633899E-04
2.691100E-05
6.453382E-04
-7.091641E-04
-4.266038E-03
1.142174E-04
7.633899E-04
2.691100E-05
6.453382E-04
-7.091641E-04
-4.266038E-03
1.142174E-04
7.633899E-04
2.691100E-05
6.453382E-04
-7.091641E-04
-4.266038E-03
SESET
PART
EXTSEOUT
Comparisons of the stresses are similar EXCEPT that the external superelement is limited to (CENTER)
stresses as described in 2-Step method with EXTSEOUT (Ch. 2).
Since the external superelement used MATRIXDB, the precision of the external superelement is based
on machine precision, thus the solution vector is exactly the same as for both SESET and PART
superelements. If the user had selected DMIGPCH, there would have been small truncation errors
because of the ASCII format of the DMIG entries.
1.
Main Index
Chapter 4: Loads, Constraints, Case Control, and Parameters in Static Analysis
Main Index
Loads, Constraints, Case Control,

and Parameters in Static Analysis
Introduction
Case Control
Parameter Controls

Introduction
Introduction
A very simple first approach to using superelements in static analysis was presented in CHAPTER 1. In
this case, only a single superelement and load was defined. These concepts can be expanded to cover a
multitude of loadings and different settings on each component. As a review, a simplified superelement
reduction is shown here:
Figure 4-1
Simplified Depiction of Superelement Reduction, Solution, and Data Recovery
In Chapter 3, multiple superelements and loadings were introduced for single-level superelement
analysis. This Chapter will expose the user to more advanced capabilities available for static analysis.
For instance, we will describe mechanical loads, thermal loads, boundary conditions, advanced case
control, advanced parameter specification and special considerations for curved parts.
The key to understanding the MSC.Nastran methodology is to understand how the loads, constraints, and
parameters are partitioned and applied. Just like the geometric partitioning described in detail in
Superelement Partitioning (Ch. 2), the loads, constraints, and parameters are partitioned for each Load
Sequence. The user is encouraged to review Key Concepts in Superelement Partitions (Ch. 1).
Main Index
CHAPTER 4 229

Recall from Equation (1-12), that when processing loads on a superelement, the load vector is reduced to
the physical boundary using the static condensation transformation matrix.
T
Pt = Go t Po + Pt
(4-1)
Where the subscript t indicates retained boundary (exterior) dof and subscript o indicates omitted
(interior) dof. The loads are summed to the residual load vector P g by adding the upstream load
contributions P t
up
to the residual loads P j . This can be expressed as:
up
Pg = Pj + i = 1 Pt i
(4-2)
After the loads for the residual G-set are known, the solution follows the standard load reduction for a
non-superelement solution. The loads are partitioned to each superelement based on a set of rules
described in the subsections.
A detailed description of loads can be found in the Applied Loads (Ch. 1) in the MSC Nastran Reference
Manual.
List Superelements
The mechanical loads for List Superelement are handled differently depending on whether the loading
is grid based, element based, or inertial based.
Point Loads
Point loads are applied to grids or spoints and include DAREA, FORCE, FORCE1, FORCE2,
FORCEAX, MOMENT, MOMENT1, MOMENT2, and MOMENTAX entries.
Loads applied to points for List Superelements are partitioned in the same manner as the grid points and
elements. That is, point loads applied to interior points of a superelement are placed into the Bulk Data
Section for that superelement and processed accordingly. If a grid is exterior to one superelement and
interior to another, the grid based loads applied to the grid are ignored for the exterior grid and the load
is applied to the interior grid of the most downstream superelement for that grid.
Element Based Loads
Element based loads include distributed loads such as PLOAD, PLOAD1, PLOAD2, PLOAD4, and
PLOADAX.
Any loadings applied on an element are assigned to the superelement to which the element assigned.
Thus, a pressure load on a boundary element will result in a load on both the interior and exterior grids
of the element and the load will be calculated and assigned to the superelement.
Main Index

Inertial Loads
Inertial loads include loads that are applied to the mass properties such as ACCEL, ACCEL1, GRAV,
and RFORCE.
Just as in element loading, the inertia loads are calculated as the superelement is processed.
Example of Load Partitioning for List Superelements
Figure 4-2
Sample Loading for List Superelement Analysis
Each element is 10 units long with a cross sectional area of 1.0. There is a -3.0y force on grid 3 and 6.0y force on grid 6. A distributed load of -0.5y force/length is applied to elements 3 and 4. An inertial
load of -1.0y is applied to the entire model. For convenience of determining how the loads are applied,
they are separated into 3 subcases one for point loads, one for element loads, and one for the inertial
load.
This model, with the SESET entry shown, describes a single-level superelement problem with
superelements 10 and 0. The input file can be found at /doc/seug/chapter4/list-loads-sample.bdf.
SUBCASE 1
$ Subcase name : Forces
SUBTITLE=Forces
SPC = 2
LOAD = 2
OLOAD(SORT1,REAL)=ALL
STRESS(SORT1,REAL,VONMISES,BILIN)=ALL
SUBCASE 2
$ Subcase name : Pressure
SUBTITLE=Pressure
SPC = 2
Main Index
CHAPTER 4 231
LOAD = 5
SUBCASE 3
$ Subcase name : Gravity
SUBTITLE=Gravity
SPC = 2
LOAD = 7
BEGIN BULK
PARAM
PARAM
POST
-1
PRTMAXIM YES
$ Elements and Element Properties for region : unit

PBARL
1.
1.
BAR
$ Pset: "unit" will be imported as: "pbarl.1"

CBAR
0.
1.
0.
CBAR
0.
1.
0.
CBAR
0.
1.
0.
CBAR
0.
1.
0.
CBAR
0.
1.
0.

$ Material Record : sample
$ Description of Material : Date: 08-Apr-11
MAT1
1.+6
.3
Time: 19:45:12
1.
$ Nodes of the Entire Model

GRID
0.
0.
0.
GRID
10.
0.
0.
GRID
20.
0.
0.
GRID
30.
0.
0.
GRID
40.
0.
0.
GRID
50.
0.
0.
$ seid.10
SESET
10
$ Loads for Load Case : Forces
Main Index
SPCADD
LOAD
1.
1.
1.

$ Displacement Constraints of Load Set : fixed

SPC1
123456
$ Loads for Load Case : Pressure

LOAD
1.
1.
$ Loads for Load Case : Gravity

LOAD
1.
1.
$ Nodal Forces of Load Set : P3

FORCE
3.
0.
-1.
0.
6.
0.
-1.
0.
-1.
0.
$ Nodal Forces of Load Set : P6

FORCE
$ Gravity Loading of Load Set : g

GRAV
1.
0.
$ Distributed Loads of Load Set : press

PLOAD1
FYE
FR
0.
-.5
1.
-.5
PLOAD1
FYE
FR
0.
-.5
1.
-.5

ENDDATA
Listing 4-1
Input for Sample List Superelement Loading Model
The SEMAP for the model follows:

Table 4-1
SEMAP for Sample List Superelement Loading Model
Superelement
Exterior Grids
Interior Grids
Elements
1, 2, 3
1, 2
10
4, 5, 6
3, 4, 5
The Bulk Data entries for the applied loadings are partitioned as follows:
Force -6.0y is applied to grid 6. Since grid point 6 is interior to superelement 10, the load is
applied to superelement 10.

P6
= 6.0
(4-3)
Force -3.0y is applied on grid point 3. Since grid point 3 is interior to the residual structure, the
load is assigned to the residual structure Bulk Data.

P3
= 3.0
(4-4)
The pressure load, p, is applied on elements that belong to superelement 10; therefore, pressure
W is partitioned into the Bulk Data for superelement 1.

P3
Main Index
10
1
1
= --- p l 34 = --- 0.5 10.0 = 2.5
2
2
(4-5)
CHAPTER 4 233
P4
10
1
1
1
1
= --- p l 34 + --- p l 45 = --- 0.5 10.0 + --- 0.5 10.0 = 5.0
2
2
2
2
(4-6)
P5
10
1
= --- p l 45 = 2.5
2
(4-7)
If a GRAV entry were applied to this model, g, the loads for each grid would be:
P1
1
1
= --- g p l 12 A 12 = --- 1.0 1.0 10.0 1.0 = 5.0
2
2
P2
1
1
= --- g p l 12 A 12 + --- g p l 23 A 23 = 10
2
2
P3
1
= --- g p l 23 A 23 = 5.0
2
P3
10
P4
10
P5
10
P6
10
(4-8)
(4-9)
(4-10)
1
= --- g p l 34 A 34 = 5.0
2
(4-11)
= 10.0
(4-12)
= 10.0
(4-13)
= 5.0
(4-14)
Review of the MSC.Nastran solution confirms the manual calculations:
FORCES
SUPERELEMENT 0
SUBCASE 1
L O A D
POINT ID.
3
TYPE
G
T1
0.0
T2
V E C T O R
T3
-3.000000E+00
0.0
R1
0.0
MD NASTRAN JOB CREATED ON 08-APR-11 AT 20:33:55
R2
0.0
APRIL
R3
0.0
8, 2011
GRAVITY
MD NASTRAN
12/15/10
SUPERELEMENT 0
SUBCASE 3
L O A D
POINT ID.
Main Index
TYPE
T1
T2
V E C T O R
T3
R1
R2
R3
0.0
-5.000000E+00
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
-1.000000E+01
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
-5.000000E+00
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0

FORCES
SUPERELEMENT 10
SUBCASE 1
L O A D
POINT ID.
6
TYPE
G
T1
0.0
T2
V E C T O R
T3
-6.000000E+00
0.0
R1
0.0
R2
R3
0.0
APRIL
0.0
8, 2011
MD NASTRAN
PRESSURE
12/15/10
SUPERELEMENT 10
SUBCASE 2
L O A D
POINT ID.
TYPE
T1
T2
V E C T O R
T3
0.0
-2.500000E+00
0.0
0.0
-5.000000E+00
0.0
0.0
-2.500000E+00
0.0
R1
0.0
R2
R3
0.0
-4.166667E+00
0.0
0.0
-2.664535E-15
0.0
0.0
APRIL
4.166667E+00
8, 2011
MD NASTRAN
GRAVITY
12/15/10
SUPERELEMENT 10
SUBCASE 3
L O A D
POINT ID.
TYPE
T1
T2
V E C T O R
T3
R1
R2
R3
0.0
-5.000000E+00
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
-1.000000E+01
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
-1.000000E+01
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
-5.000000E+00
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
Listing 4-2
Loads for Sample List Superelement Loading Model
PART Superelements
Loads applied to grids or elements for PART Superelements are always applied to the PART and reduced
to the physical boundary (i.e. the P t matrix).
Loads applied to grids or elements for External Superelements are always applied and reduced to the
physical boundary (i.e. the P t matrix).
Main Index
CHAPTER 4 235

Thermal loads must also be partitioned and associated to the appropriate superelement dof in order to
obtain correct results. In statics, the thermal load is converted to forces at grids points by assuming a
fixed wall. For example, a simple rod element subjected to thermal loads will have equivalent
mechanical forces calculated by the following:
Calculate the thermal strains
Te mp = T
(4-15)
Calculate the thermal stresses for fixed grid
= E T em p
(4-16)
Calculate the equivalent mechanical forces
Fe q u i v = A
(4-17)
After the equivalent mechanical forces are calculated, they are added to the matrix and normal
reductions are made to the loads.
The displacement solution is calculated using the mechanical loads and thermal loads. The total strain
matrix is calculated as normal, but the stresses must account for the thermal strain. For the rod element:
Tot a l = M ec h + Te mp
(4-18)
Of course, the mechanical strain is the only component of the strain matrix that causes stress. Thus, the
stress can be expressed as
= E T ot a l Te mp = E Tot a l T
(4-19)
Thermal loads can be applied to the model by defining temperatures at the grids with TEMP or TEMP1
entries, or applied to the model by defining element temperatures with TEMPP1 or TEMPRB.
List Superelements
For list superelements, temperatures described by grid points are partitioned and assigned to BOTH the
interior and exterior grids of each superelement the grid is associated to. Of course, this makes sense
because the temperature loading is converted to the equivalent mechanical force on an elemental basis
and the element must have the T for all of its nodes.
Temperatures defined by elements are partitioned to the superelement the element belongs to.
Example of Thermal Load Partitioning for List Superelements
Consider the following model with E=1.E6, =1ppm/, and the cross sectional area of the beam = 1.0.
A temperature load of +25 is applied. There are two boundary conditions considered 1) cantilever, 2)
fixed-fixed.
Main Index

Figure 4-3
Sample Temperature Loading for List Superelement Analysis
The sample input files for both boundary conditions are located at: /doc/seug/chapter4/thermalloading/list-temperature-sample1.bdf (cantilever) and -sample2.bdf (fixed-fixed). The input for the
fixed-fixed example is as follows:
SOL 101
CEND
TITLE = MD Nastran job created on 08-Apr-11 at 20:33:55
SUBTITLE = created by Lance Proctor, EagleSim
ECHO = NONE
TEMPERATURE(INITIAL) = 1
SUBCASE 1
SUBTITLE=Thermal
SPC = 2
TEMPERATURE(LOAD) = 2
BEGIN BULK
PARAM
PARAM
POST
PRTMAXIM YES
$ Elements and Element Properties for region : unit

PBARL
1.
1.
BAR
$ Pset: "unit" will be imported as: "pbarl.1"

CBAR
0.
1.
0.
CBAR
0.
1.
0.
Main Index
CHAPTER 4 237
CBAR
0.
1.
0.
CBAR
0.
1.
0.
CBAR
0.
1.
0.

MAT1
1.+6
.3
Time: 19:45:12
1.
1.-6

GRID
0.
0.
0.
GRID
10.
0.
0.
GRID
20.
0.
0.
GRID
30.
0.
0.
GRID
40.
0.
0.
GRID
50.
0.
0.
$ seid.10
SESET
10
$ Loads for Load Case : Thermal

SPCADD
$ Grid Point Temperature Field Default for Load Case : Thermal

TEMPD
25.

SPC1
123456
$ Displacement Constraints of Load Set : fixed2

SPC1
123456
$ Default Initial Temperature

TEMPD
0.

ENDDATA
Listing 4-3
Sample List Superelement Temperature Loading Model (fixed-fixed)
In this case, the thermal load on each element will cause an expansion of the element thus the
equivalent mechanical load will be a tensile load. Considering the equations for element 1:
6
T em p = T = 1. 10 25. 0. = 25. 10
6
= E T em p = 1. 10 25. 10
= 25.
F e q u i v = A = 25. 1.0 = 25.
(4-20)
(4-21)
(4-22)
Since this is a tensile load, the nodal loads fore element 1 are
P1
P e le mT em p = P 1 Te mp = ------
= 25.
P 2 1 T em p
25.
Main Index
(4-23)

Similarly, for the remainder of the elements:
P3
P4
P5
P2
-
= 25. ------
= 25. ------
= 25. ------
= 25.
----P
P
P
25. 4 3Temp
25. 5 4Temp
25. P 6 5Temp
25.
3 2Temp
(4-24)
Considering the G-set load vector for each superelement:
P1
25.
0
P = P 2 = 25. + 25.
25
P3
25.
= 0.
25.
(4-25)
Similarly, for superelement 10:
10
P
=
P3
25.
P4
0.
=
P5
0.
25.
P6
(4-26)
For the cantilever case, the thermal displacements are unrestrained, so the tip displacement will be
6
3
= T L = 1. 10 25. 0. 50 = 1.250 10
(4-27)
The mechanical strain is calculated by removing the thermal strain from the total strain. In this case, there
will be zero strain, resulting in zero stress.
THERMAL
SUPERELEMENT 0
SUBCASE 1
L O A D
POINT ID.
T2
V E C T O R
TYPE
T1
-2.500000E+01
0.0
0.0
T3
0.0
R1
2.500000E+01
0.0
0.0
0.0
R2
0.0
0.0
APRIL
9, 2011
R3
0.0
0.0
MD NASTRAN
12/15/10
THERMAL
SUPERELEMENT 10
SUBCASE 1
L O A D
Main Index
V E C T O R
CHAPTER 4 239
POINT ID.
TYPE
T1
T2
T3
R1
R2
R3
-2.500000E+01
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
2.500000E+01
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
Listing 4-4
.f06 Loads for Sample List Superelement Temperature Loading Model
The results are expected for each boundary condition

THERMAL
(Cantilever Boundary Conditions)
SUPERELEMENT 0
SUBCASE 1
POINT ID.
TYPE
T1
T2
V E C T O R
T3
R1
R2
R3
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
2.500000E-04
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
5.000000E-04
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
S T R E S S E S
I N
B A R
E L E M E N T S
( C B A R )
ELEMENT
SA1
SA2
SA3
SA4
AXIAL
SA-MAX
SA-MIN
M.S
ID.
SB1
SB2
SB3
SB4
STRESS
SB-MAX
SB-MIN
M.S
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
THERMAL
SUPERELEMENT 10
SUBCASE 1
POINT ID.
T2
V E C T O R
TYPE
T1
5.000000E-04
0.0
0.0
T3
0.0
R1
0.0
R2
0.0
R3
7.500000E-04
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
1.000000E-03
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
1.250000E-03
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
S T R E S S E S
I N
B A R
E L E M E N T S
( C B A R )
ELEMENT
SA1
SA2
SA3
SA4
AXIAL
SA-MAX
SA-MIN
M.S
ID.
SB1
SB2
SB3
SB4
STRESS
SB-MAX
SB-MIN
M.S
Main Index
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0

0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
Listing 4-5
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
Output for Sample List Superelement Temperature Loading Model (Cantilever)
THERMAL2
(Fixed-Fixed Boundary Conditions)
SUPERELEMENT 0
SUBCASE 1
POINT ID.
TYPE
T1
T2
V E C T O R
T3
R1
R2
R3
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
F O R C E S
POINT ID.
TYPE
T1
2.500000E+01
O F
T2
T3
0.0
C O N S T R A I N T
R1
0.0
0.0
R2
0.0
R3
0.0
S T R E S S E S
I N
B A R
E L E M E N T S
( C B A R )
MENT
SA1
SA2
SA3
SA4
AXIAL
SA-MAX
SA-MIN
M.
D.
SB1
SB2
SB3
SB4
STRESS
SB-MAX
SB-MIN
M.
-2.500000E+01
-2.500000E+01
-2.500000E+01
-2.500000E+01
-2.500000E+01
-2.500000E+01
-2.500000E+01
-2.500000E+01
-2.500000E+01
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
-2.500000E+01
THERMAL2
SUPERELEMENT 10
SUBCASE 1
POINT ID.
Main Index
TYPE
T1
T2
V E C T O R
T3
R1
R2
R3
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
CHAPTER 4 241
F O R C E S
POINT ID.
TYPE
O F
T1
T2
-2.500000E+01
T3
0.0
0.0
S T R E S S E S
I N
C O N S T R A I N T
R1
0.0
B A R
R2
0.0
E L E M E N T S
R3
0.0
( C B A R )
MENT
SA1
SA2
SA3
SA4
AXIAL
SA-MAX
SA-MIN
M.
D.
SB1
SB2
SB3
SB4
STRESS
SB-MAX
SB-MIN
M.
-2.500000E+01
-2.500000E+01
-2.500000E+01
-2.500000E+01
-2.500000E+01
-2.500000E+01
-2.500000E+01
-2.500000E+01
-2.500000E+01
-2.500000E+01
-2.500000E+01
-2.500000E+01
-2.500000E+01
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
Listing 4-6
-2.500000E+01
-2.500000E+01
Output for Sample List Superelement Temperature Loading Model (FixedFixed)
PART Superelements
Thermal loads applied to grids or elements for PART Superelements are always applied to the PART,
converted to mechanical forces and reduced to the physical boundary (i.e. the P t matrix).
The above examples are re-created for PART superelements and are located at:
/doc/seug/chapter4/thermal-loading/part-temperature-sample1.bdf (cantilever) and sample2.bdf (fixedfixed).
Thermal loads applied to grids or elements for External Superelements converted to mechanical forces
and reduced to the physical boundary (i.e. the P t matrix).
The above examples are re-created for External superelements (MATRIXDB option) and are located at:
/doc/seug/chapter4/thermal-loading/ext-create-temperature-sample1.bdf, ext_assem-temperaturesample1.bdf (cantilever) and -sample2.bdf (fixed-fixed).
Main Index


Boundary conditions in static analysis include Single Point Constraints (SPCs), Multi Point Constraints
(MPCs) and Contact. In the case of contact, there are two types: touching contact and glued contact.
Contact is only supported in the residual structure, so it will not be discussed further in this Guide. If
contact is specified in a static run errors similar to this may be produced:
*** USER FATAL MESSAGE 1 (GP1M3DC)
*** USER FATAL MESSAGE 1 (%2)
0*** SYSTEM FATAL
MESSAGE
3062 MODULE = GP1
FAILURE OCCURRED IN UTILITY
CALLED IN SUBROUTINE GP1M3DC .
0FATAL ERROR
Listing 4-7
Sample Error When Contact is Specified with Superelements
Note that MSC.Nastran offers the user the flexibility of defining multiple constraints in the separate
subcases of an analysis. This feature is not currently supported with superelements and if the user
attempts to change the SPCs or MPCs between subcases, the following errors will occur:
^^^ USER
FATAL
MESSAGE 9072 (PHASE0)
^^^ MULTIPLE BOUNDARY CONDITIONS ARE NOT ALLOWED
Listing 4-8
FOR SUPERELEMENTS.
Error Message when User Attempt to Solve with Multiple Boundary Conditions
Single Point Constraints (SPCs)

Single Point Constraints (SPCs) are the fixed points in the solution. These can be defined with SPC,
SPC1, or on the GRID PS field. The SPC entries are activated with the SPC case control command,
while the GRID PS field are always active.
In addition to explicitly defined constraints, PARAM,AUTOSPC,YES will automatically constrain
singular dof. For detailed information on PARAM,AUTOSPC refer to the Automatic Application of
Single-Point Constraints (AUTOSPC) (Ch. 6) in the MSC Nastran Linear Static Analysis Users Guide.
List Superelements
Constraints applied to points for List Superelements are partitioned in the same manner as the grid points.
That is, constraints applied to interior points of a superelement are placed into the Bulk Data Section for
that superelement and processed accordingly. If a grid is exterior to one superelement and interior to
another, the constraint applied to the grid are ignored for the exterior grid and the constraint is applied to
the interior grid of the most downstream superelement for that grid.
Main Index
CHAPTER 4 243
PART Superelements
As with List Superelements, the constraints on interior dof of a part superelement are processed with the
superelement. However, constraints on exterior dof (i.e boundary grids) are carried down to the residual
structure. When this occurs, the user is reminded with a clear message in the .f06 file:
*** USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 7552 (BNDSP3)
BOUNDARY GRID
Listing 4-9
1B WILL INHERIT ITS CONTRAINTS FROM UPSTREAM SUPERELEMENT(S).
Info Message Issued Part Superelement Constraints are Applied to Boundary

dof
It is possible that either an explicit constraints or automatic constraints will be applied to a boundary grid.
In this case, as long as the analysis coordinate frames (CD on the GRID entry) are congruent between
the superelement components at the attachment grids, there is no problem. However, if the analysis
coordinate frames are not congruent, the following error will be issued:
*** USER FATAL MESSAGE 6804 (BNDSP3)
THE DISPLACEMENT COORDINATE SYSTEM (CD FIELD ON GRID ENTRY) SPECIFIED FOR BOUNDARY GRID ID
IN SUPERELEMENT
1 B
0 IS NOT CONGRUENT WITH DISPLACEMENT COORDINATE SYSTEMS IN OTHER CONNECTING SUPERELEMENTS.
*** USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 7552 (BNDSP3)

BOUNDARY GRID
1B WILL INHERIT ITS CONTRAINTS FROM UPSTREAM SUPERELEMENT(S).
^^^
^^^ USER
FATAL
^^^ RUN IS TERMINATED DUE TO MESSAGE(S) ABOVE
ON THE RESIDUAL STRUCTURE AND/OR THE SUPERELEMENT(S).
^^^
Listing 4-10
Error Issued When Part Superelement Constraints are Applied in NonCongruent Coordinate Systems
For external superelements, constraints will be applied and processed during the stiffness reduction. The
external superelement process will automatically transform the external stiffness from its original
coordinate frame to the residual coordinate frame. Boundary grids that have constraints should be
applied in the downstream superelement.
Grid Point Singularity Processing

Because each superelement is processed independently, it is possible to turn AUTOSPC on and off, for
each superelement (refer to section Parameter Controls below). Typically, AUTOSPC is applied to the
entire model (all superelements). PARAM,AUTOSPC,YES is the default for all superelement solutions
(except the nonlinear solutions).
When the grid point singularity processor (AUTOSPC) is applied to superelements, MSC.Nastran will
only process the interior points of each superelement. Any points that are exterior to a superelement are
Main Index

defined as belonging to the A-set for that superelement. AUTOSPC will not constrain an A-set DOF.
This logic makes sense because the exterior points of a superelement can have elements connected to
them from other superelements; therefore, to constrain these points before we have a chance to attach all
elements might over constrain the structure. AUTOSPC will process these grid points when processing
the downstream superelement that contains them as interior points.
Multipoint Constraints (MPCs) and Rigid Elements

Multi Point Constraints (MPCs) define dof dependencies in the solution. These can be defined with
MPC, RBAR, RBEi, RSPLINE, RTRPLT, or RSSCON. The rigid elements are automatically applied
to every solution, whereas the MPCs must be activated with the MPC case control command.
The parameter AUTOMSET can be used to rewrite the MPC equations to avoid set conflicts.
PARAM,AUTOMSET,YES is applicable to superelement analysis and will be processed in each
superelement if requested by the user.
List Superelements
R-type elements (RBE2, RBE3, RBAR, RSSCON, etc.) in the main Bulk Data are treated as elements;
i.e., their connectivity is used to determine which superelement partition the elements are assigned to.
The rules to determine exterior points are the same as if these were flexible elements.
MPCs are not used to define superelement exterior points, so when they are near a boundary, the user
may have to specify the exterior grids. Recall from Chapter 2 that element connectivity is used to
determine the exterior points for a superelement. Because MPC sets are called in Case Control and
different MPC sets can be used in each SUBCASE, MPC sets are not used in the definition of
superelements. MPC entries are partitioned according to the interior points of superelements. An MPC
entry is assigned to the highest upstream superelement (based on the processing order) to which it
connects.
Special care must be taken when an MPC or R-type element is connected to exterior points of a
superelement. Because the exterior points are in the A-set for the superelement, these points cannot be
listed as dependent (M-set) on an MPC or R-type element because a Set membership conflict will occur.
Note that PARAM,AUTOMSET,YES can often be used to resolve the set conflicts associated with
dependent dof.
A common modeling situation is to have two coincident grids at a superelement boundary as shown in
the following figure. In this case, MPCs or Rigid Elements are often used to connect the grids. Note
that if flexible elements such as CELAS or CBUSH are used, they will be partitioned as any other flexible
element and the following subsections are irrelevant.
Main Index
CHAPTER 4 245
Figure 4-4
Sample Model with Coincident Grids at Superelement Boundary
Rigid Element (RBAR) Connection

Suppose the user wants to connect the coincident grids with an RBAR and maintain grid 3 as the
boundary grid for superelement 10. In this case grid 3 must contain all of the independent dof and grid
11 will contain all of the dependent dof and the RBAR is as follows:
Figure 4-5
Patran Definition of RBAR 101 Connecting Coincident Nodes.
The Patran superelement partitioning does not recognize MPCs or Rigid Elements when defining
superelement boundaries. Since there are no flexible elements connecting grids 3 and 11, when the user
attempts to define superelement 10 in Patran, a clear warning is issued and the user must specifically
select the boundary grids:
Main Index

Figure 4-6
Patran Example Warning When Defining Superelements that are Connected

with MPC or Rigid Elements
Since the non-MPC elements only connect to grid 11 (and not grid 3), the user is obligated to select grid
11. If the user attempt to select grid 3, the following error is issued
Figure 4-7
Example of Selecting a Node that is not Connected to a Groups Element
Patran allows the user to select grid 11
Main Index
CHAPTER 4 247
Figure 4-8
Selecting an Acceptable Boundary Node
Note: Patran has a logical set of rules for the most common use cases. This example is contained in
/doc/seug/chapter4/rigid-elem/rbar-connection1.bdf. The resulting SESET for this case is:
RBAR
101
SESET
Listing 4-11
11
10
3
12
123456
123456
13
RBAR and SESET for rbar-connection1.bdf
And the SEMAP for this case is:

Table 4-2
SEMAP for Coincident Nodes at Boundary rbar-connection1.bdf
Superelement
Interior Grids
Exterior Grids
Elements
Residual
1, 2, 3, 11
1, 2, 101
10
12, 13
11
11, 12
The astute reader may be wondering why there is not a set conflict because grid 11 is dependent and an
exterior grid i.e. an A-Set point for superelement 10. The answer is that grid 11 is part of the A-Set for
superelement 10 and processed accordingly. Then the boundary point is added to Superelement 0 before
the MPCs are processed; i.e. recall equation 1-13:
Main Index

So, grid 11 is part of the A-set in Superelement 10, then it is part of the M-set in Superelement 0, which
is perfectly legal.
Suppose the user wants the RBAR to be part of superelement 10, what can be done? If the user defines
a PLOTEL (Element ID 14) between grid 3 and 11 and adds it to the superelement 10 group, then Patran
will allow grid 3 to be the exterior grid.
Figure 4-9
Automatic Boundary When PLOTEL is Added to Superelement Group
The resulting bdf for this case is located at /doc/seug/chapter4/rigid-elem/rbar-connection1p.bdf. The

SESET entry for this case becomes
PLOTEL
14
11
RBAR
101
11
123456
123456
$ Super10.10
SESET
Figure 4-10
Main Index
10
11
12
13
PLOTEL, RBAR, and SESET for rbar-connection1p.bdf
CHAPTER 4 249
Here the user must ensure that grid 3 is the independent grid on the RBAR (or MPC) in order to avoid a
set conflict. In this case, the SEMAP shows that PLOTEL 14 and RBAR 101 are assigned to
Superelement 10.
Table 4-3
SEMAP for rbar-connection1p.bdf
Superelement
Interior Grids
Exterior Grids
Elements
Residual
1,2,3
1, 2
10
11, 12, 13
11, 12, 14, 101
MPC Connections
Another method for connecting the model shown in Figure 4-4 is to use explicit MPCs.
$ Multipoint Constraints of the Entire Model
MPCADD
207
201
202
204
205
MPC
201
11
-1.
203
-1.
206
MPC
202
11
-1.
-1.
MPC
203
11
-1.
-1.
MPC
204
11
-1.
-1.
MPC
205
11
-1.
-1.
MPC
206
11
-1.
-1.
$ Super10.10
SESET
10
Listing 4-12
12
13
MPC and SESET entries for mpc-connection1.bdf
The SEMAP is similar to the RBAR case, except that there is no map entry for the explicit MPCs:
Table 4-4
SEMAP for Coincident Nodes at Boundary mpc-connection1.bdf
Superelement
Interior Grids
Exterior Grids
Elements
Residual
1, 2, 3, 11
1, 2
10
12, 13
11
12, 13
Like the RBAR example, the user could add PLOTEL 14 between grids 3 and 11 and assign grid 3 as
the boundary grids. In this case the modified bulk data and SEMAP follow:
PLOTEL
14
11
$ Multipoint Constraints of the Entire Model
Main Index
MPCADD
207
201
202
204
205
MPC
201
11
-1.
203
-1.
206
MPC
202
11
-1.
-1.
MPC
203
11
-1.
-1.
MPC
204
11
-1.
-1.

MPC
205
11
-1.
-1.
MPC
206
11
-1.
-1.
$ Super10.10
SESET
10
11
12
13
Listing 4-13
Listing
Table 4-5
SEMAP for Coincident Nodes at Boundary mpx-connection1p.bdf
Superelement
Interior Grids
Exterior Grids
Elements
Residual
1, 2, 3
1, 2
10
11, 12, 13
11, 12, 14
Assigning Exterior Points (CSUPEXT)

MSC.Nastran is offers an additional control for the user to define the exterior points of a superelement.
The user could use the CSUPEXT entry instead of defining PLOTELs. This may be more convenient
for models with dozens or hundreds of boundaries.
CSUPEXT
Superelement Exterior Point Definition
Assigns exterior points to a superelement.

Format:
1
CSUPEXT
SEID
GP1
GP2
GP3
GP4
GP5
GP6
GP7
147
562
937
10
Example:
CSUPEXT
Main Index
CSUPEXT
SEID
GP1
THRU
GP2
CSUPEXT
12006
THRU
12050
Field
SEID
GPi
Contents
Identification number of a primary superelement. (Integer > 0)
Grid or scalar point identification number in the downstream superelement or
residual structure. (Integer > 0 or THRU; For THRU option, GP1<GP2)
CHAPTER 4 251
For the RBAR or MPC example, the SESET entry is modified to include grid 11 and the CSUPEXT entry
specifies GRID 3 as the exterior point. The modified models are: /doc/seug/chapter4/rigid-elem/rbarconnection1.bdf and mpc-connnection1-csupext.bdf.
Super10.10
$ modify SESET and add CSUPEXT
SESET
10
CSUPEXT 10
11
12
13
Listing 4-14
Modifications for CSUPEXT Definition of Exterior Points
The corresponding SEMAPs are as follows:

Table 4-6
SEMAP for Coincident Nodes at Boundary rbar-connection1-csupext.bdf
Superelement
Interior Grids
Exterior Grids
Elements
Residual
1, 2, 3
1, 2
10
11, 12, 13
11, 12, 101
Table 4-7
SEMAP for Coincident Nodes at Boundary mpc-connection1-csupext.bdf
Superelement
Interior Grids
Exterior Grids
Elements
Residual
1, 2, 3
1, 2
10
11, 12, 13
11, 12
PART Superelements
When PART superelements are used, the user must ensure that the exterior boundary points are part of
the A-Set. This means that if grid 3 is selected as the boundary, the user must ensure that it contains the
independent dof of the MPC or RBAR. Patran does not recognize MPCs on the boundary of PART
superelements, so the user can export the model for each group and then manually assemble the model
with INCLUDE statements.
For example, the PART superelement bdf for the RBAR configuration contained in Superelement 10 can
be written from the Analysis Form as follows:
Main Index

Figure 4-11
Writing an Individual Part bdf Model from Patran
This will result in a bulk data file containing the following entries:
PBARL
1.
1.
BAR
$ Pset: "bar" will be imported as: "pbarl.1"

CBAR
11
11
12
0.
1.
0.
CBAR
12
12
13
0.
1.
0.

MAT1
1.+6
.3
.1
Time: 16:42:01
1.-6
$ Multipoint Constraints of Group : SE10

RBAR
101
11
123456
123456
$ Nodes of Group : SE10

GRID
20.
0.
0.
GRID
11
20.
0.
0.
GRID
12
30.
0.
0.
GRID
13
40.
0.
0.
$ Loads for Load Case : Default

$ Nodal Forces of Load Set : axial
FORCE
Listing 4-15
13
1000.
1.
0.
0.
PART bdf for Superelement 10 Containing the RBAR, part10-rbar.bdf
The residual solution can be written with an INCLUDE file for the PART. Note that since there is a
BEGIN SUPER, the Direct Text Input for the Bulk Data must be written at the END of the bulk data
Main Index
CHAPTER 4 253
section. In addition, since there are duplicate boundary nodes, the user must specify SEBNDRY in order
to avoid User Fatal Message 6794.
*** USER FATAL MESSAGE 6794 (SEPSEB)
DUPLICATE BOUNDARY POINTS DETECTED IN UPSTREAM SUPERELEMENT 10 WHILE SEARCHING 0 AT GRID 3.
LIST FOLLOWS:
11
0FATAL ERROR
Listing 4-16
Example of Error 6794 When There are Duplicate Boundary Nodes
Figure 4-12
Example of SECONCT, BEGIN SUPER, and INCLUDE for PART

Superelement
Since the loads must be consistent across all superelements, and the only loads are defined by the
FORCE entry in the part superelement, a LOAD entry must be added to the subcase.
Main Index

Figure 4-13
The resulting residual bulk data file is:
SOL 101
CEND
TITLE = MD Nastran job created on 09-Apr-11 at 17:43:48
ECHO = NONE
SUBCASE 1
SUBTITLE=Default
LOAD = 1
SPC = 2
BEGIN BULK
PARAM
Main Index
POST
-1
CHAPTER 4 255
PARAM
PRTMAXIM YES
$ Elements and Element Properties for region : bar

PBARL
1.
1.
BAR
$ Pset: "bar" will be imported as: "pbarl.1"

CBAR
0.
1.
0.
CBAR
0.
1.
0.

MAT1
1.+6
.3
.1
Time: 16:42:01
1.-6
$ Nodes of Group : residual

GRID
0.
0.
0.
GRID
10.
0.
0.
GRID
20.
0.
0.

SPCADD

SPC1
123456

SEBNDRY,10,0,3
BEGIN SUPER = 10
include 'part10-rbar.bdf'
ENDDATA
Listing 4-17
Residual Bulk Data File for rbar-residual.bdf
A similar process can be followed for explicit MPCs. Note that since the MPCs are in the PART
superelement an MPCADD must be added. In this example, the MPCADD is placed in the direct text
input for the part superelement export:
Main Index

Figure 4-14
Combining Explicit MPCs with MPCADD
In addition, the MPCs will need to be activated by adding MPC=200 to the Direct Text Input for Case
Control.
Main Index
CHAPTER 4 257
Figure 4-15
Activating MPCs for the PART Superelement Solution
The resulting input files are located at: /doc/seug/chapter4/rigid-elem/ext10-mpc.bdf and mpcresidual.bdf.
Defining the external superelement is similar to defining the PART superelement, except that the ASET
and EXTSEOUT entries must be defined.
Recall from Single-Level Analysis Using External Superelements (Ch. 3) that the ASET is easily defined
from the Meshing tab using the DOF List:
Main Index

Figure 4-16
Defining the ASET for External Superelement 10
Also recall from Single-Level Analysis Using External Superelements (Ch. 3)that the EXTSEOUT
parameters are set when defining the Analysis in the Solution Parameters Form. In this case, the
MATRIXDB option is used for the external file format.
Main Index
CHAPTER 4 259
Figure 4-17
Defining the EXTSEOUT for Superelement 10
For the RBAR case, the example files are: doc/seug/chapter4/rigid-elem/ext10-rbar.bdf and assemblerbar.bdf.
For the MPC case, the example files are: doc/seug/chapter4/rigid-elem/ext10-mpc.bdf and assemblempc.bdf.
Main Index

Case Control
Case Control
MSC.Nastran has several superelement-unique Case Control commands that allow the user maximum
flexibility in superelement solutions. These commands include manual processing commands such as
SEMG, SELG, SEKR, SELR, SEMR, SEALL, and SEDR. A brief description of these entries is in
the table below. For detailed descriptions on usage, refer to the Quick Reference Guide Case Control
section. For detailed description of the operations for each command, refer to the appropriate section in
the Reference Manual.
Table 4-8
Manual Superelement Processing Case Control Directives
Case Control Command
Purpose
SEMGenerate
Superelement Element Matrix Generation generate and

assemble the structural matrices ( K jj , M j j , B j j , etc.)
SELGenerate
Superelement Loads Generation generate loads matrix

( Pj )
SEKReduce
Superelement Stiffness Reduction

K g g K n n K ff
SELReduce
Superelement Load Reduction P g P l
SEMReduce
Superelement Mass Reduction K g g K a a
SEALL
SEDRecovery
Perform all Generate and Reduce operations on specified

superelements
Superelement Data Recovery
Information in this section refers to the Structured Solution Sequences (SSS), SOLs 100 through 200.
The manual processing commands are not of particular interest in these solutions, because these solutions
have automatic superelement processing. In prior versions of MSC.Nastran, Solutions 61 through 99
(Unstructured Solution Sequences, USS) were manual solutions, and in those solutions the use of the
manual processing commands was mandatory. Therefore, with the exception of SEDR, the details of
these commands are not covered in detail in this User Guide.
Case Control commands that are unique to superelement analysis are SEEXclude (SEEX), SEFINAL,
and (the most important Case Control command for superelements) SUPER. The SEFINAL and SEEX
commands are processing commands that control processing order (SEFINAL) and inclusion (SEEX).
Their description and use is beyond the scope of this User Guide, but experienced superelement users
may find them useful for debugging and advanced operations.
The SUPER command is the command used to partition the Case Control into a unique subset for each
superelement. The understanding and use of the SUPER Case Control command is extremely important
Main Index
CHAPTER 4 261
in both static and dynamic analysis. This Chapter will discuss the SUPER command as it relates to
statics.
For a general refresher on the Case Control section in statics, refer to the The Case Control Section
(Ch. 2) in the MSC Nastran Linear Static Analysis Users Guide.
The SUPER Command

The SUPER Case Control command is used to partition the Case Control into a unique subset for each
superelement. The purpose of the SUPER command is to partition the Case Control in a manner similar
to the Bulk Data partitioning. That is, each superelement has its own unique set of Case Control created,
based on the use of the SUPER command. During the processing of each superelement, its unique Case
Control will be used.
At the risk of sounding redundant, the SUPER command is the most important Case
Control command for superelements. It is also the most frequently misused command, and when it is
misused, either incorrect results, fatal errors, or no output can occur. Therefore, strict attention must be
paid to the use of the SUPER command.
For most cases, condensed case control (described below) is all that is required the SUPER command
can be omitted since SUPER=ALL is the default. The following subsections describe the SUPER use for
cases when different loadings, output requests, or processing requests are used for individual
superelements.
SUPER
Superelement Subcase Assignment
Assigns a subcase(s) to a superelement or set of superelements.

Format:
ALL
SUPER = setid

lseqid
seid
Examples:
SUPER=17,3
SUPER=15
Main Index
(4-28)

Case Control
SUPER=ALL
Field
Contents
seid
Superelement identification number (Integer > 0).
ALL
The subcase is assigned to all superelements and all loading conditions (Default).
setid
Set identification number of a previously appearing SET command. The subcase is

assigned to all superelements with identification numbers that appear on this SET
command (Integer > 0).
lseqid
Load sequence number (Integer > 0; Default=1).
The SUPER command can occur in each SUBCASE and can appear before the first SUBCASE (in which
case it is a default behavior for all subcases without a SUPER entry). The purpose of the SUPER
command is to allow different loadings, constraints, and output requests for individual superelements.
In superelement analysis Case Control is treated differently than in conventional analysis. Internally,
MSC.Nastran creates a separate Case Control set for each superelement (called CASES); thus, each
superelement can have its own unique SUBCASE for each loading condition.
A SUBCASE must exist for the residual structure for each loading condition. An internal counter (lseqid)
is based on the load sequence of residual structure SUBCASEs, which is in contrast with conventional
analysis, where each SUBCASE defines a unique loading condition (or solution).
Another way of describing this is that there are n load vectors for the residual that result in n solution
vectors. Thus, at the final reduction level for statics, the L-set:
P l = K ll U l
(4-29)
Expanding to n load vectors:

P l 1 P l2 P l3 P l n = K ll U l 1 U l 2 U l 3 U ln
(4-30)
Where P li and U l i are the load vector and solution vector for load sequence i (a.k.a. lseqid). These
are stored in ascending SUBCASE ID order for the residual subcases.
Main Index
CHAPTER 4 263
The user must ensure that there is a superelement load vector for each residual load vector. This is where
the understanding of the SUPER=seid,lseqid becomes important.
Note:
MSC.Nastran stores data blocks on the database with Qualifier. For example, each
superelement has a P g vector, but how is MSC.Nastran supposed to know which one is
associated to a particular superelement? The answer is that the MSC.Nastran database has
metadata associated with each data block. This metadata is in the form of Qualifiers. For
instance, the Qualifiers for P g include SEID, P2G, and MTEMP to name a few. For a
detailed description on qualifiers, refer to the PATH description in the MD Nastran 2006
DMAP Programmers Manual, Chapter 3.2. The full path descriptors can be found in the
installation del directory, file nddl.dmap.
The full description of the P g path qualifiers are:

Table 4-9
NDDL PATH Qualifiers for
NDDL Path
PG
Qualifiers
SEID,PEID,MTEMP,DESITER,PVALID,APRCH,QCPLD,adjoint,
HIGHQUAL,P2G,K2GG,M2GG,inertia,DELTA,auxmid,bndshp,
isolapp,desinc,discrete,partname $
The scope of this document limits us to explore only a few of these qualifiers.

A simple example of condensed Case Control is:
DISP=ALL
STRESS=ALL
SPC=2
SUBCASE 101
LOAD = 15
SUBCASE 201
LOAD = 3
SUBCASE 301
LOAD = 77
Listing 4-18
Main Index
Simple Example of Condensed Case Control

Case Control
Assuming that, in addition to the residual structure, there are 2 superelements (SEID=1 and SEID=2), the
Case Control partition (CASES) for each Superelement is as follows:
Table 4-10
SEID
Internal Partitioning (CASES) of Simple Example of Condensed Case Control

Case
Control
Load Sequence ID (lseqid)

(Column number in P g )
1
101
201
301
15
77
SPC ID
SPC=2
SPC=2
SPC=2
MPC ID
(MPC=0)
(MPC=0)
(MPC=0)
Output
Requests
DISP=ALL,
STRESS=ALL
DISP=ALL,
STRESS=ALL
DISP=ALL,
STRESS=ALL
SUBCASE
101
201
301
15
77
SPC=2
SPC=2
SPC=2
Output
Requests
DISP=ALL,
STRESS=ALL
DISP=ALL,
STRESS=ALL
DISP=ALL,
STRESS=ALL
SUBCASE
101
201
301
15
77
SPC=2
SPC=2
SPC=2
DISP=ALL,
STRESS=ALL
DISP=ALL,
STRESS=ALL
DISP=ALL,
STRESS=ALL
SUBCASE
ID
LOAD
ID
ID
LOAD
ID
SPC ID
MPC ID
ID
LOAD
ID
SPC ID
MPC ID
Output
Requests
Main Index
CHAPTER 4 265
Since there are no explicit MPCs activated by the case control, the Case Control does not include an MPC
qualifier. Similarly, there are no PARAMs, so all PARAM statements will be based on the bulk data or
default values. Examples for PARAMs are included in Parameter Controls.

While condensed case control is sufficient for most applications, there is flexibility afforded to the user
with expanded case control. In statics, the common reasons for using expanded case control are:
SPCs have different IDs in different superelements for the same load sequence
MPCs have different IDs in different superelements for the same load sequence
LOADs have different IDs in different superelements for the same load sequence
Different output is requested for different superelements
Different PARAMeters apply to different superelements (see Parameter Controls)
Different Eigenfrequency cutoffs are required for different superelement (i.e. the METHOD
case control used in dynamics)

For all of these conditions, the correct application of SUBCASE / SUPER is required for the proper
results. At worst, the user will get wrong results; at best, results will be missing.
The following examples demonstrate expanded case control and the internal CASES for each
superelement. These examples can be found in the installation: /doc/seug/chapter4/expanded-caseccex1.dat, expanded-casecc-ex2.dat, and expanded-casecc-ex3.dat
DISP=ALL
STRESS=ALL
SUBCASE 11
SUPER=10,1
SPC=3
SUBCASE 12
SUPER=10,2
SUBCASE 13
SUPER=10,3
LOAD=542
Listing 4-19
Main Index
SUBCASE 21
SUPER=20,3
SPC=3
LOAD=21
SUBCASE 22
SUPER=20,2
SPC=3
LOAD=22
SUBCASE 23
SUPER=20,1
SPC=3
Expanded Case Control Example 1
SUBCASE 31
SUPER=0,1
SPC=2
LOAD=1
SUBCASE 32
SUPER=0,2
SPC=2
LOAD=29
SUBCASE 33
SUPER=0,3
SPC=2
LOAD=3

Case Control
Table 4-11
SEID
Expanded Case Control Example 1 Internal Partitioning (CASES)

Case
Control

1
31
32
33
29
SPC ID
SUBCASE
11
12
13
542
SPC ID
SUBCASE
23
22
21
22
21
SUBCASE
ID
LOAD
ID
ID
LOAD
ID
ID
LOAD
ID
SPC ID
This particular example will result in a multitude of errors:


^^^
^^^ USER
FATAL
^^^ MULTIPLE BOUNDARY CONDITIONS ARE NOT ALLOWED
FOR SUPERELEMENTS.
^^^
Main Index
CHAPTER 4 267
*** USER FATAL MESSAGE 7323 (SEP2D)

SUBCASES FOR SUPERELEMENT 20 HAS A LOAD SEQUENCE NUMBER = 2 WHICH IS OUT OF ORDER.
*** USER FATAL MESSAGE 7323 (SEP2D)
SUBCASES FOR SUPERELEMENT 20 HAS A LOAD SEQUENCE NUMBER = 1 WHICH IS OUT OF ORDER.

*** USER WARNING MESSAGE 2053 (GP4)
UNDEFINED SINGLE-POINT CONSTRAINT SET
^^^
^^^ USER
FATAL
^^^ RUN IS TERMINATED DUE TO MESSAGE(S) ABOVE
ON THE RESIDUAL STRUCTURE AND/OR THE SUPERELEMENT(S).
^^^
Listing 4-20
Errors for Expanded Case Control Example 1
The first error is that multiple boundary conditions are not allowed for superelements. This is because
Superelement 10 has SPC=3 for SUBCASE 10/lseqid=1, and no SPCs for the other subcase / load
sequences. The next error is because the load sequence number is out of order for superelement 20. A
corrected version of the case control is as follows:
DISP=ALL
STRESS=ALL
SUBCASE 11
SUPER=10,1
SPC=3
SUBCASE 12
SUPER=10,2
SPC=3
SUBCASE 13
SUPER=10,3
LOAD=542
SPC=3
Main Index
SUBCASE 21
SUPER=20,1
SPC=3
LOAD=23
SUBCASE 22
SUPER=20,2
SPC=3
LOAD=22
SUBCASE 23
SUPER=20,3
SPC=3
LOAD=21
SUBCASE 31
SUPER=0,1
SPC=2
LOAD=1
SUBCASE 32
SUPER=0,2
SPC=2
LOAD=29
SUBCASE 33
SUPER=0,3
SPC=2
LOAD=3

Case Control
Table 4-12
SEID
Expanded Case Control Example 2 Internal Partitioning (CASES)

Case
Control

1
31
32
33
29
SPC ID
SUBCASE
11
12
13
542
SPC ID
SUBCASE
21
22
23
22
21
SUBCASE
ID
LOAD
ID
10
ID
LOAD
ID
20
ID
LOAD
ID
SPC ID
The Example 2 Case Control produces a valid case control. The astute reader will notice that the SPC
IDs are changed. This does not lead to a fatal message because the SPC IDs are consistent within a
superelement, which is the only requirement. Also, if the user runs this model, he will note that
AUTOSPC captures the 6 dof for superelement 20, but not for grids 111 and 211 in superelement 10,
nor the residual structure.
Main Index
CHAPTER 4 269
The following example is a variation that produces the same residual solution as Example 2:
DISP=ALL
STRESS=ALL
$ Constraints or Loads above 1st subcase applies to all subcases
$ unless superseded by a callout within the subcase
SPC=3
SUBCASE 13
SUPER=10,3
LOAD=542
Listing 4-21
SUBCASE 21
SUPER=20,1
LOAD=23
SUBCASE 22
SUPER=20,2
LOAD=22
SUBCASE 23
SUPER=20,3
LOAD=21
SUBCASE 31
SUPER=0,1
SPC=2
LOAD=1
SUBCASE 32
SUPER=0,2
SPC=2
LOAD=29
SUBCASE 33
SUPER=0,3
SPC=2
LOAD=3
Expanded Case Control Example 3
Note that the SPCs are automatically propagated to the missing SUPER=I,J subcases. However, this
is not true for the output requests as discussed in the next section.
Output Control
The output control (DISPLACEMENT, STRESS, FORCE, etc.) has similar rules to the loads and
constraints, but there are some clear differences. For Example 2 above (expanded-casecc-ex2.dat), there
is a subcase for each superelement and load sequence, so the output request above the first subcase
applies to every subcase unless an individual subcase requests more output or a different set of output
(i.e. DISP=ALL vs DISP=setid).
Main Index

Case Control
Table 4-13
SEID
Expanded Case Control Example 2 Output Requests

Case
Control

1
31
32
33
DISP
ALL
ALL
ALL
STRESS
ALL
ALL
ALL
SUBCASE
11
12
13
DISP
ALL
ALL
ALL
STRESS
ALL
ALL
ALL
SUBCASE
21
22
23
DISP
ALL
ALL
ALL
STRESS
ALL
ALL
ALL
SUBCASE
ID
10
ID
20
ID
In the case of Expanded Case Control Example 3 (expanded-casecc-ex3.dat ) above it is not required to
specify an expanded subcase for a SEID/lseqid combination that does not have loads. However, omitting
the subcase altogether will result in the omission of all output requests for that subcase. This omission
will not cause incorrect answers but will prevent obtaining any output for that superelement for that
loading condition
Main Index
CHAPTER 4 271
.
Table 4-14
Expanded Case Control Example 3 Output Requests
SEID
Case
Control
SUBCASE

1
31
32
33
DISP
ALL
ALL
ALL
STRESS
ALL
ALL
ALL
SUBCASE
11
12
13
DISP
ALL
STRESS
ALL
SUBCASE
21
22
23
DISP
ALL
ALL
ALL
STRESS
ALL
ALL
ALL
ID
10
ID
20
ID
Since there was no SUBCASE specified for SUPER=10,2 or SUPER=10,3, the output is null for these
SEID/lseqid combinations.
Another output control provided to the user is the SEDR case control command. The SEDR command
is used to select which superelements will have data recovery. By default, every superelement will have
data recovery based on the case control. However, the user can turn off all output requests associated
with a superelement by specifying the SEDR Case Control command.
SEDR
Superelement Data Recovery
Specifies the superelement identification numbers for which data recovery will be performed.
Format:
Main Index

Case Control
ALL
SEDR = i
(4-31)
Examples:
SEDR=ALL
SEDR=7
Field
Contents
ALL
Performs data recovery for all superelements.
Set identification number of a previously appearing SET command. Data recovery

will be performed for superelements with identification numbers that appear on this
SET command (Integer > 0).
Identification number of a single superelement for which data recovery will be

performed (Integer > 0).
Vector Output
Vector output such as DISPLACEMENT, VELOCITY, and ACCELERATION can be based on
SORT1 or SORT2 requests. SORT1 means that output will be presented as a tabular listing of grid points
for each load, frequency, eigenvalue, or time, depending on the solution sequence. A SORT2 request
means output will be presented as a tabular listing of load, frequency, or time for each grid point.
The defaults for SORT1 and SORT2 depend on the type of analysis:
SORT1 is the default in static analysis, frequency response, steady state heat transfer analysis,
real and complex eigenvalue analysis, flutter analysis, and buckling analysis.
SORT2 is the default in transient response analysis (structural and heat transfer). SORT2 is not
available for real eigenvalue (including buckling), complex eigenvalue, or flutter analysis. If
SORT1 is selected in a transient solution for one or more of the commands ACCE, DISP, ENTH,
FORC, HDOT, MPCF, OLOA, SPCF, STRA, STRE, and VELO, then the remaining commands
will also be output in SORT1 format. If SORT2 is selected in a static or frequency response
solution for one or more of the commands ACCE, DISP, FORC, MPCF, OLOA, SPCF, STRA,
STRE, and VELO, then the remaining commands will also be output in SORT2 format.
XYPLOT plot requests forces SORT2 and overrides SORT1 requests!
Tensor Output
The tensor output requests for STRESS and FORCE can have different output options. The location
options CENTER, CORNER, CUBIC, SGAGE, and BILIN are recognized only in the first subcase, and
Main Index
CHAPTER 4 273
determine the option to be used in all subsequent subcases with the STRESS, STRAIN, and FORCE
commands. In superelement analysis, the first subcase refers to the first subcase of each superelement.
Therefore, it is recommended that these options be specified above all subcases. Consequently, options
specified in subcases other than the first subcase will be ignored. See also Remark 8 under the FORCE
Case Control command for further discussion.
Main Index

Parameter Controls
Parameter Controls
In addition to loads, constraints, and output, the case control can be used to specify different
PARAMeters associated with each superelement. For example, the user may be assembling models that
were generated by different organizations and each organization may have used a different mass density.
Rather than modify each material entry for each component, the assembly model could use expanded
case control in conjunction with PARAM,WTMASS to control the mass density for each superelement.
With MSC.Nastran the user can specify parameters in Case Control. Many-but not all parameters can be
specified in Case Control. For a listing of which parameters can be specified in the case control, refer to
the Parameter Applicability Tables (Ch. 5) in the MSC Nastran Quick Reference Guide.
Because the user can specify values in Case Control, a different value can be specified for each
superelement. As with output requests, PARAM entries can be specified above the subcase level or
within individual subcases.
For the linear solutions, the value used in the first subcase appearing for a superelement is used for that
superelement for all subcases. If a parameter appears above the first subcase, the value given is a default
value and is used for all subcases (if not changed inside individual subcases). The value used for any
parameter when processing a superelement is determined with a strict set of rules. These rules state that
the value used for a parameter will be:
The value from the first subcase for that superelement
The default value specified before the first subcase (if not in the subcase)
The value specified in the Bulk Data (if not either of the above)
The default value of the parameter (if none of the above). Note that the default value can vary
between solutions. For instance, PARAM,AUTOSPC,YES is the default for SOL 101, b
Due to this hierarchy, if you wish to use different values for parameters for different superelements, it is
recommend that the user specify a default value above the first subcase and specify any exceptions inside
the appropriate subcases.
List Superelements
For List Superelements defined in a model with BEGIN BULK, a PARAM defined in the bulk data is
applicable to every superelement unless overridden by the same PARAM defined in the case control.
PART Superelements
For PART superelements defined with BEGIN SUPER, either each bulk data must have the desired
PARAMs, or they must be specified in the case control. A common misconception is that
PARAM,POST defined in the main bulk data section is applicable to all superelement. To the contrary,
PARAM,POST (and any other PARAM) entry must be specified either within the BEGIN SUPER
section or in the case control. Often, it is easier to define the PARAMs in the case control.
Main Index
CHAPTER 4 275
For External Superelements, there is very little flexibility to change PARAMs after the reduction is
performed. During the superelement reduction step (EXTSEOUT or PARAM,EXTOUT), the
PARAM entries associated with stiffness generation and reduction (or mass / load generation and
reduction) are applied. PARAMs associated with other operations are ignored. During the assembly run,
there are very few PARAMs that are recognized and applied. For instance, PARAM,SNORM will
affect the reduction run, but will never be applied to the reduced superelement in the assembly run.
Main Index

Most of the examples in this manual are presented with a non-superelement solution, a list superelement
solution, a part element solution to demonstrate that the same answers are achieved for any method. Up
to this point, the only entries that were required for superelements have been those associated with
partitioning the grids and elements. This section covers special considerations for models with curved
shells.
SNORM for PART or External Superelements

PARAM,SNORM provides a special situation that must be handled by the user for External
superelements. SNORM was introduced in V68.2 and became the default in V2001. The purpose of
SNORM is to generate unique grid point normals for adjacent shell elements as shown below. These
unique grid point normals are generated for the CQUAD4, CTRIA3, CQUADR, and CTRIAR
elements. The grid point normal is the average of the local normals from all adjacent shell elements
including CQUAD8 and CTRIA6 elements. When grid point normals are present, they are used in all
element calculations of the CQUAD4, CTRIA3, CQUADR, and CTRIAR elements and improve the
solution.
Figure 4-18
Unique Grid Point Normal for Adjacent Shell Elements
More details on SNORM can be found in Shell Models and Shell Normal (Ch. 3) in the MD Nastran
Reference Manual.
Main Index
CHAPTER 4 277
Example of Curved Shells

The example for this section comes from the Surface Elements (Ch. 1) in the MSC Nastran Reference
Manual. The 8x8 mesh will be used as shown here (note: the reference manual uses symmetry, so the
8x8 refers to the elements within a 90 arc and height).
Figure 4-19
Main Index
SNORM Example Model

Figure 4-20
Boundary Grids Between Superelement 4 and Superelement 1
The following example files are included in the installation in /doc/seug/chapter4/quadr-8x8-*.bdf.

Using the defaults, it is easy to see that the external superelement produces inconsistent results with
respect to the baseline, list superelements, and part superelements.
Table 4-15
SNORM Example Deflection Comparison Using Default Values
Filename
quadr-8x8-baseline.bdf
Residual Only
4.738975E-01
quadr-8x8-seset.bdf
List Superelement - BEGIN BULK
4.738975E-01
quadr-8x8-partse.bdf
PART Superelement BEGIN SUPER
4.738975E-01
External generation (EXTSEOUT)
n/a
quadr-8x8-extse-q1.bdf
Main Index
Grid 1 Radial
Deflection
Superelement Type
CHAPTER 4 279
Table 4-15
SNORM Example Deflection Comparison Using Default Values
Filename
Grid 1 Radial
Deflection
Superelement Type
n/a
n/a
n/a
External assembly
5.350466E-01
quadr-8x8-assembly.bdf
So, why is the external superelement solution so much different? The answer is the values of SNORM.
For the Residual Only, List Superelement, and Part Superelement solutions, MSC.Nastran has enough
information to form SNORM based on all of the elements attaching to each grid even if they are not in
the current superelement. In the case of External Superelements, MSC.Nastran has no information
about what is beyond the boundary, and bases the SNORM value on the elements it knows about. For
all of these example cases, PARAM,SNORMPRT,1 was turned on so that the SNORM direction cosines
are output to the .pch file. Examination of these values for grid 1 indicates that there is a significant
difference between the internal and external solutions:
Table 4-16
SNORM Example Direction Cosine Comparison Using Default Values

Filename
Grid 1 SNORM Direction Vector

Nx
Ny
Nz
quadr-8x8-baseline.bdf
-1.00000
0.00000
0.00000
quadr-8x8-seset.bdf
-1.00000
0.00000
0.00000
quadr-8x8-partse.bdf
-1.00000
0.00000
0.00000
0.99518
0.09802
0.00000
0.99518
-0.09802
0.00000
n/a
n/a
n/a
quadr-8x8-assembly.bdf
To correct these values, the user must manually define the SNORM direction cosines for each grid on
the boundary that is affected. For the grids shown in Figure 4-20, these entries are:
Main Index
SNORM
-1.00000 0.00000 0.00000
SNORM
10
-1.00000 0.00000 0.00000
SNORM
19
-1.00000 0.00000 0.00000
SNORM
28
-1.00000 0.00000 0.00000
SNORM
37
-1.00000 0.00000 0.00000
SNORM
46
-1.00000 0.00000 0.00000
SNORM
55
-1.00000 0.00000 0.00000
SNORM
64
-1.00000 0.00000 0.00000
SNORM
73
-1.00000 0.00000 0.00000

SNORM
82
-1.00000 0.00000 0.00000
SNORM
91
-1.00000 0.00000 0.00000
SNORM
100
-1.00000 0.00000 0.00000
SNORM
109
-1.00000 0.00000 0.00000
SNORM
118
-1.00000 0.00000 0.00000
SNORM
127
-1.00000 0.00000 0.00000
SNORM
136
-1.00000 0.00000 0.00000
SNORM
145
-1.00000 0.00000 0.00000
Listing 4-22
SNORM Correction Entries for Grids at =0.0
To complete the example problem suite, the following files are contained in the
/doc/seug/chapter4/snorm directory:
1.
Main Index
Chapter 5: Inertia Relief Analysis Using Superelements
Main Index
Inertia Relief Analysis Using

Superelements
Introduction

Introduction
Introduction
Inertia relief is a subset of static analysis that can be used to let the body inertia react the applied loads.
Common applications include free-free aircraft where the aeroelastic loads are known and the mass is
used to balance the loads. Automotive applications can include applying known loads at the axles and
allowing the inertia of the structure to balance the loads.
Inertia relief is normally used to find the static solution of models that are not fully constrained. That is,
if a structure has possible mechanisms or rigid body motion, a static analysis cannot be performed using
conventional methods. Inertia relief provides an approach that can solve problems containing
mechanisms or rigid body modes by applying supports in order to calculate an equivalent set of body
accelerations. These body accelerations are applied equal and opposite to the applied loads. The
supports allow a stable solution while the body accelerations ensure that a zero net reaction load is
realized at the support locations.
The reader is encouraged to review the following reference documentation for further description and
theoretical discussion:
Inertia Relief (Ch. 11) in the MSC Nastran Linear Static Analysis Users Guide
Rigid Body Supports (Ch. 1) in the MSC Nastran Reference Manual
Static Condensation in SubDMAPs SEKR and SEMR2 (Ch. 1) in the MSC Nastran Reference
Manual
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 283

Users can use inertia relief to obtain a static solution for a structure that is not stable, but is in a state of
equilibrium under loading. Examples of structures in this state are aircraft in flight, cars in motion, and
spacecraft in orbit. Each of these structures has one or more unconstrained, rigid body motions possible.
Therefore, it is not possible to solve these problems using conventional static analysis. In inertia relief
the structure is in a state of static equilibrium under applied loading and inertial loads.
When inertia relief is invoked, the program will calculate the summation of all loads and the mass
properties about the reference degrees-of-freedom (DOFs), and then the inertial loads required to put the
structure in a state of static equilibrium will be calculated. The program applies the static loads and these
accelerations simultaneously. The model is now in a state of equilibrium, and a set of constraints must
be added that can prevent any rigid body motion or mechanisms. The program accomplishes this task by
constraining the reference DOFs and performing the solution. If the structure is capable of rigid body
motion or mechanisms and the reference DOFs can prevent these, then the reaction forces at the
reference DOFs will be zero.
The inertia relief implementation in SOL 101 allows a maximum of six reference dof can be specified.
This is in contrast to SOL 1 (non-superelement solution) which has a general implementation and allows
for any number and combination of rigid-body modes and mechanisms. The intent of SOL 101 is to
allow the solution of structures that are free-free (or to allow rigid body motion) and not to resolve
structures that have additional mechanisms. At the superelement level, SOL 101 calculates additional
inertia loadings (beyond those specified in the Case Control Section). Each of these loads corresponds
to a unit acceleration of the superelement mass about the reference point (PARAM,GRDPNT). The
procedure used to solve the inertia relief problem is described in detail in General Operations (Ch. 1) in
the MSC Nastran Reference Manual.
Main Index


Inertia relief is only applicable in static analysis. The inertia relief path is invoked when the user specifies
PARAM,INREL. There are two options available as described in the following sections.
Manual Definition of Reference Points

In SOL 101 the manual definition of inertia relief is invoked by using a SUPORT or SUPORT1 with
SUPORT1 case control and PARAM,INREL,-1. The SUPORT and SUPORT1 entries are as follows:
SUPORT / SUPORT1
Fictitious Support
Defines determinate reaction degrees-of-freedom (r-set) in a free body analysis.

SUPORT1 must be requested by the SUPORT1 Case Control command.
Format(s):
1
SUPORT
ID1
C1
ID2
C2
ID3
C3
ID4
C4
SUPORT1
SID
ID1
C1
ID2
C2
ID3
C3
10
Examples:
SUPORT
16
123456
SUPORT1
16
Field
123456
Contents
SID
Identification number of the support set.
Idi
Grid or scalar point identification numbers.
Ci
Component numbers. (Integer zero or blank for scalar points, or any unique
combinations of the Integers 1 through 6 for grid points with no embedded blanks.)
If a SUPORT entry is used and PARAM,INREL is not set to -1, MSC.Nastran will treat the SUPORT
entries the same as SPC1 constraints on the specified dof and the static solution with the reference
(SUPORT) DOFs constrained and will not calculate the acceleration loads required for equilibrium.
If PARAM,GRDPNT is specified in an inertial relief run, it must be specified for all superelements, and
the location of the reference grid point must be identical for all superelements. Otherwise a FATAL
message will be issued. NOTE: this is one potential issue with specifying PART Superelements with
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 285
inertia relief in Patran. Unless the user removes the PARAM,GRDPNT from the input file, the following
message will likely occur:
^^^
^^^ USER
FATAL
^^^ GRID POINT 501
ON PARAM,GRDPNT IS NOT KNOWN TO THE CURRENT SUPERELEMENT. THIS IS NOT ALLOWED IN INERTIA
RELIEF.
^^^
An additional Bulk Data entry, DMIG,UACCEL, is available so user-specified accelerations can be

used in place of the ones calculated for equilibrium. When using DMIG,UACCEL, the user must specify
the point about which the accelerations will be applied (this point must appear on a SUPORT entry). A
different acceleration can be specified for each subcase. In this case, uniform accelerations are applied
to the model, and the solution is found. Uniform accelerations are useful for situations, such as spacecraft
liftoff and landing loadings, which are often specified as static accelerations.
DMIG,UACCEL
Direct Matrix Input of Enforced Static Acceleration
Defines rigid body accelerations in the basic coordinate system.

Format:
1
DMIG
UACCEL
0"
9"
TIN
DMIG
UACCEL
G2
C2
X2
9
NCOL
G1
C1
X1
G3
C3
X3
Example:
DMIG
UACCEL
DMIG
UACCEL
386.4
DMIG
UACCEL
3.0
DMIG
UACCEL
1.0
Field
TIN
Main Index
Contents
Type of matrix being input. (Integer 1 or 2)
1
Real, single precision (One field is used per element.)
Real, double precision (One field is used per element.)
10

Field
Contents
NCOL
Number of columns, see Remark 2. Default is the number of columns specified.

(Integer > 0)
Load sequence number. (Integer > 0)
Gi
Grid point identification number of a single reference point. (Integer > 0)
Ci
Component number for Gi in the basic coordinate system. See Remark 4.

Integer < 6)
Xi
Value of enforced acceleration term in the basic coordinate system. (Real)
(0 <
The following rules apply to manual specification of inertia relief in superelement analysis:
PARAM,INREL,-1
List Superelements: PARAM,INREL,-1 must be specified in the Main Bulk Data Section or the
Case Control.
PART Superelements: PARAM,INREL,-1 must appear in each bulk data section or in the case
control (above the first subcase will apply to each superelement).

SUPORT, SUPORT1 must be specified in the Main Bulk Data Section and refer to grids points
in the residual structure

DMIG UACCEL entries must be in the Main Bulk Data Section and refer to grid points in the
residual structure.
PARAM,GRDPNT must be specified for the same grid and must be defined in each
superelement.
External Superelements produce incorrect results.
Automatic Definition of Reference Points

An alternative method to defining the SUPORT / SUPORT1 entries for the manual method is to specify
the automatic method with PARAM,INREL,-2. This method was introduced in Version 2004 and is the
recommended inertia relief method. The user does not have to specify the SUPORT entry. The user can
simply specify PARAM,INREL,-2 in the input file. The method is designed for models with exactly 6
rigid body modes. The reference frame is selected automatically, in a manner that poor solutions are
unlikely because of the choice of reference frame variables. Details of the automatic inertia relief method
can be found in Section 3.18 of the V2004 Release Guide and General Operations (Ch. 1) in the MSC
Nastran Reference Manual
The following features are not supported for the Automatic Inertia Relief Method:
The DMIG,UACCEL option
The Iterative Solver
External Superelements produce incorrect answers
The automatic method is supported for List Superelements, PART Superelements.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 287

The freedom aircraft model will be used as the example for inertia relief. Recall from Chapter 3, the
model is broken into superelements as follows:
Figure 5-1
Freedom Superelement Model
For this example there are some fictitious pressure loads on the wings and tail section as well as loads
on the engine as follows:
Figure 5-2
Main Index
Applied Loads to Freedom Model for Inertia Relief Example

For the manual case, grid 501, attached to an RBE3 on the wingbox, is SUPORTed in all 6dof.

The baseline model is prepared as normal with elements, properties, and loading. In order to specify
inertia relief in Patran, the user selects Inertia Relief and Node i.d. for Wt. Gener. in the Solution
Parameters Form. Note that in Patran, the SUPORT dof are exported as 123456 on the node specified.
Nastran does allow the user to specify the SUPORT dof on multiple grids as long as the dof are statically
determinate.
Figure 5-3
Main Index
Defining Inertia Relief (PARAM,INREL,-1) and SUPORT dof in Patran
CHAPTER 5 289
The input for the baseline model contains the standard input plus the loading and the highlighted entries
shown below. This file is part of the delivery in /doc/seug/chapter5/inrel1/freedom-baseline.bdf.
SOL 101
CEND
TITLE = Freedom - Inertia Relief Example
LABEL = Non-Superelement Model
ECHO = NONE
SUBCASE 1
$ Subcase name : Inertia-Relief
SUBTITLE=Inertia-Relief
LOAD = 2
BEGIN BULK
PARAM
POST
-1
PARAM
INREL
-1
PARAM
GRDPNT
501
SUPORT
501
123456
Listing 5-1
Entries Generated by Patran for Inertia Relief
Note that PARAM,GRDPNT is not required for inertia relief, but Patran will write it along with the
SUPORT entry.
The solution for the baseline model follows the standard inertia relief algorithms. The data related to
inertia relief include the QRR, QRL, and URA matrices (refer to Inertia Relief (Ch. 11) in the MSC
Nastran Linear Static Analysis Users Guide for additional detail.)
FREEDOM - INERTIA RELIEF EXAMPLE
APRIL
17, 2011
MD NASTRAN
12/15/10

NON-SUPERELEMENT MODEL
SUBCASE 1
INTERMEDIATE MATRIX ... QRR
COLUMN
1
3.045757E+00
2.947638E-11
-1.327679E-10
-6.334501E-11
3.045757E+00
-3.512300E-11
COLUMN
Main Index
1
-1.546296E-09
2.367779E+01
-1.145002E-07
3.891883E-09
1.823758E+02
2
-2.367779E+01

COLUMN
1
6.758991E-10
-1.071598E-10
3.045757E+00
4.486149E-09
-2.367779E+01
1.265905E-07
2.367779E+01
3.133308E-08
-5.173908E+02
-1.417457E-07
5.173908E+02
-1.166995E-08
COLUMN
COLUMN
COLUMN
3
1.324432E-07
-1.823758E+02
-2.236083E-08
-5.012229E-04
-5.598023E+03
5.337467E+04
3.782013E-04
3.731522E-04
6.687310E+04
1.877806E+05
2.372100E-05
-2.490782E+00
1.708873E-08
4
1.681446E+04
5
-5.168224E-04
6
-8.202438E+03
INTERMEDIATE MATRIX ... QRL
COLUMN
1
4.503087E+01
1.140729E-07
-2.206303E+03
1
-1.281470E-05
INTERMEDIATE MATRIX ... URA
COLUMN
1
4.578611E+00
-3.485217E-06
3.012699E+02
1
-7.474066E-08

FOR DATA BLOCK KLL
LOAD SEQ. NO.
1
EPSILON
-1.1948665E-12
Listing 5-2
EXTERNAL WORK
6.1499340E+01
QRR, QRL, and URA matrices for Freedom Baseline Inertia Relief Example
APRIL
19, 2011
MD NASTRAN
12/15/10
PAGE

NON-SUPERELEMENT MODEL, AUTOMATIC SUPORT
SUBCASE 1
COLUMN
1
Main Index
3.045757E+00
-2.168404E-18
6.938894E-18
1
2.664535E-15
2.367779E+01
-1.202130E-07
CHAPTER 5 291
COLUMN
1
-8.673617E-19
3.045757E+00
3.989864E-17
-1.040834E-17
-8.673617E-19
3.045757E+00
2.664535E-15
-2.367779E+01
1.202130E-07
2.367779E+01
1.110223E-16
-5.173908E+02
-1.202130E-07
5.173908E+02
4.440892E-15
COLUMN
COLUMN
COLUMN
COLUMN
2
-2.367779E+01
-4.440892E-15
5.173908E+02
-5.173908E+02
0.000000E+00
-5.140536E-04
-8.202438E+03
1.102846E+05
3.718374E-04
3.718374E-04
1.237830E+05
4.304607E+05
2.065903E-12
-2.490782E+00
1.709939E-08
3
1.202130E-07
4
1.681446E+04
5
-5.140536E-04
6
-8.202438E+03
COLUMN
1
4.503087E+01
5.995204E-14
-2.206303E+03
1
2.740799E-11
COLUMN
1
4.578611E+00
-3.486766E-06
3.012699E+02
1
-7.487090E-08

FOR DATA BLOCK KLL
LOAD SEQ. NO.
1
EPSILON
3.0007746E-11
Listing 5-3
EXTERNAL WORK
6.1499340E+01
QRR, QRL, and URA matrices for Freedom Baseline Inertia Relief Example
Automatic SUPORT
Note that the displacements are always relative to the SUPORT points. Of course this makes sense
because the SUPORT points are the fictitious constraints used during the inertia relief process, so their
displacements are zero. Since the SUPORT points are statically determinate, the relative displacements
in the structure will be the same. Thus, the element strains and subsequent stresses will be unaffected by
the choice of SUPORT dof. Even though the QRR and QRL matrices are different (in rotations), the net
solution for URA and relative displacements is exactly the same whether manual or automatic SUPORT
points are used. Of course, the external work is exactly the same, as expected.
Main Index

List Superelement Example

The list superelement (SESET) setup for this model is the same as described in Defining List
Superelements (Ch. 2). The inertia relief definition is the same as shown in Figure 5-3. The resulting
input file is the same as the baseline model with the addition of the SESET entries:
SOL 101
CEND
TITLE = Freedom - Inertia Relief Example
LABEL = SESET Model
param,grdpnt,0
ECHO = NONE
SUBCASE 1
$ Subcase name : Inertia-Relief
SUBTITLE=Inertia-Relief
LOAD = 2
BEGIN BULK
PARAM
POST
-1
PARAM
INREL
-1
$PARAM
SUPORT
PARAM
GRDPNT
501
501
123456
PRTMAXIM YES
$ tail.10
SESET
10
10001
THRU
10142
SESET
10
10163
THRU
10434
SESET
20
20001
THRU
20010
SESET
20
20012
THRU
20224
SESET
20
20241
SESET
20
20501
THRU
20510
SESET
20
20512
THRU
20724
SESET
20
20741
$ engine.20
$ aft-fuselage.30
SESET
30
30055
THRU
30078
SESET
30
30103
THRU
30811
SESET
40
40009
THRU
40552
SESET
40
45009
THRU
45552
$ wings.40
Main Index
CHAPTER 5 293
$ cabin.50
SESET
50
50025
THRU
50781
60
60025
THRU
60241
$ nose.60
SESET
Listing 5-4
Entries Generated by Patran for Inertia Relief SESET Example
Note that PARAM,GRDPNT,501 is manually commented to avoid User Fatal Message 6009 described
in Manual Definition of Reference Points above. The results of this solution are exactly the same as the
baseline model:
APRIL
18, 2011
MD NASTRAN
12/15/10
PAGE
SUPERELEMENT 0
SESET MODEL
SUBCASE 1
COLUMN
1
3.045757E+00
-2.316819E-11
-5.672507E-11
-6.210241E-11
3.045757E+00
8.054769E-13
-7.951607E-11
8.219830E-11
3.045757E+00
3.622851E-09
-2.367779E+01
1.209920E-07
2.367779E+01
-2.480283E-08
-5.173908E+02
-1.413612E-07
5.173908E+02
2.598918E-10
COLUMN
COLUMN
COLUMN
COLUMN
COLUMN
1
5.707202E-10
2.367779E+01
-1.241147E-07
-1.651148E-09
1.823758E+02
-1.823758E+02
1.274564E-08
-5.007371E-04
-5.598023E+03
5.337467E+04
3.679409E-04
3.712929E-04
6.687310E+04
1.877806E+05
-1.354397E-05
2
-2.367779E+01
3
1.193610E-07
4
1.681446E+04
5
-5.136385E-04
6
-8.202438E+03
COLUMN
1
4.503087E+01
-8.756203E-08
-2.206303E+03
1
9.046338E-07
Main Index

COLUMN
1
4.578611E+00
-3.486443E-06
3.012699E+02
1
-7.484697E-08
-2.490782E+00
1.710076E-08

FOR DATA BLOCK KLL
LOAD SEQ. NO.
1
EPSILON
-3.5960325E-12
Listing 5-5
EXTERNAL WORK
2.5560770E+01
QRR, QRL, and URA matrices for Freedom SESET Inertia Relief Example,
Manual SUPORT
APRIL
19, 2011
MD NASTRAN
12/15/10
PAGE
SUPERELEMENT 0
SESET MODEL, AUTOMATIC SUPORT
SUBCASE 1
COLUMN
1
3.045757E+00
-4.340937E-13
6.695174E-13
-6.561843E-13
3.045757E+00
-6.132841E-13
2.177562E-12
-2.058131E-12
3.045757E+00
3.561191E-10
-2.367779E+01
1.209224E-07
2.367779E+01
2.840832E-10
-5.173908E+02
-1.204577E-07
5.173908E+02
-1.673694E-10
COLUMN
COLUMN
COLUMN
COLUMN
COLUMN
1
4.467154E-11
2.367779E+01
-1.204133E-07
8.992702E-11
5.173908E+02
-5.173908E+02
-7.164146E-10
-5.141476E-04
-8.202438E+03
1.102846E+05
3.719388E-04
3.718660E-04
1.237830E+05
4.304607E+05
7.571039E-07
2
-2.367779E+01
3
1.208757E-07
4
1.681446E+04
5
-5.141501E-04
6
-8.202438E+03
COLUMN
1
Main Index
4.503087E+01
2.076625E-09
-2.206303E+03
1
-6.944076E-07
CHAPTER 5 295
COLUMN
1
4.578611E+00
-3.486421E-06
3.012699E+02
1
-7.485668E-08
-2.490782E+00
1.709656E-08

FOR DATA BLOCK KLL
LOAD SEQ. NO.
1
EPSILON
-8.9810836E-13
Listing 5-6
EXTERNAL WORK
2.5560770E+01
QRR, QRL, and URA matrices for Freedom SESET Inertia Relief Example,
Automatic SUPORT
Note that the external work is different than the non-superelement example. This is because the external
work is calculated for the residual solution only.

The PART superelement setup for this model is the same as described in Defining PART Superelements
(Ch. 2). The inertia relief definition is the same as shown in Figure 5-3. The resulting input file is the
same as a PART superelement model except PARAM,INREL,-1, PARAM,GRDPNT,501, and the
SUPORT entries are in each PART superelement. This input would result in a fatal message 9006
described above. But if the PARAM,GRDPNT and SUPORT entries are commented from each PART
superelement, the model will solve as expected.
APRIL
19, 2011
MD NASTRAN
12/15/10
PAGE
SUPERELEMENT 0
PART MODEL, MANUAL SUPORT
SUBCASE 1
COLUMN
1
3.045757E+00
-2.289200E-11
-5.686449E-11
-6.284509E-11
3.045757E+00
5.457716E-13
-6.685159E-11
8.156821E-11
3.045757E+00
3.657268E-09
-2.367779E+01
1.209012E-07
COLUMN
COLUMN
COLUMN
COLUMN
Main Index
1
5.693241E-10
2.367779E+01
-1.240983E-07
-1.620809E-09
1.823758E+02
-1.823758E+02
1.271673E-08
-5.007266E-04
-5.598023E+03
2
-2.367779E+01
3
1.193249E-07
4
1.681446E+04

2.367779E+01
-2.459625E-08
-5.173908E+02
-1.416112E-07
5.173908E+02
1.727775E-10
COLUMN
-5.136293E-04
5.337467E+04
3.679520E-04
3.713032E-04
6.687310E+04
1.877806E+05
-1.351392E-05
-2.490782E+00
1.710085E-08
6
-8.202438E+03
COLUMN
1
4.503087E+01
-8.689504E-08
-2.206303E+03
1
9.421889E-07
COLUMN
1
4.578611E+00
-3.486449E-06
3.012699E+02
1
-7.484717E-08

FOR DATA BLOCK KLL
LOAD SEQ. NO.
1
EPSILON
-3.1166439E-12
Listing 5-7
EXTERNAL WORK
2.5560770E+01
QRR, QRL, and URA matrices for Freedom PART Inertia Relief Example,
Manual SUPORT
APRIL
19, 2011
MD NASTRAN
12/15/10
PAGE
SUPERELEMENT 0
PART MODEL, AUTOMATIC SUPORT
SUBCASE 1
COLUMN
1
3.045757E+00
-4.344630E-13
6.695105E-13
-6.562398E-13
3.045757E+00
-6.132425E-13
2.177479E-12
-2.058378E-12
3.045757E+00
3.561466E-10
-2.367779E+01
1.209225E-07
COLUMN
COLUMN
COLUMN
Main Index
1
4.467153E-11
2.367779E+01
-1.204133E-07
8.984531E-11
5.173908E+02
-5.173908E+02
-7.163629E-10
-5.141476E-04
-8.202438E+03
2
-2.367779E+01
3
1.208757E-07
4
1.681446E+04
CHAPTER 5 297
COLUMN
1
2.367779E+01
2.840672E-10
-5.173908E+02
-1.204578E-07
5.173908E+02
-1.672735E-10
COLUMN
5
-5.141501E-04
1.102846E+05
3.719388E-04
3.718659E-04
1.237830E+05
4.304607E+05
7.572106E-07
-2.490782E+00
1.709656E-08
6
-8.202438E+03
COLUMN
1
4.503087E+01
2.076575E-09
-2.206303E+03
1
-6.944107E-07
COLUMN
1
4.578611E+00
-3.486420E-06
3.012699E+02
1
-7.485668E-08

FOR DATA BLOCK KLL
LOAD SEQ. NO.
1
EPSILON
-3.9768788E-13
Listing 5-8
EXTERNAL WORK
2.5560770E+01
QRR, QRL, and URA matrices for Freedom PART Inertia Relief Example,
Automatic SUPORT
Notice that the PART superelement solution matches the List Superelement solution for both the manual
and automatic SUPORT solutons.
External Superelement Example

As noted in Comparison of Methods (Ch. 3), the mass matrix is not generated in static analysis. As a
consequence, inertia loads (GRAV and RFORCE) are not applied to external superelements during the
assembly run. Similarly, inertia relief calculations will not include the external superelement mass
matrix. Since external superelements produce incorrect answers for inertia relief, the examples are
withheld.
The key results are summarized below. The files are located in the MSC.Nastran delivery subdirectory
/doc/seug/chapter5. Note that the URA (acceleration) numbers are exactly the same for the baseline, List
Superelement (SESET) and PART Superelements. The key stress is reported for element 30715 von
Main Index

Mises at the Center +Z. Note that the only key value that changes is the External Work value. The
External Work value is calculated for the residual structure, so it makes sense that the superelement
values are different (and lower) than the residual structure only solution.
Table 5-1
Inertia Relief Comparison Matrix
File
INREL
URA-Tx
URA-Tz
URA-Ry
Ext Work
Stress
Freedombaselineinrel.bdf
-1
4.578611E+00
3.012699E+02
-2.490782E+00
6.1499340E+01
1.240841E+03
Freedombaselineinrel2.bdf
-2
4.578611E+00
3.012699E+02
-2.490782E+00
6.1499340E+01
1.240841E+03
Freedompartsecontinuousinrel.bdf
-1
4.578611E+00
3.012699E+02
-2.490782E+00
2.5560770E+01
1.240841E+03
Freedompartsecontinuousinrel2.bdf
-2
4.578611E+00
3.012699E+02
-2.490782E+00
2.5560770E+01
1.240841E+03
Freedomsesetinrel.bdf
-1
4.578611E+00
3.012699E+02
-2.490782E+00
2.5560770E+01
1.240841E+03
Freedomsesetinrel2.bdf
-2
4.578611E+00
3.012699E+02
-2.490782E+00
2.5560770E+01
1.240841E+03
From the data presented in this chapter, it can be concluded that inertia relief works equally well for
internal superelement solutions as residual-only solutions.
1.
Main Index
Chapter 6: Multiple Loading in Static Analysis
Main Index
Introduction

Introduction
Introduction
Although Case Control (Ch. 4) discussed multiple loadings, this chapter clarifies how the Case Control
is handled in static analysis with multiple loading conditions. If multiple load cases exist in a static
solution, a separate subcase must exist for the residual structure for each load condition or boundary
condition. Separate subcases can exist for the superelements for each solution. This section describes
how the program internally partitions the Case Control into separate sections for each superelement.
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 301

As discussed in Superelement Partitioning (Ch. 2), MSC.Nastran divides the Bulk Data into separate
sections (internal tables) based on the superelement definitions. Similarly, the Case Control is also
partitioned into separate sets for each superelement. The name of this separate datablock is CASES in
the DMAP. Section 4.x discusses how the the SUPER command is used to determine which SUBCASEs
apply to which superelements. This command is also used in partitioning the Case Control.
Based the specification of the SUPER command, a separate set of Case Control is created for each
superelement. One set is for the residual structure. The residual Case Control controls the final solution
of
P t = K tt U t
(6-1)
As described in The SUPER Command (Ch. 4), a SUBCASE must be defined for the residual structure
for each loading condition (or boundary condition) which will be solved. As mentioned before, the
program actually copies any SUBCASEs that reference superelement 0 into a CASES table, which is
qualified with SEID = 0 (refer to the qualifier discussion in The SUPER Command (Ch. 4)). When
processing the residual structure (PHASE 1), the program uses this copy of the Case Control. The
program creates a separate CASES table for each superelement in the model (qualified with SEID=seid).
The SEP2CT module creates this table during execution of the PHASE0 subDMAP in the program.
The following examples demonstrate (in an idealized form) the Case Control partitioning.
Use of Load Sequences

As a review, refer to The SUPER Command (Ch. 4) for a detailed description of load sequences with the
SUPER command.
As discussed in Condensed Case Control (Ch. 4), condensed Case Control provides a single set of case
control instructions that apply to every superelement for each load sequence.
A simple example of condensed Case Control is:
DISP=ALL
STRESS=ALL
SPC=2
SUBCASE 101
LOAD = 15
SUBCASE 201
LOAD = 3
SUBCASE 301
LOAD = 77
Main Index

Listing 6-1
Simple Example of Condensed Case Control

Expanded Case Control (Ch. 4) discussed the aspects of expanded control and how the loads, constraints,
parameters, and output can be more precisely applied to each superelement. An example of expanded
case control is:
ISPL=ALL
STRESS=ALL
$
SUBCASE 11
SUPER=10,1
SPC=3
SUBCASE 12
SUPER=10,2
SUBCASE 13
SUPER=10,3
LOAD=542
SUBCASE 21
SUPER=20,3
SPC=3
LOAD=21
SUBCASE 22
SUPER=20,2
SPC=3
LOAD=22
SUBCASE 23
SUPER=20,1
SPC=3
SUBCASE 31
SUPER=0,1
SPC=2
LOAD=1
SUBCASE 32
SUPER=0,2
SPC=2
LOAD=29
SUBCASE 33
SUPER=0,3
SPC=2
LOAD=3
Listing 6-2
Main Index
Example of Expanded Case Control
CHAPTER 6 303
Examples for Multiple Loading Conditions (cantilever

plate)
In this Section, the Expanded Case Control Example 2 from Case Control (Ch. 4) will be expanded to
include List Superelements, PART Superelement, and External Superelements. Comparison of Results
will summarize the results.
A slight variant of the cantilever plate that was used in Defining List Superelements (Ch. 2) will be used
here. The differences are in the applied loads, constraints, and parameters.
Figure 6-1
Geometry for Expanded Case Control Example
The geometry and properties for this model are as follows:

$.......2.......3.......4.......5.......6.......7.......8.......9.......0
$
$
Cantilevered Beam Made of Plates Model
$
$
/201 202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
/*----*----*----*----*----*----*----*----*----*----*
/|
/| 1
| 2
| 3
| 4
| 5
| 6
| 7
| 8
| 9
| 10 |
/|
+--->X
/*----*----*----*----*----*----*----*----*----*----*
/101 102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
$
$.......2.......3.......4.......5.......6.......7.......8.......9.......0
Main Index
GRID
101
0.
0.
0.
GRID
102
1.
0.
0.
GRID
103
2.
0.
0.
GRID
104
3.
0.
0.
GRID
105
4.
0.
0.
GRID
106
5.
0.
0.
GRID
107
6.
0.
0.
GRID
108
7.
0.
0.

GRID
109
8.
0.
0.
GRID
110
9.
0.
0.
GRID
111
10.
0.
0.
GRID
201
0.
1.
0.
GRID
202
1.
1.
0.
GRID
203
2.
1.
0.
GRID
204
3.
1.
0.
GRID
205
4.
1.
0.
GRID
206
5.
1.
0.
GRID
207
6.
1.
0.
GRID
208
7.
1.
0.
GRID
209
8.
1.
0.
GRID
210
9.
1.
0.
GRID
211
10.
1.
0.
$.......2.......3.......4.......5.......6.......7.......8.......9.......0
CQUAD4
101
102
202
201
CQUAD4
102
103
203
202
CQUAD4
103
104
204
203
CQUAD4
104
105
205
204
CQUAD4
105
106
206
205
CQUAD4
106
107
207
206
CQUAD4
107
108
208
207
CQUAD4
108
109
209
208
CQUAD4
109
110
210
209
CQUAD4
10
110
111
211
210
$.......2.......3.......4.......5.......6.......7.......8.......9.......0
MAT1
10.E6
PSHELL
.1
PSHELL
.1
Listing 6-3
.3
2.588-4 1.E-6
0.
Geometry and Properties for Expanded Case Control Example
The loadings and constraints are as follows:
Figure 6-2
Main Index
Constraints for Expanded Case Control Example
CHAPTER 6 305
Main Index
Figure 6-3
Load Sequence 1 for Expanded Case Control Example
Figure 6-4
Figure 6-5

For simplicity of comparing input files, the loads and boundary conditions retain the same values and
comments the loads on the residual structure are defined in the bulk data section as follows:
$ all spc's are applied to all subcases
spcadd,99,2,3
$ SE 20 SPC's
spc1,3,123456,101,201
$ SE 10 SPCs
spc1,3,6,111,211
$ SE 0 SPCs
spc1,2,6,101,thru,211
$ 1st load sequence = force 1 + force 23

load,1001,1.,1.,1,1.,23
$ 2nd load sequence = force 22 + force 29
load,1002,1.,1.,22,1.,29
$ 3rd load sequence = force 542 + force 21 + force 3
load,1003,1.,1.,3,1.,21,1.,542
$ SE 20 loads
$.......2.......3.......4.......5.......6.......7.......8.......9.......0
FORCE
21
203
21.
0.
1.
0.
FORCE
22
203
22.
1.
0.
0.
211
542.
1.
0.
0.
$ SE 10 loads
FORCE
542
$ SE 0 loads
FORCE
206
1.
0.
0.
1.
FORCE
29
206
29.
1.
0.
0.
FORCE
206
3.
0.
1.
0.
Listing 6-4
Loads and Constraints for Expanded Case Control Example
In addition, DISP=ALL and STRESS=ALL are the output requests and PARAM,K6ROT,0. is the only
non-default parameter specified.

The case control for the baseline model (/doc/seug/chapter5/expanded-case-control/ex2 -baseline.dat) is
as follows:
DISPL=ALL
STRESS=ALL
$
spc = 99
SUBCASE 1
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 307
LOAD = 1001
SUBCASE 2
LOAD = 1002
SUBCASE 3
LOAD = 1003
Listing 6-5
Baseline Case Control
The spc=99 points to the SPCADD entry that combines all of the constraints. The LOAD =100x points
to the corresponding LOAD bulk data entries that combine the individual FORCEs.
List Superelements
The list superelement example (/doc/seug/chapter5/expanded-case-control/ex2 -seset.dat)uses expanded
case control to place the appropriate loads and constraints with each superelement. Note that there is a
superelement subcase for each load sequence, even if there is no load.
SUBCASE 11
SUPER=10,1
SPC=3
SUBCASE 12
SUPER=10,2
SPC=3
SUBCASE 13
SUPER=10,3
LOAD=542
SPC=3
SUBCASE 21
SUPER=20,1
SPC=3
LOAD=23
SUBCASE 22
SUPER=20,2
SPC=3
LOAD=22
SUBCASE 23
SUPER=20,3
SPC=3
LOAD=21
SUBCASE 31
SUPER=0,1
SPC=2
LOAD=1
Main Index

SUBCASE 32
SUPER=0,2
SPC=2
LOAD=29
SUBCASE 33
SUPER=0,3
SPC=2
LOAD=3
SESET,10,108,thru,111
Listing 6-6
List Superelement (SESET) Expanded Case Control and SESET Entries
PART Superelements
The PART superelement model (/doc/seug/chapter5/expanded-case-control/ex2 -part.dat) is broken into
its constituent sections. The case control is exactly the same as shown in Listing 6-1. Below is the bulk
data listing for the PART superelement. Note that param,k6rot is specified within each bulk data section.
Also note that the loads and constraints are only defined in the relevant superelement bulk data section.
BEGIN BULK
param,k6rot,0.
GRID
104
3.
0.
0.
GRID
105
4.
0.
0.
GRID
106
5.
0.
0.
GRID
107
6.
0.
0.
GRID
204
3.
1.
0.
GRID
205
4.
1.
0.
GRID
206
5.
1.
0.
GRID
207
6.
1.
0.
CQUAD4
104
105
205
204
CQUAD4
105
106
206
205
CQUAD4
106
107
207
206
$.......2.......3.......4.......5.......6.......7.......8.......9.......0
MAT1
10.E6
PSHELL
.1
PSHELL
.1
$ SE 0 SPCs
Main Index
.3
2.588-4 1.E-6
0.
CHAPTER 6 309
spc1,2,6,101,thru,211
$ SE 0 loads
FORCE
206
1.
0.
0.
1.
FORCE
29
206
29.
1.
0.
0.
FORCE
206
3.
0.
1.
0.
BEGIN SUPER = 10
param,k6rot,0.
GRID
107
6.
0.
0.
GRID
108
7.
0.
0.
GRID
109
8.
0.
0.
GRID
110
9.
0.
0.
GRID
111
10.
0.
0.
GRID
207
6.
1.
0.
GRID
208
7.
1.
0.
GRID
209
8.
1.
0.
GRID
210
9.
1.
0.
GRID
211
10.
1.
0.
CQUAD4
107
108
208
207
CQUAD4
108
109
209
208
CQUAD4
109
110
210
209
CQUAD4
10
110
111
211
210
$.......2.......3.......4.......5.......6.......7.......8.......9.......0
MAT1
10.E6
PSHELL
.3
.1
2.588-4 1.E-6
0.
542.
1.
0.
$ SE 10 SPCs
spc1,3,6,111,211
$ SE 10 loads
FORCE
542
211
0.
BEGIN SUPER = 20
param,k6rot,0.
GRID
101
0.
0.
0.
GRID
102
1.
0.
0.
GRID
103
2.
0.
0.
GRID
104
3.
0.
0.
GRID
201
0.
1.
0.
GRID
202
1.
1.
0.
GRID
203
2.
1.
0.
GRID
204
3.
1.
0.
$.......2.......3.......4.......5.......6.......7.......8.......9.......0
CQUAD4
Main Index
101
102
202
201

CQUAD4
102
103
203
202
CQUAD4
103
104
204
203
$.......2.......3.......4.......5.......6.......7.......8.......9.......0
MAT1
10.E6
PSHELL
.3
.1
2.588-4 1.E-6
0.
$ SE 20 SPC's
spc1,3,123456,101,201
$ SE 20 loads
$.......2.......3.......4.......5.......6.......7.......8.......9.......0
FORCE
21
203
21.
0.
1.
0.
FORCE
22
203
22.
1.
0.
0.
Listing 6-7
PART Superelement Bulk Data for Expanded Case Control Example
The external superelement example is broken into its constituent superelement component models
(/doc/seug/chapter5/expanded-case-control/ex2 extout10.dat, and -extout20.dat). The bulk data for
each superelement differs from the bulk data in the corresponding PART superelement shown above
because the SUPER entry is removed. Remember, during the reduction step, there are no superelements.
The Case Control for each External Superelment creation run is shown below. The boundaries are
defined with appropriate ASET1 entries. In this case, the MATDB (a.k.a. MATRIXDB) method is used
to store the external superelement matrices.
EXTSEOUT(ASMBULK,EXTBULK,EXTID=10,MATDB)
$
SUBCASE 11
SPC=3
SUBCASE 12
SPC=3
SUBCASE 13
LOAD=542
SPC=3
BEGIN BULK
aset1,123456,107,207
Listing 6-8
Case Control for External Superelement 10 in Expanded Case Control Example
EXTSEOUT(ASMBULK,EXTBULK,EXTID=20,MATDB)
$
SUBCASE 21
SPC=3
LOAD=23
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 311
SUBCASE 22
SPC=3
LOAD=22
SUBCASE 23
SPC=3
LOAD=21
BEGIN BULK
aset1,123456,104,204
Listing 6-9
Case Control for External Superelement 20 in Expanded Case Control Example
Note that the Case Control sections for the external superelements are exactly the same as for the internal
List and PART superelements. One of the key things to notice is that subcases are required for each
Residual Load Sequence, even if there are no loads in the external superelement.
The assembly run (/doc/seug/chapter5/expanded-case-control/ex2 -assemble.dat) requires additional
FMS to attach the external superelements. The SUPER command is not strictly required, but is retained
in the example for completeness. Finally, the assembly information from the .asm file is included in
the bulk data section.
assign se10m='expanded-casecc-ex2-extout10.MASTER'
SOL 101 $ Linear Statics

CEND
$
TITLE = CANTILEVERED BEAM MADE OF PLATES
Subtitle = Created by Lance Proctor, EagleSim
Label = External Superelement Example - Assembly
$
DISPL=ALL
STRESS=ALL
$
SUBCASE 11
SUPER=10,1
SUBCASE 12
SUPER=10,2
SUBCASE 13
SUPER=10,3
SUBCASE 21
SUPER=20,1
Main Index

SUBCASE 22
SUPER=20,2
SUBCASE 23
SUPER=20,3
SUBCASE 31
SUPER=0,1
SPC=2
LOAD=1
SUBCASE 32
SUPER=0,2
SPC=2
LOAD=29
SUBCASE 33
SUPER=0,3
SPC=2
LOAD=3
BEGIN BULK
include 'expanded-casecc-ex2-extout10.asm'
Listing 6-10
Case Control for the Assembly Run in Expanded Case Control Example
If the user removes the super commands from the assembly run, then only SUBCASEs 31, 32, and 33 are
required to obtain output for all superelements. The modified input file is as follows
(/doc/seug/chapter5/expanded-case-control/ex2 assemble-alt.dat):

CEND
$
Label = External Superelement Example - Assembly
$
DISPL=ALL
STRESS=ALL
$
SUBCASE 31
Main Index
CHAPTER 6 313
SPC=3
LOAD=1
SUBCASE 32
SPC=3
LOAD=29
SUBCASE 33
SPC=3
LOAD=3
BEGIN BULK
Listing 6-11
Case Control for the Assembly Run in Expanded Case Control Example
Alternate Condensed Case Control
To compare the results, a displacement and stress component within each superelement for each load
sequence is tabulated below. The answers are exactly the same regardless of method.
Table 6-1
Solution
Comparison of Results for Expanded Case Control Example Load Sequence 1

U z203
U z206
U z211
m 1
m 5
m 8
Baseline
1.046790E-02
5.013979E-02
1.244254E-01
2.557507E+03
3.738639E+02
5.389776E+00
SESET
1.046790E-02
5.013979E-02
1.244254E-01
2.557507E+03
3.738639E+02
5.389776E+00
PART
1.046790E-02
5.013979E-02
1.244254E-01
2.557507E+03
3.738639E+02
5.389776E+00
External
1.046790E-02
5.013979E-02
1.244254E-01
2.557507E+03
3.738639E+02
5.389776E+00
Table 6-2
Baseline
U y 203
-6.175009E-04
U y 206
-3.233154E-03
U y211
-8.900994E-03
m 1
4.860896E+02
m 5
2.826428E+02
m 8
1.130378E+00
SESET
-6.175009E-04
-3.233154E-03
-8.900994E-03
4.860896E+02
2.826428E+02
1.130378E+00
PART
-6.175009E-04
-3.233154E-03
-8.900994E-03
4.860896E+02
2.826428E+02
1.130378E+00
External
-6.175009E-04
-3.233154E-03
-8.900994E-03
4.860896E+02
2.826428E+02
1.130378E+00
Solution
Main Index


Baseline
U y203
-5.509641E-03
U y 206
-3.695509E-02
U y211
-1.541361E-01
m 1
5.174318E+03
m 5
5.411604E+03
m 8
5.419734E+03
SESET
-5.509641E-03
-3.695509E-02
-1.541361E-01
5.174318E+03
5.411604E+03
5.419734E+03
PART
-5.509641E-03
-3.695509E-02
-1.541361E-01
5.174318E+03
5.411604E+03
5.419734E+03
External
-5.509641E-03
-3.695509E-02
-1.541361E-01
5.174318E+03
5.411604E+03
5.419734E+03
Solution
1.
Main Index
Chapter 7: Multi-Level Superelement Analysis
Main Index
Introduction
User Interface

Introduction
Introduction
The preceding chapters have described superelements in the context of single level a single-level
superelement tree; that is each superelement is reduced and attached directly to the residual structure.
This chapter will provide more information for the analysis for superelements that are broken into
multiple layers.
The first section of this chapter compares the single- and multi-level superelement analysis.
The remainder of the chapter will provide details about the user interface, work through a manual
solution of multi-level superelement analysis, and walk the user through a few examples of using
MSC.Nastran to solve multi-level superelements.
Main Index
CHAPTER 7 317

There are many circumstances when the user may want to reduce superelements in a tree rather than a
line. For these situations, multi-level superelement analysis is available. In the multi-level superelement
technique, the superelements can be chained together in logical branches. In a single-level analysis, all
superelements are processed independently of each other; however, all superelements have to be
processed before the residual structure can be processed. In multi-level the user can create assemblies of
superelements. That is, the exterior points of several superelements can be interior to a downstream
collector superelement.
In order to compare single and multi-level superelement analysis, the flyswatter example from chapter 3
will be used as an illustrative example. Recall the model from Chapter 3:
Figure 7-1
Flyswatter Example Showing Grids Assigned to Residual in Single-Level

The method of single-level superelement analysis covered in Chapter 3. In this method, each
superelement is connected directly to the residual structure, as depicted in the diagram below.
Main Index

Figure 7-2
Single Level Superelement Analysis of Flyswatter
For example, the model shown in Figure 7-1 could be arranged into a multi-level tree as illustrated in
Figure 7-3.
Figure 7-3
Multi-Level Superelement Tree of Flyswatter
Consider the left branch of the superelement tree:
Main Index
CHAPTER 7 319
Figure 7-4
Left Branch of Flyswatter Superelement Tree with Boundary Grids Labeled
The solution for the left branch of the superelement tree can be broken down into the reduction and data
recovery phases as shown below:
Main Index

Figure 7-5
Main Index
Multi-Level Reduction Steps for Left Branch of Flyswatter Tree
CHAPTER 7 321
Figure 7-6
Multi-Level Data Recovery Steps for Left Branch of Flyswatter Tree
A detailed description of the static solution for the left branch of the tree proceeds as follows:
Reduce tip Superelement 10
The stiffness and loads are reduced to grids 35 and 36 which are on the boundary between
Superelement 10 and Superelement 30
Main Index

Generate boundary matrices K a a
10
Pa
10
fix ed
10
Calculate fixed boundary solution at grids 35 and 36, U o
Recall Equation (1-8), U o
f ix ed
o
1
= Uo = Ko o Po

Assemble Superelement 30
The reduced matrices of Superelement 10 are added to the element stiffness and nodal loads
on Superelement 30
Kg g
30
= Kj j
30
+ Ka a
10
Reduce Superelement 30 Assembly
Main Index
Pg
30
= Pj
30
+ Pa
10
CHAPTER 7 323
The assembled stiffness and loads are reduced to grids 19 and 20 which are on the boundary
with Superelement 50
Generate boundary matrices , K a a
30
Pa
30
fix ed
30
Assemble Superelement 50
The reduced matrices of Superelement 30 are added to the element stiffness and nodal loads
on Superelement 50
Kg g
50
= Kj j
50
+ Ka a
30
Pg
50
= Pj
50
+ Pa
30
Reduce Superelement 50 Assembly

The assembled stiffness and loads are reduced to grids 13 and 23 which are on the boundary
with Superelement 0 (Residual)
Main Index

Generate boundary matrices K a a
50
Pa
50
fix ed
50
[Similar reduction is performed for the SE 20-40-60 tree and SE 70 single-level]

Assemble Residual Superelement 0
The reduced matrices of Superelement 5, 6, and 7 are added to the element stiffness and nodal
loads of Superelement 0
Kg g
Pg
= K jj
= Pj
+ Ka a
+ Pa
50
50
+ Ka a
+ Pa
60
60
+ Ka a
+ Pa
70
70
Solve the residual solution

Perform standard reductions (apply MPCs, SPCs)
Solve for K ll U l l = P l
Back expand to G-Set solution vector, U g
Data recovery for Residual
Calculate and output user requested displacements, stresses, etc.
fre e
Obtain free boundary solution at grids 13 and 23, U a
grids 13 and 23 from Superelement 0
Main Index
50
by copying displacements of
CHAPTER 7 325
Calculate interior displacement for free solution based on boundary displacements,
fre e
Uo
50
Recall equation 1-7, , (in statics the A-Set is equivalent to the T-
Set) U o
f ree
= Go t Ut
total
Combine free-boundary and fixed boundary solution, U o
Recall equation 1-9, U o
t o ta l
= Uo
fre e
+ Uo
fre e
+ Uo
50
fi xe d
Calculate total Solution for Superelement 50,

Recall Equation 1-9, U o
t o ta l
= Uo
fi xe d
The total G-Set solution is obtained by combining the A-Set and O-Set displacement
Ua
vectors, U g =
Uo

fre e
Main Index
30

Calculate total Solution for Superelement 30, U g
30

fre e
Calculate total Solution for Superelement 10, U g
10
10

[Data recovery for Superelement Tree 20-40-60 and Superelement 70 is performed similarly]
Main Index
CHAPTER 7 327
User Interface
By default, MSC.Nastran will perform a single-level superelement analysis that is, every superelement
is attached to the residual structure by default. In multi-level superelement analysis, one superelement
can be directly connected to another.
The superelement tree is defined with either the DTI, SETREE or SETREE entries.
DTI,SETREE
Superelement Tree Definition
Specifies superelement tree that determines the superelement processing order.

Format:
1
10
DTI
SETREE
SEUP1 SEDWN1 SEUP2 SEDWN2 SEUP3 SEDWN3
SEUP4
SEDWN4 SEUP5 SEDWN5 -etc.-
Example:
DTI
Field
SETREE
14
14
14
14
Contents
SEUPi
Identification number of the superelement upstream from SEDWNi. (Integer > 0)
SEDWNi
Identification number of the uperelement into which SEUPi is assembled. (Integer

0)
In the example above, the following superelement tree is defined:
Main Index
14

User Interface
Figure 7-7
DTI, SETREE Schematic Example
A more convenient input format is the SETREE entry.
SETREE
Superelement Tree Definition (Alternate Form of DTI,SETREE)
Specifies superelement reduction order.

Format:
1
SETREE SEID
SEUP8
SEUP1
SEUP2
SEUP3
SEUP4
SEUP5
SEUP6
SEUP7
SEUP9
-etc.-
10
20
30
40
10
Example:
SETREE 400
Field
Main Index
Contents
SEID
Partitioned superelement identification number of a downstream superelement.

(Integer > 0)
SEUPi
Identification number of superelements that are upstream of SEID. (Integer > 0)
CHAPTER 7 329
Figure 7-8
SETREE Schematic Example
If a superelement is not referenced on the DTI,SETREE or SETREE entry, then the manner in which it
is handled depends on the type of that superelement.
List Superelements
DTI, SETREE
A List Superelement that is unreferenced in the DTI,SETREE will be automatically attached to
the residual structure if all of its exterior points belong to the residual. However, if one or more
of its exterior points do not belong to the residual, then the program will terminate with a user
fatal error complaining that one of more of the superelements are not in the same path.
SETREE
SETREE will only be processed if the new superelement partitioning is requested by using
BEGIN SUPER. (for details refer to the note on BEGIN SUPER vs. BEGIN BULK Superelement
Partitioning)
A List Superelement that is unreferenced in the SETREE will be automatically attached to the
residual structure if all of its exterior points belong to the residual. However, if one or more of
its exterior points do not belong to the residual, then the program will terminate with a user fatal
error complaining that one of more of the superelements are not in the same path.
PART Superelements
DTI, SETREE
Main Index

User Interface
A PART Superelement that is unreferenced in the DTI,SETREE will be automatically attached
to the residual structure if all of its exterior points belong to the residual. However, if one or
more of its exterior points do not belong to the residual, then the program will terminate with a
user fatal error complaining that one of more of the superelements are not in the same path.
SETREE
BEGIN SUPER. (for details refer to the note on BEGIN SUPER vs. BEGIN BULK)
A PART Superelement that is unreferenced in the SETREE will be automatically attached to the
The external superelement process for multi-level superelement processing can be thought of as a manual
reduction at each level. This type of solution sounds cumbersome at first, but for a large program such
as an aircraft or spacecraft, it is a practical method for creating sub-assemblies and assemblies that have
reduced dof size while retaining full fidelity of the component model.
Main Index
CHAPTER 7 331

An example solved by hand is the best demonstration of how multilevel superelements are processed.
Since solving large problems by hand is not practical, a simple fixed-fixed beam using uniaxial springs
will be is divided into multilevel superelements and solved by hand. The model is shown in the figure
below.
Figure 7-9
Multi-Level Superelement Example Spring Model and Superelement Tree
This problem can be solved with either List (SESET) Superelements or PART superelements. The
entries required to use the List superelement option are:
SESET,1,6,7
SESET,2,4,5
DTI,SETREE,1,2,0,1,2
Listing 7-1
Entries for Multi-Level Spring Example using List Superelements
BEGIN BULK
SETREE
Main Index

[residual bulk data omitted]
$ Superelement Name: SEID.1

BEGIN SUPER = 1
[superelement 1 bulk data omitted]

BEGIN SUPER = 2
[superelement 2 bulk data omitted]
ENDDATA f0fd6b01
Listing 7-2
Entries for Multi-Level Spring Example using PART Superelements
The corresponding MSC.Nastran input files for this example are located at
/doc/seug/chapter7/spring/baseline.bdf, /doc/seug/chapter7/spring/seset-setree.bdf, and
/doc/seug/chapter7/spring/part-setree.bdf.
Using this superelement definition, the following SEMAP is generated:
Table 7-1
SEMAP for Multi-Level Spring Example
Superelement
Exterior Grids
Interior Grids
Elements
6,7
5,6
4,5
3,4
1,2,3
1,2
Figure 7-10
Main Index
Superelement 1 Grids and Elements for Spring Example
CHAPTER 7 333
Figure 7-11
Figure 7-12
NOTE: for this example, only 1 dof per grid is used.

SUPERELEMENT 1 REDUCTION
The first step in processing the superelement is to generate the matrices associated with the physical
elements contained within the superelement, i.e. the J-Set matrictes. The following stiffness and loading
matrices are generated for superlement 1.
K jj =
1. 1. 0.
1. 2. 1. in term of
0. 1. 1.
U5
U6
U7
0.
P j = 4.
0.
(7-1)
(7-2)
Next, the reduced matrices of the upstream superelement (the A-Set boundary matrices) are added to the
physical elements to generate the G-Set matrices. In this case, there are no superelements upstream of
superelement 1, so the G-Set matrices are equivalent to the J-Set matrices. (Note that for this situation,
where two matrices are identical, MSC.Nastran stores only one matrix in the database and will create a
pointer for the second matrix, which points to the stored data. Therefore, the database files do not become
excessively large with duplicated data.)
Following the standard reduction process for statics:
Remove MPC Dependencies.
Main Index

if there were any MPC-type relations (MPCs, RBE2, RBAR, etc), the program would apply
and process these relations, and the G-Set matrices would be reduced to N-Set matrices. In
this case, the N-Set is equivalent to the G-Set.
Apply SPC Constraints
For superelement 1, grid point 7 is constrained; thus, terms associated with this grid point are
removed from the matrices to apply that constraint. After applying the constraints, the
matrices are defined for the F-set.
K ff =
1.0 1.
1. 2.0
P f = 0. =
4.
Ka a Ka o
(7-3)
Ko a Ko o
Pa
(7-4)
Po
At this point, the static condensation is performed. The matrices are partitioned into A-Set and O-Set
DOFs and then transformed. This process is the same as described in Manual Solution of a Small
Superelement Example (Ch. 1).
1
G o a = K o o K o a = 0.5 1. = 0.5
T
K a a = K a a + K o a G o a = 1. 0.5 = 0.5
P a = P a + G o a T P o = 2.0
(7-5)
(7-6)
(7-7)
The stiffness and loads for Superelement 1 have been reduced and are available to attach to the
downstream superelement (in this case Superelement 2)
Once again, the J-Set matrices are generated for the physical model of the superelement.
K jj =
0.
1.0 1.0 0.0
1. 2.0 1. P j = 0.
0.0 1.0 1.0

3.
U3
in terms of U 4
U5
(7-8)
Next, the reduced matrices of upstream Superelement 1 are connected to the appropriate dof to form the
G-Set matrices. In this case the stiffness and loads are added to Grid 5.
The reduced stiffness of .5 units is added to the existing term in that position (1.0) to get the assembly
stiffness of 1.5 in that DOF. The reduced load of 2.0 units is added to the physical load on grid 5 (3.0
Main Index
CHAPTER 7 335
units), resulting in an assembly load of 5.0 units on that point. The resulting assembly stiffness and
loading matrices are shown below.
Kg g =
0.
1.0 1.0 0.0
1. 2.0 1.0 P g = 0. in terms of
0.0 1.0 1.5

5
U3
U4
U5
(7-9)
This superelement has no MPCs and constraints applied, so we proceed to the reduction process.
1.0
K ff = 1.0
0.0
1.0 0.0
2.0 1.0 1.5
(7-10)
1.0
1
G o a = K o o K o a = 0.75 0.5
0.5 1.
1.
0.0
0.75
0.50
(7-11)
K a a = K a a + K o a G o a = 0.25
(7-12)
P a = P a + G o a T P o = 0. + 2.5 = 2.5
(7-13)
RESIDUAL STRUCTURE SOLUTION

The residual structure consists of elements 1 and 2 plus the reduced assembly matrices from
superelement 2. Once again, the physical matrices are generated, providing the following:
K jj =
0.
1.0 1.0 0.0
=
1.
1. 2.0 1.
j
0.0 1.0 1.
2.
in terms of
U1
U2
(7-14)
U3
Now the reduced matrices are added from upstream assembly superelement 2. The reduced stiffness
value of .25 units is added into the term for dof 3, resulting in a diagonal term in the stiffness of 1.25
units. The reduced loads are added into the loading vector at the appropriate location, providing a
resulting load of 4.5 units (2.5+2.0) at dof 3.
Kg g =
Main Index
0.
1.0 1.0 0.0
1. 2.0 1.0 P g = 1.
0.0 1.0 1.25

4.5
(7-15)

Following the standard reduction process for statics, the MPC and SPCs are applied, resulting in the
constrained stiffness matrix and loading matrix.
K ff = 2.0 1. P f = 1.
1. 1.25
4.5
(7-16)
Because there are no additional reductions or inertia relief the F-Set, A-Set, and L-Set are equivalent.
Solving the equations produces the displacements for the residual structure.
K ff U f = P f which gives U f = 3.833

6.667
(7-17)
This solution is then expanded to G-Set size, providing the solution vector for the residual structure.
0.
U1
U g = 3.833 = U 2
6.667
U3
(7-18)
RESIDUAL STRUCTURE DATA RECOVERY

Following the solution phase, the data recovery phase can be started. The solution vector (displacements)
for the superelement can be used to calculate and output the user requested quantities such as stress,
element forces, SPC forces, etc. The actual data recovery will not be performed here since it follows
standard procedures.
DATA RECOVERY FOR SUPERELEMENT 2
The superelement directly above the residual structure is Superelement 2, thus the data recovery must be
performed for Superelement 2 first (i.e. the reverse of the reduction process). The data recovery follows
the process outlined in Manual Solution of a Small Superelement Example (Ch. 1). The reader is
encouraged to review the equations and formulation in Chapter 1 if the equations below seem unfamiliar.
The total displacements for the interior dof are based on the free-boundary solution (i.e. the displacement
vector cause by boundary motion) and the fixed-boundary solution (i.e. the displacements with the
boundary fixed with interior loads applied). The total interior solution is:
U o = U oo + G o t U a
(7-19)
First, the boundary solution for Superelement 2 is partitioned form the solution for the residual structure.
U 3 = 6.667 = U a
The interior dof solution is found by applying constraint modes to the boundary motion.
Main Index
(7-20)
CHAPTER 7 337
fr ee
U oa = G o t U a =
0.75 6.667 = 5.0 = U 4
0.5
U5
3.33
(7-21)
The fixed-boundary solution

f ix ed
U oo = K o o P o =
0.75 0.5 0. = 2.5 = U 4
0.5 1. 5.
U5
5.0
(7-22)
Combining the two, we obtain the solution for displacements of superelement 2.

tot a l
7.5
U4
a
o
Uo = Uo + Uo =
=
8.333
U5
(7-23)
Combining the boundary solution to the interior solution yields
6.666
U3
U g = 7.5 = U 4
8.333
U5
(7-24)
The solution vector (displacements) for the superelement can be used to calculate and output the user
requested quantities such as stress, element forces, SPC forces, etc. Again, the actual data recovery will
not be performed here since it follows standard procedures.
DATA RECOVERY FOR SUPERLEMENT 1
The same process for data recovery is applied to Superelement 1; the boundary solution at the exterior
points (in this case grid 5).
U 5 = 8.333 = U a
(7-25)
The free boundary solution is generated from the boundary displacements:

U oa = G o t U a = 0.5 8.333 = 4.166 = U 6
f ree
(7-26)
Finally, we calculate the fixed boundary solution. Then we combine this result with the solution due to
the boundary motion to get the displacements for superelement 1.
1
U oo = K o o P o = 0.5 4.0 = 2.0 = U 6
Main Index
fix e d
(7-27)

U o = U oa + U oo = 4.166 + 2.0 = 6.166 = U 6
tot a l
(7-28)
Since grid 7 is constrained, its displacement is 0.0. Combining the displacements, the solution vector for
Superelement 1 is obtained:
8.333
U5
U g = 6.166 = U 6
0.0
U7
(7-29)
Data recovery for stresses, spcforces, etc. follow standard data recovery procedures.
For comparison, if the problem is solved without superelements, the solution matrices are:
K ff U f = P f =
2.
1.
0.
0.
0.
1.
2.
1.
0.
0.
0.
1.
2.
1.
0.
0.
0.
1.
2.
1.
0.
0.
0.
1.
1.
U2
1.
U3
2.
U 4 = 0.
U5
3.
4.
U6
(7-30)
Which produces:
U2
3.833
U3
6.667
U 4 = 7.5
U5
8.333
6.166
U6
(7-31)
The two approaches give identical answers, verifying that, for statics, using multi-level superelements
for the solution does not introduce any approximation.
Main Index
CHAPTER 7 339

In this section, the model used in Static Example Input Using Freedom (Ch. 2), will be used to
demonstrate the different techniques available in MSC.Nastran to solve multi-level superelements. The
examples will include solving multi-level superelements with List (SESET) Superelements, PART
Superelements, and External Superelements. As a refresher, the model definition is:
Figure 7-13
Freedom Plane Sections
NOTE: in this solution PARAM,SNORM,0.0 is used. This simplifies the solution process because shell
normals for boundaries do not have to be calculated for the external superelement solution. For further
details on the impact of SNORM, refer to SNORM for PART or External Superelements (Ch. 4).
The baseline solutions for Non-Superelement, and single-level List and PART Superelements can be
found at /doc/seug/chapter7/freedom/baseline:
Table 7-2
Files for Non-Superelement and Single-Level Superelement Baselines

Filename
Description
freedom-baseline.bdf
Baseline solution without superelements
freedom-seset.bdf
List superelement solution
freedom-partse-discontinuous.bdf
PART Superelement solution, discontinuous grid

ids at boundary
The baseline solutions will be used to demonstrate that the multi-level superelement solutions provide
the same results.
The superelement tree used for the multi-level superelement solutions will be based on a hypothetical
project that separates its functional groups based on major components. Below is a depiction of the
superelement tree that will be used:
Main Index

Figure 7-14
Superelement Tree used for Freedom Example
Baseline Residual Solution

For comparison, a few key results will be used: the displacement of grid 40465, and stresses for element
30849, and the constraint forces for grids 30398, 40093, and 45093. In addition, the external work will
be compared. The results from the .f06 file for the non-superelement solution are shown below:
FOR DATA BLOCK KLL
LOAD SEQ. NO.
EPSILON
EXTERNAL WORK
2.4914695E-10
7.5310065E+02
POINT ID.
40465
Main Index
V E C T O R
TYPE
T1
T2
T3
R1
R2
R3
-4.159350E-03
-6.231965E-03
-4.670197E-02
7.550971E-04
-3.095922E-04
1.120664E-05
CHAPTER 7 341
F O R C E S
POINT ID.
TYPE
30398
40093
45093
O F
T1
T2
0.0
C O N S T R A I N T
T3
R1
R2
R3
0.0
4.444910E+02
0.0
0.0
0.0
-1.049091E-08
1.357353E-08
4.657378E+02
0.0
0.0
0.0
-1.708439E-08
0.0
4.657378E+02
0.0
0.0
0.0
S T R E S S E S
ELEMENT
ID
30849
I N
E L E M E N T S

GRID-ID
CEN/4
NORMAL-X
NORMAL-Y
-3.129590E+04 -1.111215E+04 -1.175186E+03

3.214362E+04
30744
30751
-86.6789
-3.665192E+04 -8.794149E+03 -1.224859E+03
-87.4873
8.950524E+03 -2.293816E+03
-6.6611
-3.547250E+04 -1.325342E+04 -1.302092E+03
-86.6576
1.841779E+04 -2.066394E+03
-10.5118
-2.723056E+04 -1.310064E+04 -1.142598E+03
-85.4066
3.504300E+04
30737
ANGLE
-6.5085
2.917080E+04
1.810185E+04 -1.962243E+03
-6.5214
-2.604683E+04 -8.940170E+03 -1.027284E+03
-86.5757
3.588052E+04
Listing 7-3
9.271286E+03 -2.143555E+03
OPTION = BILIN
1.387658E+04 -2.111494E+03
2.832415E+04
30752
SHEAR-XY
( Q U A D 4 )
-4.5762
MAJOR
MINOR
-1.104395E+04 -3.136409E+04
3.238451E+04
VON MISES
2.755525E+04
1.363569E+04
2.816209E+04
-8.740398E+03 -3.670568E+04
3.320962E+04
2.859203E+04
8.682644E+03
-1.317738E+04 -3.554854E+04
2.955423E+04
2.538973E+04
3.112725E+04
1.803437E+04
2.580114E+04
-1.300884E+04 -2.732236E+04
2.367085E+04
3.526731E+04
1.787754E+04
3.054336E+04
-8.878700E+03 -2.610830E+04
2.299276E+04
3.605209E+04
9.099715E+03
3.247298E+04
Freedom Non-Superelement Baseline Results
Note that the List and PART Superelement solutions produce the same results for displacements, SPC
forces, and stresses.
List Superelement Solution

For List (SESET) Superelements, the DTI,SETREE entry is required to define a superelement tree. The
definition of list superelements in Patran follows the procedure described in Demonstration of Defining
Interior Points in Patran (Ch. 2). However, Patran does not support the DTI,SETREE entry, so the user
must use Direct Text Input as shown below.
To define the superelement tree depicted in Figure 7-14, the following DTI,SETREE entry is required:
DTI,SETREE,1,10,30,20,30,30,50
,60,50,50,0,40,0
Main Index

Figure 7-15
Defining DTI,SETREE in Patran with Direct Text Input
The resulting input file:

SUBCASE 1
$ Subcase name : Default
SUBTITLE=Default
SPC = 2
LOAD = 6
SET 1 = 40465
DISPLACEMENT(print,SORT1,REAL)=1
SET 2 = 30849
$ STRESS(plot,SORT1,REAL,VONMISES,BILIN)=ALL
STRESS(print,SORT1,REAL,VONMISES,BILIN)=2
BEGIN BULK
DTI,SETREE,1,10,30,20,30,30,50
Main Index
CHAPTER 7 343
,60,50,50,0,40,0
PARAM
PARAM
POST
-1
PRTMAXIM YES
Listing 7-4
Resulting DTI,SETREE in .bdf file
The corresponding input file is found at: /doc/seug/chapter7/freedom/setree/seset-setree.bdf. The

resulting SEMAP is:
(SORTED BY SEID)
INDEX
SUPERELEMENT
PROCESS ORDER
DOWNSTREAM SE
SUPERELEMENT TYPE
10
30
RESIDUAL STRUCTURE
20
30
30
50
40
50
60
50

INDEX
SUPERELEMENT
PROCESS ORDER
DOWNSTREAM SE
SUPERELEMENT TYPE
20
30
10
30
60
50
30
50
50
40
RESIDUAL STRUCTURE

INDEX
SE ID
10
30
50
20
30
50
30
50
40
50
60
50
Main Index
MAY
T R E E
28, 2011
MD NASTRAN

**** TREE CONFIGURATION IS MULTILEVEL ****

( NO. LEVELS =
TIP
NO. TIPS =
L E V E L
* = PROCESS ORDER )
N U M B E R
INDEX
-1-
-2-
-3-
50
30
10
5*
4*
2*
40
6*
20
1*
60
3*
Listing 7-5
SEMAP Showing Multi-Level Superelement Processing Order for Freedom

SESET Model
Investigation of the SEMAP confirms that the superelements are connected to one another as requested
by the DTI,SETREE defined above.
The output is partitioned to the appropriate superelements:
DEFAULT
SUPERELEMENT 40
SUBCASE 1
POINT ID.
40465
TYPE
T1
-4.159350E-03
T2
-6.231965E-03
V E C T O R
T3
R1
R2
R3
-4.670197E-02
7.550971E-04
-3.095922E-04
1.120664E-05
F O R C E S
POINT ID.
O F
C O N S T R A I N T
TYPE
T1
T2
T3
40093
-5.469864E-09
9.506579E-09
4.657378E+02
0.0
R1
0.0
R2
0.0
R3
45093
-9.333434E-09
0.0
4.657378E+02
0.0
0.0
0.0
DEFAULT
SUPERELEMENT 30
SUBCASE 1
F O R C E S
Main Index
O F
C O N S T R A I N T
CHAPTER 7 345
POINT ID.
30398
TYPE
G
T1
T2
0.0
0.0
T3
R1
4.444910E+02
R2
0.0
0.0
R3
0.0
S T R E S S E S
ELEMENT
ID
30849
I N

GRID-ID
CEN/4
NORMAL-X
NORMAL-Y
-3.129590E+04 -1.111215E+04 -1.175186E+03

3.214362E+04
30744
30751
-3.665192E+04 -8.794149E+03 -1.224859E+03
-87.4873
8.950524E+03 -2.293816E+03
-6.6611
-3.547250E+04 -1.325342E+04 -1.302092E+03
-86.6576
1.841779E+04 -2.066394E+03
-10.5118
-2.723056E+04 -1.310064E+04 -1.142598E+03
-85.4066
3.504300E+04
30737
-86.6789
-6.5085
2.917080E+04
1.810185E+04 -1.962243E+03
-6.5214
-2.604683E+04 -8.940170E+03 -1.027284E+03
-86.5757
3.588052E+04
9.271286E+03 -2.143555E+03
( Q U A D 4 )
OPTION = BILIN

ANGLE
1.387658E+04 -2.111494E+03
2.832415E+04
30752
SHEAR-XY
E L E M E N T S
-4.5762
MAJOR
MINOR
-1.104395E+04 -3.136409E+04
3.238451E+04
VON MISES
2.755525E+04
1.363569E+04
2.816209E+04
-8.740398E+03 -3.670568E+04
3.320962E+04
2.859203E+04
8.682644E+03
2.538973E+04
-1.317738E+04 -3.554854E+04
3.112725E+04
2.955423E+04
1.803437E+04
2.580114E+04
-1.300884E+04 -2.732236E+04
2.367085E+04
3.526731E+04
1.787754E+04
3.054336E+04
-8.878700E+03 -2.610830E+04
2.299276E+04
3.605209E+04
9.099715E+03
3.247298E+04
Listing 7-6
Results for Multi-Level Solution of Freedom List Superelements
Note that the results are printed in reverse order of superelement reduction.
PART Superelement Solution

Again, using the superelement tree shown in Figure 7-14, the same problem will be solved using PART
superelements. Patran provides a convenient form for defining the Superelement Tree for PART
Superelements as shown below.
Main Index

Figure 7-16
Defining the SETREE for Part Superelements in Patran
The resulting input file: (ref /doc/seug/chapter7/freedom/partse-discontinuous-setree.bdf)

SOL 101
CEND
TITLE = MD Nastran job created on 29-Mar-11 at 17:13:27
ECHO = NONE
SUBCASE 1
SUBTITLE=Default
SPC = 2
LOAD = 6
BEGIN BULK
PARAM
PARAM
Main Index
POST
-1
PRTMAXIM YES
CHAPTER 7 347
SETREE
30
10
SETREE
30
20
SETREE
50
30
SETREE
50
60
$ Elements and Element Properties for region : pbar.3

PBAR
1.
Listing 7-7
1.2
.5
Input File for Multi-Level PART Analysis with SETREE as Defined by Using
Patran
Note that any SETREE entries that use SEID 0 (the residual structure) as the downstream superelement
are not written since the default is to attach superelements to the residual.
Note that the SEMAP indicates a slightly different processing order for the PART superelement, but
every superelement is processed before it is needed by its downstream connection, so the result is an
equivalent solution.
PRIMARY
PROCESS
DOWNSTREAM
ORDER
SUPERELEMENT
TYPE
------------ ------------ ------- ------------ ----------------------------0
10
30
20
30
30
50
40
50
60
50
LABEL
------------------------
RESIDUAL STRUCTURE

PRIMARY
PROCESS
DOWNSTREAM
ORDER
SUPERELEMENT
TYPE
------------ ------------ ------- ------------ ----------------------------10
30
20
30
30
50
60
50
40
50
RESIDUAL STRUCTURE
LABEL
------------------------

SUPERELEMENT
------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
10
Main Index
30
50

20
30
50
30
50
40
50
60
50
FREEDOM PLANE EXAMPLE, MULTI-LEVEL PART SUPERELEMENT
MAY
28, 2011

DISCONTINUOUS NODES AT INTERFACES
( CONFIGURATION = MULTILEVEL
T R E E
NO. LEVELS =
NO. TIPS =
4 )
TIP
LEVEL
LEVEL
LEVEL
LEVEL
LEVEL
LEVEL
LEVEL
LEVEL
LEVEL
INDEX
-1-
-2-
-3-
-4-
-5-
-6-
-7-
-8-
-9-
40
50
30
10
20
60
Listing 7-8
SEMAP Showing Multi-Level Superelement Processing Order for Freedom

PART Model
The solution for the PART multi-level superelement model is equivalent to the List multi-level
superelement model.
MAY
28, 2011
MD NASTRAN
DEFAULT
SUBCASE 1
POINT ID.
40465
12/15/10
SUPERELEMENT 40
TYPE
T1
-4.159350E-03
T2
-6.231965E-03
V E C T O R
T3
R1
R2
R3
-4.670197E-02
7.550971E-04
-3.095922E-04
1.120664E-05
F O R C E S
POINT ID.
Main Index
O F
C O N S T R A I N T
TYPE
T1
T2
T3
40093
8.011156E-09
2.258071E-08
4.657378E+02
0.0
R1
0.0
R2
0.0
R3
45093
-2.125145E-08
0.0
4.657378E+02
0.0
0.0
0.0
CHAPTER 7 349
MAY
28, 2011
MD NASTRAN
DEFAULT
12/15/10
SUPERELEMENT 30
SUBCASE 1
F O R C E S
POINT ID.
30374
TYPE
G
O F
T1
T2
0.0
0.0
T3
C O N S T R A I N T
R1
4.444910E+02
R2
0.0
R3
0.0
0.0
S T R E S S E S
LEMENT
ID
30849
I N

GRID-ID
CEN/4
NORMAL-X
30727
-3.665192E+04 -8.794149E+03 -1.224859E+03
-87.4873
8.950524E+03 -2.293816E+03
-6.6611
-3.547250E+04 -1.325342E+04 -1.302092E+03
-86.6576
1.841779E+04 -2.066394E+03
-10.5118
-2.723056E+04 -1.310064E+04 -1.142598E+03
-85.4066
3.504300E+04
30713
-86.6789
-6.5085
2.917080E+04
1.810185E+04 -1.962243E+03
-6.5214
-2.604683E+04 -8.940170E+03 -1.027284E+03
-86.5757
3.588052E+04
Listing 7-9
9.271286E+03 -2.143555E+03
( Q U A D 4 )
OPTION = BILIN

ANGLE
1.387658E+04 -2.111494E+03
2.832415E+04
30728
SHEAR-XY
-3.129590E+04 -1.111215E+04 -1.175186E+03

3.214362E+04
30720
NORMAL-Y
E L E M E N T S
-4.5762
MAJOR
MINOR
-1.104395E+04 -3.136409E+04
3.238451E+04
VON MISES
2.755525E+04
1.363569E+04
2.816209E+04
-8.740398E+03 -3.670568E+04
3.320962E+04
2.859203E+04
8.682644E+03
2.538973E+04
-1.317738E+04 -3.554854E+04
3.112725E+04
2.955423E+04
1.803437E+04
2.580114E+04
-1.300884E+04 -2.732236E+04
2.367085E+04
3.526731E+04
1.787754E+04
3.054336E+04
-8.878700E+03 -2.610830E+04
2.299276E+04
3.605209E+04
9.099715E+03
3.247298E+04
Results for Multi-Level Solution of Freedom List Superelements
As with the List Superelements, the PART Superelement data recovery is performed in reverse order of
the reduction.
External Superelement Solution

The external superelement method provides the user the maximum flexibility when multiple
organizations are involved in a project, or there are many design changes in a few components. For a
review of the external superelement methods, the user is encouraged to review Demonstration of Defining
Interior Points in Patran (Ch. 2) before proceeding.
Main Index

PARAM,EXTOUT Method
For a review of the 3-Step External Superelement method, the user may want to review Using
PARAM,EXTOUT (3-Step) External Superelements (Ch. 2).
When using the 3-step PARAM,EXTOUT external superelement method for multi-level superelement
reduction, the user manually reduces and attaches each superelement in the tree. In order to reduce a
collector superelement, the reduced matrices from its constituent components must have already been
reduced so that they can be attached.
For the superelement tree defined in Figure 7-14, the steps in Table 7-3 must be performed in order. The
files in the table are located at /doc/seug/chapter7/freedom-param-extout-multilevel. Note that for proper
data recovery, SCR=NO must be specified on the command line. (The default installation is SCR=NO,
but if the user has overwritten the default in a MSC.Nastran rc file, SCR=NO must be specified on the
command line.)
Table 7-3
Steps for Performing 3-Step Multi-Level Superelement Analysis of Freedom

Step
Filename
Reduce Tail
reduce-tail.dat
Reduce Engines
reduce-engines.dat
The engines must be reduced prior to

attaching the engine matrices to the aftfuselage.
Reduce Aft-Fuselage
reduce-aft-fuselage.dat
The tail and engines must be attached to

the aft-fuselage. The aft-fuselage must
be reduced prior to attaching the aftfuselage matrices to the cabin.
Reduce Nose
reduce-nose.dat
The nose must be reduced prior to

attaching the nose matrices to the cabin.
Reduce Cabin
reduce-cabin.dat
The aft-fuselage and nose must be

attached to the cabin. The cabin must
be reduced prior attaching the cabin
matrices to the wingbox.
Reduce Wings
reduce-wings.dat
The wings must be reduced prior to

attaching the wing matrices to the
cabin.
Residual Solution and Data Recovery
Main Index
assemble-wingbox.dat
Comment
The tail must be reduced prior to
attaching the tail matrices to the aftfuselage
The cabin and wings are attached to the

wingbox and the residual solution is
performed. Boundary solutions for the
cabin and wings are generated.
CHAPTER 7 351
Table 7-3
Steps for Performing 3-Step Multi-Level Superelement Analysis of Freedom

Step
Filename
Comment
Wing Data Recovery
Recover-wings.dat
The data recovery for the wings is

performed.
Cabin Data Recovery
Recover-cabin.dat
The data recovery of the cabin is

performed. Boundary solution for the
nose and aft-fuselage are generated.
Nose Data Recovery
Recover-nose.dat
The data recovery for the nose is

performed.
Aft Fuselage Data Recovery
Recover-aft-fuselage.dat
Engine Data Recovery
Recover-engines.dat
Tail Data Recovery
Recover-tail.dat
The data recovery for the aft fuselage is

engines and tail is performed.
The data recovery for the engines is
performed.
The data recovery for the tail is
performed.
Schematically, the steps in Table 7-3, can be represented as follows:
Listing 7-10
Main Index
Schematic of 3-Step Multi-Level Superelement Steps for Freedom

As an example of a tip superelement reduction, the reduce-engines.dat file is shown below. A

description of the highlighted lines is as follows:
The assign master and assign dball statements define the MSC.Nastran database which will be
used for data recovery.

The assign output2 entry identifies the file that stores the reduced matrices of the engines. The
unit number matches the unit number on the PARAM,EXTUNIT entry

PARAM,EXTOUT,DMIGOP2 specifies the format of the matrices.
PARAM,EXTUNIT,31 specifies the unit number to store the reduced matrices. This matches
the unit number on the assign output2 line.

The BNDFIX1 entry defines the boundary dof between the engines and the aft-fuselage.
assign master='engines.master' delete
assign dball ='engines.dball' delete
assign output2='engines_dmigop2.op2' unit=31 delete
SOL 101
CEND
TITLE = Freedom plane example, engines Reduction
LABEL = Step 1 of 3-step External SE Reduction, Multi-Level
ECHO = NONE
param,snorm,0. $turn off SNORM processing
SUBCASE 1
LOAD = 1
BEGIN BULK
$ define boundary dof
BNDFIX1,123456,20449,thru,20482
PARAM,EXTUNIT,31
$ model and loads

include 'freedom-part-engines.bdf'
enddata
Listing 7-11
External Superelement Reduction of Engines (reduce-engines.dat) 3-Step

Method
The resulting .f06 file reveals some key information including the external work on the member. When
comparing the external work to the freedom-part-discontinuous-setree, which breaks down each
individual superelement, the user will notice that the work is the same. This verifies the that the same
solution is obtained whether using internal or external superelements.
Main Index
CHAPTER 7 353

FOR DATA BLOCK KOO
LOAD SEQ. NO.
ASTERISKS
1
EPSILON
EXTERNAL WORK
3.0666982E-12
1.9711174E+01
EPSILONS LARGER THAN 0.001 ARE FLAGGED WITH
Listing 7-12
External Work of Engine Superelement using External Superelements

FOR DATA BLOCK KOO
LOAD SEQ. NO.
ASTERISKS
1
EPSILON
-4.2039805E-12
EXTERNAL WORK
EPSILONS LARGER THAN 0.001 ARE FLAGGED WITH
1.9711174E+01
1
FREEDOM PLANE EXAMPLE, SINGLE LEVEL PART SUPERELEMENT
PAGE
30
Listing 7-13
MAY
25, 2011
MD NASTRAN
12/15/10
External Work of Engine Superelement using PART Superelements
After the engines and tail are reduced, the aft-fuselage can be assembled and reduced. A description of
the highlighted lines is as follows:

The assign output2 entry identifies the file that stores the reduced matrices of the aft-fuselage
assembly. The unit number matches the unit number on the PARAM,EXTUNIT entry
The assign inputt2 entries identify the files that contain the stored matrices for the tail and
engines. The unit numbers match the unit numbers on the SEBULK entry
PARAM,EXTOUT,DMIGOP2 specifies the format of the matrices.
PARAM,EXTUNIT,31 specifies the unit number to store the reduced matrices. This matches
the unit number on the assign output2 line.

The SEBULK entry identifies that the tail and engines are external superelements with a
DMIGOP2 format and the unit numbers

The SECONCT entry defines the superelement connections
The BEGIN SUPER entries identify the start of data for the external superelements
The EXTRN entries define the grids/dofs that are mapped on the external matrices. These are
the same grids/dofs used during the reduction run.
Main Index

The GRID and CORD2R entries define the geometric location of the grids for each external
superelement. These must be manually copied from the input files used in the reduction runs.
assign master='aft-fuselage.master' delete
assign dball ='aft-fuselage.dball' delete
assign output2='aft-fuselage_dmigop2.op2' unit=31 delete
assign inputt2='tail_dmigop2.op2' unit=32
assign inputt2='engines_dmigop2.op2' unit=33
SOL 101
CEND
TITLE = Freedom plane example, aft-fuselage Reduction
ECHO = NONE
SPC=1
$ example use expanded case control

SUBCASE 10
SUPER = 10,1
SUBCASE 20
SUPER = 20,1
SUBCASE 30
SUPER = 0,1
LOAD = 1
BEGIN BULK
BNDFIX1,123456,30788,thru,30811
PARAM,EXTUNIT,31
$ in this reduction, the aft-fuselage a collector and is considered the residual during the reduction process
$ attach upstream se
SEBULK
10
EXTOP2
SECONCT
10
AUTO
32
AUTO
33
$ attach upstream se
SEBULK
Main Index
20
EXTOP2
CHAPTER 7 355
SECONCT
20
$ model and loads

include 'freedom-part-aft-fuselage.bdf'
BEGIN SUPER = 10 $ Tail

$ define external dof - these are the BNDFIX1 data from the reduction run
EXTRN,10415,thru,10434,123456
$ define external grids
GRID
10415
287.7
GRID
10416
287.532 2.057
0.
20.281
20.049
BEGIN SUPER = 20 $ Engines

$ define external dof - these are the BNDFIX1 data from the reduction run
EXTRN,20449,thru,20482,123456
$ define coord systems necessary for boundary dof
CORD2R
85
0.
-1.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
-1.
0.
$ define external grids

GRID
20449
242.97
GRID
20450
246.303 -14.406 13.96
-15.343 12.686
enddata
Listing 7-14
External Superelement Attachment of Tail and Engines to Aft-Fuselage and

Reduction of Aft-Fuselage (reduce-aft-fuselage.dat), PARAM,EXTOUT
method
The remaining reduce files follow a similar format. The tail, engines, wings, and nose are tip
superelements; while the aft-fuselage and cabin are collector superelements that attach upstream
superelements before they are reduced.
At the end of the tree, the wingbox is the residual structure. The attachment of the upstream
superelements is similar to the aft-fuselage listing above. In order to perform data recovery on the
upstream superelements, the boundary information must be partitioned and stored using the following
entries:
The assign output2 entries identify the files which will receive the boundary solution for the
respective superelements. The unit number matches the unit specified on

PARAM,EXTDRUNT.
Expanded case control allows parameter control for each superelement. SUPER= defines the
superelement for the subcase.

PARAM,EXTDROUT,DMIGOP2 defines the format to store the external superelement
boundary solution.
Main Index

PARAM,EXTDRUNT defines the unit to store the boundary solution for each respective
superelement.
assign master='wingbox.master' delete
assign dball ='wingbox.dball' delete
assign inputt2='wings_dmigop2.op2' unit=32
assign inputt2='cabin_dmigop2.op2' unit=33
assign output2='wings-bndry-soln.op2' unit=35 delete

assign output2='cabin-bndry-soln.op2' unit=36 delete
SOL 101
CEND
TITLE = Freedom plane example, Wingbox Assembly
ECHO = NONE
DISP=ALL
STRESS(BILIN)=ALL
SPCF=ALL
SUBCASE 40
super = 40,1
param,extdrout,dmigop2
param,extdrunt,35
SUBCASE 50
super=50,1
param,extdrunt,36
SUBCASE 99
super=0,1
LOAD = 1
BEGIN BULK
$ in this reduction, the wingbox is the residual and the final level of reduction
param,maxratio,1.e8
$ attach upstream se - wings
Main Index
SEBULK
40
EXTOP2
SECONCT
40
AUTO
32
CHAPTER 7 357
$ attach upstream se - cabin collector

SEBULK
50
EXTOP2
SECONCT
50
AUTO
33
$ model and loads

include 'freedom-part-wingbox.bdf'
Listing 7-15
External Superelement Residual Solution (assemble-wingbox.dat) With

Directives for Upstream Boundary Solution Storage, PARAM,EXTOUT Method
After the residual solution is obtained, and the boundary solutions are stored on appropriate files, the data
recovery for upstream superelements can begin. As an example, the cabin data recovery input file is
shown below. A description of the highlighted lines is as follows:
The assign + restart entries define the database that was specified during the reduction run. This
database contains all of the grids, elements, coordinates, loading, constraints, etc., so there is no
need to specify any bulk data.
The assign inputt2 entry defines the boundary solution written by the downstream superelement.
The assign output2 entry defines the files that store the boundary solution of the upstream
superelements

boundary solution.
superelement.
The output requests can specify any valid output request for a static solution as if it were run
without superelements.
assign se50='cabin.master'
restart logi=se50
assign inputt2='cabin-bndry-soln.op2' unit=31
$ define files to store boundary solution for upstream data recovery

assign output2='aft-fuselage-bndry-soln.op2' unit=35 delete
assign output2='nose-bndry-soln.op2' unit=36 delete

DIAG 5,6,8,56
CEND
$
TITLE = Freedom plane example, Cabin Data Recovery
Main Index


$
$ output requests apply to all subcases unless overwritten
DISPL=ALL
STRESS(bilin)=ALL
SPCF=ALL
ECHO=NONE
$
$ specify data recovery from boundary solution
param,extdr,yes
param,extdrunt,31
$
$ use same case control from reduction run
SUBCASE 30 $ aft-fuselage
super = 30,1
param,extdrunt,35
SUBCASE 60 $ nose
super = 60,1
param,extdrunt,36
SUBCASE 99
SUPER = 0,1
LOAD = 1
BEGIN BULK
$ no bulk data necessary
ENDDATA
Listing 7-16
Cabin Data Recovery Input (recover-cabin.dat) With Directives for Upstream

Boundary Solution Storage.
The data recovery solutions are performed for every superelement that is desired. The data recovery for
the wings (recover-wings.dat and recover aft-fuselage.dat) demonstrates that the same solution is
obtained for the 3-step external superelement process when compared to both the List and PART multilevel superelement solutions.
Main Index
CHAPTER 7 359
[DATA RECOVERY FOR WINGS]
FREEDOM PLANE EXAMPLE, WING DATA RECOVERY
MAY
24, 2011
MD NASTRAN
12/15/10

STEP 3 OF 3-STEP EXTERNAL SE REDUCTION, MULTI-LEVEL
SUBCASE 1
POINT ID.
40465
V E C T O R
TYPE
T1
T2
T3
R1
R2
R3
-4.159352E-03
-6.231966E-03
-4.670198E-02
7.550971E-04
-3.095921E-04
1.120662E-05
F O R C E S
POINT ID.
O F
C O N S T R A I N T
TYPE
T1
T2
T3
40093
-5.100531E-09
8.711197E-09
4.657378E+02
0.0
R1
0.0
R2
0.0
R3
45093
-8.245081E-09
0.0
4.657378E+02
0.0
0.0
0.0
[DATA RECOVERY FOR AFT-FUSELAGE]
F O R C E S
POINT ID.
30374
TYPE
G
O F
T1
T2
0.0
C O N S T R A I N T
T3
0.0
R1
4.444910E+02
0.0
R2
0.0
R3
0.0
S T R E S S E S
ELEMENT
ID
0
30849

GRID-ID
CEN/4
NORMAL-X
30720
ANGLE
-86.6789
-3.665192E+04 -8.794149E+03 -1.224859E+03
-87.4873
8.950524E+03 -2.293816E+03
-6.6611
-3.547250E+04 -1.325342E+04 -1.302092E+03
-86.6576
1.841779E+04 -2.066394E+03
-10.5118
-2.723056E+04 -1.310064E+04 -1.142598E+03
-85.4066
3.504300E+04
1.810185E+04 -1.962243E+03
E L E M E N T S
( Q U A D 4 )
OPTION = BILIN
-6.5085
2.917080E+04
30727
SHEAR-XY
1.387658E+04 -2.111494E+03
2.832415E+04
30728
NORMAL-Y
-3.129590E+04 -1.111215E+04 -1.175186E+03

3.214362E+04
Main Index
I N
-6.5214
MAJOR
MINOR
-1.104395E+04 -3.136409E+04
3.238451E+04
VON MISES
2.755525E+04
1.363569E+04
2.816209E+04
-8.740398E+03 -3.670568E+04
3.320962E+04
2.859203E+04
8.682644E+03
2.538973E+04
-1.317738E+04 -3.554854E+04
3.112725E+04
2.955423E+04
1.803437E+04
2.580114E+04
-1.300884E+04 -2.732236E+04
2.367085E+04
3.526731E+04
1.787754E+04
3.054336E+04

30713
-2.604683E+04 -8.940170E+03 -1.027284E+03
-86.5757
-8.878700E+03 -2.610830E+04
2.299276E+04
3.588052E+04 9.271286E+03 -2.143555E+03 -4.5762 3.605209E+04 9.099715E+03 3.247298E+04
Listing 7-17
Wing and Aft-Fuselage Data Recovery Solutions (recover-wings.dat and

recover-aft-fuselage.dat) Excerpts
EXTSEOUT Method
The standard 2-step external superelement method using the EXTSEOUT case control command is
intended for single-level superelement trees. However, by adapting the 3-step method for data recovery,
a full solution of upstream superelements is possible.
The files in the table are located at /doc/seug/chapter7/freedom-extseout-multilevel. Note that for proper
data recovery, SCR=NO must be specified on the command line. (The default installation is SCR=NO,
but if the user has overwritten the default in a MSC.Nastran rc file, SCR=NO must be specified on the
command line.)
Table 7-4
Main Index
Steps for Performing 2-Step Hybrid Multi-Level Superelement Analysis of Freedom

Step
Filename
Comment
Reduce Tail
reduce-tail.dat
Reduce Engines
reduce-engines.dat
The engines must be reduced prior to

attaching the engine matrices to the aftfuselage.
Reduce Aft-Fuselage
reduce-aft-fuselage.dat
The tail and engines must be attached to

the aft-fuselage. The aft-fuselage must
be reduced prior to attaching the aftfuselage matrices to the cabin.
Reduce Nose
reduce-nose.dat
The nose must be reduced prior to

attaching the nose matrices to the cabin.
Reduce Cabin
reduce-cabin.dat
The aft-fuselage and nose must be

attached to the cabin. The cabin must
be reduced prior attaching the cabin
matrices to the wingbox.
Reduce Wings
reduce-wings.dat
The wings must be reduced prior to

attaching the wing matrices to the
cabin.
The tail must be reduced prior to

attaching the tail matrices to the aftfuselage
CHAPTER 7 361
Table 7-4
Steps for Performing 2-Step Hybrid Multi-Level Superelement Analysis of Freedom

Step
Filename
Comment
Residual Solution and Data Recovery
assemble-wingbox.dat
The cabin and wings are attached to the

wingbox and the residual solution is
performed. Boundary solutions for the
cabin and wings are generated.
Wing Data Recovery
recover-wings.dat
The data recovery for the wings is

performed.
Cabin Data Recovery
recover-cabin.dat
The data recovery of the cabin is

nose and aft-fuselage are generated.
Nose Data Recovery
recover-nose.dat
The data recovery for the nose is

performed.
Aft Fuselage Data Recovery
recover-aft-fuselage.dat
Engine Data Recovery
recover-engines.dat
Tail Data Recovery
recover-tail.dat
The data recovery for the aft fuselage is

engines and tail is performed.
The data recovery for the engines is
performed.
The data recovery for the tail is
performed.
The 2-step method uses the EXTSEOUT case control command instead of PARAM,EXTOUT during
the reduction step. The advantage of the EXTSEOUT command with the EXTBULK option is that the
BEGIN SUPER entries and associated EXTRN, GRID, and CORD2R entries are generated, eliminating
the need to cut/paste this data from the reduction run input file. The highlighted entries for the reduceengines.dat file are:

The assign output2 entry identifies the file that stores the reduced matrices of the engines. The
unit number matches the unit number on the PARAM,EXTUNIT entry

The EXTSEOUT entry defines the EXTBULK, EXTID (superelement ID), and the matrix
format (DMIGOP2) and unit number to store the reduced matrices.

assign master='engines.master' delete
assign dball ='engines.dball' delete
assign output2='engines_dmigop2.op2' unit=31 delete
SOL 101
CEND
TITLE = Freedom plane example, engines Reduction
Main Index


ECHO = NONE
$ note: the unit number must be different than the unit for the tail
$ since both op2 files need to be attached in the aft-fuselage collector
EXTSEOUT(ASMBULK,EXTBULK,EXTID=20) DMIGOP2=31
DISP=ALL
STRESS=ALL
SPCF=ALL
SUBCASE 1
LOAD = 1
BEGIN BULK
BNDFIX1,123456,20449,thru,20482
PARAM,EXTUNIT,31
$ model and loads

include 'freedom-part-engines.bdf'
enddata
Listing 7-18
External Superelement Reduction of Engines (reduce-engines.dat) EXTSEOUT

Method
The EXTBULK option on the EXTSEOUT entry creates a .pch file which will automatically create the
information necessary to attach the engines to the aft-fuselage. The contents of the .pch file are as
follows:
$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$
$
$ STANDARD PUNCH (.PCH) FILE FOR EXTERNAL SUPERELEMENT
20
$ ------------------------------------------------------------$
$ AT THE VERY END OF THE MAIN BULK DATA PORTION OF THE ASSEMBLY RUN
$
$ NOTE
$ ---$
$ USE OF THIS FILE IN THE ASSEMBLY RUN IS PURELY OPTIONAL SINCE
Main Index
CHAPTER 7 363
$ THIS INFORMATION IS ALSO STORED ON THE OP2 FILE GENERATED IN THE

$ EXTERNAL SUPERELEMENT CREATION RUN
$
$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$
$--------------------------- COLUMN NUMBERS ---------------------------$00000000111111111122222222223333333333444444444455555555556666666666777
$23456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012
$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$
$
BEGIN SUPER
20
$
CORD2R
85
-1.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
-1.
0.
$
EXTRN
20449
123456
20450
123456
20451
123456
20452
123456
20453
123456
20454
123456
20455
123456
20456
123456
20457
123456
20458
123456
20459
123456
20460
123456
20461
123456
20462
123456
20463
123456
20464
123456
20465
123456
20466
123456
20467
123456
20468
123456
20469
123456
20470
123456
20471
123456
20472
123456
20473
123456
20474
123456
20475
123456
20476
123456
20477
123456
20478
123456
20479
123456
20480
123456
20481
123456
20482
123456
$
$
GRID
20449
242.97
GRID
20450
246.303 -14.406 13.96
-15.343 12.686
(etc)
GRID
20482
276.303 17.391
11.706
85
$
ASET
20449
123456
20450
123456
20451
123456
20452
123456
ASET
20453
123456
20454
123456
20455
123456
20456
123456
ASET
20457
123456
20458
123456
20459
123456
20460
123456
ASET
20461
123456
20462
123456
20463
123456
20464
123456
ASET
20465
123456
20466
123456
20467
123456
20468
123456
ASET
20469
123456
20470
123456
20471
123456
20472
123456
ASET
20473
123456
20474
123456
20475
123456
20476
123456
ASET
20477
123456
20478
123456
20479
123456
20480
123456
ASET
20481
123456
20482
123456
$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$
Listing 7-19
Main Index
.pch File Containing Mapping Information for Engines Generated with

EXTBULK Option on EXTSEOUT entry

It is key to note in the .pch file the BEGIN SUPER command which is useful for the remainder of the
reduce files.
As with the PARAM,EXTOUT method, after the engines and tail are reduced, the aft-fuselage can be
assembled and reduced. A description of the highlighted lines is as follows:

The assign output2 entry identifies the file that stores the reduced matrices of the aft-fuselage
assembly. The unit number matches the unit number on the PARAM,EXTUNIT entry
The assign inputt2 entries identify the files that contain the stored matrices for the tail and
engines. The unit numbers match the unit numbers on the SEBULK entry
The EXTSEOUT entry defines the EXTBULK, EXTID (superelement ID), and the matrix
format (DMIGOP2) and unit number to store the reduced matrices.

The SEBULK entry identifies that the tail and engines are external superelements with a
DMIGOP2 format and the unit numbers

The SECONCT entry defines the superelement connections. Note that when EXTSEOUT is
used, the connections must be made manually.

The include .pch files define the EXTRN, GRID, and CORD2i entries for each superelement.
Since these have BEGIN SUPER entries, they must be included at the end of the input file.
assign master='aft-fuselage.master' delete
assign dball ='aft-fuselage.dball' delete
assign output2='aft-fuselage_dmigop2.op2' unit=31 delete
assign inputt2='tail_dmigop2.op2' unit=32
assign inputt2='engines_dmigop2.op2' unit=33
SOL 101
CEND
TITLE = Freedom plane example, aft-fuselage Reduction
ECHO = NONE
SPC=1
DISP=ALL
STRESS=ALL
SPCF=ALL
$ example use expanded case control
Main Index
CHAPTER 7 365
SUBCASE 10
SUPER = 10,1
SUBCASE 20
SUPER = 20,1
SUBCASE 30
SUPER = 0,1
LOAD = 1
BEGIN BULK
BNDFIX1,123456,30788,thru,30811
$ model and loads
include 'freedom-part-aft-fuselage.bdf'
$ include assembly information

SEBULK
10
EXTOP2
SECONCT
10
MANUAL
32
,10415,thru,10434,30001,thru,30020
SEBULK
20
EXTOP2
SECONCT
20
MANUAL
33
,20449,thru,20482,30021,thru,30054
$ include bulk data for PARTS - these must be included LAST in the bdf
include 'reduce-tail.pch'
include 'reduce-engines.pch'
Listing 7-20
External Superelement Attachment of Tail and Engines to Aft-Fuselage and

Reduction of Aft-Fuselage (reduce-aft-fuselage.dat), EXTSEOUT method
The remaining reduce files follow a similar format. The tail, engines, wings, and nose are tip
superelements; while the aft-fuselage and cabin are collector superelements that attach upstream
superelements before they are reduced.
At the end of the tree, the wingbox is the residual structure. The attachment of the upstream
superelements is similar to the aft-fuselage listing above. In order to perform data recovery on the
upstream superelements, the boundary information must be partitioned and stored using the following
entries:
The assign output2 entries identify the files which will receive the boundary solution for the
respective superelements. The unit number matches the unit specified on

PARAM,EXTDRUNT.
Main Index


boundary solution.
superelement.
assign master='wingbox.master' delete
assign dball ='wingbox.dball' delete
assign inputt2='cabin_dmigop2.op2' unit=31
assign inputt2='wings_dmigop2.op2' unit=32
assign output2='wings-bndry-soln.op2' unit=35 delete

assign output2='cabin-bndry-soln.op2' unit=36 delete
SOL 101
CEND
TITLE = Freedom plane example, Wingbox Assembly
ECHO = NONE
DISP=ALL
STRESS(BILIN)=ALL
SPCF=ALL
SUBCASE 40
super = 40,1
param,extdrunt,35
SUBCASE 50
super=50,1
param,extdrunt,36
SUBCASE 99
super=0,1
LOAD = 1
BEGIN BULK
$ in this reduction, the wingbox is the residual and the final level of reduction
param,maxratio,1.e8
Main Index
CHAPTER 7 367
$ attach upstream se - wings

SEBULK
40
EXTOP2
SECONCT
40
MANUAL
32
,40001,thru,40008,171,thru,178
,45001,thru,45008,179,thru,186
$.......2.......3.......4.......5.......6.......7.......8.......9.......CONTINUE
$
40001
171
40002
172
40003
173
40004
174
40005
175
40006
176
40007
177
40008
178
45001
179
45002
180
45003
181
45004
182
45005
183
45006
184
45007
185
45008
186
$ attach upstream se - cabin collector

SEBULK
50
EXTOP2
SECONCT
50
MANUAL
31
,50001,thru,50037,187,thru,223
$ model and loads

include 'freedom-part-wingbox.bdf'
include 'reduce-wings.pch'
include 'reduce-cabin
Listing 7-21
External Superelement Residual Solution (assemble-wingbox.dat) With

Directives for Upstream Boundary Solution Storage, EXTSEOUT Method
After the residual solution is obtained, and the boundary solutions are stored on appropriate files, the data
recovery for upstream superelements can begin. As an example, the cabin data recovery input file is
shown below. A description of the highlighted lines is as follows:
The assign + restart entries define the database that was specified during the reduction run. This
database contains all of the grids, elements, coordinates, loading, constraints, etc., so there is no
need to specify any bulk data.
The assign inputt2 entry defines the boundary solution written by the downstream superelement.
The assign output2 entry defines the files that store the boundary solution of the upstream
superelements

boundary solution.
superelement.
Main Index

The output requests can specify any valid output request for a static solution as if it were run
without superelements.
assign se50='cabin.master'
restart logi=se50
assign inputt2='cabin-bndry-soln.op2' unit=31
$ define files to store boundary solution for upstream data recovery

assign output2='aft-fuselage-bndry-soln.op2' unit=35 delete
assign output2='nose-bndry-soln.op2' unit=36 delete

DIAG 5,6,8,56
CEND
$
TITLE = Freedom plane example, Cabin Data Recovery
$
$ output requests apply to all subcases unless overwritten
DISPL=ALL
STRESS(bilin)=ALL
SPCF=ALL
ECHO=NONE
$
$ specify data recovery from boundary solution
param,extdr,yes
param,extdrunt,31
$
$ use same case control from reduction run
SUBCASE 30 $ aft-fuselage
super = 30,1
param,extdrunt,35
SUBCASE 60 $ nose
super = 60,1
param,extdrunt,36
SUBCASE 99
SUPER = 0,1
LOAD = 1
Main Index
CHAPTER 7 369
BEGIN BULK
$ no bulk data necessary
ENDDATA
Listing 7-22
Cabin Data Recovery Input (recover-cabin.dat) With Directives for Upstream

Boundary Solution Storage, EXTSEOUT method
The data recovery solutions are performed for every superelement that is desired. The data recovery for
the wings (recover-wings.dat and recover aft-fuselage.dat) demonstrates that the same solution is
obtained for the EXTSEOUT with PARAM,EXTDROUT superelement process when compared to both
the List and PART multi-level superelement solutions. The solution is the same as shown in Listing 7-17.
When comparing results from all of the methods for multi-level superelement analysis described above,
the reader will notice that all elements have the exact same values for deflections and stresses. Below are
tables which summarize the results solved for in the methods discussed in this chapter.
Table 7-5
Results Comparison for Multi-Level Superelement Analysis Methods

Maximum
SPCFORCES
Elm. 30849, Grid

30720 Von Mises
Stress
Model
External Work
Displacement
Vector (40465)
Baseline
7.5310065E+02
-4.670197E-02
4.6573779E+02
3.320962E+04
List Superelement
7.2700531E+02
-4.670197E-02
4.6573779E+02
3.320962E+04
PART Superelement
7.5153900E+02
-4.670197E-02
4.6573779E+02
3.320962E+04
3-Step External
Superelement
7.2341473E+02
-4.670197E-02
4.6573779E+02
3.320962E+04
2-Step External
Superelement
7.2341473E+02
-4.670198E-02
4.6573779E+02
3.320962E+04
Table 7-6
Results Comparison for Multi-Level Superelement Analysis Methods
Model
SPCF 30398
SPCF 40093
SPCF 45093
Baseline
4.444910E+02
4.657378E+02
4.657378E+02
List Superelement
4.444910E+02
4.657378E+02
4.657378E+02
PART Superelement
4.444910E+02
4.657378E+02
4.657378E+02
PARAM,EXTOUT External Superelement
4.444910E+02
4.657378E+02
4.657378E+02
EXTSEOUT External Superelement
4.444910E+02
4.657378E+02
4.657378E+02
Main Index

1.
Main Index
Chapter 8: Output Description and Control in Static Superelement Analysis
Main Index
Output Description and Control in

Static Superelement Analysis
Introduction
Result Output

Introduction
Introduction
Up to this point, this guide provided snippets of output. The purpose of this chapter is to summarize and
consolidate the various MSC.Nastran output in one convenient location. Additional output controls will
be discussed.
Note:
BEGIN SUPER vs. BEGIN BULK Superelement Partitioning

MSC.Nastran maintains two distinct paths for superelement processing in the solution
sequences. When a BEGIN SUPER entry is present the program uses the more modern
SEP1X module to make the SEMAP table used to control partition of superelements. When
there is a BEGIN BULK entry but no BEGIN SUPER entries a parallel path using the older
SEP1 module is used instead. For a more detailed discussion of these two methods, please
refer to Superelement Analysis (Ch. 1) in the MSC Nastran Reference Manual.
Main Index
CHAPTER 8 373
MSC.Nastran provides detailed diagnostics related to superelements and their connection to each other.
The sections below will discuss the superelement definition tables and output controls available to the
user.
Superelement Definition Tables

Superelement definition tables list the superelement processing order used in the solution. The user can
find this table in the .f06 file when solving using list superelements and PART superelements.
For this section, the output for the flyswatter examples in CHAPTER 3 are investigated in more detail.
List Superelements
For list superelements, the superelement definition table is presented in two formats. The first table lists
the superelements by number (SEID). In the second table, the superelements are listed by processing
order.
(SORTED BY SEID)
INDEX
SUPERELEMENT
PROCESS ORDER
DOWNSTREAM SE
SUPERELEMENT TYPE
RESIDUAL STRUCTURE
10
20
30
40
50
60
70

INDEX
Main Index
SUPERELEMENT
PROCESS ORDER
DOWNSTREAM SE
SUPERELEMENT TYPE
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
RESIDUAL STRUCTURE

Listing 8-1
List Superelement Definition Table (Ref output from:

/doc/seug/chapter3/flyswatter-seset.bdf)
In the second column, the superelement number (SEID) is identified. In the third column, the order which
the superelements are processed is presented.
PART Superelements
With PART superelements, the superelement definition table is presented in two similar, but slightly
different formats from the list superelements. The PART superelements definition table includes a
column titled Label, which can define the superelement defined via the SELABEL bulk data entry.
PRIMARY
PROCESS
DOWNSTREAM
ORDER
SUPERELEMENT
TYPE
------------ ------------ ------- ------------ ----------------------------0
RESIDUAL STRUCTURE
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
LABEL
-----------------------------------------

PRIMARY
PROCESS
DOWNSTREAM
ORDER
SUPERELEMENT
TYPE
------------ ------------ ------- ------------ ----------------------------10
20
30
40
50
60
70
Listing 8-2
LABEL
-----------------------------------------

0
RESIDUAL STRUCTURE
PART Superelement Definition Table (Ref output from:

/doc/seug/chapter3/flyswatter-part.bdf)
For PART superelements, the first column lists the superelements. The third column lists the process
order and the fourth column lists and downstream elements, if applicable to the problem.
Main Index
CHAPTER 8 375
There are no definition tables for external superelements during the superelement generation run. When
an external superelement is attached in an assembly run, the external superelement is identified as an
EXTERNAL in the Superelement Definition Tables.
PRIMARY
PROCESS
DOWNSTREAM
ORDER
SUPERELEMENT
TYPE
------------ ------------ ------- ------------ ----------------------------0
10
10
20
20
30
30
40
40
50
50
60
60
70
70
LABEL
----------------------------
RESIDUAL STRUCTURE

PRIMARY
PROCESS
DOWNSTREAM
ORDER
SUPERELEMENT
TYPE
------------ ------------ ------- ------------ ----------------------------10
10
20
20
30
30
40
40
50
50
60
60
70
70
RESIDUAL STRUCTURE
Listing 8-3
LABEL
----------------------------
External Superelement Definition Table (Ref output from:

/doc/seug/chapter3/assembly.bdf)
Controlling Diagnostic Output with PARAMs SEMAP,

SEMAPOPT, SEMAPPRT
The user has many of options to control the amount and type of Superelement diagnostic output. User
parameters SEMAP, SEMAPOPT, and SEMAPPRT control the diagnostic output.
PARAM,SEMAP
The user has four options for PARAM,SEMAP: SEMAPALL, SEMAPEST, SEMAPCON,
SEMAPPUN. A table with the PARAM,SEMAP options and their description is shown here:
Main Index

Table 8-1
PARAM SEMAP Options for Controlling Superelement Diagnostic Output
SEMAP Value
Output and Application
SEMAP (Default)
ISM, SDT. The lengthy GPM is suppressed. This is the appropriate value for use after the
model is stable and only minor changes are to be made.
SEMAPALL
GPM, ISM, SDT. All tables are printed. This value is useful on the initial debug run of a model
and when making extensive modeling changes.
SEMAPCON
Only the summary tables of the GPM and the estimation data is output. This is a useful value
when iterating to an economic partitioning scheme for large, complex models.
SEMAPEST
Only the estimation data is printed. This is useful when evaluating several alternative
partitioning schemes.
SEMAPPUN
No output is printed. The exterior grid points of the superelement with a SEID that is input on
SEMAPOPT are placed on a CSUPER entry image on the PUNCH file, allowing the
superelement to be used as an external superelement. If SEMAPOPT > 0, the superelement
entry is given an SSID of SEMAPOPT. If SEMAPOPT < 0, the exterior points listed are those
of the residual structure, but the CSUPER entry is given an SSID of |SEMAPOPT|.
In the above table, there are three abbreviations which represent the output data displayed in the .f06 file.
ISM stands for the individual superelement map. In the .f06 file, this can be found by searching for the
superelement connectivity list. If a grid is attached to more than one superelement, the ISM identifies
each superelement.
The for list superelements, the superelement connectivity list (aka ISM) shows the grids attachments to
each superelement. .
[Individual Superelement Map (ISM)for SESET Superelements]
SUPERELEMENT CONNECTIVITY LIST
INDEX
GRID ID
TYPE
------------------------------------ CONNECTED TO --------------------------------
INT.-TO-SE
SE-ID
70
70
70
70
70
70
70
70
50
10
10
50
11
11
50
12
12
50
13
13
50
Main Index
SE-ID
70
SE-ID
SE-ID
SE-ID
SE-ID
SE-ID
SE-ID
SE-ID
CHAPTER 8 377
102
102
20
103
103
20
104
104
20
Listing 8-4
Individual Superelement Map (ISM) data from .f06 for SESETS
For Part superelements, the ISM identifies the boundary grids for each superelement the boundary grid
ids (i.e. 1B, 2B,...) are related to their corresponding superelement grid ids via the grid point map.
[Individual Superelement Map (ISM) for PART Superelements]
SUPERELEMENT

LIST OF
INDEX
-1-
INTERIOR POINTS
12 )
-2-
-3-
-4-
-5-
-6-
-7-
-8-
-9-
3B
4B
5B
6B
7B
8B
9B
-5-
-6-
1B
2B
11
11B
12B
SUPERELEMENT

LIST OF
INDEX
1
-1-
-2-
-3-
ELEMENTS
-4-
-7-
-8-
1 )
-9-
SUPERELEMENT
10

LIST OF
INDEX
1
-1-
-2-
1B
2B
-3-
EXTERIOR POINTS
-4-
SUPERELEMENT
-5-

-6-
-7-
-8-
2 )
-9-
20

LIST OF
INDEX
1
-1-
-2-
3B
4B
-3-
EXTERIOR POINTS
-4-
SUPERELEMENT
-5-

-6-
-7-
-8-
2 )
-9-
30

LIST OF
INDEX
1
EXTERIOR POINTS
-1-
-2-
-3-
-4-
1B
2B
5B
6B
SUPERELEMENT
Main Index
-5-
40

-6-
-7-
-8-
4 )
-9-

LIST OF
INDEX
1
EXTERIOR POINTS
-1-
-2-
-3-
-4-
3B
4B
7B
8B
-5-
SUPERELEMENT
-6-
-7-
-8-
4 )
-9-
50

LIST OF
INDEX
1
EXTERIOR POINTS
-1-
-2-
-3-
-4-
5B
6B
9B
10B
-5-
SUPERELEMENT
-6-
-7-
-8-
4 )
-9-
60

LIST OF
INDEX
1
EXTERIOR POINTS
-1-
-2-
-3-
-4-
7B
8B
11B
12B
-5-
SUPERELEMENT
-6-
-7-
-8-
4 )
-9-
70

LIST OF
INDEX
1
-1-
-2-
9B
11B
Listing 8-5
-3-
EXTERIOR POINTS
-4-
-5-
-6-
-7-
-8-
2 )
-9-
Individual Superelement Map (ISM) data from .f06 for PARTS (Ref output from:
The Superelement Definition Table (SDT) is next; it contains the SEID of every superelement in the
model, the processing order, and the superelement tree. Below is a sample SDT output.
[Superelement Definition Table (SDT) for SESET Superelements]

(SORTED BY SEID)
INDEX
SUPERELEMENT
PROCESS ORDER
DOWNSTREAM SE
SUPERELEMENT TYPE
RESIDUAL STRUCTURE
10
20
30
40
50
60
70

INDEX
Main Index
SUPERELEMENT
PROCESS ORDER
DOWNSTREAM SE
SUPERELEMENT TYPE
CHAPTER 8 379
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
RESIDUAL STRUCTURE

INDEX
SE ID
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
JUNE
( NO. LEVELS =
TIP
NO. TIPS =
L E V E L
INDEX
-1-
10
1*
20
2*
30
3*
40
4*
50
5*
60
6*
Main Index
N U M B E R
T R E E
* = PROCESS ORDER )
2, 2011
MD NASTRAN
12/15/10
PAGE
11

70
7*
Listing 8-6
Superelement Definition Table (SDT) data from .f06 for SESETS (Ref output
from: /doc/seug/chapter3/flyswatter-seset.bdf)L
[Superelement Definition Table (SDT) for PART Superelements]

PRIMARY
PROCESS
DOWNSTREAM
ORDER
SUPERELEMENT
TYPE
------------ ------------ ------- ------------ ----------------------------0
RESIDUAL STRUCTURE
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
LABEL
------------------------------------

PRIMARY
PROCESS
DOWNSTREAM
ORDER
SUPERELEMENT
TYPE
------------ ------------ ------- ------------ ----------------------------10
20
30
40
50
60
70
RESIDUAL STRUCTURE
LABEL
------------------------------------

SUPERELEMENT
------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Main Index
10
20
30
40
50
60
CHAPTER 8 381
70
JUNE
2, 2011
MD NASTRAN
12/15/10
T R E E
NO. LEVELS =
NO. TIPS =
7 )
TIP
LEVEL
LEVEL
LEVEL
LEVEL
LEVEL
LEVEL
LEVEL
LEVEL
LEVEL
LEVEL
LEV
INDEX
-1-
-2-
-3-
-4-
-5-
-6-
-7-
-8-
-9-
-10-
-11
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
Listing 8-7
Superelement Definition Table (SDT) data from .f06 for PARTS (Ref output
from: /doc/seug/chapter3/flyswatter-part.bdf)
Finally, the Grid Point Map (GPM) contains a list of each superelements boundary grid points . Below
is a sample of the GPM data.
[Grid Point Map (GPM) for SESET Superelements]
UNIQUE SUPERELEMENT CONNECTIVITY LIST ------------------------------------ CONNECTED TO --------------------------(SORTED BY 1ST GRD)

COUNT
Main Index
1ST GRD
TYPE
INT.-TO-SE
SE-ID
SE-ID
70
70
50
13
50
70
14
60
70
15
60
19
30
23
50
24
60
27
40
29
30
50
60
SE-ID
SE-ID
SE-ID
SE-ID
SE-ID
SE-ID

31
40
28
33
10
34
10
35
10
28
39
20
40
20
41
20
30
40
JUNE
2, 2011
MD NASTRAN
12/15/10
PAGE
16

0
0
UNIQUE SUPERELEMENT CONNECTIVITY LIST ------------------------------------ CONNECTED TO ---------------------------(SORTED BY COUNT)

COUNT
1ST GRD
TYPE
INT.-TO-SE
SE-ID
SE-ID
SE-ID
SE-ID
SE-ID
SE-ID
JUNE
2, 2011
SE-ID
SE-ID
SE-ID
SE-ID
13
50
70
14
60
70
23
50
24
60
70
19
30
50
27
40
60
29
30
31
40
35
10
30
41
20
40
70
50
15
60
34
10
40
20
28
33
10
28
39
20
MD NASTRAN
12/15/10
PAGE
17

0
0
UNIQUE SUPERELEMENT CONNECTIVITY LIST ------------------------------------ CONNECTED TO ---------------------------(SORTED BY SE-ID)

COUNT
1ST GRD
TYPE
INT.-TO-SE
SE-ID
SE-ID
Main Index
13
50
70
27
40
60
35
10
30
19
30
50
24
60
23
50
SE-ID
SE-ID
SE-ID
SE-ID
SE-ID
SE-ID
SE-ID
SE-ID
CHAPTER 8 383
14
60
70
41
20
40
28
33
10
34
10
40
20
28
39
20
29
30
31
40
50
15
60
70
70
Listing 8-8
Grid Point Map (GPM) data from .f06 for SESETS (Ref output from:
/doc/seug/chapter3/flyswatter-seset.bdf)
[Grid Point Map (GPM) for PART Superelements]
INTERIOR TO
POINT ID
TYPE
1B
10
30
2B
10
30
3B
20
40
4B
20
40
5B
30
50
6B
30
50
7B
40
60
8B
40
60
9B
50
70
10B
50
11B
60
12B
60
70
JUNE
2, 2011
MD NASTRAN
12/15/10
POINT/SUPERELEMENT CONNECTIVITY LIST (SORTED BY FIRST POINT ID - "B" INDICATES BOUNDARY SEQUENC
FIRST
COUNT
Main Index
INTERIOR TO
POINT ID
TYPE
1B
10
30
3B
20
40
5B
30
50

7B
40
60
9B
50
70
10B
50
11B
60
12B
60
70
JUNE
2, 2011
MD NASTRAN
12/15/10
FIRST
COUNT
INTERIOR TO
POINT ID
TYPE
12B
60
10B
50
11B
60
70
9B
50
70
1B
10
30
5B
30
50
3B
20
40
7B
40
60
JUNE
2, 2011
MD NASTRAN
12/15/10
POINT/SUPERELEMENT CONNECTIVITY LIST (SORTED BY INTERIOR SUPERELEMENT - "B" INDICATES BOUNDARY

FIRST
COUNT
INTERIOR TO
POINT ID
TYPE
12B
60
5B
30
50
3B
20
40
1B
10
30
9B
50
70
11B
60
70
10B
50
7B
40
Listing 8-9
60
Grid Point Map (GPM) data from .f06 for PARTS(Ref output from:
If the user would like to find more information on these options refer to the Quick Reference Guide.
Main Index
CHAPTER 8 385
PARAM,SEMAPOPT
PARAM,SEMAPOPT controls the amount of output for the SEMAP. The most common options are 0,
1, or 2 as described in the table below.
Table 8-2
Common PARAM,SEMAPOPT options

SEMAPOPT Value
Result
Both grid list and summaries of grid lists
Only grid list
Only Summaries of grid lists
Additional controls can be found in the MSC.Nastran DMAP Users Guide, TABPRT Module
Description.
[PARAM,SEMAPOPT,1 Output]
SUPERELEMENT CONNECTIVITY LIST
INDEX
GRID ID
TYPE
------------------------------------ CONNECTED TO ------------------------------
INT.-TO-SE
SE-ID
SE-ID
70
70
70
13
13
50
70
14
14
60
70
15
15
60
16
16
60
101
101
20
102
102
20
103
103
20
104
104
20
Listing 8-10
SE-ID
SE-ID
SE-ID
SE-ID
SE-ID
SE-ID
SE-ID
PARAM,SEMAPOPT,1 Output (SESET)
[PARAM,SEMAPOPT,2 Output]
UNIQUE SUPERELEMENT CONNECTIVITY LIST ------------------------------------ CONNECTED TO -----------------------------(SORTED BY 1ST GRD)

COUNT
Main Index
1ST GRD
TYPE
INT.-TO-SE
SE-ID
SE-ID
SE-ID
SE-ID
SE-ID
SE-ID
SE-ID
SE-ID
SE-ID

70
70
50
13
50
70
14
60
70
35
10
30
14
60
70
41
20
40
28
33
10
34
10
40
20
28
39
20
29
30
31
40
50
15
60
70
70
Listing 8-11
PARAM,SEMAPOPT,2 output (SESET shown)
PARAM,SEMAPPRT
PARAM,SEMAPPRT controls which data from the SEMAP that will be output as shown below.
Table 8-3
PARAM,SEMAPPRT Options
Input Code
Main Index
Output Information
PARAM,SEMAPPRT,-1
No output data
PARAM,SEMAPPRT,0
Superelement definition table, superelement tree, unique

superelement connectivity list, estimation data for
superelement
PARAM,SEMAPPRT,1
Superelement definition table, superelement tree
PARAM,SEMAPPRT,2

superelement connectivity list
PARAM,SEMAPPRT,3

superelement
PARAM,SEMAPPRT,4
No output data
PARAM,SEMAPPRT,5

superelement
CHAPTER 8 387

Sorted Bulk Data
For PART superelements, the sorted bulk data is partitioned into separate sections for each superelement.
S O R T E D
B U L K
D A T A
E C H O
SUPER
10
ENTRY
COUNT
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
1-
CQUAD4
18
33
34
46
45
0.
0.
2-
CQUAD4
19
34
35
47
46
0.
0.
3-
CQUAD4
20
35
36
48
47
0.
0.
4-
CQUAD4
21
36
37
49
48
0.
0.
5-
CQUAD4
22
37
38
50
49
0.
0.
6-
CQUAD4
23
45
46
58
57
0.
0.
7-
CQUAD4
24
46
47
59
58
0.
0.
65-
LOAD
305
1.
1.
301
66-
LOAD
307
1.
1.
101
67-
MAT1
68-
*+0000017.33-4
69-
PARAM
GRDPNT
70-
PARAM
POST
-1
71-
PARAM
PRTMAXIMYES
72-
PLOAD4
101
18
-1.
73-
PSHELL
1.
*1
3.+7
1.15385+7
..
.3
10
+000001
+000002
THRU
1
42
ENDDATA
TOTAL COUNT=
74
INPUT BULK DATA ENTRY COUNT =
91
S O R T E D
D A T A
B U L K
E C H O
SUPER
20
ENTRY
COUNT
Main Index
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
1-
CQUAD4
43
39
40
52
51
0.
0.
2-
CQUAD4
44
40
41
53
52
0.
0.
3-
CQUAD4
45
41
42
54
53
0.
0.
4-
CQUAD4
46
42
43
55
54
0.
0.
5-
CQUAD4
47
43
44
56
55
0.
0.
64-
LOAD
303
1.
1.
201
65-
LOAD
305
1.
1.
301
66-
LOAD
307
1.
1.
101
67-
MAT1
68-
*+0000017.33-4
*2
3.+7
1.15385+7
.3
..
10
+000001
+000002

69-
PARAM
GRDPNT
70-
PARAM
POST
-1
71-
PARAM
PRTMAXIMYES
72-
PLOAD4
101
43
-1.
73-
PSHELL
1.
THRU
2
67
ENDDATA
TOTAL COUNT=
74
[listing for superelement 30,40,50,60 omitted]
S O R T E D
B U L K
D A T A
E C H O
SUPER
70
ENTRY
COUNT
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
1-
CQUAD4
0.
0.
2-
CQUAD4
0.
0.
20-
PSHELL
1.
21-
SPC1
123456
22-
SPCADD
..
10
ENDDATA
TOTAL COUNT=
Listing 8-12
23
PART Superelement Sorted Bulk Data

The boundary grids associated with each PART superelement are output the Boundary Sequence
Assignment Table. For example, the Figure below will generate the following Boundary Sequence
assignment table.
BOUNDARY
SEQUENCE ID --------------------------------- ASSIGNED TO POINT ID (SUPERELEMENT) ---------------------------------
Main Index
1B
35 (
10)
35 (
30)
2B
36 (
10)
36 (
30)
3B
41 (
20)
41 (
40)
4B
42 (
20)
42 (
40)
5B
19 (
30)
19 (
50)
6B
20 (
30)
20 (
50)
7B
27 (
40)
27 (
60)
8B
28 (
40)
28 (
60)
9B
13 (
0)
13 (
50)
10B
23 (
0)
23 (
50)
11B
14 (
0)
14 (
60)
12B
24 (
0)
24 (
60)
13 (
70)
14 (
70)
CHAPTER 8 389
INTERIOR TO
POINT ID
TYPE
SUPERELEMEMT ------------------------------- CONNECTED TO SUPERELEMENT --------------------
1B
10
30
2B
10
30
3B
20
40
4B
20
40
5B
30
50
6B
30
50
7B
40
60
8B
40
60
9B
50
70
10B
50
11B
60
12B
60
70
FIRST
INTERIOR TO
COUNT
POINT ID
TYPE
1B
SUPERELEMEMT ------------------------------- CONNECTED TO SUPERELEMENT -------------------0
10
30
3B
20
40
5B
30
50
7B
40
60
9B
50
70
10B
50
11B
60
12B
60
70
FIRST
INTERIOR TO
COUNT
POINT ID
TYPE
12B
10B
50
11B
60
70
9B
50
70
1B
10
30
5B
30
50
3B
20
40
7B
40
60
60
FIRST
Main Index
INTERIOR TO
COUNT
POINT ID
12B
TYPE
60

5B
30
50
3B
20
40
1B
10
30
9B
50
70
11B
60
70
10B
50
Main Index
7B
40
60
Listing 8-13
PART Superelement Boundary Grid Search Output
Figure 8-1
Boundary Grid Illustration
CHAPTER 8 391

Sorted Bulk Data
Just like non-superelement analysis, for List (SESET) Superelements the sorted bulk data echo is
contained in one section for the entire model.
S O R T E D
B U L K
D A T A
E C H O
ENTRY
COUNT
Main Index
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
1-
CQUAD4
0.
0.
2-
CQUAD4
0.
0.
3-
CQUAD4
0.
0.
4-
CQUAD4
14
13
0.
0.
5-
CQUAD4
10
13
14
24
23
0.
0.
6-
CQUAD4
10
20
19
0.
0.
7-
CQUAD4
10
11
21
20
0.
0.
8-
CQUAD4
11
12
22
21
0.
0.
9-
CQUAD4
12
13
23
22
0.
0.
10-
CQUAD4
10
14
15
25
24
0.
0.
11-
CQUAD4
11
15
16
26
25
0.
0.
12-
CQUAD4
12
16
17
27
26
0.
0.
13-
CQUAD4
13
17
18
28
27
0.
0.
14-
CQUAD4
14
19
20
30
29
0.
0.
15-
CQUAD4
15
29
30
36
35
0.
0.
16-
CQUAD4
16
27
28
32
31
0.
0.
17-
CQUAD4
17
31
32
42
41
0.
0.
18-
CQUAD4
18
33
34
46
45
0.
0.
19-
CQUAD4
19
34
35
47
46
0.
0.
20-
CQUAD4
20
35
36
48
47
0.
0.
201-
PSHELL
1.
202-
PSHELL
1.
203-
PSHELL
1.
204-
PSHELL
1.
205-
PSHELL
1.
206-
PSHELL
10
10
1.
10
207-
SESET
10
33
34
37
208-
SESET
10
45
THRU
50
209-
SESET
10
57
THRU
62
210-
SESET
10
69
THRU
74
211-
SESET
10
81
THRU
86
212-
SESET
10
93
THRU
98
213-
SESET
20
39
40
43
10
38
44
..
10

214-
SESET
20
51
THRU
56
215-
SESET
20
63
THRU
68
216-
SESET
20
75
THRU
80
217-
SESET
20
87
THRU
92
218-
SESET
20
99
THRU
104
219-
SESET
30
29
30
220-
SESET
40
31
32
221-
SESET
50
THRU
222-
SESET
50
21
22
223-
SESET
60
15
THRU
224-
SESET
60
25
26
225-
SESET
70
THRU
226-
SPC1
123456
227-
SPCADD
12
18
ENDDATA
0
TOTAL COUNT=
Listing 8-14
228
List (SESET) Superelement Sorted Bulk Data

For SESET superelements, the boundary grid connectivity is displayed in one table called the Unique
Superelement Connectivity List.
0
UNIQUE SUPERELEMENT CONNECTIVITY LIST ------------------------------------ CONNECTED TO -----------------------------------(SORTED BY SE-ID)

COUNT
1ST GRD
TYPE
INT.-TO-SE
SE-ID
SE-ID
Main Index
13
50
70
27
40
60
35
10
30
19
30
50
24
60
23
50
14
60
70
41
20
40
28
33
10
34
10
40
20
28
39
20
29
30
31
40
50
SE-ID
SE-ID
SE-ID
SE-ID
SE-ID
SE-ID
SE-ID
SE-ID
CHAPTER 8 393
15
60
70
70
Listing 8-15
Main Index
SESET Unique Superelements Connectivity List for Boundary Grids


Visualizing the model is one of the most important verification steps in superelement analysis. In many
cases, preprocessing programs such as Patran are adequate to visualize the model and provide interactive
feedback. However, MSC.Nastran supports imaged superelements (copies, mirrors, etc.) which are not
always supported by commercial preprocessors. In this case MSC.Nastran provides an option to create
a plot of the model using OUTPUT(PLOT) commands. OUTPUT(PLOT) is covered in detail in
Superelement Plotting with PLOT (Ch. 19).
Main Index
CHAPTER 8 395
Result Output
The .f06 output (diagnostics, displacements, stresses, forces, etc.) for models with superelements is
different than a non-superelement analysis. Recall from Figure 1-9:
Figure 8-2
Flow Chart for Superelement Processing
The process order is determined by MSC.Nastran modules SEP1 (list superelements) or SEP1X (PART
superelements) in Phase 1 operations and listed in the Superelement Definition Tables (refer to
Superelement Definition Tables). Each superelement is processed (reduced) in a loop according to the
process order. Phase 2 is the solution of the residual structure. The data recovery is performed in a loop
in Phase 3; that is, the data recovery for each superelement is performed in a loop that is in reverse order
of Phase 1 process order.
The selected output below comes from the Chapter 3 flyswatter examples.
Main Index

Result Output
List Superelements
The following listings show the output for list superelements. In this case, the output relative to Phase 1
and Phase 3 operations is shown:
[PHASE 1 Output Associated with List Superelement 10]
SUPERELEMENT 10
** SYSTEM INFORMATION MESSAGE 4159 (DFMSA)

5.006693E+00
** USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 5293 (SSG3A)

FOR DATA BLOCK KOO
LOAD SEQ. NO.
EPSILON
EXTERNAL WORK
8.5530295E-15
1.1700904E-05
6.9137383E-15
1.1700904E-05
6.9176406E-15
9.7933684E-05
EPSILONS LARGER THAN 0.001 ARE FLAGGED WITH ASTER

SUPERELEMENT 20

5.006693E+00

FOR DATA BLOCK KOO
LOAD SEQ. NO.
EPSILON
EXTERNAL WORK
-2.3284101E-14
1.1700904E-05
-2.0241675E-14
1.1700904E-05
-1.6063905E-14
9.7933684E-05
IN PHASE LOADS
SUPERELEMENT 10
SUBCASE 1
POINT ID.
T3
R1
R2
33
0.0
0.0
3.683764E-04
9.794447E-05
1.543324E-05
0.0
34
0.0
0.0
3.560836E-04
9.801662E-05
1.548379E-05
0.0
35
0.0
0.0
3.440241E-04
9.593536E-05
1.486124E-05
0.0
36
0.0
0.0
3.321574E-04
9.586434E-05
1.520494E-05
0.0
37
0.0
0.0
3.192997E-04
9.717572E-05
1.586828E-05
0.0
38
0.0
0.0
3.064635E-04
9.710126E-05
1.598421E-05
0.0
.
.
Main Index
TYPE
T1
T2
V E C T O R
R3
CHAPTER 8 397
.
93
0.0
0.0
7.633899E-04
9.912115E-05
1.682907E-05
0.0
94
0.0
0.0
7.496271E-04
9.880464E-05
1.671144E-05
0.0
95
0.0
0.0
7.361663E-04
9.843080E-05
1.651792E-05
0.0
96
0.0
0.0
7.228653E-04
9.817738E-05
1.640466E-05
0.0
97
0.0
0.0
7.096976E-04
9.801870E-05
1.633151E-05
0.0
98
0.0
0.0
6.966225E-04
9.796763E-05
1.631299E-05
0.0
IN PHASE LOADS
SUPERELEMENT 10
SUBCASE 1
S T R E S S E S
ELEMENT
ID
I N

GRID-ID
NORMAL-X
18
CEN/4
1.147215E+00
19
CEN/4
NORMAL-Y
MAJOR
MINOR
VON MISES
2.066162E+00 -3.538281E-01
2.263909E+00
1.174470E+00
51.9591
3.538281E-01 -2.066162E+00
2.263909E+00
1.521224E+01 -1.091012E+01
-52.2252
2.366733E+01
1.134244E+00
2.312109E+01
-1.134244E+00 -2.366733E+01
2.312109E+01
-9.589333E+00 -1.521224E+01
Listing 8-16
ANGLE
-38.0409
-1.147215E+00 -5.651187E-01
9.589333E+00
( Q U A D 4 )
SHEAR-XY
5.651187E-01 -1.174470E+00
E L E M E N T S
1.091012E+01
37.7748
Phase 1 and Phase 3 List Superelements Output
PART Superelements
PART Superelement analysis Phase 1 and Phase 3 operations are executed and reported the same way
that List Superelements are reported.
[PHASE 1 Output Associated with PART Superelement 10]
SUPERELEMENT 10

5.006693E+00

FOR DATA BLOCK KOO
LOAD SEQ. NO.
EPSILON
EXTERNAL WORK
8.5530295E-15
1.1700904E-05
6.9137383E-15
1.1700904E-05
6.9176406E-15
9.7933684E-05
Main Index

Result Output
5.006693E+00

FOR DATA BLOCK KOO
LOAD SEQ. NO.
EPSILON
EXTERNAL WORK
-2.3284101E-14
1.1700904E-05
-2.0241675E-14
1.1700904E-05
-1.6063905E-14
9.7933684E-05
IN PHASE LOADS
SUPERELEMENT 10
SUBCASE 1
POINT ID.
TYPE
T1
T2
V E C T O R
T3
R1
R2
33
0.0
0.0
3.683764E-04
9.794447E-05
1.543324E-05
0.0
R3
34
0.0
0.0
3.560836E-04
9.801662E-05
1.548379E-05
0.0
35
0.0
0.0
3.440241E-04
9.593536E-05
1.486124E-05
0.0
36
0.0
0.0
3.321574E-04
9.586434E-05
1.520494E-05
0.0
37
0.0
0.0
3.192997E-04
9.717572E-05
1.586828E-05
0.0
38
0.0
0.0
3.064635E-04
9.710126E-05
1.598421E-05
0.0
93
0.0
0.0
7.633899E-04
9.912115E-05
1.682907E-05
0.0
94
0.0
0.0
7.496271E-04
9.880464E-05
1.671144E-05
0.0
95
0.0
0.0
7.361663E-04
9.843080E-05
1.651792E-05
0.0
96
0.0
0.0
7.228653E-04
9.817738E-05
1.640466E-05
0.0
97
0.0
0.0
7.096976E-04
9.801870E-05
1.633151E-05
0.0
98
0.0
0.0
6.966225E-04
9.796763E-05
1.631299E-05
0.0
IN PHASE LOADS
SUPERELEMENT 10
SUBCASE 1
S T R E S S E S
ELEMENT
ID
I N

GRID-ID
NORMAL-X
18
CEN/4
1.147215E+00
19
CEN/4
NORMAL-Y
5.651187E-01 -1.174470E+00
Main Index

ANGLE
MAJOR
MINOR
VON MISES
2.066162E+00 -3.538281E-01
2.263909E+00
1.174470E+00
51.9591
3.538281E-01 -2.066162E+00
2.263909E+00
1.521224E+01 -1.091012E+01
-52.2252
2.366733E+01
1.134244E+00
2.312109E+01
-1.134244E+00 -2.366733E+01
2.312109E+01
-9.589333E+00 -1.521224E+01
Listing 8-17
( Q U A D 4 )
-38.0409
-1.147215E+00 -5.651187E-01
9.589333E+00
SHEAR-XY
E L E M E N T S
1.091012E+01
37.7748
Phase 1 and Phase 3 PART Superelement Output
CHAPTER 8 399
External Superelements Phase 1 operations are performed in a reduction run. In a single-level reduction
run, there are no superelement diagnostics.
During the Phase 2 operations, the external superelements are attached to the residual structure and the
system solution is performed.
During Phase 3 operations, there are two possible paths depending on the method employed:
2-Step Method: Data recovery is performed in the same run as the solution
3-Step Method: Data recovery is performed in a RESTART of the reduction run.
The following sections describe the diagnostic and results output for each method.
External Superelement 2-Step Method
The assembly run contains the Superelement Definition Table.
PRIMARY
PROCESS
DOWNSTREAM
ORDER
SUPERELEMENT
TYPE
------------ ------------ ------- ------------ ----------------------------0
RESIDUAL STRUCTURE
10
10
20
20
30
30
40
40
50
50
60
60
70
70
LABEL
-----------------------------------

PRIMARY
PROCESS
DOWNSTREAM
ORDER
SUPERELEMENT
TYPE
------------ ------------ ------- ------------ ----------------------------10
10
20
20
30
30
40
40
50
50
60
60
70
70
RESIDUAL STRUCTURE
LABEL
-----------------------------------

SUPERELEMENT
Main Index

Result Output
------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
Listing 8-18
External Superelement 2-Step Method Superelement Definition Table
Note that this output is in the same format as the Superelement Definition Table for PART Superelements
and that the external superelements are identified in the TYPE column.
Since Phase 1 operations were performed in the reduction step, there is no additional reduction necessary
for the external superelements. However, there will be diagnostic messages associated with the retrieval
of the reduced matrices. The results output for the 2-Step method will be reported the same as results
output for internal superelements. The diagnostic output will depend on the storage method defined on
the EXTSEOUT case control entry (i.e. MATRIXDB, DMIGDB, DMIGOP2, DMIGPCH, or
MATOP4).
[Diagnostic Output Associated with Attaching MATRIXDB External Superelements]
$ DIRECT TEXT INPUT FOR FILE MANAGEMENT SECTION

ASSIGN SE10M='create-ext10.MASTER'
DBLOCATE DATABLK=(EXTDB) CONVERT(SEID=10) LOGI=SE10M
$ DIRECT TEXT INPUT FOR EXECUTIVE CONTROL
$ LINEAR STATIC ANALYSIS, DATABASE
N A S T R A N
Main Index
E X E C U T I V E
C O N T R O L
E C H O
CHAPTER 8 401
SOL 101
CEND
*** SYSTEM INFORMATION MESSAGE 482 (LCDRVR)
1 DATABLOCK(S) HAVE BEEN LOCATED ON THE SE10M DATABASE.
Listing 8-19
Diagnostic Output Associated with Attaching MATRIXDB External

Superelements
[Phase 1 Diagnostic Output Associated with Attaching DMIGOP2 External Superelements]


*** USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 4105 (INPTX2)
DATA BLOCK DUMMY
RETRIEVED FROM FORTRAN UNIT 31 (GENERATED IN BINARY (LTLEND) FORMAT) IN NATIVE BINARY FORMAT
NAME OF DATA BLOCK WHEN PLACED ON FORTRAN UNIT WAS XSOP2DIR.

DATA BLOCK EXTDB
NAME OF DATA BLOCK WHEN PLACED ON FORTRAN UNIT WAS GEOM1X

DATA BLOCK EXTDB

DATA BLOCK EXTDB

DATA BLOCK EXTDB
NAME OF DATA BLOCK WHEN PLACED ON FORTRAN UNIT WAS MATK

DATA BLOCK EXTDB
NAME OF DATA BLOCK WHEN PLACED ON FORTRAN UNIT WAS MATM
Main Index

Result Output

DATA BLOCK EXTDB
NAME OF DATA BLOCK WHEN PLACED ON FORTRAN UNIT WAS MATP

DATA BLOCK EXTDB
NAME OF DATA BLOCK WHEN PLACED ON FORTRAN UNIT WAS MATV
Listing 8-20
Diagnostic Output Associated with Attaching DMIGOP2 External

Superelements
[Phase 0 Diagnostic Output Associated with Attaching DMIGPCH External Superelements]

PRIMARY
PROCESS
DOWNSTREAM
ORDER
SUPERELEMENT
TYPE
------------ ------------ ------- ------------ ----------------------------0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
LABEL
-----------------------
RESIDUAL STRUCTURE

PRIMARY
PROCESS
DOWNSTREAM
ORDER
SUPERELEMENT
TYPE
------------ ------------ ------- ------------ ----------------------------10
20
30
40
50
60
70
RESIDUAL STRUCTURE
LABEL
-----------------------
[Phase 1 Diagnostic Output Associated with Attaching DMIGPCH External Superelements]
Main Index
CHAPTER 8 403


APRIL
6, 2011
MD NASTRAN
12/15/10
SUPERELEMENT 10
*** USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 7310 (VECPRN)

ORIGIN OF SUPERELEMENT BASIC COORDINATE SYSTEM WILL BE USED AS REFERENCE LOCATION.
OLOAD
SUBCASE/
LOAD
DAREA ID
TYPE
FX
T1
0.000000E+00
T2
T3
R1
----
----
----
FY
----
FZ
----
----
MX
----
----
----
MY
----
----
----
----
MZ
----
----
----
----
TOTALS
0.000000E+00
FX
0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00
----
2.000000E+00
----
1.200000E+01
8.000000E+00
2.000000E+01
----
----
FZ
----
----
MX
----
----
----
MY
----
----
----
----
MZ
----
----
----
----
0.000000E+00
FX
0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00
----
2.000000E+00
2.000000E+00
----
1.200000E+01
8.000000E+00
2.000000E+01
----
----
FZ
----
----
MX
----
----
----
-3.200000E+01
MY
----
----
----
----
MZ
----
----
----
----
0.000000E+00
----
0.000000E+00
FY
TOTALS
0.000000E+00
----
0.000000E+00
FY
TOTALS
0.000000E+00
---2.000000E+00
R3
----
0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00
7.500952E+00
----
----
----
2.899048E+00
----
---0.000000E+00
1.040000E+01
0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00
----
0.000000E+00
7.500952E+00
----
----
----
2.899048E+00
----
---0.000000E+00
1.040000E+01
0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00
----
0.000000E+00

----
----
----
0.000000E+00
----
APRIL
---0.000000E+00
0.000000E+00 -1.600000E+01 -1.280000E+02 -5.120000E+01
0.000000E+00
R2
0.000000E+00
-1.600000E+01 -9.600000E+01 -5.120000E+01
Main Index
RESULTANT
0.000000E+00
6, 2011
MD NASTRAN
12/15/10
SUPERELEMENT 20

Result Output
Listing 8-21
Diagnostic Output Associated with Attaching DMIPCH External Superelements
IN PHASE LOADS
SUPERELEMENT 10
SUBCASE 1
POINT ID.
TYPE
T1
T2
V E C T O R
T3
R1
R2
33
0.0
0.0
3.683764E-04
9.794447E-05
1.543324E-05
0.0
R3
34
0.0
0.0
3.560836E-04
9.801662E-05
1.548379E-05
0.0
35
0.0
0.0
3.440241E-04
9.593536E-05
1.486124E-05
0.0
36
0.0
0.0
3.321574E-04
9.586434E-05
1.520494E-05
0.0
37
0.0
0.0
3.192997E-04
9.717572E-05
1.586828E-05
0.0
38
0.0
0.0
3.064635E-04
9.710126E-05
1.598422E-05
0.0
93
0.0
0.0
7.633899E-04
9.912116E-05
1.682907E-05
0.0
94
0.0
0.0
7.496271E-04
9.880464E-05
1.671144E-05
0.0
95
0.0
0.0
7.361663E-04
9.843080E-05
1.651792E-05
0.0
96
0.0
0.0
7.228653E-04
9.817738E-05
1.640465E-05
0.0
97
0.0
0.0
7.096976E-04
9.801870E-05
1.633151E-05
0.0
98
0.0
0.0
6.966225E-04
9.796763E-05
1.631299E-05
0.0
OPPOSING LOADS
SUPERELEMENT 10
SUBCASE 1
S T R E S S E S
ELEMENT
ID.
18
19
I N
E L E M E N T S
( Q U A D 4 )
NORMAL-X
NORMAL-Y
SHEAR-XY
ANGLE
MAJOR
MINOR
VON MISES
1.147401E+00
5.651970E-01
-1.174603E+00
-38.0404
2.066437E+00
-3.538384E-01
2.264188E+00
-1.147401E+00
-5.651970E-01
1.174603E+00
51.9596
3.538384E-01
-2.066437E+00
2.264188E+00
9.590242E+00
1.521231E+01
-1.091089E+01
-52.2236
2.366846E+01
1.134096E+00
2.312228E+01
-9.590242E+00
-1.521231E+01
1.091089E+01
37.7764
-1.134096E+00
-2.366846E+01
2.312228E+01
Listing 8-22
2-Step Method Superelements Data Recovery Output
The data recovery output for the 2-Step External Superelement process is the same format as for internal
(List or PART) superelements.
External Superelement 3-Step Method
Since the data recovery is the 3rd step of the 3-step method, there is no superelement processing
associated with the data recovery run.
Main Index
CHAPTER 8 405
Controlling Results Output with SEDR

The user can limit the results output by using the SEDR case control entry in conjunction with a SET of
superelements. For example, if the user desired output for the residual and superelements 10 and 20
only, a SET is defined as: SET 99=0,10,20. In the resulting .f06 file (and corresponding .op2 or .xdb
files), the Phase 3 data recovery is only be performed superelements 0, 10 and 20. A sample input is
shown in Listing 8-20.
SOL 101
CEND
SET 99 = 0,10,20
SEDR=99
SUBCASE 1
SPC = 2
LOAD = 303
Listing 8-23
1.
Main Index
Using SEDR to Limit the Data Recovery for Specific Superelements

Result Output
Main Index
Chapter 9: Introduction to Dynamic Analysis Using Superelements
Main Index
Introduction to Dynamic Analysis

Using Superelements
Introduction

Introduction
Introduction
Dynamic reduction is an optional numerical approach that can be used in MD Nastran to reduce a
dynamic model to one with fewer degrees-of-freedom. Typically, the intent of dynamic reduction is to
increase the efficiency of a dynamic solution by working with smaller matrices while maintaining the
dynamic characteristics of the system.
As demonstrated in the preceding chapters, superelements in statics produce an exact solution (within
machine precision). The static reduction process replaces the physical representation of the superelement
model with reduced matrices that have the same properties. Therefore, in static analysis no
approximation is introduced by using superelements. That is, the full static response of the superelement
can be represented by the reduced matrices. In statics the fixed boundary solution, added on to the
boundary solution. Recall the total static solution developed in Static Condensation Process (Ch. 1).
Equation (1-7) thru Equation (1-9) and Figure 1-6 are repeated here:
Uo
t o ta l
Figure 9-1
1
= G o t U t + K o o P o (Static Solutions)
(9-1)
Pictorial Representation of Static Superelement Solution

f ix ed
In static analysis, the interior motion, U o

, is represented by the fixed boundary solution
generated by the loads. But in classic modal analysis, the mass matrix is required and there are no loads
Main Index
CHAPTER 9 409
to be considered. The static reduction process produces approximate (and often poor) results in dynamics
despite preserving the mass properties of the reduced structure. The biggest deficiency in static
reduction is that the dynamic mass is not retained. Therefore, the static reduction must be augmented
with terms to account for the dynamic mass. This is done by representing the interior dynamic mass with
modes at the fixed boundary with a dynamic transformation matrix, G o q . Thus, the total solution for
the superelement modal displacements becomes:
Uo
t o ta l
= Go t Ut + Go q Uq
(9-2)
Where
G o t = Constraint Modes (same as in statics)
U t = Superelement Boundary Physical DOF Solution
G o q = Dynamic Transformation Matrix
U q = Superelement Modal DOF Solution
The Physical and Modal DOF Solution will be developed in Description of Dynamic Reduction Process.
Graphically, mode 1 of a cantilever beam can be represented as:
Figure 9-2
Main Index
Pictorial Representation of Modal Superelement Solution


The following information explains the internal operations used in MSC.Nastran when reducing
superelement matrices for a dynamic solution. The user interface is shown in the next section.
Before developing the theory, recall from basic dynamic theory the following facts:
Dynamic dof must have mass
A state of vibration will be a linear combination of the dynamic modes shapes available
Also, combining the physical (t) and modal (q) dof in Equation (9-2),
Uo t
Uo =
Uo q
Ut
G o q Uq
Go t
(9-3)
The total boundary transformation matrix, G o a is defined as:

Go a =
(9-4)
Go t Go q
Static Condensation
The default approach in superelement dynamic analysis is to use static condensation, commonly known
as Guyan[] reduction. In this case, the dynamic transformation matrix, G o q , is ignored and the
superelement motion of the free boundary solution is
Uo = Go t Ut
(9-5)
The stiffness, mass, damping, and loads applied to the superelement are transformed into the reduced
matrices using only the static transformation matrix G o t . Recall from Equation (1-6), that the
constraint modes are:
1
Go t = Ko o Ko t
(9-6)
And from Equation 1-11, the physical reduced stiffness matrix is

T
K tt = K o t G o t + K tt
(9-7)
Similar manipulations can be performed on the mass matrix, producing the physical reduced mass matrix
(refer to General Operations (Ch. 1) in the MSC Nastran Reference Manual)
T
M t t = G o t M o o G o t + M o t + M o t G o t + M tt
Main Index
(9-8)
CHAPTER 9 411
Note that the M t t matrix preserves the rigid body mass properties of the superelement provided no
mass is removed during constraint processing. The structural damping B t t and viscous damping
K tt4 matrices are reduced similarly. For more details on the damping reduction, refer to the MATREDU
(Ch. ) in the MSC Nastran DMAP Programmers Guide description.
Static condensation can provide adequate dynamic results in a few cases. For instance, a small avionics
box that is included in a aircraft dynamic landing analysis may have modal frequencies higher than the
range of interest and will respond statically. In this case the physical stiffness and mass of the box are
important, but the dynamic mass (i.e. local frequencies) are irrelevant to the solution objective.
Another case when static condensation is sufficient for dynamic analysis is when the physical dof that
are retained are sufficient to represent the dynamic response of interest. For example, a simply supported
beam with 100 grids that is statically reduced to 50 grids (i.e. every other grid) will be sufficient for
dynamic analysis that only requires a few dozen modes.
Other than the examples described, it is usually required to add modal dof in order to capture system
dynamics adequately. This will be described in subsequent subsections.
Example of Constraint Modes
As described in Static Condensation Process (Ch. 1), G o t , represent the superelement physical
influence coefficients (or superelement physical shape functions) for the free boundary solution. That
is, each column of this matrix represents the motion of the interior points when one boundary dof is
moved one unit while the other boundary points are held constrained. Therefore, the transformation
matrix has one column for each exterior (boundary) dof (the Aset for the superelement), and the number
of rows are equal to the number of interior dof (the O-set for the superelement).
So, what does a constraint mode look like? This is best described by figures for a simple example.
Consider the structure shown here:
Main Index

Figure 9-3
Geometry for Constraint Mode Example, Boundary Grids 501 and 502
For this case, the superelement boundary dof are specified at the independent grid (501 and 502) for the
RBE2 at each end of the model. Accordingly, the constraint modes are as follows:
Figure 9-4
Main Index
Pictorial Representation of Constraint Modes for Boundary Grid 501
CHAPTER 9 413
Figure 9-5
Pictorial Representation of Constraint Modes for Boundary Grid 502
This example is contained in /doc/seug/chapter9/Component-Modes.bdf.

Recall that a dynamic shape is a linear combination of the shapes available. Thus, the static condensation
shapes would have difficulty representing the 1st bending mode of the structure, let alone a 2nd or 3rd
order mode.
Dynamic Reduction Component Modes Synthesis

Dynamic reduction consists of calculating additional dynamic superelement influence coefficients (or
superelement dynamic shape functions), G o q , to improve the approximation used to reduce a
superelement for dynamic analysis.
Structural dynamicists are familiar with modal solutions where the physical space is transformed to the
modal space for efficient solutions. The MSC.Nastran modal solutions include: Modal Complex
Eigenvalues (SOL 110), Modal Frequency Response (SOL 111), Modal Transient Response (SOL 112),
and Aerodynamic Flutter (SOL 145). When a modal transformation is used and all modes of a structure
are used, no approximation occurs in this transformation. However, there is no computational advantage
to retaining all of the modes in a modal solution, because a direct solution would not carry the burden of
modal calculation. Thus, the dilemma is to select the cutoff frequency to use in the modal solution.
Some guidelines on the cutoff frequency can be found in the Mode Truncation in Modal Transient
Response Analysis (Ch. 5) in the MSC Nastran Dynamic Analysis Users Guide.
Main Index

Dynamic reduction of superelements is similar to the transformation of a structure into modal

coordinates. However, the transformation involves the use of both static and dynamic shapes.
MSC.Nastran offers Component Modes Synthesis (CMS) for dynamic reduction. As with the modal
solutions, the frequency cutoff is an important consideration in dynamic reduction.
The flow chart introduced in Superelement Analysis (Ch. 1) is valid for both statics and dynamics.
Figure 9-6
Flowchart for Dynamic Superelement Processing
Chapter 1 discussed the static condensation required to form the K a a matrix. For statics, the K a a
matrix is the same as the K t t matrix as describe in Static Condensation Process (Ch. 1). In
Component Modes Synthesis, the process is modified by adding the dynamic mass and stiffness K q q
a mass reduction for M a a that includes both the static mass matrix M t t and the dynamic mass matrix
from the component modes M q q . The flowchart for the dynamic superelement reduction can be
expanded to include the component modes synthesis detail as follows:
Main Index
CHAPTER 9 415
Figure 9-7
Dynamic Superelement Reduction Flowchart
The synthesis step forms the total boundary matrices as follows:

Ka a =
K tt K tq
Kq t Kq q
(9-9)
Ma a =
M t t M tq
Mq t Mq q
(9-10)
The q subscript represents the MSC.Nastran Q-Set, which is designated to store the computed
component modes. The qt and tq matrices represent the coupling matrices between the physical TSet and modal Q-Set.
Since the static condensation process provides an exact solution for statics, there is no coupling between
the constraint modes and the component modes, so Equation (9-9) becomes:
Main Index

Ka a =
K tt
(9-11)
0 Kq q
For simplicity, this manual will describe the equations necessary for the fixed boundary reduction
described in Fixed-Boundary Reduction (Craig-Bampton Method). For a more detailed discussion of all
component modes calculations, refer to Real Eigenvalue Analysis in SubDMAPs SEMR3 and MODERS
(Ch. 1) in the MSC Nastran Reference Manual.
Fixed-Boundary Reduction (Craig-Bampton Method)
The most popular form of Component Modes Synthesis is the Fixed Boundary Method. This method is
also known as the Craig-Bampton Method[] . In this technique, the dof that are used for the static
condensation are fixed during the normal mode calculations which are necessary to capture the dynamic
mass in the Component Modes Synthesis method. The physical dof in the F-Set are partitioned into the
A-Set and O-Set. In static reduction we defined the T-Set as the physical boundary dof for the
superelement. In dynamic fixed boundary reduction, the superelement physical boundary dof are fixed
during component modes calculations. The dof fixed during component modes synthesis are designated
the B-Set. So, for fixed-boundary CMS, the T-Set is equivalent to the B-Set. Also, the omitted dof are
designated as the V-set, or free to vibrate set. So, in fixed-boundary CMS, the O-Set is equivalent to
the V-Set.
Starting from the F-Set:
K ff U f = P f
(9-12)
Recall from Equation (1-3) in the static reduction solution, the F-Set is partitioned to the retained and
omitted sets.
Ko o Ko t U
Po
o
=
T
Pt
Ko t Kt t Ut
(9-13)
For Fixed-Boundary, the T-Set is equivalent to the B-Set. Also, substitute the symbol for static
displacement U with static mode shape . Note that since we are solving the constraint modes for
a unit boundary displacement, b
= Ib
. Also, the applied loads on the O-Set are zero for normal
modes.
Ko o Ko b
o
T
b
b
Ko b Kb b
b = Ib
Main Index
Po = 0
=
b
Pb
(9-14)
CHAPTER 9 417
Extracting the first line of the equation:

Ko o o
+ Ko b Ib
= 0
(9-15)
Solving for the internal constraint modes:

o
= Ko o
Ko b Ib
(9-16)
Thus, the full static constraint mode matrix is assembled as:
b
o
b
=
Ib
(9-17)
For the component modes, the F-Set is partitioned similarly. The free-to-vibrate set, designated as the
V-Set , is equivalent to the O-Set. Both the mass and stiffness are required for normal modes:
K ff =
Ko o Ko t
K t o K tt
K vv K vb
Kb v Kb b
(9-18)
M ff =
Mo o Mo t
M to M tt
M v v M vb
Mb v Mb b
(9-19)
The normal modes calculated for component modes synthesis are based on the V-Set, or free-to-vibrate
set, using the familiar Eigenvalue equation:
Kv v Mv v v = 0
(9-20)
Each column in v contains a mode shape vector for the physical dof in the V-set. Since for fixed
boundary component modes, the O-Set is equivalent to the V-Set,
Go q = v
(9-21)
The generalized mass and stiffness for the Q-set modal dof are calculated as:
T
Kq q = Go q Ko o Go q
T
Mq q = Go q Mo o Go q
Main Index
(9-22)
(9-23)

For mode shapes which are mass-normalized (the NORM field on the EIGRL entry), these matrices
take on special properties. The generalized stiffness is a diagonal matrix with the Eigenvalue, i , for
each mode on the diagonal.
(9-24)
The generalized mass becomes the identity matrix:
Mq q = I
(9-25)
The dynamic mass is accounted for by the coupling of the modal dof to the physical dof. Because of
symmetry, only the M q t matrix needs to be computed:
T
Mq t = Go q Mo t + Mo o Go a
(9-26)
Finally, the A-Set matrices are formed by assembling the physical and component modes:
Ka a =
Kb b Kb q
Kq b Kq q
(9-27)
Ma a =
Mb b Mb q
Mq b Mq q
(9-28)
And for mass normalized modes, the fixed-boundary component modes synthesis A-Set matrices
become:
(9-29)
Ma a =
M tt M tq
Mq t I
(9-30)
Manual Example
For this example, we will revisit the model used in Manual Solution of a Small Superelement Example
(Ch. 1). However, the fixed-fixed boundary condition will be replaced with a cantilever boundary
condition as follows:
Main Index
CHAPTER 9 419
Figure 9-8
Model for Manual Example of Component Modes Synthesis
In this example,
K of each spring is 1.0
M of each mass is 1.0 on each grid
Grid 1 is defined as external to superelement 2 and internal to the residual.
Grid 3 is external to both superelement 1 and 2, and internal to the residual.
The conventional analysis model is: /doc/seug/chapter9/simple-modes-conventional1.bdf and the

superelement solution is: /doc/seug/chapter9/simple-fixed-boundary1.bdf.
The input file for the conventional analysis is as follows:
SOL 103
CEND
TITLE = Simple Modes - Conventional Analysis
LABEL = Baseline Model
ECHO = NONE
RESVEC = NO
SUBCASE 1
SUBTITLE=Normal Modes
METHOD = 1
SPC = 2
VECTOR(SORT1,REAL)=ALL
BEGIN BULK
PARAM
PARAM
EIGRL
POST
PRTMAXIM YES
1
10
$ Elements and Element Properties for region : spring

PELAS
1.
$ Pset: "spring" will be imported as: "pelas.1"
Main Index
MASS

CELAS1
CELAS1
CELAS1
CELAS1
$ Elements and Element Properties for region : Unit_Mass

CONM2
1.
CONM2
1.
CONM2
1.
CONM2
1.
CONM2
1.

GRID
0.
0.
GRID
1.
0.
0.
0.
GRID
2.
0.
0.
GRID
3.
0.
0.
GRID
4.
0.
0.
$ Loads for Load Case : Dynamic

SPCADD
$ Displacement Constraints of Load Set : RyRzMxMyMz

SPC1
23456
$ Displacement Constraints of Load Set : Cantilever-Fixed

SPC1
Listing 9-1
Input for Simple Dynamic Example (Non Superelement)
The MSC.Nastran Solution for this example is as follows:

R E A L
MODE
EXTRACTION
NO.
ORDER
1
2
3
4
EIGENVALUE
E I G E N V A L U E S
RADIANS
CYCLES
GENERALIZED
GENERALIZED
MASS
STIFFNESS
1.206148E-01
3.472964E-01
5.527393E-02
1.000000E+00
1.206148E-01
1.000000E+00
1.000000E+00
1.591549E-01
1.000000E+00
1.000000E+00
2.347296E+00
1.532089E+00
2.438395E-01
1.000000E+00
2.347296E+00
3.532089E+00
1.879385E+00
2.991135E-01
1.000000E+00
3.532089E+00
SIMPLE MODES - CONVENTIONAL ANALYSIS
MAY
1, 2011
MD NASTRAN
NORMAL MODES
BASELINE MODEL
EIGENVALUE =
1.206148E-01
CYCLES =
5.527393E-02
POINT ID.
Main Index
TYPE
R E A L
T1
E I G E N V E C T O R
T2
T3
N O .
R1
R2
R3
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
2.280134E-01
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
4.285251E-01
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
CHAPTER 9 421
5.773503E-01
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
6.565385E-01
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
EIGENVALUE =
1.000000E+00
CYCLES =
1.591549E-01
POINT ID.
TYPE
R E A L
T1
T2
N O .
T3
R1
R2
R3
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
5.773503E-01
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
5.773503E-01
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
2.065163E-16
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
-5.773503E-01
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
EIGENVALUE =
2.347296E+00
CYCLES =
2.438395E-01
POINT ID.
TYPE
4
5
T1
T2
0.0
N O .
T3
R1
R2
R3
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
-6.565385E-01
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
2.280134E-01
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
5.773503E-01
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
-4.285251E-01
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
EIGENVALUE =
3.532089E+00
CYCLES =
2.991135E-01
POINT ID.
R E A L
TYPE
2
3
R E A L
T1
T2
N O .
T3
R1
R2
R3
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
4.285251E-01
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
-6.565385E-01
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
5.773503E-01
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
-2.280134E-01
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
Listing 9-2
Solution for Simple Dynamic Example (Non Superelement)
The manual solution for the fixed-boundary component modes synthesis is as follows. The MSC.Nastran
solution can be found in file /doc/seug/chapter9/simple-fixed-boundary1.bdf and the output will be
presented to compare to the manual solution.
The component modes are stored in SPOINT dof which are part of the QSET dof for the superelement.
The superelement QSET dof are specified with either SEQSET or SEQSET1 entries described here.
SPOINT
Main Index
Scalar Point Definition

Defines Scalar Points

Format:
1
SPOINT
ID1
ID2
ID3
125
126
127
501
10
Example:
SPOINT

SPOINT
ID1
THRU:
ID2
SEELT
5001
THRU
5025
Field
Contents
IDi
Scalar point identification numbers. (Integer > 0 or THRU; for THRU

option ID1 < ID2)
SEQSET1
Superelement Generalized Degree-of-Freedom, Alternate Form
Defines the generalized degrees-of-freedom of the superelement to be used in generalized dynamic

reduction or component mode synthesis.
Format:
1
SEQSET1
SEID
G1
G2
G3
G4
GS
G6
G7
G8
-etc.-
15
123456
52
53
Example:
SEQSET1
Main Index
22
105
10
CHAPTER 9 423

SEQSET1 SEID
G1
THRU
G2
SEQSET1 16
101
THRU
110
Field
Contents
SEID
Superelement identification number. Must be a primary superelement. (Integer > 0)
Component numbers. (Any unique combination of the Integers 1 through 6 with no

embedded blanks for grid points; Integer 0 or blank for scalar points.)
Gi
Grid or scalar point identification numbers. Must be exterior points. (Integer > 0 or
THRU; for THRU option G1 < G2.)
In this example, the baseline solution is modified by adding the appropriate superelement entries shown
here:
spoint,11,12
seqset1,1,0,11,12
spoint,21
seqset1,2,0,21
seset,1,4,5
seset,2,2
Figure 9-9
SESET, SPOINT, and SEQSET1 Entries for Fixed-Boundary Reduction

Example
For superelement 1, grid 3 is the exterior grid:
+ SPOINT 11, 12
Figure 9-10
Superelement 1 for Fixed-Boundary Manual Solution
The constraint modes are solved in the same manner as in Section 1.5.2.1.
Notes:
The G-Set and J-Set for superelement 1 are equivalent since there are no upstream
superelements.
Main Index

The G-Set and A-Set include SPOINTs 11 and 12 which are used to store the component mode
mass and stiffness after they are calculated. (SPOINTs 11 and 12 are part of the Q-Set)
The physical dof are reduced independently of the dynamic dof, so the physical reduction presented here
does not include the Q-Set dof:
Kg g
K 34
=
K 34
K 34 K 34 + K 45 K 45
K 45
Ko o
K 34 + K 45 K 45
K 45
K 45
K 45
1 1 0
1 2 1
0 1 1
2 1
1 1
(9-31)
(9-32)
Similarly,
o
= Ko o
= 1 1
1 2
Ko b Ib
1 1 0 = 1 = u4
0 0 1
u5
1
(9-33)
1
u4
1
o
o
=
= 1 = u5
b
Ib
1
u3
(9-34)
(9-35)
Rearranging:
Go t
= b
1 u3
= 1 u4
1 u5
(9-36)
Recall that the constraint modes represent the internal shape when the boundary dof are each moved by
a unit displacement. In this case, the boundary is dof u 3 , so a unit displacement of the boundary results
in unit displacements of the other dof. So the numbers bear out the statement.
Solving the fixed-boundary component modes requires the mass matrix:
Main Index
CHAPTER 9 425
Mj j
M3 0
=
0
=
0 M4 0
0 0 M5
0 0 0
0 1 0
0 0 1
(9-37)
Note that M 3 is an element (i.e. CONM2), therefore, it is considered a boundary element and
automatically assigned to the downstream superelement in this case, superelement 0. Partitioning the
mass and stiffness to the V-Set:
Mv v
= Mo o
M4 0
0 M5
1 0
0 1
(9-38)
And
K vv
= Ko o
K 34 + K 45 K 45
K 45
K 45
2 1
1 1
(9-39)
The Eigenvalue equation is:

Kv v Mv v v = 0
2 1 1 0 4
1 1
0 1 5
(9-40)
0
=
(9-41)
Solving the determinate:

det 2 1
1 1
(9-42)
Produces the quadratic equation:

2
2 1 1 1 = 3 1 = 0
(9-43)
With the following roots:
1
= 0.3819
2.618
2
q 11
The mass normalized mode coefficients are stored in the Q-Set dof (SPOINT 11 and 12):
Main Index
(9-44)

1
= 0.8507
0.5257
2
q 12
u 12
u 11
G o q = v = 0.5257
0.8507
0.8507 u 11
0.5257 u
12
(9-45)
Forming the modal mass and stiffness matrices:

u 11
K q q = G o q K o o G o q = 0.3819
0
T
Mq q = Go q Mo o Go q =
u 12
0 u 11
2.618 u
12
1 0
0 1
(9-46)
(9-47)
u3
Mq t = Go q Mo t + Mo o Go a =
1.3764
0.3249
u 11
(9-48)
u 12
And the assembled matrices:

u3
Ka a =
u 11
u 12
0
0
0 u 3
0 0.3819 0 u 11
0
0
2.618 u 12
2.0
1.3764 0.3249
M a a 1.3764
1.0
0
0.3249
0
1.0
(9-49)
(9-50)
There are some interesting facts that are observable in the reduced matrices. First, notice that the
physically reduced stiffness (the 1-1 term) is 0.0 for this superelement. This superelement is a special
case, where the interface between the superelement and the rest of the structure is determinate. In this
case the reduced stiffness is 0. This can be explained by examining the static transformation vector. If
Main Index
CHAPTER 9 427
point 3 moves 1.0 units, then points 4 and 5 also move 1.0 units. The static transformation is a rigid-body
vector. The reaction at the interface when the structure moves in this shape is 0.0, indicating that the
reduced stiffness is null. Statically, there is no reaction force when the interface moves, but this does not
mean that the superelement is not connected to the rest of the structure.
Also notice that there are no coupling terms between the modal and physical DOFs in the stiffness
matrix, showing that if the superelement moves (or is loaded) statically, the modes are not excited. The
coupling between modal and physical DOFs occurs in the mass matrix (which is not used in statics),
showing that if the interface is moved in a dynamic analysis, the modes respond dynamically. The
physical mass matrix of the omitted dof is preserved (2.0).
The MSC.Nastran solution for superelement 1 (/doc/seug/chapter9/simple-fixed-boundary1.bdf ) is:
SIMPLE MODES - SUPERELEMENT ANALYSIS
MAY
8, 2011
MD NASTRAN

SUPERELEMENT MODEL 1, FIXED BOUNDARY CMS
SUBCASE 1
R E A L
MODE
EXTRACTION
NO.
ORDER
EIGENVALUE
12/15/10
SUPERELEMENT 1
RADIANS
CYCLES
GENERALIZED
MASS
GENERALIZED
STIFFNESS
3.819660E-01
6.180340E-01
9.836316E-02
1.000000E+00
3.819660E-01
2.618034E+00
1.618034E+00
2.575181E-01
1.000000E+00
2.618034E+00
Listing 9-3
MSC.Nastran Modal Solution for Fixed-Boundary Modes of Superelement 1
Superelement 2 is processed next:
+ SPOINT 21
Figure 9-11
Superelement 2 for Fixed-Boundary Manual Solution
The formulation for superelement 2 follows similarly. Again, note that the mass terms are assigned to
the downstream superelement. Also, note that the constraints are applied on the downstream
superelement.
Kg g
Main Index
1 1 0
2
=
1 2 1 Mg g
0 1 1
0 0 0
0 1 0
0 0 0
(9-51)

The static constraint modes are:

u1
Go t
= b
u3
0 u1
0.5 u 2
1 u3
1
= 0.5
(9-52)
Investigating this matrix, the u 1 column represents the constraint mode when u 1 is moved a unit
displacement, and u 3 is held fixed. It follows that u 2 is 0.5. Similarly, the u 3 column represents the
motion when u 3 is moved a unit displacement and u 1 is held fixed.
For the constraint modes, the V-Set is partitioned producing:
Mv v
= 1 K v v
(9-53)
= 2
Kv v Mv v v = 2 1 v = 0
(9-54)
Which yields as solution of = 2.0 G o q = v = 1 for a mass-normalized eigenvector.

Synthesizing the A-Set matrices from the physical and modal components:
u1 u2 u3
1 0 0 u1
0.5 0.5 1 u 2
0 1 0 u3
Go a =
Ka a
Ma a
Main Index
0.5 0.5 0
0.5 0.5 0
0
0 2
(9-55)
u1
u3
(9-56)
u 21
0.25 0.25 0.50

0.25 0.25 0.50
0.50 0.50 1.0
u1
u3
u 21
(9-57)
CHAPTER 9 429

MAY
8, 2011
MD NASTRAN
12/15/10
SUBCASE 1
R E A L
MODE
EXTRACTION
NO.
ORDER
1
EIGENVALUE
RADIANS
CYCLES
GENERALIZED
MASS
2.000000E+00
Listing 9-4
SUPERELEMENT 2
1.414214E+00
2.250791E-01
1.000000E+00
GENERALIZED
STIFFNESS
2.000000E+00
MSC.Nastran Modal Solution for Fixed-Boundary Modes of Superelement 2
RESIDUAL STRUCTURE ASSEMBLY AND SOLUTION

The residual structure includes grids 1, 3, and SPOINTs 11, 12, and 21.
+ SPOINT 11, 12, 21

Figure 9-12
Residual Structure for Fixed-Boundary Manual Solution
From Equation (1-13), the assembled stiffness matrix is:

(9-58)
The J-Set residual structure stiffness and mass matrices include only the mass and stiffness of elements
that are interior to the residual structure. Thus,
K jj
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
=
0 M jj
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
u1
u3
u 11
u 12
u 21
Note that the residual structure contains the physical DOFs associated with points 1 and 3 and the
generalized DOFs representing the upstream superelement modes on SPOINTs 11, 12, and 21.
The upstream A-Set matrices are added to the appropriate ij terms to form the G-Set matrices for the
residual structure:
Main Index

Kg g
Mg g
0.5 0.5
0
0
0
0.5 0.5
0
0
0
0
0 0.3819 0
0
0
0
0
2.618 0
0
0
0
0 2.0
1.25 0.25
0
0
0.25 3.25 1.3764 0.3249
0 1.3764
1.0
0
0 0.3249
0
1.0
0.50 0.50
0
0
u1
u3
(9-59)
u 11
u 12
u 21
0.5
0.5
0
0
1.0
u1
u3
u 11
(9-60)
u 12
u 21
Applying the constraints (i.e. removing the rows and columns of u 1 ), the F-Set matrices become:
K ff
Mf f
0.5
0
0
0
0 0.3819
0
0
0
0
0.2618 0
0
0
0
2.0
3.25 1.3764 0.3249

1.3764
1.0
0
0.3249
0
1.0
0.5
0
0
u3
u 11
(9-61)
u 12
u 21
0.5
0
0
1.0
u3
u 11
u 12
(9-62)
u 21
The Eigenvalue problem:

Kf f Mf f f = 0
(9-63)
Produces
0.1206
i = 1.00
2.3473
3.5321
Main Index
(9-64)
CHAPTER 9 431

MAY
8, 2011
MD NASTRAN

EXTRACTION
NO.
ORDER
SUBCASE 1
R E A L
MODE
12/15/10
SUPERELEMENT 0
EIGENVALUE
RADIANS
CYCLES
GENERALIZED
MASS
GENERALIZED
STIFFNESS
1.206148E-01
3.472964E-01
5.527393E-02
1.000000E+00
1.206148E-01
1.000000E+00
1.000000E+00
1.591549E-01
1.000000E+00
1.000000E+00
2.347296E+00
1.532089E+00
2.438395E-01
1.000000E+00
2.347296E+00
3.532089E+00
1.879385E+00
2.991135E-01
1.000000E+00
3.532089E+00
Listing 9-5
MSC.Nastran Modal Solution for Fixed-Boundary Modes of Residual
In this example, the solution provides an exact solution because there is no modal truncation i.e. all of
the modes are retained during the reduction process. For practical models, this will not be the case. For
example, a superelement with a million dof may be reduced to a boundary with a few dozen physical dof
and a few hundred modal dof which will produce an approximate residual solution because of the modal
truncation.
The Solution Eigenvectors:
1
f f
0.4285
0.2722
0.0067
0.1137
0.5773
1.2858
0.1159
0.2887
0.2280
0.3748
0.6423
0.7705
4
0.6565
1.0132
0.8243
0.7568
u3
u 11
(9-65)
u 12
u 21
DATA RECOVERY FOR RESIDUAL STRUCTURE

The data recovery for the residual structure involves simply partitioning the residual dof from the
solution and expanding back to the G-Set. For this model, residual mode 1 is:
Main Index
0.0
0.4285
0.2722
0.0067
0.0137
u1
u3
u 11
u 12
u 21
(9-66)

The MSC.Nastran solution /doc/seug/chapter9/simple-fixed-boundary1.bdf

From the MSC.Nastran solution of /doc/seug/chapter9/simple-fixed-boundary1.bdf
MAY
8, 2011
NORMAL MODES
MD NASTRAN

EIGENVALUE =
1.206148E-01
CYCLES =
5.527393E-02
POINT ID.
TYPE
G
0.0
4.285251E-01
2.722018E-01
21
1.375089E-02
EIGENVALUE =
N O .
T3
1.591549E-01
TYPE
R1
R2
R3
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
-6.724520E-03
R E A L
T1
T2
0.0
5.773503E-01
11
-1.285778E+00
21
2.886751E-01
EIGENVALUE =
N O .
T3
R1
R2
R3
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
-1.159385E-01
2.347296E+00
CYCLES =
2.438395E-01
TYPE
R E A L
T1
T2
0.0
-2.280134E-01
11
3.748278E-01
21
7.705452E-01
EIGENVALUE =
N O .
T3
R1
R2
R3
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
6.423264E-01
3.532089E+00
CYCLES =
2.991135E-01
TYPE
R E A L
T1
T2
N O .
T3
R1
R2
R3
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
6.565385E-01
11
-1.013219E+00
21
-7.567943E-01
Listing 9-6
8.243195E-01
MSC.Nastran Eigenvectors for Fixed-Boundary Modes of Residual
Main Index
1.000000E+00
CYCLES =
POINT ID.
T2
11
POINT ID.
SUBCASE 1
R E A L
T1
POINT ID.
12/15/10
SUPERELEMENT 0
CHAPTER 9 433
The boundary solution of superelement 2 is extracted from the residual structure solution. In this case,
the boundary solution for mode 1 is:
a 1
u1
0
= 0.4285 u 3
0.0137 u 21
(9-67)
To obtain the interior solution, the transformation matrix G o a is applied to the boundary solution.
Considering mode 1:
1 0 0
u1
0
0
= G o a a 1 = 0.5 0.5 1 0.4285 = 0.2280 u 2
1 1 0 0.0137
0.4285 u 3
(9-68)

NORMAL MODES
SUPERELEMENT 2

EIGENVALUE =
1.206148E-01
CYCLES =
5.527393E-02
POINT ID.
TYPE
SUBCASE 1
R E A L
T1
T2
N O .
T3
R1
R2
R3
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
2.280134E-01
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
4.285251E-01
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
21
1.375089E-02
MAY
8, 2011
NORMAL MODES
MD NASTRAN

EIGENVALUE =
1.000000E+00
CYCLES =
1.591549E-01
POINT ID.
TYPE
SUBCASE 1
R E A L
T1
T2
N O .
T3
R1
R2
R3
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
5.773503E-01
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
5.773503E-01
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
21
2.886751E-01
MAY
8, 2011
NORMAL MODES
MD NASTRAN
12/15/10
SUPERELEMENT 2

EIGENVALUE =
2.347296E+00
CYCLES =
2.438395E-01
Main Index
12/15/10
SUPERELEMENT 2
R E A L
SUBCASE 1
N O .

POINT ID.
TYPE
2
3
21
T1
T2
T3
R1
R2
R3
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
6.565385E-01
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
-2.280134E-01
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
7.705452E-01
MAY
8, 2011
MD NASTRAN
NORMAL MODES
12/15/10
SUPERELEMENT 2

EIGENVALUE =
3.532089E+00
CYCLES =
2.991135E-01
POINT ID.
TYPE
SUBCASE 1
R E A L
T1
T2
0.0
21
-7.567943E-01
N O .
T3
R1
R2
R3
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
-4.285251E-01
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
6.565385E-01
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
Listing 9-7
MSC.Nastran Eigenvectors for Fixed-Boundary Modes of Superelement 2

The same procedure is performed on superelement 1, producing the following solution for mode 1:
0.4285 u 3
= 0.5773 u 4
0.6564 u 5
(9-69)

MAY
8, 2011
NORMAL MODES
MD NASTRAN

EIGENVALUE =
1.206148E-01
CYCLES =
5.527393E-02
POINT ID.
SUBCASE 1
R E A L
T2
N O .
TYPE
T1
4.285251E-01
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
5.773503E-01
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
6.565385E-01
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
11
2.722018E-01
R1
R2
R3
-6.724520E-03
NORMAL MODES
MAY
8, 2011
MD NASTRAN
12/15/10
SUPERELEMENT 1

EIGENVALUE =
T3
Main Index
12/15/10
SUPERELEMENT 1
1.000000E+00
SUBCASE 1
CHAPTER 9 435
CYCLES =
POINT ID.
1.591549E-01
R E A L
T2
N O .
T3
TYPE
T1
5.773503E-01
0.0
0.0
0.0
R1
0.0
R2
0.0
R3
3.469447E-16
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
-5.773503E-01
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
11
-1.285778E+00
-1.159385E-01
MAY
8, 2011
NORMAL MODES
MD NASTRAN

EIGENVALUE =
2.347296E+00
CYCLES =
2.438395E-01
POINT ID.
SUBCASE 1
R E A L
T2
N O .
T3
TYPE
T1
-2.280134E-01
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
-5.773503E-01
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
4.285251E-01
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
11
3.748278E-01
6.423264E-01
R1
R2
MAY
8, 2011
NORMAL MODES
R3
MD NASTRAN
EIGENVALUE =
3.532089E+00
CYCLES =
2.991135E-01
Note:
SUBCASE 1
R E A L
T2
N O .
T3
TYPE
T1
6.565385E-01
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
-5.773503E-01
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
2.280134E-01
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
11
-1.013219E+00
Listing 9-8
12/15/10
SUPERELEMENT 1
POINT ID.
12/15/10
SUPERELEMENT 1
R1
R2
R3
8.243195E-01
MSC.Nastran Eigenvectors for Fixed-Boundary Modes of Superelement 1

Note that the data recovery for superelements is based on the Eigenvector normalization
used for the residual structure regardless of the Eigenvalue normalization method
requested for the superelement.
Fixed Boundary Mode Shapes with PARAM FIXEDB

The MSC.Nastran solution for /doc/seug/chapter9/simple-fixed-boundary1.bdf will report the
Eigenvectors of the system solution. In some cases, such as during model checkout, the user may want
to view the component modes that are calculated rather than the system modes. To do this, the user can
specify PARAM,FIXEDB,-1 to request an uncoupled solution. (see example
Main Index

/doc/seug/chapter9/simple-fixed-boundary2.bdf). The solution for the component modes of

superelement 1can be compared to Equation (9-45).
MAY
8, 2011
NORMAL MODES
MD NASTRAN
SUPERELEMENT MODEL 1, FIXED BOUNDARY CMS, PARAM,FIXEDB,-1

EIGENVALUE =
3.819660E-01
CYCLES =
9.836316E-02
POINT ID.
TYPE
R E A L
T1
SUBCASE 1
T2
N O .
T3
R1
R2
R3
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
5.257311E-01
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
8.506508E-01
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
11
0.0
0.0
MAY
8, 2011
NORMAL MODES
MD NASTRAN
12/15/10
SUPERELEMENT 1
SUPERELEMENT MODEL 1, FIXED BOUNDARY CMS, PARAM,FIXEDB,-1

EIGENVALUE =
2.618034E+00
CYCLES =
2.575181E-01
POINT ID.
12/15/10
SUPERELEMENT 1
TYPE
11
R E A L
T1
T2
0.0
SUBCASE 1
N O .
T3
R1
R2
R3
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
-8.506508E-01
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
5.257311E-01
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
Listing 9-9
Solution with PARAM,FIXEDB,-1
Free-Boundary Dynamic Reduction

The free-free dynamic reduction technique assumes that the physical boundary dof are free to vibrate
during the component modes synthesis solution. That is the V-Set includes both the interior dof and the
exterior dof of a superelement. In MSC.Nastran, boundary dof are designated to be part of the V-Set by
placing them in the C-Set. If any constraints are applied on interior points, they are included when
performing the dynamic reduction.
The internal operations performed for free-free reduction are more complicated than those for fixedboundary reduction. When a fixed-boundary reduction is performed, the dynamic transformation vectors
are independent of the static transformation vectors, because the exterior points are held constrained
while the dynamic transformation vectors are found. When a free-free reduction is performed, one or
more of the dynamic transformation vectors may be (actually, probably will be) a linear combination of
the static vectors. If there are no internal constraints, the rigid-body modes of a free-free component can
be used as an example. These shapes are a linear combination of the static transformation vectors. More
simply, the static transformation vectors are capable of describing any possible rigid-body motion of the
component.
Main Index
CHAPTER 9 437
If any dynamic transformation vector that is a linear combination of the static vectors (or of any of the
transformation vectors, for that matter) is used, the reduced matrices will be singular, and the problem
will fail. Three methods of preventing this problem are provided in MSC.Nastran:
Do not calculate the rigid-body modes. Simply, do not request the rigid body Eigenvectors
during the calculation of the dynamic transformations. This can be accomplished by specifying a
value greater than 0.0 for the lowest frequency of interest on the EIGRL entry.
Calculate the rigid-body modes, let MSC.Nastran will remove them. Logic is included in the
program that attempts to remove any dynamic transformation vectors that are a linear
combination of the static transformations. This logic is shown later in this section.
Calculate the rigid-body modes, but remove them manually using a SESUP or SUPORT
(PARTs) entry (described in the next section). Any exterior DOFs defined on a SESUP entry are
not constrained during the calculation of the dynamic transformation vectors. For each DOF
listed on an SESUP, MSC.Nastran throws away one dynamic transformation vector, starting
with the first one (lowest frequency). MSC does not recommend this approach, because the
program does not check to verify that the thrown away vectors are actually a linear combination
of the static transformation vectors. Therefore, elastic modes may be removed unintentionally.
Of the three approaches, setting the frequency cutoff greater than 0.0 is the recommended approach for
free-free CMS calculations.
As mentioned above, the processing of models with free boundaries (C-Set) is much more involved than
the fixed-boundary (Craig-Bampton) method. For details on this method, the read can refer to the
Dynamic Reduction and Component Mode Synthesis in SubDMAP SEMR3 (Ch. 1) in the MSC Nastran
Reference Manual.
Manual Example
The example model for the free-free (CSET) Component Modes Synthesis (CMS) example is similar to
the fixed-boundary (BSET) CMS model, except that mass density has been added to the elements. The
problem descriptions is as follows:
Figure 9-13
Sample Model for Free-Free Component Modes Synthesis
K 12 = K 23 = K 34 = K 45 = 1.0
M 1 = M 2 = M 3 = M 4 = M 5 = 1.0
12 = 12 = 12 = 12 = 2.0
Main Index

The conventional analysis model is: /doc/seug/chapter9/simple-modes-conventional2.bdf. As in the

fixed-boundary solution, grids 1 and 3 are assigned to the residual structure. To make the boundary
points free-free, they must be placed in the C-Set by using the SECSET or SECSET1 entry which follow
a familiar format:
SECSET / SECSET1
Free Boundary Degree-of-Freedom
Defines boundary degrees-of-freedom to be free (c-set) during generalized dynamic reduction or

component mode synthesis calculations.
Formats:
1
SECSET
SEID
G1
C1
G2
C2
G3
C3
SECSET1
SEID
G1
G2
G3
G4
G5
G7
G8
G9
-etc.-
SECSET
124
23
15
SECSET1
135
14
23
24
122
127
10
G6
Examples:
Field
Contents
SEID
Superelement identification number. (Integer > 0)
C, Ci
Component numbers of degree-of-freedoms. (Any unique combination of the

Integers 1 through 6 with no embedded blanks for grid points; Integer 0 or blank for
scalar points.)
Gi
Grid or scalar point identification number. (Integer > 0)
In this example, SECSET1 is used as follows:

SECSET1,1,123456,3
SECSET1,2,123456,1,3
SUPERELMENT 1 REDUCTION
The first step is to reduce superelement 1. The G-Set mass and stiffness matrices are:
Main Index
25
CHAPTER 9 439
Kg g
1 1 0
1
=
1 2 1 Mg g
0 1 1
1 0 0
0 3 0
0 0 2
(9-70)
Note that the m 3 mass is not contained in superelement 1 because the mass is on a boundary element
and, therefore, assigned to the residual structure.
The static constraint modes are calculated exactly as they are for the fixed-boundary solution in the
previous section, i.e.
1 u3
= 1 u4
1 u5
(9-71)
Partitioning the O-Set:
u
Go c = 1 4
1 u5
(9-72)
For free-free CMS, the V-Set is the O-Set + C-Set. For this example, the V-Set is the same as the G-Set,
therefore the Eigenvalue equation becomes:
K M = 0
1 1 0
1 0 0 3
0
1 2 1 0 3 0 4 =
0
0 1 1
0 0 2 5
(9-73)
(9-74)
From which the determinate is:
det
1 1
0
1 2 3 1
0
1 1
Which produces the following roots:
Main Index
(9-75)

1
0.0
2 = 0.6667
1.500
3
(9-76)
The first eigenvalue (0.0) is a rigid-body mode, which is a linear combination of the static vectors. In
this case the rigid-body mode is identical to the static transformation vector and therefore needs to be
removed. These eigenvectors (normalized to unit generalized mass) are
0.4082
0.5477
1 = 0.4082 2 = 0.1825
0.4082
0.5477
0.7303
3 = 0.3651
0.1825
(9-77)
Or,
0.4082 0.5477 0.7303
= 0.4082 0.1825 0.3651
0.4082 0.5477 0.1826
1
v
(9-78)
Since mode 1 is a linear combination of the constraint mode, it must be removed. The operations for this
are described in the Orthogonalization (Ch. 7) in the MD Nastran Reference Manual beginning with
Equation 7-227. The linear algebra for this follows:
Go z =
0.4082 0.5477 0.7303

0.4082 0.1825 0.3651
0.4082 0.5477 0.1826
1 0.4082
0.5477
0
0
0
0 0.7303 1.0954
0 1.0954 0.5477
0.7303
(9-79)
(9-80)
The first mode is null and is removed. The matrix is partitioned

x
0.7303 1.0954
1.0954 0.5477
Now an additional filter is performed to remove any remaining vectors which might
not be independent. First, we transform the o-set mass using x .
z
Main Index
(9-81)
CHAPTER 9 441
Mz z
= x Mo o x =
z
z
2.8 2.4
2.4 4.2
(9-82)
A scaling matrix is found using the diagonals of M z z

2
scale = diagonalM zz
12
0.5976
0.
0.
0.4879
(9-83)
What remains of the eigenvectors as scaled by this

x scale = x
z
(9-84)
The generalized mass is scaled also

T
M z z = scale M zz scale =
2
1.
0.6988
0.6988
1.
(9-85)
Now the final filter is done. The reduced mass matrix is passed through the DECOMP
module.
(9-86)
the terms on the matrix diagonal are compared to the values on the factor diagonal.
Mz z
RATIO i = -----------i for this problem, Ratio =
di
1.0 0
0 1.96
(9-87)
If Ratio exceeds a filter (PARAM,RESVRAT-default=1.E8), the associated vector is

removed.
For this example, none exceeded the allowable ratio, and both vectors are kept.
A final orthogonalization is performed on the remaining vectors. First, the stiffness is
transformed
T
K zz = x k o o x =
0.2381
0
0
0.3571
the eigenvalue problem
Main Index
(9-88)

K zz M zz zz = 0
zz =
0.6693 1.2296
0.4099 1.3387
(9-89)
is solved for all roots (these eigenvalues are not printed). The final transformation
vectors are found by:
Go q = x z z =
0.3651 0.4472
0.5477 0.4472
(9-90)
The transformation matrix is then

u3
Go a
= Go t Go q =
1 0.3651 0.4472
1 0.3651 0.4472
u 1001
u 1002
1.
0
0
1. 0.3651 0.4472
1. 0.3651 0.4472
u3
u4
(9-91)
u5
Using this to transform the stiffness and mass provides:
Ma a
Ka a
= Go a Mo o Go a =
= Ga Ko o Go a =
6.0
0 2.1909 0.4472
1.
1.0
0
0.4472
0
1.0
0
0
0
0 0.1667 0
0
0
1.0
(9-92)
(9-93)
Next, Superelement 2 reduction is performed. Superelement 2 has grids 1,2, and 3 of which 1 and 3 are
on the boundary.
Figure 9-14
Superelement 2, Free-Free Component Modes Synthesis
The static (Guyan) reduction produces the following:
Main Index
CHAPTER 9 443
1 1 0
1 2 1 ;M gg =
0 1 1
Kg g =
1 0 0
0 3 0
0 0 1
u1
u 2 ; b =
u3
1 0
0.5 0.5
0 1
(9-94)
Grids 1 and 3 are part of the C-Set, therefore, part of the V-Set and are included in the modal solution.
K vv M vv v = 0
(9-95)
1 1 0
0 0
1 2 1 + 0 3 0 v = 0
0 0
0 1 1
(9-96)
1 1
0
1 2 3 1
0
1 1
det
= 0
(9-97)
which produces the roots:

= 0.
1.
1.667
(9-98)
The Eigenvectors (normalized to unit mass) are

0.4472
0.7071
1 = 0.4472 2 =
0
0.4472
0.7071
0.5477
3 = 0.3651
0.5477
(9-99)
Removing linear combinations of the static constraint modes:
Go z
0.4722 0.7071 0.5477

0.4722 0.0 0.3651
0.4722 0.7071 0.5477
0 0
0
0 0 0.9129
0 0
0
1 0
0.5 0.5
0 1
0.4472 0.7071 0.5477
0.4472 0.7071 0.5477
(9-100)
Since the first two eigenvectors are a linear combination of the static transformation, they are removed.
Only a single eigenvector remains. It is normalized to unit generalized mass producing:
G o q = 0.5773 u 2
Main Index
(9-101)

or transformation matrix
G o q = 0.5 0.5 0.5773
(9-102)
We now have our transformation matrix for superelement 2:

u1
u3
u 21
1 0
0
0.5 0.5 0.5773
0 1
0.
Go q =
u1
(9-103)
u2
u3
Notice that the filtering removed both the rigid-body mode and one of the elastic modes. The remaining
mode has motion only for grid point 2 and looks similar to the mode from the fixed-boundary CMS. In
general, this will not be the case, but in this example all eigenvectors of the superelement are calculated.
The transformation is used to reduce the stiffness and mass matrix. The dynamic transformation vector
is represented in the reduced model by SPOINT 21.
Ma a
Ma a
= Go a Mo o Go a =
= Go a Mo o Go a =
0.5 0.5
0
0.5 0.5
0
0
0 0.6667
1.75
0.75 0.866
0.75
1.75 0.866
0.866 0.866 1.0
(9-104)
u1
u3
(9-105)
u 22
RESIDUAL STRUCTURE SOLUTION

The internal grids of residual structure are 1 and 3, and the upstream superelements are attached.
Schematically:
+SPOINT 11, 12, 22

Figure 9-15
Residual Structure for Free-Free CMS
All the remaining grid points are in this model (points 1 and 3). All elements have been placed in
upstream superelements, and there are two sets of reduced matrices representing superelements 1 and 2.
We also have scalar points (SPOINTs) 11, 12 and 22 representing the modes from the superelements.
Main Index
CHAPTER 9 445
The physical mass and stiffness for the residual structure are generated. Since there are no stiffness
elements, the K jj matrix is null. However, the mass matrix includes the CONM2s on grids 1 and 3.
K jj =
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Mj j =
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
(9-106)
u1
u3
(9-107)
u 11
u 12
u 22
Add the reduced matrices from superelement 1:
Kg g =
Mg g =
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0 0
0
0
0 0
0 0.1667 0 0
0
0
1.0 0
0
0
0 0
u1
u3
(9-108)
u 11
u 12
u 22
1
0
0
0
0
7.0
2.1090 0.4472
0 2.1909
1.0
0
0 0.4472
0
1.0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
u1
u3
u 11
u 12
u 22
Add the reduced matrices from superelement 2:
Main Index
(9-109)

Kg g =
Mg g =
0.5 0.5
0
0
0
0.5 0.5
0
0
0
0
0 0.1667 0
0
0
0
0
1.0
0
0
0
0
0 0.6667
u1
u3
(9-110)
u 11
u 12
u 22
2.75
0.75
0
0
0.866
0.75
8.75 2.1090 0.4472 0.866
0
2.1909
1.0
0
0
0
0.4472
0
1.0
0
0.866 0.866
0
0
1.0
u1
u3
u 11
(9-111)
u 12
u 22
Apply constraint at dof 1:
K ff =
0.5
0
0
0
0 0.1667 0
0
0
0
1.0
0
0
0
0 0.6667
Mf f =
u3
u 11
(9-112)
u 12
u 22
8.75 2.1090 0.4472 0.866

2.1909
1.0
0
0
0.4472
0
1.0
0
0.866
0
0
1.0
u3
u 11
u 12
(9-113)
u 22
Solve the eigenvalue problem:

K ff M ff f = 0 yilelds = 0.0468 0.38 0.856 1.217
(9-114)
Just like the fixed-boundary solution, since all of the modes are retained during Component Modes
Synthesis, the solution does not have any modal truncation and matches the non-superelement solution
exactly.
The resulting residual structure eigenvectors are:
Main Index
CHAPTER 9 447
0.2735
0.2338
0.006
0.0179
f =
0.3085
1.2041
0.0845
0.3541
0.2121
0.5772
0.5634
0.8311
0.344
0.8731
0.8614
0.6585
u3
u 11
(9-115)
u 12
u 22
Physical eigenvectors for the residual structure are:
0
0
0
0
0.27355 0.3085 0.2121 0.344
u1
(9-116)
u3
SUPERELEMENT 1 DATA RECOVERY

The superelement 1 boundary dof are extracted from the residual solution:
b o u n d a r y
0.2735 0.3085 0.2121 0.344

0.2338 1.2041 0.5772 0.8731
0.006 0.0845 0.5634 0.8614
u3
u 11
(9-117)
u 12
Then the internal solution is calculated using the transformation:
= Go a
b o u n d a r y
(9-118)
Numerically:
1.
0
0
1. 0.3651 0.4472
1. 0.5477 0.4472
0.2735 0.3085 0.2121 0.344

0.2338 1.2041 0.5772 0.8731
0.006 0.0845 0.5634 0.8614
(9-119)
which produces the physical eigenvectors for superelement 1.
0.2735 0.3085 0.2121 0.344

0.3616 0.09343 0.2533 0.36
0.3989 0.3889 0.356 0.251
SUPERELMENT 2 DATA RECOVERY

Repeating the process,
Main Index
u3
u4
u5
(9-120)

b o u n d a r y
0
0
0
0
0.2735 0.3085 0.2121 0.344
0.0179 0.3541 0.8311 0.6585
1 0
0
0.5 0.5 0.5773
0.5 0
0
u1
(9-121)
u3
u 22
0
0
0
0
0.27355 0.3085 0.2121 0.344
0.0179 0.3541 0.8311 0.6585
0
0
0
0
0.1471 0.3587 0.37385 0.2083
0.27355 0.3085 0.2121 0.344
(9-122)
u1
(9-123)
u2
u3
The solution for the entire structure is:
F UL LB YH A N D =
0
0.1471
0.2735
0.3616
0.3989
0
0
0
0.3587 0.37385 0.2083
0.3085 0.2121 0.344
0.09343 0.2533
0.36
0.3889 0.356 0.251
u1
u2
u3
(9-124)
u4
u5
which compares to the results from an MSC.Nastran run for this model (/doc/seug/chapter9/simple-freeboundary.bdf)
M S C NA S TR A N =
0
0
0.1471 0.3587
0.2735 0.3085
0.3616 0.09343
0.3989 0.3888
0
0.37385
0.2121
0.2533
0.3559
0
0.2083
0.344
0.3601
0.2510
u1
u2
u3
(9-125)
u4
u5
Mixed-Boundary Dynamic Reduction

MSC.Nastran offers the user the option of combining fixed-boundary (B-Set) and free-free (C-Set)
Component Modes Synthesis. Although the theory is not presented here, example file
/doc/seug/chapter9/simple-mixed-boundary.bdf is available to the user for study.
MHRED Reduction
An alternate reduction method is available to users using free-boundary solutions or mixed-boundary
solutions. This method was developed by Dr. Arya Majed and Ed Henkel and implemented in
Main Index
CHAPTER 9 449
MSC.Nastran Version 2004. For further details, refer to the MSC.Nastran Release Guide Section 3.19
and the Real Eigenvalue Analysis in SubDMAPs SEMR3 and MODERS (Ch. 1) in the MSC Nastran
Reference Manual.
Residual Vectors
During Component Modes Synthesis reduction, it is likely that, for practical models, the combination of
constraint modes and component modes are not sufficient to represent a static deformed shape under the
applied loading. MSC.Nastran uses the Residual Vector technique to add high-frequency vectors so that
the linear combination of static constraint modes + dynamic component modes + residual vectors is
capable of representing the static deformation of the structure for the applied loads. This method is
described in detail in the Modal Augmentation Methods (Ch. 12) in the MSC Nastran Dynamic Analysis
Users Guide.
Main Index

As an illustrative example of the importance of component modes, we will compare the solution modal
solution for the flat plate example shown in Figure 9-3 for a List Superelement (SESET) with and without
component modes synthesis.
Accuracy Improvements with CMS

In this example, the superelement boundary is selected as the two end grids 501 and 502. In the residual
structure, grid 501 will be constrained in all 6 dof and grid 502 will be free; i.e. this will be a cantilever
plate solution.
The baseline solution w/o superelements will be compared to the solution with constraint modes only,
versus constraint modes plus the first 10 component modes. The first 10 flexible modes of the cantilever
solution will be compared.
Baseline Solution w/o Superelements
The baseline solution is prepared as a regular normal modes solution. Since this is a basic modal setup
in Patran, the setup is not shown. The example file is located at c. The first 10 mode shapes are shown
below:
Main Index
CHAPTER 9 451
Figure 9-16
Baseline Cantilever Plate Mode Shapes
The first 10 Eigenvalues are reported in the .f06 file:

BASELINE CANTILEVER PLATE MODAL SOLUTION
APRIL
27, 2011
MD NASTRAN
12/15/10

SUBCASE 1
R E A L
MODE
EXTRACTION
NO.
Main Index
EIGENVALUE
RADIANS
CYCLES
ORDER
GENERALIZED
MASS
GENERALIZED
STIFFNESS
4.024357E+04
2.006080E+02
3.192775E+01
1.000000E+00
4.024357E+04
1.576860E+06
1.255731E+03
1.998557E+02
1.000000E+00
1.576860E+06
3.927420E+06
1.981772E+03
3.154088E+02
1.000000E+00
3.927420E+06
1.235382E+07
3.514801E+03
5.593979E+02
1.000000E+00
1.235382E+07
1.303454E+07
3.610338E+03
5.746031E+02
1.000000E+00
1.303454E+07
4.744861E+07
6.888295E+03
1.096306E+03
1.000000E+00
4.744861E+07
1.183608E+08
1.087938E+04
1.731506E+03
1.000000E+00
1.183608E+08
1.297454E+08
1.139059E+04
1.812868E+03
1.000000E+00
1.297454E+08
1.413472E+08
1.188895E+04
1.892185E+03
1.000000E+00
1.413472E+08
10
10
2.897126E+08
1.702095E+04
2.708968E+03
1.000000E+00
2.897126E+08

Listing 9-10
Baseline Modal Solution
List Superelement
The setup for a dynamic superelement requires both the physical and component modes definition. To
review the List Superelement (SESET) setup for the physical dof, refer to Defining List Superelements
(Ch. 2). To add the component modes, the user must define the Eigensolution parameters with the
EIGRL entry and add dof to store the component modes.
A convenient alternative to defining SPOINT and SEQSET or SEQSET1 entries, is to request that
MSC.Nastran automatically generate the SPOINT and QSET internally. This can be done by specifying
PARAM,AUTQSET,YES. Another semi-automatic method is SENQSET.
SENQSET
Superelement Internal Generalized Degree-of-Freedom
Defines number of internally generated scalar points for superelement dynamic reduction.
Format:
1
SENQSET
SEID
10
10
Example:
1
SENQSET 110
Field
3
45
Contents
SEID
Partitioned superelement identification number. See Remark 3. (Integer > 0 or

Character = ALL)
Number of internally generated scalar points for dynamic reduction generalized

coordinates. (Integer > 0; Default = 0)
In Patran, the modal dof are easily defined using the PARAM,AUTOQSET option as follows:
Main Index
CHAPTER 9 453
Figure 9-17
Defining Superelement Component Modes Automatic QSET in Patran
The resulting bdf file is located at /doc/seug/chapter9/SESET-Modes-With-CMS.bdf . The resulting bdf

file has the appropriate entries as highlighted here:
SOL 103
CEND
TITLE = SESET with CMS Cantilever Plate Modal Solution
ECHO = NONE
PARAM,AUTOQSET,YES
RESVEC = NO
SUBCASE 1
Main Index

SUBTITLE=Cantilever Modes - Baseline

METHOD = 1
SPC = 2
VECTOR(PLOT,SORT1,REAL)=ALL
SPCFORCES(PLOT,SORT1,REAL)=ALL
BEGIN BULK
PARAM
PARAM
EIGRL
POST
PRTMAXIM YES
1
10
MASS
$ Elements and Element Properties for region : shell

PSHELL
.1
$ SE10.10
SESET
10
THRU
205
$ Loads for Load Case : Cantilever

SPCADD
$ Displacement Constraints of Load Set : fixed-501

SPC1
Listing 9-11
123456
501
Component Modes Superelement Example
The SEMAP is similar to the SEMAP for a static solution. The exception is that there are boundary dof
associated with the component modes. When PARAM,AUTOQSET,YES is specified, these dof are not
exposed to the user. However, if the user uses SPOINT and SEQSET entries, the dof will show up in the
SEMAP. MSC.Nastran will first calculate the component modes for the superelement by setting the
boundary dof fixed. In this example the component modes are as follows:
SESET WITH CMS CANTILEVER PLATE MODAL SOLUTION
APRIL
27, 2011
MD NASTRAN
12/15/10
SUPERELEMENT 10
SUBCASE 1
R E A L
MODE
EXTRACTION
NO.
ORDER
Main Index
EIGENVALUE
RADIANS
CYCLES
GENERALIZED
MASS
GENERALIZED
STIFFNESS
1.646070E+06
1.282993E+03
2.041946E+02
1.000000E+00
1.646070E+06
1.249204E+07
3.534408E+03
5.625185E+02
1.000000E+00
1.249204E+07
4.800166E+07
6.928323E+03
1.102677E+03
1.000000E+00
4.800166E+07
5.470990E+07
7.396614E+03
1.177208E+03
1.000000E+00
5.470990E+07
1.312258E+08
1.145538E+04
1.823181E+03
1.000000E+00
1.312258E+08
1.436465E+08
1.198526E+04
1.907514E+03
1.000000E+00
1.436465E+08
2.217674E+08
1.489186E+04
2.370113E+03
1.000000E+00
2.217674E+08
CHAPTER 9 455
2.929962E+08
1.711713E+04
2.724276E+03
1.000000E+00
2.929962E+08
5.099344E+08
2.258173E+04
3.593994E+03
1.000000E+00
5.099344E+08
10
10
5.717190E+08
2.391065E+04
3.805498E+03
1.000000E+00
5.717190E+08
Listing 9-12
Component Modes for Superelement 10
A physical representation of the first 3 component modes is as follows:
Figure 9-18
First 3 Component Modes for List Superelement
The residual structure solution is as follows:

SESET WITH CMS CANTILEVER PLATE MODAL SOLUTION
APRIL
27, 2011
MD NASTRAN
12/15/10
SUPERELEMENT 0
SUBCASE 1
R E A L
MODE
Main Index
EXTRACTION
EIGENVALUE
RADIANS
CYCLES
GENERALIZED
GENERALIZED

NO.
ORDER
MASS
STIFFNESS
4.024365E+04
2.006082E+02
3.192779E+01
1.000000E+00
4.024365E+04
1.576960E+06
1.255771E+03
1.998621E+02
1.000000E+00
1.576960E+06
3.931224E+06
1.982731E+03
3.155615E+02
1.000000E+00
3.931224E+06
1.235836E+07
3.515446E+03
5.595005E+02
1.000000E+00
1.235836E+07
1.304375E+07
3.611614E+03
5.748062E+02
1.000000E+00
1.304375E+07
4.749556E+07
6.891702E+03
1.096848E+03
1.000000E+00
4.749556E+07
1.192018E+08
1.091796E+04
1.737647E+03
1.000000E+00
1.192018E+08
1.299789E+08
1.140083E+04
1.814498E+03
1.000000E+00
1.299789E+08
1.430148E+08
1.195888E+04
1.903314E+03
1.000000E+00
1.430148E+08
10
10
2.904264E+08
1.704190E+04
2.712302E+03
1.000000E+00
2.904264E+08
Listing 9-13
Residual Structure Solution with 10 Superelement Component Modes
If the component modes are eliminated from the solution, only the physical dof will remain. The
resulting bdf file is located at /doc/seug/chapter9/SESET-Modes-NO-CMS.bdf . The resulting modes
are:
SESET WITHOUT CMS CANTILEVER PLATE MODAL SOLUTION
APRIL
27, 2011
MD NASTRAN
12/15/10
SUPERELEMENT 0
SUBCASE 1
R E A L
MODE
EXTRACTION
NO.
ORDER
EIGENVALUE
RADIANS
CYCLES
GENERALIZED
MASS
GENERALIZED
STIFFNESS
4.061991E+04
2.015438E+02
3.207669E+01
1.000000E+00
4.061991E+04
3.872860E+06
1.967958E+03
3.132103E+02
1.000000E+00
3.872860E+06
3.969939E+06
1.992470E+03
3.171115E+02
1.000000E+00
3.969939E+06
1.552354E+07
3.939993E+03
6.270693E+02
1.000000E+00
1.552354E+07
3.594094E+08
1.895810E+04
3.017275E+03
1.000000E+00
3.594094E+08
1.159474E+09
3.405105E+04
5.419392E+03
1.000000E+00
1.159474E+09
Listing 9-14
Residual Structure Solution with No Superelement Component Modes
But the EIGRL requested 10 modes, how come there are only 6? The answer is that after the constraints
are applied to grid 501, there remain only 6 dynamic dof at grid 501. Recall that a dynamic dof must
have mass and that the reduction process will preserve the rigid body mass matrix, therefore there are 3
translational and 3 rotational masses computed at grid 502 as a result of the mass reduction. Furthermore,
investigation of the residual mode shapes reveals that the modes are a linear combination of the constraint
modes in Figure 9-5. More specifically:
Main Index
CHAPTER 9 457
Table 9-1
Relation of Residual Modes to Constraint Modes when Component Modes are

Not Calculated
Residual Mode
Frequency (Hz)
Constraint Mode(s)
Scale Factor(s)
32.1
502-Tz, 502-Ry
-134.29, 17.357
313.2
502-Tz, 502-Ry
-239.94, 132.08
317.1
502-Ty, 502-Rz
-133.64, -17.114
627.1
502-Rx
-347.99
3017.3
502-Ty, 502-Rz
231.44, 128.62
5419.4
502-Tx
-107.52
Finally, a comparison of the Baseline, Non-CMS, and CMS solutions reveals that the CMS solution
closely approximates the Baseline solution, but the Non-CMS solution does inadequate job of
representing the structural modes:
Table 9-2
Comparison of Non-Superelement, List Superelement with CMS, and List

Superelement Without CMS Solutions
Residual
Mode
Baseline
Frequency
SESET CMS
Frequency
SESET Non CMS

Frequency
3.192775E+01
3.192779E+01
3.207669E+01
1.998557E+02
1.998621E+02
3.132103E+02
3.154088E+02
3.155615E+02
3.171115E+02
5.593979E+02
5.595005E+02
6.270693E+02
5.746031E+02
5.748062E+02
3.017275E+03
1.096306E+03
1.096848E+03
5.419392E+03
1.731506E+03
1.737647E+03
1.812868E+03
1.814498E+03
1.892185E+03
1.903314E+03
10
2.708968E+03
2.712302E+03
The CMS solution will improve if more component modes are calculated for the superelement.
Note that when PARAM,AUTOQSET is specified, there is an additional modal solution of the residual
structure that does not include the effects of the upstream superelements. This may be undesirable as it
will add solution time, therefore most applications to practical models use either the SPOINT/SEQSET
or SENQSET method.
Main Index


Throughout this manual several MSC.Nastran Sets were defined during the superelement reduction
process: A-Set, B-Set, C-Set, T-Set, Q-Set, O-Set, V-Set. This section provides a comprehensive
description of the various sets used in the superelement reduction process. This description can also be
found in the Degree-of-Freedom Sets (Ch. 7) in the MSC Nastran Quick Reference Guide.
The full set description can be found in the following figure.
Figure 9-19
MSC.Nastran Degree of Freedom Sets
The superelement reduction is concerned with forming the reduced matrices at the A-Set, i.e.
,
, etc. In order to accomplish this, several auxiliary sets are used. The sets on the left
side of Figure 9-19 are called Mutually Exclusive Set. That is to say, that a dof that is a member of one
mutually exclusive set cannot be a member of another mutually exclusive set.
In addition to the sets above, there are additional sets that are used during the dynamic reduction;
specifically the W-Set and the X-Set. The W-Set is used to identify and remove massless dof from the
problem prior to normal modes calculations. This operation is described in the Real Eigenvalue Analysis
in SubDMAPs SEMR3 and MODERS (Ch. 1) in the MSC Nastran Reference Manual. The Y-Set is used
for Auto-Support operations when residual vectors are applied to a free-free structure. The Z-Set is used
during the Orthogonalization process.
Main Index
CHAPTER 9 459
Table 9-3
Dof Sets Used in Superelement Reduction
Dof Set
Description
Physical dof fixed during Component Modes Synthesis
Physical dof free during Component Modes Synthesis
lm
Lagrange multiplier dof created for Rigid elements by RIGID=LAGRANGE
Physical dof in the Reference Set used to define free body motion.
Modal dof used to store modes in Component Modes Synthesis
l=b+c+lm
Physical dof in the left-over set. This is the lowest level of reduction in standard static
analysis.
t=l+r
Physical dof in the total physical boundary for superelement analysis.
a=t+q
Physical and Modal dof in the analysis set
v=o+c+r
x
Physical dof free to vibrate in component modes synthesis

Physical dof remaining after null masses are removed. This is the lowest level of
reduction in modal analysis.
The l-Set is the left-over set which consists of the B-Set + C-Set + lm-Set. The l-Set is the solution set
for a static solution. The B-Set and C-Set are the physical dof in the Fixed-Boundary and Free-Boundary
Component Modes Synthesis (CMS) calculations defined in this Chapter. The lm-Set are the Lagrange
dof associated with the dependent dof for Rigid Elements (RBE1, RBE2, RBE3, RBAR, RSPLINE)
when RIGID=LAGRANGE is specified in the case control. The use of this set in superelements is
irrelevant, therefore, it is not considered further in this manual. (See Note below regarding Lagrange
dof). The R-Set are the Reference dof defined on SUPORT or SUPORT1 entries. These are used in static
analysis to define inertia relief and in modal analysis to calculate pure rigid body modes.
The user can request output the set definitions to the .f06 file by specifying PARAM,USETPRT and
PARAM,USETSTRi. As an example, the mixed boundary example in Mixed-Boundary Dynamic
Reduction (/doc/seug/chapter9/simple-mixed-boundary.bdf), included the following entries:
PARAM,USETPRT,11
PARAM,USETSTR1,a:b:c:q
PARAM,USETSTR2,v:t
Listing 9-15
Example of USET Print Request
Which produced the following output for superelement 2:

MAY
8, 2011
MD NASTRAN
SUPERELEMENT MODEL 3, MIXED BOUNDARY CMS

U S E T
Main Index
D E F I N I T I O N
12/15/10
SUPERELEMENT 2
T A B L E
SUBCASE 1
( E X T E R N A L
S E Q U E N C E ,
C O L U M N
S O R T )

EXT GP.
DOF
INT DOF
INT GP.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1 -
1-
2-
1 G
3-
4-
5-
6-
2 -
7-
8-
9-
10-
11-
12-
3 -
13-
14-
2 G
3 G
15-
16-
10
10
17-
11
10
11
18-
12
11
21 -
19-
4 S
13
22 -
20-
5 S
14
23 -
21-
6 S
15
12
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------EXT GP.
DOF
---- C O L U M N
INT DOF
INT GP.
T O T A L S ----
Listing 9-16
15
11
12
Example .f06 Output for PARAM, USETPRT
Note that in this example, grid 1, dof 1 is in the B-Set, i.e. fixed for Component Modes Synthesis
Calculations. Grid 2, dof1 is in the V-Set, i.e. this was originally part of the O-Set and is free to vibrate
in Component Modes Synthesis. Grid 3, dof1 is in the C-Set which is also part of the V-Set. The spoints
in this model were all assigned to the Q-Set. The table also provides a list of dof in the T-Set (physical
dof) and A-Set (analysis set). In this case, the dof for grids 1 and 3 are assigned to the T-Set and A-Set
because AUTOSPC is not applied to boundary dof during superelement reduction.
Main Index
CHAPTER 9 461
Note:
Lagrange Rigid Element Processing. Typically, the dependent dof associated with RBEs
are placed in the mr set, while the dependent dof associated with MPCs are placed in the
mp set; which collectively define the M-Set. However, if the user specifies
RIGID=LAGRAN in the case control, the dependent dof are carried into the ASET as part
of the lm dof. Currently the MSC.Nastran processing does not handle the
RIGID=LAGRAN for superelements and the following message will appear in the .f06
output:
** Warning ** Rigid elements for the upstream superelements have been moved to the
residual. Currently this is a restriction which may be relaxed in the future. This action is
necessary when RIGID=LAGRAN is specified or implied and rigid elements are present
in upstream superelements.
Typically this leads to subsequent FATAL messages because the grids attaching to the RBE
are not in the residual structure.
A slightly different path is taken when an external superelement is reduced. This is not
legal and a FATAL message will ensue:
*** USER FATAL MESSAGE 4349 (GP4)
THERE ARE LAGRANGE RIGID ELEMENTS IN THE MODEL (RBAR, RBE1, RBE2,
RBE3, RJOINT, RROD, RPRPLT) AND AN EXTERNAL SUPERELEMENT GENERATION
REQUEST (EXTSEOUT OR PARAM,EXTOUT).
USER INFORMATION: AN EXTERNAL SUPERELEMENT (CREATED WITH THE

EXTSEOUT CASE CONTROL COMMAND OR THE EXTOUT PARAMETER)
CANNOT CONTAIN LAGRANGE RIGID ELEMENTS.
Therefore, the remainder of this guide will NOT be concerned with RIGID=LAGRAN
processing and consider that all dependent dof belong to the M-Set (either the mr or
mp set).
1.
Main Index

Main Index
Chapter 10: Input and Output for Dynamic Reduction
10
Main Index
Input and Output for Dynamic

Reduction
Introduction

Introduction
Introduction
This chapter describes the controls for the dynamic processing of superelements, along with the output
associated with dynamic reduction.
In CHAPTER 9, a description of the process and equations required to perform dynamic reduction for
fixed-boundary, free-boundary, and mixed-boundary Component Modes Synthesis was presented. This
chapter will provide more depth in the application of the various methods along with a description of the
output.
The first section of this chapter describes the Case Control commands associated with dynamic
reduction. The Case Control commands are the same whether you are using PARTs or main bulk data
List superelements.
The remaining sections provide detailed examples for Single-Level and Multi-Level dynamic reduction.
Dynamic reduction is invoked when both the necessary Case Control commands and Bulk Data entries
are present. If either set of information is missing, a static reduction will be performed.
Main Index
CHAPTER 10 465

The Case Control for dynamic reduction is an extension of the Case Control in static analysis. The reader
is encouraged to review Case Control (Ch. 4), [for static analysis] before continuing with this section.
In particular, Expanded Case Control (Ch. 4) is particularly important in dynamic analysis because most
practical applications in dynamic superelement analysis will use expanded Case Control.
The Case Control commands SEMG, SELG, SEKR, SELR, SEMR, SEALL, and SEDR are applicable
in both static and dynamic analysis. A brief summary of these commands is available in Table 4-8 and
in the Superelement Control (Ch. 4) in the MSC Nastran Quick Reference Guide. A more detailed
description of each command is found in the specific Case Control entries found in the MSC.Nastran
Quick Reference Guide, therefore, they will not be discussed further in this chapter. The SEEXCLUDE
and SEFINAL commands are also the same for statics and dynamics and are described in Case Control
(Ch. 4) [for static analysis].
The most used Case Control command for dynamic analysis is the SUPER command. This was also
described in detail in The SUPER Command (Ch. 4) and the format is repeated here because of its
importance to dynamic analysis and its extensive use in this chapter.
SUPER
Superelement Subcase Assignment
Assigns a subcase(s) to a superelement or set of superelements.

Format:
SUPER =
Examples:
SUPER=17,3
SUPER=15
SUPER=ALL
Main Index
ALL
setid
,lseqid
seid
(10-1)

Field
Contents
seid
Superelement identification number (Integer > 0).
ALL
The subcase is assigned to all superelements and all loading conditions (Default).
setid
Set identification number of a previously appearing SET command. The subcase is

assigned to all superelements with identification numbers that appear on this SET
command (Integer > 0).
lseqid
Load sequence number (Integer > 0; Default=1).
Note that the lseqid is relevant only in static analysis and frequency response analysis when there are
multiple loading conditions. This Chapter concentrates on dynamic reduction, therefore, there are no
examples using lseqid in this Chapter.
The only other case control command required for dynamic reduction is the METHOD entry. The
METHOD selects the ID of either an EIGR or EIGRL bulk data entry. The EIGR and EIGRL entries
define parameters for the Eigenvalue extraction calculations. Refer to the MSC.Nastran Dynamics
Users Guide, Chapter 3 for more details on these entries and their usage.
The EXTSEOUT Case Control entry is used to export the reduced superelement matrices for use in
external superelement analysis. The general usage of EXTSEOUT (or PARAM,EXTOUT) for dynamic
analysis is the same as in static analysis as described in Defining and Attaching External Superelements
(Ch. 2), and Single-Level Analysis Using PART Superelements (Ch. 3). However, in external
superelement analysis in dynamic reduction the modal (or generalized) dof must be defined as part of the
Q-Set. MSC.Nastran offers several methods of specifying the Q-Set dof as follows:
Table 10-1
Methods for Defining Q-Set dof for Component Modes Synthesis

Method
Convenience
Comments
SPOINT + SEQSET / SEQSET1
Manual Definition
For use with List (SESET) Superelements.

Offers maximum control over SPOINT /
Q-Set dof definition
SPOINT + QSET / QSET1
Manual Definition
For use with PART and External

Superelements. Offers maximum control
over SPOINT / Q-Set dof definition
SENQSET
Semi-Automatic
For use with PART Superelements.

Allows the user to specify the number of
Q-Set without reference to SPOINTs
Fully Automatic
Fully automatic definition of Q-Set dof in

all Superelement types. After the number
of component modes are determined, the
program generates internal dof for the QSet. Component Modes Synthesis will be
performed on the Residual structure.
PARAM,AUTOQSET,YES
Main Index
CHAPTER 10 467
In static reduction, only the stiffness and loads are required, however, in dynamic reduction the mass is
required. Additional reduced matrices in external superelements for dynamic analysis include the
damping (BAA), and material damping (K4AA).
Main Index


Just as in static single-level superelement analysis, the dynamic single-level superelement analysis is
processed so that the superelements attach directly to the residual structure. Therefore, along with the
physical dof, the component modes dof are passed to the residual structure for the system solution.
Figure 10-1
Schematic Representation of Single-Level Superelement Analysis
Just as in static analysis, the boundary dof are exterior to the superelement and interior to the residual
structure. In statics, the boundary dof included physical dof only. However, in dynamic analysis the
component modes dof must be accounted for. As described in CHAPTER 9, the component modes are
designated as Q-Set dof by the user. These Q-Set dof are part of the superelement A-Set and therefore,
the modal dof in single-level superelement analysis are exterior to the superelement and interior to the
residual structure.
The following subsections demonstrate how to define the Case Control and Q-Set dof for dynamic
superelement reduction using a simple model. These are intended to be boilerplate examples that users
can modify and adapt to their specific applications.
The examples in this Chapter will use the same example defined in Simple Example using Cantilever
Plate (Ch. 2). The Superelements, grids, and elements for this example are as follows:
Main Index
CHAPTER 10 469
Figure 10-2
Cantilever Plate Model Used in Dynamic Superelement Examples
The non-superelement solution for this model is located at /doc/seug/chapter10/cantileverbeam/baseline/modes.bdf. The basic bulk data (grids, elements, materials) are the same as the example
described in Simple Example using Cantilever Plate (Ch. 2); the entries required for a dynamic solution
are highlighted.
SOL 103
CEND
TITLE = Baseline modal solution
ECHO = NONE
RESVEC = YES
SUBCASE 1
SUBTITLE=Default
METHOD = 1
SPC = 2
BEGIN BULK
PARAM
PARAM
EIGRL
POST
-1
PRTMAXIM YES
1
Listing 10-1
10
MASS
Entries Required for Modal Analysis
Note that residual vectors are not required for this solution, but they have been calculated. For more
information on residual vectors, refer to the Residual Vector (Modal Augmentation) (Ch. 7) in the MSC
Nastran Dynamic Analysis Users Guide.
Main Index

For comparison purposes, the Eigenvalue solution for the first 10 modes is:
BASELINE MODAL SOLUTION
MAY
12, 2011
MSC NASTRAN
12/15/10

SUBCASE 1
R E A L
(BEFORE AUGMENTATION OF RESIDUAL VECTORS)

MODE
EXTRACTION
NO.
ORDER
EIGENVALUE
RADIANS
CYCLES
GENERALIZED
MASS
GENERALIZED
STIFFNESS
3.985089E+04
1.996269E+02
3.177160E+01
1.000000E+00
3.985089E+04
1.533628E+06
1.238397E+03
1.970970E+02
1.000000E+00
1.533628E+06
3.876550E+06
1.968896E+03
3.133595E+02
1.000000E+00
3.876550E+06
5.065938E+06
2.250764E+03
3.582202E+02
1.000000E+00
5.065938E+06
1.184051E+07
3.441004E+03
5.476528E+02
1.000000E+00
1.184051E+07
4.487429E+07
6.698827E+03
1.066151E+03
1.000000E+00
4.487429E+07
4.523558E+07
6.725740E+03
1.070435E+03
1.000000E+00
4.523558E+07
1.212137E+08
1.100971E+04
1.752250E+03
1.000000E+00
1.212137E+08
1.243649E+08
1.115190E+04
1.774880E+03
1.000000E+00
1.243649E+08
10
10
1.352188E+08
1.162836E+04
1.850711E+03
1.000000E+00
1.352188E+08
Listing 10-2
Baseline Eigenvalue Solution for Cantilever Plate Model
List Superelements
The examples in this section are for dynamic reduction of list (SESET) superelements.
Defining Physical Boundary and Modal Dof
The physical dof for List superelement dynamic reduction are defined the same way they are defined for
superelement static reduction. For a review of defining physical dof, refer to Defining List Superelements
(Ch. 2). As a summary, the following bulk data entries can be used:
Table 10-2
Summary of Bulk Data Entries that Define Physical Grids for a Superelement
Entry
Comment
SESET
Defines the interior grids for a superelement
GRID SEID field
Defines interior grid points for a superelement
SEELT
With BEGIN BULK defines the superelement ID assignment of

boundary elements
SEELT
With BEGIN SUPER defines all elements within a superelement
The partitioning of the superelements is described in detail in Superelement Partitioning (Ch. 2).
Main Index
CHAPTER 10 471
Example Cantilever Plate

The following sections demonstrate the definitions required to perform modal analysis of List
Superelements using fixed-boundary, free-free boundary, and mixed boundary solutions. In each case
the superelement interior physical grids are defined exactly the way they are defined for static analysis.
These details are defined in detail in Demonstration of Defining Interior Points in Patran (Ch. 2), and
therefore, will not be duplicated here. Instead, these sections will concentrate on the additional steps
required to define the input associated with Component Modes Synthesis.
Fixed-Boundary Component Modes Synthesis
AUTOQSET METHOD
Patran supports the fixed-boundary Component Modes Synthesis formulation for modal solutions with
the PARAM,AUTOQSET,YES technique. To select this method, the user can select the Calculate
Component Modes (AUTOQSET) button as shown below.
Figure 10-3
Main Index
Example of Selecting the AUTOQSET Method in Patran

The associated Superelement and Component Modes Synthesis entries are shown in the following listing
(ref /doc/seug/chapter10/cantilever-beam/seset/modes.bdf):
SOL 103
CEND
TITLE = List Superelement (SESET) Solution
LABEL = AUTOQSET Method
ECHO = NONE
PARAM,AUTOQSET,YES
RESVEC = YES
SUBCASE 1
SUBTITLE=Default
METHOD = 1
SPC = 2
BEGIN BULK
PARAM
PARAM
POST
-1
PRTMAXIM YES
EIGRL
10
MASS
$ Tip.10
SESET
10
108
THRU
111
SESET
10
208
THRU
211
20
101
102
103
$ Base.20
SESET
Listing 10-3
201
202
203
Input File (partial) for AUTOQSET Method
For the AUTOQSET method, the SEMAP does not contain any information about the Q-Set modal dof
for each superelement because they are not generated or assigned until after the Component Modes
Synthesis calculation is complete.
LIST SUPERELEMENT (SESET) SOLUTION
MAY
12, 2011
MSC NASTRAN
12/15/10
PAGE

AUTOQSET METHOD
SUPERELEMENT
10

INDEX
-1-
-2-
108
109
-3-
-4-
110
111
SUPERELEMENT
-6-
-7-
-8-
208
209
210
211
-9-
8 )
-10-
10
Main Index
-5-
2 )
CHAPTER 10 473
INDEX
-1-
-2-
107
207
-3-
-4-
SUPERELEMENT
-5-
-1-
-2-
-3-
-4-
10
-7-
-8-
-9-
-10-
10

INDEX
-6-

-5-
-6-
-7-
-8-
4 )
-9-
-10-
SUPERELEMENT
20

INDEX
-1-
-2-
101
102
-3-
-4-
103
201
SUPERELEMENT
-6-
202
203
-1-
-2-
104
204
-3-
-5-
-1-
-2-
-3-
6 )
-9-
-10-
-6-
-7-
-8-
-9-
2 )
-10-
20

INDEX
-8-
-4-
SUPERELEMENT
-7-
20

INDEX
-5-
-4-

-5-
-6-
-7-
-8-
3 )
-9-
-10-
SUPERELEMENT

INDEX
-1-
-2-
104
105
-3-
-4-
106
107
SUPERELEMENT
-6-
-7-
-8-
204
205
206
207
-1-
Listing 10-4
-2-
-3-
-4-
8 )
-9-
-10-

INDEX
-5-

-5-
-6-
-7-
-8-
3 )
-9-
-10-
SEMAP for List Superelement AUTOQSET Method
The Component Modes Synthesis processing produces a modal solution for each fixed-boundary
superelement. These Q-Set dof are automatically carried down to the residual solution.
MAY
MSC NASTRAN
12/15/10
SUPERELEMENT 10
AUTOQSET METHOD
SUBCASE 1
R E A L
Main Index
12, 2011

(AFTER AUGMENTATION OF RESIDUAL VECTORS)

MODE
EXTRACTION
NO.
ORDER
EIGENVALUE
RADIANS
CYCLES
GENERALIZED
GENERALIZED
MASS
STIFFNESS
1.506281E+06
1.227306E+03
1.953318E+02
1.000000E+00
1.506281E+06
3.384791E+07
5.817896E+03
9.259468E+02
1.000000E+00
3.384791E+07
5.259718E+07
7.252392E+03
1.154254E+03
1.000000E+00
5.259718E+07
1.331114E+08
1.153739E+04
1.836233E+03
1.000000E+00
1.331114E+08
2.981700E+08
1.726760E+04
2.748224E+03
1.000000E+00
2.981700E+08
3.776630E+08
1.943355E+04
3.092946E+03
1.000000E+00
3.776630E+08
7.868719E+08
2.805124E+04
4.464493E+03
1.000000E+00
7.868719E+08
1.176342E+09
3.429784E+04
5.458670E+03
1.000000E+00
1.176342E+09
3.065455E+09
5.536655E+04
8.811859E+03
1.000000E+00
3.065455E+09
10
10
3.264128E+09
5.713255E+04
9.092927E+03
1.000000E+00
3.264128E+09
11
11
6.010233E+09
7.752570E+04
1.233860E+04
1.000000E+00
6.010233E+09
12
12
1.552301E+10
1.245914E+05
1.982933E+04
1.000000E+00
1.552301E+10
13
13
4.541589E+10
2.131100E+05
3.391752E+04
1.000000E+00
4.541589E+10
MAY
12, 2011
MSC NASTRAN
12/15/10
SUPERELEMENT 20
AUTOQSET METHOD
SUBCASE 1
R E A L

MODE
EXTRACTION
NO.
ORDER
EIGENVALUE
RADIANS
CYCLES
GENERALIZED
MASS
GENERALIZED
STIFFNESS
2.113386E+08
1.453749E+04
2.313713E+03
1.000000E+00
2.113386E+08
3.167098E+08
1.779634E+04
2.832376E+03
1.000000E+00
3.167098E+08
1.145855E+09
3.385048E+04
5.387471E+03
1.000000E+00
1.145855E+09
9.807771E+09
9.903419E+04
1.576178E+04
1.000000E+00
9.807771E+09
1.529802E+10
1.236851E+05
1.968510E+04
1.000000E+00
1.529802E+10
3.483048E+10
1.866292E+05
2.970297E+04
1.000000E+00
3.483048E+10
3.864021E+10
1.965711E+05
3.128527E+04
1.000000E+00
3.864021E+10
5.855620E+10
2.419839E+05
3.851293E+04
1.000000E+00
5.855620E+10
6.722251E+10
2.592730E+05
4.126459E+04
1.000000E+00
6.722251E+10
10
10
8.492655E+10
2.914216E+05
4.638119E+04
1.000000E+00
8.492655E+10
^^^
^^^ USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 9037 (RESLOAD )
^^^ THE RESIDUAL VECTOR LOADS AND INITIAL CONDITIONS
ARE NOT LINEARLY INDEPENDENT WITH MODAL VECTORS OR
NO RESIDUAL VECTOR LOADS AND INITIAL CONDITIONS WERE FOUND AFTER FILTERING AND SWEEPING.
^^^ USER INFORMATION:
RESIDUAL VECTORS WILL NOT
Main Index
BE ADDED TO THE MODAL VECTORS.
MAY
12, 2011
MSC NASTRAN
12/15/10
CHAPTER 10 475
SUPERELEMENT 0
AUTOQSET METHOD
SUBCASE 1
R E A L

MODE
EXTRACTION
NO.
ORDER
EIGENVALUE
RADIANS
CYCLES
GENERALIZED
GENERALIZED
MASS
STIFFNESS
4.060261E+04
2.015009E+02
3.206986E+01
1.000000E+00
4.060261E+04
1.997386E+06
1.413289E+03
2.249320E+02
1.000000E+00
1.997386E+06
3.955553E+06
1.988857E+03
3.165365E+02
1.000000E+00
3.955553E+06
5.513270E+06
2.348035E+03
3.737014E+02
1.000000E+00
5.513270E+06
2.525060E+07
5.024998E+03
7.997532E+02
1.000000E+00
2.525060E+07
7.125292E+07
8.441145E+03
1.343450E+03
1.000000E+00
7.125292E+07
1.666736E+08
1.291021E+04
2.054724E+03
1.000000E+00
1.666736E+08
1.776582E+08
1.332885E+04
2.121352E+03
1.000000E+00
1.776582E+08
2.846538E+08
1.687169E+04
2.685212E+03
1.000000E+00
2.846538E+08
10
10
8.146163E+08
2.854148E+04
4.542518E+03
1.000000E+00
8.146163E+08
11
11
8.285748E+08
2.878497E+04
4.581271E+03
1.000000E+00
8.285748E+08
12
12
1.051970E+09
3.243408E+04
5.162044E+03
1.000000E+00
1.051970E+09
13
13
1.903192E+09
4.362559E+04
6.943228E+03
1.000000E+00
1.903192E+09
14
14
2.225433E+09
4.717449E+04
7.508053E+03
1.000000E+00
2.225433E+09
15
15
9.740678E+09
9.869488E+04
1.570778E+04
1.000000E+00
9.740678E+09
MAY
12, 2011
MSC NASTRAN
12/15/10
SUPERELEMENT 0
AUTOQSET METHOD
SUBCASE 1
R E A L

MODE
EXTRACTION
NO.
ORDER
Main Index
EIGENVALUE
RADIANS
CYCLES
GENERALIZED
MASS
GENERALIZED
STIFFNESS
3.985089E+04
1.996269E+02
3.177160E+01
1.000000E+00
3.985089E+04
1.533628E+06
1.238397E+03
1.970970E+02
1.000000E+00
1.533628E+06
3.876551E+06
1.968896E+03
3.133595E+02
1.000000E+00
3.876551E+06
5.065942E+06
2.250765E+03
3.582203E+02
1.000000E+00
5.065942E+06
1.184070E+07
3.441031E+03
5.476571E+02
1.000000E+00
1.184070E+07
4.488045E+07
6.699287E+03
1.066225E+03
1.000000E+00
4.488045E+07
4.525008E+07
6.726818E+03
1.070606E+03
1.000000E+00
4.525008E+07
1.212216E+08
1.101007E+04
1.752307E+03
1.000000E+00
1.212216E+08
1.246714E+08
1.116563E+04
1.777066E+03
1.000000E+00
1.246714E+08
10
10
1.352230E+08
1.162854E+04
1.850740E+03
1.000000E+00
1.352230E+08
11
11
2.732663E+08
1.653077E+04
2.630954E+03
1.000000E+00
2.732663E+08
12
12
3.360361E+08
1.833129E+04
2.917515E+03
1.000000E+00
3.360361E+08
13
13
5.672505E+08
2.381702E+04
3.790597E+03
1.000000E+00
5.672505E+08

14
14
9.171191E+08
3.028397E+04
4.819844E+03
1.000000E+00
9.171191E+08
15
15
9.621873E+08
3.101914E+04
4.936850E+03
1.000000E+00
9.621873E+08
16
16
3.295050E+09
5.740253E+04
9.135896E+03
1.000000E+00
3.295050E+09
Listing 10-5
Component Modes and Residual Solution for AUTOQSET Method
Note that there are two solutions for the residual structure. The first residual solution is for the residual
structure including the upstream physical dof only and Q-Set dof for the residual are generated for these
dof. The second residual solution is for the residual structure including all component modes. The first
10 modes of the final residual solution track the non-superelement solution in Listing 10-2 with only
minor differences in the frequencies in the higher frequencies. Note that the first 10 modes of the first
residual solution do not track the non-superelement solution very well this is the solution if there were
no components calculated, thus reinforcing the concept that component modes are required for a good
dynamic solution.
In this case, the OP2 file was the output format requested when reading the OP2 into Patran, the mode
shape of the assembled solution is displayed properly.
Figure 10-4
Mode 1 of Superelement Solution as Displayed in Patran
SENQSET METHOD
The SENQSET method is not supported for List Superelements (SESET).
SPOINT / SEQSET1 METHOD
The maximum flexibility in defining the Q-Set for Component Modes Synthesis is with the SPOINT /
SEQSET1 method. In this method, the user defines the dof with the SPOINT entry and assigns them to
the Q-Set with the SEQSET1 entry (SEQSET could also be used, but SEQSET1 is the most common
method because of its convenient input format).
Since Patran does not support the SPOINT / SEQSET1 method directly, the user can specify the SPOINT
/ SEQSET1 entries in Direct Text Input as shown below:
Main Index
CHAPTER 10 477
Figure 10-5
Example of Defining the SPOINT / SEQSET1 Method in Patran
In this case, the number of modes requested is 10. The reason that 16 Q-Set dof are allocated for each
superelement is because there are 6 dof added for Residual Vectors. Since there are no explicit static
loads, there could be a possibility of only 6 residual vectors associated with inertia loads. Refer to the
RESVEC Case Control command and the Residual Vector (Modal Augmentation) (Ch. 7) in the MSC
Nastran Dynamic Analysis Users Guide for more details on residual vectors. The Direct Text Input for
SPOINT / SEQSET1 are added to the input file as shown here (ref /doc/seug/chapter10/cantileverbeam/seset/modes2.bdf):
SOL 103
CEND
Main Index

LABEL = SPOINT / SEQSET1 Method

ECHO = NONE
RESVEC = YES
SUBCASE 1
SUBTITLE=Default
METHOD = 1
SPC = 2
BEGIN BULK
SPOINT,1001,thru,1016
SEQSET1,10,0,1001,thru,1016
SEQSET1,20,0,2001,thru,2016
Listing 10-6
Input File (partial) for SPOINT / SEQSET1 Method
For the SPOINT / SEQSET1 method, the SEMAP reflects the dof as shown below.
MAY
12, 2011
MSC NASTRAN
12/15/10
PAGE

SUPERELEMENT
10

INDEX
-1-
-2-
108
109
-3-
-4-
110
111
SUPERELEMENT
-5-
-6-
-7-
-8-
208
209
210
211
-1-
-2-
-3-
-4-

-5-
-6-
-7-
-9-
-10-
1007
1008
107
207
1001
1002
1003
1004
1005
1006
1009
1010
1011
1012
1013
1014
1015
1016
10

INDEX
-1-
-2-
-3-
-4-
10
18 )
-8-
11
SUPERELEMENT
-10-
10

INDEX
8 )
-9-

-5-
-6-
-7-
-8-
4 )
-9-
-10-

Main Index
MAY
12, 2011
MSC NASTRAN
12/15/10
PAGE
CHAPTER 10 479
SUPERELEMENT
20

INDEX
-1-
-2-
101
102
-3-
-4-
103
201
SUPERELEMENT
-5-
-6-
202
203
-1-
-8-
6 )
-9-
-10-
20

INDEX
-7-
18 )
-2-
-3-
-4-
-5-
-6-
-7-
-8-
-9-
-10-
2007
2008
104
204
2001
2002
2003
2004
2005
2006
11
2009
2010
2011
2012
2013
2014
2015
2016
SUPERELEMENT
20

INDEX
-1-
-2-
-3-
-4-

-5-
-6-
-7-
-8-
3 )
-9-
-10-
MAY
12, 2011
MSC NASTRAN
12/15/10
PAGE

SUPERELEMENT

INDEX
-1-
-2-
-3-
-4-
-5-

-6-
-7-
40 )
-8-
-9-
-10-
104
105
106
107
204
205
206
207
1001
1002
11
1003
1004
1005
1006
1007
1008
1009
1010
1011
1012
21
1013
1014
1015
1016
2001
2002
2003
2004
2005
2006
31
2007
2008
2009
2010
2011
2012
2013
2014
2015
2016
SUPERELEMENT

INDEX
-1-
-2-
-3-
Listing 10-7
-4-

-5-
-6-
-7-
-8-
3 )
-9-
-10-
SEMAP for SPOINT / SEQSET1 Method
The results of the component modes calculations for the upstream superelements are exactly the same as
the results of the AUTOQSET method. The residual structure, however, does not undergo Component
Modes Synthesis calculations and there is only one set of before and after modal augmentation
Eigenvalues. As with the AUTOQSET method, the first 10 modes of the final residual solution for the
SPOINT / SENQSET1 method track the non-superelement solution in Listing 10-2 with only minor
differences in the frequencies in the higher frequencies.
Main Index

EXPANDED CASE CONTROL WITH SPOINT / SENQSET1 METHOD

As with statics, Patran exports condensed case control for dynamic superelements. MSC.Nastran offers
the user more control over superelement reduction by using expanded case control. The reader is
encouraged to review Expanded Case Control (Ch. 4) [for statics]. In dynamic superelement reduction
expanded Case Control can be used to control the number of modes or frequency cutoff for each
superelement by changing the METHOD for each superelement. Just as in statics, expanded Case
Control can also be used to specify PARAM entries that are desired for each individual superelement
processing. As an example, the fixed-boundary solution above is reworked by specifying different modal
extraction methods for each superelement. Note that the number of Q-Set points is adjusted accordingly.
The modified input file as shown here (ref /doc/seug/chapter10/ cantilever-beam/seset/modes2e.bdf)
LABEL = SPOINT / SEQSET1 Method, Expanded Case Control
ECHO = NONE
RESVEC = YES
$ output request is valid for all superelements
SUBCASE 10
super = 10
SUBTITLE=CMS of SEID 10
METHOD = 10
SUBCASE 20
super = 20
METHOD = 20
$ only superelement 20 has constraints
SPC = 2
SUBCASE 30
super = 0
SUBTITLE=Solution of Residual
METHOD = 30

BEGIN BULK
SEQSET1,10,0,1001,thru,1021
SEQSET1,20,0,2001,thru,2018
$ specify a different number of extraction modes for each superelement
Main Index
CHAPTER 10 481
EIGRL
10
15
MASS
EIGRL
20
12
MASS
EIGRL
30
10
MASS
Listing 10-8
Expanded Case Control for SPOINT / SENQSET1 Method
In this case, there is no appreciable change in the residual solution indicating that there is little effect of
modal truncation.
Free-Free Component Modes Synthesis
As discussed in Section 10.3.1.2.1, Patran supports a fixed-boundary solution only. That is to say, the
physical boundary dof are automatically assigned to the B-Set. In order to re-assign the physical
boundary dof to the C-Set, the user must manually re-assign them with the SECSET or SECSET1
entries. Free-Boundary Dynamic Reduction (Ch. 9) discusses the theory and provides a manual solution
for free-free Component Modes Synthesis.
SECSET / SECSET1
Free Boundary Degree-of-Freedom
Defines boundary degrees-of-freedom to be free (c-set) during generalized dynamic reduction or

component mode synthesis calculations.
Formats:
1
SECSET
SEID
G1
C1
G2
C2
G3
C3
SECSET1
SEID
G1
G2
G3
G4
G5
G7
G8
G9
-etc.-
9
G6
Examples:
Main Index
SECSET
124
23
15
SECSET1
135
14
23
24
122
127
25
10

Field
Contents
SEID
Superelement identification number. (Integer > 0)
C, Ci
Component numbers of degree-of-freedoms. (Any unique combination of the

Integers 1 through 6 with no embedded blanks for grid points; Integer 0 or blank for
scalar points.)
Gi
Grid or scalar point identification number. (Integer > 0)
Note:
The AUTOQSET method is incompatible with free-free Component Modes Synthesis. If

boundary dof are placed in the C-Set, the following error will be issued
^^^
^^^ USER
FATAL
^^^ PARAM,AUTOQSET,YES IS REQUESTED IN THE PRESENCE OF SUPERELEMENTS WITH SECSETI OR SESUP BULK DATA
ENTRIES OR PART SUPERELEMENTS WITH CSETI,
BNDFREEI OR SUPORTI ENTRIES.
^^^
Listing 10-9
Fatal Message Issued When AUTOQSET and C-Set are Specified
Therefore, for List Superelements with any boundary dof specified as free for Component Modes
Synthesis, the SPOINT / SEQSET1 method must be used.
Demonstration of Defining Interior Points in Patran (Ch. 2) demonstrates how to create the physical dof
for a superelement based on Patran Groups. Patran will automatically determine the boundary grids
based on the element connectivity. In order to perform a free-free Component Modes Synthesis, these
boundary grids must be placed in the C-Set. Patran provides a convenient method of determining the
boundary grids via the Select Boundary Nodes form as shown here.
Main Index
CHAPTER 10 483
Figure 10-6
Showing Boundary Grids in Patran
For List Superelements (SESET), the user can place these grids / dof into the C-Set with the SECSET1
when creating the analysis job via direct text input.
Main Index

Figure 10-7
Defining SECSET1 in Patran for List Superelements
The resulting input file is shown here with the SECSET1 entries highlighted (ref /doc/seug/chapter10/
cantilever-beam/seset/modes2-f.bdf):
SOL 103
CEND
LABEL = SPOINT / SEQSET1 Method
ECHO = NONE
RESVEC = YES
SUBCASE 1
SUBTITLE=Default
METHOD = 1
SPC = 2
BEGIN BULK
Main Index
CHAPTER 10 485
SEQSET1,10,0,1001,thru,1016
SEQSET1,20,0,2001,thru,2016
$ place boundary in C-Set
SECSET1,10,123456,107,207
SECSET1,20,123456,104,204
Listing 10-10
Input File (partial) with SECSET1 Entries
The SEMAP does not change from the one shown in Listing 10-7 because the C-Set does not change the
physical boundary dof. The C-Set does, however, change the solution by placing the boundary dof into
the V-Set. Recall from the description of MSC.Nastran Sets, in Nastran Set Definitions The USET
Table (Ch. 9), that the V-Set defines the physical dof that are free to vibrate during Component Modes
Synthesis. Of course, this affects the component modes calculated for each superelement as shown
below.
MAY
13, 2011
MSC NASTRAN
12/15/10
SUPERELEMENT 10
SPOINT / SEQSET1 METHOD WITH C-SET
SUBCASE 1
R E A L

MODE
EXTRACTION
NO.
ORDER
EIGENVALUE
RADIANS
CYCLES
GENERALIZED
GENERALIZED
MASS
STIFFNESS
-8.791685E-06
2.965078E-03
4.719067E-04
1.000000E+00
-8.791685E-06
-4.172325E-06
2.042627E-03
3.250942E-04
1.000000E+00
-4.172325E-06
4.202127E-06
2.049909E-03
3.262532E-04
1.000000E+00
4.202127E-06
4.440546E-06
2.107260E-03
3.353809E-04
1.000000E+00
4.440546E-06
4.753470E-06
2.180245E-03
3.469968E-04
1.000000E+00
4.753470E-06
1.049042E-05
3.238891E-03
5.154856E-04
1.000000E+00
1.049042E-05
4.536248E+07
6.735167E+03
1.071935E+03
1.000000E+00
4.536248E+07
1.172746E+08
1.082934E+04
1.723543E+03
1.000000E+00
1.172746E+08
2.994234E+08
1.730386E+04
2.753994E+03
1.000000E+00
2.994234E+08
10
10
4.257892E+08
2.063466E+04
3.284108E+03
1.000000E+00
4.257892E+08
MAY
MSC NASTRAN
12/15/10
SUPERELEMENT 20
SUBCASE 1
R E A L
Main Index
13, 2011

MODE
EXTRACTION
NO.
ORDER
EIGENVALUE
RADIANS
CYCLES
GENERALIZED
GENERALIZED
MASS
STIFFNESS
4.594047E+06
2.143373E+03
3.411284E+02
1.000000E+00
4.594047E+06
6.219975E+07
7.886682E+03
1.255204E+03
1.000000E+00
6.219975E+07
1.489042E+08
1.220263E+04
1.942109E+03
1.000000E+00
1.489042E+08
3.783261E+08
1.945061E+04
3.095660E+03
1.000000E+00
3.783261E+08
5.401025E+08
2.324011E+04
3.698778E+03
1.000000E+00
5.401025E+08
9.494821E+08
3.081367E+04
4.904147E+03
1.000000E+00
9.494821E+08
2.000750E+09
4.472974E+04
7.118959E+03
1.000000E+00
2.000750E+09
6.904783E+09
8.309502E+04
1.322498E+04
1.000000E+00
6.904783E+09
1.048266E+10
1.023849E+05
1.629506E+04
1.000000E+00
1.048266E+10
10
10
3.013517E+10
1.735948E+05
2.762848E+04
1.000000E+00
3.013517E+10
11
11
5.496186E+10
2.344395E+05
3.731220E+04
1.000000E+00
5.496186E+10
12
12
6.854768E+10
2.618161E+05
4.166933E+04
1.000000E+00
6.854768E+10
13
13
8.205459E+10
2.864517E+05
4.559021E+04
1.000000E+00
8.205459E+10
MAY
13, 2011
MSC NASTRAN
12/15/10
SUPERELEMENT 0
SUBCASE 1
R E A L

MODE
EXTRACTION
NO.
ORDER
EIGENVALUE
RADIANS
CYCLES
GENERALIZED
MASS
GENERALIZED
STIFFNESS
4.013306E+04
2.003324E+02
3.188389E+01
1.000000E+00
4.013306E+04
1.640732E+06
1.280910E+03
2.038632E+02
1.000000E+00
1.640732E+06
3.955552E+06
1.988857E+03
3.165364E+02
1.000000E+00
3.955552E+06
5.091842E+06
2.256511E+03
3.591349E+02
1.000000E+00
5.091842E+06
1.233339E+07
3.511893E+03
5.589351E+02
1.000000E+00
1.233339E+07
4.581940E+07
6.769002E+03
1.077320E+03
1.000000E+00
4.581940E+07
4.598342E+07
6.781108E+03
1.079247E+03
1.000000E+00
4.598342E+07
1.060017E+08
1.029571E+04
1.638613E+03
1.000000E+00
1.060017E+08
1.243820E+08
1.115267E+04
1.775002E+03
1.000000E+00
1.243820E+08
10
10
1.336136E+08
1.155913E+04
1.839693E+03
1.000000E+00
1.336136E+08
Listing 10-11
Free-Boundary Component Modes and Residual Solution
Note that the free-boundary component modes are drastically different than the fixed-boundary
component modes shown in Listing 10-5. Also note that the residual solution is not as accurate as the
fixed-boundary solution.
But why is the free-boundary solution not as accurate? Mode 1 of the free-boundary solutios is 31.83
Hz, but it should be 31.77Hz and mode 2 is 203.9Hz, but it should be 197.1 Hz.
Main Index
CHAPTER 10 487
Investigation of the solution indicates that after filtering, only 4 independent component modes for
superelement 10 are retained and brought down to the residual structure. This is verified by reviewing
the Grid Point Singularity Table for Superelement 0:
MAY
13, 2011
MSC NASTRAN

SUBCASE 1
G R I D
POINT
12/15/10
SUPERELEMENT 0
TYPE
ID
P O I N T
S I N G U L A R I T Y
FAILED
STIFFNESS
DIRECTION
RATIO
T A B L E
OLD USET
EXCLUSIVE
NEW USET
UNION
EXCLUSIVE
UNION
1005
0.00E+00
SB
1006
0.00E+00
SB
1007
0.00E+00
SB
1008
0.00E+00
SB
1009
0.00E+00
SB
1010
0.00E+00
SB
1011
0.00E+00
SB
1012
0.00E+00
SB
1013
0.00E+00
SB
1014
0.00E+00
SB
1015
0.00E+00
SB
1016
0.00E+00
SB
2014
0.00E+00
SB
2015
0.00E+00
SB
2016
0.00E+00
SB
Listing 10-12
Residual Structure Grid Point Singularity Table for Free-Boundary Solution
It makes sense that there are only 4 modes retained for Superelement 10 because there are 6 rigid body
modes only 4 flexible modes. Since the rigid body modes can be described by the physical dof, they are
filtered during residual vector calculations. Also there are no residual vectors added for this
superelement.
FREE-BOUNDARY SOLUTION WITH EXPANDED CASE CONTROL
This indicates that there may be modal truncation that is, there are not a sufficient number of
component modes to accurately capture the dynamic mass. Therefore, the number of modes may need
to be increased for Superelement 10. This could be accomplished by increasing the total number of
modes extracted for every superelement, but this carries the burden of calculating modes that are not
necessary. Instead, expanded Case Control can be used to modify the number of modes calculated for
Superelement 10 (ref /doc/seug/chapter10/cantilever-beam/seset/modes2-f2.bdf):
SOL 103
CEND
Main Index


LABEL = SPOINT / SEQSET1 Method with C-SET, Expanded Case Control
ECHO = NONE
RESVEC = YES
SUBCASE 10
super = 10
METHOD = 10
SUBCASE 20
super = 20
METHOD = 20
SPC = 2
SUBCASE 30
super = 0
METHOD = 30

BEGIN BULK
SEQSET1,10,0,1001,thru,1026
SEQSET1,20,0,2001,thru,2016
$ place boundary in C-Set
SECSET1,10,123456,107,207
SECSET1,20,123456,104,204
EIGRL
10
20
MASS
EIGRL
20
10
MASS
EIGRL
30
10
MASS
Listing 10-13
Input for Free-Boundary Solution with Expanded Case Control
The solution of the residual structure computes the system modes as follows:
SPOINT / SEQSET1 METHOD WITH C-SET, EXPANDED CASE CONTROL
Main Index
MAY
13, 2011
MSC NASTRAN
12/15/10
SUPERELEMENT 0
SUBCASE 30
CHAPTER 10 489
R E A L

MODE
EXTRACTION
NO.
ORDER
EIGENVALUE
RADIANS
CYCLES
GENERALIZED
GENERALIZED
MASS
STIFFNESS
4.008070E+04
2.002017E+02
3.186308E+01
1.000000E+00
4.008070E+04
1.617656E+06
1.271871E+03
2.024245E+02
1.000000E+00
1.617656E+06
3.890399E+06
1.972409E+03
3.139187E+02
1.000000E+00
3.890399E+06
5.065938E+06
2.250764E+03
3.582202E+02
1.000000E+00
5.065938E+06
1.219360E+07
3.491934E+03
5.557585E+02
1.000000E+00
1.219360E+07
4.523552E+07
6.725735E+03
1.070434E+03
1.000000E+00
4.523552E+07
4.581753E+07
6.768865E+03
1.077298E+03
1.000000E+00
4.581753E+07
1.243532E+08
1.115138E+04
1.774797E+03
1.000000E+00
1.243532E+08
1.299757E+08
1.140069E+04
1.814476E+03
1.000000E+00
1.299757E+08
10
10
1.386618E+08
1.177548E+04
1.874125E+03
1.000000E+00
1.386618E+08
Listing 10-14
Free-Boundary Residual Solution Expanded Case Control
Note that in this case there is only slight improvement in the calculated modes at the residual structure.
This indicates that, for this problem, the fixed-boundary solution is superior to the free-boundary
solution using standard reduction techniques.
FREE-BOUNDARY SOLUTION WITH MHRED REDUCTION
In MSC.Nastran Version 2004 an alternate method of C-Set reduction was introduced. This method was
the default in Versions 2004 through 2008, but the original method was restored in Version 2010. The
mathematical formulation is presented in the Real Eigenvalue Analysis in SubDMAPs SEMR3 and
MODERS (Ch. 1) in the MSC Nastran Reference Manual. The user interface is to simply add
PARAM,MHRED,YES. This can be done in either the Case Control or bulk data sections of the input
file. When this PARAM is added to the free-boundary solution with expanded case control, the results
are much more precise when compared to the baseline solution (ref /doc/seug/chapter10/cantileverbeam/seset/modes2-f3.bdf).
MAY
13, 2011
MSC NASTRAN
12/15/10
SUPERELEMENT 0
SPOINT / SEQSET1 METHOD WITH C-SET, EXPANDED CASE CONTROL, MHRED
R E A L
SUBCASE 30

MODE
EXTRACTION
NO.
ORDER
Main Index
EIGENVALUE
RADIANS
CYCLES
GENERALIZED
MASS
GENERALIZED
STIFFNESS
3.985089E+04
1.996269E+02
3.177160E+01
1.000000E+00
3.985089E+04
1.533627E+06
1.238397E+03
1.970970E+02
1.000000E+00
1.533627E+06
3.876548E+06
1.968895E+03
3.133594E+02
1.000000E+00
3.876548E+06
5.065922E+06
2.250760E+03
3.582196E+02
1.000000E+00
5.065922E+06
1.184046E+07
3.440997E+03
5.476517E+02
1.000000E+00
1.184046E+07

4.487408E+07
6.698812E+03
1.066149E+03
1.000000E+00
4.487408E+07
4.523500E+07
6.725697E+03
1.070428E+03
1.000000E+00
4.523500E+07
1.211685E+08
1.100766E+04
1.751923E+03
1.000000E+00
1.211685E+08
1.243561E+08
1.115150E+04
1.774817E+03
1.000000E+00
1.243561E+08
10
10
1.352106E+08
1.162801E+04
1.850655E+03
1.000000E+00
1.352106E+08
Listing 10-15
Free-Boundary Residual Solution with MHRED Expanded Case Control
Mixed-Boundary CMS
The mixed-boundary solution implies that the physical boundary dof are split between B-Set (fixed) and
C-Set (free). The method for defining C-Set dof is the same as for the free-boundary solution above.
The expanded Case Control with MHRED example is modified so that one physical boundary grid is in
the B-Set and one grid is in the C-Set as follows (ref /doc/seug/chapter10/ cantilever-beam/seset/modes2m.bdf):
SOL 103
CEND
LABEL = SPOINT / SEQSET1 Method, Mixed-Boundary, Expanded Case Control, MHRED
ECHO = NONE
RESVEC = YES
param,mhred,yes
SUBCASE 10
super = 10
METHOD = 10
SUBCASE 20
super = 20
METHOD = 20
SPC = 2
SUBCASE 30
super = 0
METHOD = 30
Main Index
CHAPTER 10 491
BEGIN BULK
SEQSET1,10,0,1001,thru,1026
SEQSET1,20,0,2001,thru,2016
$ place 104 and 107 boundary in C-Set
SECSET1,10,123456,107
SECSET1,20,123456,104
EIGRL
10
20
MASS
EIGRL
20
10
MASS
EIGRL
30
10
MASS
$ Tip.10
SESET
10
108
THRU
111
SESET
10
208
THRU
211
20
101
102
103
$ Base.20
SESET
Listing 10-16
201
202
203
Input for Mixed-Boundary Solution with Expanded Case Control
Again, the residual solution compares favorably with the baseline solution.
MAY
13, 2011
MSC NASTRAN
12/15/10
SUPERELEMENT 0
SPOINT / SEQSET1 METHOD, MIXED-BOUNDARY, EXPANDED CASE CONTROL,
R E A L
SUBCASE 30

MODE
EXTRACTION
NO.
ORDER
EIGENVALUE
CYCLES
GENERALIZED
MASS
GENERALIZED
STIFFNESS
3.985089E+04
1.996269E+02
3.177160E+01
1.000000E+00
3.985089E+04
1.533628E+06
1.238397E+03
1.970970E+02
1.000000E+00
1.533628E+06
3.876551E+06
1.968896E+03
3.133595E+02
1.000000E+00
3.876551E+06
5.065938E+06
2.250764E+03
3.582202E+02
1.000000E+00
5.065938E+06
1.184051E+07
3.441004E+03
5.476528E+02
1.000000E+00
1.184051E+07
4.487427E+07
6.698826E+03
1.066151E+03
1.000000E+00
4.487427E+07
4.523568E+07
6.725748E+03
1.070436E+03
1.000000E+00
4.523568E+07
1.212124E+08
1.100965E+04
1.752240E+03
1.000000E+00
1.212124E+08
1.243596E+08
1.115167E+04
1.774843E+03
1.000000E+00
1.243596E+08
10
10
1.352187E+08
1.162836E+04
1.850711E+03
1.000000E+00
1.352187E+08
Listing 10-17
Main Index
RADIANS
Free-Boundary Residual Solution with MHRED Expanded Case Control

PART Superelements
Whether using List Superelements or PART Superelements, the reduction process of the solution is
exactly the same. However, the input and user interface for the PART Superelements varies from the List
Superelements.
Defining Physical Boundary and Modal DOF
The physical dof for PART superelement dynamic reduction are defined the same way they are defined
for superelement static reduction. For a review of defining physical dof, refer to Defining PART
Superelements (Ch. 2).
There are several methods available for defining the modal dof associated with Component Modes
Synthesis. PART Superelements support AUTOQSET. PARTs have a convenient method of defining the
number of modal dof with the SENQSET entry, which is an advantage compared to the List
Superelements. PARTs also support manual definition, but the format is by specifying the modal dof and
Q-Set within the PART bulk data section. The user may also connect modal dof to downstream
superelements other than the residual in mult-level superelement analysis with PARTs. These input
methods are described in detail in the sections below.
Example Cantilever Plate
Fixed-Boundary CMS
AUTOQSET METHOD
Just as in List Superelement, Patran supports AUOTQSET for PART superelements. The Select
Superelement form provides the option to write PART superelements and select AUTOQSET as shown
below:
Main Index
CHAPTER 10 493
Figure 10-8
Selecting PART Superelements and AUTOQSET in Patran
The resulting input file is similar to a static input file with the exception of the entries required for modal
analysis and the AUTOQSET option (ref /doc/seug/chapter10/ cantilever-beam/parts/modes.bdf):
SOL 103
CEND
TITLE = PART Superelement Solution
LABEL = AUTOQSET Method
ECHO = NONE
PARAM,AUTOQSET,YES
RESVEC = YES
SUBCASE 1
SUBTITLE=Default
METHOD = 1
SPC = 2
BEGIN BULK
PARAM
PARAM
Main Index
POST
-1
PRTMAXIM YES

EIGRL
10
MASS
$ Superelement Name: Tip.10

BEGIN SUPER = 10
PARAM
POST
PARAM
-1
PRTMAXIM YES
EIGRL
10
MASS
$ Superelement Name: Base.20

BEGIN SUPER = 20
PARAM
POST
PARAM
-1
PRTMAXIM YES
EIGRL
10
MASS
ENDDATA
Listing 10-18
Partial Input File for PART Superelement with AUTOQSET
Because the processing is performed by the PART superelement partitioning module (SEP1X refer to
Introduction (Ch. 2)), the SEMAP is different from the List superelement partitioning. Note, as with the
List superelements, the Q-Set dof are not reported for AUTOQSET. Even though the format is reported
differently, the partitioning is exactly the same as the List superelement example.
PART SUPERELEMENT SOLUTION
MAY
13, 2011
MSC NASTRAN
12/15/10

AUTOQSET METHOD
BOUNDARY
1B
107 (
0)
107 (
10)
2B
207 (
0)
207 (
10)
3B
104 (
0)
104 (
20)
4B
204 (
0)
204 (
20)

INTERIOR TO
Main Index
PAGE
CHAPTER 10 495
POINT ID
TYPE
SUPERELEMEMT ------------------------------- CONNECTED TO SUPERELEMENT ------------------------
1B
10
2B
10
3B
20
4B
20
FIRST
COUNT
INTERIOR TO
POINT ID
TYPE
SUPERELEMEMT ---------------------------- CONNECTED TO SUPERELEMENT ------------------------
1B
10
3B
20
FIRST
COUNT
INTERIOR TO
POINT ID
TYPE
1B
10
3B
20
POINT/SUPERELEMENT CONNECTIVITY LIST (SORTED BY INTERIOR SUPERELEMENT - "B" INDICATES BOUNDARY SEQUEN
FIRST
COUNT
INTERIOR TO
POINT ID
TYPE
1B
10
3B
20
SUPERELEMENT

LIST OF
INDEX
1
INTERIOR POINTS
-1-
-2-
-3-
-4-
1B
2B
3B
4B
SUPERELEMENT
-5-

-6-
-7-
-8-
4 )
-9-

LIST OF
INDEX
1
-1-
-2-
-3-
ELEMENTS
-4-
SUPERELEMENT
-5-
-6-
-7-
=
-8-
3 )
-9-
10

LIST OF
INDEX
Main Index
-1-
-2-
-3-
EXTERIOR POINTS
-4-
-5-

-6-
-7-
-8-
2 )
-9-

1B
2B
SUPERELEMENT
20

LIST OF
INDEX
-1-
-2-
3B
4B
Listing 10-19
-3-
EXTERIOR POINTS
-4-
-5-

-6-
-7-
-8-
2 )
-9-
SEMAP for PART Superelement with AUTOQSET
The superelement reduction, residual assembly, solution, and data recovery follow the same path as the
List Superelement example with AUTOQSET and the answers are exactly the same as shown in
Listing 10-5 and therefore, will not be repeated here.
SENQSET METHOD
Since Patran does not support the SENQSET method directly, the entries must be added manually.
(Note: any Direct Text Input that is entered in the Patran bulk data section will be specified in every
superelement. The SENQSET entry is only valid in the main bulk data section, so using Patran Direct
Text Input for SENQSET will result in a FATAL message).
In this case, the number of modes requested is 10. The Q-Set dof allocation for each superelement should
be large enough to account for normal modes plus Residual Vectors. Since there are no explicit static
Nastran Dynamic Analysis Users Guide for more details on residual vectors. The manual modification
to the input file is shown here (ref /doc/seug/chapter10/cantilever-beam/parts modes2.bdf)
:
SOL 103
CEND
LABEL = SENQSET Method
ECHO = NONE
RESVEC = YES
SUBCASE 1
SUBTITLE=Default
METHOD = 1
SPC = 2
BEGIN BULK
Main Index
CHAPTER 10 497
$ manually add these entries to the main bulk data section

SENQSET,10,16
SENQSET,20,16
Listing 10-20
Input File (partial) for SENQSET Method
The SEMAP lists the internally generated Q-Set dof when SENQSET is used.
LANCE PROCTOR, EAGLESIM
MAY
13, 2011
MSC NASTRAN
12/15/
CREATED BY
SENQSET METHOD

PRIMARY
PROCESS
DOWNSTREAM
ORDER
SUPERELEMENT
TYPE
LABEL
------------ ------------ ------- ------------ ----------------------------0
RESIDUAL STRUCTURE
10
20
-----------------------------------------

PRIMARY
PROCESS
DOWNSTREAM
ORDER
SUPERELEMENT
TYPE
LABEL
------------ ------------ ------- ------------ ----------------------------10
20
RESIDUAL STRUCTURE
-----------------------------------------

SUPERELEMENT
------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
10
20
MAY
13, 2011
MSC NASTRAN
T R E E
NO. LEVELS =
NO. TIPS =
2 )
TIP
LEVEL
LEVEL
LEVEL
LEVEL
LEVEL
LEVEL
LEVEL
LEVEL
LEVEL
LEVEL
INDEX
-1-
-2-
-3-
-4-
-5-
-6-
-7-
-8-
-9-
-10-
10
20
12/15/10

BOUNDARY
Main Index

1B
107 (
0)
107 (
10)
2B
207 (
0)
207 (
10)
3B
104 (
0)
104 (
20)
4B
204 (
0)
204 (
20)
INTERIOR TO
POINT ID
TYPE
1B
10
2B
10
3B
20
4B
20
147477001B
20
147477002B
20
147477003B
20
147477004B
20
147477005B
20
147477006B
20
147477007B
20
147477008B
20
147477009B
20
147477010B
20
147477011B
20
147477012B
20
147477013B
20
147477014B
20
147477015B
20
147477016B
20
147480001B
10
147480002B
10
147480003B
10
147480004B
10
147480005B
10
147480006B
10
147480007B
10
147480008B
10
147480009B
10
147480010B
10
147480011B
10
147480012B
10
147480013B
10
147480014B
10
147480015B
10
Main Index
{these are the internally generated Q-Set dof}
CHAPTER 10 499
147480016B
10
FIRST
COUNT
INTERIOR TO
POINT ID
TYPE
18
1B
10
18
3B
20
FIRST
COUNT
INTERIOR TO
POINT ID
TYPE
SUPERELEMEMT ------------------------------- CONNECTED TO SUPERELEMENT ---------------------
18
1B
10
18
3B
20
FIRST
COUNT
INTERIOR TO
POINT ID
TYPE
SUPERELEMEMT ------------------------------- CONNECTED TO SUPERELEMENT ----------------
18
1B
10
18
3B
20
SUPERELEMENT

LIST OF
INDEX
INTERIOR POINTS
-1-
-2-
-3-
-4-
1B
2B
3B
11
147477007B
147477008B
21
147480001B
147480002B
31
147480011B
147480012B
147480013B
36 )
-5-
-6-
-7-
-8-
-9-
-10-
4B
147477001B
147477002B
147477003B
147477004B
147477005B
147477006B
147477009B
147477010B
147477011B
147477012B
147477013B
147477014B
147477015B
147477016B
147480003B
147480004B
147480005B
147480006B
147480007B
147480008B
147480009B
147480010B
147480014B
147480015B
SUPERELEMENT
147480016B

LIST OF
INDEX
1
-1-
-2-
-3-
ELEMENTS
-4-
SUPERELEMENT
-5-
-6-
-7-
=
-8-
3 )
-9-
10

LIST OF
INDEX
-1-
-2-
1B
2B
11
147480009B
147480010B
-3147480001B
147480011B
EXTERIOR POINTS
18 )
-4-
-5-
-6-
-7-
-8-
-9-
-10-
147480002B
147480003B
147480004B
147480005B
147480006B
147480007B
147480008B
147480012B
SUPERELEMENT
147480013B
147480014B
147480015B
147480016B
20

LIST OF
Main Index
EXTERIOR POINTS
18 )

INDEX
1
11
-1-
-2-
3B
4B
147477009B
147477010B
Listing 10-21
-3147477001B
147477011B
-4-
-5-
-6-
-7-
-8-
-9-
-10-
147477002B
147477003B
147477004B
147477005B
147477006B
147477007B
147477008B
147477012B
147477013B
147477014B
147477015B
147477016B
SEMAP for PART Superelement with SENQSET
The superelement reduction, residual assembly, solution, and data recovery follow the same path as the
List Superelement example with SPOINT / SEQSET1 and the answers compare favorable to the baseline
solution in Listing 10-2, and therefore, will not be repeated here.
SPOINT / QSET1 METHOD WITH CMS ON RESIDUAL
The maximum flexibility in defining the Q-Set for PART Superelement Component Modes Synthesis is
with the SPOINT / QSET1 method. In this method, the user defines the dof with the SPOINT entry and
assigns them to the Q-Set with the QSET1 entry (QSET could also be used, but QSET1 is the most
common method because of its convenient input format).
Since Patran does not support the SPOINT / QSET1 method directly, the user can specify the SPOINT /
QSET1 entries in Direct Text Input as shown below:
Figure 10-9
Example of Defining the SPOINT / QSET1 Method in Patran
In this case, the number of modes requested is 10. The reason that 16 Q-Set dof are allocated for each
superelement is because there are 6 dof added for Residual Vectors. Since there are no explicit static
Main Index
CHAPTER 10 501
Nastran Dynamic Analysis Users Guide for more details on residual vectors. The Direct Text Input for
SPOINT / QSET1 are added to the input file as shown here (ref /doc/seug/chapter10/cantileverbeam/parts/modes3.bdf):
SOL 103
CEND
LABEL = SPOINT / QSET1 Method
ECHO = NONE
RESVEC = YES
SUBCASE 1
SUBTITLE=Default
METHOD = 1
SPC = 2
BEGIN BULK
QSET1,0,1001,thru,1016
PARAM
PARAM
EIGRL
POST
-1
PRTMAXIM YES
1
10
MASS
MASS

BEGIN SUPER = 10
QSET1,0,1001,thru,1016
PARAM
PARAM
EIGRL
POST
-1
PRTMAXIM YES
1
10

BEGIN SUPER = 20
QSET1,0,1001,thru,1016
PARAM
PARAM
Main Index
POST
-1
PRTMAXIM YES

EIGRL
10
MASS
ENDDATA
Listing 10-22
Partial Input File for SPOINT / QSET1 Method
Note that the Direct Text Input is applied to the bulk data section for the residual and each PART. This
means that the solution will also perform Component Modes Synthesis on the residual structure (the same
solution operations as the AUTOQSET method).
Even though the SPOINT IDs are common among superelements, the SEMAP keeps track of the IDs and
assigns different boundary sequence numbers to each.
MAY
13, 2011
MSC NASTRAN
12/15/10

SPOINT / QSET METHOD
BOUNDARY
Main Index
1B
1001 (
10)
2B
1002 (
10)
3B
1003 (
10)
4B
1004 (
10)
5B
1005 (
10)
6B
1006 (
10)
7B
1007 (
10)
8B
1008 (
10)
9B
1009 (
10)
10B
1010 (
10)
11B
1011 (
10)
12B
1012 (
10)
13B
1013 (
10)
14B
1014 (
10)
15B
1015 (
10)
16B
1016 (
10)
17B
107 (
0)
107 (
10)
18B
207 (
0)
207 (
10)
19B
1001 (
20)
20B
1002 (
20)
21B
1003 (
20)
22B
1004 (
20)
23B
1005 (
20)
24B
1006 (
20)
25B
1007 (
20)
26B
1008 (
20)
PAGE
CHAPTER 10 503
27B
1009 (
20)
28B
1010 (
20)
29B
1011 (
20)
30B
1012 (
20)
31B
1013 (
20)
32B
1014 (
20)
33B
1015 (
20)
34B
1016 (
20)
35B
104 (
0)
104 (
20)
36B
204 (
0)
204 (
20)
INTERIOR TO
POINT ID
Main Index
TYPE
1B
SQ
10
2B
SQ
10
3B
SQ
10
4B
SQ
10
5B
SQ
10
6B
SQ
10
7B
SQ
10
8B
SQ
10
9B
SQ
10
10B
SQ
10
11B
SQ
10
12B
SQ
10
13B
SQ
10
14B
SQ
10
15B
SQ
10
16B
SQ
10
17B
10
18B
10
19B
SQ
20
20B
SQ
20
21B
SQ
20
22B
SQ
20
23B
SQ
20
24B
SQ
20
25B
SQ
20
26B
SQ
20
27B
SQ
20
28B
SQ
20
29B
SQ
20
30B
SQ
20

31B
SQ
20
32B
SQ
20
33B
SQ
20
34B
SQ
20
35B
20
36B
20
FIRST
COUNT
INTERIOR TO
POINT ID
TYPE
18
1B
10
18
19B
20
FIRST
COUNT
INTERIOR TO
POINT ID
TYPE
18
1B
10
18
19B
20
POINT/SUPERELEMENT CONNECTIVITY LIST (SORTED BY INTERIOR SUPERELEMENT - "B" INDICATES BOUNDARY SEQUEN
FIRST
COUNT
INTERIOR TO
POINT ID
TYPE
18
1B
10
18
19B
20
SUPERELEMENT

LIST OF
INDEX
-1-
-2-
-3-
EXTERIOR POINTS
-4-
-5-

-6-
-7-
-8-
32 )
-9-
1B
2B
3B
4B
5B
6B
7B
8B
9B
11
11B
12B
13B
14B
15B
16B
19B
20B
21B
21
23B
24B
25B
26B
27B
28B
29B
30B
31B
31
33B
34B
SUPERELEMENT

LIST OF
INDEX
1
INTERIOR POINTS
-1-
-2-
-3-
-4-
17B
18B
35B
36B
SUPERELEMENT
Main Index
-5-

-6-
-7-
-8-
4 )
-9-
CHAPTER 10 505
LIST OF
INDEX
1
-1-
-2-
-3-
ELEMENTS
-4-
SUPERELEMENT
-5-
-6-
-7-
=
-8-
3 )
-9-
10

LIST OF
INDEX
-1-
-2-
-3-
EXTERIOR POINTS
-4-
-5-
-6-
-7-
-99B
1B
2B
3B
4B
5B
6B
7B
8B
11
11B
12B
13B
14B
15B
16B
17B
18B
SUPERELEMENT
18 )
-8-
20

LIST OF
INDEX
EXTERIOR POINTS
18 )
-1-
-2-
-3-
-4-
-5-
-6-
-7-
-8-
-9-
19B
20B
21B
22B
23B
24B
25B
26B
27B
11
29B
30B
31B
32B
33B
34B
35B
36B
Listing 10-23
SEMAP for SPOINT / QSET1 Method
As mentioned above, this model is equivalent to the AUTOQSET method. Therefore, the superelement
reduction, residual assembly, solution, and data recovery follow the same path as the List Superelement
example with AUTOQSET and the answers are exactly the same as shown in Listing 10-5, and therefore,
will not be repeated here.
SPOINT / QSET1 METHOD WITHOUT CMS ON RESIDUAL
It is not necessary to perform Component Modes Synthesis on the residual structure, so the SPOINT /
QSET1 entries can be removed from the main bulk data section. This solution will follow the same path
as the SPOINT / SEQSET1 solution and is not included here. The example file is /doc/seug/chapter10/
cantilever-beam/parts/modes4.bdf.
Free-Boundary CMS
As discussed in Fixed-Boundary Component Modes Synthesis, Patran supports a fixed-boundary
solution only. That is to say, the physical boundary dof are automatically assigned to the B-Set. For
PART superelements, in order to re-assign the physical boundary dof to the C-Set, the user must
manually re-assign them with the CSET, CSET1, BNDFREE, or BNDFRE1 entries. Free-Boundary
Dynamic Reduction (Ch. 9) discusses the theory and provides a manual solution for free-free Component
Modes Synthesis.
BNDFRFEE, BNDFRE1, CSET, CSET1
Free Boundary Degrees-of-Freedom
Defines analysis set (a-set) degrees-of-freedom to be free (c-set) during generalized dynamic reduction
or component mode synthesis calculations.
Main Index

Formats:
1
BNDFREE
ID1
C1
ID2
C2
ID3
C3
ID4
C4
CSET
ID1
C1
ID2
C2
ID3
C3
ID4
C4
BNDFRE1
ID1
ID2
ID3
ID4
ID5
ID6
ID7
ID8
ID9
-etc.-
ID1
ID2
ID3
ID4
ID5
ID6
ID7
ID8
ID9
ID10
-etc.-
CSET1
Examples:
BNDFREE
124
23
16
CSET
124
23
16
BNDFRE1
124
12
122
12
122
127
CSET1
124
127
Alternate Formats and Example:
Main Index
BNDFIX1
ID1
THRU ID2
BNDFIX1
THRU
32
CSET1
ID1
THRU ID2
CSET1
THRU
CSET1
ALL
CSET1
ALL
32
10
10
CHAPTER 10 507
Field
Contents
Component numbers. (Integer zero or blank for scalar points, or any unique
combinations of the Integers 1 through 6 for grid points with no embedded blanks.)
IDi
Grid or scalar point identification numbers. (Integer > 0; For THRU option, ID1<
ID2)
As discussed in the previous section, the Patran Direct Text Input for PART superelements will apply to
each superelement, so the user must modify the input file manually. The examples shown below are
similar to the examples for the Fixed-Boundary Component Modes Synthesis in the List Superelement
sections above, with the addition of the SENQSET Method which is only available with PART
Superelements.
FREE BOUNDARY SOLUTION WITH AUTOQSET METHOD
As noted before the AUTOQSET Method is incompatible with the C-Set.
FREE-BOUNDARY SOLUTION WITH SENQSET METHOD and MHRED
In this example, the Fixed-Boundary SENQSET is modified to add the appropriate BNDFRE1 entries.
The alternate reduction method MHRED is used as described in the List superelement section above and
the number of component modes for Superelement 10 is set to 20. Note that Patran can be used to display
the boundary grids as shown in Figure 10-6. The example file is at /doc/seug/chapter10/cantileverbeam/parts/modes2.bdf.
SOL 103
CEND
LABEL = SENQSET Method, Free-Boundary CMS
ECHO = NONE
RESVEC = YES
param,mhred,yes
SUBCASE 1
SUBTITLE=Default
METHOD = 1
SPC = 2
BEGIN BULK
$ manually add these entries to the main bulk data section
SENQSET,10,26
Main Index

SENQSET,20,16
PARAM
PARAM
EIGRL
POST
-1
PRTMAXIM YES
1
10
MASS
MASS
MASS

BEGIN SUPER = 10
$ Manually add the BNDFRE1 entry
BNDFRE1,123456,107,207
PARAM
PARAM
EIGRL
POST
-1
PRTMAXIM YES
1
20

BEGIN SUPER = 20
$ Manually add the BNDFRE1 entry
BNDFRE1,123456,104,204
PARAM
PARAM
EIGRL
POST
-1
PRTMAXIM YES
1
10
ENDDATA
Listing 10-24
PART Superelement Free-Boundary Input File with SENQSET
SPOINT / BNDFRE1 METHOD

The manual SPOINT, BNDFRE1 method is set up similarly (ref /doc/seug/chapter10/cantileverbeam/parts/modes-f2.bdf)
SPOINT / BNDFRE1 METHOD

The manual SPOINT, BNDFRE1 method is set up similarly (ref /doc/seug/chapter10/ cantilever-beam/parts/modes-f2.bdf)
SOL 103
CEND
LABEL = SPOINT / QSET Method, Free-Boundary CMS
ECHO = NONE
RESVEC = YES
Main Index
CHAPTER 10 509
param,mhred,yes
SUBCASE 1
SUBTITLE=Default
METHOD = 1
SPC = 2
BEGIN BULK
PARAM
PARAM
EIGRL
POST
-1
PRTMAXIM YES
1
10
MASS

BEGIN SUPER = 10
$ Manually add the SPOINT, QSET1, and BNDFRE1 entries
BNDFRE1,123456,107,207
QSET1,0,1001,thru,1026
PARAM
PARAM
EIGRL
POST
-1
PRTMAXIM YES
1
20
MASS

BEGIN SUPER = 20
BNDFRE1,123456,104,204
QSET1,0,1001,thru,1016
PARAM
PARAM
EIGRL
POST
-1
PRTMAXIM YES
1
10
MASS
ENDDATA
Listing 10-25
PART Superelement Free-Boundary Input File with SPOINT /QSET1
SPOINT / BNDFRE1 METHOD, EXPANDED CASE CONTROL
Main Index

The equivalent expanded Case Control model is /doc/seug/chapter10/cantilever-beam/parts/modesf3.bdf:

SOL 103
CEND
LABEL = SPOINT / QSET Method, Free-Boundary CMS, Expanded Case Control
ECHO = NONE
RESVEC = YES
param,mhred,yes
SUBCASE 10
super = 10
METHOD = 10
SUBCASE 20
super = 20
METHOD = 20
SPC = 2
SUBCASE 30
super = 0
METHOD = 30

BEGIN BULK
PARAM
PARAM
EIGRL
POST
-1
PRTMAXIM YES
30
10

BEGIN SUPER = 10
BNDFRE1,123456,107,207
QSET1,0,1001,thru,1026
Main Index
MASS
CHAPTER 10 511
PARAM
PARAM
EIGRL
POST
-1
PRTMAXIM YES
10
20
MASS

BEGIN SUPER = 20
BNDFRE1,123456,104,204
QSET1,0,1001,thru,1016
PARAM
PARAM
EIGRL
POST
-1
PRTMAXIM YES
20
10
MASS
ENDDATA
Listing 10-26
PART Superelement Free-Boundary Input File with SPOINT / QSET1 and

Mixed-Boundary CMS
The mixed-boundary solution implies that the physical boundary dof are split between B-Set (fixed) and
C-Set (free). The method for defining C-Set dof is the same as for the free-boundary solution above.
The expanded Case Control with MHRED example is modified so that one physical boundary grid is in
the B-Set and one grid is in the C-Set as follows (ref /doc/seug/chapter10/ cantilever-beam/parts/modesm.bdf)
SOL 103
CEND
LABEL = SPOINT / QSET Method, Mixed Boundary CMS, Expanded Case Control
ECHO = NONE
RESVEC = YES
param,mhred,yes
SUBCASE 10
super = 10
METHOD = 10
Main Index

SUBCASE 20
super = 20
METHOD = 20
SPC = 2
SUBCASE 30
super = 0
METHOD = 30

BEGIN BULK
PARAM
PARAM
EIGRL
POST
-1
PRTMAXIM YES
30
10
MASS

BEGIN SUPER = 10
BNDFRE1,123456,107
QSET1,0,1001,thru,1026
PARAM
PARAM
EIGRL
POST
-1
PRTMAXIM YES
10
20
MASS

BEGIN SUPER = 20
BNDFRE1,123456,104
QSET1,0,1001,thru,1016
PARAM
PARAM
EIGRL
POST
-1
PRTMAXIM YES
20
10
MASS
ENDDATA
Listing 10-27
Main Index
PART Superelement Mixed-Boundary Input File with SPOINT / QSET1 and

CHAPTER 10 513
The Component Modes Synthesis examples for External Superelements are contained in Chapter 12,
External Superelement Examples in Modal Examples (Ch. 12).
Main Index


Multi-level dynamic reduction is desirable for many models, though not required. As in static analysis,
using a multi-level reduction reduces the size of the residual structure (resulting in a faster solution time
for model change restarts). However, in dynamic analysis multi-level reduction can be used to determine
how sub-assemblies perform before performing the full system-level solution.
A good example of a multi-level reduction is the human arm. The hand cantilevers from the wrist, thus
fixed-boundary modes of the hand behave expected. Then, looking at the forearm, it makes sense to
create a sub-assembly (also referred to as a collector superelement) that includes the effects of both the
forearm and the hand. Once the component modes of the hand-forearm sub-assembly are computed, it
is attached to the upper arm for the final assembly modes.
In contrast, as single-level reduction of the arm will reduce the hand independently of the forearm. Each
reduction will occur independently and the coupled effects are not computed until the final assembly.
This means that the user may not need to carry more component modes of the forearm since they are
calculated with a fixed-boundary. When using a collector superelement sub-assembly, the dynamic
behavior and modal cut-off frequency is much easier to understand.
This section builds on the static muli-level superelement reduction contained in CHAPTER 7. The only
difference between static multi-level superelement analysis and dynamic multi-level superelement
analysis is in defining the entries associated to Component Modes Synthesis described in the preceding
sections.
Defining the Superelement Tree

By default, MSC.Nastran will perform a single-level superelement analysis that is, every superelement
is attached to the residual structure by default. In multi-level superelement analysis, one superelement
can be directly connected to another.
As with multi-level static superelements, the superelement tree for multi-level dynamic List (SESET)
Superelements is defined with the DTI, SETREE entry.
DTI,SETREE
Superelement Tree Definition
Specifies superelement tree that determines the superelement processing order.

Format:
1
SEUP1
SEDWN1
SEUP2 SEDWN2 SEUP3
SEDWN4 SEUP5
SEDWN5
-etc.-
DTI SETREE 1
SEUP4
Main Index
9
SEDWN3
10
CHAPTER 10 515
Example:
DTI
SETREE
14
14
14
14
14
Field
Contents
SEUPi
Identification number of the superelement upstream from SEDWNi. (Integer > 0)
SEDWNi
Identification number of the uperelement into which SEUPi is assembled. (Integer 0)
Figure 10-10
DTI, SETREE Schematic Example
Multi-Level PART superelements offer a more convenient input format with the SETREE entry.
SETREE
Superelement Tree Definition (Alternate Form of DTI,SETREE)
Specifies superelement reduction order.

Format:
1
Main Index
10

SETREE SEID
SEUP8
SEUP1
SEUP2
SEUP9
-etc.-
10
20
SEUP3
SEUP4
30
40
SEUP5
SEUP6
SEUP7
Example:
SETREE 400
Field
Contents
SEID
Partitioned superelement identification number of a downstream superelement.

(Integer > 0)
SEUPi
Identification number of superelements that are upstream of SEID. (Integer > 0)
Figure 10-11
SETREE Schematic Example
If a superelement is not referenced on the DTI,SETREE or SETREE entry, then the manner in which it
is handled depends on the type of that superelement.
List Superelements
DTI, SETREE
Main Index
CHAPTER 10 517
A List Superelement that is unreferenced in the DTI,SETREE will be automatically attached to
the residual structure if all of its exterior points belong to the residual. However, if one or more
of its exterior points do not belong to the residual, then the program will terminate with a user
fatal error complaining that one of more of the superelements are not in the same path.
SETREE
BEGIN SUPER. (for details refer to the note on SEP1X in Introduction (Ch. 2))
A List Superelement that is unreferenced in the SETREE will be automatically attached to the
PART Superelements
DTI, SETREE
A PART Superelement that is unreferenced in the DTI,SETREE will be automatically attached
to the residual structure if all of its exterior points belong to the residual. However, if one or
more of its exterior points do not belong to the residual, then the program will terminate with a
user fatal error complaining that one of more of the superelements are not in the same path.
SETREE
BEGIN SUPER. (for details refer to the note on SEP1X in Introduction (Ch. 2))
A PART Superelement that is unreferenced in the SETREE will be automatically attached to the
Multi-Level Superelement Component Modes Synthesis

Connection
As with the single-level dynamic reduction examples above, the modal dof associated to the Component
Modes Synthesis must be assigned. In multi-level superelement analysis, the user has the option of
connecting the superelement component modes to the downstream superelement or to the residual.
Common practice is to assign the component modes as interior dof in the next downstream superelement
of the superelement tree, although it is possible to assign the component modes as internal dof to the
residual structure from any level. The examples will only consider assigning modal dof to the next
downstream superelement in the tree.
Note that for a model with BEGIN BULK and List Superelements only can use either GRIDs or
SPOINTs to store the component modes. However, MSC.Nastran requires that component modes
defined with SPOINTs must be connected directly to internal dof of the residual structure. In order
Main Index

However, a model with BEGIN SUPER requires that SPOINTs are used to store the Q-Set component
modes. Models with BEGIN SUPER are permitted to pass SPOINTs to the downstream superelement
(instead of the residual).
Multi-Level Modal Reduction Example (fly swatter)

For this set of examples, the double headed flyswatter model introduced in Superelement Partitioning
(Ch. 2), will be used.
Figure 10-12
Flyswatter Model for Dynamic Multi-Level Superelement Reduction Examples
In the example below, the following figure demonstrates the schematic of the superelement tree that will
be used.
Main Index
CHAPTER 10 519
Figure 10-13
Flyswatter Multi-Level Superelement Reduction Schematic
The first 10 system modes for a non-superelement baseline solution are as follows (ref
/doc/seug/chapter10/flyswatter/baseline/modes.bdf)
R E A L
MODE
EXTRACTION
NO.
ORDER
EIGENVALUE
CYCLES
GENERALIZED
MASS
GENERALIZED
STIFFNESS
5.771180E+02
2.402328E+01
3.823424E+00
1.000000E+00
5.771180E+02
1.053431E+03
3.245661E+01
5.165629E+00
1.000000E+00
1.053431E+03
1.582892E+03
3.978558E+01
6.332071E+00
1.000000E+00
1.582892E+03
3.441425E+03
5.866366E+01
9.336612E+00
1.000000E+00
3.441425E+03
1.816830E+04
1.347899E+02
2.145247E+01
1.000000E+00
1.816830E+04
3.090139E+04
1.757879E+02
2.797752E+01
1.000000E+00
3.090139E+04
4.377879E+04
2.092338E+02
3.330060E+01
1.000000E+00
4.377879E+04
5.775877E+04
2.403305E+02
3.824979E+01
1.000000E+00
5.775877E+04
5.928398E+04
2.434830E+02
3.875153E+01
1.000000E+00
5.928398E+04
10
10
8.165628E+04
2.857556E+02
4.547942E+01
1.000000E+00
8.165628E+04
Listing 10-28
Flyswatter Baseline Modal Solution (No Superelements)
The mode shapes are as follows:
Main Index
RADIANS

Figure 10-14
Flyswatter Baseline Mode Shapes (No Superelements)
List Superelements
The superelements are defined in Patran by using Groups, refer to Demonstration of Defining Interior
Points in Patran (Ch. 2) to review the superelement creation in Patran. In the case of List (SESET)
Superelements with BEGIN BULK, the DTI,SETREE must be used to specify multi-level superelement
analysis. Patran does not support DTI,SETREE with a form, so it must be entered into the Direct Text
Input as follows:
Main Index
CHAPTER 10 521
Figure 10-15
Defining DTI,SETREE for List Superelements in Patran
The resulting input file is shown below (ref /doc/seug/chapter10/flyswatter/seset/modes-autoq.bdf)

SOL 103
CEND
TITLE = Flyswatter Modes
LABEL = List (SESET), Multi-Level, AUTOQSET
ECHO = NONE
PARAM,AUTOQSET,YES
RESVEC = NO
SUBCASE 1
SUBTITLE=Default
METHOD = 1
SPC = 2
BEGIN BULK
DTI,SETREE,1,1,3,3,5,5,0,
,2,4,4,6,6,0
PARAM
PARAM
EIGRL
POST
-1
PRTMAXIM YES
1
10

PSHELL
Main Index
1.

$[superelement seset definitions below]

$ SEID.1
SESET
33
34
37
SESET
45
THRU
50
SESET
57
THRU
62
SESET
69
THRU
74
SESET
81
THRU
86
SESET
93
THRU
98
SESET
39
40
43
SESET
51
THRU
56
SESET
63
THRU
68
SESET
75
THRU
80
SESET
87
THRU
92
SESET
99
THRU
104
29
30
31
32
38
$ SEID.2
44
$ SEID.3
SESET
$ SEID.4
SESET
$ SEID.5
SESET
THRU
SESET
21
22
SESET
15
THRU
SESET
25
26
THRU
12
$ SEID.6
18
$ SEID.7
SESET

SPCADD
$ Displacement Constraints of Load Set : grid.ps

SPC1
123456

ENDDATA e4104518
Listing 10-29
Input File for Multi-Level List Superelement
The SEMAP for superelement tree shows that the superelements are attached in a multi-level tree.
*** USER WARNING MESSAGE 4183 (SEP1A)
TABLE SETREE DID NOT SPECIFY DOWNSTREAM CONNECTION FOR THE FOLLOWING SUPERELEMENTS.
USER INFORMATION: A RESIDUAL-ONLY MODEL IS ASSUMED.
7
FLYSWATTER MODES
LIST (SESET), MULTI-LEVEL, AUTOQSET
Main Index
MAY
15, 2011
MSC NASTRAN
12/15/10
CHAPTER 10 523

(SORTED BY SEID)
INDEX
SUPERELEMENT
PROCESS ORDER
DOWNSTREAM SE
SUPERELEMENT TYPE
RESIDUAL STRUCTURE

INDEX
SUPERELEMENT
PROCESS ORDER
DOWNSTREAM SE
SUPERELEMENT TYPE
RESIDUAL STRUCTURE

INDEX
SE ID
T R E E
**** TREE CONFIGURATION IS MULTILEVEL ****

( NO. LEVELS =
TIP
NO. TIPS =
L E V E L
INDEX
-1-
Main Index
-2-
-3-
7*
4*
2*
N U M B E R
* = PROCESS ORDER )

6*
3*
1*
7
5*
Listing 10-30
SETREE for Multi-Level List Superelement Modes Example
Note that in this case, the component modes are passed directly to the residual structure. The final
solution indicates that the solution matches the baseline solution.
In order to pass the component modes to the downstream superelement rather than the residual structure,
GRID points must be used to store the Q-Set dof. The goal of the next example is to demonstrate that
the same residual solution and subsequent data recovery are achieved for multi-level dynamic reduction
by combining all of the previous examples and using expanded Case Control. The process is described
as follows:
The left leg of the superelement tree (SEID 1, 3, and 5, refer to Figure 10-13 ) will be performed
by passing the modal Q-Set dof from the upstream to the downstream superelement. In addition,
this side of the tree will perform a mixed-boundary Component Modes Synthesis by placing the
upper grids into the C-Set. In this manner, the component modes of SEID 5 can be compared
directly with a solution of the left side fixed at grids 13 and 23.
The right leg of the superelement tree (SEID 2, 4, and 6) will be processed with a fixed-boundary
solution. The component modes modes will also be passed to the downstream superelement.
For comparison purposes, an intermediate model is prepared as shown below (ref
/doc/seug/chapter10/flyswatter/baseline/seid135-fixedbase.bdf).
Main Index
CHAPTER 10 525
Figure 10-16
Submodel for Fixed Boundary of Superelements 1, 3, 5
The solution for the Submodel is performed without superelements. The Eigensolution is as follows:
FLYSWATTER MODES, COLLECTOR SUPERELEMENT 5 BREAKOUT MODEL
MAY
15, 2011
MSC NASTRAN
12/15/10

BASELINE MODES
SUBCASE 1
R E A L
MODE
EXTRACTION
NO.
10
RADIANS
CYCLES
ORDER
GENERALIZED
MASS
GENERALIZED
STIFFNESS
3.714080E+03
6.094325E+01
9.699420E+00
1.000000E+00
3.714080E+03
4.080678E+03
6.388018E+01
1.016685E+01
1.000000E+00
4.080678E+03
4.793354E+04
2.189373E+02
3.484495E+01
1.000000E+00
4.793354E+04
7.292526E+04
2.700468E+02
4.297928E+01
1.000000E+00
7.292526E+04
3.250839E+05
5.701613E+02
9.074398E+01
1.000000E+00
3.250839E+05
7.722886E+05
8.787995E+02
1.398653E+02
1.000000E+00
7.722886E+05
2.382625E+06
1.543575E+03
2.456676E+02
1.000000E+00
2.382625E+06
4.861385E+06
2.204855E+03
3.509136E+02
1.000000E+00
4.861385E+06
1.051328E+07
3.242419E+03
5.160469E+02
1.000000E+00
1.051328E+07
10
1.500208E+07
Listing 10-31
Main Index
EIGENVALUE
3.873252E+03
6.164473E+02
1.000000E+00
1.500208E+07
Solution of Submodel for Fixed Boundary of Superelements 1, 3, 5

The full model for this example is as follows (ref /doc/seug/chapter10/flyswatter/seset/modes-multiseqset1.bdf)

SOL 103
CEND
LABEL = List (SESET), Multi-Level, SEQSET1
ECHO = NONE
RESVEC = NO
param,mhred,yes
SET 246=2,4,6
SUBCASE 1
SUBTITLE=Subcase for FOR SEID 1
SUPER = 1
METHOD = 1
SUBCASE 3
SUPER = 3
METHOD = 3
SUBCASE 5
SUPER = 5
METHOD = 5
SUBCASE 7
SUPER=7
METHOD=7
SPC = 2
SUBCASE 9
SUBTITLE=Subcase for FOR SEID 2, 4, and 6
SUPER = 246
METHOD = 1
SUBCASE 10
SUBTITLE = Subcase for Residual
SUPER=0
Main Index
CHAPTER 10 527
METHOD=1
BEGIN BULK
DTI,SETREE,1,1,3,3,5,5,0,
,2,4,4,6,6,0
$ define grids to store component modes of SE 1

$ allocate enough to store 10 modes + 6 Resvec
GRID,1001
GRID,1002
GRID,1003
$ place these grids as INTERIOR TO SE 3
seset,3,1001,thru,1003
$ define the grids as Q-Set dof for SE 1
seqset1,1,123456,1001,thru,1003

GRID,3001
GRID,3002
GRID,3003
GRID,3004
seqset1,3,123456,3001,thru,3004
$ place grids 35, 36 into C-Set
secset1,3,123456,35,36

GRID,5001
GRID,5002
GRID,5003
GRID,5004
GRID,5005
seqset1,5,123456,5001,thru,5005
$ place grids 19, 20, 35, and 36 into C-Set
secset1,5,123456,19,20,35,36
Main Index


GRID,2001
GRID,2002
GRID,2003
seqset1,2,123456,2001,thru,2003

GRID,4001
GRID,4002
GRID,4003
seqset1,4,123456,4001,thru,4003

GRID,6001
GRID,6002
GRID,6003
seqset1,6,123456,6001,thru,6003
$ define SPOINTs to store component modes of SE 7

seqset1,7,0,7001,thru,7016
PARAM
PARAM
POST
-1
PRTMAXIM YES
EIGRL
10
EIGRL
15
EIGRL
20
EIGRL
12
$ SEID.1
SESET
Main Index
33
34
37
38
CHAPTER 10 529
SESET
45
THRU
50
SESET
57
THRU
62
SESET
69
THRU
74
SESET
81
THRU
86
SESET
93
THRU
98
SESET
39
40
43
SESET
51
THRU
56
SESET
63
THRU
68
SESET
75
THRU
80
SESET
87
THRU
92
SESET
99
THRU
104
29
30
31
32
$ SEID.2
44
$ SEID.3
SESET
$ SEID.4
SESET
$ SEID.5
SESET
THRU
SESET
21
22
SESET
15
THRU
SESET
25
26
THRU
12
$ SEID.6
18
$ SEID.7
SESET
ENDDATA
Listing 10-32 Input for List Superelement Example using Grids to Pass Component Modes to
the Downstream Superelement (instead of residual)
The SEMAP and SETREE have not changed from the previous example refer to Listing 10-30. Since
the structure is symmetric, the solution of the mixed-boundary leg at Superelement 5 can be directly
compared to the Submodel shown in Figure 10-16, and for contrast, it can also be compared directly to
the fixed-boundary leg at Superelement 6. The effects on residual solution and final mode shapes can
also be compared to the baseline solution.
FLYSWATTER MODES
MAY
15, 2011
MSC NASTRAN
12/15/10
SUPERELEMENT 6
LIST (SESET), MULTI-LEVEL, SEQSET1
SUBCASE 9
R E A L

MODE
EXTRACTION
NO.
ORDER
1
Main Index
EIGENVALUE
RADIANS
CYCLES
GENERALIZED
MASS
1.928906E+05
4.391931E+02
6.989976E+01
1.000000E+00
GENERALIZED
STIFFNESS
1.928906E+05

2.065030E+05
4.544260E+02
7.232414E+01
1.000000E+00
2.065030E+05
7.289379E+05
8.537786E+02
1.358831E+02
1.000000E+00
7.289379E+05
4.834193E+06
2.198680E+03
3.499308E+02
1.000000E+00
4.834193E+06
6.997852E+06
2.645345E+03
4.210197E+02
1.000000E+00
6.997852E+06
7.082520E+06
2.661301E+03
4.235591E+02
1.000000E+00
7.082520E+06
1.486210E+07
3.855140E+03
6.135646E+02
1.000000E+00
1.486210E+07
1.508492E+07
3.883931E+03
6.181468E+02
1.000000E+00
1.508492E+07
1.759065E+07
4.194122E+03
6.675151E+02
1.000000E+00
1.759065E+07
10
10
2.454850E+07
4.954645E+03
7.885562E+02
1.000000E+00
2.454850E+07
FLYSWATTER MODES
MAY
15, 2011
MSC NASTRAN
12/15/10
SUPERELEMENT 5
SUBCASE 5
R E A L

MODE
EXTRACTION
NO.
ORDER
EIGENVALUE
RADIANS
CYCLES
GENERALIZED
GENERALIZED
MASS
STIFFNESS
3.714080E+03
6.094325E+01
9.699420E+00
1.000000E+00
3.714080E+03
4.080678E+03
6.388018E+01
1.016685E+01
1.000000E+00
4.080678E+03
4.793354E+04
2.189373E+02
3.484495E+01
1.000000E+00
4.793354E+04
7.292526E+04
2.700468E+02
4.297928E+01
1.000000E+00
7.292526E+04
3.250839E+05
5.701613E+02
9.074398E+01
1.000000E+00
3.250839E+05
7.722886E+05
8.787995E+02
1.398653E+02
1.000000E+00
7.722886E+05
2.382625E+06
1.543575E+03
2.456676E+02
1.000000E+00
2.382625E+06
4.861387E+06
2.204855E+03
3.509136E+02
1.000000E+00
4.861387E+06
1.051441E+07
3.242594E+03
5.160748E+02
1.000000E+00
1.051441E+07
10
10
1.500237E+07
3.873289E+03
6.164531E+02
1.000000E+00
1.500237E+07
FLYSWATTER MODES
MAY
15, 2011
MSC NASTRAN
12/15/10
SUPERELEMENT 0
SUBCASE 10
R E A L

MODE
EXTRACTION
NO.
ORDER
Main Index
EIGENVALUE
RADIANS
CYCLES
GENERALIZED
MASS
GENERALIZED
STIFFNESS
5.771180E+02
2.402328E+01
3.823424E+00
1.000000E+00
5.771180E+02
1.053431E+03
3.245661E+01
5.165629E+00
1.000000E+00
1.053431E+03
1.582892E+03
3.978558E+01
6.332071E+00
1.000000E+00
1.582892E+03
3.441425E+03
5.866366E+01
9.336612E+00
1.000000E+00
3.441425E+03
1.816831E+04
1.347899E+02
2.145247E+01
1.000000E+00
1.816831E+04
3.090142E+04
1.757880E+02
2.797753E+01
1.000000E+00
3.090142E+04
CHAPTER 10 531
4.377881E+04
2.092339E+02
3.330060E+01
1.000000E+00
4.377881E+04
5.775886E+04
2.403307E+02
3.824982E+01
1.000000E+00
5.775886E+04
5.928398E+04
2.434830E+02
3.875153E+01
1.000000E+00
5.928398E+04
10
10
8.165640E+04
2.857558E+02
4.547945E+01
1.000000E+00
8.165640E+04
Listing 10-33 Solution of List Superelement Example using Grids to Pass Component Modes
to the Downstream Superelement (instead of residual)
The superelement component modes solution of SEID 6 is drastically different than SEID 5. The reason
is that SEID 5 uses a mixed-boundary solution by placing the physical grids that are not at the boundary
with the residual into the C-Set. If SEID 6 had been exported as an external superelement and then
imported to a model without additional structure, and fixed at the grids that attach to the residual (i.e.
grids 14 and 24), then the solution would give the same results as SEID 5.
When the superelement component modes of SEID 5 are compared to the Submodel modes, it is clear
that the same modal solution is attained. Furthermore, comparison of the residual modes to the baseline
modes indicates a match.
It should also be noted that the solution sequence is based on the SUPERELMENT PROCESSING
ORDER shown in the SETREE rather than the SUBCASE number.
When the solution results are read into Patran and displayed, it is clear that the correct data recovery has
been performed as shown below (only mode 1 is shown).
Figure 10-17
Main Index
Mode 1 of List Superelement Example using Grids to Pass Component Modes

to the Downstream Superelement (instead of residual)

PART Superelements
Patran provides a convenient form for defining the Superelement Tree for PART Superelements as shown
below.
Figure 10-18
Defining the SETREE for PART Superelements in Patran
The resulting file for the AUTOQSET option is (ref /doc/seug/chapter10/flyswatter/parts/modes-multiautoq.bdf)

SOL 103
CEND
LABEL = Part Superelement, Multi-Level Tree, AUTOQSET
ECHO = NONE
PARAM,AUTOQSET,YES
RESVEC = YES
SUBCASE 1
SUBTITLE=Default
METHOD = 1
SPC = 2
Main Index
CHAPTER 10 533
BEGIN BULK
PARAM
POST
PARAM
-1
PRTMAXIM YES
EIGRL
SETREE
10
SETREE
SETREE
SETREE
Listing 10-34
Patran; AUTOQSET Method
Note that any SETREE entries that use SEID 0 (the residual structure) as the downstream superelement
are not written since the default is to attach superelements to the residual. The solution for this model is
the same as the equivalent List Superelement model and produce the same answers as the baseline model.
Since the solution goes through the PART partitioning (SEP1X), the superelement processing order is
slightly different than the List Superelement processing order shown in Listing 10-30. Even so, the
solution is the same.
FLYSWATTER MODES
MAY
15, 2011
MSC NASTRAN

PART SUPERELEMENT, MULTI-LEVEL TREE, AUTOQSET

PRIMARY
PROCESS
DOWNSTREAM
ORDER
SUPERELEMENT
TYPE
------------ ------------ ------- ------------ ----------------------------0
RESIDUAL STRUCTURE
LABE
---------------------
SUPERELEMENT DEFINITION TABLE (SORTED BY PROCESS ORDER

PRIMARY
PROCESS
DOWNSTREAM
ORDER
SUPERELEMENT
TYPE
------------ ------------ ------- ------------ -----------------------------
Main Index
LABE
---------------------
12/15/10

RESIDUAL STRUCTURE

SUPERELEMENT
------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
FLYSWATTER MODES
MAY
15, 2011
MSC NASTRAN
12/15/10

PART SUPERELEMENT, MULTI-LEVEL TREE, AUTOQSET
( CONFIGURATION = MULTILEVEL
T R E E
NO. LEVELS =
NO. TIPS =
3 )
TIP
LEVEL
LEVEL
LEVEL
LEVEL
LEVEL
LEVEL
LEVEL
LEVEL
LEVEL
INDEX
-1-
-2-
-3-
-4-
-5-
-6-
-7-
-8-
-9-
The same model can be solved with SENQSET instead of AUTOQSET. As noted in Fixed-Boundary
Component Modes Synthesis, the input file must be manually modified to add the SENQSET entries.
The example file is (ref /doc/seug/chapter10/flyswatter/parts/modes-multi-senqset.bdf)
SOL 103
CEND
LABEL = Part Superelement, Multi-Level, SENQSET
ECHO = NONE
RESVEC = YES
SUBCASE 1
SUBTITLE=Default
Main Index
CHAPTER 10 535
METHOD = 1
SPC = 2
BEGIN BULK
$ senqset must be added manually.
senqset,1,16
senqset,2,16
senqset,3,16
senqset,4,16
senqset,5,16
senqset,6,16
senqset,7,16
PARAM
PARAM
POST
-1
PRTMAXIM YES
EIGRL
SETREE
SETREE
SETREE
SETREE
Listing 10-35
10
Patran; SENQSET Method
Again the results match the baseline solution. But both the AUTOQSET and SENQSET method pass
the component modes for each superelement directly to the residual. In order to pass the Q-Set to the
next downstream superelement, the SECONCT entry must be used. Using a similar solution as the List
Superelement solution above (Listing 10-32), the modes are passed down for the left leg of the
superelement tree using SPOINTs. (ref /doc/seug/chapter10/flyswatter/parts/modes-multi-seconct.bdf)
SOL 103
CEND
LABEL = Part Superelement, Multi-Level, SECONCT
ECHO = NONE
RESVEC = YES
param,mhred,yes
SET 246=2,4,6
SUBCASE 1
Main Index


SUPER = 1
METHOD = 1
SUBCASE 3
SUPER = 3
METHOD = 3
SUBCASE 5
SUPER = 5
METHOD = 5
SUBCASE 7
SUPER=7
METHOD=7
SPC = 2
SUBCASE 9
SUBTITLE=Subcase for FOR SEID 2, 4, and 6
SUPER = 246
METHOD = 1
SUBCASE 10
SUBTITLE = Subcase for Residual
SUPER=0
METHOD=1
BEGIN BULK
PARAM
PARAM
POST
-1
PRTMAXIM YES
EIGRL
SETREE
10
SETREE
SETREE
SETREE
$ SECONCT must be used to pass Q-Set component modes to a downstream SE

$ The default for boundary search of physical grids is SEBULK entry "AUTO"
$ only the modal dof need to be connected explicitly
SECONCT,1,3
,1001,thru,1016,31001,thru,31016
Main Index
CHAPTER 10 537
SECONCT,3,5
,3001,thru,3021,53001,thru,53021
$ allow default processing (i.e. send modal dof to residual) for other SE
SENQSET,2,16
SENQSET,4,16
SENQSET,5,26
SENQSET,6,16
SENQSET,7,16

BEGIN SUPER = 1
$ define spoints to store component modes of SE 1
spoint,1001,thru,1016
qset1,0,1001,thru,1016
PARAM
PARAM
EIGRL
POST
-1
PRTMAXIM YES
1
10

BEGIN SUPER = 2
PARAM
PARAM
EIGRL
POST
-1
PRTMAXIM YES
1
10

BEGIN SUPER = 3
$ define spoints to store component modes of SE 3
qset1,0,3001,thru,3021
$ define spoints to receive upstream component modes from SE 1
PARAM
PARAM
EIGRL
POST
-1
PRTMAXIM YES
3
15

BEGIN SUPER = 4
PARAM
PARAM
Main Index
POST
-1
PRTMAXIM YES

EIGRL
10

BEGIN SUPER = 5
$ define points to receive component modes from SE 3
PARAM
PARAM
EIGRL
POST
-1
PRTMAXIM YES
5
20

BEGIN SUPER = 6
$ define spoints to receive upstream component modes from SE 4
PARAM
PARAM
EIGRL
POST
-1
PRTMAXIM YES
1
10

BEGIN SUPER = 7
PARAM
PARAM
EIGRL
POST
-1
PRTMAXIM YES
7
10
ENDDATA
Listing 10-36
Input for PART Superelement Example using SPOINTS / SECONCT to Pass

Component Modes to the Downstream Superelement (instead of residual)
Because each Partitioned Bulk Data Section is treated separately, the same numbers could be re-used for
the SPOINTS in the downstream superelement that are used in the upstream superelement. In either case
the use of a SECONCT entry is required to attach the modes from an upstream to downstream
superelement, otherwise they are assigned to the residual. The upstream modes are attached to these
DOFs by the use of the SECONCT entry in the Main Bulk Data Section. However, in this example
different SPOINT IDs were used for clarity.
The selected output is:
FLYSWATTER MODES
MAY
MSC NASTRAN
12/15/10
SUPERELEMENT 5
PART SUPERELEMENT, MULTI-LEVEL, SECONCT
SUBCASE 5
R E A L
Main Index
15, 2011
CHAPTER 10 539
MODE
EXTRACTION
NO.
ORDER
EIGENVALUE
RADIANS
CYCLES
GENERALIZED
GENERALIZED
MASS
STIFFNESS
3.714080E+03
6.094325E+01
9.699420E+00
1.000000E+00
3.714080E+03
4.080678E+03
6.388018E+01
1.016685E+01
1.000000E+00
4.080678E+03
4.793354E+04
2.189373E+02
3.484495E+01
1.000000E+00
4.793354E+04
7.292526E+04
2.700468E+02
4.297928E+01
1.000000E+00
7.292526E+04
3.250839E+05
5.701613E+02
9.074398E+01
1.000000E+00
3.250839E+05
7.722886E+05
8.787995E+02
1.398653E+02
1.000000E+00
7.722886E+05
2.382625E+06
1.543575E+03
2.456676E+02
1.000000E+00
2.382625E+06
4.861387E+06
2.204855E+03
3.509136E+02
1.000000E+00
4.861387E+06
1.051441E+07
3.242594E+03
5.160748E+02
1.000000E+00
1.051441E+07
10
10
1.500237E+07
3.873290E+03
6.164532E+02
1.000000E+00
1.500237E+07
FLYSWATTER MODES
MAY
15, 2011
MSC NASTRAN
12/15/10
SUPERELEMENT 6
SUBCASE 9
R E A L

MODE
EXTRACTION
NO.
ORDER
EIGENVALUE
RADIANS
CYCLES
GENERALIZED
GENERALIZED
MASS
STIFFNESS
4.771979E+03
6.907951E+01
1.099435E+01
1.000000E+00
4.771979E+03
4.838306E+03
6.955793E+01
1.107049E+01
1.000000E+00
4.838306E+03
8.975424E+04
2.995901E+02
4.768125E+01
1.000000E+00
8.975424E+04
1.469312E+05
3.833160E+02
6.100664E+01
1.000000E+00
1.469312E+05
1.198461E+06
1.094743E+03
1.742337E+02
1.000000E+00
1.198461E+06
6.358247E+06
2.521556E+03
4.013181E+02
1.000000E+00
6.358247E+06
2.954034E+07
5.435103E+03
8.650234E+02
1.000000E+00
2.954034E+07
3.230597E+07
5.683834E+03
9.046102E+02
1.000000E+00
3.230597E+07
3.739612E+07
6.115237E+03
9.732701E+02
1.000000E+00
3.739612E+07
10
10
7.022938E+07
8.380298E+03
1.333766E+03
1.000000E+00
7.022938E+07
FLYSWATTER MODES
MAY
15, 2011
MSC NASTRAN
12/15/10
SUPERELEMENT 0
SUBCASE 10
R E A L

MODE
EXTRACTION
NO.
ORDER
Main Index
EIGENVALUE
RADIANS
CYCLES
GENERALIZED
MASS
GENERALIZED
STIFFNESS
5.771180E+02
2.402328E+01
3.823424E+00
1.000000E+00
5.771180E+02
1.053431E+03
3.245661E+01
5.165629E+00
1.000000E+00
1.053431E+03
1.582892E+03
3.978558E+01
6.332071E+00
1.000000E+00
1.582892E+03
3.441425E+03
5.866366E+01
9.336612E+00
1.000000E+00
3.441425E+03

1.816830E+04
1.347899E+02
2.145247E+01
1.000000E+00
1.816830E+04
3.090139E+04
1.757879E+02
2.797752E+01
1.000000E+00
3.090139E+04
4.377879E+04
2.092338E+02
3.330060E+01
1.000000E+00
4.377879E+04
5.775877E+04
2.403305E+02
3.824979E+01
1.000000E+00
5.775877E+04
5.928398E+04
2.434830E+02
3.875153E+01
1.000000E+00
5.928398E+04
10
10
8.165628E+04
2.857556E+02
4.547942E+01
1.000000E+00
8.165628E+04
Listing 10-37 Solution for PART Superelement Example using SPOINTS / SECONCT to Pass
Component Modes to the Downstream Superelement (instead of residual)
As with the List Superelement solution in Listing 10-33, the PART superelement component modes
solution of SEID 6 is different than SEID 5. But, the PART component modes for SEID 6 do not match
the List Superelement component modes for SEID 6.
When the superelement component modes of SEID 5 are compared to the Submodel modes, it is clear
that the same modal solution is attained. Furthermore, comparison of the residual modes to the baseline
modes indicates a match.
It should also be noted that the solution sequence is based on the SUPERELMENT PROCESSING
ORDER shown in the SETREE rather than the SUBCASE number.
When the solution results are read into Patran and displayed, it is clear that the correct data recovery has
been performed.
Examination of the SEMAP indicates significant differences between the PART solution and the List
(SESET) Solution.
Isolating the SEMAP for SEID 5 between the two solutions; refer to Figure 10-12 for the geometry.
Table 10-3
Comparison of SEMAP for SEID 5 between List and PART Superelements
Superelement Type
Exterior Grids
Interior Grids
List (BEGIN BULK)
13, 19, 20, 23, 35, 36
9, 10, 11, 12, 21, 22
PART (BEGIN SUPER)
13, 23
9, 10, 11, 12, 19, 20 21, 22
This means that the exterior grids for both upstream superelements for the List superelements were
carried to Superelement 5 and attached to the residual as physical dof. This is why they needed to be
placed in the C-Set for the component modes of Superelement 5 to match the Subassembly results. In
contrast, the PART superelement processing only allows the grids to be exterior to one and only one
superelement.
1.
Main Index
Chapter 11: Dynamic Loading on Superelements
11
Main Index
Dynamic Loading on
Superelements
Introduction
542

Introduction
Introduction
This chapter describes methods available in MSC.Nastran for applying dynamic loading to models with
superelements. This Chapter is not intended to be a comprehensive review of dynamic analysis and
dynamic response, but rather a review of how to use superelements in conjunction with dynamic loading
and response for models that incorporate superelements. For a full review of the dynamic capabilities in
MSC.Nastran, the reader is encouraged to refer to these sections in the MSC.Nastran Dynamic Analysis
Users Guide (Dyn. UG) and MSC.Nastran Reference Manual (Ref. Man.):
Frequency Response Analysis (Ch. 4) in the MSC Nastran Dynamic Analysis Users Guide
Transient Response Analysis (Ch. 5) in the MSC Nastran Dynamic Analysis Users Guide
Damping (Ch. 6) in the 3MSC Nastran Dynamic Analysis Users Guide
Enforced Motion (Ch. 7) in the MSC Nastran Dynamic Analysis Users Guide
Formulation of Dynamic Equations in SubDMAP GMA (Ch. 1) in the MSC Nastran Reference
Manual
Frequency Response and Random Analysis in SubDMAP FREQRS (Ch. 1) in the MSC Nastran
Reference Manual
Transient Response in SubDMAPs SEDTRAN and SEMTRAN (Ch. 1) in the MSC Nastran
Reference Manual
Superelement analysis with random vibration is an extension of frequency response and is covered in
detail in CHAPTER 18 of this manual. Note that MSC.Nastran supports acoustics, nonlinear harmonic
response, rotor dynamics, and cyclic symmetry, but these topics are beyond the scope of this User Guide.
Typical dynamic input entries for transient and frequency response are shown in the tables below. Note
that these tables are not exhaustive lists, but they cover many dynamic analysis applications.
Main Index
CHAPTER 11 543
Table 11-1
Typical Dynamic Input for Transient Analysis
Dynamic Definition
Examples
Load Amplitude
Forces, Pressures, Inertia

Loads, Temperatures, Base
Motion
Input Entries
TLOADi
FORCEi, PLOADi, GRAV,

RFORCE, TEMP, SPCD, etc.
Temporal Scaling
Time history tables, start

timing
Initial Conditions
Initial displacements, Initial

velocities
Load Combinations
Combine various loading
DLOAD
Integration Time Interval, Time

Output Control
Time increment, output

interval
TSTEP
Viscous dampers
PDAMPi, PBUSH
Structural
PARAM,G + PARAM,W3
Material
MATi (GE) + PARAM,W4
Rayleigh
PARAM, APLPHi
Damping
Hybrid Damping, general

parameters
Modal Schedule
Modal Extraction
Main Index
Frequency range of interest
TABLEDi, DELAY
IC
TIC
DAMPING,
DAMPING
SEDAMP
PARAM,SESDAMP
SDAMPING
TABDMP1
EIGRL
544

Introduction
Table 11-2
Typical Dynamic Input for Frequency Response Analysis
Dynamic Definition
Examples
Load Amplitude

Loads, Temperatures, Base
Motion
Frequency Scaling
Frequency scaling tables

real/imag or mag/phase
Phasing
Delays, Phasing
Load Combinations
DLOAD
Frequency Output Control
Frequency increment
FREQi
Viscous dampers
PDAMPi, PBUSH
Structural
PARAM,G
Material
MATi (GE)
Rayleigh
PARAM, APLPHi
Damping
Input Entries
RLOADi
TABLEDi
DELAY, DPHASE
DAMPING,
DAMPING
SEDAMP
PARAM,SESDAMP
SDAMPING
TABDMP1
Hybrid Damping, general

parameters
Modal Schedule
Modal Extraction
FORCEi, PLOADi, GRAV,

RFORCE, TEMP, SPCD,
etc.
Frequency range of interest
EIGRL
For modal solutions, modal damping on a per-superelement basis can be defined using expanded case
control with PARAM,SESDAMP.
There are two methods for defining the dynamic load in MSC.Nastran:
Direct Reference to TLOADi, RLOADi, or DLOAD
Indirect Reference via the LOADSET / LSEQ Method
In either case, the DLOAD, TLOADi, and RLOADi entries define the dynamic loading.
DLOAD
Dynamic Load Combination or Superposition
Defines a dynamic loading condition for frequency response or transient response problems as a linear
combination of load sets defined via RLOAD1 or RLOAD2 entries for frequency response or TLOAD1
or TLOAD2 entries for transient response. The overall load vector is defined by
P = Scale Scale i P i
i
Main Index
(11-1)
CHAPTER 11 545
Format:
1
10
DLOAD
SID
Scale
Scale1
LID1
Scale2
LID2
Scale3
LID3
Scale4
LID4
-etc.-
17
1.0
2.0
2.0
-2.0
1.5
Example:
DLOAD
Field
-2.0
Contents
SID
Load set identification number selected with DLOAD case control
Scale
Overall Scale Factor
Scalei
Individual Scale Factors applied to LIDi
LIDi
Load set identification number of RLOAD1, RLOAD2, TLOAD1, or TLOAD2

entries
TLOAD1
Transient Response Dynamic Excitation, Form 1, Tabular Input
Defines a frequency dependent dynamic load in the form

Pt = A Ft
(11-2)
for use in transient response or frequency response problems.

Format:
1
TLOAD1
SID
EXCITEID
DELAYI/
TYPE
TID
US0
VS0
DELAYR
Example:
TLOAD1 5
Main Index
15
LOAD
13
10
546

Introduction
Field
Contents
SID
Set identification number. (Integer > 0)
EXCITEID
ID of the DAREA or SPCD or static load (LOAD, FORCE, GRAV, etc.) entry that
defines {A}
DELAYI
ID of the DELAY entry that defines the time delay (allows variable delay per dof)
DELAYR
Real value of the time delay (applies constant delay to all dof in EXCITEDID)
TYPE
Defines TYPE of dynamic loading (load, displacement, velocity, or acceleration)
TID
ID of TABLEDi that defines F t
US0
Scale factor for initial displacements for enforced motion analysis
VS0
Scale factor for initial velocities in enforced motion analysis
TLOAD2
Transient Response Dynamic Excitation, Form 2 Analytical Function
Defines a time dependent dynamic load in the form

, t T1 + or t T2 +
Pf =
C t
A t B e cos 2F t
+ P
(11-3)
, T1 + t T2 +
for use in transient response problems, where t = t T1

Format:
1
TLOAD1
SID
EXCITEID
DELAYI/
TYPE
T1
T2
DELAYR
C
US0
VS0
Example:
TLOAD1 4
2.0
Main Index
10
5.0
2.1
4.7
12.0
10
CHAPTER 11 547
Field
Contents
SID
EXCITEID
defines {A}
DELAYI
ID of the DELAY entry that defines the time delay (allows variable delay per dof)
DELAYR
TYPE
T1, T2
Time constants ( T1 0 T2 T1 )
Frequency in cycles per unit time
Phase angle in degrees
Exponential coefficient
Growth Coefficient
RLOAD1
Frequency Response Dynamic Excitation, Form 1

P f = A C f + iD f e
i 2 f
(11-4)
for use in frequency response problems.

Format:
1
RLOAD1 SID
EXCITEID DELAYI/
DPHASEI/
TC
TD
TYPE
DELAYR
DPHASER
Example:
RLOAD1
Main Index
2.0
10
10
548

Introduction
Field
Contents
SID
EXCITEID
defines {A}
DELAYI
ID of the DELAY entry that defines the time delay
DELAYR
DPHASEI
ID of the DPHASE entry that defines the phase angle (allows variable phase per dof)
DPHASER
Real value of the phase angle (applies constant phase for all dof in EXCITEDID)
TC
ID of the TABLEDi entry that defines C f
TD
ID of the TABLEDi entrie that defines D f
TYPE
RLOAD2
Frequency Response Dynamic Excitation, Form 2

P f = A B f e
i f + 2 f
(11-5)
for use in frequency response problems.

Format:
1
RLOAD1
SID
EXCITEID
DELAYI/
DPHASEI/
TB
TP
TYPE
DELAYR
DPHASER
10
Example:
RLOAD1
15
Field
Main Index
5.0
Contents
SID
EXCITEID
ID of the DAREA or SPCD entry that defines {A}
DELAYI
ID of the DELAY entry that defines the time delay
DELAYR
Real value of the time delay
(applies constant delay to all dof in EXCITEDID)
CHAPTER 11 549
Field
Contents
DPHASEI
ID of the DPHASE entry that defines the phase angle (allows variable phase per dof)
DPHASER
Real value of the phase angle (applies constant phase for all dof in EXCITEDID)
TB
ID of the TABLEDi entry that defines f
TP
ID of the TABLEDi entrie that defines f
TYPE
The TYPE of loading above can be an applied load, enforced displacement, enforced velocity, or
enforced displacement with the following format:
Table 11-3
TYPE of Dynamic Loading defined on RLOADi or TLOADi Entries

TYPE
Main Index
Dynamic Excitation
0, L, LO, LOA, or LOAD
Applied Load (any static load such as FORCE,

MOMENT, PLOADi, GRAV, etc.)
1, D, DI, DIS, or DISP
Enforced displacement using large mass method

or SPC/SPCD method
1, V, VE, VEL, or VELO
Enforced velocity using large mass method or

SPC/SPCD method
1, A, AC, ACC, or ACCE
Enforced acceleration using large mass method or

SPC/SPCD method
550


The dynamic loading in MSC.Nastran is defined for transient and frequency response by selecting a
dynamic load excitation set in the case control with the DLOAD case control entry. The setid on the
DLOAD case control selects the excitation setid defined on a DLOAD, TLOAD1, TLOAD2,
RLOAD1, or RLOAD2 bulk data entry shown above.
In the direct reference to TLOADi, RLOADi, the static load vectors are referenced directly by the
EXCITEID field on the TLOADi or RLOADi entries as illustrated in the figure below.
Figure 11-1
Direct Method of Relating Static Load Vector to EXCITEID Field on the RLOADi
/ TLOADi Entries
If the TYPE of loading is applied load (see Table 11-3), the EXCITEID on the RLOADi or TLOADi
entries may reference DAREA, static (FORCE, PLOADi, GRAV, etc.) or thermal (TEMP, TEMPP1,
TEMPRB) entries.
If the TYPE of loading is enforced motion, the EXCITEID must reference the SETID on SPCD entries.
Main Index
CHAPTER 11 551
Examples for the case control and simple dynamic load definition for direct and modal frequency and
transient response are shown below.
SOL 108 $ Direct Frequency Response
CEND
DISP=ALL
SUBCASE
10801
DLOAD = 10801
FREQ = 10802
BEGIN BULK
$ Harmonic Load, Output Frequencies, and Damping PARAMs for SOL 108/
$ Direct Frequency Response
RLOAD1
10801
10803
FREQ1
10802
500.
250.
10
10804
FORCE
10803
105
100.
0.
0.
100.
0.
0.
10.
1.
2000.
1.
3000.
99999.
0.
ENDT
.08
TABLED1 10804
PARAM
0.
ENDDATA
Listing 11-1
Direct Method Example Dynamic Loading and Structural Damping for Direct
Frequency Response
SOL 109 $ Direct Transient Response

CEND
DISPL=ALL
SUBCASE
10901 $ Direct Transient Response
DLOAD = 10901
TSTEP = 10902
BEGIN BULK
$ Transient Load, Time Step for SOL 109/Direct Transient Response

TLOAD1
10901
10903
TSTEP
10902
19
FORCE
10903
105
0
.01
10904
1
100.
0.
0.
100.
1.
.14
TABLED1 10904
PARAM
Main Index
0.
0.
.05
0.
.08
.17
0.
99999.
0.
ENDT
W3
1000.
-1.
552

PARAM
.08
ENDDATA
Listing 11-2
Direct Method Example Dynamic Loading and Structural Damping for Direct
Transient Response
SOL 111 $ Modal Frequency Response

CEND
DISPL=ALL
SUBCASE
11101 $ Modal Frequency Response
METHOD = 11101
SDAMP = 11102
DLOAD = 11103
FREQ = 11104
BEGIN BULK
$ Modal Frequency Response
EIGRL
11101
TABDMP1 11102
-.1
2000.
10
99999.
0.6
250.
10
CRIT
0.
.06
RLOAD1
11103
11105
FREQ1
11104
500.
FORCE
11105
105
ENDT
11106
100.
0.
0.
100.
1.
2000.
1.
3000.
TABLED1 11106
0.
0.
10.
99999.
0.
ENDT
0.
ENDDATA
Listing 11-3
Direct Method Example Dynamic Loading and Modal Damping for Modal
Frequency Response
SOL 112 $ Modal Transient Response

CEND
DISPL=ALL
SUBCASE
11201 $ Modal Transient Response
METHOD = 11201
SDAMP = 11202
DLOAD = 11203
TSTEP = 11204
BEGIN BULK
Main Index
CHAPTER 11 553
$ Transient Load, Time Step for SOL 112/Modal Transient Response

EIGRL
11201
TABDMP1 11202
-.1
2000.
10
99999.
0.6
ENDT
11206
CRIT
0.
.06
TLOAD1
11203
11205
TSTEP
11204
19
FORCE
11205
105
.01
1
100.
0.
0.
1.
1.
.14
TABLED1 11206
0.
0.
.05
0.
.08
.17
0.
99999.
0.
ENDT
-1.
ENDDATA
Listing 11-4
Main Index
Direct Method Example Dynamic Loading and Modal Damping for Modal
Transient Response
554

Indirect Reference to EXCITEDID: LOADSET / LSEQ

Method
As with the Direct Reference Method, the dynamic loading in MSC.Nastran is defined for transient and
frequency response by selecting a dynamic load excitation set in the case control with the DLOAD case
control entry. The setid on the DLOAD case control selects the excitation setid defined on a DLOAD,
TLOAD1, TLOAD2, RLOAD1, or RLOAD2 bulk data entries shown above. However, in the Indirect
Method, the static load vectors are referenced indirectly by defining an LSEQ entry and adding the
LOADSET case control command.
LSEQ
Static Load Set Definition
Defines a sequence of static or thermal load sets.

Format:
1
LSEQ
LSID
EXCITE LID
ID
99
105
TID
Example:
LSEQ
Field
55
Contents
LSID
Load Sequence Identification number (referenced by LOADSET case

control entry in dynamic analysis)
EXCITEID
The EXCITEID set identification number of the static load vector Links to
EXCITEID on RLOADi or TLOADi entries
LID
Load set identification number of a set of static load entries
TID
Temperature set identification number of a set of thermal load entries
The Indirect Method is illustrated in the figure below.
Main Index
10
CHAPTER 11 555
Figure 11-2
Indirect Method (LOADSET/LSEQ) of Relating Static Load Vectors to

EXCITEID Field on the RLOADi / TLOADi Entries
For multiple loadings, as many LSEQ entries as necessary may be specified.

If the TYPE of loading is applied load (see Table 11-3) , the EXCITEID on the RLOADi or TLOADi
entries are linked to the EXCITEID on the LSEQ entry. The LSEQ entry, in turn, may reference
DAREA, static (FORCE, PLOADi, GRAV, etc.) or thermal (TEMP, TEMPP1, TEMPRB) entries.
The LOADSET entry is used to activate the Load Sequence ID (LSID) on the LSEQ entry.
If the TYPE of loading is enforced motion, the EXCITEID is linked to the EXCITEID on the LSEQ
entry. In turn, the LSEQ entry must reference the SETID on SPCD entries. The LOADSET entry is
used to activate the LSID on the LSEQ entry.
Main Index
556

Examples for the case control and simple dynamic load definition for direct and modal frequency and
transient response are shown below.
SOL 108 $ Direct Frequency Response
CEND
$
$
LOADSET = 999
DISPL=ALL
SUBCASE
10801 $ Direct Frequency Response w/ Random
DLOAD = 10801
FREQ = 10802
BEGIN BULK
$ Direct Frequency Response
FORCE
888
105
LSEQ
999
10803
100.
0.
0.
1.
1.
3000.
888
RLOAD1
10801
10803
FREQ1
10802
500.
250.
10
10804
0.
0.
10.
1.
99999.
0.
ENDT
PARAM
W3
1000.
PARAM
.08
TABLED1 10804
2000.
0.
ENDDATA
Listing 11-5
Indirect Method (LOADSET/LSEQ) Example Dynamic Loading and Structural

Damping for Direct Frequency Response
SOL 109 $ Direct Transient Response

CEND
LOADSET = 999
DISPL=ALL
SUBCASE
10901 $ Direct Transient Response
DLOAD = 10901
TSTEP = 10902
BEGIN BULK
$ Transient Load, Time Step for SOL 109/Direct Transient Response
Main Index
FORCE
888
105
LSEQ
999
10903
TLOAD1
10901
10903
TSTEP
10902
19
100.
0.
10904
888
.01
0.
1.
CHAPTER 11 557
TABLED1 10904
0.
0.
.05
0.
.08
.17
0.
99999.
0.
ENDT
PARAM
W3
1000.
PARAM
.08
1.
.14
-1.
ENDDATA
Listing 11-6
Indirect Method (LOADSET/LSEQ) Example Dynamic Loading and Structural

Damping for Direct Transient Response
SOL 111 $ Modal Frequency Response

CEND
LOADSET=999
DISPL=ALL
SUBCASE
11101 $ Modal Frequency Response
METHOD = 11101
SDAMP = 11102
DLOAD = 11103
FREQ = 11104
BEGIN BULK
$ Modal Frequency Response
FORCE
888
105
LSEQ
999
11105
888
EIGRL
11101
-.1
2000.
10
99999.
0.6
TABDMP1 11102
100.
0.
0.
1.
1.
3000.
CRIT
0.
.06
RLOAD1
11103
11105
FREQ1
11104
500.
250.
10
0.
0.
10.
1.
99999.
0.
ENDT
ENDT
11106
TABLED1 11106
2000.
0.
ENDDATA
Listing 11-7
Indirect Method (LOADSET/LSEQ) Example Dynamic Loading and Modal

Damping for Modal Frequency Response
SOL 112 $ Modal Transient Response

CEND
LOADSET=999
DISPL=ALL
SUBCASE
11201 $ Modal Transient Response
METHOD = 11201
Main Index
558

SDAMP = 11202
DLOAD = 11203
TSTEP = 11204
BEGIN BULK
$ Transient Load, Time Step for SOL 112/Modal Transient Response
FORCE
888
105
LSEQ
999
11205
888
EIGRL
11201
-.1
2000.
10
99999.
0.6
ENDT
11206
TABDMP1 11202
100.
0.
0.
1.
1.
.14
CRIT
0.
.06
TLOAD1
11203
11205
TSTEP
11204
19
.01
0.
0.
.05
0.
.08
.17
0.
99999.
0.
ENDT
TABLED1 11206
-1.
ENDDATA
Listing 11-8
Main Index
Indirect Method (LOADSET/LSEQ) Example Dynamic Loading and Modal

Damping for Modal Transient Response
CHAPTER 11 559
By default modal damping for the modal solutions is only applied to the residual structure modes. In
order to specify modal damping for a superelement PARAM,SESDAMP,YES must be specified along
with the appropriate SDAMP/TABDMP1 and SEDAMP/DAMPING entries. Expanded case control can
be used to apply different modal damping to each superelement. Refer to Expanded Case Control (Ch. 4)
for more details on expanded case control.
Note that damping is additive; that is, modal damping is applied to the upstream mode, and additional
modal damping will be applied to system (residual) modes. Applying modal damping to an upstream
superelement may lead to an over-damped component.
Main Index
560


Patran supports the pre- and post-processing of dynamic results with Superelements. For this example,
the cantilever plate introduced in Simple Example using Cantilever Plate (Ch. 2), will be used to
demonstrate the use of Patran to generate and post-process a modal transient solution. The grid ids,
element ids, and superelement partitioning are shown in the figure below.
Figure 11-3
Cantilever Plate Model used for Dynamic Examples
The user is urged to review the superelement definition process outlined in detail in Demonstration of
Defining Interior Points in Patran (Ch. 2) since this chapter assumes the user is familiar with defining
superelements in Patran and will only focus on the procedures necessary for using superelements in
dynamic analysis.
The procedure for generating a modal transient input file for a superelement model is very similar to the
procedure for generating a modal transient input file for a non-superelement model. The required forms,
resulting MSC.Nastran input file, and output are detailed in this section. The superelement solutions are
shown in subsequent sections.
First, the user must define a time dependent load case in the Loads/BCs tab as shown in the figure below.
Main Index
CHAPTER 11 561
Figure 11-4
Creating a Transient Load Case in Patran
For this example, two dynamic loads are specified; one time varying point load for superelement 10 (grid
211) and one for superelement 0 (grid 105) :
A sinusoidal input at grid 211 tuned to the first bending mode
A sinusoidal input at grid 105 tuned to the second bending mode
The loading history is shown in the figure below. For the users convenience, an excel spreadsheet of
the input loadings is included at /doc/seug/chapter11/transient-response/baseline/time.xlsx. In this
spreadsheet, the input values for a TLOAD2 entry are converted to tabular input. The tabular input is
then saved to CSV files for convenient input to Patran (ref: files /doc/seug/chapter11/transientresponse/baseline/time105.csv and time211.csv)
Main Index
562

Figure 11-5
Time History Loading for Grids 211 and 105
Patran provides a convenient method of importing CSV files to a time dependent field. In the Loads/BCs
tab, the user can use the Create Non-Spatial field icon to bring up the Fields form where the field name
is entered and the CSV file can be imported as shown below.
Figure 11-6
Main Index
Importing a Time-Dependent CSV File to a Patran Field
CHAPTER 11 563
Next, the load is applied to the appropriate grids. This is similar to the process of defining a point load
in statics except that the time-dependent field must be specified.
Note:
Figure 11-7
for a time-dependent load case, the input data form is double-wide as shown below. The
form will initially appear as a single-wide form with a slidebar on the bottom, but the user
may manually resize the form to show the additional input depicted below.
Defining a Time-Dependent Point Load in Patran
The time-dependent load definition procedure outlined above is applicable to Direct or Modal Transient
Response for non-superelement, list (SESET) superelement, and PART superelement models.
To define a modal transient solution, open the Analysis tab and select Solution Type as shown below:
Main Index
564

Figure 11-8
Accessing the Solution Type Form in Patran
To define a modal transient response, the Solution Type form is set as shown below.
Main Index
CHAPTER 11 565
Figure 11-9
Defining a Modal Transient Solution Type in Patran
Next, the integration time step is defined in the appropriate Subcase Parameters forms shown below.
This will generate the TSTEP entries in the MSC.Nastran input file.
Main Index
566

Figure 11-10
Defining Integration Time Step in Patran
In this example, the modal damping is defined as 2% Critical damping over the frequency range. The
appropriate forms are shown below. This will generate TABDMP1 entries in the MSC.Nastran input file.
Main Index
CHAPTER 11 567
Figure 11-11
Defining Modal Damping in Patran
The user can define the desired output in the Output Requests form:
Main Index
568

Figure 11-12
Defining Modal Transient Output Requests in Patran
The appropriate subcase must be selected for the solution:
Figure 11-13
Main Index
Selecting the Appropriate Subcase for Modal Transient Analysis
CHAPTER 11 569
Patran will generate an input file (.bdf) using the indirect LOADSET/LSEQ method described in Indirect
Reference to EXCITEDID: LOADSET / LSEQ Method. The input file is detailed below (ref:
/doc/seug/chapter11/transient-response/baseline/modal-transient.bdf)
SOL 112
CEND
TITLE = Cantilever Beam Modal Transient Solution
LABEL = Baseline, No Superelements
ECHO = NONE
RESVEC = YES
LOADSET = 1
SDAMPING = 1
SUBCASE 1
SUBTITLE=Modal-Transient
METHOD = 1
TSTEP = 1
SPC = 2
DLOAD = 2
DISPLACEMENT(PLOT,SORT2,REAL)=ALL
VELOCITY(PLOT,SORT2,REAL)=ALL
ACCELERATION(PLOT,SORT2,REAL)=ALL
OLOAD(PLOT,SORT2,REAL)=ALL
BEGIN BULK
PARAM
PARAM
POST
PRTMAXIM YES
TSTEP
5000
TABDMP1
CRIT
0.
EIGRL
.02
2.-4
2000.
.02
10
ENDT
0

PSHELL
.1
1.
.833333
$ Loads for Load Case : Modal-Transient

SPCADD
TLOAD1
LSEQ
TLOAD1
LSEQ
DLOAD
1.
1.
1
3
2
1.
Main Index
570

SPC1
123456
101
201
$ Nodal Forces of Load Set : f211

FORCE
211
1.
0.
0.
1.
0.
0.
1.
0.
4.-4
0.
6.-4

FORCE
105
1.
$ Referenced Dynamic Load Tables

$ Dynamic Load Table : time211
TABLED1
2
0.
0.
2.-4
0.
.0312
0.
.0314
0.
.0316
-.025
.0318
-.0649
.032
-.105
.0322
-.144
.0324
-.184
.0326
-.223
.0328
-.261
.033
-.3
.0332
-.338
.0334
-.375
.0336
-.412
.0338
-.448
.034
-.483
.0342
-.518
.1992
0.
.1994
0.
.1996
0.
.1998
0.
.2
0.
ENDT

TABLED1
1
0.
0.
2.-4
0.
4.-4
0.
6.-4
0.
.0304
0.
.0306
-.195
.0308
-.429
.031
-.637
.0312
-.807
.0314
-.927
.0316
-.991
.0318
-.994
.032
-.936
.0322
-.822
.0324
-.657
.0326
-.452
.0328
-.219
.033
.0264
.0332
.271
.0334
.498
.1992
0.
.1994
0.
.1996
0.
.1998
0.
.2
0.
ENDT

ENDDATA 987c7626
Listing 11-9
Non-Superelement Modal Transient Input File
After running MSC.Nastran, the .xdb file can be attached to Patran for post-processing. In addition to
animations and fringe plots, dynamic results are often graphed vs. time. A convenient method of
selecting multiple results (in this case 5000 time steps) is accomplished by using the filtering option as
shown below.
Main Index
CHAPTER 11 571
Figure 11-14
Using Filter Option to Select Multiple Results Time Steps
To view the applied load history for grids 105 and 211, the Applied Loads, Translational is selected.
Next, the Target Entities is used to select the desired nodes.
Main Index
572

Figure 11-15
Selecting Nodes for Graphing Results
Figure 11-16
Applied Load Time History for Grids 105 and 211 (t=0.0 to 0.2 seconds)
Note that the applied load matches the expected applied loads shown in Figure 11-5.
The following figures show results for displacements and accelerations of grids 105 and 211 (the load
application points).
Main Index
CHAPTER 11 573
Main Index
Figure 11-17
Displacement Time History for Grids 105 and 211 (time = 0-1.0 seconds)
Figure 11-18
Displacement Time History for Grids 105 and 211 (time = 0-0.2 seconds)
574

Figure 11-19
Acceleration Time History for Grids 105 and 211 (time = 0-0.2 seconds)

To define a List (SESET) Superelement model for modal transient response analysis, the SESET entries
and component modes (Q-set dof) for each superelement must be defined. Component modes can be
defined so that the Q-Set dof are automatically generatated (AUTOQSET) or manually defined
(SPOINT/SEQSET1). The following sections show the input for these two methods.
Component modes with AUTOQSET
To define a List (SESET) Superelement model, the SESET entries and QSET dof must be defined. This
is easily accomplished in Patran by using the Select Superelements form as shown below:
Main Index
CHAPTER 11 575
Figure 11-20
Defining List Superelements and AUTOQSET for Modal Transient Solution
The resulting input file only differs from the baseline model by adding the PARAM,AUTOQSET and
SESET entries which are highlighted below (ref: /doc/seug/chapter11/transient-response/seset/modaltransient-lseq-autoq.bdf)
SOL 112
CEND
LABEL = SESET Solution
ECHO = NONE
RESVEC = YES
LOADSET = 1
SDAMPING = 1
PARAM,AUTOQSET,YES
SUBCASE 1
METHOD = 1
TSTEP = 1
SPC = 2
Main Index
576

DLOAD = 2

BEGIN BULK
PARAM
PARAM
POST
PRTMAXIM YES
TSTEP
5000
TABDMP1
CRIT
0.
EIGRL
.02
2.-4
2000.
.02
ENDT
10
$ Tip.10
SESET
10
108
THRU
111
SESET
10
208
THRU
211
20
101
102
103
$ Base.20
SESET
201
202
203

SPCADD
TLOAD1
LSEQ
TLOAD1
LSEQ
DLOAD
1.
1.
105
3
211
1.

SPC1
123456
101
201

FORCE
211
1.
0.
0.
1.
0.
0.
1.

FORCE
105
1.

include 'time211.dat'
ENDDATA
Listing 11-10
Main Index
List (SESET) Superelement Modal Transient Input File with AUTOQSET and
LOADSET / LSEQ
CHAPTER 11 577
Component modes with SPOINT/SEQSET1

The component modes could be passed to the residual using manual definition of SPOINT/SEQSET1
entries. The proper input file for this method is as follows (ref: /doc/seug/chapter11/transientresponse/seset/modal-transient-lseq-seqset.bdf)
SOL 112
CEND
LABEL = SESET Solution, LOADSET/LSEQ, SEQSET
ECHO = NONE
RESVEC = YES
LOADSET = 1
SDAMPING = 1
SUBCASE 1
METHOD = 1
TSTEP = 1
SPC = 2
DLOAD = 2

BEGIN BULK
SEQSET1,10,0,1001,thru,1016
SEQSET1,20,0,2001,thru,2016
PARAM
PARAM
POST
PRTMAXIM YES
TSTEP
5000
TABDMP1
CRIT
0.
EIGRL
.02
2.-4
2000.
.02
ENDT
10
$ Tip.10
SESET
10
108
THRU
111
SESET
10
208
THRU
211
20
101
102
103
$ Base.20
SESET

SPCADD
Main Index
201
202
203
578

TLOAD1
LSEQ
Listing 11-11
1
3
List (SESET) Superelement Modal Transient Input File with SEQSET1 and
LOADSET / LSEQ
The results are the same as the baseline model.

List superelements also support the direct reference method described in Direct Reference to EXCITEID.
In this case, the EXCITEDID on the TLOAD1 entry points directly to the load identification number on
a static load entry (FORCE, PLOAD4, GRAV, etc.) or enforced motion entry (SPCD). The examples
in the previous section are modified for the direct reference method as listed below.
The component modes for each LIST Superelement can be passed to the residual structure automatically
by specifying PARAM,AUTOQSET,YES. The proper input file for this method is as follows
SOL 112
CEND
LABEL = SESET Solution, Direct Reference, AUTOQSET
ECHO = NONE
RESVEC = YES
SDAMPING = 1
PARAM,AUTOQSET,YES
SUBCASE 1
METHOD = 1
TSTEP = 1
SPC = 2
DLOAD = 2

BEGIN BULK
PARAM
PARAM
TSTEP
Main Index
POST
PRTMAXIM YES
1
5000
2.-4
CHAPTER 11 579
TABDMP1
CRIT
0.
EIGRL
.02
2000.
.02
ENDT
10
$ Tip.10
SESET
10
108
THRU
111
SESET
10
208
THRU
211
20
101
102
103
$ Base.20
SESET
201
202
203

SPCADD
TLOAD1
105
TLOAD1
211
DLOAD
1.
1.
1.

SPC1
123456
101
201

FORCE
211
1.
0.
0.
1.
0.
0.
1.

FORCE
105
1.

ENDDATA
Listing 11-12
Direct Reference to EXCITEDID

If SEQSET1 entries are specified instead of PARAM,AUTOQSET (ref : /doc/seug/chapter11/transientresponse/seset/modal-transient-dir-autoq.bdf):
SOL 112
CEND
LABEL = SESET Solution, Direct Reference, SEQSET
ECHO = NONE
RESVEC = YES
SDAMPING = 1
Main Index
580

SUBCASE 1
METHOD = 1
TSTEP = 1
SPC = 2
DLOAD = 2

BEGIN BULK
SEQSET1,10,0,1001,thru,1016
SEQSET1,20,0,2001,thru,2016
PARAM
PARAM
POST
PRTMAXIM YES
TSTEP
5000
TABDMP1
CRIT
0.
EIGRL
.02
2.-4
2000.
.02
ENDT
10
$ Tip.10
SESET
10
108
THRU
111
SESET
10
208
THRU
211
20
101
102
103
$ Base.20
SESET
201
202
203

SPCADD
TLOAD1
105
TLOAD1
211
DLOAD
1.
1.
1.

SPC1
123456
101
201

FORCE
211
1.
0.
0.
1.
0.
0.
1.

FORCE
105

ENDDATA
Main Index
1.
CHAPTER 11 581
Listing 11-13
Direct Reference to EXCITEDID
Once again, the results are the same as the baseline model.
PART Superelement LOADSET / LSEQ Reference to

EXCITEDID
For PART Superelements the transient load definition, integration time steps, and modal damping
(TLOADi, TABLEDi, TSTEP, and TABDMP1) entries must be defined in the main bulk data section.
Patran does not support these rules for PART superelements, so the user must manually modify the input
file.
In modal transient response analysis, the component modes (Q-set dof) for each superelement must be
defined and passed to the downstream superelement. Component modes can be defined so that the QSet dof are automatically generated and attached (AUTOQSET), semi-automatically generated and
attached (SENQSET) or manually defined and attached (SPOINT/QSET1 + SECONCT). The
following sections show the input for these three methods to define the component mode dof.
The component modes for each PART Superelement can be passed to the residual structure automatically
by specifying PARAM,AUTOQSET,YES. The proper input file for this example is as follows (ref:
/doc/seug/chapter11/transient-response/parts/modal-transient-lseq-autoq.bdf)
SOL 112
CEND
LABEL = PART SE Solution, LOADSET/LSEQ, AUTOQSET
ECHO = NONE
PARAM,AUTOQSET,YES
RESVEC = YES
LOADSET = 1
SDAMPING = 1
SUBCASE 1
METHOD = 1
TSTEP = 1
SPC = 2
DLOAD = 2

BEGIN BULK
Main Index
582


PARAM
PARAM
POST
PRTMAXIM YES
TSTEP
5000
TABDMP1
CRIT
0.
EIGRL
.02
2.-4
2000.
.02
10
ENDT
0

$ superelement 0 loads
TLOAD1
LSEQ
105
3
TLOAD1
10
DLOAD
11
1.
211
1.
1.
10
0.
0.
1.
0.
1.

FORCE
105
1.

$ Constant Load Table : time105
$
$
BEGIN SUPER = 10
PARAM
PARAM
POST
PRTMAXIM YES
EIGRL
10
LSEQ
11
FORCE
211
1.
0.

$
BEGIN SUPER = 20
PARAM
PARAM
EIGRL
POST
PRTMAXIM YES
1
10

SPCADD
Main Index
CHAPTER 11 583
$ need to specify dummy LSEQ entry for each subcase,

$ i.e. fill a zero load column for this superelement
LSEQ
14

SPC1
123456
101
201

ENDDATA
Listing 11-14
PART Superelement Modal Transient Input File with AUTOQSET and

LOADSET / LSEQ
Component modes with SPOINT/QSET1

The component modes could be passed to the residual using manual definition of SPOINT/QSET1
entries in the PART Superelement bulk data sections and SECONCT entries in the main bulk data
section. The proper input file for this example is as follows (ref: /doc/seug/chapter11/transientresponse/parts/modal-transient-lseq-qset.bdf)
SOL 112
CEND
LABEL = PART SE Solution, LOADSET/LSEQ, QSET1
ECHO = NONE
RESVEC = YES
LOADSET = 1
SDAMPING = 1
SUBCASE 1
METHOD = 1
TSTEP = 1
SPC = 2
DLOAD = 2

BEGIN BULK
SECONCT 10
1001
SECONCT 20
2001
Main Index
0
THRU
1016
11001
THRU
11016
2016
12001
THRU
12016
0
THRU
584

PARAM
PARAM
POST
PRTMAXIM YES
TSTEP
5000
TABDMP1
CRIT
0.
EIGRL
.02
2.-4
2000.
.02
10
ENDT
0

TLOAD1
LSEQ
105
3
TLOAD1
10
DLOAD
11
1.
211
1.
1.
10
0.
0.
1.
0.
0.
1.

FORCE
105
1.

$
$
BEGIN SUPER = 10
QSET1,0,1001,thru,1016
PARAM
POST
LSEQ
11

FORCE
211
1.

$
BEGIN SUPER = 20
QSET1,0,2001,thru,2016
PARAM
POST

SPCADD
Main Index
CHAPTER 11 585
$ need dummy LSEQ entry for subcase,

LSEQ
14

SPC1
123456
101
201

ENDDATA
Listing 11-15
PART Superelement Modal Transient Input File with QSET1 and LOADSET /
LSEQ
Component modes with SENQSET

The component modes could be passed to the residual using semi-automatic definition of SENQSET
entries in the main bulk data section. The proper input file for this method is as follows (ref:
/doc/seug/chapter11/transient-response/parts/modal-transient-lseq-senqset.bdf):
SOL 112
CEND
LABEL = PART SE Solution, LOADSET/LSEQ, SENQSET
ECHO = NONE
RESVEC = YES
LOADSET = 1
SDAMPING = 1
SUBCASE 1
METHOD = 1
TSTEP = 1
SPC = 2
DLOAD = 2

BEGIN BULK
senqset,10,16
senqset,20,16
PARAM
POST

TLOAD1
Main Index
105
586

LSEQ
TLOAD1
10
DLOAD
11
1.
211
1.
1.
10
0.
0.
1.
0.
0.
1.

FORCE
105
1.

$
$
BEGIN SUPER = 10
PARAM
POST
LSEQ
11

FORCE
211
1.

$
BEGIN SUPER = 20
PARAM
POST

SPCADD

LSEQ
14

SPC1
123456
101
201

ENDDATA
Listing 11-16 PART Superelement Modal Transient Input File with SENQSET and LOADSET
/ LSEQ
Once again, the results match the baseline.
Main Index
CHAPTER 11 587

PART superelements also support the direct reference method described in Direct Reference to
EXCITEID. In this case, the EXCITEDID on the TLOAD1 entry points directly to the load
identification number on a static load entry (FORCE, PLOAD4, GRAV, etc.) or enforced motion entry
(SPCD). The examples in the previous section are modified for the direct reference method as listed
below.
/doc/seug/chapter11/transient-response/parts/modal-transient-dir-autoq.bdf)
SOL 112
CEND
LABEL = PART SE Solution, Direct Reference, AUTOQSET
ECHO = NONE
PARAM,AUTOQSET,YES
RESVEC = YES
SDAMPING = 1
SUBCASE 1
METHOD = 1
TSTEP = 1
SPC = 2
DLOAD = 2

BEGIN BULK
PARAM
PARAM
POST
PRTMAXIM YES
TSTEP
5000
TABDMP1
CRIT
0.
EIGRL
.02
2.-4
2000.
.02
10
ENDT
0

TLOAD1
Main Index
105
588

TLOAD1
10
DLOAD
5
1.
211
1.
1.
10
0.
0.
1.
0.
0.
1.

FORCE
105
1.

$
$
BEGIN SUPER = 10
PARAM
POST

FORCE
211
1.

$
BEGIN SUPER = 20
PARAM
POST

SPCADD

SPC1
123456
101
201

ENDDATA
Listing 11-17
PART Superelement Modal Transient Input File with AUTOQET and Direct
Reference to EXCITEDID

Main Index
CHAPTER 11 589
section. The proper input file for this example is as follows (ref: /doc/seug/chapter11/transientresponse/parts/modal-transient-dir-qset.bdf)
SOL 112
CEND
LABEL = PART SE Solution, Direct Reference, QSET1
ECHO = NONE
RESVEC = YES
SDAMPING = 1
SUBCASE 1
METHOD = 1
TSTEP = 1
SPC = 2
DLOAD = 2

BEGIN BULK
SECONCT 10
1001
SECONCT 20
2001
PARAM
PARAM
POST
0
THRU
THRU
11001
THRU
11016
2016
12001
THRU
12016
PRTMAXIM YES
TSTEP
5000
TABDMP1
CRIT
0.
EIGRL
1016
.02
2.-4
2000.
.02
10
ENDT
0

TLOAD1
105
TLOAD1
10
DLOAD
5
1.
211
1.
1.
10
0.
0.

FORCE
105
Main Index
1.
1.
590


$
$
BEGIN SUPER = 10
QSET1,0,1001,thru,1016
PARAM
PARAM
EIGRL
POST
PRTMAXIM YES
1
10

FORCE
211
1.
0.
0.
1.

$
BEGIN SUPER = 20
QSET1,0,2001,thru,2016
PARAM
POST

SPCADD

SPC1
123456
101
201

ENDDATA
Listing 11-18
Main Index
PART Superelement Modal Transient Input File with QSET1 and Direct
CHAPTER 11 591

/doc/seug/chapter11/transient-response/parts/modal-transient-dir-senqset.bdf):
SOL 112
CEND
LABEL = PART SE Solution, Direct Reference, SENQSET
ECHO = NONE
RESVEC = YES
SDAMPING = 1
SUBCASE 1
METHOD = 1
TSTEP = 1
SPC = 2
DLOAD = 2

BEGIN BULK
senqset,10,16
senqset,20,16
PARAM
PARAM
POST
PRTMAXIM YES
TSTEP
5000
TABDMP1
CRIT
0.
EIGRL
.02
2.-4
2000.
.02
10
ENDT
0

TLOAD1
105
TLOAD1
10
DLOAD
1.
211
1.
1.
10
0.
0.

FORCE
105

Main Index
1.
1.
592


$
$
BEGIN SUPER = 10
PARAM
POST

FORCE
211
1.
0.
0.
1.

$
BEGIN SUPER = 20
PARAM
POST

SPCADD

SPC1
123456
101
201

ENDDATA 621e13d3
Listing 11-19
Main Index
PART Superelement Modal Transient Input File with SENQSET and Direct
CHAPTER 11 593

The procedure for generating a modal frequency response input file for a superelement model is very
similar to the procedure for generating a modal frequency response input file for a non-superelement
model. The required forms, resulting MSC.Nastran input file, and output are detailed in this section. The
superelement solutions are shown in subsequent sections.
First, the user must define a frequency dependent load case in the Loads/BCs tab as shown in the figure
below.
Figure 11-21
Creating a Frequency Response Load Case in Patran
For this example, a constant amplitude sine sweep from 0 to 2000 Hz will be applied as a force to two
locations: one point load for superelement 10 (grid 211) and one for superelement 0 (grid 105).
Patran provides a convenient method of defining the frequency-dependent loads. In the Loads/BCs tab,
the user can use the Create Non-Spatial field icon to bring up the Fields form where the field name is
entered and the data can be defined as shown.
Main Index
594

Figure 11-22
Defining a Frequency Dependent Load with a Patran Field
Next, the load is applied to the appropriate grids. This is similar to the process of defining a point load
in statics except that the frequency-dependent field must be specified. NOTE: for a frequency-dependent
load case, the input data form is double-wide as shown below. The form will initially appear as a singlewide form with a slidebar on the bottom, but the user may manually resize the form to show the additional
input depicted below.
Main Index
CHAPTER 11 595
Figure 11-23
Defining a Frequency-Dependent Point Load in Patran
The frequency-dependent load definition procedure outlined above is applicable to Direct or Modal
Frequency Response for non-superelement, list (SESET) superelement, and PART superelement models.
To define a modal frequency response solution, open the Analysis tab and select Solution Type as
shown below:
Main Index
596

Figure 11-24
Accessing the Solution Type Form in Patran
To define a modal frequency response solution, the Solution Type form is set as shown below.
Main Index
CHAPTER 11 597
Figure 11-25
Defining a Modal Transient Solution Type in Patran
Next, the frequency output intervals are defined in the appropriate Subcase Parameters forms shown
below. The forms as shown below will generate the FREQ2 and FREQ4 entries in the MSC.Nastran
input file for a solution frequency range from 10 to 1000Hz. For more details on strategies for specifying
frequency output request intervals refer to the Solution Frequencies (Ch. 4) in the MSC Nastran Dynamic
Analysis Users Guide.
Main Index
598

Figure 11-26
Defining Frequency Output Intervals in Patran
Main Index
CHAPTER 11 599
Figure 11-27
The user can define the desired output in the Output Requests form:
Main Index
600

Figure 11-28
Defining Modal Frequency Response Output Requests in Patran
The appropriate subcase must be selected for the solution:
Main Index
CHAPTER 11 601
Figure 11-29
Selecting the Appropriate Subcase for Modal Frequency Response Analysis
Reference to EXCITEDID: LOADSET / LSEQ Method. The input file is detailed below (ref:
/doc/seug/chapter11/frequency-response/baseline/freq-resp.bdf)
SOL 111
CEND
TITLE = Cantilever Plate Modal Frequency Response Solution
LABEL = Baseline, no superelements
ECHO = NONE
RESVEC = YES
LOADSET = 1
SDAMPING = 1
SUBCASE 1
SUBTITLE=Modal-Frequency
METHOD = 1
FREQUENCY = 1
SPC = 2
DLOAD = 2
Main Index
602

DISPLACEMENT(PLOT,SORT1,PHASE)=ALL
STRESS(PLOT,SORT1,REAL,VONMISES,BILIN)=ALL
BEGIN BULK
PARAM
PARAM
POST
PRTMAXIM YES
$[output frequency requests]

FREQ2
10.
1000.
FREQ4
10.
1000.
50
5
$[modal damping schedule]

TABDMP1
1
0.
EIGRL
CRIT
.03
2000.
.03
10
ENDT
0
$ Loads for Load Case : Modal-Frequency

SPCADD
RLOAD1
1
6
LSEQ
RLOAD1
LSEQ
DLOAD
1.
1.
1
3
1
1.

SPC1
123456
101
201

FORCE
105
1.
0.
0.
1.
0.
0.
1.

FORCE
211
1.

$ Dynamic Load Table : sine-sweep
TABLED1
1
0.
1.
2000.
1.
ENDT

$
$
ENDDATA
Listing 11-20
Non-Superelement Modal Frequency Response Input File
After running MSC.Nastran, the .xdb file can be attached to Patran for post-processing. In addition to
animations and fringe plots, dynamic results are often graphed vs. time. A convenient method of
Main Index
CHAPTER 11 603
selecting multiple results (in this case 78 output frequencies), is by using a filtering option as shown
below.
Figure 11-30
Using Filter Option to Select Multiple Results Frequencies
To view the acceleration output for grids 105 and 211, the Accelerations, Translational is selected. Next,
the Target Entities is used to select the desired nodes.
Main Index
604

Figure 11-31
Selecting Nodes for Graphing Results
The displacement and acceleration responses for grids 105 and 211 are shown below
Main Index
CHAPTER 11 605
Main Index
Figure 11-32
Acceleration Frequency Response for Grids 105 and 211 (10-100 Hz)
Figure 11-33
Displacement Frequency Response for Grids 105 and 211 (10-100 Hz)
606


To define a List (SESET) Superelement model for modal frequency response analysis, the SESET entries
and component modes (Q-set dof) for each superelement must be defined. Component modes can be
defined so that the Q-Set dof are automatically generatated (AUTOQSET) or manually defined
(SPOINT/SEQSET1). The following sections show the input for these two methods.
This is easily accomplished in Patran by using the Select Superelements form as shown below:
Figure 11-34
Defining List Superelements and AUTOQSET for Modal Frequency Response

Solution
The resulting input file only differs from the baseline model by adding the PARAM,AUTOQSET and
SESET entries which are highlighted below (ref: /doc/seug/chapter11/ frequency-response/seset/freqresp-lseq-autoq.bdf)
SOL 111
CEND
TITLE = Cantilever Beam Modal Frequency Response Solution
LABEL = List superelements,LOADSET/LSEQ, AUTOQSET
ECHO = NONE
PARAM,AUTOQSET,YES
Main Index
CHAPTER 11 607
RESVEC = YES
LOADSET = 1
SDAMPING = 1
SUBCASE 1
METHOD = 1
FREQUENCY = 1
SPC = 2
DLOAD = 2

BEGIN BULK
PARAM
PARAM
POST
PRTMAXIM YES
FREQ2
10.
1000.
FREQ4
10.
1000.
TABDMP1
1
0.
EIGRL
50
5
CRIT
.03
2000.
.03
ENDT
10
$ Tip.10
SESET
10
108
THRU
111
SESET
10
208
THRU
211
20
101
102
103
$ Base.20
SESET
201
202

SPCADD
RLOAD1
LSEQ
RLOAD1
LSEQ
DLOAD
1.
1.
1
3
1
1.

SPC1
123456
101
201

FORCE
105
1.
0.
0.
1.
0.
0.
1.

FORCE
211
1.

TABLED1
1
0.
Main Index
1.
2000.
1.
ENDT
203
608


$
$
ENDDATA 07282fbc
Listing 11-21
List (SESET) Superelement Frequency Response Input File with AUTOQSET

and LOADSET / LSEQ

The component modes could be passed to the residual using manual definition of the
SPOINT/SEQSET1 entries refer to Figure 11-34. The proper input file for this method is as follows
(ref: /doc/seug/chapter11/frequency-response/seset/freq-resp-lseq-seqset.bdf):
SOL 111
CEND
LABEL = List superelements, LOADSET/LSEQ, SEQSET1
ECHO = NONE
RESVEC = YES
LOADSET = 1
SDAMPING = 1
SUBCASE 1
METHOD = 1
FREQUENCY = 1
SPC = 2
DLOAD = 2

BEGIN BULK
SEQSET1,10,0,1001,thru,1016
SEQSET1,20,0,2001,thru,2016
PARAM
PARAM
POST
FREQ2
10.
1000.
FREQ4
10.
1000.
TABDMP1
1
0.
Main Index
PRTMAXIM YES
50
5
CRIT
.03
2000.
.03
ENDT
CHAPTER 11 609
EIGRL
10
$ Tip.10
SESET
10
108
THRU
111
SESET
10
208
THRU
211
20
101
102
103
$ Base.20
SESET
201
202
203

SPCADD
RLOAD1
LSEQ
RLOAD1
LSEQ
DLOAD
1.
1.
1
3
1
1.

SPC1
123456
101
201

FORCE
105
1.
0.
0.
1.
0.
0.
1.

FORCE
211
1.

TABLED1
1
0.
1.
2000.
1.
ENDT

$
$
ENDDATA
Listing 11-22
List (SESET) Superelement Modal Frequency Response Input File with

SEQSET1 and LOADSET / LSEQ
The results are the same as the baseline model.

List superelements also support the direct reference method described in Direct Reference to
EXCITEID. In this case, the EXCITEDID on the TLOAD1 entry points directly to the load
identification number on a static load entry (FORCE, PLOAD4, GRAV, etc.) or enforced motion entry
(SPCD). The examples in the previous section is modified for the direct reference method and listed
below.
Main Index
610


The component modes for each List Superelement can be passed to the residual structure automatically
by specifying PARAM,AUTOQSET,YES. The proper input file for this method is as follows
SOL 111
CEND
LABEL = List superelements, Direct Reference, AUTOQSET
ECHO = NONE
PARAM,AUTOQSET,YES
RESVEC = YES
LOADSET = 1
SDAMPING = 1
SUBCASE 1
METHOD = 1
FREQUENCY = 1
SPC = 2
DLOAD = 2

BEGIN BULK
PARAM
PARAM
POST
PRTMAXIM YES
FREQ2
10.
1000.
FREQ4
10.
1000.
TABDMP1
1
0.
EIGRL
50
5
CRIT
.03
2000.
.03
ENDT
10
$ Tip.10
SESET
10
108
THRU
111
SESET
10
208
THRU
211
20
101
102
103
$ Base.20
SESET
201
202

SPCADD
RLOAD1
RLOAD1
DLOAD
1.
1
1
1.
1.
Main Index
203
CHAPTER 11 611
SPC1
123456
101
201

FORCE
105
1.
0.
0.
1.
0.
0.
1.

FORCE
211
1.

TABLED1
1
0.
1.
2000.
1.
ENDT
ENDDATA
Listing 11-23
List (SESET) Superelement Modal Frequency response Input File with

AUTOQSET and Direct Reference to EXCITEDID

The component modes could be passed to the residual using manual definition of SPOINT/SEQSET1
entries. The proper input file for this method is as follows (ref : /doc/seug/chapter11/frequencyresponse/seset/freq-resp-dir-seqset.bdf):
SOL 111
CEND
LABEL = List superelements, LOADSET/LSEQ, SEQSET1
ECHO = NONE
RESVEC = YES
SDAMPING = 1
SUBCASE 1
METHOD = 1
FREQUENCY = 1
SPC = 2
DLOAD = 2

BEGIN BULK
SEQSET1,10,0,1001,thru,1016
SEQSET1,20,0,2001,thru,2016
PARAM
Main Index
POST
612

PARAM
PRTMAXIM YES
FREQ2
10.
1000.
FREQ4
10.
1000.
TABDMP1
CRIT
0.
EIGRL
50
.03
2000.
.03
ENDT
10
$ Tip.10
SESET
10
108
THRU
111
SESET
10
208
THRU
211
20
101
102
103
$ Base.20
SESET
201
202
203

SPCADD
RLOAD1
RLOAD1
DLOAD
1.
1
1
1.
1.

SPC1
123456
101
201

FORCE
105
1.
0.
0.
1.
0.
0.
1.

FORCE
211
1.

TABLED1
1
0.
1.
2000.
1.
ENDT
ENDDATA
Listing 11-24
List (SESET) Superelement Modal Frequency response Input File with

AUTOQSET and Direct Reference to EXCITEDID
Once again, the results are the same as the baseline model
PART Superelement LOADSET / LSEQ Reference to

EXCITEDID
For PART Superelements the frequency load definition, frequency output intervals, and modal damping
(RLOADi, TABLEDi, FREQi, and TABDMP1) entries must be defined in the main bulk data section.
Patran does not support these rules for PART superelements, so the user must manually modify the input
file.
In modal frequency response analysis, the component modes (Q-set dof) for each superelement must be
defined and passed to the downstream superelement. Component modes can be defined so that the QSet dof are automatically generated and attached (AUTOQSET), semi-automatically generated and
Main Index
CHAPTER 11 613
attached (SENQSET) or manually defined and attached (SPOINT/QSET1 + SECONCT). The

following sections show the input for these three methods to define the component mode dof.
by specifying PARAM,AUTOQSET,YES. The proper input file for this method is as follows (ref:
/doc/seug/ frequency-response/chapter11/parts/freq-resp-lseq-autoq.bdf)
SOL 111
CEND
LABEL = PART Superelements, LOADSET/LSEQ, AUTOQSET
ECHO = NONE
PARAM,AUTOQSET,YES
RESVEC = YES
LOADSET = 1
SDAMPING = 1
SUBCASE 1
METHOD = 1
FREQUENCY = 1
SPC = 2
DLOAD = 2

BEGIN BULK
PARAM
PARAM
POST
PRTMAXIM YES
FREQ2
10.
1000.
FREQ4
10.
1000.
TABDMP1
1
0.
EIGRL
50
5
CRIT
.03
2000.
.03
10
ENDT
0

RLOAD1
LSEQ
RLOAD1
10
DLOAD
1
3
11
1.
1
1.
Main Index
1.
10
614

FORCE
105
1.
0.
0.
1.
0.
1.

TABLED1
1
0.
1.
2000.
1.
ENDT

BEGIN SUPER = 10
PARAM
POST

LSEQ
11
FORCE
211
1.
0.
BEGIN SUPER = 20
PARAM
POST

SPCADD

SPC1
123456
101
99
88
201
$ dummy LSEQ
LSEQ

$
$
ENDDATA
Listing 11-25
PART Superelement Modal Frequency Response Input File with AUTOQSET

and LOADSET / LSEQ

section. The proper input file for this method is as follows (ref: /doc/seug/chapter11/frequencyresponse/parts/freq-resp-lseq-qset.bdf)
SOL 111
CEND
LABEL = PART Superelements, LOADSET/LSEQ, QSET1
Main Index
CHAPTER 11 615
ECHO = NONE
RESVEC = YES
LOADSET = 1
SDAMPING = 1
SUBCASE 1
METHOD = 1
FREQUENCY = 1
SPC = 2
DLOAD = 2

BEGIN BULK
SECONCT 10
1001
SECONCT 20
2001
PARAM
PARAM
0
THRU
1016
11001
THRU
11016
2016
12001
THRU
12016
50
0
THRU
POST
PRTMAXIM YES
FREQ2
10.
1000.
FREQ4
10.
1000.
TABDMP1
1
0.
EIGRL
CRIT
.03
2000.
.03
10
ENDT
0

RLOAD1
LSEQ
RLOAD1
10
DLOAD
1
3
11
1.
1
1.
1.
10

FORCE
105
1.
0.

TABLED1
1
0.
1.
2000.
1.

$
BEGIN SUPER = 10
Main Index
ENDT
0.
1.
616

QSET1,0,1001,thru,1016
PARAM
POST

LSEQ
11
FORCE
211
1.
0.
0.
1.

$
BEGIN SUPER = 20
QSET1,0,2001,thru,2016
PARAM
POST

SPCADD

SPC1
123456
101
99
88
201
$ dummy LSEQ
LSEQ

$
ENDDATA
Listing 11-26
PART Superelement Modal Frequency Response Input File with QSET1 and
LOADSET / LSEQ

/doc/seug/chapter11/frequency-response/parts/freq-resp-lseq-senqset.bdf)
SOL 111
CEND
LABEL = PART Superelements, LOADSET/LSEQ, SENQSET
ECHO = NONE
RESVEC = YES
LOADSET = 1
Main Index
CHAPTER 11 617
SDAMPING = 1
SUBCASE 1
METHOD = 1
FREQUENCY = 1
SPC = 2
DLOAD = 2

BEGIN BULK
senqset,10,16
senqset,20,16
PARAM
PARAM
POST
PRTMAXIM YES
FREQ2
10.
1000.
FREQ4
10.
1000.
TABDMP1
1
0.
50
5
CRIT
.03
2000.
.03
ENDT

RLOAD1
LSEQ
RLOAD1
10
DLOAD
1
3
11
1.
1
1.
1.
10

FORCE
105
1.
0.
0.
1.
0.
1.

TABLED1
1
0.
1.
2000.
1.
ENDT

$
BEGIN SUPER = 10
PARAM
POST

LSEQ
11
FORCE
211

$
Main Index
1.
0.
618


BEGIN SUPER = 20
PARAM
POST

SPCADD

SPC1
123456
101
99
88
201
$ dummy LSEQ
LSEQ

$
$
ENDDATA
Listing 11-27
PART Superelement Modal Frequency Response Input File with SENQSET

and LOADSET / LSEQ
Once again, the results match the baseline.

PART superelements also support the direct reference method described in Direct Reference to
EXCITEID. In this case, the EXCITEDID on the TLOAD1 entry points directly to the load identification
number on a static load entry (FORCE, PLOAD4, GRAV, etc.) or enforced motion entry (SPCD). The
examples in the previous section are modified for the direct reference method as listed below.
/doc/seug/chapter11/frequency-response/parts/freq-resp-dir-autoq.bdf)
SOL 111
CEND
LABEL = PART Superelements, Direct Reference, AUTOQSET
ECHO = NONE
PARAM,AUTOQSET,YES
RESVEC = YES
SDAMPING = 1
SUBCASE 1
Main Index
CHAPTER 11 619
METHOD = 1
FREQUENCY = 1
SPC = 2
DLOAD = 2

BEGIN BULK
PARAM
PARAM
POST
PRTMAXIM YES
FREQ2
10.
1000.
FREQ4
10.
1000.
TABDMP1
1
0.
EIGRL
50
5
CRIT
.03
2000.
.03
10
ENDT
0

RLOAD1
RLOAD1
10
DLOAD
1.
1
1
1.
1.
10

FORCE
105
1.
0.
0.
1.
0.
1.

TABLED1
1
0.
1.
2000.
1.
ENDT

$
BEGIN SUPER = 10
PARAM
POST

FORCE
211
1.

$
BEGIN SUPER = 20
PARAM
Main Index
POST
0.
620


SPCADD

SPC1
123456
101
201
ENDDATA
Listing 11-28
PART Superelement Modal Transient Input File with AUTOQET and Direct

section. The proper input file for this example is as follows (ref: /doc/seug/chapter11/frequencyresponse/parts/freq-resp-dir-qset.bdf)
SOL 111
CEND
LABEL = PART Superelements, LOADSET/LSEQ, QSET1
ECHO = NONE
RESVEC = YES
SDAMPING = 1
SUBCASE 1
METHOD = 1
FREQUENCY = 1
SPC = 2
DLOAD = 2

BEGIN BULK
SECONCT 10
1001
SECONCT 20
2001
PARAM
PARAM
FREQ2
Main Index
POST
0
THRU
1016
11001
THRU
11016
2016
12001
THRU
12016
1000.
50
0
THRU
0
PRTMAXIM YES
1
10.
CHAPTER 11 621
FREQ4
TABDMP1
1
0.
EIGRL
10.
1000.
CRIT
.03
2000.
.03
10
ENDT
0

RLOAD1
RLOAD1
10
DLOAD
1.
1
1
1.
1.
10

FORCE
105
1.
0.
0.
1.
0.
1.

TABLED1
1
0.
1.
2000.
1.
ENDT

$
BEGIN SUPER = 10
QSET1,0,1001,thru,1016
PARAM
POST

FORCE
211
1.
0.

$
BEGIN SUPER = 20
QSET1,0,2001,thru,2016
PARAM
POST

SPCADD

SPC1
123456
101
201
ENDDATA
Listing 11-29
Main Index
PART Superelement Modal Transient Input File with QSET1 and Direct
622


/doc/seug/frequency-response/chapter11/parts/freq-resp-dir-senqset.bdf):
SOL 111
CEND
LABEL = PART Superelements, Direct Reference, SENQSET
ECHO = NONE
RESVEC = YES
SDAMPING = 1
SUBCASE 1
METHOD = 1
FREQUENCY = 1
SPC = 2
DLOAD = 2

BEGIN BULK
senqset,10,16
senqset,20,16
PARAM
PARAM
POST
PRTMAXIM YES
FREQ2
10.
1000.
FREQ4
10.
1000.
TABDMP1
1
0.
EIGRL
50
5
CRIT
.03
2000.
.03
10
ENDT
0

RLOAD1
RLOAD1
10
DLOAD
1.
1
1
1.
1.
10

FORCE
105
1.
0.

TABLED1
1
0.
Main Index
1.
2000.
1.
ENDT
0.
1.
CHAPTER 11 623
$
BEGIN SUPER = 10
PARAM
PARAM
EIGRL
POST
PRTMAXIM YES
1
10

FORCE
211
1.
0.
0.
1.

$
BEGIN SUPER = 20
PARAM
PARAM
EIGRL
POST
PRTMAXIM YES
1
10

SPCADD

SPC1
123456
101
201
ENDDATA
Listing 11-30
Main Index
PART Superelement Modal Frequency Response Input File with SENQSET

and Direct Reference to EXCITEDID
624


There are two common strategies for applying dynamic loads to external superelements:
Apply the load in the reduction run and carry it downstream
Keep physical dof at the load application points so that the load can be applied at the assembly
level
The first method allows the user to define either point or distributed loads efficiently, while the second
method is only practical if there are only a few loading points.
Residual Vectors
One consideration for external superelements is the handling of residual vectors. A detailed description
of residual vectors can be found in the Modal Augmentation Methods (Ch. 12) in the MSC Nastran
Dynamic Analysis Users Guide. Currently, MSC.Nastran computes the flexible component modes and
residual vectors and combines them with the constraint modes. When the combined matrices are attached
in a downstream dynamic solution, the residual vectors are not distinguished from the flexible component
modes and are used in the computation of the assembly flexible modes. In this case, the upstream
residual vectors will combine with the system modes and become indistinguishable. The ramifications
are that the upstream residual vectors are allowed to respond dynamically in the system solution. In other
words, RESVEC(NODYN) is only applicable to residual vectors calculated for the residual structure.
Remark 5 of the RESVEC case control command states:
5. Caution needs to be exercised when allowing the residual vectors to respond dynamically in a modal
solution. The best approach is to always include enough normal modes to capture the dynamics of the
problem, and rely on the residual vectors to help account for the influence of the truncated modes on the
quasistatic portion of the response. This is not the default setting for this capability. When choosing to
allow the residual vectors to respond dynamically, it is important to be aware of the frequency content of
the excitation, as it will have the ability to excite these augmentation modes. If this is undesirable, then
the forcing function should be filtered in advance to remove any undesired frequency content, or specify
the NODYNRSP keyword.
Applying a Dynamic Load an External Superelement

Dynamic loads are applied during the dynamic solution. In order to apply a dynamic loading to an
external superelement, the static load vector must have been generated during the reduction run. The
static load can be generated for normal modes, transient response, or frequency response solutions as
detailed in the following table:
Main Index
CHAPTER 11 625
Table 11-4
Defining Static Load Vector During External Superelement Creation Run

Static Load Vector
Definition Case Control
Reduction Solution
Bulk Data Loading
Normal Modes (SOL 103)
LOAD=loadid
FORCE, PLOAD4, GRAV, etc
Transient Response
DLOAD=dynloadid
DLOAD, TLOADi
DLOAD=dynloadid
DLOAD, RLOADi
Direct, SOL 109

Modal SOL 112
Frequency Response
Direct, SOL 108
Modal, SOL 111
A sample of the case control and bulk data necessary to define the static load vector for Normal Modes,
Modal Transient Response, and Modal Frequency Response external superelement creation are shown
below:
assign output2='se10_dmig_103.op2' unit=31 delete
SOL 103
CEND
$
SUBCASE 1
SUBTITLE=Modes
METHOD = 1
$ define static load
LOAD=5
BEGIN BULK
qset1,0,1001,thru,1017
aset1,123456,107,207
FORCE
211
1.
0.
0.
1.
$
EIGRL
Listing 11-31
Main Index
10
Example of Defining a Static Load Vector in Normal Modes External

Superelement Creation Run
626


SOL 112
CEND
$
SUBCASE 1
METHOD = 1
$ not necessary during reduction
$
TSTEP = 1
DLOAD = 10
BEGIN BULK
qset1,0,1001,thru,1017
aset1,123456,107,207
TLOAD1
10
211

FORCE
Listing 11-32
211
1.
0.
0.
Example of Defining a Static Load Vector in Modal Transient External

Superelement Creation Run

SOL 111
CEND
$
SUBCASE 1
METHOD = 1
$ not necessary during reduction
$
FREQ = 1
DLOAD = 10
BEGIN BULK
Main Index
1.
CHAPTER 11 627
qset1,0,1001,thru,1017
aset1,123456,107,207
FREQ2
10.
1000.
FREQ4
10.
1000.
50
5
RLOAD1
10

FORCE
211
1.
0.
0.
1.

TABLED1
1
0.
Listing 11-33
1.
2000.
1.
ENDT
Example of Defining a Static Load Vector in Modal Frequency Response

External Superelement Creation Run
Note that for the dynamic solution sequences, the time varying or frequency varying loads are not
applied. Another way of saying this is that only the static load vector is calculated for the external
superelement.
More detailed examples are contained in CHAPTER 12.
Applying the Time History to the External Loading

Since only the static load vectors are calculated during external superelement creation, the dynamic
loading must be defined during the assembly run. The method applying dynamic load history to the
external superelement is the same as the LOADSET / LSEQ method for PART Superelements defined
in Sections PART Superelement LOADSET / LSEQ Reference to EXCITEDID and PART Superelement
LOADSET / LSEQ Reference to EXCITEDID. This means that the DLOAD, TLOADi, and/or
RLOADi entries for the external superelement loads must be defined in the main bulk data section and
that an LSEQ entry must be defined in the BEGIN SUPER section associated with the external
superelement. Examples for defining dynamic loading on an external superelement for modal transient
and modal frequency response are shown below.
assign inputt2='se10_dmig_112.op2' unit=31
SOL 112
CEND
SDAMPING = 1
LOADSET=1
SUBCASE 1
METHOD = 1
TSTEP = 1
Main Index
628

SPC = 2
DLOAD = 10
BEGIN BULK
TSTEP
5000
TABDMP1
CRIT
0.
EIGRL
.02
2.-4
2000.
.02
10
ENDT
0
TLOAD1
10
211

TABLED1
211
0.
0.
2.-4
0.
4.-4
0.
6.-4
0.
include 'create-se10-112.asm'
$ .pch file has BEGIN SUPER=10
include 'create-se10-112.pch'
LSEQ
Listing 11-34
101
Defining the Dynamic Loading for an External Superelement in the Assembly

Run for Modal Transient Analysis

SOL 111
CEND
SDAMPING = 1
LOADSET=1
SUBCASE 1
SUBTITLE=Modal Frequency Response
METHOD = 1
FREQ= 1
SPC = 2
DLOAD = 10
BEGIN BULK
RLOAD1
10
11

TABLED1
1
0.
1.
2000.
Main Index
1.
ENDT
CHAPTER 11 629

LSEQ
101
Listing 11-35
Defining the Dynamic Loading for an External Superelement in the Assembly

Run for Modal Frequency Response Analysis
More detailed examples are contained in CHAPTER 12.
Combining External Superelement Dynamic Loads with

Residual Dynamic Loads
Combining external superelement dynamic loads with residual structure dynamic loads is accomplished
by using the DLOAD bulk data entry to combing multiple dynamic loads. The DLOAD bulk data entry
must be defined in the main bulk data section only. Examples for modal transient and modal frequency
response are shown below.l
SOL 112
CEND
SDAMPING = 1
LOADSET=1
SUBCASE 1
METHOD = 1
TSTEP = 1
SPC = 2
DLOAD = 2
BEGIN BULK
TSTEP
5000
TABDMP1
CRIT
0.
EIGRL
.02
2.-4
2000.
.02
10
ENDT
0

TLOAD1
LSEQ
105
3
Main Index
TLOAD1
10
DLOAD
1.
211
1.
1.
10
630


FORCE
105
1.
0.
0.
1.

LSEQ
101
ENDDATA
Listing 11-36
Combining Dynamic Loads on External Superelement and Residual Structure

with DLOAD Bulk Data Entry for Modal Transient Response Analysis

SOL 111
CEND
SDAMPING = 1
LOADSET=1
SUBCASE 1
METHOD = 1
FREQ= 1
SPC = 2
DLOAD = 2
BEGIN BULK
FREQ2
10.
1000.
FREQ4
10.
1000.
TABDMP1
1
0.
EIGRL
50
5
CRIT
.03
2000.
.03
10
ENDT
0

Main Index
RLOAD1
LSEQ
1
3
CHAPTER 11 631

FORCE
105
1.
1.
0.
0.
1.
RLOAD1
10
DLOAD
11
1.
1
1.
10

TABLED1
1
0.
1.
2000.
1.
ENDT
LSEQ
Listing 11-37
Main Index
101
Combining Dynamic Loads on External Superelement and Residual Structure

with DLOAD Bulk Data Entry for Modal Frequency Response Analysis
632

External Superelements and Damping

Depending on the type of damping, damping applied directly to the external superelement must be
defined either during the superelement reduction run or the assembly run. A detailed discussion of
damping can be found in the Damping (Ch. 6) in the 3MSC Nastran Dynamic Analysis Users Guide.
Table 11-5
Applying Damping to External Superelements
Damping Effect
Structural Damping
Case Control Entries

n/a
Bulk Data Entries

PARAM,G
PARAM,W3
Material Damping
n/a
MATi, GE field
PARAM,W4
Modal Damping
SDAMPING
SEDAMP
Or
n/a
Applied during
assembly run only
Applied during
reduction run only.
Generates K4
matrices (i.e.
K4AAX)
TABDMP1
Generated during
reduction run only.
Generates BAA
matrices (i.e. BAAX)
DAMPING ALPHA1
and ALPHA2 entries
Generated during
assembly run only.
Must use DMIGPCH
option.
PARAM,SESDAMP,YES
Rayleigh Damping
Comment
Or
PARAM,ALPHA1
PARAM,ALPHA2
Viscous Dampers
n/a
CDAMPi, PBUSH, etc.
Generated during
assembly run only.
Generates BAA
matrices (i.e. BAAX)
Note:
1.
Main Index
Damping is additive. This means that modal damping applied to a superelement

component modes and modal damping applied to the residual solution will be additive.
Chapter 12: External Superelement Examples
12
Main Index
Introduction
Connections
Static Examples
Modal Examples
634

Introduction
Introduction
The purpose of this Chapter is to provide a single-source location for external superelement examples
using both the 2-Step and 3-Step methods. Although there have been many examples throughout this
Guide, this section provides the practioner with a single reference location for the common solutions and
examples to cover most of the methods that can be used to define and attach external superelements.
The model used throughout this section is intentionally simple so that the reader can concentrate on
process rather than geometry:
Figure 12-1
External Superelement Example Model Used Throughout Chapter 12
Section Connections provides a summary of the commands necessary to use external superelements, and
section Static Examples Frequency Response Examples provides detailed examples for statics, normal
modes, modal transient response, and modal frequency response.
There are two methods for defining external superelements, the 2-Step Method and the 3-Step Method.
Section Defining and Attaching External Superelements (Ch. 2) should be reviewed for the basic
differences between the two methods and their implementation and limitations.
Main Index
CHAPTER 12 635
Connections
Patran provides an excellent interface for creating external superelements with the 2-Step method; and
creating the external superelements for the 3-Step method requires only a few extra entries to be entered
manually in the Direct Text Input section when creating an Analysis Job. However, Patran does not
provide a specific interface for connecting the external superelements to a downstream solution, so the
user must enter the connection information manually, either via the Direct Text Input section of Patran,
or by manipulating the input file by hand.
The following subsections describe the connection options and caveats for attaching external
superelements to an assembly run.
Automatic Connections
The easiest method for the user is to use the automatic boundary search option built in to MSC Nastran.
In the automatic search, the locations of the boundary are compared to the locations of all other grids in
the model, and if there is a geometric match (within tolerance), the grids are automatically connected in
the superelement map (refer to Section The Superelement Map SEMAP (Ch. 2), for more details).
The SEBULK bulk data entry is used to define the external superelement (the TYPE field) and the
connection method (the METHOD field).
SEBULK
Format:
1
SEBULK
SEID
TYPE
RSEID
METHOD
TOL
LOC
UNITNO
Example:
SEBULK
Field
Main Index
14
REPEAT
AUTO
1.0E-3
Contents
SEID
Partitioned superelement identification number. See Remark 10. (Integer > 0)
TYPE
Superelement type. (Character; no Default)
10
636

Connections
Field
Contents
PRIMARY
Primary
REPEAT
Identical
MIRROR
Mirror
COLLCTR
Collector
EXTERNAL
External
EXTOP2
External using an OUTPUT2 file created in an
earlier run.
RSEID
Identification number of the reference superelement, used if TYPE = REPEAT and

MIRROR. (Integer > 0; Default = 0)
METHOD
Method to be used when searching for boundary grid points. (Character: AUTO or
MANUAL; Default = AUTO)
TOL
Location tolerance to be used when searching for boundary grid points. (Real; Default
= 10E-5)
LOC
Coincident location check option for manual connection option. (Character: YES or
NO; Default = YES)
UNITNO
FORTRAN unit number for the OUTPUT2 file (applicable and meaningful only when
TYPE = EXTOP2).
When the AUTO method is chosen, MSC Nastran performs a boundary search for the external
superelement in the same manner as it does for internal PART superelements.
Manual Connections
The automatic attachment method to find boundary connections works in many applications, however,
there are circumstances when it will fail or provide unintended connections. An example where the
automatic connection logic will fail is when there are multiple coincident grids at the attachment points.
In this case, MSC Nastran cannot determine the user intention and will issue a FATAL message. Another
example where the automatic connection logic will provide unintended connections is when there are
grids retained in the reduction run that are not intended to be attached to an assembly. For instance, the
user may retain additional grids in the reduction so that relative displacements can be calculated between
the component and a grid that is in the assembly solution.
Fortunately, MSC Nastran has anticipated these cases and provides the user options to define the
connections manually. The following subsections describe the entries available to the user to handle the
cases where there are multiple coincident grids or grids that should not be connected.
Main Index
CHAPTER 12 637
SECONCT
The SECONCT entry is used to explicitly define the attachment grids (or spoints). The format is straight
forward as the user defines the superelements to be considered and the grid/spoint pairings.
SECONCT
Explicitly defines grid and scalar point connection procedures for a partitioned superelement.
Format:
1
SECONCT
SEIDA
SEIDB
TOL
LOC
GIDA1
GIDB1
GIDA2
GIDB2
GIDA3
GIDB3
-etc.-
10
Example:
SECONCT
10
20
1.0E-4
1001
4001
YES
2222
4444

SECONCT
SECONCT
Field
Main Index
SEIDA
SEIDB
TOL
LOC
GIDA1
THRU
GIDA2
GIDB1
10
20
101
THRU
110
THRU
201
GIDB2
THRU
210
Contents
SEIDA
SEIDB
TOL
LOC
Coincident location check option for manual connection. (Character; YES or NO;
Default = YES)
638

Connections
Field
Contents
GIDAi
Identification number of a grid or scalar point in superelement SEIDA, which will be

connected to GIDBi
GIDBi
Identification number of a grid or scalar point in superelement SEIDB, which will be

connected to GIDAi
SEEXCLD
Rather than define a manual pairing (which is potentially a tedious process), the user has the option to
exclude grids from the automatic search with the SEEXCLD entry. The interface requires the
superelement pairings and the grids/spoints to be excluded in the search (on one side of the superelement
interface).
SEEXCLD
Partitioned Superelement Exclusion
Defines grids that will be excluded during the attachment of a partitioned superelement.
Format:
1
SEEXCLD
SEIDA
SEIDB
GIDA1
GIDA2
GIDA3 GIDA4 GIDA5 GIDA6
GIDA7
GIDA8
-etc.-
110
10
45
678
396
10
Example 1:
SEEXCLD
Example 2:
SEEXCLD
Field
Main Index
400
ALL
10
20
30
THRU
40
Contents
SEIDA
SEIDB
Superelement identification. (Integer > 0 or Character = ALL; Default = ALL)
GIDAi
Identification number of a grid in superelement SEIDA to be excluded from connection

to superelement SEIDB. (Integer > 0 or THRU; for THRU option GIDA1 <
GIDA2.)
CHAPTER 12 639
SEBNDRY
Another method for removing conflicts (multiple grids) or unintentional connections is with the
SEBNDRY entry. In this case, the automatic boundary search is limited to the grids specified on the
SEBNDRY entry.
SEBNDRY
Superelement Boundary-Point Definition
Defines a list of grid points in a partitioned superelement for the automatic boundary search between a
specified superelement or between all other superelements in the model.
Format:
1
SEBNDRY
SEIDA SEIDB
10
GIDA1 GIDA2 GIDA3 GIDA4 GIDA5 GIDA6
GIDA7 GIDA8 -etc.Example:

1
SEBNDRY
400
10
20
30
40
10
This entry is used to limit the automatic search logic to selected grid points for certain PARTs. Any grid
points listed on this entry are the only grid points in SEIDA to which the automatic logic can connect
grid points in SEIDB.
Field
Contents
SEIDA
SEIDB
Superelement identification. See Remark 2. (Integer > 0 or Character ALL; Default

= ALL)
GIDAi
Identification number of a boundary grid point in superelement SEIDA. (Integer > 0 or

THRU; For THRU option, G1 < G2.)
Potential Conflicts with SPC/MPC dof

During the superelement reduction, the boundary dof are defined with ASET/ASET1, BSET/BSET1,
CSET/CSET1, BNDFIX/BNDFIX1, BNDFREE/BNDFREE1, or QSET/QSET1 entries. The
boundary dof must be part of the MSC Nastran ASET; therefore, the boundary dof must not be SPCd,
MPCd, or AUTOSPCd during the reduction process.
Main Index
640

Connections
PARAM AUTOMSET
Boundary dof are often chosen at centerline grids for external superelement models. In many cases an
RBE3 is used to spider the centerline grid dof to the physical grids as shown below.
Figure 12-2
Example of RBE3 Connecting Centerline Grid to Structural Grids
In the case of an RBE3, the central grid is dependent by default; therefore if the user assigns this as an
external point, there will be conflicts between the dependent dof (M-Set) and the A-set dof and a FATAL
message will occur. To avoid the set conflict, the user has two options:
Use the UM option on the RBE3 to reassign the dependent dof
Use PARAM,AUTOMSET,YES to instruct MSC Nastran to resolve the conflict
For either option, the set conflict is resolved and the reduction to the boundary occurs without incident.
Lagrange MPCs
Typically, the dependent dof associated with RBEs are placed in the mr set, while the dependent dof
associated with MPCs are placed in the mp set; which collectively define the M-Set. However, if the
user specifies RIGID=LAGRAN in the case control, the dependent dof are carried into the ASET as part
of the lm dof. Currently the MSC.Nastran processing does not handle the RIGID=LAGRAN for
external superelement reduction. This is not legal and a FATAL message will ensue:
*** USER FATAL MESSAGE 4349 (GP4)
Main Index
CHAPTER 12 641
THERE ARE LAGRANGE RIGID ELEMENTS IN THE MODEL (RBAR, RBE1, RBE2, RBE3,
RJOINT, RROD, RPRPLT) AND AN EXTERNAL SUPERELEMENT GENERATION REQUEST
(EXTSEOUT OR PARAM,EXTOUT).
USER INFORMATION: AN EXTERNAL SUPERELEMENT (CREATED WITH THE EXTSEOUT

CASE CONTROL COMMAND OR THE EXTOUT PARAMETER) CANNOT CONTAIN
LAGRANGE RIGID ELEMENTS.
Main Index
642

Static Examples
Static Examples
The static examples are based on the model shown in Figure 12-1, section Defining and Attaching External
Superelements (Ch. 2) provides additional details about the commands.
The examples for each method described in this section are organized as follows in the MSC Nastran
installation directories /doc/seug/chapter12/statics:
Figure 12-3
Example Files for Static 2-Step External Superelement Method
Static Examples Using 2-Step Method (EXTSEOUT)

Baseline Solution Without Superelements
The baseline solution for the cantilever plate in Figure 12-1 was covered in section Simple Example using
Cantilever Plate (Ch. 2), and will not be revisited here. The baseline file can be found in
/doc/seug/chapter12/statics/baseline/cant-beam.bdf. This file will be used as the comparison point for all
examples detailed in this section.
Step 1: Creation of External Superelement
When using the 2-step method to create an external superelement, the EXTSEOUT provides different
formats of creating the reduced matrices and output transformation matrices:
MATRIXDB* store the matrices and output transformation matrices on the MASTER/DBALL
DMIGDB* store the matrices and output transformation matrices on the MASTER/DBALL in
DMIG binary format

DMIGOP2 store the matrices and output transformation matrices on an .op2 file
MATOP4 store the matrices and output transformation matrices on the .pch and .op4 files
DMIGPCH store the matrices and output transformation matrices on the .pch
Main Index
CHAPTER 12 643
Note:
If the user selects MATRIXDB or DMIGDB method, the input file must be run with
SCRATCH=NO to save the .MASTER/.DBALL for the second step.
The first step in creating an external superelement is to define the boundary dof by specifying the ASET
entries. Patran provides a convenient form to define the ASET. A representative example is shown
below.
Figure 12-4
Defining Boundary dof in Patran
The Patran interface allow the user to select the desired method through the Translation Parameters tab
of the Analysis form.
Main Index
644

Static Examples
Figure 12-5
Selecting EXTSEOUT Method in Patran
Patran will export an MSC Nastran input file with the appropriate entries to perform the external
superelement creation:
SOL 101
CEND
TITLE = MSC Nastran JOB CREATED ON 20-MAR-11 AT 12:28:00
ECHO = NONE
EXTSEOUT(ASMBULK,EXTBULK,EXTID=20,MATRIXDB)
SUBCASE 1
TITLE=MSC Nastran JOB CREATED ON 20-MAR-11 AT 12:28:00
SUBTITLE=DEFAULT
LABEL=SESET STATIC SOLUTION
SPC = 2
BEGIN BULK
Main Index
CHAPTER 12 645
ASET1
123456
104
204
ENDDATA
Listing 12-1
Static Reduction Run for MATRIXDB Method 2-Step Method
In the .bdf file, the EXTSEOUT command is in the case control section.
The external creation runs for the various methods can be found in /doc/seug/chapter12/statics/external2-step/*/create-se10.bdf and create-se20.bdf; where *=dmigdb, dmigop2, dmigpch, matop4, or
matrixdb.
If there is more than one superelement, the user will need to check the UNIT numbers that PATRAN has
automatically assigned. Since there are multiple superelements that will be attached in the assembly run,
the user will need to manually adjust the unit numbers in the DMIGOP2 or MATOP4 options to avoid
conflicts during the assembly. These necessary changes are highlighted in the listings below
ASSIGN OUTPUT4='extse10.op4',UNIT=35
SOL 101
CEND
ECHO = NONE
EXTSEOUT(ASMBULK,EXTBULK,EXTID=10,MATOP4=35)
SUBCASE 1
SOL 101
CEND
ECHO = NONE
EXTSEOUT(ASMBULK,EXTBULK,EXTID=10,MATOP4=36)
SUBCASE 1
Listing 12-2
Example Highlighting Changes to Input File Necessary to Avoid Conflicts in the

Assembly Run (MATOP4 shown, DMIGOP2 similar)
After running the reduction run, MSC Nastran will produce two files (.asm and .pch) that define the
necessary connection information. These files assume that the connection nodes in the assembly run will
have the same IDs as the grids in the reduction run. If this is not the case, the user can modify the
SEBULK entry to use the AUTO method, or manually provide the pairs.
Main Index
646

Static Examples
An example of the .asm and .pch files defining the default external superelement connections are shown
below:
$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$
$
10
$ ------------------------------------------------------------$

$
$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$
$--------------------------- COLUMN NUMBERS ---------------------------$00000000111111111122222222223333333333444444444455555555556666666666777
$23456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012
$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$
$
SEBULK
10
EXTOP4
MANUAL
35
$
SECONCT
10
107
107
207
207
$
$
GRID
107
6.
GRID
207
6.
0.
1.
0.
0.
$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$
Listing 12-3
External Superelement .asm File Generated Automatically from the External

Superelement Reduction Run (ASMBULK option chosen)
$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$
$
10
$ ------------------------------------------------------------$
$
$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$
$--------------------------- COLUMN NUMBERS ---------------------------$00000000111111111122222222223333333333444444444455555555556666666666777
$23456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012
Main Index
CHAPTER 12 647
$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$
$
BEGIN SUPER
10
$
EXTRN
107
123456
207
123456
$
$
GRID
107
6.
GRID
207
6.
0.
1.
0.
0.
$
ASET
107
Listing 12-4
123456
207
123456
External Superelement .pch File Generated Automatically from the External

Superelement Reduction Run (EXTBULK option chosen)
Note that if coordinate systems are necessary to define the grid placement or displacement coordinate
systems, then they would also be generated.
Step 2: Attachment of External Superelement with Data Recovery
To create the assembly input file, the user needs to define the appropriate File Management Section
entries to define the external superelement files and define the appropriate Bulk Data entries to define
the external superelement attachment information. The required entries can be entered manually by
editing the assembly input file or by defining the commands in the Direct Text Input when generating an
Analysis file in Patran.
For the MATRIXDB method, the direct text is shown in the figures below.
Figure 12-6
Main Index
Direct Text Input for the File Management Section Required to Attach the
External Superelements (MATRIXDB and DMIGDB Methods)
648

Static Examples
Figure 12-7
Note:
Direct Text Input for the Bulk Data Section Required to Attach the External
Superelements (all Methods)
The Direct Text Input for the bulk data section must be written at the END of the input
file. The correct order is to include all of the .asm files, followed by the .pch files. Recall
that the .pch files have a BEGIN SUPER entry which means the entries after the include
.pch will be applicable to the superelement
The resulting assembly input file for the MATRIXDB method is shown below with the direct text inputs
highlighted.
$ Direct Text Input for Nastran System Cell Section
assign se10m='se_10_reduce_matrixdb.MASTER'
SOL 101
CEND
ECHO = NONE
SUBCASE 1
SUBTITLE=DEFAULT
Main Index
CHAPTER 12 649
BEGIN BULK

include 'se_10_reduce_matrixdb.asm'
include 'se_10_reduce_matrixdb.pch'
ENDDATA
Listing 12-5
Static Assembly Input File for the MATRIXDB and DMIGDB Methods
The DMIGDB option uses the same FMS and BULK entries as the MATRIXDB method.
For the DMIGPCH file, the case control section must be modified to include the K2GG and P2G entries
as shown below:
Figure 12-8
Direct Text Input for the Case Control Section Required to Attach the External
Superelements (DMIGPCH Method)
For the DMIGOP2 assembly file, the File Management Section of direct text input must specify the file
names associated with each external superelement. Here, the user will define the ASSIGN INPUTT2
entries with their associated unit numbers for the respective files.
Main Index
650

Static Examples
Figure 12-9
External Superelements (DMIGOP2 Method)
The MATOP4 method uses similar File Management Section entries except INPUTT4 replaces
INPUTT2.
Static Examples Using 3-Step Method

The 3-Step method of external superelement creation, assembly, and data recovery is not directly
supported by Patran. However, the required entries are reasonably straight forward and easily entered by
hand.
The baseline solution is the same as described in Section Baseline Solution Without Superelements.
The difference for the External Superelement Creation between the 2-step method and the 3-step method
is accomplished by replacing the EXTSEOUT case control command with PARAM,EXTOUT and
PARAM,EXTUNIT. The following table summarizes the commands necessary for each method:
Main Index
CHAPTER 12 651
Table 12-1
Summary of Commands Required for Step 1 of 3-Step Method
Method
Command(s)
Comment
MATRIXDB
Run with SCR=NO
DMIGDB
PARAM,EXTOUT,DMIGDB
Run with SCR=NO
DMIGOP2
ASSIGN OUTPUT2unitnumber
Run with SCR=NO
PARAM,EXTUNIT,unitnumber
DMIGPCH
Cannot be used for data

recovery step
MATRIXOP4
Run with SCR=NO
PARAM,EXTOUT,MATRIXOP4
A sample .bdf for DMIGDB and DMIGOP2 reductions can be seen below.
SOL 101
CEND
ECHO = NONE
param,extout,dmigdb
SUBCASE 1
SUBTITLE=DEFAULT
SPC = 2
BEGIN BULK
ASET1
123456
104
204

ENDDATA
Listing 12-6
Main Index
External Superelement Reduction for Step 1 of 3 Step Method DMIGDB

Method
652

Static Examples
ASSIGN OUTPUT2='extse10.op2',UNIT=35 delete

SOL 101
CEND
ECHO = NONE
$EXTSEOUT(ASMBULK,EXTBULK,EXTID=10,DMIGOP2=35)
PARAM,EXTUNIT,35
SUBCASE 1
SUBTITLE=DEFAULT
LOAD = 3
BEGIN BULK
ASET1
123456
107
207

ENDDATA
Listing 12-7
External Superelement Reduction for Step 1 of 3 Step Method DMIGOP2

Method
Step 2: Attachment of External Superelement

In the creation of the residual solution assembly file, the user defines the FMS entries necessary to define
the files created in the Step 1 reduction. The user must also define the connection information (SEBULK
and SECONNCT) in the main bulk data section as well as the grids, coordinate frames, and EXTERN
entries in the PART superelement section associated with each external superelement.
In addition, the boundary solution must be saved for Step-3, data recovery. In order to save the boundary
solution, a file must be defined and PARAM,EXTROUT and PARAM,EXTDRUNT must be defined
in the bulk data section for each external superelement for which data recovery is desired. The following
table shows the commands necessary to request and store the boundary solution matrices for each
method.
Main Index
CHAPTER 12 653
Table 12-2
Methods to Store the Boundary Solution for Use in Step 3, Data Recovery
METHOD
Commands
Comment
MATRIXDB
PARAM,EXTDROUT,MATRIXDB
Run with SCR=NO
DMIGDB
PARAM,EXTDROUT,DMIGDB
Run with SCR=NO
DMIGOP2
PARAM,EXTDRUNT,unitnumber
DMIGOP4
Use one of the other methods
DMIGOP4 data recovery

matrices are not supported,
use one of the other methods
to store the boundary matrics
Sample input files for the DMIGDB and DMIGOP2 methods are shown below.
ASSIGN SE10M='se_10_reduce_dmigdb.master'
ASSIGN SE10D='se_10_reduce_dmigdb.dball'
DBLOCATE DB=(EXTDB) CONVERT(SEID=10),LOGICAL=SE10M
ASSIGN MASTER='assemble_dmigdb.master' delete
ASSIGN DBALL='assemble_dmigdb.dball' delete
SOL 101
CEND
ECHO = NONE
SUBCASE 1
SUBTITLE=DEFAULT
BEGIN BULK
Main Index
654

Static Examples
SEBULK
10EXTERNAL
MANUAL
$
SECONCT
10
107
107
SEBULK
207
207
20EXTERNAL
MANUAL
$
SECONCT
20
104
104
BEGIN SUPER
204
204
207
123456
10
PARAM,EXTDROUT,dmigdb
$
EXTRN
107
123456
$
$
GRID
107
6.
GRID
207
6.
0.
1.
0.
0.
$
ASET
107
BEGIN SUPER
123456
207
123456
204
123456
20
PARAM,EXTDROUT,dmigdb
$
EXTRN
104
123456
$
$
GRID
104
3.
GRID
204
3.
0.
1.
0.
0.
$
ASET
104
123456
204
123456
ENDDATA
Listing 12-8
Assembly Input File for DMIGDB Method Step 2 of 3 Step Method
ASSIGN MASTER='assemble.master' delete

ASSIGN DBALL='assemble.dball' delete
ASSIGN INPUTT2='extse10.op2' unit=35
ASSIGN OUTPUT2='extse10bndry.op2' unit=37 DELETE
Main Index
CHAPTER 12 655

SOL 101
CEND
ECHO = NONE
SUBCASE 1
SUBTITLE=DEFAULT
BEGIN BULK
$ define connection for SE 10 uses AUTO connection

sebulk,10,extop2, , , , ,35
sebulk,20,extop2, , , , ,36
BEGIN SUPER=10
PARAM,EXTDRUNT,37
extrn
107
207
123456
GRID
107
123456
6.
0.
0.
GRID
207
6.
1.
0.
BEGIN SUPER=20
PARAM,EXTDRUNT,38
extrn
104
204
123456
GRID
104
123456
3.
0.
0.
GRID
204
3.
1.
0.
ENDDATA
Listing 12-9
Assembly Input File for DMIGOP2 Method Step 2 of 3 Step Method
The figures below show the Patran Direct Text Input necessary for the MATRIXDB method.
Main Index
656

Static Examples
Figure 12-10
Definition of FMS Direct Text Input for MATRIXDB Method Step 2 of 3-Step
Method
Figure 12-11
Definition of Bulk Data Direct Text Input for MATRIXDB Method Step 2 of 3Step Method
Step 3: External Data Recovery Restart

In the data recovery stage of the 3-step method, the user can obtain full data recovery (including Grid
Point Forces, MPCForces, etc.) and obtain .xdb output. In the recover files, it is necessary to restart from
the Step 1 MSC Nastran database (.MASTER and .DBALL files). The user must define the files which
contain the boundary solution for each respective superelement from Step 2. The user must keep the case
control structure (SPC, MPC, LOAD, DEFORM, etc.) the same as the Step 1 solution, with the
exception of data recovery.
Main Index
CHAPTER 12 657
The following entries are required for the data recovery step:
Table 12-3
Commands Required for Step 3 Data Recovery
Method
MATRIXDB
Commands
ASSIGN step 1 database
RESTART step 1 database
Comment
Use read-only restart with
LOGICAL=on RESTART
command
PARAM,EXTDR,YES
DMIGDB


LOGICAL=on RESTART
command

DBLOCATE boundary solution
PARAM,EXTDR,YES
DMIGOP2


LOGICAL=on RESTART
command
ASSIGN step2 data recovery .op2

PARAM,EXTDR,YES
PARAM,EXTDRUNT
MATRIXOP4


LOGICAL=on RESTART
command
ASSIGN step2 data recovery .op2

PARAM,EXTDR,YES
PARAM,EXTDRUNT
Sample Step 3 data recovery files for DMIGDB and DMIGOP2 are shown below.
RESTART LOGICAL=SE10M
ASSIGN ASSYM='assemble_dmigdb.master'
DBLOCATE DB=(EXTDB) WHERE(SEID=10),LOGICAL=ASSYM

Main Index
658

Static Examples
SOL 101
CEND
ECHO = NONE
PARAM,EXTDR,YES
PARAM,POST,0
SUBCASE 1
SUBTITLE=DEFAULT
LOAD = 3
BEGIN BULK
ENDDATA
Listing 12-10
Data Recovery Input File for DMIGDB Method Step 3 of 3 Step Method
ASSIGN SE10M='se_10_reduce_dmigop2.master'
ASSIGN SE10D='se_10_reduce_dmigop2.dball'
ASSIGN INPUTT2='extse10bndry.op2' UNIT=37

SOL 101
CEND
ECHO = NONE
PARAM,EXTDR,YES
PARAM,EXTDRUNT,37
PARAM,POST,0
SUBCASE 1
SUBTITLE=DEFAULT
LOAD = 3
Main Index
CHAPTER 12 659
BEGIN BULK
ENDDATA
Listing 12-11
Main Index
660

Modal Examples
Modal Examples
The modal examples are based on the model shown in Figure 12-1, section Defining and Attaching
External Superelements (Ch. 2) provides additional details.
installation directories /doc/seug/chapter12/modal:
Figure 12-12
The primary difference between a static reduction and a modal reduction is the definition of entries
required to store and attach the modal dof associated with Component Modes Synthesis. For more
information on Component Modes Synthesis, refer to Dynamic Reduction Component Modes Synthesis
(Ch. 9).
Modal Examples Using 2-Step Method (EXTSEOUT)

The modal examples are based on the model shown in Figure 12-1, section Defining and Attaching
External Superelements (Ch. 2) provides additional details.
installation directories /doc/seug/chapter12/modal:
Main Index
CHAPTER 12 661
Figure 12-13
The primary difference between a static reduction and a modal reduction is the definition of entries
required to store and attach the modal dof associated with Component Modes Synthesis. For more
information on Component Modes Synthesis, refer to Dynamic Reduction Component Modes
Synthesis (Ch. 9).
The baseline solution for the cantilever plate in Figure 12-1 was covered in Chapter 2 and will be
revisited here. The baseline file can be found in /doc/seug/chapter12/modal/baseline/modal.bdf. This file
will be used as the comparison point for all examples detailed in this section.
DMIG binary format

Note:
Main Index
If the user selects MATRIXDB or DMIGDB method, the input file must be run with
662

Modal Examples
and SPOINT/QSET entries. Patran provides a convenient form to define the ASET. A representative
example is shown in Figure 12-4. Often SPOINTS and QSET dof are defined manually to control the IDs.
In Patran, the user can define the SPOINT and QSET entries in the Direct Text Input section for Bulk
Data.
of the Analysis form as shown in Figure 12-5.
superelement creation, a MATRIXDB example is shown below:
SOL 103
CEND
ECHO = NONE
RESVEC = YES
EXTSEOUT(ASMBULK=MANQ,EXTBULK,EXTID=10,MATRIXDB)
SUBCASE 1
$ Subcase name : DEFAULT.SC1
SUBTITLE=DEFAULT.SC1
METHOD = 1
BEGIN BULK
$ Loads for Load Case : DEFAULT.SC1

SPOINT
1001
QSET1
ASET1
123456
THRU
1016
1001
THRU
107
207
1016

ENDDATA
Listing 12-12
Modal Reduction Run for MATRIXDB Method 2-Step Method
In the .bdf file, the EXTSEOUT command is in the case control section.
The external creation runs for the various methods can be found in /doc/seug/chapter12/modal/external2-step/*/create-se10.bdf and create-se20.bdf; where *=dmigdb, dmigop2, dmigpch, matop4, or
matrixdb.
Main Index
CHAPTER 12 663
SOL 103
CEND
ECHO = NONE
EXTSEOUT(ASMBULK=manq,EXTBULK,EXTID=10,MATOP4=35)
SUBCASE 1
SOL 103
CEND
ECHO = NONE
EXTSEOUT(ASMBULK=manq,EXTBULK,EXTID=10,MATOP4=36)
SUBCASE 1
Listing 12-13 Example Highlighting Changes to Input File Necessary to Avoid Conflicts in the
below:
$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$
$
10
$ ------------------------------------------------------------$

$
$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$
$--------------------------- COLUMN NUMBERS ---------------------------$00000000111111111122222222223333333333444444444455555555556666666666777
$23456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012
$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$
Main Index
664

Modal Examples
$
SEBULK
10
EXTOP4
MANUAL
35
$
SECONCT
SPOINT
10
107
107
207
207
1001
THRU
1016
1001
1001
THRU
1016
THRU
1016
$
$
GRID
107
6.
GRID
207
6.
0.
1.
0.
0.
$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$
Listing 12-14

$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$
$
10
$ ------------------------------------------------------------$
$
$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$
$--------------------------- COLUMN NUMBERS ---------------------------$00000000111111111122222222223333333333444444444455555555556666666666777
$23456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012
$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$
$
BEGIN SUPER
10
$
EXTRN
107
123456
207
123456
$
$
GRID
107
6.
GRID
207
6.
0.
1.
$
ASET
$
Main Index
107
123456
207
123456
0.
0.
CHAPTER 12 665
QSET1
1001
THRU
1001
THRU
1016
1016
$
SPOINT
Listing 12-15

the external superelement attachment information. The required entries can be entered manually by
editing the assembly input file or by defining the commands in the Direct Text Input when generating an
Analysis file in Patran.
For the MATRIXDB method, the direct text is shown in the figures below.
Figure 12-14
Main Index
External Superelements (MATRIXDB and DMIGDB Methods)
666

Modal Examples
Figure 12-15
Direct Text Input for the Bulk Data Section Required to Attach the External
Superelements (all Methods)
Note: the Direct Text Input for the bulk data section must be written at the END of the input file. The
correct order is to include all of the .asm files, followed by the .pch files. Recall that the .pch files have
a BEGIN SUPER entry which means the entries after the include .pch will be applicable to the
superelement.
The resulting assembly input file for the MATRIXDB method is shown below with the direct text inputs
highlighted.
SOL 103
CEND
ECHO = NONE
SUBCASE 1
SUBTITLE=DEFAULT
METHOD = 1
Main Index
CHAPTER 12 667
BEGIN BULK
ENDDATA
Listing 12-16
For the DMIGPCH file, the case control section must be modified to include the K2GG and P2G entries
as shown below:
Figure 12-16
Direct Text Input for the Case Control Section Required to Attach the External
Superelements (DMIGPCH Method)
For the DMIGOP2 assembly file, the File Management Section of direct text input must specify the file
names associated with each external superelement. Here, the user will define the ASSIGN INPUTT2
entries with their associated unit numbers for the respective files.
Main Index
668

Modal Examples
Figure 12-17
External Superelements (DMIGOP2 Method)
INPUTT2.
Modal Examples Using 3-Step Method

The 3-Step method of external superelement creation, assembly, and data recovery is not directly
supported by Patran. However, the required entries are reasonably straight forward and easily entered by
hand.
The baseline solution is the same as described in section Baseline Solution Without Superelements.
Main Index
CHAPTER 12 669
Table 12-4
Method
Command(s)
Comment
MATRIXDB
Run with SCR=NO
DMIGDB
PARAM,EXTOUT,DMIGDB
Run with SCR=NO
DMIGOP2
Run with SCR=NO
DMIGPCH

recovery step
MATRIXOP4
Run with SCR=NO
A sample .bdf for DMIGDB and DMIGOP2 reductions can be seen below.
SOL 103
CEND
ECHO = NONE
param,extout,dmigdb
SUBCASE 1
SUBTITLE=DEFAULT
METHOD = 1
SPC = 2
BEGIN BULK
SPOINT
1001
QSET1
ASET1
123456
THRU
1016
1001
THRU
104
204
1016
FORCE
Main Index
211
1.
0.
0.
1.
670

Modal Examples
$
EIGRL
10
10
ENDDATA
Listing 12-17

Method
ASSIGN OUTPUT2='extse10.op2',UNIT=35 delete

SOL 103
CEND
ECHO = NONE
$EXTSEOUT(ASMBULK,EXTBULK,EXTID=10,DMIGOP2=35)
PARAM,EXTUNIT,35
SUBCASE 1
SUBTITLE=DEFAULT
METHOD = 1
BEGIN BULK
SPOINT
1001
QSET1
ASET1
123456
THRU
1016
1001
THRU
107
207
1016
FORCE
211
1.
0.
0.
1.
$
EIGRL
10
Listing 12-18
10

Method

Main Index
CHAPTER 12 671
in the bulk data section for each external superelement for which data recovery is desired. Refer to
Table 12-4 for the commands necessary to request and store the boundary solution matrices for each
method.
ASSIGN MASTER='assemble_dmigdb.master' delete
ASSIGN DBALL='assemble_dmigdb.dball' delete
SOL 103
BEGIN BULK

SEBULK
10EXTERNAL
MANUAL
SEBULK
20EXTERNAL
MANUAL
$ define connection info

SECONCT
SPOINT
SECONCT
SPOINT
10
107
107
207
207
1001
THRU
1017
1001
1001
THRU
1017
THRU
1017
20
104
104
204
204
2001
THRU
2016
2001
THRU
2016
2001
THRU
2016
BEGIN SUPER=10
param,extdrout,dmigdb
EXTRN
107
123456
207
123456
1001
1002
1003
1004
1005
1006
1007
1008
1009
1010
1011
1012
1013
1014
1015
1016
1017
$
Main Index
672

Modal Examples
$
GRID
107
6.
GRID
207
6.
0.
0.
1.
0.
$
ASET
107
123456
207
123456
1001
THRU
1017
1001
THRU
1017
$
QSET1
$
SPOINT
BEGIN SUPER=20
EXTRN
104
123456
204
123456
2001
2002
2003
2004
2005
2006
2007
2008
2009
2010
2011
2012
2013
2014
2015
2016
$
$
GRID
104
3.
GRID
204
3.
0.
0.
1.
0.
$
ASET
104
123456
204
123456
2001
THRU
2016
2001
THRU
2016
$
QSET1
$
SPOINT
ENDDATA
Listing 12-19
ASSIGN MASTER='assemble.master' delete

ASSIGN DBALL='assemble.dball' delete
SOL 103
Main Index
CHAPTER 12 673
BEGIN BULK
$ define connection for SE 10 uses AUTO connection

SEBULK
10
EXTOP2
MANUAL
35
SEBULK
20
EXTOP2
MANUAL
36

SECONCT
SPOINT
SECONCT
SPOINT
10
107
107
207
207
1001
THRU
1016
1001
1001
THRU
1016
20
104
104
204
204
2001
THRU
2016
2001
2001
THRU
2016
THRU
1016
THRU
2016
BEGIN SUPER=10
PARAM,EXTDRUNT,37
BEGIN SUPER=20
PARAM,EXTDRUNT,38
ENDDATA
Listing 12-20

control structure (SPC, MPC, METHOD, etc.) the same as the Step 1 solution, with the exception of
data recovery.
Table 12-3 contains the entries necessary for the data recovery step.
ASSIGN ASSYM='assemble_dmigdb.master'

Main Index
674

Modal Examples
SOL 103
CEND
ECHO = NONE
PARAM,EXTDR,YES
PARAM,POST,0
SUBCASE 1
SUBTITLE=DEFAULT
METHOD = 1
BEGIN BULK
ENDDATA
Listing 12-21
ASSIGN SE10M='se_10_reduce_dmigop2.master'
ASSIGN SE10D='se_10_reduce_dmigop2.dball'
ASSIGN INPUTT2='extse10bndry.op2' UNIT=37

SOL 103
CEND
ECHO = NONE
PARAM,EXTDR,YES
PARAM,EXTDRUNT,37
PARAM,POST,0
SUBCASE 1
SUBTITLE=DEFAULT
METHOD = 1
Main Index
CHAPTER 12 675
BEGIN BULK
ENDDATA
Listing 12-22
Main Index
676


The modal transient examples are based on the model shown in Figure 12-1.
installation directories /doc/seug/chapter12/modal-transient:
Figure 12-18
Example Files for Transient Response External Superelement Method

(EXTSEOUT)
The boundary conditions and loading are based on the example files contained in Modal Transient
Illustrative Example (Ch. 11). As a review, the loading is as follows:
Figure 12-19
Main Index
Time History Loading for Grids 211 and 105
CHAPTER 12 677
Note that grid 211 is in external superelement 10, while grid 105 is in the residual structure.
DMIG binary format

*Note: If the user selects MATRIXDB or DMIGDB method, the input file must be run with
example is shown in Figure 12-4. Often SPOINTS and QSET dof are defined manually to control the
IDs. In Patran, the user can define the SPOINT and QSET entries in the Direct Text Input section for
Bulk Data.
For a modal transient solution, the user has the option of creating the external superelement with a modal
solution (SOL 103) or a modal transient solution (SOL 112). The example files cover both cases, but
only the SOL 103 reduction case will be covered in this text.
superelement creation, a MATRIXDB example is shown below. Note that the LOAD for the
superelement is also referenced in the case control; this will create the load vector so that the transient
time can be applied to it during the assembly solution.
assign master='create-se10-103.master' delete
assign dball ='create-se10-103.dball' delete
$
SOL 103
CEND
$
TITLE = Cantilever Beam Modal Frequency Response - modal reduction
Label = External Superelement Example, SE 10 Creation, Step 1
Main Index
678

DISPL=ALL
OLOAD=ALL
$
EXTSEOUT(ASMBULK=manq,EXTBULK,EXTID=10) MATRIXDB
$
SUBCASE 1
SUBTITLE=Modes
METHOD = 10
LOAD=5
BEGIN BULK
qset1,0,1001,thru,1017
aset1,123456,107,207
FORCE
211
1.
0.
0.
1.
ENDDATA
Listing 12-23
assign output2='se10_dmigop2_103.op2' unit=31 delete

$
SOL 103
CEND
$
$
DISPL=ALL
OLOAD=ALL
$
EXTSEOUT(ASMBULK=manq,EXTBULK,EXTID=10) DMIGOP2=31
Main Index
CHAPTER 12 679
$
SUBCASE 1
SUBTITLE=Modes
METHOD = 1
LOAD=5
BEGIN BULK
qset1,0,1001,thru,1017
aset1,123456,107,207
FORCE
211
1.
0.
0.
1.
$
$
SOL 103
CEND
$
$
DISPL=ALL
OLOAD=ALL
$
EXTSEOUT(ASMBULK=manq,EXTBULK,EXTID=10) MATRIXOP4=31
$
SUBCASE 1
SUBTITLE=Modes
METHOD = 1
LOAD=5
BEGIN BULK
qset1,0,1001,thru,1017
aset1,123456,107,207
Main Index
680


FORCE
211
1.
0.
0.
1.
Listing 12-24

below:
$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$
$
10
$ ------------------------------------------------------------$

$
$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$
$--------------------------- COLUMN NUMBERS ---------------------------$00000000111111111122222222223333333333444444444455555555556666666666777
$23456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012
$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$
$
SEBULK
10
EXTOP4
MANUAL
35
$
SECONCT
SPOINT
10
107
107
207
207
1001
THRU
1017
1001
1001
THRU
1017
THRU
1017
$
$
GRID
107
6.
GRID
207
6.
0.
1.
0.
0.
$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$
Listing 12-25
Main Index

CHAPTER 12 681
$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$
$
10
$ ------------------------------------------------------------$
$
$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$
$--------------------------- COLUMN NUMBERS ---------------------------$00000000111111111122222222223333333333444444444455555555556666666666777
$23456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012
$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$
$
BEGIN SUPER
10
$
EXTRN
107
123456
207
123456
$
$
GRID
107
6.
GRID
207
6.
0.
0.
1.
0.
$
ASET
107
123456
207
123456
1001
THRU
1017
1001
THRU
1017
$
QSET1
$
SPOINT
Listing 12-26

the external superelement attachment information. In addition, LSEQ entries must be placed in each
Main Index
682

superelement, even if there is null loading for the superelement. The assembly input file for the
MATRIXDB method is shown below:
ASSIGN MASTER='assemble_dmigdb-112from103.master' delete
ASSIGN DBALL ='assemble_dmigdb-112from103.dball' delete
ASSIGN SE10M='create-se10-103.master'
ASSIGN SE10D='create-se10-103.dball'
$
SOL 112
CEND
LABEL = External SE Assembly Run, SOL 112, LSEQ / LOADSET
ECHO = NONE
RESVEC = YES
SDAMPING = 1
loadset=1
set 999=103,105,211
SUBCASE 1
METHOD = 1
TSTEP = 1
SPC = 2
DLOAD = 2
DISPLACEMENT(SORT2,REAL)=999
VELOCITY(SORT2,REAL)=999
ACCELERATION(SORT2,REAL)=999
SPCFORCES(SORT2,REAL)=999
OLOAD(SORT2,REAL)=999
BEGIN BULK
TSTEP
5000
TABDMP1
CRIT
0.
EIGRL
.02
2.-4
2000.
.02
10

Main Index
ENDT
0
CHAPTER 12 683
TLOAD1
LSEQ
105
3
TLOAD1
10
DLOAD
1.
$DLOAD
211
1.
1.
1.
1.
10

FORCE
105
1.
0.
0.
1.

$ need dummy LSEQ entry for subcase, points to column 1 of the reduced load matrix
LSEQ
101
LSEQ
201
ENDDATA
Listing 12-27
For the DMIGPCH file, the case control section must be modified to include the K2GG, M2GG, and
P2G case control commands.
For the DMIGOP2 assembly file, the File Management Section must specify the file names associated
with each external superelement. Here, the user will define the ASSIGN INPUTT2 entries with their
associated unit numbers for the respective files.
INPUTT2.

Main Index
684


Table 12-5
Method
Command(s)
Comment
MATRIXDB
Run with SCR=NO
DMIGDB
PARAM,EXTOUT,DMIGDB
Run with SCR=NO
DMIGOP2
Run with SCR=NO
DMIGPCH

recovery step
MATRIXOP4
Run with SCR=NO
A sample .bdf for DMIGDB and DMIGOP2 reductions can be seen below. Refer to comments in section
Step 1: Creation of External Superelement for comments on loading.
ASSIGN MASTER='create-se10-103.master' delete
ASSIGN DBALL ='create-se10-103.dball' delete
$
SOL 103
CEND
$
$
DISPL=ALL
OLOAD=ALL
$
$EXTSEOUT(ASMBULK=manq,EXTBULK,EXTID=10) DMIGOP2=31
param,extout,dmigdb
$
SUBCASE 1
SUBTITLE=Modes
Main Index
CHAPTER 12 685
METHOD = 10
LOAD=5
BEGIN BULK
qset1,0,1001,thru,1017
aset1,123456,107,207
FORCE
211
1.
0.
0.
1.
$
EIGRL
10
10
ENDDATA
Listing 12-28

Method

$
SOL 103
CEND
$
Label = External Superelement Example, SE 10 Creation, Modes
$
DISPL=ALL
OLOAD=ALL
$
param,extout,dmigop2
param,extunit,31
$
SUBCASE 1
SUBTITLE=Modes
METHOD = 1
LOAD=5
BEGIN BULK
Main Index
686

qset1,0,1001,thru,1017
aset1,123456,107,207
FORCE
211
1.
0.
0.
1.
$
EIGRL
Listing 12-29
10

Method

in the bulk data section for each external superelement for which data recovery is desired. Refer to
method.
$
SOL 112
CEND
ECHO = NONE
RESVEC = YES
SDAMPING = 1
Main Index
CHAPTER 12 687
loadset=1
set 999=103,105,211
SUBCASE 1
METHOD = 1
TSTEP = 1
SPC = 2
DLOAD = 2
BEGIN BULK
TSTEP
5000
TABDMP1
CRIT
0.
EIGRL
.02
2.-4
2000.
.02
ENDT
10

TLOAD1
LSEQ
105
3
TLOAD1
10
DLOAD
1.
$DLOAD
211
1.
1.
1.
1.
10

FORCE
105
1.
0.
0.
1.

$ define SE 10 and SE 20 as external

SEBULK
10EXTERNAL
MANUAL
SEBULK
20EXTERNAL
MANUAL

SECONCT
Main Index
10
107
107
207
207
1001
THRU
1017
1001
THRU
1017
688

SPOINT
1001
THRU
20
SECONCT
SPOINT
1017
104
104
204
204
2001
THRU
2016
2001
2001
THRU
2016
THRU
2016
BEGIN SUPER=10
LSEQ
101
EXTRN
107
123456
207
123456
1001
1002
1003
1004
1005
1006
1007
1008
1009
1010
1011
1012
1013
1014
1015
1016
1017
$
$
GRID
107
6.
GRID
207
6.
0.
0.
1.
0.
$
ASET
107
123456
207
123456
1001
THRU
1017
1001
THRU
1017
$
QSET1
$
SPOINT
BEGIN SUPER=20
LSEQ
201
EXTRN
104
123456
204
123456
2001
2002
2003
2004
2005
2006
2007
2008
2009
2010
2011
2012
2013
2014
2015
2016
$
$
GRID
104
3.
GRID
204
3.
0.
0.
1.
0.
$
ASET
104
123456
204
123456
2001
THRU
2016
$
QSET1
Main Index
CHAPTER 12 689
$
SPOINT
2001
THRU
2016
ENDDATA
Listing 12-30
assign inputt2='se10_dmigop2_103.op2' unit=31

assign output2='se10-dmigop2-dr.op2' unit=33
$
SOL 112
CEND
ECHO = NONE
RESVEC = YES
SDAMPING = 1
loadset=1
set 999=103,105,211
SUBCASE 1
METHOD = 1
TSTEP = 1
SPC = 2
DLOAD = 2
BEGIN BULK
TSTEP
5000
TABDMP1
CRIT
0.
EIGRL
.02
2.-4
2000.
.02
10
Main Index
ENDT
0
690

TLOAD1
LSEQ
105
3
TLOAD1
10
DLOAD
1.
$DLOAD
211
1.
1.
1.
1.
10

FORCE
105
1.
0.
0.
1.


SEBULK
10
EXTOP2
MANUAL
31
SEBULK
20
EXTOP2
MANUAL
32

SECONCT
SPOINT
10
107
107
207
207
1001
THRU
1017
1001
1001
THRU
1017
SECONCT
SPOINT
20
104
104
204
204
2001
THRU
2016
2001
2001
THRU
2016
THRU
1017
THRU
2016
BEGIN SUPER=10
LSEQ
101
param,extdrunt,33
EXTRN
107
123456
207
123456
1001
1002
1003
1004
1005
1006
1007
1008
1009
1010
1011
1012
1013
1014
1015
1016
1017
$
$
GRID
107
6.
GRID
207
6.
0.
1.
$
ASET
$
Main Index
107
123456
207
123456
0.
0.
CHAPTER 12 691
QSET1
1001
THRU
1001
THRU
1017
1017
$
SPOINT
BEGIN SUPER=20
LSEQ
201
param,extdrunt,34
EXTRN
104
123456
204
123456
2001
2002
2003
2004
2005
2006
2007
2008
2009
2010
2011
2012
2013
2014
2015
2016
$
$
GRID
104
3.
GRID
204
3.
0.
0.
1.
0.
$
ASET
104
123456
204
123456
2001
THRU
2016
2001
THRU
2016
$
QSET1
$
SPOINT
ENDDATA
Listing 12-31

control structure (SPC, MPC, LOAD, METHOD, etc.) the same as the Step 1 solution, with the
exception of data recovery. The dynamic loading and time steps must be copied from the residual
solution in order to build the proper data recovery tables.
Main Index
692

ASSIGN ASSYM='assemble_dmigdb-112from103.master'
ASSIGN ASSYD='assemble_dmigdb-112from103.dball'
SOL 112
CEND
TITLE = Cantilever Plate Frequency Response Example
SUBTITLE = Created by Lance Proctor, Eaglesim
LABEL = EXTERNAL SE, 3-step method, SE 20 data recovery
ECHO = NONE
RESVEC = YES
PARAM,EXTDR,YES
LOADSET = 1
SDAMPING = 1
set 999=103,105,211
SUBCASE 1
METHOD = 20 $ method from reduction run
FREQ= 1
SPC = 1 $ original reduction has SPC=1
DLOAD = 2
DISPLACEMENT(SORT2,PHASE)=999
VELOCITY(SORT2,PHASE)=999
ACCELERATION(SORT2,PHASE)=999
SPCFORCES(SORT2,PHASE)=999
OLOAD(SORT2,PHASE)=999
BEGIN BULK
$ bulk data defining load and frequency solution from residual of assembly
FREQ2
10.
1000.
FREQ4
10.
1000.
TABDMP1
1
0.
50
5
CRIT
.03
2000.
.03
ENDT

RLOAD1
Main Index
CHAPTER 12 693
LSEQ
RLOAD1
10
11
DLOAD
1.
3
1
1.
1.
10

TABLED1
1
0.
1.
2000.
1.
ENDT
ENDDATA
Listing 12-32
assign inputt2='se10-dmigop2-dr.op2' unit=31

assign run1M='create-se10-103.master'
assign run1D ='create-se10-103.dball'
restart logi=run1M
SOL 112
CEND
TITLE = Cantilever Plate Transient Response Example
ECHO = NONE
ECHO = NONE
RESVEC = YES
PARAM,EXTDR,YES
PARAM,EXTDRUNT,31
SDAMPING = 1
loadset=1
set 999=103,105,211
SUBCASE 1
TSTEP = 1
$
SPC = 2 $ remove because SPC=2 was not in reduction run

DLOAD = 2
Main Index
694

BEGIN BULK
TSTEP
5000
TABDMP1
CRIT
0.
.02
2.-4
2000.
.02
ENDT
TLOAD1
LSEQ
105
3
TLOAD1
10
DLOAD
1.
211
1.
1.
10

ENDDATA
Listing 12-33
Main Index
Data Recovery Input File for DMIGOP2 Method Step 3 of 3 Step Method
CHAPTER 12 695

(EXTSEOUT)
The modal transient examples are based on the model shown in Figure 12-1.
installation directories /doc/seug/chapter12/Modal-Freq-Response:
Figure 12-20
Example Files for Transient Response External Superelement Method

The boundary conditions and loading are based on the example files contained in Frequency Response
Illustrative Example (Ch. 11). As a review, the loading is a sine-sweep with applied loads at grids 105
and 211. Note that grid 211 is in external superelement 10, while grid 105 is in the residual structure.
DMIG binary format

Main Index
696

*Note: If the user selects MATRIXDB or DMIGDB method, the input file must be run with
example is shown in Figure 12-4. Often SPOINTS and QSET dof are defined manually to control the IDs.
In Patran, the user can define the SPOINT and QSET entries in the Direct Text Input section for Bulk
Data.
For a modal transient solution, the user has the option of creating the external superelement with a modal
solution (SOL 103) or a modal transient solution (SOL 112). The example files cover both cases, but
only the SOL 103 reduction case will be covered in this text.
superelement creation, a MATRIXDB example is shown below. Note that the LOAD for the
superelement is also referenced in the case control; this will create the load vector so that the sine-sweep
can be applied to it during the assembly solution.
assign master='create-se10-103.master' delete

assign dball ='create-se10-103.dball' delete
$
SOL 103
CEND
$
$
DISPL=ALL
OLOAD=ALL
$
EXTSEOUT(ASMBULK,EXTBULK,EXTID=10) MATRIXDB
$
SUBCASE 1
SUBTITLE=Modes
METHOD = 10
LOAD=5
BEGIN BULK
qset1,0,1001,thru,1017
Main Index
CHAPTER 12 697
aset1,123456,107,207
FORCE
211
1.
0.
0.
1.
$
EIGRL
10
10
ENDDATA
Listing 12-34

$
SOL 103
CEND
$
$
DISPL=ALL
OLOAD=ALL
$
EXTSEOUT(ASMBULK=manq,EXTBULK,EXTID=10) DMIGOP2=31
$
SUBCASE 1
SUBTITLE=Modes
METHOD = 1
LOAD=5
BEGIN BULK
qset1,0,1001,thru,1017
aset1,123456,107,207
Main Index
698

FORCE
211
1.
0.
0.
1.

$
SOL 103
CEND
$
$
DISPL=ALL
OLOAD=ALL
$
EXTSEOUT(ASMBULK=manq,EXTBULK,EXTID=10) MATRIXOP4=31
$
SUBCASE 1
SUBTITLE=Modes
METHOD = 1
LOAD=5
BEGIN BULK
qset1,0,1001,thru,1017
aset1,123456,107,207
FORCE
211
1.
0.
0.
1.
Listing 12-35

Main Index
CHAPTER 12 699
below:
$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$
$
10
$ ------------------------------------------------------------$

$
$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$
$--------------------------- COLUMN NUMBERS ---------------------------$00000000111111111122222222223333333333444444444455555555556666666666777
$23456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012
$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$
$
SEBULK
10
EXTOP4
MANUAL
35
$
SECONCT
SPOINT
10
107
107
207
207
1001
THRU
1017
1001
1001
THRU
1017
THRU
1017
$
$
GRID
107
6.
GRID
207
6.
0.
1.
0.
0.
$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$
Listing 12-36

$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$
$
10
$ ------------------------------------------------------------$
Main Index
700

$
$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$
$--------------------------- COLUMN NUMBERS ---------------------------$00000000111111111122222222223333333333444444444455555555556666666666777
$23456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012
$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$
$
BEGIN SUPER
10
$
EXTRN
107
123456
207
123456
$
$
GRID
107
6.
GRID
207
6.
0.
0.
1.
0.
$
ASET
107
123456
207
123456
1001
THRU
1017
1001
THRU
1017
$
QSET1
$
SPOINT
Listing 12-37

entries to define the external superelement files and define the appropriate Bulk Data entries to define the
external superelement attachment information. In addition, LSEQ entries must be placed in each
superelement, even if there is null loading for the superelement. The assembly input file for the
MATRIXDB method is shown below:

Main Index
CHAPTER 12 701
$
SOL 111
CEND
ECHO = NONE
RESVEC = YES
SDAMPING = 1
loadset=1
set 999=103,105,211
SUBCASE 1
SUBTITLE=Modal-Freq Response
METHOD = 1
FREQ= 1
SPC = 2
DLOAD = 2
BEGIN BULK
FREQ2
10.
1000.
FREQ4
10.
1000.
TABDMP1
1
0.
EIGRL
50
5
CRIT
.03
2000.
.03
10
ENDT
0

RLOAD1
LSEQ
1
3

FORCE
105
1.
1.
0.
0.
RLOAD1
10
DLOAD
11
1.

Main Index
1.
10
1.
702

TABLED1
1
0.
1.
2000.
1.
ENDT
LSEQ
101
LSEQ
201
ENDDATA
Listing 12-38
Frequency Response Assembly Input File for the MATRIXDB and DMIGDB
Methods
For the DMIGPCH file, the case control section must be modified to include the K2GG, M2GG, and
P2G entries
For the DMIGOP2 assembly file, the File Management Section must specify the file names associated
with each external superelement. Here, the user will define the ASSIGN INPUTT2 entries with their
associated unit numbers for the respective files.
INPUTT2.

Main Index
CHAPTER 12 703
Table 12-6
Method
Command(s)
Comment
MATRIXDB
Run with SCR=NO
DMIGDB
PARAM,EXTOUT,DMIGDB
Run with SCR=NO
DMIGOP2
Run with SCR=NO
DMIGPCH

recovery step
MATRIXOP4
Run with SCR=NO
A sample .bdf for DMIGDB and DMIGOP2 reductions can be seen below. Refer to comments in section
Step 1: Creation of External Superelement for comments on loading.
ASSIGN MASTER='create-se10-103.master' delete
ASSIGN DBALL ='create-se10-103.dball' delete
$
SOL 103
CEND
$
$
DISPL=ALL
OLOAD=ALL
$
param,extout,dmigdb
$
SUBCASE 1
SUBTITLE=Modes
METHOD = 10
LOAD=5
Main Index
704

BEGIN BULK
qset1,0,1001,thru,1017
aset1,123456,107,207
FORCE
211
1.
0.
0.
1.
$
EIGRL
10
10
ENDDATA
Listing 12-39

Method

$
SOL 103
CEND
$
Label = External Superelement Example, SE 10 Creation, Modes
$
DISPL=ALL
OLOAD=ALL
$
param,extout,dmigop2
param,extunit,31
$
SUBCASE 1
SUBTITLE=Modes
METHOD = 1
LOAD=5
BEGIN BULK
Main Index
CHAPTER 12 705
qset1,0,1001,thru,1017
aset1,123456,107,207
$
FORCE
211
1.
0.
0.
1.
$
EIGRL
Listing 12-40
10

Method

solution, a file must be defined and PARAM,EXTROUT and PARAM,EXTDRUNT must be defined in
the bulk data section for each external superelement for which data recovery is desired. Refer to
method.
$
SOL 111
CEND
ECHO = NONE
RESVEC = YES
SDAMPING = 1
Main Index
706

loadset=1
set 999=103,105,211
SUBCASE 1
METHOD = 1
FREQ= 1
SPC = 2
DLOAD = 2
BEGIN BULK
FREQ2
10.
1000.
FREQ4
10.
1000.
TABDMP1
1
0.
EIGRL
50
5
CRIT
.03
2000.
.03
ENDT
10
?
RLOAD1
LSEQ
1
3

FORCE
105
1.
1.
0.
0.
1.
RLOAD1
10
DLOAD
11
1.
1
1.
10

TABLED1
1
0.
1.
2000.
1.
ENDT

SEBULK
10EXTERNAL
MANUAL
SEBULK
20EXTERNAL
MANUAL

SECONCT
SPOINT
Main Index
10
107
107
207
207
1001
THRU
1017
1001
1001
THRU
1017
THRU
1017
CHAPTER 12 707
SECONCT
SPOINT
20
104
104
204
204
2001
THRU
2016
2001
2001
THRU
2016
THRU
2016
BEGIN SUPER=10
LSEQ
101
EXTRN
107
123456
207
123456
1001
1002
1003
1004
1005
1006
1007
1008
1009
1010
1011
1012
1013
1014
1015
1016
1017
$
$
GRID
107
6.
GRID
207
6.
0.
0.
1.
0.
$
ASET
107
123456
207
123456
1001
THRU
1017
1001
THRU
1017
$
QSET1
$
SPOINT
BEGIN SUPER=20
LSEQ
201
EXTRN
104
123456
204
123456
2001
2002
2003
2004
2005
2006
2007
2008
2009
2010
2011
2012
2013
2014
2015
2016
$
$
GRID
104
3.
GRID
204
3.
0.
0.
1.
0.
$
ASET
104
123456
204
123456
2001
THRU
2016
$
QSET1
Main Index
708

$
SPOINT
2001
THRU
2016
ENDDATA
Listing 12-41

$
SOL 111
CEND
ECHO = NONE
RESVEC = YES
SDAMPING = 1
loadset=1
set 999=103,105,211
SUBCASE 1
METHOD = 1
FREQ= 1
SPC = 2
DLOAD = 2
BEGIN BULK
FREQ2
10.
1000.
FREQ4
10.
1000.
TABDMP1
1
0.
EIGRL
Main Index
50
5
CRIT
.03
2000.
.03
10
ENDT
0
CHAPTER 12 709

RLOAD1
LSEQ
1
3

FORCE
105
1.
1.
0.
0.
1.
RLOAD1
10
DLOAD
11
1.
1.
10

TABLED1
1
0.
1.
2000.
1.
ENDT

SEBULK
10
EXTOP2
MANUAL
31
SEBULK
20
EXTOP2
MANUAL
32

SECONCT
SPOINT
10
107
107
207
207
1001
THRU
1017
1001
1001
THRU
1017
SECONCT
SPOINT
20
104
104
204
204
2001
THRU
2016
2001
2001
THRU
2016
THRU
1017
THRU
2016
BEGIN SUPER=10
LSEQ
101
param,extdrunt,33
EXTRN
107
123456
207
123456
1001
1002
1003
1004
1005
1006
1007
1008
1009
1010
1011
1012
1013
1014
1015
1016
1017
$
$
GRID
107
6.
GRID
207
6.
0.
1.
$
ASET
$
Main Index
107
123456
207
123456
0.
0.
710

QSET1
1001
THRU
1001
THRU
1017
1017
$
SPOINT
BEGIN SUPER=20
LSEQ
201
param,extdrunt,34
EXTRN
104
123456
204
123456
2001
2002
2003
2004
2005
2006
2007
2008
2009
2010
2011
2012
2013
2014
2015
2016
$
$
GRID
104
3.
GRID
204
3.
0.
0.
1.
0.
$
ASET
104
123456
204
123456
2001
THRU
2016
2001
THRU
2016
$
QSET1
$
SPOINT
ENDDATA
Listing 12-42

control structure (SPC, MPC, LOAD, METHOD, etc.) the same as the Step 1 solution, with the
exception of data recovery. The dynamic loading and frequency steps must be copied from the residual
solution in order to build the proper data recovery tables.
Main Index
CHAPTER 12 711
restart logi=run1M
ASSIGN ASSYM='assemble_dmigdb-111from103.master'
ASSIGN ASSYD='assemble_dmigdb-111from103.dball'
SOL 111
CEND
ECHO = NONE
RESVEC = YES
PARAM,EXTDR,YES
LOADSET = 1
SDAMPING = 1
set 999=103,105,211
SUBCASE 1
FREQ= 1
$
SPC = 2 $ original model does not have SPC=2, remove to avoid error
DLOAD = 2
BEGIN BULK
FREQ2
10.
1000.
FREQ4
10.
1000.
TABDMP1
1
0.
50
5
CRIT
.03
2000.
.03
ENDT

RLOAD1
Main Index
712

LSEQ
RLOAD1
10
11
DLOAD
1.
3
1
1.
1.
10

TABLED1
1
0.
1.
Listing 12-43
2000.
1.
ENDT
assign inputt2='se10-dmigop2-dr.op2' unit=31

restart logi=run1M
SOL 111
CEND
ECHO = NONE
RESVEC = YES
PARAM,EXTDR,YES
PARAM,EXTDRUNT,31
LOADSET = 1
SDAMPING = 1
set 999=103,105,211
SUBCASE 1
FREQ= 1
$
SPC = 2 $ original model does not have SPC=2, remove to avoid error
DLOAD = 2
Main Index
CHAPTER 12 713
BEGIN BULK
FREQ2
10.
1000.
FREQ4
10.
1000.
TABDMP1
1
0.
50
5
CRIT
.03
2000.
.03
ENDT

RLOAD1
LSEQ
RLOAD1
10
DLOAD
1
3
11
1.
1
1.
1.
10

TABLED1
1
0.
Listing 12-44
1.
Main Index
1.
2000.
1.
ENDT
Data Recovery Input File for DMIGOP2 Method Step 3 of 3 Step Method
714

Main Index
Chapter 13: Practical Image Superelements
13
Main Index
Introduction
List Superelements
PART Superelements
716

Introduction
Introduction
The purpose of this chapter is to document the capabilities of image superelements in MSC.Nastran. The
following figures illustrate the possible types of image superelements. In Figure 13-1 a model of a portion
of a gear is shown. The physical model of one tooth can be represented as a superelement. This type is
called a primary superelement-one where the actual geometry for the superelement is defined in the bulk
data. Other gear teeth, as shown in Figure 13-1, are images of the first (primary) tooth. An image
superelement is a superelement that uses the geometry of another superelement to describe it for
MSC.Nastran. These image superelements can save processing time in that they are able to re-use the
reduced stiffness, mass, and damping matrices from their primary superelement, which reduces the
amount of calculations needed. Full data recovery is available for image superelements. An image
superelement can be an identical image, as shown in Figure 13-1, or a mirror image, as shown in
Figure 13-2. In Figure 13-1, the right side of the plate is a mirror image copy of the primary. Please note
that images can have their own unique loadings. Only the stiffness, mass and damping is identical to the
primary. Another type of superelement is the external superelement, where a part of the model is
represented by using matrices from an outside source (the matrices can come from another MSC.Nastran
run). For these matrices no internal geometry information is available; only the grid points to which the
matrices are attached are known. An external superelement is shown in Figure 13-3. In this figure the
finite element model is on the left and the external superelement is represented by the dashed lines on the
right.
Figure 13-1
Main Index
A Primary Superelement and Several Identical Images
CHAPTER 13 717
Figure 13-2
A Primary Superelement and its Mirror Image Superelement
Figure 13-3
An External Superelement
CHAPTER 10.
The following sections provide examples of image superelements for List (CSUPER), PART, and
External Superelements.
Main Index
718

List Superelements
List Superelements
List superelements are defined by specifying a list (set) of the interior dof using the SESET entry.
Readers may want to review Defining List Superelements (Ch. 2) before proceeding with this section. As
a quick review: the superelement processing partitions of the model into separate sections based on a list
of interior grid points and/or elements defined by the user. The Main Bulk Data Section is defined as the
first bulk data input section which occurs after BEGIN BULK or BEGIN SUPER [=0].
Using CSUPER
In this Section, the CSUPER entry will be used to create images (copy and mirror) of List
Superelements. The CSUPER entry uses an encoded superelement id to define the type of image (copy,
mirror) and the attachment locations of the exterior dof of its parent superelement. The image
superelement is also known as a secondary superelement. Internally, MSC.Nastran creates a copy of the
reduced matrices and performs the appropriate coordinate system transformations. Note that a mirror
superelement will be mapped into a left-handed coordinate system. The format of the CSUPER entry is
shown below:
CSUPER
Secondary Superelement Connnection
Defines the grid or scalar point connections for identical or mirror image superelements from an external
source. These are all known as secondary superelements.
Format:
1
CSUPER SSID
GP7
PSID
GP1
GP2
GP3
GP4
GP5
GP6
GP8
-etc.-
10
10
Example:
CSUPER
Field
Main Index
120003
21
Contents
SSID
Coded identification number for secondary superelement. See Remark 1 (Integer>0)
PSID
Identification number for referenced primary superelement. See Remark 2 (Integer>0

or blank)
GPi
Grid or scalar point identification number in the downstream superelement or residual

structure. (Integer > 0 or THRU; For THRU option, GP1<GP2)
CHAPTER 13 719
Remarks:
1. The value of SSID is written in the form XXX000+n, where n is the referenced secondary
superelement identification number and n must be less than 10000 and XXX is a displacement
component sign reversal code as follows:
The sign reversal code specifies the displacement component(s) normal to the plane of the
mirror through which the reflection is to be made
Blank or 0
no reversal for identical superelement. If PSID is preceded by a

minus sign and there is no xxx code on SSID, then a z-reversal
mirror is generated.
x-reversal
y-reversal
z-reverasl
12
x and y-reversal
23
y and z-reversal
31
z and x-reversal
123
x, y, and z-reversal }
Mirror Images
Identical Images
Mirror Images
2. If PSID = 0 or blank, the superelement boundary matrices are obtained from an external source
(such as a database or external file). For more information, see PARAM, EXTDRUNT of the
Quick Reference Guide.
3. For identical or mirror image superelements, the grid point IDs, GPi, may appear in any order.
However, if they are not in the same order as the external GRIDs of the primary superelement,
then the SEQSEP entry is also required. In case of external superelements, the GRID IDs must
be in the order that the terms in the associated matrices occrur.
4. Image superelements and their primaries must be congruent. The identical or mirror image
superelement must have the same number of external grid points as its primary superelement
(including dof for the Q-set if cms has been performed on the primary). The exterior grid points
of the image superelement must have the same relative location to each other as do the
corresponding points of the primary superelement. The global coordinate directions of each
exterior grid point of the image superelement must have the same relative alignment as those of
the corresponding grid points of the primary superelement. If congruency is not satisfied because
of round-off, then the tolerance may be adjusted with PARAM, CONFAC or the congruence
checking can be disabled by using DIAG 37
5. For superelements from an external source, please refer to the Quick Reference Guide, PARAMS
EXTDR, EXTDRUNT, and EXTUNIT.
Main Index
720

List Superelements
Example Using CSUPER

An example using CSUPER is shown below using the flyswatter example seen throughout this guide.
The grids and elements for the full model are shown below. Results for the baseline and single-level
superelement analysis can be found in Baseline Static Example using Patran (Ch. 3) (ref
/doc/seug/chapter3/baseline/baseline.bdf and /doc/seug/chapter3/seset/seset.bdf).
Figure 13-4
Flyswatter Baseline Model
The full model could be broken up into List superelements as shown in the figure below (ref
/doc/seug/chapter3/seset/seset.bdf).
Main Index
CHAPTER 13 721
Figure 13-5
Flyswatter Example for Full Model Internal Superelements (SESET)
However, it is computationally efficient to use image superelements for this model. For this example,
half of the flyswatter is removed from the whole so that proper duplication can be demonstrated. The
primary superelements are shown below:
Main Index
722

List Superelements
Figure 13-6
Flyswatter Primary Superelements
The following table lists the superelements that define the full model:
Table 13-1
Primary and Secondary Superelements for CSUPER Example
Superelement ID
Type
Description
Comment
10
Primary
Left Swatter
Created in proper location
[000]20
Secondary
Right Swatter
Copy of SE 10
30
Primary
Left Vertical
Created in Proper Location
[000]40
Secondary
Vertical Tail
Copy of SE 30
50
Primary
Left Horizontal
10060
Secondary
Right Horizontal
Mirror of SE 50
70
Primary
Post
Note that the coded id number for superelement 20 and 40 is 000xx indicating that these superelements
are simply relocated. The coded id number for superelement 60 is 10060 indicating that this
superelement is mirrored by reversing the X coordinates.
The user will note that the boundary grid points which are used to catch (attach) the image
superelements are also retained.
Main Index
CHAPTER 13 723
Figure 13-7
Selecting Superelements for Image Superelement Example
The secondary superelements are created by the CSUPER instructions shown in the input file below.
Note that Patran does not provide a form for CSUPER entry, so the Direct Text Input must be used as
demonstrated below:
Main Index
724

List Superelements
Figure 13-8
Defining CSUPER Entries and Unattached Secondary Boundary Grids in

Patran
Note that Patran will not export grid points that are not attached to elements, so they must be defined in
the Direct Text Input section as shown in the figure above.
For this example, expanded case control is substituted for the condensed case control that Patran writes.
For a review of expanded case control, refer to section 4.2. The loads must be applied to the appropriate
grids/elements of the primary superelement id. In this case, the outboard grid for image superelement
20 is grid id 98 of the primary superelement 10. The elements of secondary superelement 20 are the same
as primary superelement 10.
The final input file is shown below (ref /doc/seug/chapter13/flyswatter/csuper/seset.bdf).
$ NASTRAN input file created by the Patran 2010.2.3 64-Bit (MD Enabled)
$ input file translator on June
28, 2011 at 19:42:36.

SOL 101
CEND
Main Index
CHAPTER 13 725
TITLE = MSC Nastran job created on 02-Apr-11 at 08:53:17

LABEL = CSUPER Example
ECHO = NONE
SET 20=20
SET 99=0,10,30,40,50,60,70
SUBCASE 1
SUPER=20,1
SPC = 2
LOAD = 1303
SUBCASE 2
SUPER=20,2
SPC = 2
LOAD = 1305
SUBCASE 3
SUPER=20,3
SPC = 2
LOAD = 1307
SUBCASE 11
SUPER=99,1
SPC = 2
LOAD = 303
SUBCASE 12
SUPER=99,2
Main Index
726

List Superelements

SPC = 2
LOAD = 305
SUBCASE 13
SUPER=99,3
SPC = 2
LOAD = 307
$
[view of full model including image superelements described in Chapter 19]
OUTPUT(PLOT)
CSCALE
1.0
PLOTTER NAST
SET 1= ALL
AXES x,y,z
$ front view
VIEW
0., 90., 90.
seupplot 0
plot set 1 label elements symbols 6
seupplot 0
plot set 1 label grids symbols 6
$
$ side view
VIEW
0., 0., 90.
seupplot 0
plot static deformation set 1 origin 1 shape
$
BEGIN BULK
$[secondary superelement 20 is a copy of primary superelement 10
$ mapped to boundary grids 41 and 42]
Main Index
CHAPTER 13 727
CSUPER
20
10
41
42
$[secondary superelement 40 is a copy of primary superelement 30

$ mapped to grids 27, 28, 41, and 42]
CSUPER
40
30
27
28
41
42
$[secondary superelement 60 is a MIRROR IMAGE of primary superelement 50

$ mapped to grids 14, 28, 27 and 24]
CSUPER
14
28
GRID
27
2.8
4.4
0.
GRID
28
3.6
4.4
0.
GRID
41
2.8
6.
0.
GRID
42
3.6
6.
0.
PARAM
POST
-1
GRDPNT
PARAM
PARAM
10060 50
27
24
PRTMAXIM YES
GRID
96
-2.8
10.
0.
GRID
97
-2.
10.
0.
GRID
98
-1.2
10.
0.
$ SE.10
SESET
10
33
34
37
SESET
10
45
THRU
50
SESET
10
57
THRU
62
SESET
10
69
THRU
74
SESET
10
81
THRU
86
SESET
10
93
THRU
98
30
29
30
38
$ SE.30
SESET
$ SE.50
SESET
50
THRU
SESET
50
21
22
70
THRU
12
$ SE.70
SESET

SPCADD
$ Displacement Constraints of Load Set : spc1.1

SPC1
123456

LOAD
305
1.
1.
301
LOAD
1305
1.
1.
1301

LOAD
307
1.
1.
101
LOAD
1307
1.
1.
1101

FORCE
201
93
2.
0.
0.
1.
$ [for the image superelement the "top ouboard" grid is grid 98]
Main Index
728

List Superelements
FORCE
1201
98
2.
0.
0.
1.
0.
0.
1.

FORCE
301
93
2.
$ [for the image superelement the "top ouboard" grid is grid 98]
FORCE
1301
98
2.
0.
0.
-1.

PLOAD4
101
18
-1.
THRU
42
$ [for the image superelement, the element numbers are the same as the
$
original superelement]
PLOAD4
1101
18
-1.
THRU
42

ENDDATA
Listing 13-1
Flyswatter Input File with CSUPER
The CSUPER commands highlighted in Listing 13-1 define the instructions for imaging and attaching
the primary superelement to its secondary superelement location. The first CSUPER command creates
superelement 20, duplicating superelement 10 and placing it on boundary grids 41 and 42. The second
CSUPER command creates superelement 40, duplicating superelement 30 and placing it on boundary
grids 27, 28, 41, and 42. The third CSUPER command creates superelement 60 based on superelement
50. This command calls for an x-reversal of superelement 50 which is then placed onto the boundary
grids 14, 28, 27, and 24. The order of the mirror is critical to the creation of the secondary superelement.
In this mirror, grid point 14 corresponds with grid point 13, 28 with 19, 27 with 20, and 24 with 23.
The SEMAP identifies the image superelements as IDENTICAL or MIRROR as shown below:

(SORTED BY SEID)
INDEX
SUPERELEMENT
PROCESS ORDER
DOWNSTREAM SE
SUPERELEMENT TYPE
RESIDUAL STRUCTURE
10
20
IDENTICAL SE
30
40
IDENTICAL SE
50
60
MIRROR
70
SE
NO
NO
RESEQ( PRIMARY SE =
RESEQ( PRIMARY SE =
WITH RESEQ( PRIMARY SE =
10 )
30 )
50 )

INDEX
Main Index
SUPERELEMENT
PROCESS ORDER
DOWNSTREAM SE
SUPERELEMENT TYPE
10
20
IDENTICAL SE
30
NO
RESEQ( PRIMARY SE =
10 )
CHAPTER 13 729
40
IDENTICAL SE
50
60
MIRROR
70
RESIDUAL STRUCTURE
Listing 13-2
SE
NO
RESEQ( PRIMARY SE =
30 )
50 )
SEMAP for Flyswatter CSUPER Example
Currently Patran cannot display image superelements. The OUTPUT(POST) commands inserted at the
end of the Case Control section instruct Nastran to create .plt files which can be converted with the
PLOTPS (refer to Installation and Operations Guide for information on how to use PLOTPS) utility
to generate PostScript files. The details of the OUTPUT(POST) commands are included in CHAPTER
19 of this guide. The plots show the original half of the flyswatter along with the duplicated half from
the CSUPER command.
Figure 13-9
Main Index
Undeformed Plot of Full Model in Final Position with Element IDs (CSUPER)
730

List Superelements
Figure 13-10
Undeformed Plot of Full Model in Final Position with Grid IDs (CSUPER)
The reader will notice that all of the grid/element numbers on the right half of the flyswatter (i.e. the
secondary imaged superelements) match the grid/element numbers on the left half of the flyswatter (i.e.
the primary superelements). The plots below show a side view of the deformed plots.
Main Index
CHAPTER 13 731
Figure 13-11
Flyswatter CSUPER Deformed Plot of Full Model, 3 Subcases
Modifying Connections with SEQSEP

The SEQSEP command can be used in conjunction with the CSUPER command to help define the grid
points for placing superelements.
SEQSEP
Superelement Sequences
Used with the CSUPER entry to define the correspondence of the exterior grid points between an
identical or mirror-image superelement and its primary superelement.
Format:
1
PSID
GP1
GP2
GP3
GP4
GP5
GP6
GP7
GP8
-etc.-
121
21
109
114
124
131
SEQSEP SSID
Example:
SEQSEP
Main Index
10
732

List Superelements
Field
Contents
SSID
Identification number for secondary superelement. (Integer > 0).
PSID
Identification number for the primary superelement. (Integer 0).
GPi
Exterior grid point identification numbers for the primary superelement. (Integer > 0).
Remarks:
1. This entry is not needed if the grid points listed on the CSUPER entry with the same SSID are in
the order of the corresponding exterior grid points of the primary superelement.
2. In Figure 13-12 the exterior grid points of 10, 20, and 30 of SEID = 1 correspond to the points 13,
12, and 11, respectively, of image SEID = 2. The CSUPER entry may be defined alone or with a
SEQSEP entry as shown in Figure 13-12
Figure 13-12
Grid Point Correspondence Between Primary and Secondary Superelements
CSUPER Entry Only:

1
CSUPER 2
13
12
11
10
10
CSUPER and SEQSEP Enties:

1
Main Index
CHAPTER 13 733
CSUPER 2
11
12
13
SEQSEP 2
30
20
10
Using the CSUPER file from the previous section, the user could choose to order the GPi nodes in
numerical order by utilizing the SEQSEP command.
SUPER
20
$CSUPER
10
CSUPER
10060
SEQSEP
60
50
CSUPER
40
30
Listing 13-3
Main Index
41
10060 50
50
14
14
13
27
42
28
24
23
28
27
27
20
41
24
28
19
42
Example using CSUPER with SEQSEP
734

PART Superelements
PART Superelements
PART superelements are defined by defining each superelement in its own Partitioned Bulk Data section.
These separate sections of the bulk data are self-contained in that each section contains all geometry,
elements, properties, constraints, parameters, and loading data for that component of the model. When
PARTs are used the program works in a manner similar to an assembly process. That is, a series of
separate components are assembled into the final finite element model, i.e. the residual structure. Part
Superelements can be imaged (copied/mirrored) by using one or more of the following commands:
SELOC uses 3 points to position a PART superelement in a new location
SEMPLN defines a mirror plane for a PART superelement
Using SEBULK and SELOC to image a PART

The SEBULK entry can be used to create an image of a partitioned superelement.
SEBULK
Format:
1
SEBULK
SEID
TYPE
RSEID
METHOD
TOL
LOC
UNITNO
AUTO
1.0E-3
Example:
SEBULK
Field
Main Index
14
REPEAT 4
Contents
SEID
Partitioned superelement identification number. See Remark10. (Integer > 0)
TYPE
Superelement type. (Character; no Default)
10
CHAPTER 13 735
Field
Contents
PRIMARY
Primary
REPEAT
Identical
MIRROR
Mirror
COLLCTR
Collector
EXTERNAL
External
EXTOP2
RSEID
External using an OUTPUT2 file created in an
earlier run.
Identification number of the reference superelement, used if TYPE = REPEAT and

MIRROR. (Integer > 0; Default = 0)
METHOD
Method to be used when searching for boundary grid points. (Character: AUTO or
MANUAL; Default = AUTO)
TOL
Location tolerance to be used when searching for boundary grid points. (Real; Default
= 10E-5)
LOC
Coincident location check option for manual connection option. (Character: YES or
NO; Default = YES)
UNITNO
FORTRAN unit number for the OUTPUT2 file (applicable and meaningful only when
TYPE = EXTOP2).
The SELOC command is used to define a partitioned superelement relocation by listing three
noncolinear points in the superelement and defines three corresponding points not belonging to the
superelement.
SELOC
Partitioned Superelement Location
Defines a partitioned superelement relocation by listing three noncolinear points in the superelement and
three corresponding points not belonging to the superelement.
Format:
Main Index
SELOC
SEID
PA1
PA2
PA3
PB1
PB2
PB3
10
736

PART Superelements
Example:
SELOC
110
Field
10
100
111
1010
112
30
Contents
SEID
Partitioned identification number of the partitioned superelement. (Integer > 0)
PAi
Identification numbers of three noncolinear grids (GRID entry) or points (POINT

entry) which are in the partitioned superelement. (Integer > 0)
PBi
Identification numbers of three grids (GRID entry) or points (POINT entry) defined
in the main Bulk Data Section to which PAi will be aligned. (Integer > 0)
Remarks
1. SELOC can be specified in the main Bulk Data Section and will cause a fatal error message if it
appears after the BEGIN SUPER=n command.
2. The superelement will be rotated and translated for alignment of the GAi and GBi locations.
3. The PAi and PBi can either be GRIDs or POINTs.
4. PA1, PA2, and PA3 must be contained in superelement SEID.
5. PB1, PB2, and PB3 must be specified in the main Bulk Data Section. If they belong to a
superelement that is also relocated, then the original (unmoved) positions of PB1, PB2, and PB3
are used.
6. PB1, PB2, and PB3 must have the same relative locations as PA1, PA2, and PA3.
7. Three grids or points are required even if the superelement connects to only one or two exterior
grids.
8. Coordinate systems, global displacement directions, and element coordinate systems for the
superelement will be rotated and translated.
9. The global coordinate directions of the boundary grid points of the upstream superelement will be
transformed internally to the global coordinate directions of the attachment grid points in the
downstream superelement. For displacement data recovery, the output will be in the original
global coordinate system.
10. The translation and rotation of the superelement to the new position is accomplished by defining
local rectangular coordinate systems based on the specified grid locations:
11. The local systems have their origin at PX1 and the x-axis points from PX1 to PX2.
12. The y-axis lies I nthe plane containing PX1, PX2, and PX3, is perpendicular to the x-axis, and
points towards PX3.
13. The z-axis is defined by the cross product of the x-axis into the y-axis.
Main Index
CHAPTER 13 737
14. The rotation and translation transformation aligns the local system defined by the superelement
grids with the local system defined by the main Bulk Data Section grids.
15. This entry will only work if PART superelements (BEGIN SUPER) exist.
Using SEMPLN to define a mirror plane

The SEMPLN entry is used to define a mirror plane for mirroring a partitioned superelement.
SEMPLN
Superelement Mirror Plane
Defines a mirror plane for mirroring a partitioned superelement.

Format:
1
SEMPLN
SEID
PLANE P1
P2
P3
10
Example:
SEMPLN
Field
110
PLANE
12
45
1125
Contents
SEID
Partitioned superelement identification number. (Integer > 0).
PLANE
Flag indicating that the plane is defined by three noncolinear points.
Pi
GRID or POINT entry identification numbers of three noncolinear points.

(Integer > 0).
Remarks
1. SEMPLN can only be specified in the main Bulk Data Section and will cause a fatal error
message if it appears after the BEGIN SUPER=n command.
2. Grids or points referenced on this entry must be defined in the main Bulk Data Section
Example Using SEBULK, SELOC, and SEMPLN

An example using SELOC and SEMPLN is shown below using the flyswatter example shown in section
Using CSUPER.
Main Index
738

PART Superelements
Table 13-2
Primary and Secondary Superelements for PART Example
Superelement ID
Type
Description
Comment
10
Primary
Left Swatter
Created in proper
location
20
Secondary
Right Swatter
Repeat of SE 10,
relocated with SELOC
30
Primary
Left Vertical
Created in Proper
Location
40
Secondary
Vertical Tail
Repeat of SE 30,
relocated with SELOC
50
Primary
Left Horizontal
Created in proper
location
60
Secondary
Right Horizontal
Mirror of SE 50,
Mirrored with SEMPLN
and relocated with
SELOC
70
Primary
Post
Created in proper
location
Note that all of the superelements are primary superelements. Superelements 20, 40, and 60 will re-use
the same bulk data as superelements 10, 30, and 50 respectively. However, superelements 20, 40, and 60
must be repositioned using SELOC and superelement 60 is mirrored to follow the CSUPER example in
section Using CSUPER.
An example using PART superelements is shown below using the flyswatter example seen throughout
this guide. The grids and elements for the full model are shown below. Results for the baseline and
single-level superelement analysis can be found in Baseline Static Example using Patran (Ch. 3) (ref
/doc/seug/chapter3/baseline/baseline.bdf and /doc/seug/chapter3/part/part.bdf).
Main Index
CHAPTER 13 739
Figure 13-13
Flyswatter Baseline Model
The full model could be broken up into PART superelements as shown in the figure below (ref
/doc/seug/chapter3/part/part.bdf).
Main Index
740

PART Superelements
Figure 13-14
Flyswatter Example for Full Model Internal Superelements (PART)
However, it is convenient to use image superelements for this model. For this example, half of the
flyswatter is removed from the whole so that proper duplication can be demonstrated. The primary
superelements are shown below:
Main Index
CHAPTER 13 741
Figure 13-15
Flyswatter Primary Superelements for PART Image Superelement Example
The reader will notice that additional grids are retained so that the SELOC entry has points retained in
the residual structure necessary to locate each image superelement. The PART superelement input file
is shown below (ref /doc/seug/chapter13/flyswatter/part/seloc-sempln.bdf).
$ input file translator on April
03, 2011 at 17:54:16.


SOL 101
CEND
param,post,-1
LABEL = PART Superelements with SELOC and SEMPLN images
ECHO = NONE
SPC=2
SUBCASE 1
Main Index
742

PART Superelements

LOAD = 303
SUBCASE 2
LOAD = 305
SUBCASE 3
LOAD = 307
$
OUTPUT(PLOT)
CSCALE
1.0
PLOTTER NAST
SET 1= ALL
$isometric view
VIEW
0., 90., 90.
$front view
$
$
$
$
$
view 0., 0., 180.

top view
view 0., 90., 180.
side view
view 270., 0., 180.
AXES x ,
y,
FIND SCALE ORIGIN 1 SET 1
seupplot 0
plot set 1 label elements
$
seupplot 0
Main Index
CHAPTER 13 743

$
BEGIN BULK
$ SE 20 is created in same location as SE 10 and must be
$ relocated by using the SELOC entry
SELOC
33
38
POINT
20
99
93
1.2
10.
99
0.
POINT
39
1.2
6.
0.
POINT
44
5.2
6.
0.
39
44

$ relocated by using the SELOC entry
SELOC
20
36
POINT
40
27
19
2.8
4.4
27
0.
POINT
28
3.6
4.4
0.
POINT
42
3.6
6.
0.
28
42

$ Mirrored with SEMPLN entry and relocated by using the SELOC entry
SEMPLN
60
1001
1002
1003
POINT
1001
Plane
0.
1.0
0.
POINT
1002
0.
0.0
0.
POINT
1003
0.
0.0
1.0
SELOC
60
23
19
14
13
24
28
include 'residual.bdf'
Begin
Super=10
include'part10.bdf'
LOAD
303
1.
1.
201

LOAD
305
1.
1.
301

LOAD
307
1.
1.
101

FORCE
201
93
2.
0.
0.
1.
0.
0.
1.

FORCE
301
93
2.

PLOAD4
101
18
-1.

Begin
Main Index
Super=20
THRU
42
744

PART Superelements
$ [SE 20 is created by using the same include file as SE 10

$ the grids/elements must be relocated using SELOC in the main bulk section]
include'part10.bdf'
$ [The loads on SE 20 are put on the proper locations as the baseline]
LOAD
303
1.
1.
201

LOAD
305
1.
1.
301

LOAD
307
1.
1.
101

FORCE
201
98
2.
0.
0.
1.
0.
0.
-1.

FORCE
301
98
2.

PLOAD4
101
18
-1.
THRU
42

Begin
Super=30
include'part30.bdf'
Begin
Super=40

include'part30.bdf'
Begin
Super=50
include'part50.bdf'
Begin
Super=60

$ the superelement is mirrored using SEMPLN in the main bulk section
include'part50.bdf'
Begin
Super=70
include'part70.bdf'
Listing 13-4
Flyswatter Input File for PARTs with SELOC and SEMPLN
In the .bdf listing above, the SELOC commands place the copied superelements 20 and 40 in their
proper location. The SEMPLN command creates a mirror plane for superelement 60 and the SELOC
places it in the correct position.
The SEMAP identifies PRIMARY and REPEATED Superelements as shown below:
PRIMARY
PROCESS
DOWNSTREAM
ORDER
SUPERELEMENT
TYPE
------------ ------------ ------- ------------ ----------------------------0
Main Index
RESIDUAL STRUCTURE
LABEL
-------------------------------
CHAPTER 13 745
10
20
10
REPEATED (SEBULK)
30
40
30
REPEATED (SEBULK)
50
60
50
REPEATED (SEBULK)
70
Listing 13-5
SEMAP for PART Superelements with SEBULK and SELOC
Currently Patran cannot display duplicate grids or elements and does not recognize the SELOC or
SEMPLN entries. The OUTPUT(POST) commands inserted at the end of the Case Control section
instruct Nastran to create .plt files which can be converted with the PLOTPS (refer to Installation and
Operations Guide for information on how to use PLOTPS) utility to generate PostScript files. The details
of the OUTPUT(POST) commands are included in CHAPTER 13 of this guide. The plots show the
original half of the flyswatter along with the duplicated half from the CSUPER command.
Main Index
746

PART Superelements
Figure 13-16
Main Index
Undeformed Plot of Full Model in Final Position with Element IDs (PART)
CHAPTER 13 747
Figure 13-17
Undeformed Plot of Full Model in Final Position with Grid IDs (PART)
The reader will notice that all of the grid/element numbers on the right half of the flyswatter (i.e. the
secondary imaged superelements) match the grid/element numbers on the left half of the flyswatter (i.e.
the primary superelements). This is expected since the same bulk data file is used for each of the PARTs
that is relocated / mirrored. The plots below show a side view of the deformed plots.
Main Index
748

PART Superelements
Figure 13-18
Main Index
Flyswatter PART Deformed Plot of Full Model, 3 Subcases
CHAPTER 13 749
External Superelements are similar to PART superelements in many respects, except rather than solving
the model in a single run, the superelement can be processed and output for use at a later time. There are
many advantages of external superelements:
the reduced matrices are compact and can be added to another structure while maintaining full
fidelity of the component behavior on the system

they can be easily re-used as many times as necessary at a very low runtime cost
they can protect design information (proprietary geometry) and material information (composite
layup)
key results can be monitored without the need for full data recovery
files can be easily shared and maintained across different organizations or design groups.
External Superelements can be imaged (copied or mirrored) and re-used many times in the same
assembly model.
Using SECONCT to Attach and External Superelement

The SECONCT entry is used to attach the exterior points of an external superelement to the residual of
the assembly model.
SECONCT
Explicitly defines grid and scalar point connection procedures for a partitioned superelement.
Format:
1
SECONCT
SEIDA
SEIDB
TOL
LOC
GIDA1
GIDB1
GIDA2
GIDB2
10
20
1.0E-4
1001
4001
GIDA3 GIDB3 -etc.-
Example:
SECONCT
YES
2222
4444

SECONCT
Main Index
SEIDA
SEIDB
TOL
LOC
GIDA1
THRU
GIDA2
GIDB1
THRU
GIDB2
10
750

SECONCT
10
20
101
THRU
110
Field
201
THRU
210
Contents
SEIDA
SEIDB
TOL
LOC
Coincident location check option for manual connection. (Character; YES or

NO; Default = YES)
GIDAi
Identification number of a grid or scalar point in superelement SEIDA, which will be

connected to GIDBi
GIDBi
Identification number of a grid or scalar point in superelement SEIDB, which will be

connected to GIDAi
Remarks
1. SECONCT can only be specified in the main Bulk Data section and will cause a fatal error if it
appears after the BEGIN SUPER = n command.
2. TOL and LOC can be used to override the default values specified on the SEBULK entries.
3. The continuation entry is optional.
4. The (GIAi, GIBi) pair must both be grids or scalar points.
5. All six degrees-of-freedom of grid points will be defined as boundary degrees-of-freedom.
6. This entry will only work if PART superelements (BEGIN SUPER) exist.
7. Blank fields are allowed after the first GIDA1-GIDB1 pair. Blank fields must also occur in pairs.
The remark does not apply to the alternate format.
8. For the alternate format, the thru ranges must be closed sets. That is, all IDs listed between 101
and 110 in the example must exist in the model.
In addition to the SECONCT entry, the SELOC and SEMPLN entries can be used to move the external
superelement to its proper location in the assembly. Sections Using SEBULK and SELOC to image a
PART and Using SEMPLN to define a mirror plane describe the SELOC and SEMPLN entries in detail.
Main Index
CHAPTER 13 751
Example using SECONCT

The flyswatter example will be used to demonstrate the SECONCT entry in conjunction with a SELOC.
In this example, the external superelement 30 will be re-used as superelement 40; in effect creating an
image superelement.
Figure 13-19
SECONCT Flyswatter
For this example, the files associated with the example in Single-Level Analysis Using External
Superelements (Ch. 3) will be modified (ref: /doc/seug/chapter13/flyswatter/external):
Table 13-3
File Description for External Superelement Image Example

File
Description
Comment
create-ext10dmigpch.bdf
External Superelement Creation
Superelement 10
Superelement 20
Superelement 30 and
Superelement 40 (relocated)
Superelement 50
Superelement 60
Superelement 70
assembly-dmigpch.bdf
Assembly Run
Assembly Run
The assembly run is straight forward (ref: /doc/seug/chapter13/flyswatter/external/assembly.bdf):
Main Index
752

$ input file translator on April
03, 2011 at 17:54:16.

SOL 101
CEND
k2gg=kaax
m2gg=maax
p2g=pax
param,post,-1
$ECHO = NONE
SUBCASE 1
SUBCASE 2
SUBCASE 3
BEGIN BULK
PARAM
PARAM
PARAM
POST
GRDPNT
PRTMAXIM YES
Main Index
CHAPTER 13 753
PSHELL
10
10
1.
10
10

CQUAD4
10
13
14
24
23
0.
0.

MAT1*
*
10
3.+7
1.15385+7
.3
7.33-4
$ Nodes of Group : pshell.10

GRID
13
-.4
3.6
0.
GRID
14
.4
3.6
0.
GRID
23
-.4
4.4
0.
GRID
24
.4
4.4
0.

include 'create-ext10dmigpch.asm'
$
include 'create-ext10dmigpch.pch'
ENDDATA ff71fa93
Listing 13-6
SECONCT Assembly File
In this case, superelement 30 is re-used as superelement 40. The .asm and .pch files from superelement
30 are copied and modified as shown below:
$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$
$
$ original$ ASSEMBLY PUNCH (.ASM) FILE FOR EXTERNAL SUPERELEMENT
Main Index
40
30
754

$ ------------------------------------------------------------$

$
$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$
$--------------------------- COLUMN NUMBERS ---------------------------$00000000111111111122222222223333333333444444444455555555556666666666777
$23456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012
$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$
$
$ originalSEBULK
SEBULK
30EXTERNAL
40EXTERNAL
MANUAL
MANUAL
$
$originalSECONCT
30
$original
19
19
SECONCT
40
19
27
20
20
28
20
35
35
41
35
36
36
36
42
$SELOC Locates Superelement 40 in the correct location

SELOC
40
19
20
36
27
28
42
$
$
GRID
19
-3.6
4.4
0.
GRID
20
-2.8
4.4
0.
GRID
35
-3.6
6.
0.
GRID
36
-2.8
6.
0.
$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$
Listing 13-7
Modifications to .asm File to Re-Use Superelement 30 as Superelement 40
The modifications to the .pch file are shown below:

$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$
$
$original STANDARD PUNCH (.PCH) FILE FOR EXTERNAL SUPERELEMENT
30
40
$ ------------------------------------------------------------$
$
$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$
Main Index
CHAPTER 13 755
$--------------------------- COLUMN NUMBERS ---------------------------$00000000111111111122222222223333333333444444444455555555556666666666777

$23456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012
$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$
$
$originalBEGIN SUPER
BEGIN SUPER
30
40
$
$
GRID
19
-3.6
4.4
0.
GRID
20
-2.8
4.4
0.
GRID
36
-2.8
6.
0.
$
ASET
19
123456
20
123456
36
123456
$
DMIG
KAAX
DMIG*
KAAX
19
19
DMIG*
KAAX
Listing 13-8
18
1
1 9.131879715D+06
19
Modifications to .pch File to Re-Use Superelement 30 as Superelement 40
When editing the .pch and .asm files for repeated superelements using the DMIGPCH method, the user
will need to make the following modifications
.asm file
Update SEID on SEBULK entry
Add SELOC and/or SEMPLN entries to locate the external part
Modify the SECONCT entry
.pch file
Update SEID for the BEGIN SUPER entry
Note that DMIGOP2, MATRIXDB, and/or MATRIXOP4 methods will require similar modifications as
well as modifying the corresponding ASSIGN statements and UNIT numbers.
Main Index
756


As a more detailed example for image superelements, a model of an electronics board with repeated
components is worked for List, PART, and External Superelements. The example contains 16 solid-body
components attached to a board as shown in the figure below.
Figure 13-20
Electronic Components on a Board Model (Full Model)
Baseline Solution (Full Model)

The analysis type for this assembly will be normal modes; a baseline example is located at
/doc/seug/chapter13/elec-board/baseline/elec-board.bdf. The solution of this model provides the
following modes and mode shapes:
Table 13-4
Main Index
Frequencies for Electronic Components on a Board Model (Full Model)
Mode Number
Frequency
1.660131E+02
2.424249E+02
4.654807E+02
5.339022E+02
6.567084E+02
6.667377E+02
8.838094E+02
9.148818E+02
1.033836E+03
10
1.229055E+03
CHAPTER 13 757
Figure 13-21
Mode Shapes 1-4 for Electronic Components on a Board Model (Full Model)
CSUPER Image Superelement Solution

Since the electronic components are exact copies of each other, the CSUPER entry can be used to
efficiently replicate the original component. For this example, there is one component modeled in detail
and 15 components that are imaged using CSUPER.
Figure 13-22
Main Index
Electronic Components on a Board Model CSUPER Images
758

For this example, the component modes for the primary superelement are defined with SPOINT and
SEQSET1 entries. In addition to the physical dof connection, the component modes must be defined for
the secondary superelements. For a detailed discussion of Component Modes Synthesis, refer to
Dynamic Reduction Component Modes Synthesis (Ch. 9)
Note:
Neither PARAM,AUTOQSET nor SENQSET will work with CSUPER and component
modes synthesis. Therefore, the user must define component modes degree of freedom
with SPOINTS and SEQSETi.
Table 13-5
Primary and Secondary Superelements for Electric Board - CSUPER
Superelement ID
Type
10
Primary
Original Component
Created in proper
location
20-80
Secondary
Components on same
side
Repeat of SE 10, located

with CSUPER
110 - 180
Secondary
Components on opposite Repeat of SE 10, located

side
with CSUPER, encoded
with 12 for x and y
reversal
[120110-120180]
Description
Comment
Listing 13-10, shows the CSUPER entries necessary to image and locate the primary superelement 15
times. The components on the same side of the board as the primary are simple copies and do not require
an encoded identification number. However, the components on the opposite side of the board require
an encoded identification number of 12 to indicate an x and y-reversal of the attachment coordinates.
Note that this is not a mirror image, but a copy that has been rotated 180 degrees before being attached
(see Figure 13-22). The input file is shown below (ref: /seug/chapter13/elec-board/csuper/elecboard.bdf)
SOL 103
CEND
TITLE = MSC Nastran job created on 22-Jun-11 at 16:14:40
ECHO = NONE
$PARAM,AUTOQSET,YES
RESVEC = NO
SUBCASE 1
SUBTITLE=Default
Main Index
CHAPTER 13 759
METHOD = 1
SPC = 2
BEGIN BULK
$ SPOINT Entries for component modes
$ [primary superelement requires SPOINT/SEQSET1 entries]
SPOINT,11001,THRU,11016
SEQSET1,10,0,11001,THRU,11016
$ [secondary superelements have SPOINTs to catch the primary SPOINTs]

PARAM
PARAM
EIGRL
POST
PRTMAXIM YES
1
10
?
$ Chip.10
SESET
10
709
THRU
792
SESET
10
796
797
798
802
803
804

SPCADD
$ Displacement Constraints of Load Set : Screws

SPC1
123456
805
824
838
1383
1402
1416
$ CSUPER Entries
$ [secondary superelements define GRIDs and SPOINTs to map the primary dof]
CSUPER
20 10 878
12003
12011
Main Index
881
1082
12004 12005 12006
12012 12013 12014
1085
12001
12007 12008 12009
12015 12016
12002
12010
760

CSUPER
30 10
13003
882
13004
885
13005
13011
13012 13013 13014
CSUPER
40 10 886 889 1090 1093

14003
14012 14013 14014
CSUPER
50 10 890
60 10 894 897 1098 1101
15014
13010
14009
14010
16004 16005
16001
16006
16012 16013
16014
CSUPER
70 10 898 901 1102 1105
15002
15009
15010
16002
16007 16008
16009
16010
16015 16016
17001
17004 17005 17006
17011
17012 17013
17014
CSUPER
80 10 902 905 1106 1109
17002
17007 17008
17009
17010
17015 17016
18001
18004 18005 18006
18012 18013 18014
15001
15007 15008
15015 15016
16011
18011
13002
14002
14007 14008
893 1094 1097
CSUPER
18003
14001
15004 15005 15006
15012 15013
17003
13001
14015 14016
15011
16003
1089
13007 13008 13009
13015 13016
14004 14005 14006
14011
15003
1086
13006
18002
18007 18008 18009
18010
18015 18016
$ [secondary superelements on the opposite side require 12xxxx] to

$ specify the x and y reversal]
CSUPER
120110
10 1319
11103
11104 11105 11106
1316
11114
1115
11111
11112 11113
CSUPER
120120
10 1323
12103
12104 12105 12106
1320
1119
12112 12113 12114
CSUPER
120130
10
13103
13104 13105 13106
1327
1116 12101
12102
12107 12108 12109
12110
1324
13112 13113 13114
CSUPER
120140
10 1331 1328
14103
14104 14105 14106
1123
1120
13107 13108
13101
13109
13102
13110
13115 13116
14114
1127 1124
14111
14112 14113
CSUPER
120150
10 1335
15103
15104 15105 15106
14101
14102
14107 14108 14109
14110
14115 14116
1332
15111
15112 15113 15114
CSUPER
120160
10 1339
16103
16104 16105 16106
1131 1128
15101
15102
15107 15108 15109
15110
15115 15116
1336
16111
16112 16113
CSUPER
120170
10 1343
17103
17104 17105
16114
17112 17113
17114
CSUPER
120180
10 1347
18103
18104 18105
16101
16107 16108
1139 1136
17106
16102
16109
16110
17101
17107 17108
17102
17109
17110
17115 17116
1344
18114
1135 1132
16115 16116
1340
17111
Main Index
11110
12115 12116
13111
18112 18113
11102
11109
11115 11116
12111
18111
1112 11101
11107 11108
1143 1140
18106
18101
18107 18108
18115 18116
18102
18109
18110
CHAPTER 13 761

ENDDATA
Listing 13-9
Electronic Components on a Board Model CSUPER Images Input File
The results for the SEMAP and modal solution are shown below:
(SORTED BY SEID)
INDEX
SUPERELEMENT
PROCESS ORDER
DOWNSTREAM SE
SUPERELEMENT TYPE
17
RESIDUAL STRUCTURE
10
20
IDENTICAL SE
NO
RESEQ( PRIMARY SE =
10
30
IDENTICAL SE
NO
RESEQ( PRIMARY SE =
10
40
IDENTICAL SE
NO
RESEQ( PRIMARY SE =
10
50
IDENTICAL SE
NO
RESEQ( PRIMARY SE =
10
60
IDENTICAL SE
NO
RESEQ( PRIMARY SE =
10
70
IDENTICAL SE
NO
RESEQ( PRIMARY SE =
10
80
IDENTICAL SE
NO
RESEQ( PRIMARY SE =
10
110
IDENTICAL SE
10
10
120
10
IDENTICAL SE
10
11
130
11
IDENTICAL SE
10
12
140
12
IDENTICAL SE
10
13
150
13
IDENTICAL SE
10
14
160
14
IDENTICAL SE
10
15
170
15
IDENTICAL SE
10
16
180
16
IDENTICAL SE
10
SUPERELEMENT 0
SUBCASE 1
R E A L
MODE
EXTRACTION
NO.
ORDER
Main Index
EIGENVALUE
RADIANS
CYCLES
GENERALIZED
MASS
1.088039E+06
1.043091E+03
2.320139E+06
8.553875E+06
5
6
7
GENERALIZED
STIFFNESS
1.660131E+02
1.000000E+00
1.088039E+06
1.523200E+03
2.424248E+02
1.000000E+00
2.320139E+06
2.924701E+03
4.654806E+02
1.000000E+00
8.553875E+06
1.125337E+07
3.354604E+03
5.339019E+02
1.000000E+00
1.125337E+07
1.702570E+07
4.126221E+03
6.567085E+02
1.000000E+00
1.702570E+07
1.754970E+07
4.189237E+03
6.667377E+02
1.000000E+00
1.754970E+07
3.083732E+07
5.553136E+03
8.838091E+02
1.000000E+00
3.083732E+07
762

3.304379E+07
5.748373E+03
9.148819E+02
1.000000E+00
3.304379E+07
4.219520E+07
6.495783E+03
1.033836E+03
1.000000E+00
4.219520E+07
10
10
5.963516E+07
7.722380E+03
1.229055E+03
1.000000E+00
5.963516E+07
Listing 13-10
Electronic Components on a Board Model CSUPER Images SEMAP and

Frequencies
The OUTPUT(POST) commands can be used to visualize the full model and results. OUTPUT(POST)
is described in CHAPTER 13.
Figure 13-23
OUTPUT(POST) plot of Mode 1 for CSUPER Image Superelement Solution of

Electronics Board
PART Superelement Image Solution

For PART superelements the images are created by using the SEBULK entry; the imaged superelements
are either REPEAT or MIRROR. SELOC is required to reposition the imaged superelements and
SEMPLN is required for the mirrored superelement.
Main Index
CHAPTER 13 763
Figure 13-24
Electronic Components on a Board Model PART Images
For this example, the component modes for the primary superelement are defined with SPOINT and
SEQSET1 entries. In addition to the physical dof connection, the component modes must be defined
for the secondary superelements. For a detailed discussion of Component Modes Synthesis, refer to
Dynamic Reduction Component Modes Synthesis (Ch. 9). In this example, PARAM,AUTOQSET,YES
can be used.
Table 13-6
Primary and Secondary Superelements for Electric Board - PARTs
Superelement ID
Type
Description
Comment
10
Primary
Original Component
Created in proper
location
20-80
Secondary
Components on same
side
Repeat of SE 10 with
SEBULK, relocated with
SELOC
110-180
Secondary
Components on oposite
side
SEBULK, relocated with
SELOC
Listing 13-11 shows the SEBULK and SELOC entries necessary to image and locate the primary
superelement 15 times. Note that this is not a mirror image, but a copy that has been rotated 180 degrees
before being attached (see Figure 13-22). The input file is shown below (ref: /seug/chapter13/elecboard/part/elec-board.bdf)
Main Index
764

SOL 103
CEND
ECHO = NONE
PARAM,AUTOQSET,YES
RESVEC = NO
SUBCASE 1
SUBTITLE=Default
METHOD = 1
SPC = 2
BEGIN BULK
$ [component is copied to same side of board]
SEBULK,20,REPEAT,10,AUTO
SELOC
20
874
877
1078
878
881
1082
SELOC
30
874
877
1078
882
885
1086
SELOC
40
874
877
1078
886
889
1090
SELOC
50
874
877
1078
890
893
1094
SELOC
60
874
877
1078
894
897
1098
SELOC
70
874
877
1078
898
901
1102
SELOC
80
874
877
1078
902
905
1106
$ [component is copied to opposite side of board]

Main Index
SELOC
110
874
877
1078
1319 1316
1115
SELOC
120
874
877
1078
1323 1320
1119
CHAPTER 13 765
SELOC
130
874
877
1078
1327 1324
SELOC
140
874
877
1078
1331 1328 1127
SELOC
150
874
877
1078
1335 1332 1131
SELOC
160
874
877
1078
1339 1336 1135
SELOC
170
874
877
1078
1343 1340
SELOC
180
874
877 1078
1347 1344
1123
1139
1143
include 'residualboard.bdf'
Begin
Super=10
include'chiponly.bdf'
Listing 13-11
Electronic Components on a Board Model PART Images Input File
PRIMARY
PROCESS
DOWNSTREAM
ORDER
SUPERELEMENT
TYPE
LABEL
------------ ------------ ------- ------------ ----------------------------0
17
RESIDUAL STRUCTURE
10
20
10
REPEATED (SEBULK)
30
10
REPEATED (SEBULK)
40
10
REPEATED (SEBULK)
50
10
REPEATED (SEBULK)
60
10
REPEATED (SEBULK)
70
10
REPEATED (SEBULK)
80
10
REPEATED (SEBULK)
110
10
REPEATED (SEBULK)
120
10
10
REPEATED (SEBULK)
130
10
11
REPEATED (SEBULK)
140
10
12
REPEATED (SEBULK)
150
10
13
REPEATED (SEBULK)
160
10
14
REPEATED (SEBULK)
170
10
15
REPEATED (SEBULK)
180
10
16
REPEATED (SEBULK)
-------------------------------------
SUPERELEMENT 0
SUBCASE 1
R E A L
MODE
EXTRACTION
NO.
ORDER
1
Main Index
EIGENVALUE
RADIANS
CYCLES
GENERALIZED
MASS
1.088176E+06
1.043157E+03
1.660235E+02
1.000000E+00
GENERALIZED
STIFFNESS
1.088176E+06
766

2.320748E+06
1.523400E+03
2.424566E+02
1.000000E+00
2.320748E+06
8.562537E+06
2.926181E+03
4.657162E+02
1.000000E+00
8.562537E+06
1.126605E+07
3.356494E+03
5.342026E+02
1.000000E+00
1.126605E+07
1.705888E+07
4.130240E+03
6.573481E+02
1.000000E+00
1.705888E+07
1.757955E+07
4.192797E+03
6.673043E+02
1.000000E+00
1.757955E+07
3.094973E+07
5.563248E+03
8.854183E+02
1.000000E+00
3.094973E+07
3.315048E+07
5.757646E+03
9.163577E+02
1.000000E+00
3.315048E+07
4.239294E+07
6.510986E+03
1.036256E+03
1.000000E+00
4.239294E+07
10
10
6.007886E+07
7.751056E+03
1.233619E+03
1.000000E+00
6.007886E+07
Listing 13-12
Electronic Components on a Board Model PART Images .f06 File
Figure 13-25
OUTPUT(POST) plot of Mode 1 for PART Image Superelement Solution of

Electronics Board
External Superelement Image Solution

For external superelements the images are created by using the SEBULK entry; the imaged
superelements are either REPEAT or MIRROR. The images can be positioned using SELOC or
SECONCT.
Main Index
CHAPTER 13 767
For external superelements, the first step is to reduce the component to the boundary dof. A detailed
process for generating a static external superelement with Patran is presented in Single-Level Analysis
Using External Superelements (Ch. 3). Below are the forms relevant to a modal reduction:
Figure 13-26
Main Index
External Superelement of Component
768

Figure 13-27
Creating a DOF list for the External Superelement Reduction
Next, the External Superelement is created by defining the analysis forms necessary to generate the
EXTSEOUT case control entry:
Main Index
CHAPTER 13 769
Figure 13-28
Defining Physical Boundary dof for External Superelement
A few modifications to the input file are suggested to make the assembly run easier, these are highlighted
in the listing below (ref /dog/seug/chapter13/elec-board/external/chip-create-external.bdf):
SOL 103
CEND
ECHO = NONE
RESVEC = NO
$ [add MANQ]
$ oringialEXTSEOUT(ASMBULK,EXTBULK,EXTID=10,DMIGPCH)
EXTSEOUT(ASMBULK=MANQ,EXTBULK,EXTID=10,DMIGPCH)
SUBCASE 1
TITLE=MSC Nastran JOB CREATED ON 22-JUN-11 AT 16:14:40
SUBTITLE=DEFAULT
METHOD = 1
BEGIN BULK
PARAM
PARAM
Main Index
POST
PRTMAXIM YES
770

EIGRL
10
MASS
$ Elements and Element Properties for region : chipconnector

PBUSH
GRID
1.+6
1.+6
1.+6
1.+6
RCV
1.
1.
1.
1.
1.
2.
1081
1.+6
1.+6
0.
$ Loads for Load Case : DEFAULT.SC1

$ [replace SPOINT ids with more convenient numbers]
$originalSPOINT
1082
$originalQSET1
SPOINT
11001
QSET1
ASET1
123456
THRU
1091
1082
THRU
THRU
11016
11001
THRU
11016
874
877
1078
1091
1081

ENDDATA
Listing 13-13
External Superelement Creation Input File
Figure 13-29
Electronic Components on a Board Model External Superelement and its

Images
For this example, the component modes for the external superelement are defined with SPOINT and
QSET1 entries. In addition to the physical dof connection, the component modes must be defined for
the secondary superelements. For a detailed discussion of Component Modes Synthesis, refer to
Description of Dynamic Reduction Process (Ch. 9). In this example, the SECONCT entries attach the
imaged SPOINTs.
Main Index
CHAPTER 13 771
Table 13-7
Primary and Secondary Superelements for Electric Board External

Superelements
Superelement ID
Type
Description
Comment
10
External
Original Component
Created in proper
location
20-80
Secondary
Components on same
side
SEBULK, positioned
with SEBULK
110-180
Secondary
Components on oposite
side
SEBULK, positioned
with SEBULK
Listing 13-14 contains the entries necessary attach the external superelement and image and locate it 15
times. Note that this is not a mirror image, but a copy that has been rotated 180 degrees before being
attached (see Figure 13-29). The input file is shown below (ref: /seug/chapter13/elecboard/external/assemble-board-chips.bdf)
SOL 103
CEND
RESVEC = NO
K2GG=KAAX
M2GG=MAAX
SUBCASE 1
SUBTITLE=Default
METHOD = 1
SPC = 2
BEGIN BULK
Main Index
SELOC
20
874
877
1078
878
881
1082
SELOC
30
874
877
1078
882
885
1086
SELOC
40
874
877
1078
886
889
1090
SELOC
50
874
877
1078
890
893
1094
SELOC
60
874
877
1078
894
897
1098
SELOC
70
874
877
1078
898
901
1102
SELOC
80
874
877
1078
902
905
1106
772

SELOC
110
874
877
1078
1319 1316
1115
SELOC
120
874
877
1078
1323 1320
1119
SELOC
130
874
877
1078
1327 1324
1123
SELOC
140
874
877
1078
1331 1328 1127
SELOC
150
874
877
1078
1335 1332 1131
SELOC
160
874
877
1078
1339 1336 1135
SELOC
170
874
877
1078
1343 1340
SELOC
180
874
877 1078
1347 1344
1139
1143

include 'chip-create-external.asm'
SEBULK
20 REPEAT
10
MANUAL
SEBULK
30 REPEAT
10
MANUAL
SEBULK
40 REPEAT
10
MANUAL
SEBULK
50 REPEAT
10
MANUAL
SEBULK
60 REPEAT
10
MANUAL
SEBULK
70 REPEAT
10
MANUAL
SEBULK
80 REPEAT
10
MANUAL
SEBULK
110 REPEAT
10
MANUAL
SEBULK
120 REPEAT
10
MANUAL
SEBULK
130 REPEAT
10
MANUAL
SEBULK
140 REPEAT
10
MANUAL
SEBULK
150 REPEAT
10
MANUAL
SEBULK
160 REPEAT
10
MANUAL
SEBULK
170 REPEAT
10
MANUAL
SEBULK
180 REPEAT
10
MANUAL
SECONCT
SPOINT
SECONCT
SPOINT
SECONCT
SPOINT
SECONCT
SPOINT
Main Index
20
874
878
877
881
1078
1082
11001
THRU
11016
12001
THRU
12016
12001
THRU
12016
30
874
882
877
885
1078
1086
11001
THRU
11016
13001
THRU
13016
13001
THRU
13016
40
874
886
877
889
1078
1090
11001
THRU
11016
14001
THRU
14016
14001
THRU
14016
180
874
1347
877
1344
1078
1143
11001
THRU
11016
18101
THRU
18116
18101
THRU
18116
1081
1085
1081
1089
1081
1093
1081
1140
CHAPTER 13 773
$
include 'chip-create-external.pch'
Listing 13-14
Electric Board Assembly Model External Superelements
PRIMARY
PROCESS
DOWNSTREAM
ORDER
SUPERELEMENT
TYPE
LABEL
------------ ------------ ------- ------------ ----------------------------0
17
RESIDUAL STRUCTURE
10
20
10
REPEATED (SEBULK)
30
10
REPEATED (SEBULK)
40
10
REPEATED (SEBULK)
50
10
REPEATED (SEBULK)
60
10
REPEATED (SEBULK)
70
10
REPEATED (SEBULK)
80
10
REPEATED (SEBULK)
110
10
REPEATED (SEBULK)
120
10
10
REPEATED (SEBULK)
130
10
11
REPEATED (SEBULK)
140
10
12
REPEATED (SEBULK)
150
10
13
REPEATED (SEBULK)
160
10
14
REPEATED (SEBULK)
170
10
15
REPEATED (SEBULK)
180
10
16
REPEATED (SEBULK)
----------------------------
SUPERELEMENT 0
SUBCASE 1
R E A L
MODE
EXTRACTION
NO.
ORDER
Main Index
EIGENVALUE
RADIANS
CYCLES
GENERALIZED
MASS
GENERALIZED
STIFFNESS
1.088039E+06
1.043091E+03
1.660131E+02
1.000000E+00
1.088039E+06
2.320139E+06
1.523200E+03
2.424248E+02
1.000000E+00
2.320139E+06
8.553875E+06
2.924701E+03
4.654806E+02
1.000000E+00
8.553875E+06
1.125337E+07
3.354604E+03
5.339019E+02
1.000000E+00
1.125337E+07
1.702570E+07
4.126221E+03
6.567085E+02
1.000000E+00
1.702570E+07
1.754970E+07
4.189237E+03
6.667377E+02
1.000000E+00
1.754970E+07
3.083732E+07
5.553136E+03
8.838091E+02
1.000000E+00
3.083732E+07
774

3.304379E+07
5.748373E+03
9.148819E+02
1.000000E+00
3.304379E+07
4.219520E+07
6.495783E+03
1.033836E+03
1.000000E+00
4.219520E+07
10
10
5.963516E+07
7.722380E+03
1.229055E+03
1.000000E+00
5.963516E+07
Listing 13-15
Listing
The frequencies for the full model, List superelement with CSUPER images, PART Superelement with
SEBULK images, and External Superelement with SEBULK images indicate that the answer are very
close for each method:
Table 13-8
Frequency Comparison for Electronics Board Example
Mode
Base Model
CSUPER
PART
External
1.660131E+02
1.660131E+02
1.660131E+02
1.660131E+02
2.424249E+02
2.424248E+02
2.424248E+02
2.424248E+02
4.654807E+02
4.654806E+02
4.654806E+02
4.654806E+02
5.339022E+02
5.339019E+02
5.339019E+02
5.339019E+02
6.567084E+02
6.567085E+02
6.567085E+02
6.567085E+02
6.667377E+02
6.667377E+02
6.667377E+02
6.667377E+02
8.838094E+02
8.838091E+02
8.838093E+02
8.838091E+02
9.148818E+02
9.148819E+02
9.148820E+02
9.148819E+02
1.033836E+03
1.033836E+03
1.033836E+03
1.033836E+03
10
1.229055E+03
1.229055E+03
1.229057E+03
1.229055E+03
Note that the frequencies are nearly identical for each method. So the question becomes: which method
is most efficient from a computational standpoint? The answer is based on the processing methods used
for each method as summarized below:
Main Index
CHAPTER 13 775
Table 13-9
Comparison of Advantages and Disadvantage of Image Superelement

Methods
Method
Advantages
Disadvantages
Full Model
Single Model
Cannot take advantage of

Images
CSUPER Image
Makes Images of the reduced

Superelement, very efficient
CSUPER not directly supported

by Patran
PART Image
Easier to set up than CSUPER
Makes an image of the

unreduced superelement
External Image
Makes image of the reduce

superelement, very efficient.
Easier to re-use components
Cannot plot assembly model or

results on assembly. Requires at
least 2 runs.
For computation, the CSUPER is probably the best for image superelements, although external
superelements is computationally the same; although for multiple runs that do not change the external
superelements, the external superelement will realize significant computational advantage. The external
superelement method provides the maximum flexibility for re-use of an existing superelement.
1.
Main Index
776

Main Index
Chapter 14: Preparing Adams Flexible Bodies
14
Main Index
Introduction
778

Introduction
Introduction
Adams is a multibody dynamics code for analyzing the loads and forces within a system with moving
parts. In its simplest implementation, Adams can be used to model the mechanics of systems using rigid
bodies. Typical models range from analyzing simple linkages to complex assemblies such as
automobiles and helicopters.
To add fidelity to the system, the parts can be represented with flexible bodies in order to capture the
flexible dynamic behavior of the multibody simulation to provide more accurate deformations and loads.
Although not technically a superelement in the traditional MSC Nastran definition, MSC Nastran can be
used to create the flexible bodies for use by Adams. The Modal Neutral File (MNF) is a file that defines
a flexible body that is used in ADAMS FLEX analysis. The MSC Nastran ADMSMNF case control
command is used to generate the MNF file. The interface is similar to generating an external
superelement.
Main Index
CHAPTER 14 779

ADAMS flexible bodies contain physical boundary points and flexible modes, similar to a superelement
for dynamic analysis. The for the reduction of a single body, physical points for the flexible body are
defined with ASET entries and the modal dof are stored in SPOINT/QSETi entries; these entries are
discussed in detail in CHAPTER 9. For the definition of several flexible body in the same MSC Nastran
run, superelements are used to define the boundaries and component modes.
The ADMSMNF case control entry tells MSC Nastran to generate the MNF file; otherwise standard
processing of the ASET/SPOINT/QSETi entries is performed. Note that the definition for the physical
points could also be executed using the SESET entry to define the interior dof (leaving the remaining
grids as boundary grids), but this section will only concentrate on the ASET technique to define the
boundary for a single flexible body.
The ADAMSMNF entry has a plethora of options:
ADAMSMNF
Control for Nastran/ADAMS Interface
Control for the Nastran/ADAMS modal neutral file (mnf) interface

Format:
NO
YES
ADAMSMNF FLEXBODY =

FLEXONLY =
YES
NO
NO
NO
ADMCHECK =
ADMOUT =

YES
YES
YES
YES
OUTGSTRS =
OUTGSTRN =

NO
NO
NO
NO
OUTSTRS =
OUTSTRN =
YES
YES
(14-1)
1.0
1.0e8
V1ORTHO =
V2ORTHO =

value1
value2
PARTIAL
NONE
MNF
CONSTANT
EXPORT
=
MINVAR =
PSETID
setid plotel
DB
FULL
ALL
BOTH
NONE
RIGID
Examples:
Main Index
780

ADAMSMNF FLEXBODY=YES
Describer
Meaining
FLEXBODY
Requests that the Nastran/ADAMS interface be executed
FLEXONLY
Requests standard DMAP solution and data recovery following Nastran/ADAMS

interface execution
ADMCHECK
Requests Nastran/ADAMS diagnostic output
ADMOUT
Requests that the Nastran/ADAMS interface outputs Nastran .op2 files.
OUTGSTRS
Controls grid point stress output to the .op2, .mnf, or both
OUTGSTRN
Controls grid point strain output to the .op2, .mnf, or both
OUTSTRS
Controls element stress output to the .op2 file
OUTSTRN
Controls element strain output to the .op2 file
V1ORTHO
Lower frequency bound of the Craig-Bampton modes (cycles/unit time)
V2ORTHO
Upper frequency bound of the Craig-Bampton modes (cycles/unit time)
MINVAR
Requests type of mass invariants to be computed
EXPORT
Controls output to .mnf file, Nastran database or both
PSETID
Selects a set of elements (including PLOTEL) whose grids are retained in the .mnf, and
whose connectivity defines face geometry for ADAMS display.
In addition to the ADAMSMNF case control entry, the user must specify the units for the model with the
DTI, UNITS bulk data entry:
DTI, UNITS
Defines units for ADAMSMNF file.
Defines the mass, force, length, and time units for modal neutral files.
Format:
1
DTI
UNITS
MASS
FORCE LENGTH TIME
Example:
DTI
Main Index
UNITS
SLINCH
LBF
INCH
10
CHAPTER 14 781
Field
Contents
MASS
Defines mass units for the .mnf file.
FORCE
Defines force units for the .mnf file.
LENGTH
Defines length units for the .mnf file.
TIME
Defines time units for the .mnf file.
The valid units are defined in the MSC Nastran Quick Reference Guide ADAMSMNF case control entry
remark 7.
This section will concentrate on only the basic options. For details on the advanced options, refer to the
remarks for the ADAMSMNF* (Case) (Ch. 4) in the MSC Nastran Quick Reference Guide.
Simple Linkage Example

The following model represents a simple linkage used in a machine part.
Figure 14-1
Finite Element Model of Simple Linkage (element shrink on)
The interface grids for this model are 1001 and 1002 which are connected to the elements with RBE2
mpcs. To define these nodes as interface nodes in Patran, a DOF List must be created as shown below.
Main Index
782

Figure 14-2
Defining Physical Interface Nodes for ADAMSMNF Preparation
The analysis is set up as a typical normal modes analysis, but with the additional steps of selecting the
ASET and defining the ADAMSMNF parameters as shown below:
Figure 14-3
Main Index
Selecting ASET for ADAMSMNF Analysis
CHAPTER 14 783
Figure 14-4
Defining ADAMSMNF Parameters in Patran
The resulting input file includes the ADAMSMNF, DTI UNITS, ASET, SPOINT, and QSET entries
necessary to create the .mnf file:
SOL 103
CEND
TITLE = Simple Linkage ADAMSMNF Creation
ECHO = NONE
RESVEC = YES
ADAMSMNF FLEXBODY=YES,FLEXONLY=YES
SUBCASE 1
SUBTITLE=Default
METHOD = 1
BEGIN BULK
Main Index
784


PARAM
PARAM
POST
PRTMAXIM YES
DTI
UNITS
EIGRL
SLINCH
LBF
IN
10

SPOINT
1003
QSET1
ASET1
123456
THRU
1018
1003
THRU
1001
1002
1018

ENDDATA
Listing 14-1
Input File for ADAMSMNF .mnf File Creation (ref: /doc/seug/chapter14/CreateADAMSMNF.bdf)
The ADAMSMNF processing occurs after the calculation of normal modes and residual vector
augmentation. The .f06 listing includes typical ADAMSMNF output as shown below.
1
SIMPLE LINKAGE ADAMSMNF CREATION
JULY
29, 2011
MSC Nastran
12/15/10

0
SUBCASE 1
R E A L

MODE
EXTRACTION
NO.
ORDER
EIGENVALUE
RADIANS
Main Index
GENERALIZED
MASS
GENERALIZED
STIFFNESS
1.649128E+06
1.284184E+03
2.043842E+02
1.000000E+00
1.649128E+06
1.259018E+07
3.548264E+03
5.647238E+02
1.000000E+00
1.259018E+07
2.118292E+07
4.602491E+03
7.325092E+02
1.000000E+00
2.118292E+07
4.866460E+07
6.976002E+03
1.110265E+03
1.000000E+00
4.866460E+07
8.422994E+07
9.177688E+03
1.460674E+03
1.000000E+00
8.422994E+07
1.334470E+08
1.155193E+04
1.838546E+03
1.000000E+00
1.334470E+08
1.471336E+08
1.212986E+04
1.930527E+03
1.000000E+00
1.471336E+08
1.890570E+08
1.374980E+04
2.188349E+03
1.000000E+00
1.890570E+08
2.959907E+08
1.720438E+04
2.738162E+03
1.000000E+00
2.959907E+08
10
10
3.394079E+08
1.842303E+04
2.932116E+03
1.000000E+00
3.394079E+08
11
11
6.073292E+08
2.464405E+04
3.922222E+03
1.000000E+00
6.073292E+08
12
12
6.390459E+08
2.527936E+04
4.023334E+03
1.000000E+00
6.390459E+08
13
13
9.539713E+08
3.088643E+04
4.915727E+03
1.000000E+00
9.539713E+08
14
14
1.033393E+09
3.214644E+04
5.116264E+03
1.000000E+00
1.033393E+09
15
15
3.481046E+09
5.900039E+04
9.390203E+03
1.000000E+00
3.481046E+09
16
16
3.860881E+09
6.213598E+04
9.889249E+03
1.000000E+00
3.860881E+09
^^^
^^^
CYCLES
NASTRAN/ADAMS INTERFACE DMAP INFORMATION MESSAGE:
CHAPTER 14 785
^^^
^^^
READ MODULE IS BEING USED FOR A-SET ORTHONORMALIZATION
^^^
*** USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 5010 (LNCILD)
STURM SEQUENCE DATA FOR EIGENVALUE EXTRACTION.
TRIAL EIGENVALUE = -3.947842D+01, CYCLES = 1.000000D+00 NUMBER OF EIGENVALUES BELOW THIS VALUE = 0
TRIAL EIGENVALUE = 3.947842D+17, CYCLES = 9.999999D+07 NUMBER OF EIGENVALUES BELOW THIS VALUE = 28
*** USER INFORMATION MESSAGE 4158 (DFMSA)

---- STATISTICS FOR SPARSE DECOMPOSITION OF DATA BLOCK SCRATCH
NUMBER OF NEGATIVE TERMS ON FACTOR DIAGONAL =
FOLLOW
28
MAXIMUM RATIO OF MATRIX DIAGONAL TO FACTOR DIAGONAL =
1.4E+11 AT ROW NUMBER
13

TABLE OF SHIFTS:
SHIFT #
(LNNRIGL)
SHIFT VALUE
FREQUENCY, CYCLES
1.
-3.9478416E+01
-9.9999994E-01
# EIGENVALUES BELOW
0
2.
3.9478415E+17
1.0000000E+08
28
3.
8.6811436E+03
1.4828888E+01
17
4.
4.4876333E+10
3.3715438E+04
27
10
5.
2.7806302E+11
8.3925078E+04
FACTOR ERROR
6.
3.0138168E+11
8.7373258E+04
28
# NEW EIGENVALUES FOUND

0
JULY
29, 2011
MSC Nastran
12/15/10

0
SUBCASE 1
E I G E N V A L U E
Main Index
A N A L Y S I S
S U M M A R Y
(READ MODULE)
786

BLOCK SIZE USED ......................
NUMBER OF DECOMPOSITIONS .............
NUMBER OF ROOTS FOUND ................
28
NUMBER OF SOLVES REQUIRED ............
15
^^^
^^^
NASTRAN/ADAMS INTERFACE DMAP INFORMATION MESSAGE:
^^^
^^^
DURING A-SET ORTHONORMALIZATION,
^^^
A TOTAL OF
^^^
OUT OF A POSSIBLE
28
MODES WERE FOUND

28
^^^
^^^
^^^ NASTRAN/ADAMS EIGENVALUES FROM A-SET ORTHONORMALIZATION:
^^^
FOR SUPERELEMENT
^^^
1
JULY
29, 2011
MSC Nastran
12/15/10

0
SUBCASE 1
R E A L
MODE
EXTRACTION
NO.
ORDER
Main Index
EIGENVALUE
RADIANS
CYCLES
GENERALIZED
MASS
GENERALIZED
STIFFNESS
-5.658196E-06
2.378696E-03
3.785812E-04
1.000000E+00
-5.658196E-06
-3.430378E-06
1.852128E-03
2.947753E-04
1.000000E+00
-3.430378E-06
-3.396903E-06
1.843069E-03
2.933335E-04
1.000000E+00
-3.396903E-06
-2.619190E-06
1.618391E-03
2.575750E-04
1.000000E+00
-2.619190E-06
1.746950E-06
1.321722E-03
2.103586E-04
1.000000E+00
1.746950E-06
2.873887E-06
1.695254E-03
2.698081E-04
1.000000E+00
2.873887E-06
1.519705E+06
1.232763E+03
1.962004E+02
1.000000E+00
1.519705E+06
1.114487E+07
3.338393E+03
5.313217E+02
1.000000E+00
1.114487E+07
1.933255E+07
4.396880E+03
6.997852E+02
1.000000E+00
1.933255E+07
10
10
4.156161E+07
6.446829E+03
1.026045E+03
1.000000E+00
4.156161E+07
11
11
7.645035E+07
8.743589E+03
1.391585E+03
1.000000E+00
7.645035E+07
12
12
1.107754E+08
1.052499E+04
1.675104E+03
1.000000E+00
1.107754E+08
13
13
1.340846E+08
1.157949E+04
1.842933E+03
1.000000E+00
1.340846E+08
14
14
1.718740E+08
1.311007E+04
2.086533E+03
1.000000E+00
1.718740E+08
15
15
2.421276E+08
1.556045E+04
2.476523E+03
1.000000E+00
2.421276E+08
16
16
3.010368E+08
1.735041E+04
2.761404E+03
1.000000E+00
3.010368E+08
17
17
4.809028E+08
2.192950E+04
3.490188E+03
1.000000E+00
4.809028E+08
18
18
5.041641E+08
2.245360E+04
3.573601E+03
1.000000E+00
5.041641E+08
CHAPTER 14 787
19
19
8.011620E+08
2.830481E+04
4.504850E+03
1.000000E+00
8.011620E+08
20
20
9.049791E+08
3.008287E+04
4.787837E+03
1.000000E+00
9.049791E+08
21
21
9.457714E+08
3.075340E+04
4.894555E+03
1.000000E+00
9.457714E+08
22
22
2.941369E+09
5.423439E+04
8.631671E+03
1.000000E+00
2.941369E+09
23
23
4.519138E+09
6.722454E+04
1.069912E+04
1.000000E+00
4.519138E+09
24
24
1.742660E+10
1.320098E+05
2.101002E+04
1.000000E+00
1.742660E+10
25
25
2.054814E+10
1.433462E+05
2.281426E+04
1.000000E+00
2.054814E+10
26
26
3.214366E+10
1.792865E+05
2.853434E+04
1.000000E+00
3.214366E+10
27
27
4.063801E+10
2.015887E+05
3.208384E+04
1.000000E+00
4.063801E+10
28
28
2.780630E+11
5.273168E+05
8.392506E+04
1.000000E+00
2.780630E+11
^^^
NASTRAN/ADAMS INTERFACE
^^^
CALLING ADAMS MNF MODULE
*** USER WARNING MESSAGE 7807 (AFERRM)

THE ADAMSMNF CASE CONTROL COMMAND HAS REQUESTED LOADING OF MODAL GRID POINT STRESS RESULTS THAT HAVE NOT BEEN
GENERATED.
THE REQUEST IS IGNORED.
User Action:
Ensure that Case Control requests for grid point stress/strain are present if output is desired.
requests are placed in the OUTPUT(POST) section using SURFACE and VOLUME entries.
The grid point
There must also be standard
STRESS and/or STRAIN Case Control output requests present.

*** USER WARNING MESSAGE 7807 (AFERRM)
THE ADAMSMNF CASE CONTROL COMMAND HAS REQUESTED LOADING OF MODAL GRID POINT STRAIN RESULTS THAT HAVE NOT BEEN
GENERATED.
THE REQUEST IS IGNORED.
User Action:
Ensure that Case Control requests for grid point stress/strain are present if output is desired.
requests are placed in the OUTPUT(POST) section using SURFACE and VOLUME entries.
STRESS and/or STRAIN Case Control output requests present.
MNF_Info: Title:
MNF_Info: Name : ./create-adamsmnf_0.mnf

MNF_Info: Type :
MSC.Nastran
MNF_Info: Comment 1:
MNF created by the ADAMS/FLEX Toolkit Module Interface
MNF_Info: Temp modeshape file: c:/scratch/create-adamsmnf.T5652_1.mnf_01
MNF_Info: Exporting frequency range [-1.000000e+000,1.000000e+008]
MNF_Info:
Shortened Shape mode file: c:/scratch/create-adamsmnf.T5652_1.mnf_02
MNF_Info:
MNF_Info: Creating a Modal Neutral File with the following information:
MNF_Info:
Nodal Coords Yes
MNF_Info:
Element Faces Yes
MNF_Info:
Eigenvalues Yes
MNF_Info:
Mode Shapes Yes
MNF_Info:
Global Mass Properties Yes
MNF_Info:
MNF_Info:
MNF_Info:
Main Index
Nodal Masses Yes

Nodal Inertias No
Generalized Stiffness Yes
The grid point
There must also be standard
788

MNF_Info:
Generalized Mass Yes
MNF_Info:
Generalized Damping No
MNF_Info:
Mode Transformation Yes
MNF_Info:
Stress Modes No
MNF_Info:
Interface Nodes Yes
MNF_Info:
Inertia Invariants Yes
MNF_Info:
Modal Preload No
MNF_Info:
Modal Loads No
MNF_Info:
Strain Modes No
MNF_Info:
Nodal Pre-Stress No
MNF_Info:
Nodal Pre-Strain No
MNF_Info:
Monitor Points No
MNF_Info:
Matrix Operators No
MNF_Info:
Modal Load Nodal No
MNF_Info:
MNF_Info: Node info:
MNF_Info:
Count: 24
MNF_Info:
MNF_Info: Global body properties:
MNF_Info: Mass
: 0.000259
MNF_Info: Center of Mass: 5.000000 0.500000 0.000000

MNF_Info: Inertia Tensor: 0.000129 0.000647 -0.000000
MNF_Info:
0.000647 0.008670 -0.000000
MNF_Info:
-0.000000 -0.000000 0.008799
MNF_Info:
MNF_Info: Eigenvalue info:
MNF_Info:
Modes: 28
MNF_Info:
MNF_Info: Trans Mode info:
MNF_Info:
Modes: 28
MNF_Info:
Nodes: 24
MNF_Info:
MNF_Info: Writing Mode Shapes
*** USER WARNING MESSAGE 7811 (MNF_Warning)
MNF MESSAGE:
Found 2 massless node(s)
MNF_Info:
MNF_Info: Units:
MNF_Info:
Mass:
MNF_Info:
Length: INCH
SLINCH
MNF_Info:
Time:
SECOND
MNF_Info:
Force:
POUND_FORCE
MNF_Info:
MNF_Info: Number of Element Faces: 14
*** SYSTEM INFORMATION MESSAGE 7801 (AFERRM)
THE ADAMS/FLEX MNF TOOLKIT SUCCESSFULLY CREATED A MODAL NEUTRAL FILE FOR SUPERELEMENT ID
Main Index
0.
CHAPTER 14 789
^^^
^^^ NASTRAN/ADAMS INTERFACE SHAPES COMPLETED
^^^
EXIT REQUESTED
Listing 14-2
Main Index
ADAMSMNF Processing Messages in the .f06 File
790


The objective of this Chapter is to introduce the concepts and provide a simple example to generate a
flexible body for ADAMS FLEX use rather than try to recreate a comprehensive treatment of the subject.
The reader interested in more information and details about ADAMS FLEX and its theory, use, and
applications can refer to the following MSC Software documentation:
MSC Nastran Quick Reference Guide
ADAMSMNF* (Case) case control entry description
MSC Nastran Reference Manual
Nastran/ADAMS Interface
Welcome to Adams/Flex
Translating FE Model Data
FE Model Requirements
Translating MSC.Nastran Data
1.
Main Index
Chapter 15: Design Sensitivity and Optimization with Superelements
15
Design Sensitivity and

Optimization with Superelements
Main Index
Introduction
792

Introduction
Introduction
The Design Sensitivity and Optimization Users Guide provides comprehensive coverage of how
superelements are implemented in design sensitivity and optimization.
Specific sections related to superelements are:
Superelement Optimization (Ch. 2)
Automatic External Superelement Optimization (AESO) (Ch. 2)
Case Control for Design Optimization (Ch. 3)
Matrix Domain Automated Component Modal Synthesis (MDACMS) (Ch. 2)
Design Variables in Superelement Design Modeling (Ch. 2)
Twenty-Five Bar Truss, Superelement and Discrete Variable Optimization (Ch. 8)
Additionally, Design Sensitivity and Optimization of PART Superelements was added to MSC.Nastran
in Version 2010. Details can be found in the MSC.Nastran 2010 Release Guide Chapter 12, Part
Superelement Optimization Enhancements.
1.
Main Index
Chapter 16: Superelements in Aeroelasticity
16
Main Index
Introduction
794

Introduction
Introduction
The Aeroelastic Analysis Users Guide describes the theoretical aspects and the numerical techniques
used to perform aeroelastic analyses with MSC.Nastran. The purpose of this chapter is to provide
examples of how superelements can be used in aeroelasticity and not a complete review of aeroelastic
theory. Aeroelasticity in MSC.Nastran is used to model the interaction of aerodynamic, inertial, and
structural forces.
Practitioners find that superelements in aeroelastic response provide a convenient method for
determining the effect of control surfaces and their sensitivity to the flutter solution. Therefore, it is
common practice to place the control surfaces into superelements so that the effect of modal stiffness and
actuator stiffness can be studied.
MSC.Nastran provides an automated interpolation procedure to relate the aerodynamic to the structural
degrees of freedom so that loads can be passed from the aerodynamic dof to the structural dof and
displacements can be passed from the structural dof to the aerodynamic dof. Splining techniques for both
lines and surfaces are used to generate the transformation matrix from structural grid point deflections to
aerodynamic grid point deflections where local streamwise slopes are also computed. The transpose of
this matrix transfers the aerodynamic forces and moments at aerodynamic boxes to structural grid points.
The structural load distribution on an elastic vehicle in trimmed flight is determined by solving the
equations for static equilibrium. The solution process leads to aerodynamic stability derivatives, e.g., lift
and moment curve slopes and lift and moment coefficients due to control surface rotation, and trim
variables, e.g., angle of attack and control surface setting, as well as aerodynamic and structural loads,
structural deflections, and element stresses.
MSC.Nastran supports the use of structural superelements in dynamic aeroelastic analysis: aeroelastic
flutter (SOL 145) and aeroelastic response (SOL 146). Splining to Superelements is not supported in
static aeroelasticity (SOL 144).
When superelements are present, the aeroelastic splines are handled as follows:
List Superelements (SESET)
All SPLINEi and corresponding SET1 entries are defined exactly the same as a non-
superelement analysis. Boundary points are assigned to the residual by default.

PART Superelements
SPLINEi and corresponding SET1 entries are defined in the superelement where the grids on
the SET1 reside

Masses and loads on boundary points can be placed in the superelement, the residual, or split
between them with equal validity

Reduce the external superelement in a modal solution (i.e. SOL 103)
Attache the SPLINEi and corresponding SET1 entries in the residual solution
All other aeroleasticity related entries (AERO, CAEROi, PAEROi, FLUTTER, and FLFACT) are
defined in the main Bulk Data Section for all superelement types. The entries associated with
Main Index
CHAPTER 16 795
Component Modes Synthesis (CMS) follow the same rules as defined in Dynamic Reduction
Component Modes Synthesis (Ch. 9).
Note:
Main Index
It is recommended to use a consistent coordinate system when using PARTs or External

Superelements.
796


The example files used to demonstrated superelements in aeroelasticity are based on the model in
Subsonic Flutter Analysis of the 15-Degree Sweptback Wing by the KE-Method (Example HA145E)
(Ch. 8) in the MSC Nastran: Aeroelastic Analysis Users GuideAeroelastic Analysis Users Guide. The
model is a flutter solution based on NASA TN D-1824, available from the NASA Technical Report
Server (NTRS) http://ntrs.nasa.gov/ .
A brief description of the model is taken from Section of the Aeroelastic Analysis Users Guide:
The subsonic flutter characteristics of several flat-plate flutter models were reported by Tuovila and
McCarty (1955) and investigated further by Yates and Bennett (1963). The untapered wing with 15 deg
of sweepback was analyzed by Rodden, Harder, and Bellinger (1979) with its structure idealized as a
stick model and with aerodynamic forces calculated by the Doublet- Lattice method. Both the
calculated flutter speed and frequency were higher than test results in the earlier three-mode solution. The
purpose of this example is to reconsider the analysis of Rodden, Harder, and Bellinger (1979) with a
structural plate model and to demonstrate the KEmethod of flutter analysis.
The structure is modeled with a half-span model with quadrilateral elements with 7 span-wise elements
and 4 chord-wise elements as shown below:
Figure 16-1
SOL 145
Structural Elements for 15 Degree Swept Wing Example
$ FLUTTER ANALYSIS
CEND
TITLE = EXAMPLE HA145E: HALF SPAN 15-DEG SWEPT UNTAPERED WING
SUBT
HA145SS1
= KE-METHOD FLUTTER ANALYSIS, DOUBLET-LATTICE AERO, 2 S.E.S
LABEL = 0.041 IN AL PLATE W/BEVELLED LEADING AND TRAILING EDGES
Main Index
ECHO
= BOTH
SPC
= 1
SDAMP
= 2000
METHOD
= 10
$ WING ROOT DEFLECTIONS AND PLATE IN-PLANE ROTATIONS FIXED
$ MODIFIED GIVENS METHOD OF REAL EIGENVALUE EXTRACTION
CHAPTER 16 797
FMETHOD = 30
SVEC
$ KE-FLUTTER METHOD
= ALL $ PRINT VIBRATION MODES.
BROKEN IN ALTER
SET 100 = 1 THRU 1000 $ AVOID PRINTING THE AERO BOX CORNER POINTS
DISP = 100 $ OPPHIA DOCUMENTATION SAYS USE THIS, NOT SVEC
PARAM, USETPRT, 0 $ PRINT BOTH STRUCTURAL AND K-SET DOFS
OUTPUT(PLOT)
CSCALE 2.0
PLOTTER NASTRAN
SET 1
= QUAD4
PTITLE = STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS

FIND SCALE, ORIGIN 1, SET 1
PLOT MODAL 0 ORIGIN 1, SET 1
OUTPUT (XYOUT)
CSCALE 2.0
PLOTTER NASTRAN
CURVELINESYMBOL = 6
YTTITLE = DAMPING
YBTITLE = FREQUENCY
XTITLE
= VELOCITY
Hz
V (FT/S)
XTGRID LINES = YES

XBGRID LINES = YES
YTGRID LINES = YES
YBGRID LINES = YES
UPPER TICS
= -1
TRIGHT TICS = -1
BRIGHT TICS = -1
XYPLOT VG / 1(G,F) 2(G,F) 3(G,F)
BEGIN BULK
SID
G1
SPC1
12345
SPC1
12345
25
SPC1
V1
V2
PARAM
KDAMP
-1
ID
G2
ETC
THRU
40
+TDP
TABDMP1 2000
F1
G1
F2
G2
ETC
+T2000
0.0
0.01
1000.0
0.01
ENDT
ACSID
VELOCITY REFC
RHOREF
SYMXZ
AERO
EID
CAERO1
101
$
$
Main Index
+T2000
2.0706
1.1092-7 1
PID
CP
NSPAN
NCHORD
( FWD LEFT POINT

X1
Y1
)
Z1
ENDT
SYMXY
LSPAN
LCHORD
ROOTCHORD ( FWD RIGHT POINT

X12
X4
IGID
Y4
Z4
TIP CHORD
X14
+CA101
798

+CA101
.0
.0
.0
2.07055 1.48044 5.52510 0.0
PID
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
PAERO1
EID
2.07055
B6
CAERO
BOX1
BOX2
SETG
DZ
SPLINE1 100
101
101
124
100
.0
SID
G1
G2
G3
G4
ETC
SET1
100
11
13
+S1
+S1
15
18
20
22
24
25
27
29
+S2
+S2
31
34
36
38
40
K2
K3
ETC
MKAERO1 0.45
$
K1
+MK
+MK
.001
0.10
0.12
0.14
SID
METHOD
F1
F2
0.16
0.20
NO
EIGRL, 10,
PARAM
OPPHIPA 1
PARAM
LMODES
SID
METHOD
DENS
MACH
VEL
IMETH
FLUTTER 30
KE
SID
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
FLFACT
0.967
FLFACT
.45
NVALUE
EPS
F6
F7
$
DENSITY
MACH NO
FLFACT, 3
.20000
.16667
V1
V2
PARAM
VREF
12.0
.14286 $
.12500
.11111
.10000
RFREQ
ENDDATA
Listing 16-1
Entries Necessary to Define Flutter Analysis - Baseline Example (ref:

/doc/seug/chapter16/ha145ss-baseline.dat)
The VG, VF plots for the baseline model are shown below:
Main Index
CHAPTER 16 799
Figure 16-2
V-G and V-F Plots for 3 Loops Baseline Model (ref:

/doc/seug/chapter16/ha145e-baseline.dat)
For more details on XYPLOT commands, refer to CHAPTER 19 and the MSC.Nastran Quick Reference
Guide.
List Superelement
The list superelement model consists of two superelements: Superelement 10 is the inboard wing and
Superelement 20 is the outboard wing as shown below:
Main Index
800

Figure 16-3
List Superelements for 15 Degree Swept Wing Example
For List Superelements the aeroelastic entries remain the same, however, the structure is partitioned into
superelements with SESET entries and the corresponding entries necessary for Component Modes
Synthesis (refer to Dynamic Reduction Component Modes Synthesis (Ch. 9) for more details on
Component Modes Synthesis in dynamic analysis). The required entries are shown below:
$ DATA ADDED FOR SUPERELEMENTS
$ PLACE INBOARD SECTION IN S.E. 10
SESET
10
THRU
SESET
10
10
THRU
13
SESET
10
17
THRU
21
SESET
10
25
THRU
29
SESET
10
33
THRU
37
$ OUTBOARD SECTION IN S.E. 20

SESET
20
15
SESET
20
32
39
40
16
23
24
31
$ GRID POINTS 6, 14, 22, 30, 38 ARE BOUNDARY POINTS, S.E. 0

$ GEN. COORDS FOR C.M.S.
SPOINT,1001,thru,1021 $ for se 10
SPOINT,2001,thru,2021 $ for se 20
SEQSET1,10,0,1001,thru,1021
SEQSET1,20,0,2001,thru,2021
Listing 16-2
Entries Necessary to Define Superelements with Component Modes Synthesis

for List Superelement Example (ref: /doc/seug/chapter16/ha145ss-seset.dat)
The VG, VF plots for the baseline model are shown below:
Main Index
CHAPTER 16 801
Figure 16-4
V-G and V-F Plots for 3 Loops List Superelement Model (ref:
/doc/seug/chapter16/ha145ss-seset.dat)
Guide.
PART Superelement
The Part superelement model consists of two superelements: Superelement 10 is the leading edge and
Superelement 20 is the trailing edge as shown below:
Main Index
802

Figure 16-5
PART Superelements for 15 Degree Swept Wing Example
For PART Superelements the aeroelastic entries remain the same, with the exception of the SPLINE and
SET1 entries, which must be placed in the appropriate superelement. The superelements are placed into
their respective PART sections with BEGIN SUPER entries. The corresponding entries necessary for
Component Modes Synthesis are defined with SENQSET entries (refer to Dynamic Reduction
Component Modes Synthesis (Ch. 9) for more details on Component Modes Synthesis in dynamic
analysis). The required entries are shown below:
SOL 145
$ FLUTTER ANALYSIS
CEND
TITLE = EXAMPLE: HALF SPAN 15-DEG SWEPT UNTAPERED WING
SUBT
HA145SS2
= KE-METHOD FLUTTER ANALYSIS, DOUBLET-LATTICE AERO
LABEL = WING BROKEN INTO TWO PARTS

SPC
= 1
ECHO
= BOTH
SDAMP
= 2000
METHOD
= 10
FMETHOD = 30
SVEC
$
$ KE-FLUTTER METHOD
= ALL $ PRINT VIBRATION MODES BROKEN. IN ALTER PACKAGE
DISP = 100 $ WITH PARAM, OPPHIA, PRINTS PHYSICAL DOF, AERO DOF MODES
PARAM, USETPRT, 0 $ PRINT ALL USER SETS FOR DIAGNOSTIC PURPOSES
BEGIN BULK $ MAIN BULK $ $ $ $ SE 0
$
MODES FOR TOTAL STRUCTURE
EIGRL, 10, , , 15
$SENQSET, SEID, N
GENERALIZED COORDS FOR COMPONENT MODE SYNTHESIS
SENQSET, 10, 21
SENQSET, 20, 21
TABDMP1 2000
+T2000
F1
G1
F2
G2
ETC
+T2000
0.0
0.01
1000.0
0.01
ENDT
MKAERO1 0.45
Main Index
ENDT
+MK
CHAPTER 16 803
K1
+MK
K2
K3
ETC
.001
0.10
0.12
0.14
0.16
0.20
SID
?
$
METHOD
DENS
MACH
VEL
IMETH
FLUTTER 30
KE
SID
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
FLFACT
0.967
FLFACT
.45
V1
PARAM
VREF
12.0
ACSID
VELOCITY REFC
AERO
EID
NVALUE
EPS
F6
F7
FLFACT
V2
PID
RHOREF
SYMXZ
2.0706
1.1092-7 1
CP
NSPAN
NCHORD
SYMXY
LSPAN
LCHORD
IGID
$ CUT THE CAERO1 IN HALF, PUT ONE PART IN SE 10, ANOTHER IN SE 20.
$CAERO1
$
101
( FWD LEFT POINT
X1
$+CA101
Y1
.0
Z1
.0

X12
.0
X4
Y4
+CA101
TIP CHORD
Z4
X14
2.07055 1.48044 5.52510 0.0
2.07055
$ CAERO1 FOR SE 10, ROOT CHORDS CUT IN HALF, NCHORD HALVED

CAERO1
$
101
( FWD LEFT POINT
X1
,.0
Y1
.0
Z1
.0
$ CAERO1 FOR SE 20
X12
X4
Y4
TIP CHORD
Z4
1.03527 1.48044 5.52510 0.0
X14
1.03527
X1 AT GRID POINT 17, X4 AT POINT 24, ROOT CHORDS
$ CUT IN HALF, EID CHANGED, NCHORD HALVED, SPLINE CHANGED TO MATCH

CAERO1
$
201
( FWD LEFT POINT
$ X1
Y1
Z1
X12
X4
Y4
Z4
+CA101
TIP CHORD
X14
+CA101, 1.03528 .0
.0
1.03527 2.51572 5.5251 0.0
EID
CAERO
BOX1
BOX2
SETG
DZ
PID
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
PAERO1
1.03527
$
B6
$ THE SPLINES ARE NOW IN THE SUPERELEMENTS
BEGIN SUPER=10 $
$
COMPONENT MODES FOR SE 10
EIGRL,10,,,15 $ USE THE MODERN METHOD

?
$ FOR SE 10, CHANGE BOX2 TO 112
$SPLINE1 100
101
101
124
100
.0
SPLINE1 100
101
101
112
100
.0
SID
G1
G2
G3
G4
ETC
SET1
100
+S1,
15
Main Index
18
20
22
24 $
11
25
13
27
+S1
29
+S2
.20000
.16667
.14286
804

BEGIN SUPER=20 $
$
COMPONENT MODES FOR SE 20
EIGRL,10,,,15
?
SPC1
12345
SPC1
12345
25
$SPC1
SPLINE1 200
201
201
212
100
.0
G1
G2
G3
G4
ETC
SID
SET1, 100, 18
+S2
31
20
34
THRU
22
36
40
24
38
25
27
29
+S2
40
$ END OF SE 20 FILE
ENDDATA
Main Index
Listing 16-3
Entries Necessary to Define Superelements with Component Modes Synthesis

for PART Superelement Example (ref: /doc/seug/chapter16/ha145ss-part.dat)
Figure 16-6
V-G and V-F Plots for 3 Loops PART Superelement Model (ref:
/doc/seug/chapter16/ha145ss-part.dat)
CHAPTER 16 805
Guide.
The external superelement example is a derivative of the PART superelement example; the geometry is
shown below:
Figure 16-7
External Superelements for 15 Degree Swept Wing Example
The external superelement models generate the modal solution only, and contain the physical boundary
points for the structural grids which will be splined to in the assembly solution. The assembly model
must also contain the aeroelastic models and spline to the exterior points of the external superelements.
In addition the aeroelastic mesh point set (the K-Set) must be manually mapped into the assembly
solution with PARAM,FIRSTKI. To obtain the dof map for the K-Set, the user must insert the
following parameters:
PARAM,USETPRT,0 $ request dof map of the USET
PARAM,OPGEOM,0 $ required if Aero dof are requested
PARAM,USETSTR1,K $ request K-Set dof
Note that the user will not know the value of PARAM,FIRSTKI a priori so the first run will print out the
dof map from which FIRSTKI can be obtained.
The partial input for the reduction runs using the MATRIXDB method are shown below (ref:
/doc/seug/chapter16/reduce-leading.dat and reduce-trailing.dat):
assign master='reduce-leading103.master' delete
assign dball ='reduce-leading103.dball' delete
sol 103
CEND
SUBT
LABEL = LEADING EDGE EXTERNAL REDUCTION
Main Index
806

EXTSEOUT(ASMBULK=MANQ,EXTBULK,EXTID=10,MATDB)
subcase 1
SPC
= 1
METHOD
= 10
$ CHANGED TO LANCZOS
DISP(plot) = all
BEGIN BULK $ MAIN BULK $ $ $ $ SE 0

$ keep grids which will be splined in the assembly run
bndfix1,123456,2,4,6,8,9,11,13
bndfix1,123456,15,18,20,22,24
$ store component modes

qset1,0,1001,thru,1021
$ DON'T ALLOW UNUSED GEN. COORDS TO BE AUTOSPCD
SPCOFF1,0,1001,thru,1021
$
$EIGRL
MID,
F1,
EIGRL,
10,
Listing 16-4
F2,
NDES
15
Leading Edge External Superelement Reduction Input File
assign master='reduce-trailing103.master' delete

assign dball ='reduce-trailing103.dball' delete
sol 103
CEND
LABEL = TRAILING EDGE EXTERNAL REDUCTION
EXTSEOUT(ASMBULK=MANQ,EXTBULK,EXTID=20,MATDB)
subcase 1
SPC
= 1
METHOD
= 10
DISP(plot) = all
BEGIN BULK $ MAIN BULK
$ keep grids which will be splined in the assembly run

bndfix1,123456,18,20,22,24,25,27
bndfix1,123456,29,31,34,36,38,40
$ store component modes
qset1,0,2001,thru,2021
$ DON'T ALLOW UNUSED GEN. COORDS TO BE AUTOSPCD
Main Index
SE 0
CHAPTER 16 807
SPCOFF1,0,2001,thru,2021
$EIGRL
MID,
F1,
F2,
NDES
EIGRL,
10,
15
Listing 16-5
Trailing Edge External Superelement Reduction Input File
Note that SPCOFF is used to turn off autospc processing of the SPOINTs. Although not necessary in
this example, it demonstrates a method for retaining unused SPONTs for use in the assembly run if
desired.
The assembly run includes the entries necessary for attaching the external superelements as well as the
aeroelastic definition for the external superelements; that is the CAEROi entries from the external
superelement are copied to the assembly run. The internal sequence of the K-Set dof is a closed set
starting with 1. The lowest numbered CAEROi entries starts the internal sequence numbers, followed
by a set of numbers in the range NSPAN*NCORD-1 for the remaining points defined on the CAEROi
entries. The next lowered number CAEROi entry continues the internal sequence number of the K-Set.
To obtain the map the model must be run first to obtain the appropriate values for PARAM,FIRSTKI of
each superelement from the USET table.:
[parameters defined in the input file]

PARAM,USETPRT,0
PARAM,OPGEOM,0
$ request dof map of the USET

$ required if Aero dof are requested
[corresponding output]
EXAMPLE: HALF SPAN 15-DEG SWEPT UNTAPERED WING
HA145SS2
JULY
15, 2011
MD NASTRAN
KE-METHOD FLUTTER ANALYSIS, DOUBLET-LATTICE AERO
K
-1-
-2-
-3-
-4-
12/15/10
SUPERELEMENT 0
DISPLACEMENT SET
-5-
-6-
-7-
-8-
-9-
-10-
1=
101-3
101-5
102-3
102-5
103-3
103-5
104-3
104-5
105-3
105-5
11=
106-3
106-5
107-3
107-5
108-3
108-5
109-3
109-5
110-3
110-5
21=
111-3
111-5
112-3
112-5
201-3
201-5
202-3
202-5
203-3
203-5
31=
204-3
204-5
205-3
205-5
206-3
206-5
207-3
207-5
208-3
208-5
Listing 16-6
Main Index
USET Printout of K-Set dof Necessary to Define PARAM,FIRSTKI
808

The values of FIRSTKI are used to generate a partitioning vector that inserts the spline matrices of the
external superelements into the proper columns. After updating PARAM,FIRSTKI, the input file
becomes (ref: /doc/seug/chapter16/assemble.dat):
assign leadM='reduce-leading.master'
assign leadD='reduce-leading.dball'
assign trailM='reduce-trailing.master'
assign trailD='reduce-trailing.dball'
DBLOCATE DB=(EXTDB) CONVERT(SEID=10) LOGI=leadM $
DBLOCATE DB=(EXTDB) CONVERT(SEID=20) LOGI=trailM $
SOL 145
$ FLUTTER ANALYSIS
CEND
SUBT
HA145SS2
LABEL = ASSEMBLY MODEL
PARAM,USETPRT,0
PARAM,OPGEOM,0
$ request dof map of the USET

$ required if Aero dof are requested

SPC
= 1
SDAMP
= 2000
METHOD
= 10
FMETHOD = 30
SVEC
$ KE-FLUTTER METHOD
= ALL $ PRINT VIBRATION MODES BROKEN. IN ALTER PACKAGE
DISP = 100 $ WITH PARAM, OPPHIA, PRINTS PHYSICAL DOF, AERO DOF MODES
OUTPUT (XYOUT)
CSCALE 2.0
PLOTTER NASTRAN
CURVELINESYMBOL = 6
YTTITLE = DAMPING
YBTITLE = FREQUENCY
XTITLE
= VELOCITY
Hz
V (FT/S)
XTGRID LINES = YES

XBGRID LINES = YES
YTGRID LINES = YES
YBGRID LINES = YES
UPPER TICS
= -1
TRIGHT TICS = -1
BRIGHT TICS = -1
XYPLOT VG / 1(G,F) 2(G,F) 3(G,F)
BEGIN super $ MAIN BULK $ $ $ $ SE 0

$
Main Index
CHAPTER 16 809
$EIGRL MID, F1, F2, NDES

EIGRL, 10, , , 15
PARAM
GRDPNT
PARAM
KDAMP
17
-1
TABDMP1 2000
+T2000
F1
G1
F2
G2
ETC
ENDT
+T2000
0.0
0.01
1000.0
0.01
ENDT
K2
K3
ETC
0.12
0.14
0.16
0.20
MKAERO1 0.45
$
K1
+MK
+MK
.001
0.10
PARAM
LMODES
SID
METHOD
DENS
MACH
VEL
IMETH
FLUTTER 30
KE
SID
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
FLFACT
0.967
FLFACT
.45
NVALUE
EPS
F6
F7
$
DENSITY
MACH NO
FLFACT, 3
.20000
.16667
V1
V2
PARAM
VREF
12.0
ACSID
VELOCITY REFC
AERO
EID
PID
.14286
RHOREF
SYMXZ
2.0706
1.1092-7 1
CP
NSPAN
NCHORD
SYMXY
LSPAN
LCHORD
IGID
$ CUT THE CAERO1 IN HALF, PUT ONE PART IN SE 10, ANOTHER IN SE 20.
$CAERO1
$
101
( FWD LEFT POINT
X1
$+CA101
.0
Y1
)
Z1
.0
.0

X12
X4
Y4
+CA101
TIP CHORD
Z4
X14
2.07055 1.48044 5.52510 0.0
2.07055
$ CAERO1 FOR SE 10, ROOT CHORDS CUT IN HALF, NCHORD HALVED

CAERO1
$
$
101
( FWD LEFT POINT

X1
, .0
Y1
.0
Z1
.0
$ CAERO1 FOR SE 20

X12
X4
Y4
TIP CHORD
Z4
1.03527 1.48044 5.52510 0.0
X14
1.03527
X1 AT GRID POINT 17, X4 AT POINT 24, ROOT CHORDS
$ CUT IN HALF, EID CHANGED, NCHORD HALVED, SPLINE CHANGED TO MATCH

CAERO1
$
$
201
( FWD LEFT POINT

X1
0
)
Y1
Z1
X12
.0
1.03527 2.51572 5.5251 0.0
EID
CAERO
BOX1
BOX2
SETG
DZ
PID
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
PAERO1
include 'reduce-leading.asm'
X4
+CA101, 1.03528 .0
$ include the upstream assembly data
Main Index

Y4 Z4
+CA101
TIP CHORD
X14
1.03527
$
B6
810

include 'reduce-trailing.asm'
$ include the .pch files

include 'reduce-leading.pch'
param,firstki,1
include 'reduce-trailing.pch'
param,firstki,25
Listing 16-7
External Superelement Assembly Model for Aeroelasticity Example
Figure 16-8
V-G and V-F Plots for 3 Loops External Superelement Model (ref:
/doc/seug/chapter16/assemble.dat)
For more details on XYPLOT commands, refer to CHAPTER 19 and the Quick Reference Guide.
1.
Main Index
Chapter 17: Considerations in Nonlinear and Buckling Analysis
17
Main Index
Considerations in Nonlinear and

Buckling Analysis
Introduction
812

Introduction
Introduction
Superelements can be used in nonlinear and buckling analysis, however, there are several characteristics
that must be considered to ensure a good solution. For instance, in contact analysis which is otherwise
linear, a superelement approach can provide an efficient and accurate solution. However, a very flexible
structure that requires large displacements is not a good candidate for superelements because the
upstream superelement remains small displacement and the coordinate frames are not updated for the
large displacements at the boundary. Even with its limitations, there are many applications for
superelements in nonlinear and buckling analysis. The remaining sections in the chapter are intended to
highlight the limitations and practical applications when using superelements in nonlinear and buckling
analysis
Main Index
CHAPTER 17 813
Superelement Limitations in Nonlinear and Buckling

Analysis
The following list describes the important limitations of upstream superelements in nonlinear analysis;
these limitations do not apply to the residual structure.
Superelements are small displacement
Superelements have differential stiffness and follower force effects**
Superelements have linear material properties
Superelements cannot be used in contact analysis
Superelements are linear in heat transfer analysis
** Differential stiffness is a stress-stiffening effect. For example, tightening a guitar string will increase
its frequency because of the stress-stiffening effect. Follower force stiffness is formulated from pressure
loads. Adding air to a soccer ball will increase its stiffness from both the stress-stiffening and follower
force effects. Neither of these events involves large displacements, so the nonlinearity caused by the
differential stiffness from higher stress and/or loading. The differential stiffness calculation is controlled
by PARAM,LGDISP and the follower force stiffness is controlled by PARAM,FOLLOWK. The table
found in Differential Stiffness and Follower Force Stiffness in Linear and Nonlinear Solution Sequences
(Ch. 13) in the MD Nastran Reference Manual shows the nonlinear effects included for the residual
structure in traditional nonlinear static (SOL 106) and normal modes (SOL 103). For completeness, the
table is repeated below and expanded to show the differences between the residual structure and
upstream superelements.
Table 17-1
Effect of PARAM,LGDISP and FOLLOWK on the Element Force and Stiffness Matrices in
Parameters
Nonlinear Statics
SOL 106 or SOL 400
SOL 1##
Restart from
SOL 106, SOL
400
Perturbation
STEP
SOL 1## Cold

Start Using
STATSUB
Residual Structure
LGDISP
FOLLOWK
Nonlinear
Element Force
Stiffness
Stiffness
Stiffness
-1
YES
l+M+Fs+C
l+M+Fs+C
l+M+Fs+C
l+D+Fs
-1
NO
l+M+C
l+M+C
l+M+C
l+D
YES
l+M+Fs+C
l+M+Fs+C
l+M+Fs+C
l+D+Fs
NO
l+M+C
l+M+C
l+M+C
l+D
YES
l+M+G+Fl+C
l+M+G+Fl+C
l+M+G+Fl+C
l+D+Fs
NO
l+M+G+Fl+C
l+M+G+Fl+C
l+M+G+Fl+C
l+D
Main Index
814

Table 17-1
Effect of PARAM,LGDISP and FOLLOWK on the Element Force and Stiffness Matrices in
Parameters
Nonlinear Statics
SOL 106 or SOL 400
SOL 1##
Restart from
SOL 106, SOL
400
Perturbation
STEP
SOL 1## Cold

Start Using
STATSUB
YES
l+M+G+C
l+M+G+C
l+M+G+C
l+D
NO
l+M+G+C
l+M+G+C
l+M+G+C
l+D
Upstream Superelements
-1
YES
l+Fs
l+Fs
l+Fs
l+D+Fs
-1
NO
YES
l+D+Fs
l+D+Fs
l+D+Fs
l+D+Fs
NO
l+D
l+D
l+D
l+D
YES
l+D+Fs
l+D+Fs
l+D+Fs
l+D+Fs
NO
l+D+Fs
l+D+Fs
l+D+Fs
l+D
YES
l+D
l+D
l+D
l+D
NO
l+D
l+D
l+D
l+D
Where:
l = Linear Contribution to Element Stiffness or Force
M = Material Nonlinear Contribution to Element Stiffness or Force
G = Differential Stiffness and Geometric Nonlinear Contribution to Element Stress or Stiffness with
Large Displacement
D = Differential Stiffness Contribution to Element Stiffness with Small Displacement
Fl = Follower Force Contribution to Element Stiffness or Force with Large Displacement
Fs = Follower Force Contribution to Element Stiffness or Force with Small Displacement
C = Contact Contribution to Element Stiffness or Force
SOL 1## = SOL 103, 105, 107 through 112, 115, and 116
Perturbation STEP = SOL 400 perturbation step. The perturbation analysis type is specified by
ANALYSIS= case control and will be based on the total stiffness of previous STEP. Refer to the Quick
Reference Guide ANALYSIS case control command for more details.
Differential stiffness is not calculated for SOL 129, Nonlinear Transient.
Main Index
CHAPTER 17 815
PARAM,SEKD can be used to control the calculation of the upstream superelement differential
stiffness matrix. The behavior of PARAM,SEKD is shown below:
PARAM,SEKD,RSONLY calculate the differential stiffness for the residual structure only.
Default in SOL 106

PARAM,SEKD,ALL calculate and reduce the differential stiffness for all superelements and
the residual structure. Default for solutions using STATSUB and SOL 400
Note that even though superelements can calculate differential stiffness and follower force, the matrices
are reduced to the boundary using static condensation. As with dynamic analysis, the static condensation
of the differential stiffness is approximate (and quite poor). But unlike dynamic analysis, there is no
correction that can be applied to the differential stiffness reduction. (Refer to Dynamic Reduction
Component Modes Synthesis (Ch. 9) for details on dynamic corrections to static condensation.) This
limitation will be shown by demonstration in the following subsection.
Buckling Example Showing Poor Approximation for

Superelements
Consider the simple model below:
Figure 17-1
Main Index
Model for Buckling Comparison, Non-Superelement Baseline
816

A detailed description of linear buckling can be found in the Linear Buckling (Ch. 13) in the MSC Nastran
Linear Static Analysis Users Guide. The Patran setup for a buckling analysis is straight forward. The
mesh, loads, boundary conditions, and properties are set up the same as for a linear static analysis. In the
analysis form, the Solution Type is set to BUCKLING and the Eigenvalue Extraction parameters can be
adjusted as desired in this case there will be 5 buckling modes extracted. The corresponding analysis
forms are shown below:
Figure 17-2
Patran Setup for Buckling Analysis (non-superelement)
The resulting MSC.Nastran input file includes a static subcase and a buckling subcase for SOL 105 (ref:
/doc/seug/chapter17//euler-buckling/euler-baseline.bdf):
SOL 105
CEND
TITLE = Euler Buckling Example
LABEL = baseline model, 5 modes
ECHO = NONE
$[linear static subcase]
SUBCASE 1
SUBTITLE=Default
Main Index
CHAPTER 17 817
SPC = 2
LOAD = 2
$[buckling Eigenvalue extraction subcase]
SUBCASE 2
SUBTITLE=Default
SPC = 2
METHOD = 1
BEGIN BULK
PARAM
PARAM
EIGRL
POST
PRTMAXIM YES
1

SPCADD
LOAD
1.
1.

SPC1
123456
12
$ Nodal Forces of Load Set : unit-force

FORCE
11
.5
-1.
0.
0.
FORCE
22
.5
-1.
0.
0.

ENDDATA
Listing 17-1
Input File for Simple Buckling Example, Non-Superelement Baseline
The Eigenvalues from the .f06 file:

R E A L
MODE
EXTRACTION
NO.
ORDER
EIGENVALUE
RADIANS
CYCLES
GENERALIZED
MASS
GENERALIZED
STIFFNESS
2.071765E+01
4.551664E+00
7.244198E-01
1.233934E-01
2.556421E+00
1.899995E+02
1.378403E+01
2.193797E+00
2.759804E-01
5.243616E+01
5.479133E+02
2.340755E+01
3.725427E+00
7.309979E-01
4.005234E+02
1.135065E+03
3.369073E+01
5.362046E+00
1.369900E+00
1.554926E+03
2.014948E+03
4.488817E+01
7.144174E+00
2.212539E+00
4.458150E+03
Listing 17-2
Eigenvalues for Simple Buckling Example, Non-Superelement Baseline
The first 5 buckling modes for this model run as a residual-only solution are shown below:
Main Index
818

Figure 17-3
Buckling Mode Shapes for Simple Buckling Example, Non-Superelement

Baseline
To understand the behavior in Superelement analysis, the model is broken into one upstream
superelement and the residual structure as shown below:
Figure 17-4
Main Index
Model for Buckling Comparison, Superelement Model
CHAPTER 17 819
In Patran, the Analysis Forms for Buckling are set up as shown in Figure 17-2, and the superelements are
selected as shown below. For a more comprehensive example of setting up superelements in Patran, refer
to Section 2.4 for List Superelements and Defining PART Superelements (Ch. 2). This example shows
the setup for List Superelements:
Figure 17-5
Selecting Superelements in the Analysis Form (SESET)
The resulting MSC.Nastran input file includes a static subcase and a buckling subcase for SOL 105 as
well as the SESET entries for the superelement definition (ref: /doc/seug/chapter17/eulerbuckling/euler-seset.bdf):
SOL 105
CEND
TITLE = Euler Buckling Example
LABEL = SESET model, 5 modes
Main Index
820

ECHO = NONE
SUBCASE 1
SUBTITLE=Default
SPC = 2
LOAD = 2
SUBCASE 2
SUBTITLE=Default
SPC = 2
METHOD = 1
BEGIN BULK
PARAM
PARAM
EIGRL
POST
PRTMAXIM YES
1
$ SEID.10
SESET
10
THRU
11
SESET
10
16
THRU
22

SPCADD
LOAD
1.
1.

SPC1
123456
12
$ Nodal Forces of Load Set : unit-force

FORCE
11
.5
-1.
0.
0.
FORCE
22
.5
-1.
0.
0.

ENDDATA
Listing 17-3
Input File for Simple Buckling Example, Superelement Model (SESET)
The SEMAP and Eigenvalues from the .f06 file:

(SORTED BY SEID)
INDEX
Main Index
SUPERELEMENT
PROCESS ORDER
DOWNSTREAM SE
SUPERELEMENT TYPE
RESIDUAL STRUCTURE
10
CHAPTER 17 821

INDEX
SUPERELEMENT
PROCESS ORDER
DOWNSTREAM SE
10
RESIDUAL STRUCTURE
SUPERELEMENT
10
14
INDEX
-1-
-2-
11
19
-3-
-4-
7
20
8
21
-5-
-6-
-7-
-8-
-9-
-10-
10
11
16
17
18
22
SUPERELEMENT
10

INDEX
-1-
-2-
-3-
-4-

-5-
-6-
SUPERELEMENT
-1-
-2-
-3-
EXTRACTION
NO.
-8-
2 )
-10-
EIGENVALUE
-5-
-6-
-7-
-8-
-9-
7 )
-10-
10
RADIANS
CYCLES
ORDER
GENERALIZED
MASS
GENERALIZED
STIFFNESS
3.486207E+01
5.904411E+00
9.397162E-01
3.437209E+00
1.198282E+02
1.106771E+03
3.326817E+01
5.294793E+00
4.191993E-01
4.639576E+02
3.471879E+03
5.892265E+01
9.377831E+00
3.313379E+00
1.150365E+04
5.328743E+03
7.299824E+01
1.161803E+01
2.008431E+00
1.070241E+04
1.061742E+04
1.030409E+02
1.639947E+01
2.959141E+00
3.141845E+04
Listing 17-4
SEMAP and Eigenvalues for Simple Buckling Example, Superelement Model

(SESET)
The first 5 buckling modes for this model run as a superelement solution are shown below:
Main Index
-9-
10
-4-
R E A L
MODE
-7-
15

INDEX
SUPERELEMENT TYPE
822

Figure 17-6
Buckling Mode Shapes for Simple Buckling Example, Superelement Model

(SESET)
The reader will note a significant difference in the Eigenvalues as summarized in the table below:
Table 17-2
Comparison of Simple Buckling Example Eigenvalues for Non-Superelement

and Superelement Solutions
Mode Number
Non-Superelement
Eigenvalue
Superelement Eigenvalue
2.071765E+01
3.486207E+01
1.899995E+02
1.106771E+03
5.479133E+02
3.471879E+03
1.135065E+03
5.328743E+03
2.014948E+03
1.061742E+04
So why are the Eigenvalues and Mode Shapes so different? The answer is that the differential stiffness
reduction for the superelement is based on static condensation (refer to Dynamic Reduction Component
Modes Synthesis (Ch. 9) for a detailed theoretical discussion of static condensation.) In dynamic
analysis static condensation is augmented with component modes synthesis to account for the dynamic
mass (refer to Dynamic Reduction Component Modes Synthesis (Ch. 9) for a detailed theoretical
discussion of component modes synthesis). There is no similar theory to augment the differential
stiffness static condensation.
Main Index
CHAPTER 17 823
The following observations are made for this simple example of superelement reduction in linear
buckling analysis:
The Eigenvalues are significantly different for the superelement solution because of the loss of
fidelity when differential stiffness is condensed to the boundary using static condensation
The Eigenvectors (mode shapes) of the Superelement are not flexible (i.e. rigid) the angle of
the rigid superelement buckling modes are based on the rotational dof at the boundary.
The Buckling Eigenvectors are normalized to 1.0 for the A-Set of the residual structure. If the
superelement boundary rotations are large, the Eigenvector for the superelement can be larger
than 1.0
Additionally, the same solution for the superelement case can be obtained by placing the dof in the
residual structure into the ASET for non-superelement model (ref: /doc/seug/chapter17/euler-aset.dat)
So does this mean that superelements have no place in linear buckling analysis? By all means, no. There
are many cases where the objective of the analysis is to obtain the buckling of a specific region of the
structure. The use of superelements will pass the linear stiffness and loads. The effect of the linear
stiffness provides a more realistic boundary condition rather than assuming a fixed or simply supported
boundary condition. The user must use caution and engineering judgment to determine the location and
size of the superelement in relation to the analysis objective. Section 17.4 will examine a case where
superelements can be used to isolate the buckling loads of an individual panel.
Main Index
824

Applying Loads on Upstream Superelements in

Nonlinear Statics
MSC.Nastran offers two nonlinear static solutions: SOL 106 and SOL 400 with
ANALYSIS=NLSTATIC. Both solutions provide the nonlinear capabilities of large displacement,
differential stiffness, follower force stiffness, material nonlinear, and contact. SOL 106 is limited to
small strain theory and contact with CGAP and slidelines. SOL 106 is not under active development.
SOL 400 offers nonlinear capabilities of large displacement, differential stiffness, follower force
stiffness, material nonlinear (including large strain), and contact. SOL 400 contact is general body-tobody contact and offers many ease-of-use capabilities with respect to contact setup and solution. SOL
400 also has advanced convergence schemes and advanced nonlinear formulations.
The method that superelements are implemented in SOL 106 and SOL 400 is similar as far as List
Superelements and PART Superelements with the exception of defining the loading on the upstream
superelement. Currently neither of the nonlinear static solutions support external superelements. The
following subsections describe the differences in applying loads to the upstream superelements for each
solution.

The case control for SOL 106 nonlinear statics is the same as the case control for linear statics with one
exception: static loads on upstream superelements cannot be directly referenced by the LOAD case
control command. Instead, the combinations of interior loads on upstream superelements must be
combined with the CLOAD / LOADSET / LSEQ commands.
To apply loads in a SOL 106 nonlinear static analysis, the LOADSET, CLOAD, TEMP, and LOAD Case
Control commands are used in conjunction with the LSEQ and CLOAD bulk data entries along with
typical static load entries (FORCE, PLOAD4, TEMP, etc.).
LSEQ
Static Load Set Definition
Defines a sequence of static or thermal load sets.

Format:
1
LSEQ
LSID
EXCITEID
LID
TID
99
105
Example:
LSEQ
Main Index
55
10
CHAPTER 17 825
Field
Contents
LSID
Load Set Identification number
EXCITEID
The EXCITEID set identification number of the static load vector Links to
EXCITEID on RLOADi or TLOADi entries
LID
Load set identification number of a set of static load entries
TID
Temperature set identification number of a set of thermal load entries
CLOAD
Static Load Combination for Superelement Loads (Superposition)
Defines a static load as a linear combination of previously calculated superelement loads defined by the
LSEQ entry in nonlinear static analysis (SOLs 106 or 153).
Format:
1
CLOAD SID
Scale4
Scale
Scale1 EXCITID1 Scale2 EXCITID2
Scale3 EXCITID3
EXCITID4 -etc.-
Example:
CLOAD
25
1.0
-62.0
62
25.0
10
Field
Main Index
-1.0
101
2.2
Contents
SID
Load set identification number selected with CLOAD case control
Scale
Overall Scale Factor
Scalei
Individual Scale Factors applied to EXCITIDi
EXCITIDi
EXCITID number on LSEQ Entry
604
10
826

To demonstrate the loading required for upstream superelements in SOL 106, the following model and
loading will be used:
Main Index
Figure 17-7
Model Used to Demonstrate Superelement Loading in SOL 106
Figure 17-8
Uniform Pressure Loading (Loading 1)
CHAPTER 17 827
Figure 17-9
Note:
Lateral Loading on Superelement Node Only (Loading 2)
Patran does not support LOADSET / LSEQ / CLOAD, so the entries must be added
manually. The following listings demonstrate the entries required
SOL 106
CEND
TITLE = nonlinear load example
LABEL = 2 Loads
ECHO = NONE
LOADSET=999
param,sekd,all
SUBCASE 1
$ Subcase name : two-load
SUBTITLE=two-load
NLPARM = 1
SPC = 2
CLOAD=555
LOAD = 2
BEGIN BULK
PARAM
POST
PARAM
AUTOSPC NO
PARAM
PARAM
Main Index
LGDISP
PRTMAXIM YES
828

NLPARM
10
ITER
25
NO
$ SEID.10
SESET
10
THRU
11
SESET
10
16
THRU
22
$.......2.......3.......4.......5.......6.......7.......8.......9.......CONT
$LSEQ
LSEQID
EXCITID LOAD
LSEQ
999
101
LSEQ
999
201
TEMP
$.......2.......3.......4.......5.......6.......7.......8.......9.......CONT
$CLOAD
CLOADID Scale
Scale1
EXCIT1
Scale2
EXCIT2
CLOAD
555
1.0
101
1.
201
1.
1.0
...
$ Loads for Load Case : two-load

SPCADD
LOAD
1.
1.

SPC1
123456
12
$ Nodal Forces of Load Set : force-lat

FORCE
11
20.
0.
1.
0.
$ Pressure Loads of Load Set : pressure

PLOAD4
-.1
THRU
10

ENDDATA
Listing 17-5
SOL 106 CLOAD Example for List Superelements (SESET) (ref:

/doc/seug/chapter17/cload/sol-106/nlstat-106-cload-seset.bdf)
SOL 106
CEND
LABEL = 2 Loads
ECHO = NONE
LOADSET=999
param,sekd,all
SUBCASE 1
$ Subcase name : two-load
SUBTITLE=two-load
NLPARM = 1
SPC = 2
CLOAD=555
LOAD = 2
Main Index
CHAPTER 17 829
BEGIN BULK
$.......2.......3.......4.......5.......6.......7.......8.......9.......CONT
$LSEQ
LSEQID
EXCITID LOAD
LSEQ
999
101
LSEQ
999
201
TEMP
$.......2.......3.......4.......5.......6.......7.......8.......9.......CONT
$CLOAD
CLOADID Scale
Scale1
EXCIT1
Scale2
EXCIT2
CLOAD
555
1.0
101
1.
201
1.0
...

SPCADD
LOAD
1.
1.

SPC1
123456
12

PLOAD4
-.1
THRU

$
$
BEGIN SUPER = 10
$.......2.......3.......4.......5.......6.......7.......8.......9.......CONT
$LSEQ
LSEQID
EXCITID LOAD
LSEQ
999
101
LSEQ
999
201
TEMP
$.......2.......3.......4.......5.......6.......7.......8.......9.......CONT
$CLOAD
CLOADID Scale
Scale1
EXCIT1
Scale2
EXCIT2
CLOAD
555
1.0
101
1.
201
1.
1.0
...

LOAD
1.
1.

FORCE
11
20.
0.
1.
0.

PLOAD4
-.1
THRU
10

ENDDATA
Listing 17-6
Main Index
SOL 106 CLOAD Example for List Superelements (SESET) (ref:

/doc/seug/chapter17/cload/sol-106/nlstat-106-cload-part.bdf
830

The following table compares the results of the baseline (ref: /doc/seug/chapter17/ cload/sol-106/nlstat106-baseline.bdf) and the List and PART Superelement solutions:
Table 17-3
Comparison of SOL 106 Results (non-superelement, List superelement, and

PART superelement)
File
Displacement (grid 22)
nlstat-106-baseline.bdf
-8.123199E-03 8.082805E-02 -1.706316E-01
nlstat-106-cload-seset.bdf
-6.134006E-03 8.042346E-02 -1.558430E-01
nlstat-106-cload-part.bdf
-6.134010E-03 8.042353E-02 -1.558490E-01
The effect of the linear behavior of the superelements accounts for the difference in results of the
superelement solutions compared to the non-superelement solution.

The load definition for nonlinear static analysis in SOL 400 does not require the LOADSET / LSEQ /
CLOAD entries which greatly simplifies the input. The equivalent SOL 400 input files for the model in
the previous subsection are shown below (ref: /doc/seug/chapter17/sol-400/nlstat-400-baseline.bdf,
nlstat-400-seset.bdf, and nlstat-400-part.bdf).
SOL 400
CEND
LABEL = 2 Loads
SUBCASE 1
STEP 1
SUBTITLE=two-load
ANALYSIS = NLSTATIC
NLPARM = 1
SPC = 2
LOAD = 2
BEGIN BULK
PARAM
Main Index
PRTMAXIM YES
PARAM
LGDISP
NLPARM
1
ITER
25
UPW
NO
CHAPTER 17 831
$ SEID.10
SESET
10
THRU
11
SESET
10
16
THRU
22

SPCADD
LOAD
1.
1.
1.

SPC1
123456
12

FORCE
11
20.
0.
1.
0.

PLOAD4
-.1
THRU
10

ENDDATA
Listing 17-7
SOL 400 List Superelement Loading Example
SOL 400
CEND
LABEL = 2 Loads
SUBCASE 1
STEP 1
SUBTITLE=two-load
ANALYSIS = NLSTATIC
NLPARM = 1
SPC = 2
LOAD = 2
BEGIN BULK
PARAM
PARAM
PARAM
NLPARM
AUTOSPC NO
LGDISP
PRTMAXIM YES
1
10
ITER

SPCADD
LOAD
1.
1.
Main Index
25
NO
832

SPC1
123456
12

PLOAD4
-.1
THRU

$
$
BEGIN SUPER = 10

LOAD
1.
1.
1.

FORCE
11
20.
0.
1.
0.

PLOAD4
-.1
THRU
10

ENDDATA
Listing 17-8
SOL 400 PART Superelement Loading Example
The following table compares the results of baseline, List, and PART Superelement solutions:
Table 17-4
Comparison of SOL 400 Results (non-superelement, List superelement, and

PART superelement)
File
Displacement (grid 22)
nlstat-400-baseline.bdf
-8.122266E-03 8.082759E-02 -1.705937E-01
nlstat-400-seset.bdf
-6.134018E-03 8.042407E-02 -1.557857E-01
nlstat-400-part.bdf
-6.134018E-03 8.042407E-02 -1.557857E-01
The effect of the linear behavior of the superelements accounts for the difference in results of the
superelement solutions compared to the non-superelement solution.
Main Index
CHAPTER 17 833
Practical Buckling Example Isolating and Individual

Panel
There are many cases where the buckling of a local structure is the objective of the analysis. In this case,
the overall buckling modes and/or buckling in adjacent or remote components is superfluous to the
analysis at hand and adds complication, computational time, and potential confusion. However, the
influence of the stiffness and loads from adjacent structure is necessary to characterize the loads and
stress in the structure of interest. Of course, this assumes that the buckling in adjacent or remote
components does not significantly affect the load path or stress in the local component of interest.
Consider the structure and loading shown below:
Figure 17-10
Example Model for Superelement Buckling Analysis
The loading on the model will put the top skin into compression. Since the panels are of similar size and
have a similar compressive loading, there will be many local panel modes. The input file for the baseline
Main Index
834

solution contains the appropriate bulk data and case control to extract buckling modes in linear buckling
analysis, SOL 105 (ref: /doc/seug/chapter17/torquebox/torquebox-s105-compression.bdf)
SOL 105
CEND
TITLE = Torque Box Buckling Example
LABEL = Baseline Model, no superelements
ECHO = NONE
SUBCASE 1
SUBTITLE=Static Load
SPC = 2
LOAD = 2
subcase 2
SUBTITLE = Buckling Subcase
SPC=2
METHOD=105
BEGIN BULK
eigrl,105,-.001,,125
PARAM
POST

SPCADD
LOAD
1.
1.
$ Displacement Constraints of Load Set : Dy

SPC1
13
25
37
49
61
799
811
823
835
847
859
1597
1609
1621
1633
1645
1657
2287
2299
2311
2323
2335
2347
3085
3097
3109
3121
3133
3145
1633
1645
1657
859
1597
1657
$ Displacement Constraints of Load Set : Dx

SPC1
1597
1609
1621
$ Displacement Constraints of Load Set : Dz

SPC1
Main Index
61
2287
2347
3085
3145
799
SPC1
3884
THRU
3890
SPC1
3929
THRU
3935
SPC1
3938
THRU
3945
CHAPTER 17 835
SPC1
3988
THRU
3995
SPC1
3998
THRU
4007
SPC1
4058
THRU
4067
SPC1
4070
THRU
4080
SPC1
4135
THRU
4145
$ Nodal Forces of Load Set : Fz

FORCE
18213
Listing 17-9
1000.
0.
0.
1.
Torque Box Buckling Input File Baseline Model, No Superelements
The first buckling mode is a local mode near the root of the structure; the panel of interest does not
participate in the buckling shape until modes 12 and 13.
Figure 17-11
Torque Box Buckling Mode Shapes Baseline Model, No Superelements
The Eigenvalues are tightly spaced:

TORQUE BOX BUCKLING EXAMPLE
BASELINE MODEL, NO SUPERELEMENTS
R E A L
Main Index
MODE
EXTRACTION
NO.
ORDER
EIGENVALUE
RADIANS
CYCLES
2.553760E-01
5.053474E-01
8.042854E-02
2.693821E-01
5.190203E-01
8.260464E-02
2.981671E-01
5.460469E-01
8.690605E-02
3.057869E-01
5.529800E-01
8.800950E-02
3.188613E-01
5.646781E-01
8.987130E-02
3.197662E-01
5.654787E-01
8.999872E-02
836

3.331849E-01
5.772218E-01
9.186769E-02
3.340883E-01
5.780037E-01
9.199215E-02
3.522315E-01
5.934910E-01
9.445702E-02
10
10
3.534917E-01
5.945517E-01
9.462584E-02
11
11
3.685873E-01
6.071139E-01
9.662517E-02
12
12
3.730561E-01
6.107832E-01
9.720916E-02
13
13
3.976341E-01
6.305823E-01
1.003603E-01
14
14
4.059001E-01
6.371029E-01
1.013981E-01
15
15
4.127828E-01
6.424818E-01
1.022542E-01
16
16
4.268000E-01
6.532993E-01
1.039758E-01
17
17
4.271918E-01
6.535991E-01
1.040235E-01
18
18
4.340169E-01
6.587996E-01
1.048512E-01
19
19
4.425279E-01
6.652277E-01
1.058743E-01
20
20
4.447321E-01
6.668824E-01
1.061376E-01
Listing 17-10
Torque Box Buckling Eigenvalues Baseline Model, No Superelements
Note that a large number of Eigenvalues are extracted in order to ensure that the buckling modes
associated with the panel of interest are calculated.
Next, the model is solved with List Superelements (SESET). In this example, the panel of interest is
retained in the residual structure and the remainder of the model is place in a superelement as shown
below:
Figure 17-12
Main Index
Torque Box Buckling Example List Superelement (SESET) Model
CHAPTER 17 837
SOL 105
CEND
TITLE = Torque Box Buckling Example
LABEL = List Superelement Model
ECHO = NONE
SUBCASE 1
SUBTITLE=Static Load
SPC = 2
LOAD = 2
subcase 2
SUBTITLE = Buckling Subcase
SPC=2
METHOD=105
BEGIN BULK
eigrl,105,-.001,,10
SESET
THRU
72
SESET
74
THRU
85
SESET
87
THRU
98
SESET
100
THRU
111
SESET
113
THRU
124
SESET
126
THRU
137
SESET
139
THRU
150
SESET
152
THRU
163
SESET
18202
THRU
18213

SPCADD
LOAD
1.
1.
$ Displacement Constraints of Load Set : Dy

SPC1
Main Index
13
25
37
49
61
799
811
823
835
847
859
1597
1609
1621
1633
1645
1657
2287
2299
2311
2323
2335
2347
3085
3097
3109
3121
3133
3145
838

$ Displacement Constraints of Load Set : Dx

SPC1
1597
1609
1621
1633
1645
1657
859
1597
1657
$ Displacement Constraints of Load Set : Dz

SPC1
61
2287
2347
3085
3145
799
SPC1
3884
THRU
3890
SPC1
3929
THRU
3935
SPC1
3938
THRU
3945
SPC1
3988
THRU
3995
SPC1
3998
THRU
4007
SPC1
4058
THRU
4067
SPC1
4070
THRU
4080
SPC1
4135
THRU
4145
$ Nodal Forces of Load Set : Fz

FORCE
18213
Listing 17-11
1000.
0.
0.
1.
Torque Box Buckling Input File List Superelement (SESET) Model
The results of the buckling analysis are shown below:
Figure 17-13
Torque Box Buckling Shapes List Superelement (SESET) Model
TORQUE BOX BUCKLING EXAMPLE

LIST SUPERELEMENT MODEL
R E A L
Main Index
MODE
EXTRACTION
NO.
ORDER
EIGENVALUE
RADIANS
CYCLES
3.723077E-01
6.101702E-01
9.711160E-02
3.970236E-01
6.300981E-01
1.002832E-01
6.074531E-01
7.793928E-01
1.240442E-01
7.777352E-01
8.818929E-01
1.403576E-01
1.005842E+00
1.002917E+00
1.596191E-01
CHAPTER 17 839
1.023911E+00
1.011885E+00
1.610465E-01
1.147565E+00
1.071245E+00
1.704939E-01
1.337936E+00
1.156692E+00
1.840932E-01
1.446782E+00
1.202822E+00
1.914351E-01
10
10
1.630566E+00
1.276936E+00
2.032307E-01
Listing 17-12
Torque Box Buckling Eigenvalues List Superelement (SESET) Model
A comparison of the modes associated with the panel of interest is shown below:
Table 17-5
Torque Box Buckling Eigenvalues Comparison of Full Model with List

Superelement Model
Full Model
Superelement Model
Mode Number
Eigenvalue
Mode Number
Eigenvalue
12
.373
.372
13
.398
.397
43
.613
.607
The results for this model indicate that superelements are a good approach for isolating the local buckling
modes of a structural component. HOWEVER, the suitability of superelements for isolating a
component are dependent upon the structure and its surrounding support structure. The practitioner must
consider the suitability of superelements for his situation. It may be that the residual structure should
include more elements than the component of interest. The superelement approach does provide the
advantage of providing the back-up stiffness of adjacent structure which is generally more accurate than
using assumed boundary conditions (i.e. simply supported or fixed) that are used in local break-out
models with applied loads or enforced displacements.
So why would one want to use superelements in buckling analysis?
Isolate structure or component of interest
Easier to identify buckling modes associated with the component of interest
Optimization easier to identify the mode is calculated for the component of interest when
applying optimization constraints.
Main Index
840


Superelements have very limited applicability in nonlinear solutions (SOL 153 and SOL 159), but they
can be effectively utilized in linear heat transfer analysis (SOL 101 with ANALYSIS=HEAT).
Patran supports heat transfer by changing the analysis preference to Thermal
Figure 17-14
Setting Thermal Analysis Preference in Patran
The example file used for this section is a chip on a circuit board connected with pins as shown below:
Figure 17-15
Main Index
Geometry for Thermal Analysis Example Problem
CHAPTER 17 841
The boundary conditions for this model include a constant temperature of 20 on the bottom of the board
and a heat flux of 500 applied to the central element on the top of the chip.
The baseline input file is:
SOL 101
APP HEAT
CEND
ANALYSIS = HEAT
TITLE = Heat Transfer Example Problem
LABEL = Baseline Model, No Superelements
ECHO = NONE
param,post,0
SUBCASE 1
SUBTITLE=Default
SPC = 1
LOAD = 200
THERMAL(SORT1,PRINT)=ALL
FLUX(SORT1,PRINT)=ALL
BEGIN BULK
$ Material Record : pwb
MAT4
.6
$ Elements and Element Properties for region : pwb

PSOLID
PELAS
0.44
$ Elements and Element Properties for region : chip

PSOLID

$ Fixed Temperatures of Load Set : tempbc
SPC
244
20.
245
20.
SPC
246
20.
247
20.
$ Normal Heat Flux of Load Set : flux

$ CHBDYG Surface Elements
QHBDY,200,AREA4,500.0,,202,203,212,211
ENDDATA
Listing 17-13
Non Superelement Heat Transfer Model (ref: /seug/chapter17/heattransfer/heat-xfer-baseline.dat)
The solution temperatures are:
Main Index
842

Figure 17-16
Temperature Contour for Heat Transfer Example Problem
The chip and the connectors are separated into superelements as shown in the figure below:
The List Superelement example is created by using BEGIN SUPER in conjunction with SEELT to define
the list associated with each superelement:
SOL 101
APP HEAT
CEND
ANALYSIS = HEAT
Main Index
CHAPTER 17 843

LABEL = List Superelement Example, SEELT
ECHO = NONE
param,post,0
SUBCASE 1
SUBTITLE=Default
SPC = 1
LOAD = 200
BEGIN SUPER $ enable use of SEELT
SEELT,2,1,thru,128
SEELT,3,929,thru,1009
Listing 17-14
List Superelement (SEELT) Heat Transfer Model (ref: /seug/chapter17/heattransfer/heat-xfer-seelt.dat)
SOL 101
APP HEAT
CEND
ANALYSIS = HEAT
LABEL = PART Superelement Example
ECHO = NONE
param,post,0
SUBCASE 1
SUBTITLE=Default
SPC = 1
LOAD = 200
BEGIN BULK
MAT4
.6
Begin super=2
$ Elements and Element Properties for region : chip
PSOLID
QHBDY,200,AREA4,500.0,,202,203,212,211
Begin super=3
Main Index
844

$ Elements and Element Properties for region : celas2

PELAS
0.44
Listing 17-15
PART Superelement Heat Transfer Model (ref: /seug/chapter17/heattransfer/heat-xfer-part.dat)
The results for the List Superelement and PART Superelement models match the results for the baseline
model.
Note:
1.
Main Index
External Superelements are not supported in heat transfer analysis.
Chapter 18: Random Vibration with Superelements
18
Main Index
Random Vibration with

Superelements
Introduction
846

Introduction
Introduction
This chapter describes methods available in MSC.Nastran for applying random vibration loading to
models with superelements. This Chapter is not intended to be a comprehensive review of random
response analysis, but rather a review of how to use superelements in conjunction with random response
for models that incorporate superelements. For a full review of the random capabilities in MSC.Nastran,
the reader is encouraged to refer to these sections in the MSC.Nastran Dynamic Analysis Users Guide
(Dyn. UG) and MSC Nastran Reference Manual (Ref. Man.):
Random Analysis (Ch. 8) in the MSC Nastran Dynamic Analysis Users Guide
Frequency-Dependent Loads (Ch. 1) in the MSC Nastran Reference Manual
Frequency Response and Random Analysis in SubDMAP FREQRS (Ch. 1) in the MSC Nastran
Reference Manual
Another useful resource is the MSC.Random Userss Manual which is a dedicated procedure for random
analysis using MSC.Nastran and Patran. MSC.Random makes use of the xdb output file and, therefore,
is limited to internal superelements that do not contain images. The examples in this guide will not use
MSC.Random, but users familiar with the interface may want to use it for superelements setup and
limited data recovery.
In MSC Nastran, random response analysis is treated as a data recovery procedure that is applied to the
results of a frequency response analysis. First, the frequency response analysis is performed for each
loading as independent subcases. The calculations of power spectral densities (PSDs) and
autocorrelation functions for the output quantities are performed in the random analysis module as a postprocessing of the frequency response results.
Each loading condition subcase represents a unique random load source, which may be applied to many
grid points. Typically, these loads are chosen to be unit loads such as unit g loads, unit pressures, or
unit forces. Since the input is unity, the output response is also known as Transfer Function. The
probabilistic magnitude of each load source is defined by spectral density functions on RANDPS input
data. If the load subcases are correlated, the coupling spectral density is also defined on one or more
RANDPS functions. An example of coupled spectral density would be the forces on four wheels of a
vehicle traveling over a rough road.
As a recap of CHAPTER 11, the MSC.Nastran entries for frequency response analysis include:
Main Index
CHAPTER 18 847
Table 18-1
Typical Dynamic Input for Frequency Response Analysis
Dynamic Definition
Examples
Load Amplitude

Loads, Temperatures,
Base Motion
Frequency Scaling
Frequency scaling tables

real/imag or mag/phase
TABLEDi
Phasing
Delays, Phasing
DELAY, DPHASE
Load Combinations
DLOAD
Frequency Output Control
Frequency increment
FREQi
Damping
Viscous dampers
PDAMPi, PBUSH+
Structural
PARAM,G
Material
MATi (GE)
Rayleigh
PARAM, APLPHi
Modal Schedule
TABLEDi
Frequency range of
interest
EIGRL
Modal Extraction
Input Entries
RLOADi
FORCEi, PLOADi,
GRAV, RFORCE, TEMP,
SPCD, etc.
To apply random loading to the frequency response results, the following entries are necessary:
Case Control
RANDOM entry points to RANDPS or RANDT1 entries
Bulk Data
RANDPS entries to apply power spectral densities and cross-correlation terms
RANDT1 entries to define time lag constants for autocorrelation
TABRND1 entries to define power spectral density (PSD) curves
TABRNDG entries to define PSD of a gust for aeroelastic response analysis
Parameters
PARAM,RMSINT defines numerical integration scheme
A brief description of the input entries is shown below:
RANDOM
Random Analysis Set Selection
Selects the RANDPS and RANDT1 bulk data entries to be used in random analysis
Main Index
848

Introduction
Format:
RANDOM = n
i
(18-1)
Examples:
RANDOM=177
SET 10 = 100,110,120
RANDOM = 10
Field
Contents
Set identification number of a previously appearing SET command, which, in turn,

references multiple RANDPS/RANDT1 bulk data entries with different set
identification numbers.
Set identification number of RANDPS and RANDT1 bulk data entries to be used in
random analysis
RANDPS
Power Spectral Density Specification
Defines load set power spectral density functions for use in random analysis having the frequency
dependent form:
S jk f = X + iY G f
(18-2)
Format:
1
RANDPS
SID
TID
2.0
2.5
Example:
RANDPS
Field
Main Index
Contents
SID
Random Set Identification number
Subcase identification number of the excited load set.
10
CHAPTER 18 849
Field
Contents
Subcase identification number of the applied load set.
X,Y
Components of the complex number
TID
Identification number of TABRNDi entries that defines
RANDT1
Autocorrelation Function Time Lag
Defines time lag constants used in random analysis autocorrelation function calculation.
Format:
1
RANDT1
SID
T0
TMAX
10
Example:
RANDT1
10
3.2
9.6
Field
Contents
SID
Random Set Identification number
Number of time lag intervals
T0
Starting time lag
TMAX
Maximum time lag
TABRND1
Power Spectral Density Table
Defines power spectral density as a tabular function of frequency for use in random analysis. Referenced
by the RANDOM case control entry
Main Index
850

Introduction
Format:
1
TABRND1
TID
XAXIS
YAXIS
F1
G1
F2
LOG
LOG
2.5
.01057
2.6
G2
F3
G3
-.etc.-
.01362
ENDT
10
Example:
TLOAD1
Field
Contents
TID
Table identification number. (Integer > 0)
XAXIS
Specifies a linear or logarithmic interpolation for the x-axis. (Character: LINEAR or

LOG; Default = LINEAR)
YAXIS
Specifies a linear or logarithmic interpolation for the Y-axis. (Character: LINEAR or

LOG; Default = LINEAR)
Fi
Frequency value in cycles per unit time.
Gi
Power Spectral Density corresponding to Fi.
PARAM,RMSINT,value
RMSINT specifies the interpolation method for numerical integration when computing both RMS (Root
Mean Square) and N0 (Number of Zero Crossings or Mean Frequency) from PSDF (Power Spectral
Density Function). RMSINT = LINEAR requests the trapezoidal approximation, which is the existing
Nastran approach. RMSINT = LOGLOG requests the Log-Log interpolation
In many industries, the most common application of random analysis is enforced motion, also known as
base motion. Enforced motion is the application of a random power spectral density input at the base of
a structure or structural component. Other applications include the application of pressures. The
examples in the following sections are based on enforced motion, although the concepts are similar for
any applied loading.
Note that MSC.Nastran supports acoustics but this topic is beyond the scope of this User Guide.
Main Index
CHAPTER 18 851

MSC.Nastran provides two methods for applying enforce motion: constraints (SPCD) or large mass.
This section provides examples for the SPCD method. The internal superelements are based on a
derivative of the cantilever plate model used in Frequency Response Illustrative Example (Ch. 11).
Baseline Model, Cantilever Plate

The model used for the baseline solution is shown below:
Figure 18-1
Example Model Used for Enforced Displacement Base Drive Random Vibration
Analysis
In this case, the base drive analysis is an enforced acceleration applied to grid 999Z which is attached to
the structure with an RBE2 as shown in the figure above. The input power spectral density function is
specified from 10 2000Hz as shown below:
Table 18-2
Main Index
Input Power Spectral Density
Frequency (Hz)
G2/Hz
10
0.1
20
0.1
50
0.3
600
0.3
1500
0.12
2000
0.12
852

Figure 18-2
Input Power Spectral Density
The Patran setup for frequency response is discussed in Frequency Response Illustrative Example
(Ch. 11); however in this case the applied loads are an enforced acceleration at grid 999Z, so a unit
gravity sine-sweep for the z-acceleration is defined as shown below. The unit gravity is applied with a
non-spatial field which will generate TABLED1 entries:
Figure 18-3
Main Index
Defining Unit Gravity Non-Spatial Field in Patran
CHAPTER 18 853
The loading is defined as an acceleration which will generate RLOAD1 entries with a loading type of
ACCE (for acceleration):
Figure 18-4
Applying Base Acceleration in Patran
Next, the frequency output intervals are defined in the appropriate Subcase Parameters forms shown
below. The forms as shown below will generate the FREQ2 and FREQ4 entries in the MSC.Nastran
input file for a solution frequency range from 10 to 2000Hz. For more details on strategies for specifying
frequency output request intervals refer to the Solution Frequencies (Ch. 4) in the MSC Nastran Dynamic
Analysis Users Guide.
Main Index
854

Figure 18-5
Defining Solution Output Frequencies in Patran
Main Index
CHAPTER 18 855
Figure 18-6
Once again, Patran provides the MSC.Random (Tools Menu) to perform random analysis as a postprocessing step for a frequency response solution using the xdb file. In order to perform the random
analysis in MSC.Nastran, the RANDOM, RANDPS, TABRND1, and PARAM,RMSINT entries must
be placed into Direct Text Input. Note: the I and J fields of RANDPS entry must correspond to the
subcases that Patran writes. Typically, Patran writes subcases sequentially starting with SubcaseID=1.
Main Index
856

Figure 18-7
Reference to EXCITEDID: LOADSET / LSEQ Method (Ch. 11). The input file is detailed below (ref:
/doc/seug/chapter18/cant-plate-spcd/baseline/freq-resp-spcd-random.bdf)
SOL 111
CEND
RANDOM=33
TITLE = cantilever plate enforced motion - 1g sine sweep + random
LABEL = Baseline - no superelements
ECHO = NONE
RESVEC = YES
LOADSET = 1
SDAMPING = 1
Main Index
CHAPTER 18 857
SUBCASE 1
SUBTITLE=SPCD-enforced-acceleration
METHOD = 1
FREQUENCY = 1
SPC = 2
DLOAD = 2
ACCELERATION(PLOT,SORT2,PHASE)=ALL
SPCFORCES(PLOT,SORT2,PHASE)=ALL
OUTPUT(XYPLOT)
XLOG YES
XGRID LINES YES
YLOG YES
YGRID LINES YES
XTITLE Frequency (Hz)
$
YTITLE Grid 211 Acceleration (in/sec^2)
XYPLOT,XYPRINT ACCE/211(T3RM)
YTITLE PSD - Grid 211 (G^2/Hz)
XYPLOT,XYPRINT,PSDF,ACCE /211(T3) $ ignored if no random
BEGIN BULK
$randps,sid,j,k,x,y,tid
RANDPS,33,1,1,1.,0.,44
PARAM,RMSINT,LOGLOG
TABRND1,44,log,log
+,10.,0.1,20.,0.1,50.,0.3,600.,0.3
+,1500.,0.12,2000.,0.12,ENDT
PARAM
PARAM
POST
PRTMAXIM YES
FREQ2
10.
2000.
FREQ4
10.
2000.
.3
TABDMP1
.03
3000.
.03
ENDT
0.
3000.
0.
EIGRL
50
CRIT
$ Loads for Load Case : SPCD-enforced-acceleration

SPCADD
RLOAD1
LSEQ
SPCD
DLOAD
999
1.
3
1
ACCE
6
3
1.
1.
$ Displacement Constraints of Load Set : enforced-grav-999z

SPC1
Main Index
999
858

$ Displacement Constraints of Load Set : fix-123456

SPC1
123456
999

$ Dynamic Load Table : unit-grav-accel
TABLED1
1
0.
386.1
3000.
386.1
ENDT

$
$
ENDDATA
Listing 18-1
Baseline Random Response Input File No Superelements
Refer to Output with XYPLOT (Ch. 19) for more information on the XYPLOT commands. The output
from the XYPLOT commands generates the following summary information in the .f06 file:
CANTILEVER PLATE ENFORCED MOTION - 1G SINE SWEEP + RANDOM
JULY
17, 2011
MSC Nastran
12/15/10
SPCD-ENFORCED-ACCELERATION
BASELINE - NO SUPERELEMENTS
X Y - O U T P U T
PLOT
FOR*
CURVE FRAME
TYPE
YMAX
TYPE NO.
PSDF ACCE
3.177E+01
CURVE ID./
PANEL
RMS
: GRID ID
211(
5)
VALUE
S U M M A R Y
( A U T O
O R
XMIN FOR
XMAX FOR
YMIN FOR
CROSSINGS
ALL DATA
ALL DATA
ALL DATA
YMIN
ALL DATA
1.288E+04
1.392E+03
1.751E+07
2.182143E+04 7.184097E+02 1.000E+01 2.000E+03
P R I N T E D
P S D F )
NO. POSITIVE
D A T A
F O R
T H I S
C U R V E
JULY
X FOR
YMAX FOR
F O L L O W S
17, 2011
MSC Nastran
12/15/10
ACCELERATION
CURVE
ID =
211
PRINT NUMBER
Listing 18-2
COMPONENT =
X-VALUE
WHOLE FRAME
Y-VALUE
1.000000E+01
2.037537E+04
1.111784E+01
2.199330E+04
1.236065E+01
2.421090E+04
CARD NUMBER
Random XYPLOT Summary Information Baseline Model
The summary information for PSD output includes the RMS value and the number of positive crossings.
The frequency response for the magnitude of acceleration for grid 211 is:
Main Index
CHAPTER 18 859
Figure 18-8
Main Index
Frequency Response Accelerations for Grid 211-T3 (Magnitude) Baseline

Model (Patran Plot)
860

Figure 18-9
Frequency Response Accelerations for Grid 211-T3 (Magnitude) Baseline

Model (Nastran XYPLOT)
Baseline Solution with MSC.Random

The Patran tool MSC.Random can be used to process an xdb file generated for a frequency response
solution. The advantages of MSC.Random are many, to name a few:
Guided analysis setup forms
Random calculations on any quantity do not have to pre-define XYPLOT commands
Change PSD spectrum without rerunning the Nastran solution
Graphical User Interface for plotting
Nicer plots than XYPLOT
A few plots of the Patran Random tool are shown below. For a full description, refer to the MSC.Random
User Manual. The example input file associated with the figures below is /doc/seug/chapter18/cantplate-spcd/part/freq-resp-spcd-random.bdf
Main Index
CHAPTER 18 861
Main Index
Figure 18-10
Accessing MSC.Random from the Tools Menu
Figure 18-11
MSC.Random Tool Guided Model Setup
862

Figure 18-12
MSC.Random Tool XY Plot Generation Forms
Figure 18-13
MSC.Random RMS Plots
Note that the MSC.Random RMS plot is normalized to Accel Scale G so that the values are reported
in G2/Hz instead of (in2/sec2)/Hz and the RMS values is in Gs
Main Index
CHAPTER 18 863
List Superelement, Cantilever Plate

The cantilever plate random response solution is now solved using List Superelements (SESET). The
superelement definition is shown below:
Figure 18-14
Superelement Definition for Cantilever Plate Random Base Drive Analysis
The superelements definition in Patran is described in detail in Demonstration of Defining Interior Points
in Patran (Ch. 2) and the Component Modes Synthesis definition for superelements is described in Single
Level Dynamic Reduction (Ch. 10). For this example, AUTOQSET is used. Note that in this case, the
superelement definition is different than previous examples using the same geometry. The loading,
damping, etc. are defined exactly the same as the non-superelement example above. After defining the
superelements, the input file is shown below. Note that only the entries associated with the superelement
definition are highlighted (ref: /doc/seug/chapter18/cant-plate-spcd/seset/freq-resp-spcd-random.bdf)
SOL 111
CEND
RANDOM=33
LABEL = Baseline - List Superelements (SESET)
ECHO = NONE
PARAM,AUTOQSET,YES
RESVEC = YES
LOADSET = 1
SDAMPING = 1
SUBCASE 1
METHOD = 1
FREQUENCY = 1
SPC = 2
DLOAD = 2
Main Index
864

OUTPUT(XYPLOT)
SEPLOT 20
XLOG YES
XGRID LINES YES
YLOG YES
YGRID LINES YES
$
BEGIN BULK
RANDPS,33,1,1,1.,0.,44
PARAM,RMSINT,LOGLOG
TABRND1,44,log,log
+,10.,0.1,20.,0.1,50.,0.3,600.,0.3
+,1500.,0.12,2000.,0.12,ENDT
PARAM
PARAM
POST
PRTMAXIM YES
FREQ2
10.
2000.
FREQ4
10.
2000.
.3
TABDMP1
.03
ENDT
EIGRL
50
CRIT
0.
.03
3000.
0.
3000.
$ middle.10
SESET
10
105
106
107
205
206
207
20
109
110
111
209
210
211
$ tip.20
SESET

SPCADD
RLOAD1
LSEQ
SPCD
DLOAD
999
1.
3
1
ACCE
6
3
1.
1.

SPC1
999
Main Index
CHAPTER 18 865
SPC1
123456
999

TABLED1
1
0.
386.1
3000.
386.1
ENDT

$
$
ENDDATA
Listing 18-3
Random Response Input File List Superelement (SESET)
The results for

JULY
17, 2011
MSC Nastran
12/15/10
SUPERELEMENT 20
BASELINE - LIST SUPERELEMENTS (SESET)

X Y - O U T P U T
PLOT CURVE FRAME
FOR*
TYPE
YMAX
TYPE NO.
PSDF ACCE
3.177E+01
CURVE ID./
PANEL
RMS
: GRID ID
211(
5)
VALUE
S U M M A R Y
( A U T O
NO. POSITIVE
XMIN FOR
CROSSINGS
ALL DATA
2.181667E+04 7.174285E+02 1.000E+01
P R I N T E D
D A T A
F O R
T H I S
O R
XMAX FOR
P S D F )
YMIN FOR
X FOR
YMAX FOR
ALL DATA
ALL DATA
YMIN
ALL DATA
2.000E+03
1.285E+04
1.394E+03
1.751E+07
C U R V E
JULY
F O L L O W S
17, 2011
MSC Nastran
12/15/10
SUPERELEMENT 20
BASELINE - LIST SUPERELEMENTS (SESET)

ACCELERATION
Listing 18-4
Main Index
CURVE
ID =
211
COMPONENT =
WHOLE FRAME
PRINT NUMBER
X-VALUE
Y-VALUE
1.000000E+01
2.037537E+04
1.111784E+01
2.199330E+04
1.236065E+01
2.421090E+04
1.374237E+01
2.733689E+04
CARD NUMBER
Random XYPLOT Summary Information List Superelement (SESET)
866

PART Superelement, Cantilever Plate

SOL 111
CEND
RANDOM=33
LABEL = PART Superelement
ECHO = NONE
PARAM,AUTOQSET,YES
RESVEC = YES
LOADSET = 1
SDAMPING = 1
SUBCASE 1
METHOD = 1
FREQUENCY = 1
SPC = 2
DLOAD = 2
OUTPUT(XYPLOT)
SEPLOT 0
XYPEAK PSDF ACCE/104(T3)
SEPLOT 20
XLOG YES
XGRID LINES YES
YLOG YES
YGRID LINES YES
$
BEGIN BULK
RANDPS,33,1,1,1.,0.,44
PARAM,RMSINT,LOGLOG
TABRND1,44,log,log
+,10.,0.1,20.,0.1,50.,0.3,600.,0.3
Main Index
CHAPTER 18 867
+,1500.,0.12,2000.,0.12,ENDT
PARAM
PARAM
POST
PRTMAXIM YES
FREQ2
10.
2000.
FREQ4
10.
2000.
.3
TABDMP1
.03
ENDT
EIGRL
50
CRIT
0.
.03
3000.
0.
3000.

SPCADD
RLOAD1
LSEQ
SPCD
DLOAD
999
1.
3
1
ACCE
6
3
1.
1.

SPC1
999

SPC1
123456
999

TABLED1
1
0.
386.1
3000.
386.1
ENDT

$
$
$
$
$ Superelement Name: middle.10
BEGIN SUPER = 10
PARAM,RMSINT,LOGLOG
PARAM
PARAM
EIGRL
POST
PRTMAXIM YES
1
0.
3000.

$ dummy LSEQ
LSEQ
99
88

$
$
$
$
$ Superelement Name: tip.20
BEGIN SUPER = 20
Main Index
868

PARAM,RMSINT,LOGLOG
PARAM
POST
PARAM
PRTMAXIM YES
EIGRL
0.
3000.

$ dummy LSEQ
LSEQ
99
88

$
$
ENDDATA
Listing 18-5
Listing
JULY
17, 2011
ELEM
MSC Nastran
12/15/10
SUPERELEMENT 20
PART SUPERELEMENT
X Y - O U T P U T
PLOT CURVE FRAME CURVE ID./
FOR*
RMS
TYPE
YMAX
VALUE
TYPE
NO.
PSDF ACCE
3.177E+01
PANEL
: GRID ID
211(
5)
S U M M A R Y
NO. POSITIVE
CROSSINGS
2.181667E+04 7.174285E+02
P R I N T E D
D A T A
( A U T O
XMIN FOR
ALL DATA
1.000E+01
F O R
T H I S

O R
P S D F )
XMAX FOR
YMIN FOR
ALL DATA
2.000E+03
C U R V E
JULY
ELEM
ALL DATA
1.285E+04
X FOR
YMAX FOR
YMIN
ALL DATA
1.394E+03
F O L L O W S
17, 2011
MSC Nastran
SUPERELEMENT 20
PART SUPERELEMENT
ACCELERATION
CURVE
ID =
211
PRINT NUMBER
Listing 18-6
Main Index
Listing
COMPONENT =
X-VALUE
WHOLE FRAME
Y-VALUE
1.000000E+01
2.037537E+04
1.111784E+01
2.199330E+04
1.236065E+01
2.421090E+04
1.751E+07
CARD NUMBER
12/15/10
CHAPTER 18 869
External superelements also support random vibration analysis for both the 2-step and 3-step methods.
The following sections show the necessary entries for performing external superelement analysis for
random vibration with the SPCD method of enforced motion.
2-Step
The model shown in Figure 18-14 is used for the 2-step method. The reduction runs use SOL 103 to
compute the boundary stiffness, mass, and component modes. In this example the DMIGOP2 method is
used:
assign output2='ext10.op2' unit=31 delete
SOL 103
CEND
TITLE = Cantilever Plate Random Example
LABEL = EXTERNAL SE, 2-step method, SE 10 reduction
ECHO = NONE
RESVEC = YES
EXTSEOUT(ASMBULK=MANQ,EXTBULK,EXTID=10,DMIGOP2=31)
SUBCASE 1
SUBTITLE=Center
METHOD = 1
BEGIN BULK
$[boundary nodes and qset dof for component modes]
SPOINT
1001
THRU
1016
QSET1
1001
THRU
1016
ASET1
123456
104
108
204
EIGRL
0.
208
10
ENDDATA
Listing 18-7
External Superelement 10 Reduction for Random Analysis with SPCD Method

2 Step Method (ref: /seug/chapter18/cant-plate-spcd/external-2step/create10.dat)

SOL 103
CEND
Main Index
870


ECHO = NONE
RESVEC = YES
EXTSEOUT(ASMBULK=MANQ,EXTBULK,EXTID=20,DMIGOP2=32)
SUBCASE 1
SUBTITLE=Tip
METHOD = 1
BEGIN BULK
SPOINT
2001
THRU
2016
QSET1
2001
THRU
ASET1
123456
108
208
EIGRL
0.
2016
10
ENDDATA
Listing 18-8

The assembly run includes the entries to attach the external superelements and the entries required for
frequency response with random. XYPLOT commands are also included to compare the results with
previous solutions. Note that PARAM,RMSINT,LOGLOG is included within each external
superelement bulk data section as well as the main bulk data section.
assign inputt2='ext10.op2' unit=31
SOL 111
CEND
RANDOM=33
LABEL = External Superelement Assembly - 2 step
ECHO = NONE
RESVEC = YES
LOADSET = 1
SDAMPING = 1
SUBCASE 1
METHOD = 1
FREQUENCY = 1
Main Index
CHAPTER 18 871
SPC = 2
DLOAD = 2
OUTPUT(XYPLOT)
SEPLOT 0
SEPLOT 20
XLOG YES
XGRID LINES YES
YLOG YES
YGRID LINES YES
$
BEGIN BULK
RANDPS,33,1,1,1.,0.,44
PARAM,RMSINT,LOGLOG
TABRND1,44,log,log
+,10.,0.1,20.,0.1,50.,0.3,600.,0.3
+,1500.,0.12,2000.,0.12,ENDT
PARAM
PARAM
POST
PRTMAXIM YES
FREQ2
10.
2000.
FREQ4
10.
2000.
.3
TABDMP1
.03
ENDT
EIGRL
50
CRIT
0.
.03
3000.
0.
3000.

SPCADD
RLOAD1
LSEQ
SPCD
DLOAD
999
1.
3
1
ACCE
6
3
1.
1.

SPC1
999
Main Index
872

SPC1
123456
999

TABLED1
1
0.
386.1
3000.
386.1
ENDT
$
include 'create10.asm'
include 'create20.asm'
include 'create10.pch'
PARAM,RMSINT,LOGLOG
$ dummy LSEQ
LSEQ
99
88
include 'create20.pch'
PARAM,RMSINT,LOGLOG
$ dummy LSEQ
LSEQ
99
88
$
$
ENDDATA
Listing 18-9
External Superelement Assembly Run for Random Analysis with SPCD Method
2 Step Method (ref: /seug/chapter18/cant-plate-spcd/external-2step/assemble-spcd.dat)
Refer to CHAPTER 19 for more information on the XYPLOT commands. The output from the XYPLOT
commands generates the following summary information in the .f06 file:

ELEM
SUPERELEMENT 20
EXTERNAL SUPERELEMENT ASSEMBLY - 2 STEP

X Y - O U T P U T
PLOT CURVE FRAME
FOR*
TYPE
YMAX
TYPE NO.
PSDF ACCE
3.177E+01
PANEL
Listing 18-10
Main Index
CURVE ID./
RMS
: GRID ID
211(
5)
VALUE
S U M M A R Y
NO. POSITIVE
CROSSINGS
( A U T O
XMIN FOR
O R
XMAX FOR
P S D F )
YMIN FOR
X FOR
YMAX FOR
ALL DATA
ALL DATA
ALL DATA
YMIN
ALL DATA
2.182143E+04 7.184099E+02 1.000E+01
2.000E+03
1.288E+04
1.392E+03
1.751E+07
External Superelement Assembly Results 2 Step Method
CHAPTER 18 873
3-Step
The model shown in Figure 18-14 is used for the 2-step method. The reduction runs use SOL 103 to
compute the boundary stiffness, mass, and component modes. In this example the DMIGOP2 method is
used:
assign master='create10.master' delete
assign dball= 'create10.dball' delete
SOL 103
CEND
ECHO = NONE
RESVEC = yes
PARAM,EXTUNIT,31
SUBCASE 1
SUBTITLE=Center
METHOD = 10
BEGIN BULK
SPOINT
1001
THRU
1016
QSET1
1001
THRU
1016
ASET1
123456
104
108
204
EIGRL
10
208
10
ENDDATA
Listing 18-11

assign master='create20.master' delete

assign dball= 'create20.dball' delete
SOL 103
CEND
Main Index
874


ECHO = NONE
RESVEC = yes
PARAM,EXTUNIT,32
SUBCASE 1
SUBTITLE=Tip
METHOD = 20
BEGIN BULK
SPOINT
2001
THRU
2016
QSET1
2001
THRU
ASET1
123456
108
208
EIGRL
20
2016
10
ENDDATA
Listing 18-12

The assembly run includes the entries to attach the external superelements and the entries required for
frequency response with random. XYPLOT commands are also included to compare the results with
previous solutions. Note that PARAM,RMSINT,LOGLOG is included within each external
superelement bulk data section as well as the main bulk data section.
assign output2='ext10dr.op2' unit=33 delete
assign output2='ext20dr.op2' unit=34 delete
SOL 111
CEND
RANDOM=33
LABEL = External Superelement Assembly - 2 step
ECHO = NONE
RESVEC = no
LOADSET = 1
SDAMPING = 1
Main Index
CHAPTER 18 875
SUBCASE 1
METHOD = 1
FREQUENCY = 1
SPC = 2
DLOAD = 2
OUTPUT(XYPLOT)
SEPLOT 0
SEPLOT 20
XLOG YES
XGRID LINES YES
YLOG YES
YGRID LINES YES
$
BEGIN BULK
RANDPS,33,1,1,1.,0.,44
PARAM,RMSINT,LOGLOG
TABRND1,44,log,log
+,10.,0.1,20.,0.1,50.,0.3,600.,0.3
+,1500.,0.12,2000.,0.12,ENDT
PARAM
PRTMAXIM YES
FREQ2
10.
2000.
FREQ4
10.
2000.
.3
TABDMP1
.03
ENDT
EIGRL
50
CRIT
0.
.03
3000.
0.
3000.
Main Index
SPCADD
RLOAD1
LSEQ
SPCD
DLOAD
999
1.
3
1
6
3
1.
1.
ACCE
876


SPC1
999

SPC1
123456
999

TABLED1
1
0.
386.1
3000.
386.1
ENDT
$
SEBULK
10
EXTOP2
MANUAL
31
$
SECONCT
10
104
104
108
108
204
204
1001
THRU
1016
1001
THRU
1016
SPOINT
1001
THRU
1016
SEBULK
20
EXTOP2
MANUAL
208
208
32
$
SECONCT
SPOINT
20
108
108
208
208
2001
THRU
2016
2001
2001
THRU
2016
THRU
2016
BEGIN SUPER=10
PARAM,EXTDRUNT,33
PARAM,RMSINT,LOGLOG
$ dummy LSEQ
LSEQ
99
88
$
EXTRN
104
123456
108
123456
204
123456
208
123456
1001
1002
1003
1004
1005
1006
1007
1008
1009
1010
1011
1012
1013
1014
1015
1016
204
123456
208
123456
$
$
GRID
104
3.
0.
0.
GRID
108
7.
0.
0.
GRID
204
3.
1.
0.
GRID
208
7.
1.
0.
$
ASET
$
Main Index
104
123456
108
123456
CHAPTER 18 877
QSET1
1001
THRU
1001
THRU
1016
1016
$
SPOINT
BEGIN SUPER=20
PARAM,EXTDRUNT,34
PARAM,RMSINT,LOGLOG
$ dummy LSEQ
LSEQ
99
EXTRN
88
108
123456
208
123456
2001
2002
2003
2004
2005
2006
2007
2008
2009
2010
2011
2012
2013
2014
2015
2016
$
$
GRID
108
7.
GRID
208
7.
0.
0.
1.
0.
$
ASET
108
123456
208
123456
2001
THRU
2016
2001
THRU
2016
$
QSET1
$
SPOINT
$
ENDDATA
Listing 18-13 External Superelement Assembly Run for Random Analysis with SPCD Method
2 Step Method (ref: /seug/chapter18/cant-plate-spcd/external-2step/assemble-spcd.dat)
The data recovery runs include the frequency response and random entries:
assign inputt2='ext10dr.op2' unit=31
assign run1M='create10.master'
assign run1D='create10.dball'
restart logi=run1M
SOL 111
CEND
Main Index
878


ECHO = NONE
RESVEC = YES
PARAM,EXTDR,YES
PARAM,EXTDRUNT,31
RANDOM=33
LOADSET = 1
SDAMPING = 1
SUBCASE 1
METHOD = 10 $ original reduction
FREQUENCY = 1
$
SPC = 2
DLOAD = 2

OUTPUT(XYPLOT)
$SEPLOT 20
XLOG YES
XGRID LINES YES
YLOG YES
YGRID LINES YES
$
BEGIN BULK
$[Bulk data includes the same frequency response and random entries as the assembly run]
RANDPS,33,1,1,1.,0.,44
PARAM,RMSINT,LOGLOG
TABRND1,44,log,log
+,10.,0.1,20.,0.1,50.,0.3,600.,0.3
+,1500.,0.12,2000.,0.12,ENDT
PARAM
PARAM
FREQ2
Main Index
POST
PRTMAXIM YES
1
10.
2000.
50
CHAPTER 18 879
FREQ4
TABDMP1
1
0.
10.
2000.
.3
3000.
.03
ENDT
CRIT
.03

SPCADD
RLOAD1
LSEQ
SPCD
DLOAD
999
1.
3
1
ACCE
6
3
1.
1.

SPC1
999

SPC1
123456
999

TABLED1
1
0.
386.1
3000.
386.1
ENDT
ENDDATA
Listing 18-14
External Superelement Data Recovery Input File for Superelement 10 for

Random Analysis with SPCD Method 3 Step Method (ref:
/seug/chapter18/cant-plate-spcd/external-3-step/recover10.dat)
assign inputt2='ext20dr.op2' unit=31

assign run1M='create20.master'
assign run1D='create20.dball'
restart logi=run1M
SOL 111
CEND
ECHO = NONE
RESVEC = YES
PARAM,EXTDR,YES
PARAM,EXTDRUNT,31
RANDOM=33
LOADSET = 1
Main Index
880

SDAMPING = 1
SUBCASE 1
FREQUENCY = 1
$
SPC = 2
DLOAD = 2

OUTPUT(XYPLOT)
$SEPLOT 20
XLOG YES
XGRID LINES YES
YLOG YES
YGRID LINES YES
$
BEGIN BULK
$[Bulk data includes the same frequency response and random entries as the assembly run]
RANDPS,33,1,1,1.,0.,44
PARAM,RMSINT,LOGLOG
TABRND1,44,log,log
+,10.,0.1,20.,0.1,50.,0.3,600.,0.3
+,1500.,0.12,2000.,0.12,ENDT
PARAM
PARAM
POST
PRTMAXIM YES
FREQ2
10.
2000.
FREQ4
10.
2000.
.3
TABDMP1
3000.
.03
ENDT
0.
50
CRIT
.03

SPCADD
RLOAD1
LSEQ
SPCD
DLOAD
999
1.
3
1
ACCE
6
3
1.
1.
Main Index
CHAPTER 18 881
SPC1
999

SPC1
123456
999

TABLED1
1
0.
386.1
3000.
386.1
ENDT
ENDDATA
External Superelement Data Recovery Input File for Superelement 20 for Random Analysis with SPCD
Method 3 Step Method (ref: /seug/chapter18/cant-plate-spcd/external-3-step/recover20.dat)
The results for superelement 20 recovery:
CANTILEVER PLATE RANDOM EXAMPLE
JULY
24, 2011
MSC Nastran
12/15/10
EXTERNAL SE, 3-STEP METHOD, SE 20 DATA RECOVERY
X Y - O U T P U T
PLOT CURVE FRAME CURVE ID./
RMS
TYPE
VALUE
TYPE
PSDF ACCE
NO. PANEL
: GRID ID
211(
5)
S U M M A R Y
NO. POSITIVE
CROSSINGS
2.183625E+04 7.184697E+02
( A U T O
XMIN FOR
O R
XMAX FOR
P S D F )
YMIN FOR
ALL DATA
ALL DATA
ALL DATA
1.000E+01
2.000E+03
1.070E+04
X FOR
YMIN
1.392E+03
YMAX FOR
ALL DATA
1.751E+07
X FOR*
YMAX
3.177E+01
Listing 18-15 External Superelement Assembly Results 3 Step Method Data Recovery Run
Results for External Superelement 20
Main Index
882


MSC.Nastran provides two methods for applying enforce motion: constraints (SPCD) or large mass.
This section provides examples for the large mass method. The internal superelements are based on a
derivative of the cantilever plate model used in Frequency Response Illustrative Example (Ch. 11).
With the exception of the applied loading, the procedure for random vibration with the large mass method
is the same as for the SPCD method. Rather than repeat all of the input, the difference in loading will be
highlighted and the example file locations identified. The following listing shows the differences
between the large mass and SPCD methods of applied load:
$ Loads for Load Case : Large-mass-enforced-acceleration
SPCADD
$ spcd method
$RLOAD1
ACCE
$ lgmass method
RLOAD1
LSEQ
LOAD
$ spcd method - remove for lgmass

$SPCD
999
1.
$ large mass - add conm2 and force

FORCE
999
1.e6
CONM2
1000
999
1.e6
DLOAD
1.
1.
0.
0.
1.
$ remove spc1 for lgmass method

$SPC1
999

SPC1
12456
999

TABLED1
1
0.
Listing 18-16
386.1
3000.
386.1
ENDT
Input Loading for Large Mass Method (ref: /seug/chapter18/cant-plate-largemass/baseline/freq-fresp-lgmass-random.bdf)
The following table lists the example files for the large mass method. The starting subdirectory is:
/seug/chapter18/cant-plate-large-mass:
Main Index
CHAPTER 18 883
Table 18-3
Example Files for Large Mass Method of Enforced Base Motion Acceleration with Random
Analysis
Superelement
Approach
Subdirectory
Filename
None
Baseline
Freq-resp-lgmass-random.bdf
List (SESET)
Seset
Freq-resp-lgmass-random-seset.bdf
List Superelement
(SESET) example
PART
Part
Freq-resp-lgmass-random-part.bdf
PART Superelement
Example
External 2-Step
External-2-step
create10.dat
External superelement 10
reduction with
EXTSEOUT case control
create20.dat
reduction with
EXTSEOUT case control
Assemble-lgmass.dat
Description
Baseline solution for
comparison purposes
External superelement
Assembly run
External 3-Step
Main Index
External 3-step
create10.dat
reduction with
PARAM,EXTOUT
create20.dat
reduction with
PARAM,EXTOUT
Assemble-lgmass.dat
External superelement
Assembly run with
PARAM,EXTDROUT for
external data recovery
Recover10.dat
data recovery run with
PARAM,EXTDR
Recover20.dat
data recovery run with
PARAM,EXTDR
884


The external superelement example is based on a derivative of the electronics board shown in Multiple
Image Example for Electronic Components (Ch. 13).
Baseline
The baseline model is shown in the figure below. Grids 792, 1590, and 3396 represent the same corner
of a chip located in different locations; these grids will be used to compare the baseline solution with the
various superelement solutions.
Figure 18-15
Baseline Circuit Board Model (ref: /seug/chapter18/elec-board/baseline/elecboard-random.bdf)
The power spectral density for the random analysis is the same as shown in Figure 18-2. The entries
necessary for the random analysis are highlighted in the listing below:
SOL 111
CEND
RANDOM=33
TITLE = electronic board enforced motion - 1g sine sweep + random
ECHO = NONE
RESVEC = YES
LOADSET = 1
SDAMPING = 1
param,prgpst,no
SUBCASE 1
Main Index
CHAPTER 18 885
METHOD = 1
FREQUENCY = 1
SPC = 2
DLOAD = 2
OUTPUT(XYPLOT)
XLOG YES
XGRID LINES YES
YLOG YES
YGRID LINES YES
$


BEGIN BULK
$[random and frequency solution output requests]
RANDPS,33,1,1,1.,0.,44
PARAM,RMSINT,LOGLOG
TABRND1,44,log,log
+,10.,0.1,20.,0.1,50.,0.3,600.,0.3
+,1500.,0.12,2000.,0.12,ENDT
FREQ2
10.
2000.
FREQ4
10.
2000.
.3
TABDMP1
.03
ENDT
EIGRL
Main Index
50
CRIT
0.
.03
3000.
0.
3000.
886


$SPC1
123456
805
824
838
1383
1402
1416
$ load application point:

GRID,9999,0,4.125,2.125
$ RBE to original boundaries
RBE2,10000,9999,123456,805,824,838,1383,1402
,1416
SPCADD
RLOAD1
LSEQ
SPCD
DLOAD
3
1
ACCE
9999
1.
1.
1.

SPC1
9999

SPC1
123456
9999

TABLED1
1
0.
386.1
3000.
386.1
ENDT

ENDDATA
Listing 18-17 Frequency Response and Random Input Entries for Electronics Board Random
Base Drive Analysis
Refer to CHAPTER 19 for more information on the XYPLOT commands. The output from the XYPLOT
commands generates the following summary information in the .f06 file:
ELECTRONIC BOARD - 1G SINE SWEEP + RANDOM
JULY
24, 2011
MSC Nastran
12/15/10
PAGE
23
X Y - O U T P U T
PLOT CURVE FRAME
FOR*
CURVE ID./
TYPE TYPE NO. PANEL

YMAX
PSDF ACCE
1.660E+02
Main Index
RMS
: GRID ID
792(
5)
VALUE
1.481614E+04
S U M M A R Y
( A U T O
O R
XMIN FOR
CROSSINGS
ALL DATA
ALL DATA
ALL DATA
YMIN
ALL DATA
1.000E+01
2.000E+03
1.059E+01
1.764E+03
1.260E+07
3.468580E+02
XMAX FOR
P S D F )
NO. POSITIVE
YMIN FOR
X FOR
YMAX FOR
CHAPTER 18 887
PSDF ACCE
1.660E+02
1590(
5)
1.978883E+04
5.469794E+02
1.000E+01
2.000E+03
1.919E+03
2.000E+03
1.863E+07
PSDF ACCE
1.660E+02
3396(
5)
2.349298E+04
6.393575E+02
1.000E+01
2.000E+03
6.747E+02
1.566E+03
2.323E+07
Listing 18-18
Baseline Results for Electronics Board Random Base Drive Analysis
List Superelement
The list superelement example uses one chip (Superelement 10) as a primary superelement and images
for the remainder of the superelements using the CSUPER entry, i.e. Superelement 20-80 and 110-180
shown in the figure below are images of superelement 10. For more details on CSUPER entry to
generate image superelements, refer to Using CSUPER (Ch. 13).
Listing 18-19
Image List Superelement Model Using CSUPER (Superelement ID in blue,

baseline grid in black, image superelement grid in red). (Ref:
/seug/chapter18/elec-board/seset-csuper/elec-board-random.bdf)
In this case, the baseline to superelement nodes map as follows:
Main Index
888

Table 18-4
Map of Electronic Board Baseline Model Grid IDs to Image Superelement Grid
IDs
Baseline Model Grid
Superelement Number
(Type)
Equivalent Grid
792
10 (Primary)
792
1590
30 (Image)
792
3396
130 (Image)
792
The input file for the List (SESET) Superelement model with image (CSUPER) superelements is shown
below:
SOL 111
CEND
RANDOM=33
LABEL = SESET with CSUPER Image
ECHO = NONE
RESVEC = YES
LOADSET = 1
SDAMPING = 1
param,prgpst,no
SUBCASE 1
METHOD = 1
FREQUENCY = 1
SPC = 2
DLOAD = 2
OUTPUT(XYPLOT)
SEPLOT 10
XLOG YES
XGRID LINES YES
YLOG YES
YGRID LINES YES
$
Main Index
CHAPTER 18 889

SEPLOT 30
XLOG YES
XGRID LINES YES
YLOG YES
YGRID LINES YES
YTITLE SE 30, Grid 792 Acceleration (in/sec^2)
SEPLOT 130
XLOG YES
XGRID LINES YES
YLOG YES
YGRID LINES YES
BEGIN BULK
RANDPS,33,1,1,1.,0.,44
PARAM,RMSINT,LOGLOG
TABRND1,44,log,log
+,10.,0.1,20.,0.1,50.,0.3,600.,0.3
+,1500.,0.12,2000.,0.12,ENDT
PARAM
PARAM
POST
PRTMAXIM YES
FREQ2
10.
2000.
FREQ4
10.
2000.
.3
TABDMP1
.03
ENDT
EIGRL
CRIT
0.
.03
3000.
0.
3000.
SEQSET1,10,0,11001,THRU,11016
Main Index
50
890

?
$ Chip.10
SESET
10
709
THRU
792
SESET
10
796
797
798
802
803
804

$SPC1
123456
805
824
838
1383
1402
1416

GRID,9999,0,4.125,2.125
RBE2,10000,9999,123456,805,824,838,1383,1402
,1416
SPCADD
RLOAD1
LSEQ
SPCD
DLOAD
9999
1.
3
1
ACCE
6
3
1.
1.

SPC1
9999

SPC1
123456
9999

TABLED1
1
0.
386.1
3000.
386.1
ENDT
$ CSUPER Entries
$.......2.......3.......4.......5.......6.......7.......8.......9.......0
Main Index
CHAPTER 18 891
CSUPER
20 10 878
881
1082
1085 12001 12002
12003 12004 12005 12006 12007 12008 12009 12010

12011 12012 12013 12014 12015 12016
CSUPER
30 10
882
885
1086
1089
13001 13002
13003 13004 13005 13006 13007 13008 13009 13010

13011 13012 13013 13014 13015 13016
CSUPER
40 10 886 889 1090 1093
14001 14002
14003 14004 14005 14006 14007 14008 14009 14010

14011 14012 14013 14014 14015 14016
CSUPER
50 10 890
893 1094 1097
15001 15002
15003 15004 15005 15006 15007 15008 15009 15010

15011 15012 15013 15014 15015 15016
CSUPER
60 10 894 897 1098 1101
16001 16002
16003 16004 16005 16006 16007 16008 16009 16010

16011 16012 16013 16014 16015 16016
CSUPER
70 10 898 901 1102 1105
17001 17002
17003 17004 17005 17006 17007 17008 17009 17010

17011 17012 17013 17014 17015 17016
CSUPER
80 10 902 905 1106 1109
18001 18002
18003 18004 18005 18006 18007 18008 18009 18010

18011 18012 18013 18014 18015 18016
CSUPER
120110 10 1319
1316
1115
1112 11101 11102
11103 11104 11105 11106 11107 11108 11109 11110

11111 11112 11113 11114 11115 11116
CSUPER
120120 10 1323
1320
1119
1116 12101 12102
12103 12104 12105 12106 12107 12108 12109 12110

12111 12112 12113 12114 12115 12116
CSUPER
120130 10
1327
1324
1123
1120
13101 13102
13103 13104 13105 13106 13107 13108 13109 13110

13111 13112 13113 13114 13115 13116
CSUPER
120140 10 1331 1328
1127 1124
14101 14102
14103 14104 14105 14106 14107 14108 14109 14110

14111 14112 14113 14114 14115 14116
CSUPER
120150 10 1335
1332
1131 1128
15101 15102
15103 15104 15105 15106 15107 15108 15109 15110

15111 15112 15113 15114 15115 15116
CSUPER
120160 10 1339
1336
1135 1132
16101 16102
16103 16104 16105 16106 16107 16108 16109 16110

16111 16112 16113 16114 16115 16116
CSUPER
120170 10 1343
1340
1139 1136
17101 17102
17103 17104 17105 17106 17107 17108 17109 17110

17111 17112 17113 17114 17115 17116
CSUPER
Main Index
120180 10 1347
1344
1143 1140
18101 18102
892

18103 18104 18105 18106 18107 18108 18109 18110

18111 18112 18113 18114 18115 18116
ENDDATA
Listing 18-20
Electronics Board List (SESET) Superelement with Image Superelement

(CSUPER) Input file for Random Base Drive Analyis
The results are summarized in Table 18-6.
Part Superelement
The PART superelement example uses one chip (Superelement 10) as a primary superelement and images
for the remainder of the superelements using the SEBULK entry with the REPEAT option, i.e.
Superelement 20-80 and 110-180 shown in the figure below are images of superelement 10. For more
details on CSUPER entry to generate image superelements, refer to Using SEBULK and SELOC to image
a PART (Ch. 13).
Figure 18-16
Main Index
Image PART Superelement Model Using SEBULK and SELOC (Superelement

ID in blue, baseline grid in black, image superelement grid in red). (Ref:
/seug/chapter18/elec-board/part/elec-board-random.bdf)
CHAPTER 18 893
In this case, the baseline to superelement nodes map as follows:

Table 18-5
Map of Electronic Board Baseline Model Grid IDs to Image Superelement Grid
IDs
Baseline Model Grid
Superelement Number
(Type)
Equivalent Grid
792
10 (Primary)
792
1590
30 (Image)
792
3396
130 (Image)
792
The input file for the PART Superelement model with image (SEBULK and SELOC) superelements is
shown below:
SOL 111
CEND
RANDOM=33
LABEL = PART Superelement with SEBULK Image
ECHO = NONE
RESVEC = YES
LOADSET = 1
SDAMPING = 1
param,prgpst,no
param,rmsint,loglog
PARAM,AUTOQSET,YES
SUBCASE 1
METHOD = 1
FREQUENCY = 1
SPC = 2
DLOAD = 2
OUTPUT(XYPLOT)
SEPLOT 10
XLOG YES
XGRID LINES YES
YLOG YES
YGRID LINES YES
Main Index
894

$
SEPLOT 30
XLOG YES
XGRID LINES YES
YLOG YES
YGRID LINES YES
SEPLOT 130
XLOG YES
XGRID LINES YES
YLOG YES
YGRID LINES YES
BEGIN BULK
RANDPS,33,1,1,1.,0.,44
PARAM,RMSINT,LOGLOG
TABRND1,44,log,log
+,10.,0.1,20.,0.1,50.,0.3,600.,0.3
+,1500.,0.12,2000.,0.12,ENDT
PARAM
PARAM
POST
PRTMAXIM YES
FREQ2
10.
2000.
FREQ4
10.
2000.
.3
TABDMP1
.03
ENDT
EIGRL
50
CRIT
0.
.03
3000.
0.
3000.
$.......2.......3.......4.......5.......6.......7.......8.......9.......0
Main Index
CHAPTER 18 895
SELOC
20
874
877
1078
878
881
1082
SELOC
30
874
877
1078
882
885
1086
SELOC
40
874
877
1078
886
889
1090
SELOC
50
874
877
1078
890
893
1094
SELOC
60
874
877
1078
894
897
1098
SELOC
70
874
877
1078
898
901
1102
SELOC
80
874
877
1078
902
905
1106
SELOC
110
874
877
1078 1319 1316 1115
SELOC
120
874
877
1078 1323 1320 1119
SELOC
130
874
877
1078 1327 1324 1123
SELOC
140
874
877
1078 1331 1328 1127
SELOC
150
874
877
1078 1335 1332 1131
SELOC
160
874
877
1078 1339 1336 1135
SELOC
170
874
877
1078 1343 1340 1139
SELOC
180
874
877 1078 1347 1344 1143

$SPC1
123456
805
824
838
1383
1402

GRID,9999,0,4.125,2.125
RBE2,10000,9999,123456,805,824,838,1383,1402
,1416
Main Index
SPCADD
RLOAD1
3
1
ACCE
1416
896

LSEQ
SPCD
9999
DLOAD
1.
6
3
1.
1.

SPC1
9999

SPC1
123456
9999

TABLED1
1
0.
386.1
3000.
386.1
$$$Create two files, one that is
include 'residualboard.bdf'
Begin
Super=10
include'chiponly.bdf'
$ dummy lseq
LSEQ
Begin
LSEQ
Begin
LSEQ
Begin
LSEQ
Begin
LSEQ
Begin
LSEQ
Begin
LSEQ
Begin
LSEQ
Begin
LSEQ
Begin
LSEQ
Begin
LSEQ
Begin
LSEQ
Begin
Main Index
99
99
99
99
99
99
99
99
99
99
99
99
99
99
99
99
Super=20
1
Super=30
1
Super=40
1
Super=50
1
Super=60
1
Super=70
1
Super=80
1
Super=110
1
99
99
Super=120
1
99
99
Super=130
1
99
99
Super=140
1
99
Super=150
99
ENDT
strictly the chip and one that is the board (residual)
CHAPTER 18 897
LSEQ
Begin
LSEQ
Begin
LSEQ
Begin
LSEQ
99
99
Super=160
1
99
99
Super=170
1
99
99
Super=180
1
Listing 18-21
99
99
Electronics Board PART Superelement with Image Superelement Input file for
Random Base Drive Analysis
The electronics board can be solved efficiently by using external superelements. In both the 2-step and
3-step examples, the chip is reduced and reused multiple times. The DMIGDB option is used for the
external superelement examples.
2-Step Method
The reduction run for the chip using the 2-step external superelement method is shown below:
assign master='chip.master' delete
assign dball='chip.dball' delete
27, 2011 at 21:43:36.

$ Normal Modes Analysis, Database
SOL 103
CEND
ECHO = NONE
RESVEC = NO
EXTSEOUT(ASMBULK=MANQ,EXTBULK,EXTID=10,DMIGDB)
SUBCASE 1
SUBTITLE=Center
METHOD = 1
Main Index
898

BEGIN BULK
PARAM
PARAM
POST
PRTMAXIM YES
EIGRL
10
SPOINT
11001
QSET1
ASET1
123456
Listing 18-22
THRU
11016
11001
THRU
11016
874
877
1078
MASS
1081
Reduction Run for Electronics Chip 2 Step Method (ref: /seug/chapter18/elecboard/external-2-step/chip-create-external-dmigdb.bdf)
Since the chip is reused multiple times, an INCLUDE file containing the common data for each
superelement is used; this is included after BEGIN SUPER = ##.
EXTRN
874
123456
877
123456
1078
123456
1081
123456
11001
11002
11003
11004
11005
11006
11007
11008
11009
11010
11011
11012
11013
11014
11015
11016
123456
1081
123456
$
$
GRID
874
.25
.5
0.
GRID
877
1.
.5
0.
GRID
1078
.25
2.
0.
GRID
1081
1.
2.
0.
$
ASET
874
123456
877
123456
11001
THRU
11016
11001
THRU
11016
1078
$
QSET1
$
SPOINT
Listing 18-23
Common Data for Reusing Chip in Multiple Superelements
The corresponding assembly run, attaching and locating the chip 16 times is shown below:
assign master='assy.master' delete
assign dball='assy.dball' delete
assign chipm='chip.master'
assign chipd='chip.dball'
DBLOCATE DB=(EXTDB) CONVERT(SEID=10),LOGICAL=CHIPM
Main Index
CHAPTER 18 899


27, 2011 at 17:47:21.

SOL 111
CEND
RANDOM=33
ECHO = NONE
RESVEC = YES
LOADSET = 1
SDAMPING = 1
param,prgpst,no
param,rmsint,loglog
PARAM,AUTOQSET,YES
SUBCASE 1
METHOD = 1
FREQUENCY = 1
SPC = 2
DLOAD = 2
Main Index
900

OUTPUT(XYPLOT)
SEPLOT 10
XLOG YES
XGRID LINES YES
YLOG YES
YGRID LINES YES
$
SEPLOT 30
XLOG YES
XGRID LINES YES
YLOG YES
YGRID LINES YES
SEPLOT 130
XLOG YES
XGRID LINES YES
YLOG YES
YGRID LINES YES
BEGIN BULK
RANDPS,33,1,1,1.,0.,44
PARAM,RMSINT,LOGLOG
TABRND1,44,log,log
+,10.,0.1,20.,0.1,50.,0.3,600.,0.3
+,1500.,0.12,2000.,0.12,ENDT
Main Index
CHAPTER 18 901
PARAM
PARAM
POST
PRTMAXIM YES
FREQ2
10.
2000.
FREQ4
10.
2000.
.3
TABDMP1
3000.
.03
ENDT
0.
EIGRL
50
CRIT
.03
10

GRID,9999,0,4.125,2.125
RBE2,10000,9999,123456,805,824,838,1383,1402
,1416
SPCADD
RLOAD1
LSEQ
SPCD
DLOAD
9999
1.
3
1
ACCE
6
3
1.
1.

SPC1
9999

SPC1
123456
9999

TABLED1
1
0.
Main Index
386.1
3000.
386.1
ENDT
SELOC
20
874
877
1078
878
881
1082
SELOC
30
874
877
1078
882
885
1086
SELOC
40
874
877
1078
886
889
1090
SELOC
50
874
877
1078
890
893
1094
SELOC
60
874
877
1078
894
897
1098
SELOC
70
874
877
1078
898
901
1102
SELOC
80
874
877
1078
902
905
1106
SELOC
110
874
877
1078
1319 1316
1115
SELOC
120
874
877
1078
1323 1320
1119
SELOC
130
874
877
1078
1327 1324
1123
SELOC
140
874
877
1078
1331 1328 1127
SELOC
150
874
877
1078
1335 1332 1131
SELOC
160
874
877
1078
1339 1336 1135
SELOC
170
874
877
1078
1343 1340
SELOC
180
874
877 1078
1347 1344
1139
1143
902


$include 'chip-create-external-dmigdb.asm'
SEBULK
10EXTERNAL
MANUAL
SEBULK
20EXTERNAL
MANUAL
SEBULK
30EXTERNAL
MANUAL
SEBULK
40EXTERNAL
MANUAL
SEBULK
50EXTERNAL
MANUAL
SEBULK
60EXTERNAL
MANUAL
SEBULK
70EXTERNAL
MANUAL
SEBULK
80EXTERNAL
MANUAL
SEBULK
110EXTERNAL
MANUAL
SEBULK
120EXTERNAL
MANUAL
SEBULK
130EXTERNAL
MANUAL
SEBULK
140EXTERNAL
MANUAL
SEBULK
150EXTERNAL
MANUAL
SEBULK
160EXTERNAL
MANUAL
SEBULK
170EXTERNAL
MANUAL
SEBULK
180EXTERNAL
MANUAL
SECONCT
SPOINT
SECONCT
SPOINT
SECONCT
SPOINT
SECONCT
SPOINT
SECONCT
SPOINT
SECONCT
Main Index
10
874
874
877
877
1078
1078
11001
THRU
11016
11001
THRU
11016
11001
THRU
11016
20
874
878
877
881
1078
1082
11001
THRU
11016
12001
THRU
12016
12001
THRU
12016
30
874
882
877
885
1078
1086
11001
THRU
11016
13001
THRU
13016
13001
THRU
13016
40
874
886
877
889
1078
1090
11001
THRU
11016
14001
THRU
14016
14001
THRU
14016
50
874
890
877
893
1078
1094
11001
THRU
11016
15001
THRU
15016
15001
THRU
15016
60
874
894
877
897
1078
1098
11001
THRU
11016
16001
THRU
16016
1081
1081
1081
1085
1081
1089
1081
1093
1081
1097
1081
1101
CHAPTER 18 903
SPOINT
SECONCT
SPOINT
SECONCT
SPOINT
SECONCT
SPOINT
SECONCT
SPOINT
SECONCT
SPOINT
SECONCT
SPOINT
SECONCT
SPOINT
SECONCT
SPOINT
SECONCT
SPOINT
SECONCT
SPOINT
Main Index
16001
THRU
70
16016
874
898
877
901
1078
1102
11001
THRU
11016
17001
THRU
17016
17001
THRU
17016
80
874
902
877
905
1078
1106
11001
THRU
11016
18001
THRU
18016
18001
THRU
18016
110
874
1319
877
1316
1078
1115
11001
THRU
11016
11101
THRU
11116
11101
THRU
11116
120
874
1323
877
1320
1078
1119
11001
THRU
11016
12101
THRU
12116
12101
THRU
12116
130
874
1327
877
1324
1078
1123
11001
THRU
11016
13101
THRU
13116
13101
THRU
13116
140
874
1331
877
1328
1078
1127
11001
THRU
11016
14101
THRU
14116
14101
THRU
14116
150
874
1335
877
1332
1078
1131
11001
THRU
11016
15101
THRU
15116
15101
THRU
15116
160
874
1339
877
1336
1078
1135
11001
THRU
11016
16101
THRU
16116
16101
THRU
16116
170
874
1343
877
1340
1078
1139
11001
THRU
11016
17101
THRU
17116
17101
THRU
17116
180
874
1347
877
1344
1078
1143
11001
THRU
11016
18101
THRU
18116
18101
THRU
18116
1081
1105
1081
1109
1081
1112
1081
1116
1081
1120
1081
1124
1081
1128
1081
1132
1081
1136
1081
1140
904

BEGIN SUPER
10
include 'chip-extpch.bdf'
$ dummy lseq in each SE
LSEQ
BEGIN SUPER
99
99
20
LSEQ
BEGIN SUPER
99
99
30
LSEQ
BEGIN SUPER
99
99
40
LSEQ
BEGIN SUPER
99
99
50
LSEQ
BEGIN SUPER
99
99
60
LSEQ
BEGIN SUPER
99
99
70
LSEQ
BEGIN SUPER
99
99
80
LSEQ
BEGIN SUPER
99
99
110
LSEQ
BEGIN SUPER
99
99
120
LSEQ
BEGIN SUPER
99
99
130
LSEQ
BEGIN SUPER
99
99
140
LSEQ
BEGIN SUPER
99
99
150
LSEQ
BEGIN SUPER
99
99
160
LSEQ
BEGIN SUPER
Main Index
99
170
99
CHAPTER 18 905
LSEQ
BEGIN SUPER
99
99
180
LSEQ
99
99
ENDDATA
Listing 18-24
Assembly Run for Electronics Board with Reused Chip Components 2 Step
Method (ref: /seug/chapter18/elec-board/external-2-step/assemble-boardchips-dmigdb-random.bdf)

3-Step Method
The reduction run for the chip using the 3-step external superelement method is shown below:
assign master='chip.master' delete
assign dball='chip.dball' delete
SOL 103
CEND
ECHO = NONE
RESVEC = NO
$EXTSEOUT(ASMBULK=MANQ,EXTBULK,EXTID=10,DMIGDB)
param,extout,dmigdb
SUBCASE 1
SUBTITLE=Center
METHOD = 10
BEGIN BULK
PARAM
PARAM
POST
EIGRL
10
SPOINT
11001
QSET1
ASET1
Main Index
PRTMAXIM YES
123456
10
THRU
11016
11001
THRU
11016
874
877
1078
1081
MASS
906

Listing 18-25
Reduction Run for Electronics Chip 3 Step Method (ref: /seug/chapter18/elecboard/external-3-step/chip-create-external-dmigdb.bdf)
Since the chip is reused multiple times, an INCLUDE file containing the common data for each
superelement is used; this is included after BEGIN SUPER = ##.
EXTRN
874
123456
877
123456
1078
123456
1081
123456
11001
11002
11003
11004
11005
11006
11007
11008
11009
11010
11011
11012
11013
11014
11015
11016
123456
1081
123456
$
$
GRID
874
.25
.5
0.
GRID
877
1.
.5
0.
GRID
1078
.25
2.
0.
GRID
1081
1.
2.
0.
$
ASET
874
123456
877
123456
11001
THRU
11016
11001
THRU
11016
1078
$
QSET1
$
SPOINT
Listing 18-26
Common Data for Reusing Chip in Multiple Superelements
The corresponding assembly run, attaching and locating the chip 16 times is shown below:
assign master='assy.master' delete
assign dball='assy.dball' delete
assign chipm='chip.master'
assign chipd='chip.dball'


27, 2011 at 17:47:21.

Main Index
CHAPTER 18 907
SOL 111
CEND
RANDOM=33
ECHO = NONE
RESVEC = YES
LOADSET = 1
SDAMPING = 1
param,prgpst,no
param,rmsint,loglog
$PARAM,AUTOQSET,YES
SUBCASE 1
METHOD = 1
FREQUENCY = 1
SPC = 2
DLOAD = 2
OUTPUT(XYPLOT)
SEPLOT 10
XLOG YES
XGRID LINES YES
YLOG YES
YGRID LINES YES
$
SEPLOT 30
XLOG YES
XGRID LINES YES
YLOG YES
YGRID LINES YES
Main Index
908


SEPLOT 130
XLOG YES
XGRID LINES YES
YLOG YES
YGRID LINES YES
BEGIN BULK
RANDPS,33,1,1,1.,0.,44
PARAM,RMSINT,LOGLOG
TABRND1,44,log,log
+,10.,0.1,20.,0.1,50.,0.3,600.,0.3
+,1500.,0.12,2000.,0.12,ENDT
PARAM
PARAM
POST
PRTMAXIM YES
FREQ2
10.
2000.
FREQ4
10.
2000.
.3
TABDMP1
3000.
.03
ENDT
0.
EIGRL
50
CRIT
.03
10

SPCADD
RLOAD1
LSEQ
SPCD
DLOAD
9999
1.
3
1
ACCE
6
3
1.
1.

SPC1
9999

SPC1
123456
9999

TABLED1
1
0.
Main Index
386.1
3000.
386.1
ENDT
CHAPTER 18 909
SELOC
20
874
877
1078
878
881
1082
SELOC
30
874
877
1078
882
885
1086
SELOC
170
874
877
1078
1343 1340
SELOC
180
874
877 1078
1347 1344
1139
1143

SEBULK
10EXTERNAL
MANUAL
SEBULK
20EXTERNAL
MANUAL
SEBULK
170EXTERNAL
MANUAL
SEBULK
180EXTERNAL
MANUAL
SECONCT
SPOINT
10
874
874
877
877
1078
1078
11001
THRU
11016
11001
THRU
11016
11001
THRU
11016
SECONCT
SPOINT
20
874
878
877
881
1078
1082
11001
THRU
11016
12001
THRU
12016
12001
THRU
12016
SECONCT
SPOINT
180
874
1347
877
1344
1078
1143
11001
THRU
11016
18101
THRU
18116
18101
THRU
18116
1081
1081
1081
1085
1081
1140
$
BEGIN SUPER
10
$ dummy lseq in each SE
LSEQ
BEGIN SUPER
99
99
180
LSEQ
99
99
ENDDATA
Listing 18-27
Main Index
Assembly Run for Electronics Board with Reused Chip Components 3 Step
Method (ref: /seug/chapter18/elec-board/external-3-step/assemble-boardchips-dmigdb-random.bdf)
910

The data recovery can be performed for the chip in any location by restarting the reduction solution
database and applying the appropriate boundary solution from the assembly run. Data recovery input
files for Superelement 10 and 130 are shown below:
assign run1M='chip.master'
assign run1D='chip.dball'
restart logi=run1M
assign assyM='assy.master'
assign assyD='assy.dball'
SOL 111
CEND
ECHO = NONE
RESVEC = YES
PARAM,EXTDR,YES
RANDOM=33
LOADSET = 1
SDAMPING = 1
SUBCASE 1
FREQUENCY = 1
$
SPC = 2
DLOAD = 2

OUTPUT(XYPLOT)
$SEPLOT 10
XLOG YES
XGRID LINES YES
YLOG YES
YGRID LINES YES
$
Main Index
CHAPTER 18 911

BEGIN BULK
RANDPS,33,1,1,1.,0.,44
PARAM,RMSINT,LOGLOG
TABRND1,44,log,log
+,10.,0.1,20.,0.1,50.,0.3,600.,0.3
+,1500.,0.12,2000.,0.12,ENDT
FREQ2
10.
2000.
FREQ4
10.
2000.
.3
TABDMP1
3000.
.03
ENDT
0.
50
CRIT
.03

SPCADD
RLOAD1
LSEQ
SPCD
DLOAD
999
1.
3
1
ACCE
6
3
1.
1.

SPC1
999

SPC1
123456
999

TABLED1
1
0.
386.1
3000.
386.1
ENDT
ENDDATA
Listing 18-28
Data Recovery Run for Electronics Chip as Superelement 10 3 Step Method

(ref: /seug/chapter18/elec-board/external-3-step/recover-chip10.bdf)
assign run1M='chip.master'
assign run1D='chip.dball'
restart logi=run1M
assign assyM='assy.master'
assign assyD='assy.dball'
SOL 111
Main Index
912

CEND
ECHO = NONE
RESVEC = YES
PARAM,EXTDR,YES
RANDOM=33
LOADSET = 1
SDAMPING = 1
SUBCASE 1
FREQUENCY = 1
$
SPC = 2
DLOAD = 2

OUTPUT(XYPLOT)
$SEPLOT 10
XLOG YES
XGRID LINES YES
YLOG YES
YGRID LINES YES
$
BEGIN BULK
RANDPS,33,1,1,1.,0.,44
PARAM,RMSINT,LOGLOG
TABRND1,44,log,log
+,10.,0.1,20.,0.1,50.,0.3,600.,0.3
+,1500.,0.12,2000.,0.12,ENDT
FREQ2
Main Index
10.
2000.
50
CHAPTER 18 913
FREQ4
TABDMP1
1
0.
10.
2000.
.3
3000.
.03
ENDT
CRIT
.03

SPCADD
RLOAD1
LSEQ
SPCD
DLOAD
999
1.
3
1
ACCE
6
3
1.
1.

SPC1
999

SPC1
123456
999

TABLED1
1
0.
386.1
3000.
386.1
ENDT
ENDDATA
Listing 18-29 Data Recovery Run for Electronics Chip as Superelement 130 3 Step Method
(ref: /seug/chapter18/elec-board/external-3-step/recover-chip130.bdf
The following table summarizes the results between the various solutions of the electronics board
random base drive analysis.
Table 18-6
Solution
Baseline Grid
Superelement ID /
Grid
G (RMS)
Baseline
792
0 / 792
1.481614E+04
1590
0 / 1590
1.978883E+04
3396
0 / 3396
2.349298E+04
792
10 / 792
1.481615E+04
1590
30 / 792
1.978884E+04
3396
130 / 792
2.349296E+04
SESET
Main Index
Selected Results for Electronics Board Random Vibration Base Drive Example
914

Table 18-6
Selected Results for Electronics Board Random Vibration Base Drive Example
Solution
Baseline Grid
Superelement ID /
Grid
G (RMS)
PART
792
10 / 792
1.481625E+04
1590
30 / 792
1.978889E+04
3396
130 / 792
2.349305E+04
792
10 / 792
1.483775E+04
1590
30 / 792
1.966581E+04
3396
130 / 792
2.347352E+04
792
10 / 792
1.483876E+04
1590
30 / 792
1.966612E+04
3396
130 / 792
2.347172E+04
External 2-Step
External 3-Step
1.
Main Index
Chapter 19: Output with XYPLOT
19
Main Index
Output with XYPLOT
Introduction
XYPLOT Commands
916

Introduction
Introduction
Typically a pre/post processor such as Patran is used to visualize the model and post process results.
However, there are some cases where visualization of imaged or relocated superelements is not possible
with current preprocessors. In this case, the MSC.Nastran PLOT command provides a method for
generating files showing the full model including all superelements in their final position. Similarly,
results output can be plotted with the MSC.Nastran XYPLOT command. Typically, XYPLOT results
are only used for dynamic response. The following subsections describe the PLOT and XYPLOT
commands available in MSC.Nastran.
Main Index
CHAPTER 19 917
Output with XYPLOT

In Chapter 13, Practical Image Superelements, there were several examples that demonstrated the use of
image superelements. The advantage of image superelements is that a superelement component can be
relocated, copied, or moved efficiently. Unfortunately most commercial pre/post processors do not have
built in functionality to manipulate and view imaged superelements. The MSC.Nastran PLOT
command can be used to visualize the full model, including imaged superelements.
The PLOT instructions are contained in a special section of the case control delimited by the
OUTPUT(PLOT) entry. The PLOT commands have many options described in the Quick Reference
Guide in the OUTPUT(PLOT) section. A summary of the commands is shown below.
Table 19-1
Summary of OUTPUT(PLOT) Commands
OUTPUT(PLOT) Command
PLOTTER
Selects format of plot file for interpretation by

plotter postprocessor.
ORTHOGRAPHIC
Selects orthographic projection.
PERSPECTIVE
Selects perspective projection.
STEREOSCOPIC
Selects stereoscopic projection.
AXES
Assigns axes of the basic coordinate system to the

observers coordinate system.
VIEW
Defines the angular relationship between the

observers coordinate system (r, s, and t axes
specified on the AXES command) and the basic
coordinate system.
MAXIMUM DEFORM
Main Index
Description
Defines the magnification of the maximum

displacement.
SCALE
Defines reduction, as a scale factor, of the models

dimensions so that the model fits on a plot frame.
DISTORTION
Specifies the distortion scale factors of axes in the

basic coordinate system.
CSCALE
Defines scale factor for characters in the plot

frame.
ORIGIN
Defines the origin of the plot frame with respect to

the origin of the (r, s, t) coordinate system defined
on the AXES command.
VANTAGE POINT
Defines the location of the observer with respect

to the model in the (r, s, t) coordinate system
defined on the AXES command for perspective
and stereoscopic projections only.
918

Table 19-1
Summary of OUTPUT(PLOT) Commands
OUTPUT(PLOT) Command
Description
PROJECTION
Defines the separation, along the r-axis, between

the observer and the projection plane if not already
specified on the VANTAGE POINT command.
Used by stereoscopic projections only.
OCULAR SEPARATION
CAMERA
PAPER SIZE
PEN
Defines the separation of the left and right eye

vantage points along the s-axis for stereoscopic
projections.
Specifies microfilm plotter options.
Defines the size and type of the paper.
Generates a message on the printed output to
inform the plotter operator as to what size and
color pen point to mount in the various pen
holders.
PTITLE
Defines a character string that will appear at the

top of the plot frame on the line below the
sequence number.
SET
Defines a set of elements and/or grid points to be

plotted.
FIND
Requests the plotter to optimally compute any of

the parameters that can
be specified on the SCALE, ORIGIN i, and/or
VANTAGE POINT
commands.
CONTOUR
PLOT
PLOT
Specifies contour plot options for stress,

displacement, or temperature.
Generates an undeformed plot or a deformed plot
per subcase, mode number, frequency, or time
step. A contour plot may also be requested with an
undeformed or deformed plot.
Undeformed and Deformed Plot Request
Generates either undeformed or deformed plots for a subcase, mode number, or time step.
Format:
Main Index
CHAPTER 19 919
Output with XYPLOT
PLOT analysis dtype CONTOUR i1 i2 THRU i3 i4 etc RANGE f1 f2

TIME t1 t2
PHASELAG
MAGNITUDE
SET sid1
MAXIMUM DEFORMATION d
ORIGIN oid1
LABEL label
SYMMETRY
w
ANTISYMMETRY
SHAPE
OUTLINE
PEN
p PRINT
DENSITY
VECTOR v PRINT
SHRINK t o NORMALS
ORIGIN oid2 etc
SET sid2
Field
Main Index
(19-1)
Contents
Analysis
Type of results (STATIC, MODAL, CMODAL, TRANSIENT,

FRQUENCY, SENOMOVE)
Dtype
Specifies plot quantity (DEFORM, VELOCITY, ACCELERATION)
CONTOUR
Request for contour plot
i1,i2,
Subcase identification numbers (default = all)
RANGE f1 f2
Specifies range of natural frequencies, eigenvalues, or excitation
TIME t1,t2
Frequencies, time steps, or load factors.
PHASE LAG
Specifies phase lag (in degrees) for complex quantities
MAGNITUDE
Requests magnitude of complex quantities
MAXIMUM
DEFORMATION d
Specifies magnification of the maximum displacement
SET sid
Set identification number which defines elements or grids to be plotted
ORIGIN oid
Origin identification number
920

Field
SYMMETRY w
ANTISYMMETRY w
Contents
Request plot of the symmetric portion of the symmetrically or
antisymmetrically loaded model.
PEN p
Pen number used to generate the plot
DENSITY d
Specifies line density scale factor.
SYMBOLS m[,n]
Specifies symbol to use at grid points (refer to Quick Reference Guide for
more details)
LABEL label
Specifies labeling for grids and elements (GRID, ELEMENTS, BOTH)

(refer to Quick Reference Guide for more details)
SHAPE
All elements in SET are shown by connecting grid points in a specified

manner.
OUTLINE
Outline all of the elements in the specified SET.
VECTOR v
A line representing length and deformation of displacement (refer to

Quick Reference Guide for more details)
PRINT
List of the average stresses at the interior grid points in the set will be
printed for contour stress plots
SHRINK t,o
t is the ratio of reduction for 2d elements

o is the ratio of reduction for 1d elements
NORMALS
Plot vector normal to CHBDYP and CHBDYG elements
Only a few of these options will be described in the subsequent section.

Consider the simplified jet example shown in the figure below (ref /doc/seug/chapter19/jet101.dat):
Main Index
CHAPTER 19 921
Output with XYPLOT
For this example, the primary and secondary superelements and their positioning / imaging requirements
are described as follows:
Table 19-2
Main Index
Description of jet101.dat Superelements
Superelement ID
Type
Description
Comment
Primary
Fuselage
Primary
Right Inboard Wing
Repositioned with SELOC
Primary
Right Outboard Wing
Primary
Vertical Tail
Primary
Left Horizontal Stabilizer
12
Secondary image
Left Inboard Wing
Mirror of SE 2
13
Secondary image
Left Outboard Wing
Mirror of SE 3
15
Secondary image
Right Horizontal Stabilizer
Mirror of SE 5
922

This model contains superelements that must be repositioned and superelements that must be mirrored.
In order to obtain a visual confirmation of the final locations and displacements, OUTPUT(PLOT)
commands are specified as follows:
SOL 101
CEND
TITLE = SE USING MIRROR IMAGE AND NASTRAN PLOTTING
ECHO = BOTH
DISP = ALL
STRESS = ALL
SPCFORCE = ALL
OLOAD = ALL
LOAD = 101
SPC = 100
$
OUTPUT(PLOT)
CSCALE
1.0
PLOTTER NAST
SET 1= ALL
AXES y ,
z,
$isometric view
VIEW
210., 25. , 180.
seplot 1,2,3,4,5
ptitle = plot all primary se in their original positions
plot senomove set 1
$
seplot 1 thru 5
ptitle = prim se (fuse, rt inbd and outbd wing, vert and lt horz stab)
plot set 1
$
seplot 12,13,15
ptitle = plot all image se in original position
plot senomove set 1
$
seplot 12,13,15
ptitle = mirrored lt inbd wing, outbd wing, and rt horz stab
plot set 1
$
seupplot 0
Main Index
CHAPTER 19 923
Output with XYPLOT

plot set 1
$
seupplot 0
plot static deformation set 1 origin 1
$
BEGIN BULK
Listing 19-1
OUTPUT(PLOT) Commands for jet101.dat Example
The OUTPUT(PLOT) commands instruct MSC.Nastran to generate a .plt file. The PLOTPS utility can
be used to translate the .plt file to a PostScript file (.ps). For more details on the plotps utility, refer to
the Using the Utility Programs (Ch. 6) in the MSC Nastran 2013 Installation and Operations Guide. On
windows systems, the command line to invoke the plotps utility is:
>c:/MSC.Software/MD_Nastran/201013/md20101/win64/plotps.exe jet101.plt
The resulting .ps file can be print to a PostScript compatible printer or opened with viewers capable of
displaying PostScript files. The OUTPUT(PLOT) commands above generate the following figures:
Figure 19-1
Main Index
Undeformed Plot of Primary Superelements in Original Position (jet1101.dat)
924

Main Index
Figure 19-2
Undeformed Plot of Primary Superelements in Final Position (SELOC),

(jet101.dat)
Figure 19-3
Undeformed Plot of Secondary Superelements in Original Position (jet1101.dat)
CHAPTER 19 925
Output with XYPLOT
Main Index
Figure 19-4
Undeformed Plot of Primary Superelements in Final (mirrored) Position

(jet1101.dat)
Figure 19-5
Undeformed Plot of Full Model in Final Position (jet1101.dat)
926

CSUPER Example
The flyswatter example from Section 13.2.1 can be used to demonstrate the OUTPUT(PLOT) for
CSUPER superelements. In this example, there are two copies and one mirror superelement. In order
to obtain a visual confirmation of the final locations and displacements, OUTPUT(PLOT) commands are
specified as follows (ref /doc/seug/chapter19/flyswatter-csuper-plot.bdf) :
OUTPUT(PLOT)
CSCALE
1.0
PLOTTER NAST
SET 1= ALL
AXES x,y,z
$ front view
VIEW
0., 90., 90.
seupplot 0
plot set 1 label elements symbols 6
seupplot 0
plot set 1 label grids symbols 6
$
$ side view
VIEW
0., 0., 90.
seupplot 0
Listing 19-2
Main Index
OUTPUT(PLOT) Commands for flyswatter-csuper-plot.bdf Example
CHAPTER 19 927
Output with XYPLOT
Figure 19-6
Main Index
Undeformed Plot of Full Model in Final Position with Element IDs (flyswattercsuper-plot.bdf)
928

Figure 19-7
Main Index
Undeformed Plot of Full Model in Final Position with Grid IDs (flyswatter-csuperplot.bdf)
CHAPTER 19 929
Output with XYPLOT
Figure 19-8
Main Index
Deformed Plot of Full Model, 3 Subcases (flyswatter-csuper-plot.bdf)
930

XYPLOT Commands
XYPLOT Commands
In CHAPTER 11, there were several examples that demonstrated the use of superelements in dynamic
response analysis. Although most commercial pre/post processors have built in functionality plot
dynamic response, many users continue to use the MSC.Nastran XYPLOT commands to output and/or
visualize dynamic results.
The XYPLOT instructions are contained in a special section of the case control delimited by the
OUTPUT(XYPLOT) entry. The XYPLOT commands have many options described in the Quick
Reference Guide in the OUTPUT(XYPLOT)section.
XYPLOTs can be generated for 1-frame per page or 2-frames per page:
Figure 19-9
Example of X-Y Plots: One Frame per Page and Two Frames per Page
A summary of the most common commands is shown below.
Main Index
CHAPTER 19 931
Output with XYPLOT
Table 19-3
Common XYPLOT Controls (All Curves)
XYPLOT Command (All Curves)

XMIN, XMAX
Specifies the minimum and maximum values on

the x-axis on all curves
XLOG
Selects logarithmic or linear x-axis on all curves
YAXIS
Controls the plotting of y-axis on all curves.
XDIVISIONS
Defines x-axis title
TCURVE
Defines title for top of plot frame
CSCALE
Defines scale factor for characters in the plot

frame
LOWER TICS
CURVELINESYMBOL
CLEAR
Specifies how to draw tic marks on the upper /

lower edge and left / right edge
Selects lines and/or symbols to be drawn through
the x-y points
Resets x-y plot commands to default value
Common XYPLOT Controls (One Frame per Page Curves)
XYPLOT Commands (1 Frame Curves)

YMIN, YMAX
XAXIS
XGRID, YGRID
YLOG
YTITLE
Main Index
Specifies spacing of tic marks on the x-axis for all

curves
XTITLE
UPPER TICS
Table 19-4
Description
Description
Specifies the minimum and maximum values on
the y-axis
Controls the plotting of the x-axis
Controls the drawing of grid lines in plot area
Selects logarithmic or linear y-axis
Defines y-axis title
932

XYPLOT Commands
Table 19-5
Common XYPLOT Controls (Two Frame per Page Curves)
XYPLOT Command (2 Frame Curves)
Description
YTMIN, YTMAX
Specifies the Min/Max y-axis values for the plot.

(T=Top frame, B=Bottom frame)
YBMIN, YBMAX
XTGRID, XBGRID
YTGRID, YBGRID
Controls drawing of grid lines in plot area (T=Top

frame, B=Bottom frame)
YTAXIS, YBAXIS
Controls the plotting of the y-axis (T=Top frame,

B=Bottom frame)
YTLOG, YBLOG
Selects logarithmic or linear y-axis (T=Top frame,

B=Bottom frame)
YTTITLE, TBTITLE
Defines y-axis title (T=Top frame, B=Bottom

frame)
MSC.Nastran XYPLOT commands provide several formats for the output of X-Y data:
Table 19-6
XYPLOT Data Generation Commands

XYPLOT Command
XYPAPLOT
Description
Generate X-Y plots for a printer
XYPEAK
Print only the summary information
XYPLOT
Generate X-Y plots for a plotter
XYPRINT
Generate table of X-Y pairs in .f06 file
XYPUNCH
Generate X-Y pairs in the PUNCH (.pch) file
The commands in Table 19-6 follow the same format as the XYPLOT command shown below:
XYPLOT
Generate X-Y Plots for a Plotter
Generates X-Y Plots for a plotter

Format:
XYPLOT
yvtype ptype [i1, i2, i3, ]/

id11 (itemu11 [,iteml11), id12 (itemu12 [,iteml12]), /
id21 (itemu21 [,iteml21), id22 (itemu22 [,iteml22]), /
Main Index
CHAPTER 19 933
Output with XYPLOT
Field
Contents
yvtype
Type of y-value to be plotted. ACCE, BOUT, DISP, ELFORCE,

ENTHALPY, FLUX, FMPF, GPMF, HDOT, MPCF, LMPF,
NONLINEAR, OLOAD, PMPF, PRESSURE, SACCE, SDISP, SMPF,
SPCF, STEMP, STRAIN, STRESS, SVELO, TEMP, VECTOR, VELO,
or VG. (refer to Quick Reference Guide for more details)
ptype
Plot type defining meaning of i1, i2, etc., idi, itemui, and itemli. AUTO,
FREQ, MODE, PSDF, RESPONSE, SPECTRAL. (refer to Quick
Reference Guide for more details)
i1,i2,
Subcase identification numbers for ptype=RESPONSE (refer to Quick

Reference Guide for more details)
Idij
Element, grid, scalar, or extra point identification number for y-value for
frame i.
itemuij
Item code for y-value. itemuij is for upper half or whole itemlij curves on
frame i, and itemlij is for lower half curves only on frame i. If itemlij is
not specified, then whole frame curves will be plotted with itemuij.
itemlij is ignored for ptype=AUTO, PSDF, and SPECTRAL
(Character or Integer > 0).
For elements, the code represents a component of the element stress,
strain, or force and is described in Table 6-1and Table 6-2 of the Guide.
For ptype=AUTOand PSDF, the complex stress or strain item codes
need to be used. Since the output quantities are real, you can use either
the real or the imaginary item code. Both will give the same result.
For grid points and pty=RESPONSE, the code is one of the mnemonics
T1, T2, T3, R1, R2, R3, T1RM, T2RM, T3RM, R1RM, R2RM, R3RM,
T1IP, T2IP, T3IP, R1IP, R2IP, or R3IP, where Ti stands for the i-th
translational component, Ri stands for the i-th rotational component, RM
means real or magnitude, and IP means imaginary or phase. For scalar or
extra points, or heat ransfer analysis, use T1, T1RM, or T1IP.
For grid points and ptype=AUTO or PSDF, the code is one of the
mnemonics T1, T2, T3, R1, R2, R3. For scalar or extra points, use T1.
For yvtype=VG, itemui and/or itemli can be F for frequency or G for
damping.
For superelement analysis the SEPLOT must be used to define the superelement which is used in the
plot.
Main Index
934

XYPLOT Commands
Illustrative Example: Modal Transient

The modal transient example in List Superelement Direct Reference to EXCITEDID (Ch. 11) will be used
to demonstrate the XYPLOT commands for a superelement modal transient solution. The model is
included in /doc/seug/ chapter19/mtran-plot.bdf.
The Case Control and XYPLOT commands in this model are:
SUBCASE 1
METHOD = 1
TSTEP = 1
SPC = 2
DLOAD = 2
OLOAD(PLOT,SORT2,REAL)=ALL
STRESS(PLOT,SORT2,BILIN,VONM)=1
OUTPUT(XYPLOT)
$ xyoutput for residual
SEPLOT 0
$ set labels
XTITLE = Time (seconds)
$ add grid lines
XGRID LINES YES
YGRID LINES YES
$ create plot files for OLOAD
$ set xmin,xmax, ymin, ymax for OLOAD plot
XMIN .02
XMAX .10
YMIN -1.1
YMAX +1.1
YTITLE = Force 105 (pounds)
XYPLOT,XYPRINT,XYPUNCH OLOAD/105(T3)
$ clear all settings - xmin/xmax, ymin/ymax are not known for accelerations
CLEAR
$ set labels
$ create plot files for ACCELERATION
$ 2 plots on one page
XTGRID LINES YES
XBGRID LINES YES
Main Index
CHAPTER 19 935
Output with XYPLOT
YTGRID LINES YES

YBGRID LINES YES
$ plot acce 105-T3 on top frame, acce 205-T3 on bottom frame
YTTITLE=ACCE 105 T3 (in/sec**2)
YBTITLE=ACCE 205 T3 (in/sec**2)
XYPLOT,XYPRINT,XYPUNCH ACCE/105(T3,),205(,T3)
$ xyoutput for superelement 10

SEPLOT 10
$ clear all settings
CLEAR
$ add grid lines
XGRID LINES YES
YGRID LINES YES
XMIN .02
XMAX .10
YMIN -1.1
YMAX +1.1
CLEAR
$ set labels
$ add grid lines
XGRID LINES YES
YGRID LINES YES
$ one plot per page:
YTITLE=ACCE 108 T3 (in/sec**2)
XYPLOT,XYPRINT,XYPUNCH ACCE/108(T3)
$ 2 plots in same frame
YTITLE = ACCE 108 / 211 T3
XYPLOT,XYPRINT,XYPUNCH ACCE/108(T3),211(T3)
$ 2 frames on one page
XTGRID LINES YES
XBGRID LINES YES
YTGRID LINES YES
YBGRID LINES YES
Main Index
936

XYPLOT Commands

SEPLOT 20
CLEAR
$ add grid lines
XGRID LINES YES
YGRID LINES YES
$ Create plot files for stress
YTITLE = VONM STRESS Elem 1, Grid 101
$ STRESS(BILIN) means output is for element type 144.
$ Grid 101 is corner 1.
Item Code = 28
XYPLOT,XYPRINT,XYPUNCH STRESS /1(28)
YTITLE = SPCF GRID 101 MY

XYPLOT,XYPRINT,XYPUNCH SPCF /101(R2)
BEGIN BULK
Listing 19-3
Modal Transient with Superelement XYPLOT Commands (Full)
Breaking down the curves one by one:

SEPLOT 0
$ set labels
$ add grid lines
XGRID LINES YES
YGRID LINES YES
XMIN .02
XMAX .10
YMIN -1.1
YMAX +1.1
Listing 19-4
XYPLOT Commands for OLOAD of Grid 105 T3 Single Frame
The resulting plot:
Main Index
CHAPTER 19 937
Output with XYPLOT
Figure 19-10
Plot for OLOAD of Grid 105 T3 Single Frame
The resulting XY summary and XYPRINT in the .f06 file:

0 IS NOW INITIATED.
CANTILEVER BEAM MODAL TRANSIENT SOLUTION
JUNE
25, 2011
MODAL-TRANSIENT
SESET SOLUTION, DIRECT REFERENCE, SEQSET
X Y - O U T P U T
SUBCASE
ID
Main Index
CURVE FRAME
TYPE
NO.
MSC Nastran
12/15/10
SUPERELEMENT 0
CURVE ID./
PANEL
: GRID ID
SUBCASE 1
S U M M A R Y
XMIN-FRAME/
XMAX-FRAME/
ALL DATA
ALL DATA
( R E S P O N S E )
YMIN-FRAME/
X FOR
YMAX-FRAME/
X FOR
ALL DATA
YMIN
ALL DATA
YMAX
938

XYPLOT Commands
LOAD
105(
5)
2.000000E-02 1.000000E-01 -1.000000E+00
3.680000E-02
1.000000E+00
4.440000E-02
0.000000E+00 1.000000E+00 -1.000000E+00
3.680000E-02
1.000000E+00
4.440000E-02
P R I N T E D
D A T A
F O R
T H I S
C U R V E
CANTILEVER BEAM MODAL TRANSIENT SOLUTION
F O L L O W S
JUNE
25, 2011
MODAL-TRANSIENT
SESET SOLUTION, DIRECT REFERENCE, SEQSET
LOAD
MSC Nastran
12/15/10
PAGE
31
SUPERELEMENT 0
CURVE
ID =
105
SUBCASE 1
COMPONENT =
WHOLE FRAME
PRINT NUMBER
X-VALUE
Y-VALUE
2.000000E-02
0.000000E+00
2.020000E-02
0.000000E+00
2.040000E-02
0.000000E+00
2.060000E-02
0.000000E+00
Listing 19-5
CARD NUMBER
.f06 Output for XYPRINT of OLOAD of Grid 105 T3 Single Frame
The resulting XYPUNCH data in the .pch file:

$SUBCASE
$LOAD
1
105
2.000000E-02
0.000000E+00
2.020000E-02
0.000000E+00
2.040000E-02
0.000000E+00
2.060000E-02
0.000000E+00
2.080000E-02
0.000000E+00
2.100000E-02
0.000000E+00
2.120000E-02
0.000000E+00
Listing 19-6
NOTE: the 105
.pch Output for XYPUNCH of OLOAD of Grid 105 T3 Single Frame

5 maps to the 105 - T3 degree of freedom.
Also note that the .f06 and .pch files follow the same format for other quantities and will not be repeated
for this illustration. However, the XYPLOT commands will be mapped to their corresponding plots
below.
CLEAR
$ set labels
$ 2 plots on one page
XTGRID LINES YES
XBGRID LINES YES
YTGRID LINES YES
YBGRID LINES YES
Main Index
CHAPTER 19 939
Output with XYPLOT

Main Index
Listing 19-7
XYPLOT Commands for Acceleration of Grids 105 T3, 211 T3 Two Frame
Figure 19-11
Plot for Acceleration of Grids 105 T3, 211 T3 Two Frame
940

XYPLOT Commands

SEPLOT 10
$ clear all settings
CLEAR
$ add grid lines
XGRID LINES YES
YGRID LINES YES
XMIN .02
XMAX .10
YMIN -1.1
YMAX +1.1
Listing 19-8
Main Index
XYPLOT Commands for OLOAD of Grid 211 T3 (SEID=10) Single Frame
CHAPTER 19 941
Output with XYPLOT
Figure 19-12
2 Plot for OLOAD of Grid 211 T3 (SEID=10) Single Frame
CLEAR
$ set labels
$ add grid lines
XGRID LINES YES
YGRID LINES YES
$ one plot per page:
$ 2 plots in same frame
YTITLE = ACCE 108 / 211 T3
Main Index
942

XYPLOT Commands
XYPLOT,XYPRINT,XYPUNCH ACCE/108(T3),211(T3)
$ 2 frames on one page
XTGRID LINES YES
XBGRID LINES YES
YTGRID LINES YES
YBGRID LINES YES
Listing 19-9
Main Index
XYPLOT Commands for Single Frame, Multiple Plots on Single Frame, and 2Frame Curves
CHAPTER 19 943
Output with XYPLOT
Listing 19-10
Plots for Single Frame, Multiple Plots on Single Frame, and 2-Frame Curves
SEPLOT 20
CLEAR
$ add grid lines
XGRID LINES YES
YGRID LINES YES
$ Create plot files for stress
Main Index
944

XYPLOT Commands
YTITLE = VONM STRESS Elem 1, Grid 101

$ STRESS(BILIN) means output is for element type 144.
$ Grid 101 is corner 1.
Item Code = 28
XYPLOT,XYPRINT,XYPUNCH STRESS /1(28)
YTITLE = SPCF GRID 101 MY

XYPLOT,XYPRINT,XYPUNCH SPCF /101(R2)
Listing 19-11
XYPLOT Commands for Superelement 20, Stress and SPCForce
Figure 19-13
Plots for Superelement 20, Stress and SPCForce
Illustrative Example: Modal Frequency Response

The modal transient example in Section 11.6.3 will be used to demonstrate the XYPLOT commands for
a superelement modal transient solution. The model is included in /doc/seug/ chapter19/mfreq-plot.bdf.
The Case Control and XYPLOT commands in this model are:
SDAMPING = 1
SUBCASE 1
METHOD = 1
FREQUENCY = 1
SPC = 2
DLOAD = 2
Main Index
CHAPTER 19 945
Output with XYPLOT
STRESS(PLOT,SORT1,PHASE,VONMISES,BILIN)=ALL
OUTPUT(XYPLOT)
SEPLOT 0
$ set labels
XTITLE = Frequency (Hz)
$ 2 plots on one page, magnitude and phase
$ add grid lines
XTGRID LINES YES
XBGRID LINES YES
YTGRID LINES YES
YBGRID LINES YES
$ plot acce 105-T3 Phase on top frame, acce 105-T3 Mag on bottom frame
YTTITLE=ACCE 105 T3 Phase (degrees)
YBTITLE=ACCE 105 T3 Mag (in/sec**2)
XYPLOT,XYPRINT,XYPUNCH ACCE/105(T3IP,),105(,T3RM)
$ change to log-log for magnitude, log-linear for phase
YBLOG YES
XLOG YES

SEPLOT 10
$ set labels
$ add grid lines
XTGRID LINES YES
XBGRID LINES YES
YTGRID LINES YES
YBGRID LINES YES
YBLOG YES
XLOG YES
SEPLOT 20
$ set labels
Main Index
946

XYPLOT Commands
$ add grid lines

XTGRID LINES YES
XBGRID LINES YES
YTGRID LINES YES
YBGRID LINES YES
XLOG YES
YBLOG YES
YTTITLE = SPCF GRID 101 MY - Phase
YBTITLE = SPCF GRID 101 MY - Mag
XYPLOT,XYPRINT,XYPUNCH SPCF /101(R2IP,),101(,R2RM)
BEGIN BULK
Listing 19-12
Frequency Response with Superelement XYPLOT Commands (Full)
Breaking down the curves for each superelement:

SEPLOT 0
$ set labels
$ add grid lines
XTGRID LINES YES
XBGRID LINES YES
YTGRID LINES YES
YBGRID LINES YES
YBLOG YES
XLOG YES
Listing 19-13
Main Index
XYPLOT Commands for Residual Structure (Freq. Response)
CHAPTER 19 947
Output with XYPLOT
Figure 19-14
Plots for Residual Structure (Freq. Response)
0 IS NOW INITIATED.
CANTILEVER BEAM MODAL FREQUENCY RESPONSE SOLUTION
JUNE
25, 2011
MODAL-FREQUENCY
LIST SUPERELEMENTS, LOADSET/LSEQ, SEQSET1
X Y - O U T P U T
SUBCASE
ID
CURVE FRAME
TYPE
NO.
ACCE
CURVE ID./
PANEL
( R E S P O N S E )
XMAX-FRAME/
YMIN-FRAME/
X FOR
YMAX-FRAME/
ALL DATA
ALL DATA
YMIN
ALL DATA
ALL DATA
X FOR
YMAX
105( 11,--) 1.000000E+01 1.000000E+03 2.606156E-01
1.096478E+02
3.597626E+02
1.202264E+02
1.000000E+01 1.000000E+03 2.606156E-01
1.096478E+02
3.597626E+02
1.202264E+02
D A T A
F O R
T H I S
C U R V E
F O L L O W S
JUNE
MODAL-FREQUENCY
25, 2011
MSC Nastran
12/15/10
SUPERELEMENT 0

CURVE
ID =
105
SUBCASE 1
COMPONENT = 11
UPPER FRAME
PRINT NUMBER
X-VALUE
Y-VALUE
1.000000E+01
1.787928E+02
1.096478E+01
1.786464E+02
1.202264E+01
1.784743E+02
1.318257E+01
1.782689E+02
1.445440E+01
1.780189E+02
1.584893E+01
1.777074E+02
Listing 19-14
Main Index
12/15/10
SUBCASE 1
S U M M A R Y
XMIN-FRAME/
: GRID ID
P R I N T E D
ACCELERATION
MSC Nastran
SUPERELEMENT 0
CARD NUMBER
XYPEAK and XYPRINT Results for Residual Structure (Freq. Response)
948

XYPLOT Commands
$SUBCASE
$ACCE
1
105
11
1.000000E+01
1.787928E+02
1.096478E+01
1.786464E+02
1.202264E+01
1.784743E+02
1.318257E+01
1.782689E+02
1.445440E+01
1.780189E+02
1.584893E+01
1.777074E+02
1.737801E+01
1.773068E+02
1.905461E+01
1.767698E+02
10
Listing 19-15
Note:
XYPUNCH Results for Residual Structure (Freq. Response)
The 105
11 maps to the 105 - T3IP degree of freedom.
Also note that the .f06 and .pch files follow the same format for other quantities and will not be repeated
for this illustration. However, the XYPLOT commands will be mapped to their corresponding plots
below.
SEPLOT 10
$ set labels
$ add grid lines
XTGRID LINES YES
XBGRID LINES YES
YTGRID LINES YES
YBGRID LINES YES
YBLOG YES
XLOG YES
Listing 19-16
Main Index
5 XYPLOT Commands for Superelement 10 (Freq Response)
CHAPTER 19 949
Output with XYPLOT
Figure 19-15
Plot for Superelement 10 (Freq Response)
SEPLOT 20
$ set labels
$ add grid lines
XTGRID LINES YES
XBGRID LINES YES
YTGRID LINES YES
YBGRID LINES YES
XLOG YES
YBLOG YES
Listing 19-17
Main Index
XYPLOT Commands for Superelement 20 (Freq Response)
950

XYPLOT Commands
Figure 19-16
Plot for Superelement 20 (Freq Response)
Illustrative Example: Random Vibration

The modal transient example in section Illustrative Example: Modal Frequency Response will be
modified to demonstrate the XYPLOT commands for a superelement modal transient solution with
random response. The model is included in /doc/seug/ chapter19/mfreq-rand-plot.bdf. The objective of
this section is to demonstrate the commands necessary to generate Power Spectral Density (PSD) plots
using the XYPLOT commands. Note that PSD plots are only available for one frame per page.
The Case Control and XYPLOT commands in this model are shown below (the differences from the
example in section Illustrative Example: Modal Frequency Response are highlighted):
SDAMPING = 1
SUBCASE 1
METHOD = 1
FREQUENCY = 1
SPC = 2
Main Index
CHAPTER 19 951
Output with XYPLOT
DLOAD = 2
RANDOM = 88
STRESS(PLOT,SORT1,PHASE,VONMISES,BILIN)=ALL
OUTPUT(XYPLOT)
SEPLOT 0
$ set labels
$ add grid lines
XTGRID LINES YES
XBGRID LINES YES
YTGRID LINES YES
YBGRID LINES YES
YBLOG YES
XLOG YES
$ psd for acceleration
XGRID LINES YES
YGRID LINES YES
YLOG YES
YTITLE PSDF ACCE 105 T3
XYPLOT,XYPRINT,XYPUNCH ACCE PSDF / 105(T3RM)

SEPLOT 10
$ set labels
$ add grid lines
XTGRID LINES YES
XBGRID LINES YES
YTGRID LINES YES
YBGRID LINES YES
Main Index
952

XYPLOT Commands
YBLOG YES
XLOG YES
XGRID LINES YES
YGRID LINES YES
YLOG YES
SEPLOT 20
$ set labels
$ add grid lines
XTGRID LINES YES
XBGRID LINES YES
YTGRID LINES YES
YBGRID LINES YES
XLOG YES
YBLOG YES
$ psd for spc force
XGRID LINES YES
YGRID LINES YES
YLOG YES
YTITLE PSDF SPCF 101 R2
XYPLOT,XYPRINT,XYPUNCH SPCF PSDF / 101(R2RM)
BEGIN BULK
RANDPS
88
1.
0.
89
0.0
0.0
20.
0.
100.
.5
1000.
0.1
2000.
0.1
ENDT
TABRND1 89
Listing 19-18
Main Index
200.
0.5
Frequency Response with Superelement XYPLOT Commands (Full)
CHAPTER 19 953
Output with XYPLOT
The XYPLOT commands not highlighted above are described in the previous section. Breaking down
the curves for each superelement:
SEPLOT 0
$ set labels
XLOG YES
XGRID LINES YES
YGRID LINES YES
YLOG YES
Main Index
Listing 19-19
XYPLOT Commands for Acceleration PSD for Residual Structure
Figure 19-17
Plot Results for Residual Structure (PSD Response)
954

XYPLOT Commands
JUNE
25, 2011
MODAL-FREQUENCY
MSC Nastran
12/15/10
SUPERELEMENT 0

X Y - O U T P U T
PLOT
TYPE
CURVE FRAME
TYPE
PSDF ACCE
NO.
CURVE ID./
PANEL
RMS
S U M M A R Y
NO. POSITIVE
: GRID ID VALUE
105(
5)
( A U T O
XMIN FOR
CROSSINGS
ALL DATA
O R
XMAX FOR
ALL DATA
P S D F )
YMIN FOR
ALL DATA
X FOR
YMAX FOR
YMIN
X FOR*
ALL DATA
YMAX
9.000029E+05 5.750994E+02 1.000E+01 1.000E+03 0.000E+00 1.000E+01 1.413E+10 5.477E+02
P R I N T E D
D A T A
F O R
T H I S
C U R V E
F O L L O W S
JUNE
MODAL-FREQUENCY
25, 2011
MSC Nastran
12/15/10
SUPERELEMENT 0

ACCELERATION
CURVE
ID =
105
COMPONENT =
Y-VALUE
CARD NUMBER
1.000000E+01
0.000000E+00
322
1.096478E+01
0.000000E+00
323
1.202264E+01
0.000000E+00
324
1.318257E+01
0.000000E+00
325
1.445440E+01
0.000000E+00
326
$ACCE
XYPEAK and XYPRINT Results for Residual Structure (PSD Response)
105
9.000029E+05
5.750994E+02
321
1.000000E+01
0.000000E+00
322
1.096478E+01
0.000000E+00
323
1.202264E+01
0.000000E+00
324
1.318257E+01
0.000000E+00
325
1.445440E+01
0.000000E+00
326
1.584893E+01
0.000000E+00
327
1.737801E+01
0.000000E+00
328
1.905461E+01
0.000000E+00
329
Listing 19-21
XYPUNCH Results for Residual Structure (PSD Response)

SEPLOT 10
$ set labels
Main Index
WHOLE FRAME
X-VALUE
Listing 19-20
XLOG YES
PRINT NUMBER
CHAPTER 19 955
Output with XYPLOT

XGRID LINES YES
YGRID LINES YES
YLOG YES
Listing 19-22
XYPLOT Commands for Acceleration PSD for Superelement 10
Figure 19-18
XYPLOT Commands for Acceleration PSD for Superelement 10
SEPLOT 20
$ set labels
XLOG YES
Main Index
956

XYPLOT Commands
$ psd for spc force

XGRID LINES YES
YGRID LINES YES
YLOG YES
YTITLE PSDF SPCF 101 R2
XYPLOT,XYPRINT,XYPUNCH SPCF PSDF / 101(R2RM)
Listing 19-23
XYPLOT Commands for SPCFORCE PSD for Superelement 20
Figure 19-19
Plot for SPCFORCE PSD for Superelement 20
1.
Main Index
Chapter : APPENDICES
APPENDICES
Main Index
Glossary

Glossary
Glossary
Boundary Element
For a list superelement, an element that has GRIDs that belong to more than one superelement is a
boundary superelement. The element will be assigned to the uppermost superelement in the
superelement tree or processing order.
Branch Element
For a list superelement, a branch superelement connects to grid pints belonging to more than one
superelement. A common example is a line element that has both grids attaching to the exterior grids of
an upstream superelement. Branch superelements are automatically assigned to the downstream
superelement, but can be reassigned to the upstream superelement using the SEELT command bulk data
entry.
Collector Superelement
In a multilevel superelement tree, a collector superelement is a superelement with more than one
upstream superelements attached to it.
Component Modes Synthesis

Component Modes are generated as part of dynamic reduction and consist of the dynamic superelement
influence coefficients (or superelement dynamic shape functions) and are used to improve the dynamic
mass reduction approximation. The component modes are stored in the G o q matrix; each column of this
matrix represents a dynamic mode shape. The boundary dof may be fixed, free, or a combination of fixed
and free during the Eigenvalue calculation.
Constraint Modes
Constraint modes are generated as part of static condensation and consist of the static influence
coefficients of the interior dof generated when all exterior or dof are held fixed except for one dof which
is moved a unit displacement. The constraint modes are stored in the [GOT] matrix; each column of this
matrix represents the motion of the interior points when one boundary DOF is moved one unit while the
other boundary points are held constrained.
An external superelement is a superelement that has been reduced to its boundary in a separate solution
and attached to the current model.
Main Index
CHAPTER 3
APPENDICES
Fixed Boundary Solution

Component Modes Synthesis performed with all physical exterior dof fixed during Eigenvalue
calculations is referred to as a fixed boundary solution.
Free Boundary Solution

Component Modes Synthesis performed with all physical exterior dof free during Eigenvalue
calculations is referred to as a free boundary solution.
List Superelement
A superelement defined in the main bulk data section by defining a list is a list superelement. The list
superelement can be defined by grids (SESET, or the SEID field of the GRID entry) or by elements
(SEELT) when BEGIN SUPER is present.
Load Sequence
The load sequence is used in static analysis to define the load vector association to a residual structure
load sequence. Most commonly used with expanded case control.
Mixed Boundary Solution

Component Modes Synthesis performed with some physical exterior dof fixed and the remaining
physical exterior dof fixed during Eigenvalue calculations is referred to as a fixed boundary solution.
Multilevel Superelement Tree

A multilevel superelement tree occurs when exterior dof from one or more superelements are attached
to the interior dof of a superelement other than the residual.
Mutually Exclusive Set

Each dof is a member of one mutually exclusive set. In superelement analysis, each boundary dof is part
of one of the following sets: B-Set = Physical dof Fixed for Component Modes Synthesis Calculations;
C-Set = Physical dof Free for Component Modes Synthesis Calculations; Q-Set = Modal dof calculated
during Component Modes Synthesis. Since these dof must be mutually exclusive of all other MSC
Nastran sets, they cannot be define as Single Point or Multi Point constraints.
Main Index

Glossary
Main Bulk Data Section

Most commonly, the Main Bulk Data Section refers to the section of the bulk data that is used to define
the residual structure when PART superelements are used. This Main Bulk Data Section occurs after
BEGIN BULK (or BEGIN SUPER = 0) and concludes with BEGIN SUPER=i, or ENDDATA.
MSC.Nastran has the possibility of auxiliary models used for Optimization, Exterior Acoustic Analysis,
and Arbitrary Beam Cross Sections. These are delimited from the Main Bulk Data Section with BEGIN
AUXMODEL, BEGIN AFPM, or BEGIN ARBMODEL, respectively.
PART Superelement
A PART Superelement is a superelement that is partitioned within its own bulk data section delimited by
BEGIN SUPER.
Phase 1 Processing
In Phase 1 Superelement processing, the superelement matrices are reduced to boundary matrix
representations and assembled with the residual structure. For a multilevel tree multiple reductions and
assemblies are performed until the final assembly of the residual structure.
Phase 2 Processing
In Phase 2 Superelement processing, the solution of residual structure is performed. The solution is
defined as the displacements of the residual structure (including velocities and accelerations for dynamic
solutions). The solution is performed at the lowest reduction level of the residual structure (typically the
A-Set).
Phase 3 Processing
In Phase 3 Superelement processing, the data recovery of each superelement, including the residual, is
performed. The data recovery includes back-expansion of the solution vector to the G-Set and
calculation of additional data recovery items (stresses, forces, etc.).
Qualifier
Each matrix stored on the MSC Nastran database has a qualifier to identify its origin and applicability.
For example, there may be several reduced stiffness matrices K a a stored on the database. The qualifiers
will identify SEID (superelement ID), SPC (constraint set), etc. so that these matrices may be identified
and assembled in the proper sequence.
Main Index
CHAPTER 5
APPENDICES
SEP1
Superelement Processing, Phase 1 (old style) generates the superelement map (SEMAP) which defines
the superelement membership of each grid and element and defines the superelement connectivity and
process order. Module SEP1 is executed for list superelements when BEGIN SUPER is not present.
SEP1X
Superelement Processing, Phase 1 (new style) generates the superelement map (SEMAP) which
defines the superelement membership of each grid and element and defines the superelement
connectivity and process order. Module SEP1X is executed for models with PART superelements and
for List Superelements when BEGIN SUPER is present.
Single Level Superelement Tree

A single level superelement tree is a model where all superelements are connected directly to the residual
structure.
Processing Order
The Processing Order defines the superelement reduction and data recovery order.
Main Index

Glossary
Main Index

MSC Nastran 2013.1 Superelements Guide

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Titolo originale

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

MSC Nastran 2013.1 Superelements Guide

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

MSC Nastran 2013.

Europe, Middle East, Africa

MSC.Software Japan Ltd.

MSC Software (S) Pte. Ltd.

Revision 0. November 15, 2013

Introduction and Fundamentals

Why Use Superelements?

Manual Solution of a Small Superelement Example

List of Superelement Enhancements Released Since Version 69

How to Define a Superelement

Superelement vs. Residual

Defining List Superelements

ii Superelements Users Guide

Defining PART Superelements

Defining and Attaching External Superelements

Single Level Superelement Analysis

Baseline Static Example using Patran

Single-Level Analysis Using List Superelements

Loads, Constraints, Case Control, and Parameters in Static Analysis

Mechanical Loads in Static Analysis

Inertia Relief Analysis Using Superelements

The Concept of Inertia Relief

Interface for Inertia Relief Using Superelements

Multiple Loading in Static Analysis

Internal Case Control Partitioning

iv Superelements Users Guide

Examples for Multiple Loading Conditions (cantilever plate)

Multi-Level Superelement Analysis

Comparison of Single- and Multi-Level Superelements

Output Description and Control in Static Superelement Analysis

List (SESET) Superelement Diagnostic Output

Introduction to Dynamic Analysis Using Superelements

Description of Dynamic Reduction Process

Nastran Set Definitions The USET Table

Input and Output for Dynamic Reduction

Case Control for Dynamic Reduction

Multi-Level Dynamic Reduction

Dynamic Loading on Superelements

Direct Reference to EXCITEID

Indirect Reference to EXCITEDID: LOADSET / LSEQ Method

vi Superelements Users Guide

Modal Transient Illustrative Example

External Superelement Examples

Transient Response Examples

Frequency Response Examples Using 3-Step Method

Practical Image Superelements

Creating a Flexible Body with ADMSMNF

Example of Swept Wing

Design Sensitivity and Optimization with Superelements

Preparing Adams Flexible Bodies

viii Superelements Users Guide

Considerations in Nonlinear and Buckling Analysis

Superelement Limitations in Nonlinear and Buckling Analysis

Random Vibration with Superelements

Enforced Motion (SPCD) Examples

Output with XYPLOT

Superelement Plotting with PLOT

x Superelements Users Guide

Chapter 1: Introduction and Fundamentals

Introduction and Fundamentals

Introduction to this Guide

Why Use Superelements?

Fundamentals of Superelement Analysis